Manual service Renault Scenic 2 Echipament Electric

Electrical equipment BATTERY XENON BULBS INSTRUMENT PANEL RADIO MULTIMEDIA PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT MULTIPLEXING AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS

77 11 322 302

MARCH 2006

"The repair procedures given by the manufacturer in this document are based on the technical specifications current when it was prepared. The procedures may be modified as a result of changes introduced by the manufacturer in the production of the various component units and accessories from which his vehicles are constructed."

EDITION ANGLAISE

All rights reserved by Renault s.a.s. Copying or translating, in part or in full, of this document or use of the service part reference numbering system is forbidden without the prior written authority of Renault s.a.s.

© Renault s.a.s. 2006

Electrical equipment Contents Page

Page

80A BATTERY EDITION 2 Battery: Initialisation

86A RADIO 80A-1

80C XENON BULBS Program No.: V010 - Vdiag No.: 05 EDITION 4 Introduction Fault finding log System operation Replacement of components Allocation of computer tracks Configuration and programming Fault summary table Interpretation of faults Conformity check Interpretation of statuses Parameter summary table Interpretation of parameters Customer complaints Fault finding chart

80C-1 80C-5 80C-7 80C-9 80C-10 80C-11 80C-14 80C-15 80C-26 80C-28 80C-29 80C-30 80C-33 80C-34

83A INSTRUMENT PANEL Vdiag No.: 04-08 EDITION 4 Introduction Fault finding log System operation Replacement of components Configurations and programming Fault summary table Conformity check Interpretation of statuses Interpretation of parameters Interpretation of commands Customer complaints Fault finding chart

83A-1 83A-5 83A-7 83A-9 83A-10 83A-12 83A-15 83A-20 83A-27 83A-38 83A-41 83A-42

EDITION 1 General information Fault finding log Security code recovery procedure Anti-theft code Replacement of components Configuration - Parameters Connection Self-test procedure Customer complaints Fault finding chart Recovering a jammed CD

86A-1 86A-5 86A-7 86A-8 86A-11 86A-12 86A-13 86A-14 86A-15 86A-16 86A-30

86C MULTIMEDIA ITS Program No.: 0020 - Vdiag: 04 EDITION 1 Introduction Fault finding log List and location of components Operating diagram Functions Role of components Replacement of components Configurations and programming Fault summary table Interpretation of faults Conformity check Status summary table Interpretation of statuses Parameter summary table Interpretation of parameters Command summary table Interpretation of commands Customer complaints Fault finding chart

86C-1 86C-6 86C-8 86C-9 86C-10 86C-11 86C-12 86C-13 86C-14 86C-15 86C-25 86C-29 86C-30 86C-36 86C-37 86C-38 86C-39 86C-44 86C-46

Page

Page

87B PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

87G ENGINE COMPARTMENT

CONNECTION UNIT

CONNECTION UNIT

UCH Vdiag No.: 44-48-4C-4D-4F-50 EDITION 3 Introduction Fault finding log System operation Replacement of components Configurations and programming Fault summary table Interpretation of faults Conformity check Status summary table Interpretation of statuses Parameter summary table Interpretation of parameters Command summary table Interpretation of commands Customer complaints Fault finding chart

Vdiag No.: 44 EDITION 5 Introduction Fault finding log System operation Allocation of computer tracks Replacement of components Configuration and programming Fault summary table Interpretation of faults Conformity check Status and parameter summary table Interpretation of statuses Interpretation of parameters Interpretation of commands Customer complaints Fault finding chart

87G-27 87G-28 87G-36 87G-37 87G-54 87G-55

Program No.: C54 - Vdiag No.: 48 EDITION 2 Introduction Fault finding log System operation Allocation of computer tracks Replacement of components Configuration and programming Fault summary table Interpretation of faults Conformity check Status summary table Interpretation of statuses Parameter summary table Interpretation of parameters Command summary table Interpretation of commands Customer complaints Fault finding chart

87G-1 87G-6 87G-8 87G-12 87G-17 87G-18 87G-19 87G-20 87G-56 87G-64 87G-65 87G-72 87G-73 87G-77 87G-78 87G-91 87G-92

87B-1 87B-6 87B-8 87B-46 87B-47 87B-59 87B-61 87B-107 87B-127 87B-131 87B-230 87B-231 87B-234 87B-236 87B-279 87B-284

87G-1 87G-6 87G-8 87G-10 87G-11 87G-12 87G-13 87G-14 87G-17

Page

88B MULTIPLEXING EDITION 1 Introduction Configuration Dealing with faults Fault finding chart Repair help

88B-1 88B-4 88B-7 88B-11 88B-14

88C AIRBAG - PRETENSIONERS ACU4 - Vdiag 04 EDITION 2 Introduction System operation Allocation of computer tracks Replacement of components Configurations and programming Fault finding log Fault summary table Interpretation of faults Status and parameter summary table Conformity check Fault finding chart

ACU4 - Vdiag 08 EDITION 1 Introduction System operation Allocation of computer tracks Replacement of components Configurations and programming Fault finding log Fault summary table Interpretation of faults Status and parameter summary table Conformity check Fault finding chart

88C-1 88C-8 88C-9 88C-11 88C-12 88C-15 88C-17 88C-18 88C-65 88C-66 88C-67

88C-69 88C-77 88C-78 88C-80 88C-81 88C-85 88C-87 88C-88 88C-139 88C-140 88C-141

ABBREVIATIONS

ABBREVIATIONS

MEANING OF ABBREVIATION

ABS

Anti-lock braking system

ALP

Fault Finding Chart

APC

After ignition

AVC

Before ignition

BVA

Automatic gearbox

BVM

Manual gearbox

BVR

Sequential gearbox

CAN

Controller Area Network

AC

Air conditioning

CD

Compact disc

PAS

Power assisted steering (hydraulic)

EPAS

Electric power assisted steering

DVD

Digital versatile disc

DTC

Fault finding code

EGR

Exhaust gas recirculation

ESP

Electronic Stability Program

GMV

Motor-driven fan assembly

CNG

Compressed natural gas

LPG

Liquefied petroleum gas

HLE

High yield strength

MAG

Metal active gas (for welding steel)

MIG

Metal inert gas (for welding aluminium)

MR

Workshop repair manual

TN

Technical Note

OBD

On board diagnostics

SER

Resistance welding

SSPP

Tyre pressure monitoring system

THLE

Very high yield strength

TM

Labour time

UCH

Passenger Compartment Unit

UPC

Protection and Switching Unit

UCT

Roof control unit

UHLE

Ultra high yield strength

VIN

Vehicle identification number

180A

BATTERY Battery: Initialisation

Initialisation:

●

When the battery is removed or when it has been disconnected, carry out a certain number of initialisations for different vehicle functions so that the vehicle operates correctly. These initialisations do not require a tool of any kind. ● ●

●

●

●

Entering the 4-digit radio code. Setting the time on the clock. Use the satellite radio control to set the time on a clock equipped with a navigation system: – Press and hold the left-hand Source key for 2 seconds to access time setting mode (the hours will flash). – Press the + or - keys to adjust the hour. – Press the left-hand Source key to switch to setting the minutes (the minutes will flash). – Press the + or - keys to adjust the minutes. – Press the left-hand Source key to exit setting mode. Checking that the electric windows are still initialised. The windows should open and close when the switch is pressed. If this is not the case, fully close the window which rises a few centimetres at a time and press the control button for 2 seconds once the window is fully closed. Checking that the sunroof is still initialised. The sunroof should open or close to the requested position without stopping. If this is not the case, reinitialise the system. – Start the engine. – Set the control to the sunroof closed position. – Press and hold the switch. The sunroof closes. – Keep pressing the switch until switching sounds can be heard from the motor (if the sunroof is already closed, wait for the motor switching sounds). – Release the switch and then press it again straight away. – Keep pressing the switch for several seconds. The sunroof will open and then fully close again. Release the switch once the sunroof is completely closed again. Initialising the electric power-assisted steering: with the engine running, turn the steering wheel a quarter turn to the left and then a quarter turn to the right, and bring back the steering wheel to the centre point with the wheels set straight ahead.

80A-1

80A

Reactivating the child safety systems: check that the switch indicator light is on. If the light is not on, deactivate then activate the switch until the light comes on.

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

180C XENON BULBS Fault finding - Introduction

80C

1. SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT This document presents the fault finding procedure applicable to all computers with the following specifications: Vehicle(s): Mégane Scénic Function concerned: Xenon lights

Name of computer: Xenon light computer Program no.: V010 VDIAG No: 05

2. PREREQUISITES FOR FAULT FINDING Documentation type: Fault finding procedures (this manual): – Assisted fault finding (integrated into the diagnostic tool), Dialogys. Wiring Diagrams: – Visu-Schéma (CD-ROM), paper version. Diagnostic tools type: – CLIP + CAN probe Type of special tooling required:

Special tooling required Multimeter CLIP + CAN sensor (Elé. 1674)

Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-1

Edition 4

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

XENON BULBS Fault finding - Introduction

80C

3. RECAP Procedure: To run fault finding on the vehicle's computers, switch on the ignition in fault finding mode (forced + after ignition feed). Proceed as follows: – vehicle card in card reader (scenario 1: keyless vehicle, entry level model, no hands-free; and scenario 2: top of the range, hands-free), – Press and hold Start button (longer than 5 seconds) with start-up conditions not fulfilled, – connect the diagnostic tool and perform the desired operations. To cut off + after ignition, proceed as follows: – disconnect the diagnostic tool, – Press the Start button twice briefly (less then 3 seconds), – Check that the + after ignition feed has been cut off by checking that the computer warning lights on the instrument panel have gone out. Faults Faults are classed as either present or stored (having appeared in a certain situation and then disappeared, or being still present but not diagnosed in the current situation). The present or stored status of faults should be taken into consideration when the diagnostic tool is used after the + after ignition feed is switched on (without acting on the system components). For a present fault, apply the procedure described in the Interpretation of faults section. For a stored fault, note the faults displayed and apply the Instructions section. If the fault is confirmed when the Notes are applied, the fault is present. Deal with the fault. If the fault is not confirmed, check: – The electric lines on which there is a fault; – The connectors on those lines (corrosion, bent pins, etc.); – The resistance of the faulty component; – The condition of the wires (insulation melted or cut, chafing, etc.). Conformity check The aim of the conformity check is to check statuses and parameters that do not produce a fault display on the diagnostic tool when they are inconsistent. Therefore, this phase is used: – to perform fault finding on faults that do not have a fault display, and which may correspond to a customer complaint. – to check that the system is operating correctly and that there is no risk of a fault recurring after repairs. This section features the fault finding procedures for statuses and parameters, and the conditions for checking them. If a status is not behaving normally or a parameter is outside the permitted tolerance values, consult the corresponding fault finding page.

Customer complaints - Fault finding chart If the diagnostic tool check is correct, but the customer complaint persists, it should be dealt with according to the customer complaint. A summary of the overall procedure to follow is provided on the following page in the form of a flow chart. Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-2

Edition 4

XENON BULBS Fault finding - Introduction

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

80C

4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Check the battery charge and the condition of the fuses

Print the system fault finding log (available on CLIP and in the Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note)

Connect CLIP

Dialogue with Electronic Control Unit?

no See Fault Finding Chart 1

yes Read the faults

Faults present

no Conformity check

yes Deal with present faults

The cause is still present

no

Fault solved

no

Fault solved

Deal with stored faults Use fault finding charts (ALPs) The cause is still present

no

Fault solved The cause is still present

yes

Contact the Techline with the completed fault finding log

Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-3

Edition 4

XENON BULBS Fault finding - Introduction

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

80C

5. FAULT FINDING LOG

WARNING!

IMPORTANT Any fault on a complex system requires thorough fault finding with the appropriate tools. The FAULT FINDING LOG, which should be completed during the procedure, enables you to keep track of the procedure which is carried out. It is an essential item for communication with the manufacturer.

IT IS THEREFORE MANDATORY TO FILL OUT A FAULT FINDING LOG EACH TIME FAULT FINDING IS CARRIED OUT. You will always be asked for this report: – when requesting technical assistance from the Techline, – for approval requests when replacing parts for which approval is obligatory, – to be enclosed when returning monitored parts on request. The log is needed for warranty compensation, and enables better analysis of the parts removed.

6. SAFETY ADVICE All work on components requires that the safety rules be obeyed to prevent damage or injury: – Make sure the battery is properly charged to avoid damaging the computers with a low load. – Use the appropriate tools. – Do not touch the xenon bulbs. – Never work on the xenon light system while it is on: the voltage is 20,000 V or more.

Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-4

Edition 4

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Xenon lights

Page 1/2

List of monitored parts: Computer ●

Administrative identification Date

2

0

Log completed by VIN Engine Diagnostic tool

CLIP

Update version ●

Customer complaint 1079

No automatic adjustment of the dipped headlights

1081

Erratic automatic adjustment

1082

The dipped headlights do not switch on

1080

The dipped headlights do not switch off

1083

The dipped headlights come on intermittently

1084

The headlight range is too weak

Other

●

Conditions under which the customer complaint occurs 005

While driving

011

When ignition is switched on

009

Sudden fault

003

When stationary

004

Intermittently

999

When switching on the main beam headlights

Other

●

Your comments

Your comments

Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure used

Type of diagnostic manual:

Workshop Repair Manual

Technical Note:

Assisted fault finding

Fault finding manual no.: Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note No.: Other documentation Title and/or part number:

FD 19 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Xenon lights ●

Page 2/2

Computer identification and system parts replaced

Part 1 part no. Part 2 part no. Part 3 part no. Part 4 part no. Part 5 part no. To be read with the Diagnostic tool (Identification screen): Computer part no. Supplier no. Program no. Software version Calibration no. VDIAG ●

Faults found with the diagnostic tool Fault no.

●

Present

Fault name

Specification

Conditions under which fault occurs Status or parameter no.

●

Stored

Parameter name

Value

Unit

System-specific information

Description:

●

Additional information

What factors led you to replace the computer? What other parts were replaced? Other faulty functions? Please specify:

FD 19 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

XENON BULBS Fault finding - System operation

80C

1 - XENON LIGHT SYSTEM COMPONENTS The system consists of the following components: – Front vehicle level sensor (the xenon light computer is built into this sensor). – Rear vehicle level sensor. – Right and left-hand headlight adjustment motor. – Bulb high-voltage power unit (ballast). – Xenon lights. The K line can be used for fault finding; the system is not multiplexed.

2 - SYSTEM OPERATION When the control lever is in position (dipped headlights), it sends a signal to the UCH. The UCH processes the signal and, through the CAN network, asks the Protection and Switching Unit to turn on the xenon lights. When the bulbs come on, the adjustment motor moves through three positions: low, high, initial. This is its intialisation. If the vehicle is travelling faster than 6 mph (10 km/h) when the bulbs come on, there is no intialisation. The computer manages various signals to adjust the amount of light: – Vehicle speed: signal from the ABS computer. Above 18 mph (30 km/h), the adjustment motors raise the bulbs to provide optimum lighting for the driver. – Vehicle front and rear height: signals from the front and rear height sensors. These sensors track the angular motion of the car's body (deceleration, acceleration, vehicle loaded). The computer then controls the motors to adjust the beam and provide optimum lighting. – System initialisation: When the vehicle is unlocked, even if the dipped headlights are off, the system moves the adjustment motors to the low position and then the initial position. This initialises the system.

Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-7

Edition 4

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

XENON BULBS Fault finding - System operation

80C

3 - SYSTEM CONFIGURATION/CALIBRATION To calibrate and configure a new computer on a vehicle, follow the configuration procedures in the following order. a - Vehicle type (CF003) This configuration activates the adjustment strategies designed for the body type. The new strategies only take effect after the ignition is switched off and the doors are locked. Perform configuration as follows: – Enter the xenon lights fault finding mode. – Make sure that the initial vehicle position indicated by the front and rear sensors is within the allowed range. – Run configuration CF003 according to the vehicle type: – J84 (MPV 5 seats) – R84 (MPV 7 seats LWB) – SUV84 (MPV 4x4) – – – – – –

Exit fault finding mode. Switch off the ignition. Lock the doors with the card. The vehicle type has been programmed. After unlocking the doors, turn the ignition back on. See that the vehicle type has been properly identified by reading configuration LC001, Vehicle type. b - Computer calibration CF001

This calibration must be performed when a system component is replaced (e.g. sensor, headlight etc.). It enables the computer to store the vehicle's reference level. To ensure proper configuration and calibration, follow this procedure: – – – – –

Check tyre pressure and adjust if faulty. Park the vehicle on a level surface under normal driving conditions (luggage compartment empty). Vehicle stopped, no variation in attitude (no door rattling). Driver aboard. Fuel tank full.

Once computer calibration has been performed, check conformity of the light beam. If it is incorrect, adjust the headlights manually.

4 - DEFECT MODE If a system component is defective, no indicator lights up on the instrument panel. The system then switches to defect mode. If the computer detects a system fault, it sets the adjustment motors to the low or initial position. If the computer detects a fault, there is no longer any intialisation when the lights are turned on.

Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-8

Edition 4

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

XENON BULBS Fault finding - Component replacement

80C

The system's xenon lights require a voltage of 20,000 V when switched on, then run on 85 V AC. The battery must without fail be disconnected before any work on the headlights, bulbs, and high-voltage headlight power transformer units. Refer to MR 370, 80C - Xenon lights, Xenon light computer: Removal - Refitting for the Removal - Refitting procedure for the components of the system. It is forbidden to supply a bulb if it is not installed in the headlight (danger that you might damage your eyes). The computer must be programmed using command CF001 each time the front or rear level sensor is replaced (see Configuration and programming). The following procedure should be applied before adjusting the beam height: – check that there are no faults – configure the vehicle type using command CF003 (see Configuration and programming) – program the computer using command CF001 (see Configuration and programming) Then manually adjust the headlight beam, see MR 370, 80C - Xenon lights, Xenon headlights: Adjustment.

Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-9

Edition 4

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

XENON BULBS Fault finding - Allocation of computer tracks

80C

Xenon light computer 8-track black connector Track

Description

1

Earth

2

Timed +12 V power supply

3

Vehicle rear height signal from rear level sensor

4

Vehicle speed signal from ABS computer.

5

Fault finding signal

6

Dipped headlights signal by Protection and Switching Unit (UPC)

7

Right-hand and left-hand headlight adjustment motor control signal

8

Rear level sensor + power supply from xenon light computer

Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-10

Edition 4

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

XENON BULBS Fault finding - Configurations and programming

80C

COMPUTER CALIBRATION CF001

NOTES

This configuration enables the computer to store the vehicle's reference level. Begin by configuring the vehicle type; then calibrate the vehicle level. The vehicle must be stationary. Also, the front and rear sensor values must be within the permissible range.

To calibrate the computer, proceed as follows: – Check tyre pressure and adjust if faulty. – Park the vehicle on a level horizontal surface. – Make sure that the headlights have been properly adjusted manually. – Position the vehicle with the wheels straight, engine off, driver behind the wheel and dipped headlights on. – Turn on the ignition and enter xenon lights fault finding mode. – Select Configuration mode. – Run configuration CF001. – When calibration is complete, exit fault finding mode. – Lock and unlock the doors with the card. – The computer has now been calibrated. – Check status LC010, which should indicate Completed.

COMPUTER CALIBRATION LC010

Status 1: Not completed Status 2: Completed

The configuration LC010 reading can have one of two statuses: – Not completed: The computer has not been calibrated, the vehicle's reference level is unknown, and the maximum and minimum body height levels have not been programmed. – Completed: The computer has been calibrated. Normal system operation. The sensor reference levels have been programmed.

AFTER REPAIR

Turn on dipped-beam headlights. Check that the system performs its intialisation to verify that the computer has no faults. Adjust the headlights manually.

Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-11

Edition 4

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

XENON BULBS Fault finding - Configurations and programming

80C

VEHICLE TYPE CF003

NOTES

This configuration is performed after replacing the computer.

Configuration procedure: – – – – – – – – –

Connect the CLIP tool and turn on the ignition. Enter Xenon lights fault finding mode. Select configuration CF003 Vehicle type. Select the type of vehicle. Confirm the configuration. Exit fault finding mode and switch off the ignition. Lock and unlock the vehicle doors with the card. Re-enter Xenon lights fault finding mode and read LC001 Vehicle type. See that the vehicle type has been properly identified by reading configuration LC001.

VEHICLE TYPE LC001

Status 1: Status 2: Status 3: Status 4:

Error J84 R84 SUV 84

Configuration LC001 can have one of four statuses: – Error: Configuration CF003 Vehicle type, has been complete, but the vehicle type programmed does not match the vehicle diagnosed. – J84: Configuration correct: the vehicle type is Scénic. – R84: Configuration correct: the vehicle type is the LWB Scénic. – SUV84: Configuration correct: the vehicle type is Scénic 4x4.

AFTER REPAIR

Turn on dipped-beam headlights. Check that the system performs its intialisation to verify that the computer has no faults. Adjust the headlights manually. Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-12

Edition 4

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

XENON BULBS Fault finding - Configurations and programming

80C

ACTUATOR HIGH AND LOW POSITION CHECK AC012

NOTES

Before running this command, make sure that the vehicle level has been calibrated. This command tests actuator control following a malfunction or customer complaint.

Use the CLIP tool to check whether the xenon light computer has any faults. If fault DF018 Actuator is present, consult procedure for dealing with DF018. If the actuators fail to move after the command is run, proceed as follows: – Check the continuity and absence of interference resistance between: Right-hand adjustment motor track 2 track 7 of the xenon light computer Left-hand adjustment motor track 2 track 7 of the xenon light computer If necessary, repair the connections. Check the condition of the adjustment motors and xenon light computer connections. Repair if necessary. If the command still fails to move the adjustment motors, replace them.

AFTER REPAIR

Turn on dipped-beam headlights. Check that the system performs its intialisation to verify that the computer has no faults. Adjust the headlights manually. Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-13

Edition 4

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

XENON BULBS Fault finding - Summary table of faults

80C

List of faults and related DTCs: Tool fault

Associated DTC

Diagnostic tool title

DF001

9003

Computer

DF008

9002

Front height sensor circuit

DF009

9001

Rear height sensor circuit

DF018

9004

Actuators

Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-14

Edition 4

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

XENON BULBS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

80C

COMPUTER

DF001 PRESENT

NOTES

C.O.

C.O. 1.DEF 2.DEF 3.DEF 4.DEF 5.DEF 6.DEF 7.DEF 8.DEF 9.DEF 10.DEF 11.DEF

: : : : : : : : : : : :

Dipped headlights signal circuit open Speed signal above maximum threshold Speed signal open circuit or short circuit to +12 V Speed signal short circuit to earth detected while driving Speed greater than 0 during initialisation Computer not calibrated Incorrect vehicle configuration Internal electronic fault. Actuator control line open circuit Actuator control line short circuit to earth Actuator control line short circuit to +12 V Battery voltage too low

The fault is declared present after the dipped headlights are switched on, or during a road test.

NOTES

Priority when dealing with a number of faults

Replace if necessary. Carry out fault finding on the UCH to make sure that the stalk works properly. Check the condition of the contacts and make sure that the xenon light computer is properly connected. Check the continuity and absence of interference resistance in the following connection: Black 6-track Protection and Switching Unit connector track 5 Track 6 of the xenon light computer If the fault is still present after these checks, replace the dipped headlights control stalk.

1.DEF

NOTES

None.

Make sure that parameter PR019 Vehicle speed is accurate, and that the value lies within the permissible range. Check the ABS circuit for faults. If any faults are present, deal with them first. Then check the continuity and absence of interference resistance between: ABS computer track 23 Xenon light computer track 4

AFTER REPAIR

Turn on the dipped headlights and check that intialisation is performed. If there is no intialisation, deal with the system faults. Adjust the headlights manually after each computer calibration. Perform a road test, then check with the diagnostic tool. Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-15

Edition 4

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

XENON BULBS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

80C

DF001 PRESENT CONTINUED 1

2.DEF

NOTES

Only take this fault into consideration if the vehicle's power supply is + after ignition.

Check the continuity and absence of interference resistance between: ABS computer track 23 Xenon light computer track 4 Check the condition of the computer connections and repair if necessary. Then check the insulation against +12 V on the connection below.

3.DEF

NOTES

None.

Check the insulation against +12 V of the connection between: ABS computer track 23 Xenon light computer track 4 Check the condition of the computer connections and repair if necessary.

4.DEF

NOTES

None.

Make sure that parameter PR019 Vehicle speed is consistent. Check the ABS circuit for faults. If any faults are present, deal with them first. Then check the continuity and absence of interference resistance between: ABS computer track 23 Xenon light computer track 4

5.DEF

NOTES

This fault reappears every time configuration CF003 Vehicle type is run.

If the computer has not been calibrated, it indicates fault DF001 Computer fault. In this case, consult command CF001 Computer calibration. If the fault persists, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Turn on the dipped headlights and check that intialisation is performed. If there is no intialisation, deal with the system faults. Adjust the headlights manually after each computer calibration. Perform a road test, then check with the diagnostic tool. Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-16

Edition 4

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

XENON BULBS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

80C

DF001 PRESENT CONTINUED 2

6.DEF

NOTES

None.

If the vehicle configuration has not been done, the computer indicates fault DF001 Computer fault. In this case, consult command CF003 Vehicle type, and configure the computer for the type of vehicle involved. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

7.DEF

NOTES

Deal with other system faults first.

If fault DF001 appears with Internal computer error status, contact the Techline.

8.DEF

NOTES

None.

Check the continuity and absence of interference resistance between: Right-hand headlight adjustment motor track 2 Xenon light computer track 7 Left-hand headlight adjustment motor track 2 Xenon light computer track 7 Check the condition of the connections as well as the xenon light computer and adjustment motor connections. Repair if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Turn on the dipped headlights and check that intialisation is performed. If there is no intialisation, deal with the system faults. Adjust the headlights manually after each computer calibration. Perform a road test, then check with the diagnostic tool. Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-17

Edition 4

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

XENON BULBS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

80C

DF001 PRESENT CONTINUED 3

9.DEF

NOTES

None.

Check the insulation against earth on the following connection: Right-hand headlight adjustment motor track 2 Xenon light computer track 7 Left-hand headlight adjustment motor track 2 Xenon light computer track 7 Check the condition of the connections as well as the xenon light computer and adjustment motor connections. Repair if necessary.

10.DEF

NOTES

None.

Check the insulation against +12 V of the connection between: Right-hand headlight adjustment motor Track 2 Xenon light computer track 7 Left-hand headlight adjustment motor Track 2 Xenon light computer track 7 Check the condition of the connections as well as the xenon light computer and adjustment motor connections. Repair if necessary.

11.DEF

NOTES

None.

If the battery voltage is too low (< 10 V), check the condition of the battery and recharge or replace if necessary. Then check the vehicle's charge circuit.

AFTER REPAIR

Turn on the dipped headlights and check that intialisation is performed. If there is no intialisation, deal with the system faults. Adjust the headlights manually after each computer calibration. Perform a road test, then check with the diagnostic tool. Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-18

Edition 4

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

DF008 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

1.DEF

XENON BULBS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

80C

FRONT HEIGHT SENSOR CIRCUIT 1.DEF: 2.DEF: 3.DEF: 4.DEF:

Signal outside upper limit Signal outside lower limit Signal outside limit on initialisation Internal electronic fault.

The fault is declared present after a road test.

NOTES

None.

Check the front height sensor connections. Repair if necessary. Check the condition of the sensor linkage rod. If it is damaged, the signal will be outside the limits. Check the condition of the front sensor connection harness (pinching, breaks, etc.). Repair if necessary.

2.DEF

NOTES

None.

Check the front height sensor connections. Repair if necessary. Check the condition of the sensor linkage rod. If it is damaged, the signal will be outside the limits. Check the condition of the front sensor connection harness (pinching, breaks, etc.). Repair if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Turn on the dipped headlights and check that intialisation is performed. If there is no intialisation, deal with the system faults. Adjust the headlights manually after each computer calibration. Perform a road test, then check with the diagnostic tool. Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-19

Edition 4

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

XENON BULBS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

80C

DF008 PRESENT CONTINUED 1

3.DEF

NOTES

None.

Check the front height sensor connections. Repair if necessary. Check the condition of the sensor linkage rod. If it is damaged, the signal will be outside the limits. Check the condition of the front sensor connection harness (pinching, breaks, etc.). Repair if necessary.

4.DEF

NOTES

None.

If fault DF008 appears with the Internal electronic fault status, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Turn on the dipped headlights and check that intialisation is performed. If there is no intialisation, deal with the system faults. Adjust the headlights manually after each computer calibration. Perform a road test, then check with the diagnostic tool. Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-20

Edition 4

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

XENON BULBS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

80C

REAR HEIGHT SENSOR CIRCUIT DF009 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

CC.0

CC.0 : CC.1 : 1.DEF: 2.DEF: 3.DEF: 4.DEF: 5.DEF:

Short circuit to earth Short circuit to +12 V Signal absent Signal outside upper limit Signal outside lower limit Signal outside limit on initialisation Inconsistent signal

The fault is declared present after a road test.

NOTES

None.

Check the condition of the contacts and the xenon light computer and rear height sensor connections. Check the continuity and insulation against earth between: Track 6 of the rear level sensor connector Track 3 of the xenon light computer connector Track 5 of the rear level sensor connector Track 8 of the xenon light computer connector Then check the insulation of this connection against earth. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

CC.1

NOTES

None.

Check the condition of the contacts and the xenon light computer and rear level sensor connections. Check the continuity and insulation against +12 V between: Track 6 of the rear level sensor connector Track 3 of the xenon light computer connector Track 5 of the rear level sensor connector Track 8 of the xenon light computer connector Then check the insulation of this connection against earth. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Turn on the dipped headlights and check that intialisation is performed. If there is no intialisation, deal with the system faults. Adjust the headlights manually after each computer calibration. Perform a road test, then check with the diagnostic tool. Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-21

Edition 4

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

XENON BULBS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

80C

DF009 CONTINUED 1

1.DEF

NOTES

None.

Check the condition of the contacts and the xenon light computer and rear level sensor connections. Check the continuity and absence of interference resistance between: Track 6 of the rear level sensor connector Track 3 of the xenon light computer connector Track 5 of the rear level sensor connector Track 8 of the xenon light computer connector Track 1 of the rear level sensor connector Vehicle earth If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

2.DEF

NOTES

None.

Check the proper installation and condition of the rear sensor linkage. Replace if necessary. Check the condition of the contacts and the xenon light computer and rear level sensor connections. Check the continuity and absence of interference resistance between: Track 6 of the rear level sensor connector Track 3 of the xenon light computer connector Track 5 of the rear level sensor connector Track 8 of the xenon light computer connector Next check the insulation of these connections against earth, and then against +12 V. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Turn on the dipped headlights and check that intialisation is performed. If there is no intialisation, deal with the system faults. Adjust the headlights manually after each computer calibration. Perform a road test, then check with the diagnostic tool. Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-22

Edition 4

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

XENON BULBS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

80C

DF009 CONTINUED 2

3.DEF

NOTES

None.

Check the proper installation and condition of the rear sensor linkage. Replace if necessary. Check the condition of the contacts and the xenon light computer and rear level sensor connections. Check the continuity and absence of interference resistance between: Track 6 of the rear level sensor connector Track 3 of the xenon light computer connector Track 5 of the rear level sensor connector Track 8 of the xenon light computer connector Next check the insulation of these connections against earth, and then against +12 V. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

4.DEF

NOTES

None.

Check the proper installation and condition of the rear sensor linkage. Replace if necessary. Check the condition of the contacts and the xenon light computer and rear level sensor connections. Check the continuity and absence of interference resistance between: Track 6 of the rear level sensor connector Track 3 of the xenon light computer connector Track 5 of the rear level sensor connector Track 8 of the xenon light computer connector Next check the insulation of these connections against earth, and then against +12 V. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Turn on the dipped headlights and check that intialisation is performed. If there is no intialisation, deal with the system faults. Adjust the headlights manually after each computer calibration. Perform a road test, then check with the diagnostic tool. Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-23

Edition 4

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

XENON BULBS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

80C

DF009 CONTINUED 3

5.DEF

NOTES

None.

Check the condition of the rear level sensor linkage. Replace if necessary. Check the condition of the contacts and the xenon light computer and rear level sensor connections. Check the continuity and absence of interference resistance between: Track 6 of the rear level sensor connector Track 3 of the xenon light computer connector Track 5 of the rear level sensor connector Track 8 of the xenon light computer connector Next check the insulation of these connections against earth, and then against +12 V. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Turn on the dipped headlights and check that intialisation is performed. If there is no intialisation, deal with the system faults. Adjust the headlights manually after each computer calibration. Perform a road test, then check with the diagnostic tool. Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-24

Edition 4

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

DF018 PRESENT OR STORED

1.DEF

XENON BULBS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

80C

ACTUATORS 1.DEF: Actuator motor fault

NOTES

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to stored faults: If the fault appears as present after: – the fault has been cleared – the ignition is switched off and on again, then the dipped headlights are switched on.

Park the vehicle facing a wall. Switch off the ignition. Switch on the ignition and turn on the dipped headlights. Run command AC012 Check actuator high and low positions to make sure that the actuators are working properly.

Check the headlamp unit which does not initialise by doing the following. Check the condition of the computer connections and the actuator connections in the headlights. Check the continuity and absence of interference resistance between: computer connector track 7 track 2 of the actuator connector in the right-hand headlight computer connector track 7 track 2 of the actuator connector in the left-hand headlight Track 1 of the actuator connector vehicle earth Track 3 of the actuator connector + after ignition If one or more of these checks fail, replace the defective adjustment motor(s).

AFTER REPAIR

Turn on the dipped headlights and check that intialisation is performed. If there is no intialisation, deal with the system faults. Adjust the headlights manually after each computer calibration. Perform a road test, then check with the diagnostic tool. Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-25

Edition 4

XENON BULBS Fault finding - Conformity check

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

80C

Only check the conformity after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. Prerequisite: dipped headlights on.

NOTES

LIGHTING POSITION SUB-FUNCTION

Order

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Function

Display and Notes

PR017

Front height

8° < PR117 < 115.5°

PR018

Rear height

9° < PR018 < 110°

1

2

PR020

Actuator positions

15 steps < PR020 < 520 steps

PR032

Front reference height

23° < PR032 < 85.6°

PR033

Rear reference height

23° < PR032 < 89.5°

PR019

Vehicle speed

0 mph < PR019 < 132 mph (220 km/h)

3

4

Fault finding

If the value is incorrect, consult the interpretation of faults DF008 Front height sensor circuit and DF009 Rear height sensor circuit If the value is incorrect, see the interpretation of fault DF018 Actuator and run command AC012 Check actuator high and low position, to see if they work properly If the value is incorrect, see the interpretation of faults DF008 Front height sensor circuit and DF009 Rear height sensor circuit status 4.DEF If the value is incorrect, see the interpretation of fault DF001 Computer

Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-26

Edition 4

XENON BULBS Fault finding - Conformity check

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

80C

Only check the conformity after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. Prerequisite: dipped headlights on.

NOTES

LIGHTING CONTROL SUB-FUNCTION

Order

1

Parameter or Status checked or Action

PR020

Function

Actuator positions

Display and Notes

Fault finding

15 steps < PR020 < 520 steps

If the value is incorrect, see the interpretation of fault DF018 Actuator and run command AC012 Check actuator high and low position to see if they work properly

LIGHTING MANAGEMENT SUB-FUNCTION

Order

1

Parameter or Status checked or Action

ET001

Function

Display and Notes

Fault finding

Done

Normal operating mode

Not done

Run CF001 Computer calibration

Computer calibration

Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-27

Edition 4

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

XENON BULBS Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

80C

COMPUTER CALIBRATION ET001

Status 1: Not completed Status 2: Completed

There must be no present or stored faults. NOTES Special notes: The vehicle must be stationary, parked on a level surface with a driver behind the wheel and the fuel tank full.

Not completed

Done

AFTER REPAIR

Status ET001 should be Not completed if the computer has not yet been calibrated and the vehicle reference heights have not been programmed. If status ET001 remains stuck at Not completed, carry out fault finding on the entire system as a component may be defective.

Status ET001 should be Completed if the computer has been calibrated and the vehicle reference heights have been programmed. This is normal operation status.

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-28

Edition 4

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

XENON BULBS Fault finding - Parameter summary table

Tool parameter

80C

Diagnostic tool title

PR020

Actuator positions

PR032

Front reference height

PR017

Front height

PR033

Rear reference height

PR018

Rear height

PR019

Vehicle speed

Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-29

Edition 4

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

XENON BULBS Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

80C

FRONT HEIGHT PR017 and PR018

NOTES

REAR HEIGHT

There must be no present or stored faults. Carry out fault finding only if the values of this parameter are inconsistent.

If the values indicated by the vehicle do not match those of the conformity check, see faults DF008 Front height sensor circuit and DF009 Rear height sensor circuit, and follow the fault finding procedure.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-30

Edition 4

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

XENON BULBS Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

80C

VEHICLE SPEED PR019

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Run fault finding only if the values of this parameter are inconsistent.

If the values indicated by the vehicle do not match those of the conformity check, see fault DF001 Computer 3.DEF and 4.DEF and apply the fault finding procedure.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-31

Edition 4

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

XENON BULBS Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

80C

ACTUATOR POSITIONS PR020

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Carry out fault finding only if the values of this parameter are inconsistent.

Note: Even though a height sensor or actuator is defective, the value of parameter PR020 will always be determined by the computer. Parameter PR020 will therefore always be within a range of permissible values even if one of the components is defective. If the values indicated by the vehicle do not match those of the conformity check, refer to fault DF018 Actuators, and follow the diagnostic procedure. To find out if an actuator is malfunctioning, see command AC012 Check actuator high and low position.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults. Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-32

Edition 4

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

NOTES

XENON BULBS Fault finding - Customer complaints

80C

Only check the customer complaint after performing a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

NO COMMUNICATION WITH THE COMPUTER

ALP 1

NO HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT ON EITHER OR BOTH HEADLIGHTS, REGARDLESS OF VEHICLE LOAD

ALP 2

DIPPED HEADLIGHT BEAMS TOO HIGH

ALP 3

THE LEFT AND RIGHT-HAND DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS DO NOT LIGHT AT THE SAME HEIGHT

ALP 4

Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-33

Edition 4

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

XENON BULBS Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 1

NOTES

80C

No dialogue with the computer

Only check the customer complaint after performing a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check fuse 1K (5A) of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box. Replace it if necessary. Turn on dipped-beam headlights. If the bulbs light but the system does not perform intialisation and no communication is possible, perform the following checks: Remove the timed power supply 40A relay A located in the passenger compartment fuse and relay box. Check the condition of the connections and repair if necessary. Measure the following resistance values: – Power circuit: Resistance between tracks 85 and 86 of the relay. If the resistance is not 65 Ω ± 5 Ω, replace relay A. – Control circuit: Resistance between tracks 30 and 87A of the relay. If the resistance is not approximately 1 Ω , replace relay A. Check the battery voltage and carry out the operations necessary to obtain a suitable voltage (9.5 V < battery voltage < 14.4 V). Check for the presence of: a +12 V before ignition feed on track 16 of the diagnostic socket, a +12 V after ignition feed on track 1 of the diagnostic socket, earth on tracks 4 and 5 of the diagnostic socket. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Turn on dipped-beam headlights. If the system does not perform intialisation, deal with the system faults. Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-34

Edition 4

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

XENON BULBS Fault finding - Fault finding charts

80C

ALP 2

No height adjustment on either or both headlights, regardless of vehicle load

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Confirm that intialisation is performed when the dipped headlights are switched on. If it is not, the actuators or a circuit component may be defective. Check the condition of fuse F1K (5A) located in the vehicle's glovebox. Repair if necessary. Use command AC012 Check actuator high and low position to find out which headlight is faulty. Check for mechanical blockage of the headlight (ball joint popped out, reflector stuck, actuator seized). Make sure that the sensors are properly positioned and mounted on the body, and check the condition of the linkage. If all the checks described above fail to solve the problem, replace the faulty adjustment motor(s).

AFTER REPAIR

Turn on dipped-beam headlights. If the system does not perform intialisation, deal with the system faults. Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-35

Edition 4

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

XENON BULBS Fault finding - Fault finding charts

80C

ALP 3

Glare, or beam too high

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check that headlights are fitted correctly. Check that the right-hand and left-hand headlights light at the same level. If the headlights differ in height, adjust the headlights manually. Check the condition of system mechanical components (sensor mounting, linkages). Check whether the initial front and rear heights PR032 Reference front height and PR033 Reference rear height are similar. If there is a major difference between these two parameters, perform a computer calibration (CF001 described in the Configurations and Programming section). Use actuator command AC012 Check actuator high and low position. If the light beam moves: adjust the headlights manually. If the light beam does not move: Check that the adjustment motors are actuated when the command is given (motor noise + vibration). If the motors are actuated but the beam does not move, check the condition of the adjustment motor/ headlight coupling rods. Replace the faulty headlight(s).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Deal with any faults found. Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-36

Edition 4

Program no.: V010 VDIAG No.: 05

XENON BULBS Fault finding - Fault finding charts

80C

ALP 4

The left-hand and right-hand dipped headlight beams do not light at the same height

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check that headlights are fitted correctly. Check that the right-hand and left-hand headlights light at the same level. If the headlights differ in height, adjust the headlights manually. Check the condition of system mechanical components (sensor mounting, linkages). Check whether the initial front and rear heights PR032 Reference front height and PR033 Reference rear height are similar. If there is a major difference between these two parameters, perform a computer calibration (CF001 described in the Configurations and Programming section). Use actuator command AC012 Check actuator high and low position. If the light beam moves: adjust the headlights manually. If the light beam does not move: Check that the adjustment motors are actuated when the command is given (motor noise + vibration). If the motors are actuated but the beam does not move, check the condition of the adjustment motor/ headlight coupling rods. Replace the faulty headlight(s).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Deal with any faults found. Lampes au Xénon J 84

80C-37

Edition 4

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

INSTRUMENT PANEL 183A Fault finding - Introduction

83A

1. SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT This document presents the fault finding procedure applicable to all computers with the following specifications: Vehicle(s): SCENIC II Function concerned: Instrument panel

Name of computer: Instrument Panel VDIAG No.: 04 - 08

2. PREREQUISITES FOR FAULT FINDING Documentation type Fault finding procedure (this manual): – Assisted fault finding (integrated into the diagnostic tool), Dialogys. Wiring Diagrams: – Visu-Schéma (CD-ROM), paper version. Type of diagnostic tools CLIP Special tooling required SPECIAL TOOLING REQUIRED Multimeter Universal bornier

3. RECAP Procedure To run fault finding on the vehicle's computers, switch on the ignition in fault finding mode (forced + after ignition feed). Proceed as follows: – Renault card in the card reader (keyless vehicle scenario 1, standard, not hands-free and scenario 2, top of the range, hands-free), – press and hold Start button (longer than 5 seconds) with start-up conditions not fulfilled, – connect the diagnostic tool and perform the required operations. To cut off + after ignition, proceed as follows: – disconnect the diagnostic tool, – press the Start button twice briefly (less than 3 seconds), – ensure that the + after ignition feed has been cut off by checking that the computer indicator lights on the instrument panel have gone out.

TDB_V04_PRELI/TDB_V08_PRELI

TdbJ841.0

83A-1

Edition 4

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding - Introduction

83A

Faults Faults are declared as either present or stored (depending on whether they appeared in a certain context and have disappeared since, or whether they remain present but have not been diagnosed within the current context). The present or stored status of faults should be taken into consideration when the diagnostic tool is used following the + after ignition supply being switched on (without acting on the system components). For a present fault, apply the procedure described in the Interpretation of faults section. For a stored fault, note the faults displayed and apply the instructions in the Notes section. If the fault is confirmed when the instructions in the Notes section are applied, the fault is present. Deal with the fault If the fault is not confirmed, check: – the electrical lines which correspond to the fault, – the connectors for these lines (for oxidation, bent pins, etc.), – the resistance of the component detected as faulty, – the condition of the wires (melted or split insulation, wear). Conformity check The aim of the conformity check is to check data that does not produce a fault on the diagnostic tool when the data is inconsistent. Therefore, this stage is used to: – carry out fault finding on faults that do not have a fault display, and which may correspond to a customer complaint. – check that the system is operating correctly and that there is no risk of a fault recurring after repair. This section gives the fault finding procedures for statuses and parameters and the conditions for checking them. If a status is not behaving normally or a parameter is outside permitted tolerance values, you should consult the corresponding fault finding page. Customer complaints - Fault finding chart If the test with the diagnostic tool is OK but the customer complaint is still present, the fault should be treated by customer complaints. A summary of the overall procedure to follow is provided on the following page in the form of a flow chart.

TdbJ841.0

83A-2

Edition 4

INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding - Introduction

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

83A

4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Check the battery charge and the condition of the fuses

Print the system fault finding log (available on CLIP and in the Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note)

Connect CLIP

Dialogue with computer?

no

See ALP No. 1

yes Read the faults

Faults present

no Conformity check

yes The cause is still present

Deal with present faults

no

Fault solved

no

Fault solved

Deal with stored faults Use Fault Finding Charts (ALPs) The cause is still present

no

Fault solved The cause is still present

yes

Contact Techline with the completed fault finding log

TdbJ841.0

83A-3

Edition 4

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding - Introduction

83A

5. FAULT FINDING LOG

IMPORTANT!

NOTE Any fault on a complex system requires thorough fault finding with the appropriate tools. The FAULT FINDING LOG, which should be completed during the fault finding procedure, ensures a record is kept of the procedure carried out. It is an essential document when consulting the manufacturer.

IT IS THEREFORE MANDATORY TO FILL OUT A FAULT FINDING LOG EACH TIME FAULT FINDING IS CARRIED OUT.

You will always be asked for this log: – when requesting technical assistance from the Techline, – for approval requests when replacing parts for which approval is obligatory, – to be attached to monitored parts for which reimbursement is requested. The log is needed for warranty reimbursement, and enables better analysis of the parts removed. 6. SAFETY ADVICE Safety rules must be observed during any work on a component to prevent any damage or injury: – Make sure the battery is properly charged to avoid damaging the computers with a low load. – Use the appropriate tools.

TdbJ841.0

83A-4

Edition 4

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Instrument panel

Page 1/2

List of monitored parts: Computer ●

Administrative identification Date

2

0

Log completed by VIN Engine Diagnostic tool

CLIP

Revision ●

Customer complaint 1188

Faulty fuel level display

1156

Faulty coolant temperature display

1185

Faulty speedometer

1157

Warning lights fail to come on

1186

Faulty tachometer

1190

Faulty trip computer displays

Other ●

Digital display: faulty text/image

004

Intermittently

Your comments

Conditions under which the customer complaint occurs 011

When the ignition is switched on

005

While driving

009

Sudden fault

010

Gradual deterioration

Other ●

1187

Your comments

Documentation used for fault finding Fault finding procedure used

Type of diagnostic manual:

MR

Technical Note

Assisted fault finding

Fault finding manual No.: Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note No.:

Other documentation Title and/or part number:

FD 10 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Instrument panel ●

Page 2/2

Identification of computer and system parts exchanged

Part 1 part no. Part 2 part no. Part 3 part no. Part 4 part no. Part 5 part no. To be read with the diagnostic tool (Identification screen): Computer part no. Supplier No. Program No. Software version Calibration No. VDIAG ●

Faults found with the diagnostic tool Fault no.

●

Present

Fault name

Specification

Conditions under which fault occurs Status or parameter no.

●

Stored

Parameter name

Value

Unit

System-specific information

Description: ●

Additional information

What factors led you to replace the computer? What other parts were replaced? Other defective functions? Your comments:

FD 10 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding - System operation

83A

Three types of instrument panel can be found on vehicles: – Entry-level instrument panel. – Mid-range instrument panel. – Top of the range instrument panel. The diagnostic tools can be used for fault finding on all versions. The instrument panels have no self-test function. The mileage before service interval may be changed using the diagnostic tools, by configuring the instrument panel and pressing and holding the trip computer scroll button on the trip computer Mileage before service page. To determine the vehicle's oil service interval, see the Maintenance Booklet. Entry-level instrument panel The Entry-level instrument panel has the following features: – Digital speedometer. – Bar-chart display. – rev counter, – oil level, – coolant temperature, – fuel level. – Audible warning. – direction indicators, – driver seatbelt warning, – headlights on reminder when a door is opened, – automatic locking when driving confirmation, – overspeed (Saudi Arabia), – automatic headlighting indicator (depending on version), – cruise control/speed limiter indicator (depending on version), – fault alerts (see section Warnings and indicator lights in the MR). – Warning light indications. – Text message display. – Trip Computer display. – mileometer and trip meter, – fuel consumed, – average consumption, – current consumption, – fuel range, – cruise control or speed limiter setting (depending on configuration). – Automatic transmission gear display (depending on configuration). – Entry level radio display. – Time and external temperature display. Mid-range instrument panel The Mid-range instrument panel has all the features of the Entry-level version. It has the Top of the range radio and Entry-level navigation displays through a multiplex connection. Top of the range instrument panel The Top of the range instrument panel has all the features of the Mid-range version plus the following functions: – Top of the range navigation.

TdbJ841.0

83A-7

Edition 4

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding - System operation

83A

Instrument panel in miles/Instrument panel in kilometres It is possible to switch from display in miles to display in kilometres and vice versa with a simple procedure, without changing the computer configurations with the diagnostic tool. To do this, follow this procedure: – with the ignition off, press one of the two trip computer buttons, then without releasing it, press the Start button, – the unit of distance flashes for approximately 3 seconds, then the new unit is displayed; release the trip computer button. Repeat the procedure to return to the previous mode. Note: After switching off the battery, the trip computer will automatically return to the original unit.

TdbJ841.0

83A-8

Edition 4

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding - Replacement of components

83A

1. PROGRAMMING, REPROGRAMMING OR REPLACING THE COMPUTER The system cannot be programmed or reprogrammed. When the computer has been replaced, configure it (see following section) and enter the VIN. Make sure the correct VIN has been entered. 2. REPLACEMENT OF COMPONENTS NOTE Work in the instrument panel is forbidden. Only the top of the range navigation window and screen can be replaced.

TdbJ841.0

83A-9

Edition 4

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

Fault finding - Configurations and programming

NOTES

No.

83A

Ignition on, engine off.

Configuration

Related configuration reading

Notes

CF002

Language setting: French English Italian German Spanish Dutch Portuguese Turkish Polish (Vdiag 08 only)

LC060

The configuration of the distance units CF140 in miles and the configuration of units of measurement for consumption in miles/gallon CF143 is only compatible with the selection of English. The configuration CF143 of units of measurement for consumption in km/l is only compatible with the selection of Portuguese.

CF146

Automatic parking brake

LC057

Two possibilities: With or Without

CF137

Vehicle type

LC030

One possibility: J = compact MPV

CF149

Gearbox type

LC029

Two possibilities: BVA = automatic gearbox BVM = manual gearbox

CF138

Type of fuel

LC049

Four options: Petrol Diesel Petrol/LPG Petrol/CNG

CF143

Unit of measurement for consumption

LC054

Three options: – L/100 km (related to configuration CF140 km) – Miles/Gallon (related to configuration CF140 Miles) – km/l (related to configuration CF140 km) To register the configuration, use the trip computer button to select the instrument panel display relating to the oil service interval, then press and hold the trip computer button for 10 seconds.

CF142

Electronic stability program (ESP)

LC053

Three options: – With (with ESP and ABS) – Without (without ESP, with ABS) – With ABS (with Vehicle speed computer)

CF145

Tyre pressure monitor

LC053

Three options: – With – None – With PAX (PAX + Tyre Pressure Monitoring system)

TdbJ841.0

83A-10

Edition 4

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

Fault finding - Configurations and programming

NOTES

No.

83A

Ignition on, engine off.

Related configuration reading

Configuration

Notes

CF140

Unit of distance

LC051

Two possibilities: km (related to configuration CF143 l/100 km or km/l) Miles (related to configuration CF002 English)

CF150

Cruise control/speed limiter

LC061

Two possibilities: With or Without

CF141

Overspeed function - Arabia

LC052

Two possibilities: With or Without

Oil service frequency Only use this parameter if the instrument panel is new. This configuration updates the new instrument panel, in accordance with two parameters which can be configured by the CLIP tool, VP006 Oil change frequency in KM and VP007 Oil change frequency in months from the old instrument panel. Refer to the vehicle handbook for the distance and frequency for the vehicle according to the country. Ignition on, engine off. Run command VP006 Oil change frequency in KM. Enter the oil change interval in km. Example of entry: Using the CLIP numeric keypad,

enter 20 to display 20,000 km. or enter 30 to display 30 000 km.

Special features for English versions The newly supplied instrument panel is configured, by default, in kilometres. In addition to the language configuration CF002 Language setting, carry out the calculation below to allow the instrument panel to display consistent values between the distance before next oil change and the desired oil change frequency. To display the oil change frequency in miles, multiply the value in miles indicated in the Maintenance booklet by 10 then divide by 6, to find the exact figure in kilometres. After the value has been entered, the computer automatically performs the conversion into miles for the oil change frequency. It is imperative to use the following procedure for correct functioning of the range and oil change frequency. Example: 18,000 miles x 10 = 180,000 miles, then divide by 6 = 30,000 km (Enter 30) To register the configuration, use the trip computer button to select the instrument panel display relating to the mileage before service, then press and hold the trip computer button for 10 seconds. IMPORTANT Make sure configurations CF002 (languages), CF140 (unit of distance) and CF143 (unit of measurement and consumption) are consistent, or else the instrument panel display system will malfunction. Inconsistent configuration may cause the Cruise Control/Speed Limiter to malfunction.

TdbJ841.0

83A-11

Edition 4

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding - Fault summary table

Tool fault DF007 DF016

Associated DTC

83A

Diagnostic tool title Fuel sender circuit Oil level sensor circuit

TdbJ841.0

83A-12

Edition 4

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

Fault finding - Fault summary table

DF007 PRESENT OR STORED

83A

FUEL SENDER CIRCUIT C.O. : Open circuit C.C. : Short circuit to earth

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to stored faults: The fault is declared present after waiting 2 minutes with the ignition on. NOTES Special notes: Check the consistency between the instrument panel display and parameter PR035 Fuel level.

Move the harness around in order to detect any change of status. Look for possible damage to the harness, check the connections and condition of instrument panel and fuel gauge connectors. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, disconnect the fuel sender connector and measure the resistance between tracks 1 and 2 of the fuel gauge. The resistance should be: Tank full = 20 Ω (tolerance + 0 Ω / - 10 Ω) Tank empty = 320 Ω (tolerance ± 10 Ω ) Replace the sender if faulty. If the fault is still present, check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Sender track 1 track 22 of the instrument panel's grey connector Sender track 2 track 23 of the instrument panel's grey connector Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, check the sender mounting. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Follow the instructions to confirm repair. Deal with any other faults. Clear the stored faults.

TDB_V04_DF007/TDB_V08_DF007

TdbJ841.0

83A-13

Edition 4

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

Fault finding - Fault summary table

DF016 PRESENT OR STORED

83A

OIL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT C.O. : Open circuit C.C. : Short circuit to earth

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to stored faults: The fault is declared present after waiting 2 minutes with the ignition on. NOTES Special notes: Check the consistency between the instrument panel display and the actual oil level (top up if low).

Move the harness around in order to detect any change of status. Look for possible damage to the harness, check the connections and condition of instrument panel, Protection and Switching Unit, and oil level sensor connections. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, check the sensor mounting. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, disconnect the oil level sensor connector and measure the resistance between tracks 1 and 2 of the oil level sensor (the resistance should be between 3 Ω and 20 Ω ). If necessary replace the sensor. If the fault is still present, check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Oil level sensor track 1 track 11 of the Protection and Switching Unit connector Oil level sensor track 2 track 10 of the Protection and Switching Unit connector Instrument panel track 7 track 5 of the Protection and Switching Unit connector Instrument panel track 8 track 4 of the Protection and Switching Unit connector Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Follow the instructions to confirm repair. Deal with any other faults. Clear the stored faults.

TDB_V04_DF016/TDB_V08_DF016

TdbJ841.0

83A-14

Edition 4

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

NOTES

INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding - Conformity check

83A

The values indicated in this conformity check are given for guidance purposes only. The Technical Note for the vehicle must be read. Test condition: Ignition on, engine off.

MAIN COMPUTER STATUSES AND PARAMETERS

Order

Function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and Notes

Fault finding

PR110:

Battery voltage

Indicates battery voltage in volts 7.5 < PR110 < 16

In the event of a fault, refer to the Interpretation of parameters section

2

ET002:

+ 12 V after ignition feed

Present

3

ET101:

Radio alarm

ON: + 12 V present OFF: No + 12 V

PR111:

Lighting dimmer voltage

Ignition on, dipped headlights lit. 0 V < PR111 < 8.1 V

Parking brake

Indicates parking brake position except for automatic parking brakes; in that case the status is OFF

Brake fluid level light alert

Indicates the brake fluid level. PRESENT: Level too low ABSENT: Level OK

Oil pressure contact

Indicates oil pressure. OPEN: Indicator light off; oil pressure OK CLOSED: Indicator light lit: inadequate or no oil pressure

1 Battery

4

5

6

7

Lighting

Parking brake ET097:

Brake fluid level light

Oil pressure

8

ET066:

ET096:

ET098:

Seat belt contact

Indicates whether or not the seat belt is fastened. ABSENT: Seat belt not fastened. PRESENT: Seat belt fastened

Passenger seat belt warning

Indicates whether or not the seat belt is fastened. The warning only applies if the detection system is installed in the vehicle. ACTIVE: Seat belt not fastened and passenger in front seat. INACTIVE: Seat belt fastened, or not fastened but no front-seat passenger.

Seat belt 9

ET099:

TDB_V04_CCONF/TDB_V08_CCONF

In the event of a fault, refer to the Interpretation of statuses section In the event of a fault, refer to the Interpretation of parameters section

In the event of a fault, refer to the Interpretation of statuses section

TdbJ841.0

83A-15

Edition 4

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding - Conformity check

83A

The values indicated in this conformity check are given for guidance purposes only. The Technical Note for the vehicle must be read. Test condition: Ignition on, engine off.

NOTES

TRIP COMPUTER

Order

Function

1

2

3

4

Parameter or Status checked or Action PR112:

Fuel

Vehicle speed

Buzzer

Display and Notes

Fuel flow

Indicates fuel flow.

Fuel consumed since trip PR117: computer reset to zero PR099: Vehicle speed

AC006:

Buzzer

Fault finding

Indicates fuel used.

In the event of a fault, refer to the Interpretation of parameters section

Indicates vehicle speed. Ignition on and engine off: the buzzer should sound.

In the event of a fault, refer to the Interpretation of commands section

TdbJ841.0

83A-16

Edition 4

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

NOTES

INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding - Conformity check

83A

The values indicated in this conformity check are given for guidance purposes only. The Technical Note for the vehicle must be read. Test condition: Ignition on, engine off.

GAUGES

Order

Function

1

Parameter or Status checked or Action

PR035:

Display and Notes

Fault finding

Fuel level

Indicates the fuel level in the tank.

In the event of a fault, apply the fault finding procedure DF007 Fuel sender circuit.

LPG level

Indicates LPG level in tank (depending on configuration). If configured for petrol, value 0.

Fuel level 2

PR015:

3 4 5

Fuel sender resistance Fuel flow

PR119:

LPG fuel gauge resistance

PR118:

CNG gauge resistance

PR112:

Fuel flow

Indicates gauge resistance based on tank contents.

In the event of a fault, refer to the Interpretation of parameters section

Indicates fuel flow.

TdbJ841.0

83A-17

Edition 4

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

NOTES

INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding - Conformity check

83A

The values indicated in this conformity check are given for guidance purposes only. The Technical Note for the vehicle must be read. Test condition: Ignition on, engine off.

DISPLAY

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Order

Function

1

Vehicle speed

PR099:

Vehicle speed

Indicates vehicle speed.

2

Engine speed

PR116:

Engine speed

Indicates engine speed.

3

Coolant temperature

PR027:

Coolant temperature

Indicates the engine coolant temperature in °C.

4

Exterior temperature

PR109:

Exterior temperature

Indicates exterior temperature in °C.

PR111:

Lighting dimmer voltage

Ignition on, dipped headlights lit. 0 V < PR111 < 8.1 V

Instrument panel warning lights

The instrument panel warning lights are activated in several stages. The vehicle speed display lights up in two stages: 188 then 200.

Lighting

Following activation of all the instrument panel warning lights, the brightness will vary between 25%, 50%, 75% then 100% of the maximum brightness for 4 seconds each time. The warning and indicator lights are not equipped with a dimmer.

5

6

AC009:

Lighting

7

AC010:

Display and Notes

Fault finding

In the event of a fault, refer to the Interpretation of parameters section

In the event of a fault, see the Dealing with command modes section

TdbJ841.0

83A-18

Edition 4

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

NOTES

INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding - Conformity check

83A

The values indicated in this conformity check are given for guidance purposes only. The Technical Note for the vehicle must be read. Test condition: Ignition on, engine off.

ODOMETER

Order

Function

1

2

Parameter or Status checked or Action PR005:

Oil change frequency

PR006:

Display and Notes

Oil change Indicates the oil change frequency in km. frequency in km (30 000 km). Oil change frequency in months.

Indicates the oil change frequency in months (24 months).

Fault finding

If the fault is still present, contact Techline.

TdbJ841.0

83A-19

Edition 4

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

83A

+12 V AFTER IGNITION ET002

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Ignition on, engine stopped.

The status must be ACTIVE. Test the multiplex network and the Protection and Switching Unit. Deal with any faults. If the status is still not correct, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Follow the instructions to confirm repair.

TDB_V04_ET002/TDB_V08_ET002

TdbJ841.0

83A-20

Edition 4

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

83A

BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LIGHT ALERT ET066

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Ignition on, engine stopped. Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir.

The status must be ABSENT. If the status is PRESENT and the level OK, disconnect the brake fluid reservoir level switch connector. The status should change to ABSENT. If so, replace the switch. If status is still not correct, check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connection: Track 2 of the level switch connector track 26 of the instrument panel Repair if necessary. If the status is still not correct, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Follow the instructions to confirm repair.

TDB_V04_ET066/TDB_V08_ET066

TdbJ841.0

83A-21

Edition 4

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

83A

OIL PRESSURE CONTACT ET096

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Switch on the ignition and start the engine (the speed should be greater than 1,600 rpm). The status should be OPEN (oil pressure warning light off).

Test the multiplex network and the Protection and Switching Unit. Deal with any faults. If the status is still not correct, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Follow the instructions to confirm repair.

TDB_V04_ET096/TDB_V08_ET096

TdbJ841.0

83A-22

Edition 4

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

83A

PARKING BRAKE ET097

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Pull and release the handbrake; make sure the status shows ENGAGED, then DISENGAGED.

Manual parking brake Pull and release the handbrake; make sure the status shows ENGAGED, then DISENGAGED. If the status is INACTIVE, make sure automatic parking brake configuration was done properly (WITHOUT). If the status is incorrect, move the harness around to see if the status changes. Look for possible damage to the harness, check the connections and condition of instrument panel and fuel sender connectors. Repair if necessary. If the status is still wrong, check the switch mounting. Repair if necessary. If the status is still faulty, use a multimeter to see if there is no continuity in the switch when it is pressed, and continuity when it is not. Replace the switch if necessary. If status is still not correct, check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connection: Switch track 10 of the computer Repair if necessary. Automatic parking brake Make sure the automatic parking brake has been configured correctly (WITH). In the event of a fault, test the multiplex network and automatic parking brake. Deal with any faults. If the status is still not correct, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Follow the instructions to confirm repair.

TDB_V04_ET097/TDB_V08_ET097

TdbJ841.0

83A-23

Edition 4

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

83A

DRIVER'S SEAT BELT CONTACT ET098

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Ignition on, engine stopped. Seat belt buckled.

The status must be PRESENT and the light on the instrument panel indicating that a seat belt is not fastened should go out. Test the multiplex network and airbag/pretensioner computer. Deal with any faults. If the status is still not correct, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Follow the instructions to confirm repair.

TDB_V04_ET098/TDB_V08_ET098

TdbJ841.0

83A-24

Edition 4

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

83A

PASSENGER SEAT BELT CONTACT WARNING ET099

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Vehicle speed above 9 mph (15 km/h) with someone in the passenger seat and their seat belt not fastened.

The buzzer should sound and the status become ACTIVE. If the buzzer fails to sound, use command mode procedure AC006 Buzzer. If the buzzer still fails to sound, test the multiplex network and airbag/pretensioner computer. Deal with any faults. If the status is still not correct, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Follow the instructions to confirm repair.

TDB_V04_ET099/TDB_V08_ET099

TdbJ841.0

83A-25

Edition 4

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

83A

RADIO ALARM ET101

NOTES

Only in Entry-level/Mid-range models. There must be no present or stored faults. With the ignition off and radio on; the radio symbol on the instrument panel should light up after approximately 20 seconds. Switch on the ignition.

The status must be ACTIVE. If the status is not ACTIVE, test the multiplex network. Deal with any faults. If everything is correct, check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance between: Grey radio connector track 5 track 1 of the instrument panel. Repair if necessary. With the radio on, check for 12 V on track 1 of the instrument panel. If the status is still not correct, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Follow the instructions to confirm repair.

TDB_V04_ET101/TDB_V08_ET101

TdbJ841.0

83A-26

Edition 4

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

83A

COOLANT TEMPERATURE PR027

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. With the engine running (to cause a change in temperature), make sure the value of this parameter, the display on the instrument panel and the reading from the injection computer match.

If not, test the multiplex network and injection computer. Deal with any faults. If the parameter is still not correct, contact Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Follow the instructions to confirm repair.

TDB_V04_PR027/TDB_V08_PR027

TdbJ841.0

83A-27

Edition 4

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

83A

VEHICLE SPEED PR099

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. During a road test, check that the vehicle speed and the value displayed by the speedometer are consistent.

If they are inconsistent, test the multiplex network and ABS/ESP computer or vehicle speed computer (VSU). Deal with any faults. If the parameter is still not correct, contact Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Follow the instructions to confirm repair.

TDB_V04_PR099/TDB_V08_PR099

TdbJ841.0

83A-28

Edition 4

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

83A

EXTERIOR TEMPERATURE PR109

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. With the ignition on, see if the ambient temperature matches the value displayed on the instrument panel.

If not, test the multiplex network and UCH. Deal with any faults. If the parameter is still not correct, contact Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Follow the instructions to confirm repair.

TDB_V04_PR109/TDB_V08_PR109

TdbJ841.0

83A-29

Edition 4

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

83A

BATTERY VOLTAGE PR110

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Measure the voltage at the battery terminals and check the consistency with the value displayed by the diagnostic tool.

If the parameter is incorrect, check the condition of the instrument panel fuse. Replace it if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance between: + battery feed track 1 of the instrument panel Earth track 2 of the instrument panel Repair if necessary. If the parameter is still not correct, contact Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Follow the instructions to confirm repair.

TDB_V04_PR110/TDB_V08_PR110

TdbJ841.0

83A-30

Edition 4

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

83A

LIGHTING DIMMER VOLTAGE PR111

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Ignition on, dipped headlights lit, 0 V < PR111 < 8.1 V. Vary the intensity of the lighting to ensure that the dimmer gradation falls into the range specified above.

While adjusting the dimmer with the side lights on, check the fluctuation in positive voltage on track 5 of the dimmer, then on track 25 of the instrument panel. If the voltage fluctuates on track 5 of the dimmer but not on track 25 of the instrument panel, proceed with Fault finding procedure A. If the voltage on track 5 of the dimmer does not fluctuate, carry out Fault finding procedure B. Fault finding procedure A Move the harness around in order to detect any change of status. Look for possible damage to the harness, check the connections and condition of instrument panel and lighting dimmer connectors. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the connection between: Dimmer track 5 track 25 of the instrument panel Repair if necessary. Fault finding procedure B If the parameter is incorrect, check that the earth is present on track 4 of the dimmer. Repair if necessary. If the parameter is still not correct, with the side lights lit, check for + 12 V on track 6 of the Protection and Switching Unit. Carry out fault finding on the Protection and Switching Unit if necessary. If the parameter is still incorrect, with the side lights lit, check for + 12 V on track 3 of the lighting dimmer. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the connection between: Dimmer track 3 track 6 of the PPH2 connector of the Protection and Switching Unit Repair if necessary. If everything is OK, replace the dimmer. If the parameter is still not correct, contact Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Follow the instructions to confirm repair.

TDB_V04_PR111/TDB_V08_PR111

TdbJ841.0

83A-31

Edition 4

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

83A

FUEL FLOW PR112

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. With the engine idling, the flow should be near or equal to 0. Note: A fuel flow signal fault causes a trip computer malfunction.

If not, test the multiplex network and injection computer. Deal with any faults. If the parameter is still not correct, contact Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Follow the instructions to confirm repair.

TDB_V04_PR112/TDB_V08_PR112

TdbJ841.0

83A-32

Edition 4

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

83A

LPG FUEL LEVEL PR115

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Ignition on, engine stopped. Check the consistency between the fuel level signal and LPG gauge resistance (PR119).

Test the multiplex network and LPG computer. Deal with any faults. If the parameter is still not correct, contact Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Follow the instructions to confirm repair.

TDB_V04_PR115/TDB_V08_PR115

TdbJ841.0

83A-33

Edition 4

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

83A

ENGINE SPEED PR116

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Turn on the engine and vary the engine speed to check the consistency between the diagnostic tool and instrument panel.

If not, test the multiplex network and injection computer. Deal with any faults. If the parameter is still not correct, contact Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Follow the instructions to confirm repair.

TDB_V04_PR116/TDB_V08_PR116

TdbJ841.0

83A-34

Edition 4

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

83A

FUEL CONSUMED SINCE TRIP COMPUTER RESET PR117

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Check the consistency between the distance travelled and amount of fuel consumed since the trip computer was reset to zero. Note: After the trip computer has been reset to zero or the instrument panel replaced, the vehicle must be driven approximately 400 metres.

If not, test the multiplex network and injection computer. Deal with any faults. If the parameter is still not correct, contact Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Follow the instructions to confirm repair.

TDB_V04_PR117/TDB_V08_PR117

TdbJ841.0

83A-35

Edition 4

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

83A

CNG GAUGE RESISTANCE PR118

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Ignition on, engine stopped.

If not, test the multiplex network and CNG computer. Deal with any faults. If the parameter is still not correct, contact Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Follow the instructions to confirm repair.

TDB_V04_PR118/TDB_V08_PR118

TdbJ841.0

83A-36

Edition 4

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

83A

LPG GAUGE RESISTANCE PR119

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Ignition on, engine stopped. Fuel sender resistance with tank full = 20 Ω (tolerances + 0 Ω / - 10 Ω ). Fuel sender resistance with tank empty = 320 Ω (tolerances ± 10 Ω )

If not, test the multiplex network and LPG computer. Deal with any faults. If the parameter is still not correct, contact Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Follow the instructions to confirm repair.

TDB_V04_PR119/TDB_V08_PR119

TdbJ841.0

83A-37

Edition 4

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

83A

BUZZER AC006

Switch on the ignition, and run the command. NOTES The command modes can only be accessed for software versions greater than 6.00, corresponding to Vdiag 08.

If there is a fault with the buzzer, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run the command to confirm repair. Follow the instructions to confirm repair. Deal with any other faults. TdbJ841.0

83A-38

Edition 4

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

83A

INSTRUMENT PANEL WARNING LIGHTS AC009

NOTES

The instrument panel warning lights are activated in several stages. The vehicle speed display lights up in two stages: 188 then 200. The side light indicator lights may not light up when the instrument panel indicator lights are activated.

If the Vdiag is lower than 08 and the side light indicator light does not work, refer to ALP02 Side light indicator light operates inconsistently.

If there is a fault activating the instrument panel display indicator lights, contact Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run the command to confirm repair. Follow the instructions to confirm repair. Deal with any other faults. TdbJ841.0

83A-39

Edition 4

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

83A

LIGHTING AC010

NOTES

Ignition on, engine off.

If there is a fault with the lighting intensity variation, contact Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run the command to confirm repair. Follow the instructions to confirm repair. Deal with any other faults. TdbJ841.0

83A-40

Edition 4

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

NOTES

INSTRUMENT PANEL Fault finding - Customer complaints

83A

Carry out a fault finding procedure on the multiplex network. Carry out fault finding on the instrument panel.

NO COMMUNICATION WITH THE INSTRUMENT PANEL. THE INSTRUMENT PANEL DOES NOT LIGHT UP.

ALP 1

TdbJ841.0

83A-41

Edition 4

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Vdiag No.: 04 - 08

Fault finding - Fault finding chart

83A

No communication with the instrument panel.

ALP 1

The instrument panel does not light up.

Test the multiplex network. Check the instrument panel connections: – + battery feed on track 1 – earth on track 2 If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

If the instrument panel has been replaced, clear the faults and configure the instrument panel.

TDB_V04_ALP01/TDB_V08_ALP01

TdbJ841.0

83A-42

Edition 4

RADIO 186A General information

86A

The tuner-amplifier has a test menu (see radio self-test procedure) to carry out repair operations or fault finding. The radio will operate for approximately 20 minutes without the ignition being switched to the accessories position. The radio beeps then switches off. Diagram:

1 2 3 4 5 6

Radio Aerial CD changer Speakers/tweeter speakers Display Steering wheel control

86A-1

RADIO General information Special features of radios in the PN range: PN0: radio with integrated display. PN1: radio with remote display. PN2: radio and cassette player with integrated display. PN3: radio and cassette player with remote display. PN4: radio and CD player with integrated display. PN5: radio and CD player with remote display. Notes: ● All radios are designed to control a CD changer. ● There is a special procedure for replacing the CD changer located in the dashboard front panel. ● According to the vehicle version, the remote displays may have a 24 or 30-track connector or two 15-track connectors. This display may be integrated into the instrument panel.

86A-2

86A

RADIO General information The radio features allow you to: – listen to the radio (four geographical zones can be programmed for FM radio) – display the name of the station using RDS which automatically switches to the best transmitter (AF function), – receive traffic news (I Traffic function), – receive news flashes and emergency bulletins (I News function). – receive public safety emergency bulletins (PTY 31).

CASSETTE FUNCTION The cassette plays automatically once cassette mode has been selected using the steering wheel control or the front panel. Only the Dolby fast-forward and rewind with search controls can be selected by specific buttons. Note: The "Mute" function accessed via the voice synthesiser or the steering wheel control stops the cassette playing.

RADIO FUNCTION The tuner has three selection modes displayed on the screen and accessible from the radio front panel: – manual mode (MANU), – preset mode (PRESET), – alphabetical mode (LIST).

86A

CD FUNCTION The CD player can play conventional discs and any audio tracks on a CD-ROM. CDs can be played in order or at random. If a CD changer is being used, random play is possible on only one of the possible 6 compact discs.

THERMAL PROTECTION If the radio temperature is too high for it to function properly, the volume is automatically reduced (without changing the volume shown in the display). Should one of the speaker tracks short circuit, the supply to the amplifier will be cut off.

86A-3

RADIO General information VOLUME CONTROL The volume can be increased according to the vehicle speed. To operate this function: select the desired volume adjustment curve by using the expert mode (press and hold the source button until a bleep is heard): SPEED 5 for maximum increase, 0 to cancel the increase.

86A-4

86A

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Radio

Page 1 of 2

List of monitored parts: Radio system ●

Administrative identification

Date

2

0

Log completed by/tel. Dealership details Mile age

VIN Repair Order ●

Engine

System configurations Renault part number:

Radio

series number Renault part number:

CD changer

series number

FAULT FINDING LOG

Renault part number:

Display ●

FAULT FINDING LOG

series number

FAULT FINDING LOG

Customer complaint 1165

Faulty control on radio front panel

1166

Sound fault on a speaker

1167

Faulty control on steering wheel

1168

Screen display fault (give details)

1169

Reception fault (FM, LW, MW)

999

The radio does not switch on

999

Fault with adjusting the volume according to speed

999

The radio does not switch off

999

The code is always requested when the radio is switched on

999

Some of the radio's buttons do not work

999

Cassette playing fault (give details)

999

CD-ROM read fault (give details)

999

The CD changer does not switch on

999

CD changer has no sound

Description of customer complaint:

Customer complaint reproduced:

YES

NO

Are there any retrofitted accessories on the vehicle?

YES

NO

If yes, which: ●

Conditions under which the customer complaint occurs 999

Permanent fault

999

Intermittent frequency (when fault occurs)

999

Low temperatures

999

Very high temperatures

999

Ambient heat

999

Engine running or warm

011

When the ignition is switched on

999

When starting

005

While driving

009

Sudden fault

Others

Comments:

FD 99 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Radio ●

Page 2 of 2

Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure used

Type of fault finding manual:

Workshop Repair Manual

Technical Note

Assisted fault finding

Fault finding manual number Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagrams Technical Note Number: Other documentation Title and/or part number: ●

Workshop fault finding

●

Conditions under which fault disappears

●

Parts returned

Parts:

Radio

CD changer

Speakers

Screen

Note: Complete and send off a fault finding log for each component that is removed and returned.

FD 99 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

RADIO Security code recovery procedure

86A

Recovering a security pre-code is carried out by removing the TUNER-AMPLIFIER and noting down the four characters that follow the letter T on the barcode. Below are two photos of barcodes displayed on the radios: Radio series number

The pre-code is found in this area. The pre-code is Q916 in this example

Pre-code

THE VIN MUST BE ENTERED IN ALL 4 SOLUTIONS 4 solutions to recover the radio code: 1 Only the VIN is available: connect to code management on Renault Net and enter the number. The code server gives the original radio code entered in the World Vehicle Database (BVM). If the code has not been entered in the World Vehicle Database or is incorrect when the code is entered in the radio, then follow the procedure below: 2 The pre-code is available: go back into code management on Renault.Net, enter the pre-code (see photos) then obtain the radio code. For radios in the NR range, the pre-code is obtained in the self-test procedure mode by pressing buttons 1, 6 and i. 3 For older vehicles which do not have a radio pre-code, enter the series number of the radio again. For example, for Philips radio, this code starts with RN. In the photo of the radio, this code is RN277F30194601. If this code is correct, the radio operates again; if it does not operate, follow the procedure below: 4 Write a help message to be sent to the assistance unit. IF A NEW CODE IS CREATED, THE VIN IS UNKNOWN; SEND A HELP MESSAGE TO RENAULT NET CODE MANAGEMENT TO UPDATE THE DATABASE.

86A-7

RADIO Protection code The radio is protected by a four digit code. This code must be entered via the control satellite or the radio keypad each time the battery is disconnected.

86A

Reminder: The radio will operate for approximately 2 minutes in scrambled mode without the code having been entered (with regular warning beeps).

Entering the code with the control on the steering wheel: Press the bottom button on the control to confirm an entry.

If the vehicle is equipped with a CD changer in the front panel, a code is exchanged between the CD changer and the radio. – If a new CD changer is fitted, the radio code is programmed when the battery or CD changer is connected. – If the radio is replaced, enter the security code of the old radio connected to the CD changer. The CD changer is programmed with the code for the new radio. – If the old radio code is lost, the changer code can be cleared using the clearing code. The clearing code is issued by the Techline, server etc.

Entry via the radio: Enter the digits using buttons 1, 2, 3 and 4, and then confirm with button 6. If the code is entered incorrectly, the radio will be locked (1 minute for the first error, 2 minutes for the second error, 4 minutes for the third error, etc. 32 minutes maximum). Some configurations must be set after the code has been entered for the first time (see the Configuration Section). These settings are stored when the battery is disconnected.

Note: If there is a configuration error, you can return to scrambled mode by pressing the 2 and 5 buttons at the same time as switching the power on. Then wait 2 minutes. Note: The CD changer is supplied uncoded. When it is installed in the vehicle, the CD changer is programmed with the radio supply code. Reminder: The radio will operate for approximately 2 minutes in scrambled mode without the code having been entered (with regular warning beeps). IMPORTANT If the vehicle is fitted with a top of the range navigation system (ITS), enter the radio code in the following way: 1. switch on the system by activating the vehicle's + after ignition feed, 2. wait 2 minutes: scrambled mode with beeps from the speakers, then code request screen appears, 3. enter the radio code using the ITS keypad: move the cursor with the central control and press to confirm, 4. switch off the ignition.

86A-8

RADIO Protection code

86A

THE DISPLAY SHOWS "CODE" OR "0000" Entering the security code. The radio beeps every 2 seconds for 2 minutes then displays CODE.

No

Does the radio show CODE then 0000?

Go back to scrambled mode. With the radio off, press the 2, 5 and ON buttons. Wait approximately 2 minutes until CODE then 0000 appear.

Yes Enter the first digit using the wheel control on the steering wheel or the front panel.

Confirm that the digit is correct by briefly pressing the lower steering wheel button or front panel button.

Use the same procedure to enter the remaining three digits.

Confirm the security code by pressing and holding the same button or button (6) on the front panel.

Does the radio show ERROR then CODE?

No

No

Yes

Does the radio show ERROR CD then CD CODE?

Yes The radio enters CONFIGURATION mode (if being used for the first time) and operates normally.

Refer to the page entitled Display displays CD CODE.

86A-9

RADIO Protection code

86A

THE DISPLAY SHOWS "CD CODE"

The radio displays ERROR CD, CD CODE, then CD-0000.

Enter the code of the old radio connected to the CD changer.

Enter the first digit using the steering wheel controls.

Confirm the digit by briefly pressing the lower button on the steering wheel controls.

Enter the three other digits using the same procedure.

Confirm the security code by pressing and holding the same button.

No

Does the CD changer code match the radio code?

Yes

Enter the CD changer resetting code obtained from the Techline. After following the procedure, the display shows CODE or 0000.

86A-10

The CD changer has registered the new radio code and operates correctly.

RADIO Replacement of components

86A

AFTER DISCONNECTING THE BATTERY OR REMOVING THE RADIO: ● ●

Enter the security code (see security code). Setting the time: For displays not equipped with time setting buttons, proceed as follows: Press and hold the satellite time setting button (left-hand button): the hour flashes and can be set with ● the +/- buttons. Briefly press the satellite time setting button (left-hand button): the minutes flash and can be set with ● the +/- buttons. Briefly press the satellite time setting button (left-hand button): exit time setting. ● For displays equipped with time setting buttons, proceed as follows: Briefly press the right-hand display button to select hours then use the left-hand button to select the ● desired hour. Press the right-hand button to confirm. Use this procedure to set the minutes.

After a component has been replaced, reconfigure and set the parameters for the radio (see Configuration Settings), enter the security code (see security code).

86A-11

RADIO Configuration - Settings

86A

CONFIGURATIONS

SETTINGS

NOTE: To select the zone in which the Tuner is to be used, press buttons 2 and 5, at the same time as the equipment is switched on. Then wait for approximately 2 minutes. Enter the four digit code then:

To enter configuration mode (Expert mode), press and hold the source button (four seconds) until you hear a bleep. This allows you to adjust the following functions:

●

●

select the tone curve appropriate for the vehicle – 0: no regulation – 1: Twingo – 2: Clio – 3: Mégane/Scénic – 4: Laguna – 5: Vel Satis - Espace select the relevant zone: – America – Japan – Asia – Arabia – Others (Europe, Africa, other)

Note: These configurations are not required when the secret code is entered after the power supply has been cut.

NR range: ● AF mode activation (automatic retuning), ● vehicle speed-dependent volume control (5 for maximum regulation, 0 to cancel regulation), ● Loudness mode activation. PN range: ● AF mode activation (automatic retuning), ● vehicle speed-dependent volume control (5 for maximum regulation, 0 to cancel regulation), ● Loudness mode activation, ● Assisted tuner mode activation, ● configuration of the number of speakers (2 or 4), ● manual or dynamic list selection. PN6 radio: ● AF mode activation (automatic retuning), ● vehicle speed-dependent volume control (5 for maximum regulation, 0 to cancel regulation), ● Loudness mode activation, ● Assisted tuner mode activation, ● configuration of the number of speakers (2 or 4), ● manual or dynamic list selection. ● activation of data storage in accordance with the Renault Card: CARD ON/OFF. To operate, the radio must be accompanied by the navigation system.

86A-12

RADIO Connections

86A

To allocate the tracks for the different functions that are connected to the radio (CD changer, steering wheel control, display, aerial), refer to the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note corresponding to the vehicle. Radio: see Wiring diagrams Technical Note, vehicle, code 261 CD changer: see Wiring diagrams Technical Note, vehicle, code 1272 Display: see Wiring diagrams Technical Note, vehicle, code 1127 For displays which are connected to the instrument panel, the code is 247 Steering wheel control: see Wiring diagrams Technical Note, vehicle, code 325 Aerial: see Wiring diagrams Technical Note, vehicle, code 886

86A-13

RADIO Self-test procedure

86A

The self-test procedure mode of the previous generation radios (PN0-6) allows certain main functions to be tested: ● by pressing buttons 2 and 4 at the same time, the speakers can be tested. They are supplied one by one; the display enables the connections and signals from each speaker to be checked, ● by pressing buttons 1 and 6 at the same time, the reception level can be tested (after frequency is displayed), – 9 or letter: good reception, – less than 3: poor reception, – if 2: total loss of stereo. The self-test procedure mode of the new generation radios (NR4/5) enables certain main functions to be tested using the combination of buttons 1, 6 and i. The messages will be displayed in the following way: ● Radio pre-code displays one letter and three digits to avoid removal of the radio, ● speaker test with two bleeps (bass - treble) from the speakers, with the tested speakers shown on the display (front left-hand H01, front right-hand H02, rear right-hand H03, rear left-hand H04), ● displays the frequencies and levels of the radio sensors, ● software version displayed, displays fault finding for the connected aerial if the aerial is supplied by a coaxial cable; in this case, the display shows H15 with X = 0, 1 or 2 depending on the aerial status (0: open circuit, 1: short circuit to earth, 2: power consumption), ● audio test loudness OFF (H08), cuts any loudness for an audio test. Note: Also displays source use time and total time in 10 minute slots (Tuner (H09)/CD (H10)/cassette (H11)/CD changer (H12)/auxiliary (13)/MP (H14)/Total (H15)).

86A-14

RADIO Radio fault finding: Customer complaints

86A

THE RADIO BEEPS APPROXIMATELY EVERY 2 SECONDS

ALP 1

THE RADIO DOES NOT WORK (NO SOUND) WHEN THE RADIO ON BUTTON IS PRESSED

ALP 2

THE RADIO DOES NOT SWITCH ON AUTOMATICALLY WHEN "+ ACCESSORIES FEED" IS SWITCHED ON OR SWITCHES OFF AFTER 20 MINUTES

ALP 3

THE RADIO IS SWITCHED ON, BUT THE DISPLAY AND SATELLITE CONTROLS DO NOT WORK

ALP 4

THE SATELLITE CONTROLS DO NOT WORK

ALP 5

RADIO RECEPTION FAULTS

ALP 6

THE VOLUME DOES NOT INCREASE WITH THE VEHICLE SPEED

ALP 7

LIGHTING DOES NOT CHANGE WHEN THE VEHICLE LIGHTS ARE SWITCHED ON

ALP 8

NO SOUND CUT-OUT DURING CARMINAT OR HANDS-FREE KIT MESSAGES

ALP 9

THE INFRARED REMOTE CONTROL DOES NOT WORK

86A-15

ALP 10

RADIO Fault finding chart

ALP 1

86A

The radio beeps approximately every 2 seconds

The radio beeps every 2 seconds wait for 2 minutes.

Enter the radio-specific security code

No Is the code correct?

Yes The radio enters Configuration mode (if being used for the first time) and operates normally.

See security code, the radio displays CODE then 0000.

The radio displays CODE then 0000. Check the code and try again.

No

Has the code been entered correctly?

Yes

86A-16

RADIO Fault finding chart

ALP 2

86A

The radio does not operate when the ON button is pressed

Press the radio's ON button.

Check the radio fuse (see Wiring diagrams Technical Note, vehicle, code 260).

No

Is the display working (backlighting)?

Yes No Replace the fuse

Is the fuse sound?

Yes Does the radio switch on?

Check the continuity of connections BCP3 and MA0, (see Wiring diagrams Technical Note, vehicle, code 261)

Yes Fault solved No

Is the wiring harness sound?

Yes Replace the wiring or repair it if the repair procedure exists.

Press the radio's ON button.

Is the volume 0 or mute?

No

Yes Disconnect the mute control wire from the hands-free kit (connection 107 D) (see Wiring diagrams Technical Note, vehicle, code 692)

86A-17

Replace the radio

Check and test whether one of the speaker tracks has short circuited or earthed from the disconnected radio connector using a multimeter, connections 34A to 34H (see Wiring DiagramsTechnical Note, vehicle, code 189 to 192 and 365 to 366)

RADIO Fault finding chart

86A

ALP 2 CONTINUED

Is there a short circuit on one of the lines?

No

Replace the radio.

Yes Check the speaker concerned using a multimeter.

Is the speaker short circuited?

Yes Replace the faulty speaker.

No

Using a multimeter, check the continuity and insulation of the wiring. No Test OK? Yes Replace the radio

86A-18

Replace the wiring or repair it if the procedure exists

RADIO Fault finding chart

86A

The radio does not switch on automatically or switches off after 20 minutes

ALP 3

Check that the system is operating correctly. – Connect + accessories feed, – Switch on the radio, – Cut the + accessories feed; the radio should switch off – Reconnect the + accessories feed; the radio should switch on.

Has the fault disappeared?

Yes

End No Check the + accessories feed using a multimeter.

Is there + 12 V on connection SP2?

No

Check supply fuse 1G (15A) (code 260).

Yes Replace the radio. No

Are the fuses sound?

Yes Replace the fuse.

Replace the radio.

86A-19

RADIO Fault finding chart

86A

EXCEPT ESPACE IV, SCENIC II

ALP 4

The radio is switched on, but the display and control satellite do not operate

The radio operates but the display does not light up.

Check thefunctions of thedisplay that are not connected to the radio by switching on the + sid e lights feed (screen backlighting and exterior temperature).

Is there anything displayed on the screen?

No

Disconnect the aerial amplifier

No

Yes Is there anything displayed onthescreen?

Check the continuity and insulation of the wiring between the radio and display using a multimeter (see Wiring diagrams Technical Note, vehicle, code 261).

Check the display supply (the fault is not associated with the radio)

Yes Check the continuity and insulation of the 34AM connection No Are the tests ok?

Are the tests ok?

No

Replace the wiring or repair it if the procedure exists.

Yes Replace the aerial amplifier.

Yes Disconnect then reconnect the display. If the fault is still present, replace the display.

86A-20

RADIO Fault finding chart

86A

ESPACE IV, SCENIC II

ALP 4

The radio is switched on, but the display and control satellite do not operate

The radio operates but the display does not light up.

Check the functions of the display that are not connected to the radio by switching on the + side lights feed (screen backlighting and exterior temperature).

Is there anythin g displayed on the screen?

No

Disconnect the aerial amplifier

No

Yes Is thereanything displayedonthe screen?

Check the continuity and insulation of the wiring between the radio and instrument panel using a multimeter (see Wiring diagrams Technical Note, vehicle, code 261).

Check the instrument panel supply (the fault is not associated with the radio) See Wiring diagrams Technical Note, Vehicle, Code 227.

Yes Check the continuity and insulation of the 34AM connection

No

Are the tests ok?

No

Replace the wiring or repair it if the procedure exists.

Are the tests ok?

Yes Replace the aerial amplifier.

Yes Disconnect and reconnect the connector connected to the display. If the fault is still present, replace the instrument panel.

86A-21

RADIO Fault finding chart

ALP 5

86A

The radio control satellite does not operate

The radio operates but the radio control satellite does not.

Does the remote display operate?

No See ALP 4

Yes Check that the radio control satellite is correctly connected to the display or instrument panel (see Wiring diagrams Technical Note, vehicle, code 1519). No Is the radio control satellite connected correctly?

Reconnect theradio control satelliteand check the system operates correctly.

Yes Check the resistance of the radio control satellite using a multimeter.

Are the resistances correct?

No

Using a multimeter, check the continuity and insulation of the wiring.

Replace the satellite.

No Test OK?

Yes Check the continuity and insulation of the connections between the radio and the display.

Test OK?

No

Yes Replace the display

86A-22

Replace the wiring between the radio and the display or repair it if the procedure exists.

RADIO Fault finding chart

ALP 6

86A

Radio reception faults

Poor radio reception.

Does the radio scan without tuning in FM?

Are there occasional gaps (loss of sound < 1 second) in FM reception?

Does the radio crackle?

No The vehicle is in an area of poor reception.

Yes

Yes

Fault external to the radio (transmitter synchronisation).

The vehicle is in an area of poor reception. The radio takes longer to find an adequate transmitter.

Disable AF in Expert mode.

Yes

Switch off the Heated rear screen function.

No Is the level higher?

Yes The fault is associated with micro-breaks on the rear screen de-icing circuit.

86A-23

With the vehicle outside and in an area with good reception, test the reception level in the radio's fault finding menu.

RADIO Fault finding chart

86A

ALP 6 CONTINUED 1

Is the reception level good?

No

Without moving the vehicle, compare the level with that of a Long Wave station.

Yes

No

Check whether the poor reception is localised or permanent and on all stations.

Is the level higher?

Yes Is the fault permanent?

No

The vehicle is in an area of poor FM reception.

No

Replace the wiring or repair it if the procedure exists.

Yes Check the continuity and insulation of the wiring between the radio and the aerial amplifier. Carry out the tests on the aerial.

Test OK?

Yes Replace the radio

86A-24

Check the vehicle aerial.

RADIO Fault finding chart

ALP 6 CONTINUED 2

Hold the aerial wire near to the radio.

No

Replace the aerial amplifier.

Is the level higher?

Yes Check the continuity and insulation of the wiring between the radio and the aerial.

No Test OK?

Replace the wiring or repair it if the repair procedure exists.

Yes Replace the radio.

86A-25

86A

RADIO Fault finding chart

ALP 7

86A

The volume does not increase with the vehicle speed

The SDVC (speed-dependent volume control) function does not work. Check the audio equipment configuration (Expert mode). Set the SPEED curve to 5 and run a test when driving at more than 48mph (80 km/h).

Does the volume change?

No

Yes Check the signal on connection 47F (see Wiring diagrams Technical Note, vehicle, code 261) using a multimeter. The voltage should vary depending on vehicle speed.

The fault has been rectified. Reset the control to: CURVE 2.

Yes No Does the signal increase?

Yes The fault is not associated with the audio equipment. See MR Fault finding corresponding to vehicle, 38C, ABS, Conformity check.

86A-26

Replace the radio with the approval of your Techline.

RADIO Fault finding chart

ALP 8

86A

Lighting does not change when the vehicle lights are switched on

Lighting does not change when the vehicle lights are switched on. Check for + 12 V on connection LPG (only lights are on).

Is there + 12 V feed?

No

Yes Replace the radio. The fault is not associated with the audio equipment. Check the continuity and insulation of connection LPG using a multimeter (See Wiring diagrams Technical Note, vehicle, code 261). No Test OK?

Yes

86A-27

Replace the wiring or repair it if the procedure exists

RADIO Fault finding chart

86A

No sound muting during Carminat, voice synthesiser or hands-free kit messages

ALP 9

No muting of sound during messages. Check for earth on connection 107D (See Technical Note Wiring Diagrams, vehicle, code 261) only during messages.

Is there an earth?

No

Yes Replace the radio.

The fault is not associated with the radio. Check the continuity and insulation of connection 107D using a multimeter. No Test OK?

Yes

86A-28

Replace the wiring or repair it if the procedure exists

RADIO Fault finding chart

ALP 10

86A

The infrared remote control does not operate (PN6)

The infrared remote control does not work. Check the continuity and insulation of connections 34GH and 34GK (between the radio and instrument panel, see Technical Note Wiring Diagrams, vehicle, code 261).

Are the connections sound?

No

Replace the wiring or repair it if the procedure exists.

Yes Connect a multimeter to connection 34GH and check that a voltage change occurs when pressing the remote control.

No Test OK?

Check that the battery is sound. No

Yes

Replace the battery.

Test OK?

Replace the radio.

Yes Replace the remote control. Connect a multimeter to connection 34GH and check for 0V on the connection when pressing the remote control. No Test OK?

Yes Replace the remote control.

86A-29

Replace the instrument panel.

RADIO Recovering a jammed CD RADIO First solution If the electric ejector motor is operational, eject the CD using a 4.5 V battery to supply the electric motor (B) (attach the + wire to contact (1) and the - wire to contact (2) when ejecting the CD).

86A-30

86A

RADIO Recovering a jammed CD

86A

RADIO Second solution

Before refitting the radio:

If the electric ejector motor is not operational, remove the screw (C) and release the electric motor (B).

●

refit the electric motor and attach it using the bolt (second solution only),

●

refit the casing.

Turn toothed wheel (D) by hand in a clockwise direction until the CD is ejected.

86A-31

RADIO Recovering a jammed CD

86A

CHANGER IN THE DASHBOARD REMOVAL

Turn the CD changer upside down. Remove the cover.

Remove the two screws (A).

Remove the mechanism from its housing. Turn the CD changer upside down. Remove the 6 screws (B).

86A-32

RADIO Recovering a jammed CD

86A

CHANGER IN THE DASHBOARD Remove the two bolts (C).

Remove the eight screws (E),

Remove the CD guide arm. Disconnect connector (D).

Remove both clips from the two connectors.

86A-33

RADIO Recovering a jammed CD

86A

CHANGER IN THE DASHBOARD Remove both ribbon cables.

Turn the guides and push the mechanism as shown in the diagram in order to raise or lower the CDs.

Remove the upper section of mechanism. The CDs can now be accessed. NOTE Never refit the changer mechanism once it has been removed.

86A-34

RADIO Recovering a jammed CD

86A

CHANGER IN THE BOOT Remove: – the three screws (1) located underneath the unit,

Remove the electronic module from the mounting and refit it to the side.

– the two springs (2) after bringing them to the upper position,

First solution If the electric motors are operating: 1 Reinsert the CD and its drawer into the changer (4) using a 4.5 V battery to supply the electric motor (3), (attach the + wire to contact (1) and the - wire to contact (2)). 2 Eject the changer by moving lever (4).

– the four dampers (3) (clipped on).

86A-35

RADIO Recovering a jammed CD

86A

CHANGER IN THE BOOT Second solution

2 Eject the CD changer by moving the lever (8).

If the electric motors are not operational: 1 To reinsert the CD and its drawer into changer (5), remove the pinion mounting (6) by its screw,

Before replacing the radio: ●

turn the toothed wheel (7) by hand in an anticlockwise direction until the drawer is turned completely upside down in the changer (5).

● ●

86A-36

refit the module in its unit, replace the four dampers and the two springs, attach the module to the unit using the three bolts, re-close the changer, attach its cover and refit the rear section.

186C ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

1.

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Introduction

86C

SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT

This document presents the fault finding procedure applicable to all computers with the following specifications: Vehicle: Scenic II ph2

Name of computer: ITS

Function concerned: Navigation, integrated hands-free telephone, receiver, CD player

Program No.: 0020

2.

Vdiag No.: 04

PREREQUISITES FOR FAULT FINDING

Documentation type Fault finding procedures (this manual): – Assisted fault finding (integrated into the diagnostic tool), Dialogys. Wiring Diagrams: – Visu-Schéma (CD-ROM), paper version. Type of diagnostic tools – CLIP + CAN sensor Special tooling required Special tooling required Multimeter Elé. 1681 3.

Universal bornier

RECAP

Procedure To run fault finding on the vehicle's computers, switch on the ignition in fault finding mode (forced + after ignition feed). Proceed as follows: – put the vehicle card in the card reader, – press and hold start button (longer than 5 seconds) with start-up conditions not fulfilled, – connect the diagnostic tool and perform the required operations. Note: The left-hand and right-hand xenon bulb computers are supplied when the dipped headlights are lit. Fault finding can only be run after the ignition is switched on in fault finding mode (forced + after ignition feed) and the dipped headlights are lit. To cut off the + after ignition feed, proceed as follows: – disconnect the diagnostic tool, – press the Start button twice briefly (less than 3 seconds), – check that the computer warning lights on the instrument panel have gone out to confirm that the + after ignition feed has been cut off.

TDB_V04_PRELI

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-1

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Introduction

86C

Faults Faults are declared as either present or stored (depending on whether they appeared in a certain context and have disappeared since, or whether they remain present but have not been diagnosed within the current context). The present or stored status of faults should be taken into consideration when the diagnostic tool is switched on after the + after ignition feed (without any system components being active). For a present fault, apply the procedure described in the Interpretation of faults section. For a stored fault, note the faults displayed and apply the instructions in the Notes section. If the fault is confirmed when the instructions in the Notes section are applied, the fault is present. Deal with the fault If the fault is not confirmed, check: – the electrical lines which correspond to the fault, – the connectors on these lines (corrosion, bent pins, etc.), – the resistance of the component detected as faulty, – the condition of the wires (melted or split insulation, wear).

Conformity check The aim of the conformity check is to check data that does not produce a fault on the diagnostic tool because the data is inconsistent. Therefore, this stage is used to: – carry out fault finding on faults that do not have a fault display, and which may correspond to a customer complaint. – check that the system is operating correctly and that there is no risk of a fault recurring after repairs. This section gives the fault finding procedures for statuses and parameters and the conditions for checking them. If a status is not behaving normally or a parameter is outside the permitted tolerance values, consult the corresponding fault finding page.

Customer complaints - Fault finding chart If the test with the diagnostic tool is OK but the customer complaint is still present, the fault should be processed by customer complaints. A synopsis of the general procedure to follow is provided on the following page in the form of a flow chart

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-2

Edition 1

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Introduction

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

4.

86C

FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Perform a pre-diagnostic on the system

Print the system fault finding log (available on CLIP and in the Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note)

Connect CLIP

Dialogue with computer?

no Refer to ALP No. 1

yes Read faults

no

Faults present

Conformity check

yes The cause is still present

Deal with present faults

no

Fault solved

yes

Deal with stored faults

Use fault finding charts (ALPs) The cause is still present

no

Fault solved The cause is still present

yes

no

Fault solved

yes Contact the Techline with the completed fault finding log

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-3

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

4.

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Introduction

86C

FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE (continued)

Wiring check Fault finding problems Disconnecting the connectors and/or manipulating the wiring harness may temporarily remove the cause of a fault. Electrical measurements of voltage, resistance and insulation are generally correct, especially if the fault is not present when the analysis is made (stored fault). Visual inspection Look for damage under the bonnet and in the passenger compartment. Carefully check the fuses, insulators and wiring harness routing. Look for signs of oxidation. Tactile inspection While manipulating the wiring harness, use the diagnostic tool to note any change in fault status from stored to present. Make sure that the connectors are properly locked. Apply light pressure to the connectors. Twist the wiring harness. If there is a change in status, try to locate the source of the fault. Inspection of each component Disconnect the connectors and check the appearance of the clips and tabs, as well as the crimping (no crimping on the insulating section). Make sure that the clips and tabs are properly locked in the sockets. Check that no clips or tabs have been dislodged during connection. Check the clip contact pressure using an appropriate model of tab. Resistance check Check the continuity of entire lines, then section by section. Look for a short circuit to earth, to + 12 V or to another wire. If a fault is detected, repair or replace the wiring harness.

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-4

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

5.

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Introduction

86C

FAULT FINDING LOG

IMPORTANT!

IMPORTANT Any fault on a complex system requires thorough fault finding with the appropriate tools. The FAULT FINDING LOG, which should be completed during the procedure, enables you to keep track of the procedure which is carried out. It is an essential document when consulting the manufacturer.

IT IS THEREFORE MANDATORY TO FILL OUT A FAULT FINDING LOG EACH TIME FAULT FINDING IS CARRIED OUT. You will always be asked for this log: ● when requesting technical assistance from Techline, ● for approval requests when replacing parts for which approval is mandatory, ● to be attached to monitored parts for which reimbursement is requested. The log is needed for warranty reimbursement, and enables better analysis of the parts removed.

6.

SAFETY ADVICE

Safety rules must be observed during any work on a component to prevent any damage or injury: – make sure that the battery is properly charged to avoid damaging the computers with a low load, – use the appropriate tools.

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-5

Edition 1

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Carminat Advanced Navigation

Page 1 of 2

List of monitored parts: navigation system Administrative identification

● Date

2

0

Log completed by/tel. Dealership details VIN

Mileage

Repair Order ●

Engine

Navigation system configuration Renault part number

Navigation computer

series number

CCU: Central Communication Unit

Renault part number series number

Fault finding log

Renault part number

Cartographic CD-ROM

series number

Languages CD-ROM

Fault finding log

Version Renault part number

Radio ●

Fault finding log

series number

Fault finding log

Customer complaint 1162

Problem reading the cartographic CD-ROM

1161

Problem opening or closing the screen

1158

Guidance voice message fault

1170

Navigation guidance fault

1160

Control fault on the CCU front panel or independent console

1171

Satellite reception fault (GPS)

999

Intermittent black screen

999

Permanent black screen

999

Location fault

Description of customer complaint:

Customer complaint reproduced:

YES

NO

Are there any retrofitted accessories on the vehicle?

YES

NO

If yes, which: ●

Conditions under which the customer complaint occurs 999

Permanent fault

999

Intermittent frequency (occurrence must be stated)

999

Low temperatures

999

Very high temperatures

999

Ambient heat

999

Engine running or warm

999

When starting

999

Covered area (garage, etc.)

999

Green TMC Symbol

999

Red TMC Symbol

999

Green GPS Symbol

999

Red GPS Symbol

999

During impacts/vibrations

999

Green CD Symbol

999

Red CD Symbol

Others

Comments:

FD98 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Carminat Advanced Navigation ●

Page 2 of 2

Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure used

Type of diagnostic manual:

Workshop Repair Manual

Technical Note

Assisted fault finding

Fault finding manual number

Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note Number:

Other documentation Title and/or part number: ●

Workshop fault finding

GPS reception status:

COM.ERROR

Search Sat

≥ 3 sat

To check the GPS reception status, follow the procedure below: Position the vehicle in an open area Wait for 15 minutes with the ignition on → GPS status In the navigation system, go to Fault finding: Navigation → Configuration → System information → Fault finding→

Status red LED computer front panel:

Permanently off

Permanently flashing

Permanently lit

Carminat computer (CD-ROM reader):

Impossible to insert CD

Impossible to eject CD

Refuses to read CD

Cartographic map CD scratched or dirty:

YES

NO

Vehicle speed signal fault finding, change of value when driving? YES NO To run this fault finding procedure on the navigation system, from the following fault finding menu: Navigation → Configuration → System information → Fault finding → I/O ●

Conditions under which fault disappears Vehicle restart after a cut-off of > 1 min: OUT NO after a cut-off of < 1 min: OUT NO By action on: ....................................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................................... The fault disappears by itself (state time): ................................................................................................................................................. Other (give as much detail as possible): .................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................

●

Parts returned

Parts:

Navigation computer

CCU

Keypad

Screen

Note: Complete and submit a fault finding log for each component removed and returned.

FD98 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - List and location of components

86C

1 - List and location of components Number

Description

1

Navigation computer

2

CD multi-changer

3

GPS aerial*

4

Display

6

Steering column control

7

Speakers

8

Tweeter speakers

9

Navigation central control

10

Tuner-amplifier

11

Microphone

* Satellite guidance

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-8

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Operating diagram

2 - Operating diagram

Microphone

GPS aerial* (+ telephone)

Display

Navigation computer

86C Vehicle multiplex network

Speakers

Receiver/radio

Navigation central control

CD multi-changer

Diagnostic socket

Steering column control

AM/FM aerial amplifier

- Vehicle multiplex network - Multimedia multiplex network - Bus UART - Wire connections

* Satellite guidance

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-9

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Features

86C

3 - Features The CARMINAT NAVIGATION and COMMUNICATION system is involved in the following functions: – Receiver. – CD multi-changer. – Satellite guidance navigation. – Hands-free telephone integrated control. – Display. – Clock.

A - Receiver This function is used for listening to AM and FM radio. The receiver automatically selects the best frequency for a station using the AF function. It receives traffic information via the Traffic Message Channel (TMC) to make best use of the Carminat Navigation and Communication system.

B - CD multi-changer The CD multi-changer located on the dashboard can hold up to 6 CDs. This can play audio CDs, CD-Rs which have been copied by the customer and CDs on which MP3 files are stored. The number of CDs in the changer can be viewed via PR005 Number of CDs in the changer.

C - Navigation This function guides the driver by displaying maps and issuing voice messages. Addresses for guidance can be entered via the central control or as voice commands.

D - Hands-free telephone integrated control This function enables the driver to use a mobile phone hands-free using the microphone located next to the driver's sun visor and the vehicle speakers. The Carminat Navigation and Communication system lets you use the phonebook, receive and make calls and receive SMS text messages. The phone can be connected to the vehicle with Bluetooth (wireless).

E - Display The display is used to display information such as navigation maps, radio, CD title, time, temperature and information from the mobile phone

F - Clock This function displays the time on the video display.

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-10

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Role of components

86C

4 - Role of main components ●

Receiver: the receiver transmits audio signals via the speakers inside the vehicle.

●

Display: displays different multimedia information such as the station tuned in, the time, or information related to CDs or satellite navigation.

●

Steering column switch: different multimedia functions can be accessed via controls on the steering wheel.

●

Speakers and tweeter speakers: produce sound from the multimedia system inside the vehicle.

●

CD multi-changer: loads CDs and sends audio signals to the receiver.

●

AM/FM aerial: picks up waves from various transmitters.

●

GPS aerial: receives various signals emitted by satellites.

●

Navigation central control: different multimedia functions can be intuitively accessed via a multimedia keypad.

●

Microphone: enables a phone to be used in hands-free mode via a Bluetooth connection.

●

Navigation computer: manages the various multimedia system functions according to the requests of the user.

●

DVD cartographic map: loads maps onto the navigation computer.

●

AM/FM aerial amplifier: improves the reception of AM/FM signals.

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-11

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Replacement of components

86C

To remove and refit this computer (see MR 370 Mechanical, 83C, On-board telematics system, Navigation computer: Removal - Refitting).

Procedures to be carried out before replacing the navigation computer: 1. Before replacing the computer (with the agreement of Techline), read the faults and run a conformity check to ensure that it is definitely faulty. 2. Eject the DVD. 3. Before removing the computer, clear the customer's data (telephone numbers, address book, etc.) using the RZ003 Parameters and customer data command and the diagnostic tool. 4. Remove the computer with ignition off. The navigation computers from the Parts Department are supplied unconfigured and in factory mode (receiver set to 162 kHz AM, and beeps for 2 minutes).

Procedures to be carried out after replacing the navigation computer: 1. Enter the unlocking code for the Carminat Navigation and Communication system. – How to obtain the unlocking code for the Carminat Navigation and Communication system ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

switch on + after ignition feed, switch on the CARMINAT NAVIGATION and COMMUNICATION system, connect the Clip diagnostic tool, note the navigation programming number given in the identification menu, contact Techline with this navigation programming number to obtain the CARMINAT NAVIGATION and COMMUNICATION system unlocking code, the unlocking code is requested 2 mins after the CARMINAT NAVIGATION and COMMUNICATION system comes on, enter this code using the navigation central control.

Note: If the code is incorrect, you must wait for between 2 and 32 minutes before entering a new code. Delete the incorrect code before entering the new one.

2. Configure the computer (see Configuration and programming). – Enter the vehicle type via the CF001 Vehicle type command. – For vehicles registered in the Netherlands only, complete the VP004 Netherlands Legislation configuration. 3. Enter the VIN code (see Dealing with commands). – Use command VP002 Write VIN to enter the VIN.

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-12

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Configurations and programming

86C

Configurations available and operating mode – Vehicle type (CF001): This configuration enables the system to identify the vehicle in which it is installed. – NETHERLANDS LEGISLATION (VP004): IMPORTANT Running command NETHERLANDS LEGISLATION initialises the computer according to this country's legislation. This configuration is IRREVERSIBLE: it is not possible to clear this selection.

List of individual configurations available on the diagnostic tool with the associated configuration reading

Configuration

Configuration reading

CF001

LC001

Vehicle type

Scenic II

VP004

LC002

Country type

Except Netherlands Netherlands

Name of configuration

Choice of configuration

Procedure to follow to modify the Vehicle Type configuration. ● Establish dialogue with the computer. ● Select the Repair mode menu. ● Select the Write configuration menu. ● Select the line corresponding to the configuration to be modified. ● Select the line in the drop-down menu that corresponds to the vehicle. ● Click on Confirm. ● Exit fault finding mode (communication cut-off with the computer without the tool being switched off), switch off the ignition for 5 seconds then switch on the ignition again. ● Establish dialogue with the computer. ● In the Read configuration menu, check that the configuration has been completed.

Programming Procedure to follow to modify the Country Type configuration (this programming only affects the Netherlands and is irreversible). ● Establish dialogue with the computer. ● Select the Repair mode menu. ● Select the Programming menu. ● Select the line corresponding to the configuration to be modified. ● Select the line in the drop-down menu that corresponds to the country. ● Exit fault finding mode (communication cut-off with the computer without the tool being switched off), switch off the ignition for 5 seconds then switch on the ignition again. ● Establish dialogue with the computer. ● In the Read configuration menu, check that the configuration has been completed.

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-13

Edition 1

MULTIMEDIA

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

Fault finding - Fault summary table

86C

Summary of faults that can be diagnosed by the navigation computer, with corresponding technical center codes.

Tool fault

Associated DTC

DF001

D010

Computer

DF002

D011

Computer

DF003

9A01

Computer

DF004

9A02

Computer

DF005

9A03

Computer

DF006

9A04

Computer

DF007

9A07

Computer

DF008

9A08

Computer

DF009

9A10

Computer

DF010

9A0D

Computer

DF021

C300

Computer configuration

DF022

C186

No radio multiplex signal

DF023

9A06

No display multiplex signal

DF025

C163

No central control multiplex signal

DF027

C189

No audio CD changer signals

DF029

9A0C

Navigation DVD reader

DF030

9A00

GPS aerial circuit*

Diagnostic tool title

* Satellite guidance

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-14

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

DF001 DF002 DF003 DF004 DF005 DF006 DF007 DF008 DF009 DF010 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

86C

COMPUTER 1.DEF: Internal electronic fault

Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note, Scenic II.

STORED FAULT Clear the fault, switch off the ignition and disconnect the 20A computer supply fuse. – Refit the fuse and switch the ignition back on. – Turn on the navigation system. If the fault reappears as stored, contact Techline. If the fault does not reappear: operate the navigation system, including the CD multi-changer, the tuner-amplifier and the hands-free telephone integrated control (if present on the vehicle) to check that the system is operating correctly. Check the conformity of the + 12 V on the BCP3 connection of the navigation computer 40-track connector (component code 662). Check that the earth on the MX connection of the 40-track connector of component 662 is perfect. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring. FAULT PRESENT

If the fault is present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

If the computer was replaced (at the request of the Techline), reconfigure the computer (see Configurations and programming). Deal with any other faults.

ITS_V04_DF001/ITS_V04_DF002/ITS_V04_DF003/ITS_V04_DF004/ITS_V04_DF005/ ITS_V04_DF006/ITS_V04_DF007/ITS_V04_DF008/ITS_V04_DF009/ITS_V04_DF010

86C-15

ITSJ84ph2V1.0 Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

86C

COMPUTER CONFIGURATION DF021 PRESENT

NOTES

1.DEF: Blank or incomplete configuration

None

Configure the system (see Configuration and programming). After configuration, switch off the ignition for 5 seconds then switch it back on again. Check that the configurations have been correctly registered by reading configurations LC001 Vehicle Type and LC002 Country type. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults using command RZ001 Fault memory. Deal with any other faults.

ITS_V04_DF021P

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-16

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

DF022 PRESENT OR STORED

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

86C

NO RADIO MULTIPLEX SIGNAL

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Apply this fault finding procedure if the fault reappears as present or stored after the fault has been cleared, the ignition switched off and back on again and the receiver started with several actions. NOTES

Order of priority in the event of more than one fault: If faults DF022 No radio multiplex signal and DF027 No audio CD changer signals are present at the same time, check the multimedia multiplex network (see 88B, Multiplexing). Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note, Scenic II.

Check the condition and the connection of the receiver 32-track connector (component code 261), of the navigation central control connector (component code 1657) and of the navigation computer 32-track connector (component code 662) (broken, oxidised, bent tabs). Manipulate the wiring harness at the connectors to produce a change in fault status (present → stored). If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connectors; otherwise, replace the wiring. With ignition on, check for + 12 V on connection BCP3 of the 8-track connector on component 261. Check that the earth on the MT connection of the 8-track connector on component 261 is perfect. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code 107W, ● connection code 107X, ● connection code 34HU, between components 1657 and 261. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults using command RZ001 Fault memory. Deal with any other faults.

ITS_V04_DF022

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-17

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

86C

DF022 CONTINUED

Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code 34DZ, ● connection code 34GA, between components 1657 and 662. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults using command RZ001 Fault memory. Deal with any other faults. ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-18

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

DF023 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

86C

NO DISPLAY MULTIPLEX SIGNAL 1.DEF: No communication with display 2.DEF: Display malfunction

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Apply this fault finding procedure if the fault reappears as present or stored after it has been cleared, the ignition turned off and on again and the navigation system started. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note, Scenic II.

1.DEF

NOTES

None

Check the condition and connection of the display connector (component code 1127) and of the navigation computer 32-track connector (component code 662) (broken, oxidised, bent tabs). Manipulate the wiring harness at the connectors to produce a change in fault status (present → stored). If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connectors; otherwise, replace the wiring. With ignition on, check for + 12 V on the BCP3 connection of the component 1127 connector. Check that the earth on the MAN connection of component 1127 is perfect. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, replace component 1127.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults using command RZ001 Fault memory. Deal with any other faults.

ITS_V04_DF023

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-19

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

86C

DF023 CONTINUED

2.DEF

NOTES

None

Check the condition and connection of the display connector (component code 1127) and of the navigation computer 32-track connector (component code 662) (broken, oxidised, bent tabs). Manipulate the wiring harness at the connectors to produce a change in fault status (present → stored). If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connectors; otherwise, replace the wiring. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code TB30, ● connection code TB31, ● connection code 34HA, ● connection code 34GZ, ● connection code 34HU, between components 662 and 1127. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults using command RZ001 Fault memory. Deal with any other faults. ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-20

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

DF025 PRESENT OR STORED

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

86C

NO CENTRAL CONTROL MULTIPLEX SIGNAL 1.DEF: No communication with the central control

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Apply this fault finding procedure if the fault reappears as present or stored after the fault has been cleared, the ignition switched off and back on again and the navigation system started after using the central control several times. NOTES

If faults DF022 No radio multiplex signal, DF025 No central control multiplex signal and DF027 No audio CD changer signals are present at the same time, check the multimedia network (see 88B, Multiplexing). Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note, Scenic II.

Check the condition and connection of the navigation central control connector (component code 1657) and of the navigation computer 32-track connector (component code 662) (broken, oxidised, bent tabs). Manipulate the wiring harness at the connectors to produce a change in fault status (present → stored). If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connectors; otherwise, replace the wiring. With ignition on, check for + 12 V on the BCP3 connection of component 1657. Check that the earth on the MX connection on the component 1657 connector is perfect. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code 34DZ, ● connection code 34GA, ● connection code 34HU, between components 1657 and 662. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults using command RZ001 Fault memory. Deal with any other faults.

ITS_V04_DF025

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-21

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

DF027 PRESENT OR STORED

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

86C

NO AUDIO CD CHANGER SIGNALS 1.DEF: No communication with the CD changer keypad

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Apply this fault finding procedure if the fault reappears as present or stored after the fault has been cleared, the ignition switched off and back on again and the audio system started after using the CD multi-changer several times. NOTES Order of priority in the event of more than one fault: Deal with fault DF022 No radio multiplex signal first. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note, Scenic II.

Check the condition of the 15A fuse (component code 260) and the 7.5A fuse (component code 1337). Check the condition and connection of the CD changer (component code 1272) and of the receiver C2 (green) connector (component code 261) (broken, oxidised, bent tabs). If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connectors; otherwise, replace the wiring. With ignition on, check for + 12 V on connections SP2, AP43 and BCP3 of the component 1272 connector. Check that the earth on the MAN connection on the component 1272 connector is perfect. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code 34HT, ● connection code 34HR, ● connection code TB29, ● connection code 34HS, between components 1272 and 261. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults using command RZ001 Fault memory. Deal with any other faults.

ITS_V04_DF027

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-22

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

DF029 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

86C

READING NAVIGATION DVD 1.DEF: Disc cannot be read

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Apply this fault finding procedure if the fault reappears as present or stored after the fault has been cleared, the ignition switched off and back on again and the navigation system started with a navigation DVD in good condition.

Check that the DVD is inserted the right way up. Check that the DVD in the navigation computer is not an audio CD or other type but a navigation DVD designed for this navigation system. Wipe the DVD from the centre out with a soft, clean cloth. Replace the navigation DVD if it is scratched. If the fault is still present after the DVD has been changed, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults using command RZ001 Fault memory. Deal with any other faults.

ITS_V04_DF029

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-23

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

DF030 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

86C

GPS AERIAL CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Apply this fault finding procedure if the fault reappears as present or stored after it has been cleared and the ignition has been switched off and on again. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note, Scenic II.

Check the condition and connection of the GPS aerial 2-track connectors (component code 886) and of the navigation computer (component code 662) (broken, oxidised, bent tabs). Manipulate the wiring harness at the connectors to produce a change in status (present → stored). If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connectors; otherwise, replace the wiring. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code 46CB, ● connection code TB15, between components 662 and 886. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring. If the connections are correct, replace the GPS aerial. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults using command RZ001 Fault memory. Deal with any other faults.

ITS_V04_DF030

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-24

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

NOTES

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Conformity check

86C

Only carry out this conformity check after a complete check with the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application conditions: Engine stopped, + after ignition feed switched on.

MAIN SCREEN

Order

Function

1

Night-time lighting

2

Vehicle speed

Parameter or Status Check or Action

Display and Notes

Fault finding

+ 12 V side lights feed

ON OFF

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET003 + 12 V side lights feed.

PR002:

Vehicle speed

0 mph Carry out a road test to obtain a variation.

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of parameter PR002 Vehicle speed.

YES NO

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET024 Reverse gear engaged.

0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6

None

ET003:

3

Reverse gear

ET024:

Reverse gear engaged

4

CD multichanger

PR005:

Number of CDs in the multichanger

ITS_V04_CCONF

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-25

Edition 1

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Conformity check

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

NOTES

86C

Only carry out this conformity check after a complete check with the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application conditions: Engine stopped, + after ignition feed switched on.

Sub-function: DRIVER SELECTION

Order

Function

Parameter or Status Check or Action

Display and Notes

Fault finding

ET006:

+ button

DEPRESSED RELEASED

ET007:

- button

DEPRESSED RELEASED

ET010:

Lower button

DEPRESSED RELEASED

ET009:

Upper button

DEPRESSED RELEASED

ET034:

MODE button

DEPRESSED RELEASED

2

Communication connection button

ET017:

Communication connection button

DEPRESSED RELEASED

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET017 Communication button.

3

Steering column control

ET018:

Wheel action

INACTIVE UPWARDS DOWNWARDS

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET018 Wheel activation.

1

Steering column switch

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of statuses ET006 + button, ET007 - button, ET010 low button, ET009 high button and ET034 MODE button.

Note: If you need to work on the telephone, ensure that you have the PIN code.

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-26

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

NOTES

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Conformity check

86C

Only carry out this conformity check after a complete check with the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application conditions: Engine stopped, + after ignition feed switched on.

Sub-function: SOUND TESTS

Order

1

Function

Speakers test

Parameter or Status Check or Action

AC004:

Speaker test

Display and Notes

Fault finding

This command enables the front lefthand, front righthand, rear left-hand and rear right-hand speakers to be activated successively.

In the event of a fault, apply the interpretation of command AC004 Speakers test.

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-27

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

NOTES

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Conformity check

86C

Only carry out this conformity check after a complete check with the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application conditions: Engine stopped, + after ignition feed switched on.

Sub-function: TESTS

Order

Function

Parameter or Status Check or Action

Display and Notes

Fault finding

Screen test: colour bars

This command is used to test the colour connections between the navigation computer and the display.

In the event of a fault, apply the interpretation of command AC006 Screen test: colour bars.

AC007:

Screen test: shades of grey

This command is used to test the video connections between the navigation computer and the display.

In the event of a fault, apply the interpretation of command AC007 Screen test: gradation of grey.

AC008:

Screen test: white screen

This command is used to test the screen to see if a pixel from the display is out of order.

Replace the display if several pixels are out of order.

Microphone test

This command is for testing microphone operation. Note: If it is quiet, speak into the microphone to check that it is working.

In the event of a fault, apply the interpretation of command AC009 Microphone test.

AC006:

1

2

Screen

Microphone

AC009:

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-28

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Status summary table

Tool status

86C

Diagnostic tool title

ET003

+ 12 V side lights feed

ET006

+ button

ET007

- button

ET009

Upper button

ET010

Lower button

ET017

Communication connection button

ET018

Wheel action

ET024

Reverse gear engaged

ET034

MODE button

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-29

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

86C

+ 12 V SIDE LIGHTS FEED ET003

NOTES

Visually check that the side lights are working. Carry out fault finding on the steering column switches and the side lights. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note, Scenic II.

Check the condition of the 7.5 A fuse in the engine compartment connection unit (component code 1337). Check the condition and connection of the navigation central control connectors (component code 1657) and of the CD changer (component code 1272) (broken, bent tabs). If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connectors; otherwise, replace the wiring. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the LPG connection between components 1337, 1272 and 1657. If the connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

ITS_V04_ET003

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-30

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

ET006 ET007 ET009 ET010 ET034

NOTES

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

86C

+ BUTTON - BUTTON UPPER BUTTON LOWER BUTTON MODE BUTTON

There must be no present or stored faults. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note, Scenic II.

Check the condition and connection of the steering column switch 10-track connector (component code 1519) and of the receiver 32-track connector (component code 261) (broken, oxidised, bent tabs). If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connectors; otherwise, replace the wiring. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code 34AQ, ● connection code 34AU, ● connection code 34AS, ● connection code 34AR, ● connection code 34AP, ● connection code 34AT, ● connection code 34AO, between components 261 and 1519. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

ITS_V04_ET006/ITS_V04_ET007/ITS_V04_ET009/ITS_V04_ET010/ITS_V04_ET034

86C-31

ITSJ84ph2V1.0 Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

86C

ET006 ET007 ET009 ET010 ET034 CONTINUED

Carry out the following checks on component 1519 using an ohmmeter: ● + button pressed: the resistance should be less than 150 Ω between connections 34AT and 34AP. ● + button released: there should be insulation between connections 34AT and 34AP. ● ●

- button pressed: the resistance should be less than 150 Ω between connections 34AP and 34AS. - button released: there should be insulation between connections 34AP and 34AS.

●

High button pressed: the resistance should be less than 150 Ω between connections 34AS and 34AQ. High button released: there should be insulation between connections 34AS and 34AQ.

● ●

Low button pressed: the resistance should be less than 150 Ω between connections 34AU and 34AQ. Low button released: there should be insulation between connections 34AU and 34AQ.

●

Mode button pressed: the resistance should be less than 150 Ω between connections 34AU and 34AP. Mode button released: there should be insulation between connections 34AU and 34AP.

●

●

If the measurements taken do not correspond to the values above, replace component 1519 (see MR 370 Mechanical 84A, Control - signals, Wiper switch: Removal - Refitting). If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-32

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

86C

COMMUNICATION CONNECTION BUTTON ET017

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note, Scenic II.

Check the condition and connection of the steering column switch 10-track connector (component code 1519) and of the receiver 32-track connector (component code 261) (broken, oxidised, bent tabs). If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connectors; otherwise, replace the wiring. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code 34AT, ● connection code 34AO, between components 261 and 1519. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring. Carry out the following checks on component 1519 using an ohmmeter: ● Communication button pressed: the resistance should be less than 150 Ω between connections 34AT and 34AO. ● Communication button released: there should be insulation between connections 34AT and 34AO. If the measurements taken do not correspond to the values above, replace component 1519 (see MR 370 Mechanical 84A, Control - signals, Wiper switch: Removal - Refitting). If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

ITS_V04_ET017

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-33

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

86C

TUMBLEWHEEL ACTION ET018

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note, Scenic II.

Check the condition and connection of the steering column switch 10-track connector (component code 1519) and of the receiver 32-track connector (component code 261) (broken, oxidised, bent tabs). If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connectors; otherwise, replace the wiring. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code 34AU, ● connection code 34AS, ● connection code 34AT, ● connection code 34AR, between components 1519 and 261. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring. Check the continuity of component 1519: – between connections 34AR and 34AT, – between connections 34AR and 34AS, – between connections 34AR and 34AU. Wheel checking procedure (see MR 370 Mechanical 84A, Control - signals, Radio control satellite: Test). If there is no continuity, replace component 1519 (see MR 370 Mechanical 84A, Control - signals, Wiper switch: Removal - Refitting). If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

ITS_V04_ET018

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-34

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

86C

REVERSE GEAR ENGAGED ET024

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note, Scenic II.

Carry out fault finding on the Protection and Switching Unit (see 87G, Engine compartment connection unit). Check the condition and connection of the navigation computer 32-track connector (component code 662) (broken, oxidised, bent tabs). If the connector is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector; otherwise, replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the Protection and Switching Unit MN and CN connectors (Vdiag 48) (component code 1337) (broken, oxidised, bent tabs). If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connectors; otherwise, replace the wiring. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the H66P connection between components 662 and 1337. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

ITS_V04_ET024

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-35

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Parameter summary table

Tool parameter

86C

Diagnostic tool title

PR002

Vehicle speed

PR005

Number of CDs in the multi-changer

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-36

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

86C

VEHICLE SPEED PR002

Carry out a road test to obtain a variation of parameter PR002 Vehicle speed. NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note, Scenic II.

If no value for parameter PR002 Vehicle speed appears on the tool, check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the 47F connection between components 662 and 118 or 1094, depending on the vehicle's equipment level. If the connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring. If the value for parameter PR002 Vehicle speed is incorrect, carry out fault finding on the ABS system (see 38C, Anti-lock braking system). If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

ITS_V04_PR002

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-37

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Command summary table

86C

CLEARING RZ001

Fault memory

RZ002

Computer memory

RZ003

Parameters and customer information SETTINGS

VP002

Enter VIN

VP004

Netherlands legislation ACTIVATION

AC004

Speaker test

AC006

Screen test: colour bars

AC007

Screen test: shades of grey

AC008

Screen test: white screen

AC009

Microphone test

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-38

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

86C

RZ001 Fault memory: This command is used to clear faults stored in the navigation computer.

RZ002 Computer memory: This command enables the configuration CF001 Vehicle Type for the navigation computer to be removed. IMPORTANT The NETHERLANDS configuration is IRREVERSIBLE this selection cannot be cleared.

RZ003 Customer parameters and data This command is used to clear CF001 Vehicle type command configurations, address books and navigation settings stored by the customer in the navigation computer. This command is also used to clear telephone numbers stored in the navigation computer and the list of received and dialled calls when the telephone is connected to the vehicle. IMPORTANT This command must be activated before removing the computer. Clearing procedure ● Establish dialogue with the navigation computer. ● Select the Repair mode menu. ● Select the Clear menu. ● Select the line of your choice. ● Confirm.

VP002 Write VIN: This command permits manual entry of the vehicle's VIN into the computer. Use this command each time the computer is replaced. The VIN number is inscribed on the manufacturer's plate. Procedure for writing the VIN ● Establish dialogue with the navigation computer. ● Select the Repair mode menu. ● Select the other parameters menu. ● Select line VP002 Write VIN. ● Enter the VIN. ● Exit fault finding mode. ● Switch off the ignition. ● Wait for the end of the power-latch. ● Read the VIN again from the Identification menu for confirmation.

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-39

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

86C

SPEAKER TEST AC004

This command activates, one by one, the front left-hand tweeters, front right-hand tweeters, front right-hand bass, rear right-hand bass, rear left-hand bass and front right-hand bass speakers. NOTES

Special note: Check the output setting on the right-hand and left-hand speakers (press the SET button, select Balance) then the output setting on the front and rear speakers (press the SET button and then select Fad). Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note, Scenic II.

Check the condition and connection of the receiver connector B (component code 261) and of the faulty speaker connector (component code 365, 191, 366, 189, 190, 192) (broken, oxidised, bent tabs). If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connectors; otherwise, replace the wiring. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code 34E, ● connection code 34F, between components 261, 365 and 191. connection code 34D, connection code 34C, between components 261 and 189. ● ●

connection code 34A, connection code 34B, between components 261 and 190. ● ●

connection code 34G, connection code 34H, between components 261, 366 and 192. ● ●

If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring. If the checks reveal no faults, but one or more of the speakers does not work, replace the faulty speaker(s). If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system.

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-40

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

86C

SCREEN TEST: COLOUR BARS AC006

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note, Scenic II.

Apply this procedure if one or more colour bars is missing on the display when this command is run. Check the condition and connection of the display connector (component code 1127) and of the navigation computer 32-track connector (component code 662) (broken, oxidised, bent tabs). If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connectors; otherwise, replace the wiring. Check for + 12 V on connection BCP3 of the component 1127 connector. Check that the earth on connection 34GU of the component 1127 connector is perfect. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code TB31, ● connection code 34DD, ● connection code 34DC, ● connection code 34DB, ● connection code 34GU, between components 1127 and 662. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring. If the checks reveal no faults, but the colours displayed by component 1127 are incorrect, replace component 1127.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system.

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-41

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

86C

SCREEN TEST: GRADATION OF GREY AC007

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note, Scenic II.

Apply this procedure if the shade of grey shown on the display when the command is activated is incorrect. Check the condition and connection of the display connector (component code 1127) and of the navigation computer 32-track connector (component code 662) (broken, oxidised, bent tabs). If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connectors; otherwise, replace the wiring. Check that the earth on connection 34GU of the component 1127 connector is perfect. If the connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring. Check that the earth on the MAN connection of component 1127 is perfect. Check for + 12 V on connection BCP3 of the component 1127 connector. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code TB30, ● connection code 34HA, ● connection code 34GZ, between components 1127 and 662. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring. If the checks reveal no faults, but the gradation of grey displayed by the display is not correct, replace component 1127.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system.

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-42

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

86C

MICROPHONE TEST AC009

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note, Scenic II.

Apply this procedure if the Faulty connection message appears when these commands are activated. Check the condition and connection of the microphone connector (component code 789) and of the navigation computer 40-track connector (component code 662) (broken, oxidised, bent tabs). If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connectors; otherwise, replace the wiring. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code 107J, ● connection code 107G, ● connection code 107F, between components 789 and 662. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring. If the checks reveal no faults but the microphone does not work, replace component 789.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system.

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-43

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

NOTES

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Customer complaints

86C

Only refer to these customer complaints after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool.

NO DIALOGUE WITH THE COMPUTER

ALP 1

THE SCREEN STAYS BLACK

ALP 2

NO VOICE MESSAGES

ALP 3

NO TRAFFIC INFORMATION MESSAGES APPEAR ON THE SCREEN

ALP 4

POOR SATELLITE RECEPTION

ALP 5

THE RADIO DOES NOT SWITCH ON AUTOMATICALLY OR GOES OFF AFTER 20 MINUTES

ALP 6

NO TIME DISPLAY OR TIME DISPLAY INCORRECT

ALP 7

THE VOLUME DOES NOT CHANGE WITH A CHANGE IN VEHICLE SPEED

ALP 8

POOR RADIO RECEPTION

ALP 9

THE CD CHANGER DOES NOT WORK

ALP 10

IMPOSSIBLE TO ALTER GPS GUIDANCE WHEN DRIVING

ALP 11

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-44

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

NOTES

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Customer complaints

86C

Only refer to these customer complaints after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool.

AFTER UPDATING THE NAVIGATION DVD, THE SYSTEM NO LONGER WORKS

ALP 12

IMPOSSIBLE TO USE TELEPHONE WITH BLUETOOTH

ALP 13

NOT POSSIBLE TO MAKE A CALL FROM THE NUMBERS STORED IN THE LIST OF RECEIVED CALLS

ALP 14

THE CALL IS NOT TRANSFERRED TO THE NAVIGATION AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM IF A NUMBER IS DIALLED ON THE TELEPHONE

ALP 15

COMMUNICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO INTERFERENCE IN BLUETOOTH

ALP 16

THE PERSON CALLING USING THE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM CANNOT HEAR ME VERY WELL OR CANNOT HEAR ME AT ALL (WITH BLUETOOTH)

ALP 17

VOICE RECOGNITION IS NOT WORKING

ALP 18

THE DISPLAY ON THE SCREEN STAYS FROZEN

ALP 19

THE SCREEN DISPLAYS CONNECT A DIAGNOSTIC TOOL

ALP 20

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-45

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 1

NOTES

86C

No dialogue with the computer

Switch on the + after ignition feed to enter fault finding mode with the computer. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note, Scenic II.

Check the condition and connection of the battery connections. Check the condition of the fuses. Check the battery voltage. Try the diagnostic tool on another vehicle. Check: – the connection between the diagnostic tool and the diagnostic probe (lead in good condition), – the connection between the diagnostic lead and the diagnostic socket (lead in good condition). Check for + 12 V on the 34HU connection of the navigation computer (component code 662). Check for + 12 V battery feed on connection BP32, for + 12 V after ignition feed on connection AP43 and for an earth on the NAM connection and on the MAM connection of the diagnostic socket (component code 225). If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring. Check for + 12 V battery feed on connection BCP3 and an earth on connection MX of component 662. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring. Disconnect the 32-track connector of component 662 and the connector of component 1657 to check the insulation, continuity and absence of interference resistance of the following connections: ● connection code 34GA, ● connection code 34DZ, between components 662 and 1657; ● connection code 107X, ● connection code 107W, between components 1657 and 225; ● connection code BCP3, between components 662 and 260; ● connection code MX, between component 662 and earth MX. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

ITS_V04_ALP1

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-46

Edition 1

MULTIMEDIA

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

86C

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 2

The screen stays black

NOTES

Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool. Check that the customer is using the navigation system correctly. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note, Scenic II.

Check that the display has not been deactivated. Press the LIGHT button on the central control for 2 seconds to reactivate the display.

To check the supply to the display, switch on the ignition, switch on the navigation system and eject the navigation DVD.

Check the condition of the supply fuse (20A) (component code 260).

No

Has the fault been solved?

Has the DVD been removed? Yes

Yes Check for + 12 V on connection BCP3 and an earth on connection MAN of the display (component code 1127).

End of fault finding.

Are these tests correct?

No

Yes

Are these checks correct?

Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of connection 34HU between components 1127 and 1272.

AFTER REPAIR

Check for + 12 V on connection BCP3 and an earth on connection MX of the navigation computer (component code 662). Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of connections 34DB, 34DC et 34DD between components 662 and 1127.

Yes

– If the connection is correct, replace the display. – If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring.

No

Contact the Techline.

No

If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring.

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

ITS_V04_ALP2

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-47

Edition 1

MULTIMEDIA

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

86C

ALP 3

No voice messages

NOTES

Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool. Check that the customer is using the navigation system correctly. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note, Scenic II.

Check that the sound from the radio is coming through the front and rear speakers. Otherwise, adjust the sound for all vehicle speakers. Press the SET button, select the audio; balance or fader menus.

Check that voice guidance is activated. Press the SET button and select the Navigation; Guidance preference; Voice guidance menus. No

Activate voice guidance.

No

Adjust the voice guidance volume.

Yes

End of fault finding.

Has voice guidance been activated? Yes Ensure that the voice guidance volume has been properly adjusted. Press the SET button and select the Volume and beeps, and Guidance volume menus. Has the voice guidance volume been properly adjusted? Yes Has the fault been solved? No

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

ITS_V04_ALP3

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-48

Edition 1

MULTIMEDIA

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

86C

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 3 CONTINUED

Check the condition and the connection of the receiver 32-track connector (component code 261), of the navigation central control connector (component code 1657) and of the navigation computer 40-track connector (component code 662) (broken, oxidised, bent tabs). If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connectors; otherwise, replace the wiring.

Check the insulation, continuity and absence of interference resistance on connections TB27, 34HD and 34HG between components 662 and 261. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring. Has the fault been solved? No

Yes End of fault finding.

Contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-49

Edition 1

MULTIMEDIA

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

86C

ALP 4

No traffic information messages appear on the screen

NOTES

Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool. Check that the customer is using the navigation system correctly.

Traffic information (TMC) is transmitted via the radio's FM band. The TMC pictogram should be green in order for the traffic information to be received. What colour is the TMC pictogram?

Grey

No traffic information is being received.

No

Activate the traffic information display.

Green The system is operating correctly, but there is no traffic information to be transmitted.

Check that the traffic information display has been activated. Press the INFO button and select the TMC traffic information; Traffic information adjustment; Card display menus. Has the display been activated? Yes Check that the traffic information settings are correct. Press the INFO button and select the TMC traffic information; Traffic information adjustment; Type of information to be displayed; Traffic information service menus. Make any necessary adjustments.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

ITS_V04_ALP4

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-50

Edition 1

MULTIMEDIA

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

86C

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 5

Poor satellite reception

NOTES

Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool. Check that the customer is using the navigation system correctly. Ensure there are no present or stored faults. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note, Scenic II.

Yellow or Grey

What colour is the GPS pictogram? Green

Positioning is imprecise (yellow) or impossible (grey) in the following areas: forests, tunnels, valleys, under bridges and in stormy weather. Carry out a system test in an open area.

The system operates normally. Check the condition and cleanliness of the GPS aerial.

If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring.

Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of connections 46CB and TB15 between components 662 and 886. No

Are the tests correct? Yes If the fault is still present, replace the GPS aerial.

If the satellite reception is poor, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

ITS_V04_ALP5

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-51

Edition 1

MULTIMEDIA

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

86C

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 6

The radio does not switch on automatically or goes off after 20 minutes

NOTES

Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool. Check that the customer is using the navigation system correctly. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note, Scenic II.

The navigation system does not receive the multimedia wake-up signal when the + after ignition feed is switched on.

Check the condition of the CD changer fuses (component code 1272). Has the fault been solved? No

Yes

On pressing the CD changer on/off button, check for the multimedia wake-up signal on connection 34HU on the radio's blue connector (component code 261).

End of fault finding.

Check for + 12 V (+ battery feed) on connection BCP3 of the component 261 black connector.

Yes

Is it present?

Is it present?

No Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of connection 34HU between components 1272, 261, 1657, 1127 and 662. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring. Has the fault been solved? No

Yes

No Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of connection BCP3 between components 261 and 260. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electricalwiring, Wiring:Precautionsfor repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring.

Has the fault been solved? Yes

End of fault finding.

AFTER REPAIR

Yes

No

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

ITS_V04_ALP6

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-52

Edition 1

MULTIMEDIA

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

86C

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 6 CONTINUED

Disconnect the connector from component 1127, check for + battery feed on connection BCP3, for + accessories feed on connection SP2 and for + after ignition feed on connection AP43 of the component 1127 connector. Also check that the earth on connection MAN is perfect. Are the tests correct? No

Yes If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

Check the continuity, insulation and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code SP2, ● connection code BCP3, between components 1272 and 260; ● connection code AP43, between components 1272 and 1337; ● connection code MAN, between component 1272 and the earth MAN. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-53

Edition 1

MULTIMEDIA

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

86C

ALP 7

Clock not displayed or incorrect

NOTES

Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool. Check that the customer is using the navigation system correctly.

Check that the time display is activated and the time zones and settings are correct. Press the SET button, select the clock; clock display; time adjustment; summer time; time zone. Are these adjustments correct?

No

Set the display and time. Explain to the customer how to make these adjustments.

No

See fault finding chart: ALP 5 Poor satellite reception.

Yes Place the vehicle outside in an open area and check that the satellite reception is correct. Is the GPS pictogram green? Yes Wait a few minutes in a location with good satellite reception. If the time is still wrong, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

ITS_V04_ALP7

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-54

Edition 1

MULTIMEDIA

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

86C

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 8

The volume does not change with a change in vehicle speed

NOTES

Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool. Check that the customer is using the navigation system correctly. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note, Scenic II.

Check that volume according to speed function has been activated. Press the SET button and select the volume correction menu. Is the volume according to speed function active?

No

Activate this function.

Carry out a road test and check that the volume varies as the vehicle speed varies.

Does the volume vary? Yes

No

Carry out fault finding on the ABS/ESP (see 38C, Anti-lock braking system).

Yes End of fault finding.

Check the condition and connection of the receiver 32-track connector (component code 261) and of the navigation computer 32-track connector (component code 662). If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connectors; otherwise, replace the wiring. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the connection 47F between components 261 and 662. If the connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

ITS_V04_ALP8

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-55

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Fault finding charts

86C

ALP 8 CONTINUED

Check the condition and connection of the ABS computer connector (component code 118 or 1094). If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connectors; otherwise, replace the wiring. If no fault is found with the ABS system, check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of connection 47F between components 261 and 118 or 1094 according to the vehicle's equipment level. If the connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring.

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-56

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Fault finding charts

86C

ALP 9

Poor radio reception

NOTES

Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note, Scenic II.

Check the condition and connection of the 32-track connector and the aerial connector on the radio (component code 886). If the connectors are faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connectors; otherwise, replace the wiring.

Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code 34AM, ● connection code 34AN, ● connection code TB13, between components 261 and 886. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring.

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

ITS_V04_ALP9

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-57

Edition 1

MULTIMEDIA

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

86C

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

ALP 10

The CD changer does not work

NOTES

Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool. Check that the customer is using the system properly. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note, Scenic II.

Check the condition of the 15 A fuses (+ accessories feed) on component 260 and 7.5 A (+ after ignition feed) on component 1337. No

Are the fuses in good condition?

Replace the fuses.

Yes Check the condition and connection of the CD multi-changer connector (component code 1272). If the connector is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector; otherwise, replace the wiring. Has the fault been solved? No

Yes

Disconnect the connector from component 1272, check for + battery feed on connection BCP3, for + accessories feed on connection SP2 and for + after ignition feed on connection AP43 of the component 1272 connector. Also check that the earth on connection MAN is perfect.

End of fault finding.

Are the tests correct? No

AFTER REPAIR

Yes

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

ITS_V04_ALP10

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-58

Edition 1

MULTIMEDIA

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

86C

ALP 10 CONTINUED

Check the continuity, insulation and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code SP2, ● connection code BCP3, between components 1272 and 260; ● connection code AP43, between components 1272 and 1337; ● connection code MAN, between component 1272 and the earth MAN. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring. Has the fault been solved? Yes

No

End of fault finding.

Check the continuity, insulation and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: ● connection code 34HN, ● connection code 34HM, ● connection code 34HP, ● connection code 34HQ, between components 1272 and 261. If any connection is faulty and if there is a repair method (see Technical Note 6015A, Repairing electrical wiring, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring; otherwise, replace the wiring. Check that the system is operating correctly. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-59

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Fault finding charts

86C

ALP 11

Impossible to alter GPS guidance when driving

NOTES

Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool.

If the configuration LC002 Country type is NETHERLANDS, it is normal not to be able to adjust the guidance when driving. This configuration is IRREVERSIBLE and it is not possible to clear this choice.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

ITS_V04_ALP11

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-60

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Fault finding charts

86C

ALP 12

After updating the navigation DVD, the system no longer works

NOTES

Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool.

Check that the navigation computer software version is compatible with the navigation DVD update.

If the navigation DVD is not compatible with the navigation computer software, suggest that the customer buys a navigation DVD in a version compatible with the vehicle's navigation system.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

ITS_V04_ALP12

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-61

Edition 1

MULTIMEDIA

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

86C

ALP 13

Impossible to use the telephone with Bluetooth

NOTES

Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool. Check that the customer is using the system properly. Check that fault DF009 Computer is not present or stored.

Note: List of telephones researched and approved by Renault in March 2005: Nokia 6820, Nokia 6230, Siemens S65, Motorola V500, Motorola V600. For information on the latest list of telephones approved by Renault and the various operations to perform on these telephones, see Technical Note 6024A Special features of mobile phones for the navigation and communication system. Check that Bluetooth mode is activated in the navigation and communication system. Press the SET button and select the telephone; Bluetooth option; Bluetooth connection menus.

No

Has the telephone been looked at by Renault? Yes Check that the telephone software on the telephone is compatible with the vehicle's navigation and communication system. The telephone software compatible with the vehicle's navigation and communication system is greater than or equal to: Nokia 6230 and 6820: v 03,15 Motorola V500 and V600: Triplets_G_0B.09.44R Siemens S65: v 12

Suggest that the customer buy a telephone approved by Renault.

Command to find out the telephone's software (see Technical Note 6024A Special features of mobile phones used with the navigation and communication system): – Nokia: *#0000# – Motorola: select configuration, telephone status then version information – Siemens: *#06#

Is the telephone software compatible with the vehicle's navigation and communication system?

No

Ask the customer to contact the telephone vendor in order to install a software version into the telephone that would be compatible with the navigation and communication system.

Yes

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

ITS_V04_ALP13

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-62

Edition 1

MULTIMEDIA

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

86C

ALP 13 CONTINUED 1 Procedure for activating the telephone's Bluetooth mode: – Nokia: Select Parameters, Connectivity, Bluetooth, Activate in the main menu. – Motorola: Select Configuration, Connection, Bluetooth link, Configuration, Supply, Activated in the main menu. – Siemens: Select Adjustments, Mode/Data, Bluetooth, then activate Bluetooth mode.

Activate Bluetooth mode for the telephone (see Technical Note 6024A "Special features of mobile phones used with the navigation and communication system").

Match up the navigation and communication system and the telephone. Was the match successful? Yes

Procedure for matching the communication system and the telephone: On the navigation and communication system: – Press the SET button. – Enter the telephone menu. – Select the Bluetooth option line. – Select the save a Bluetooth telephone line.

No On the telephone: – Enter the menu to find a Bluetooth accessory. – In the list of found accessories, select My CAR. – Enter the PIN code given on the vehicle's navigation display.

Test the Bluetooth terminal on the navigation computer. Check that the telephone does not need to be confirmed before it is connected to the Bluetooth system.

If this is the case, confirm in order to connect the telephone then inhibit this function in the telephone (not possible on Siemens telephones).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-63

Edition 1

MULTIMEDIA

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

86C

ALP 13 CONTINUED 2

Check that the telephone is at the top of the matched phones list (icon opposite its name). Is the telephone at the top of the list?

No

Put the telephone at the top of the list of telephones matched to the navigation and communication system.

No

If the fault has not been solved, contact Techline.

Try to match another telephone to the vehicle's navigation and communication system. Was the match successful? Yes The customer's telephone is definitely the reason why it does not work with the navigation and communication system.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-64

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Fault finding charts

86C

ALP 14

Not possible to make a call from the numbers stored in the list of received calls

NOTES

Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool. Check that the customer is using the system properly.

This fault occurs with Nokia phones and cannot be repaired.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

ITS_V04_ALP14

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-65

Edition 1

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

MULTIMEDIA Fault finding - Fault finding charts

86C

ALP 15

The call is not transferred to the navigation and communication system if a number is dialled on the telephone

NOTES

Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool. Check that the customer is using the system properly.

This fault occurs with Siemens phones and cannot be repaired. In this case, dial the numbers using the navigation central control.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

ITS_V04_ALP15

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-66

Edition 1

MULTIMEDIA

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

86C

ALP 16

Communication is subject to interference with Bluetooth

NOTES

Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool. Check that the customer is using the system properly. Check that the telephone network signal is strong enough to make a call. For information on the latest list of telephones approved by Renault and the various operations to perform on these telephones, see Technical Note 6024A Special features of mobile phones for the navigation and communication system.

Make a call to a fixed line. Is the interference still present?

No

Yes Deactivate Bluetooth mode on the telephone. If the telephone is not listed opposite (see Technical Note 6024A Special features of mobile phones used with the navigation and communication system).

Procedure for activating the telephone's Bluetooth mode: – Nokia: Select Parameters, Connectivity, Bluetooth, Deactivate in the main menu. – Motorola: Select Configuration, Connection, Bluetooth link, Configuration, Supply, Deactivated in the main menu. – Siemens: Select Adjustments, Mode/Data, Bluetooth, then deactivate Bluetooth mode.

Deactivate Bluetooth mode in the navigation and communication system. Press the SET button and select the telephone; Bluetooth option; Bluetooth connection menus. Make a call to a fixed line. No

Is the interference still present? Yes

AFTER REPAIR

The fault is linked to the number the customer is calling or to a localised lack of network availability.

The fault is linked to the customer's telephone. Ask the customer to carry out a fault finding procedure on the telephone with the vendor.

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

ITS_V04_ALP16

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-67

Edition 1

MULTIMEDIA

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

86C

ALP 16 CONTINUED

Place the telephone close to the navigation computer. If the fault is still present, check the condition and connection of the connectors on the navigation computer and the radio. No

Is the interference still present? Yes Match up another telephone and make a call. Is the interference still present? Yes

No

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

End of fault finding.

Procedure for matching the communication system and the telephone: On the navigation and communication system: – Press the SET button. – Enter the telephone menu. – Select the Bluetooth option line. – Select the save a Bluetooth telephone line. On the telephone: – Enter the menu to find a Bluetooth accessory. – In the list of found accessories, select My CAR. – Enter the PIN code given on the vehicle's navigation display

Fault solved, end of fault finding.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-68

Edition 1

MULTIMEDIA

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

86C

ALP 17

The person calling using the communication system cannot hear me very well or cannot hear me at all (with Bluetooth)

NOTES

Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool. Check that the customer is using the system properly. Check that the telephone network signal is strong enough to make a call. For information on the latest list of telephones approved by Renault and the various operations to perform on these telephones, see Technical Note 6024A Special features of mobile phones for the navigation and communication system.

Make a call to a fixed line. Is the fault still present?

No

The fault is linked to the number the customer is calling or to a localised lack of network availability.

No

Check the condition and connection of the microphone connector.

Yes With the engine stopped, is voice recognition of the words Directory and Dial working?

Check that the microphone part number is correct. If not, replace the microphone.

Yes Check the condition and connection of the connectors of the telephone support base plate, the navigation computer and the radio.

Match up another telephone and make a call. Is the fault still present? Yes

No

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

Procedure for matching the communication system and the telephone: On the navigation and communication system: – Press the SET button. – Enter the telephone menu. – Select the Bluetooth option line. – Select the save a Bluetooth telephone line. On the telephone: – Enter the menu to find a Bluetooth accessory. – In the list of found accessories, select My CAR. – Enter the PIN code given on the vehicle's navigation display

The fault is probably caused by the telephone. Ask the customer to carry out a fault finding procedure on the telephone.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

ITS_V04_ALP17

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-69

Edition 1

MULTIMEDIA

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

86C

ALP 18

Voice recognition is not working

NOTES

Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool. Check that the customer is using the system properly. Use the Wiring Diagrams Technical Note, Scenic II.

With the engine stopped, then at 30 mph (50 km/h) does voice recognition of the words Directory and Dial work?

No

Check the condition and connection of the microphone connector (component code 789). Check that the microphone part number is correct. If not, replace the microphone.

Yes The customer needs to use voice recognition intensively for 2 weeks so that the voice recognition system can learn to recognise his voice.

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

ITS_V04_ALP18

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-70

Edition 1

MULTIMEDIA

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

86C

ALP 19

The display on the screen stays fixed

NOTES

Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool. Check that the customer is using the navigation system correctly.

The display on the screen stays frozen. Switch off the ignition and wait until the system shuts down completely (at least 1 minute). Switch on the ignition again. Has the fault been solved?

No

Contact the Techline.

Yes End of fault finding. If the fault recurs, contact Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

ITS_V04_ALP19

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-71

Edition 1

MULTIMEDIA

ITS Program no.: 0020 Vdiag No.: 04

Fault finding - Fault finding charts

86C

ALP 20

The screen displays Connect a diagnostic tool

NOTES

Only check the customer complaint after performing a full check with the diagnostic tool.

The navigation computer configuration has not been carried out. Configure the computer (see Configuration and programming). Has the fault been solved?

No

Contact the Techline.

Yes End of fault finding.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

ITS_V04_ALP20

ITSJ84ph2V1.0

86C-72

Edition 1

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH 187B Fault finding - Introduction

87B

1. SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT This document describes the diagnostics applicable to all UCH's with the following characteristics: Vehicle(s): Scénic II

Name of computer: UCH

Function concerned: UCH

Vdiag No.: 44

2. PREREQUISITES FOR FAULT FINDING Standard documentation: Fault finding procedures (this manual): – Assisted fault finding (incorporated into the diagnostic tool), paper version (Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note) and Dialogys. Wiring Diagrams: – Visu-Diagram (CD-ROM), paper. Type of diagnostic tools: – CLIP Special tooling required: Special tooling required Multimeter.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-1

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Introduction

87B

3. REMINDERS Procedure: To run diagnostics on the vehicle's computers, switch on the ignition in fault finding mode (+ after ignition forced setting). Proceed as follows: – RENAULT card on the card holder (keyless vehicle scenario 1, basic, not hands-free and scenario 2, top of the range, hands-free), – Press and hold start button (longer than 5 seconds) with start-up conditions not fulfilled, – Connect the diagnostic tool and perform the required operations. To cut off + after ignition, proceed as follows: – Disconnect the diagnostic tool, – Press the start button twice briefly (less then 3 seconds), – Ensure that the + after ignition feed has been cut off by checking that the computer warning lights on the instrument panel have gone out. Faults: Faults are declared to be either present or stored (depending on whether they appeared in a certain context and have disappeared since, or whether they remain present but are not diagnosed within the current context). The present or stored state of faults should be taken into consideration when the diagnostic tool is used after the + after ignition feed (without acting on the system components). For a present fault, apply the method described in the Interpretation of faults section. For a stored fault, note the faults displayed and apply the Notes section. If the fault is confirmed when the instructions in the Notes section are applied, the fault is present. Deal with the fault If the fault is not confirmed, check: – the electrical lines which correspond to the fault, – the connectors on these lines (corrosion, bent pins, etc.), – - the resistance of the faulty component, – the condition of the wires (melted or cut insulation, wear). Conformity check The conformity check is designed to check the states and parameters which do not display any faults on the diagnostic tool when inconsistent. This phase therefore: – diagnosis of faults that do not have a fault display, and which may correspond to a customer complaint. – checks that the system is operating correctly and that there is no risk of a fault reappearing after repairs. This section gives the fault finding procedures for states and parameters and the conditions for checking them. If a state is not operating normally or a parameter is outside permitted tolerance values, you should consult the corresponding fault finding page.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-2

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Introduction

87B

Customer complaints - Fault finding chart If the test with the diagnostic tool is OK, but the customer complaint is still present, the fault should be treated by customer complaints. A synopsis of the general procedure to follow is provided on the following page in the form of a flow chart.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-3

UCH Fault finding - Introduction

Vdiag No.: 44

87B

4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Check the battery charge and condition of the fuses

Print the system fault finding log (available in CLIP or in the Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note)

Connect CLIP

Dialogue with computer?

no See Chart 1

yes Read faults

Faults present

no Conformity check

yes The symptom persists

Deal with faults found

no

Fault solved

no

Fault solved

Deal with stored faults Use the fault finding charts

The symptom persists

no

Fault solved

The symptom persists

yes

Contact Techline with the completed fault finding log

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-4

UCH Fault finding - Introduction

Vdiag No.: 44

87B

5. FAULT FINDING LOG

WARNING:

WARNING All problems involving a complex system call for thorough diagnostics with the appropriate tools. The FAULT FINDING LOG, which should be completed during the fault finding procedure, ensures a record is kept of the procedure carried out. It is an essential item when discussing the fault with the manufacturer.

IT IS THEREFORE MANDATORY TO FILL OUT A FAULT FINDING SHEET EACH TIME FAULT FINDING IS DONE. You will always be asked for this report: ● When requesting technical assistance from the Techline. ● For certification requests when replacing parts that must be certified. ● Which must be attached to monitored parts for which reimbursement is requested. It is therefore used to decide whether a reimbursement will be made under warranty and leads to improved analysis of the removed parts.

6. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS All work on components requires that the safety rules be obeyed to prevent damage or injury: – Make sure the battery is properly charged to avoid damaging the computers with a low charge. – Do not smoke, – Use the proper tools.

7. DIAGNOSTIC TOOL TEST OK If the test with the diagnostic tool is OK, but the customer complaint is still present, the fault should be treated by customer complaints.

8. CHANGING A UCH After a UCH has been replaced, the computer must be configured. Refer to the Configuration part of this section.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-5

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Engine immobliser

Page 1 / 2

List of monitored parts: Computer, card reader, handle and antenna modules ●

Administrative identification Date:

2

0

Sheet completed by: VIN: Engine Diagnostic tool

CLIP

Version ●

Customer complaint 1469

Other

●

1468

Does not start

1467

Indicator light coming on

004

Intermittently

Please specify:

Conditions under which the customer complaint occurs 009

Other

●

Ignition problem

Sudden breakdown

010

Gradual deterioration

Please specify:

Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure

Type of fault finding manual:

Workshop Repair Manual:

Technical Note

Assisted fault finding

Fault Finding Manual No.: Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note No.: Other documentation Title and/or part no.:

FD 13 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Engine immobliser ●

Page 2 / 2

Identification of computer and system parts exchanged

Part 1 part no. Part 2 part no. Part 3 part no. Part 4 part no. Part 5 part no. To be read with the diagnostic tool (Identification screen): Computer part no. Supplier no. Program no. Software version Calibration no.: VDIAG ●

Faults found with the diagnostic tool Fault no.

●

Present

Stored

Specification

Conditions when fault occurs State or parameter no.

●

Fault title

Name of parameter

Value

Unit

System-specific information

Description: ●

Additional information

What factors led you to replace the computer? What other parts were replaced? Other defective functions? Please specify:

For Laguna II, Vel Satis and Espace IV vehicles: Is there a problem with both cards?

Yes

No

After fully inserting the card in the reader, the instrument panel warning lights are illuminated:

Yes

No

After fully inserting the card in the reader, the steering column is unlocked:

Yes

No

After fully inserting the card in the reader, the reader indicator lamp:

Blinks rapidly Is permanently illuminated

Is unlit

3 seconds after fully inserting the card in the reader, the instrument panel immobiliser warning light:

Blinks: slowly Is permanently illuminated

rapidly Is unlit

The vehicle starts after pressing the "start" button for more than 3 seconds

Yes

No

FD 13 Fault finding log page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Passenger compartment connection unit

Page 1 / 2

List of monitored parts: Computer ●

Administrative identification Date

2

0

Log completed by VIN: Engine Diagnostic tool

CLIP

OPTIMA 5800

NXR

Version ●

Customer complaint 875

Door locking/unlocking problem

1194

Indicator light coming on

Other

●

Lights problem

1075

Wiper problem

004

Intermittently

Please specify:

Conditions under which the customer complaint occurs 005

While driving

009

Sudden breakdown

Other

●

1070

010

Gradual deterioration

Please specify:

Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure

Type of fault finding manual:

Workshop Repair Manual:

Technical Note

Assisted fault finding

Fault Finding Manual No.: Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note No.: Other documentation Title and/or part no.:

FD 15 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Passenger compartment connection unit ●

Page 2 / 2

Identification of computer and system parts exchanged

Part 1 part no. Part 2 part no. Part 3 part no. Part 4 part no. Part 5 part no. To be read with the diagnostic tool (Identification screen): Computer part no. Supplier no. Program no. Software version Calibration no.: VDIAG ●

Faults found with the diagnostic tool Fault no.

●

Present

Fault title

Specification

Conditions when fault occurs State or parameter no.

●

Stored

Name of parameter

Value

Unit

System-specific information

Description:

●

Additional information

What factors led you to replace the computer? What other parts were replaced? Other faulty functions? Please specify:

FD 15 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH 187B Fault finding - System operation

87B

General Operation The UCH performs and contributes to the following functions: – Keyless vehicle, which breaks down into three parts: Access, protection and starting. – Air conditioning, which breaks down into three parts: User selection, cold loop and heating. – Wipers, which breaks down into two parts: Wiper control and wiper power. – Lighting, which breaks down into two parts: Lighting control and lighting power. – Tyre pressure monitoring system (dealt with in Section 35B). UCH fault finding is performed using the diagnostic tool. 1 The KEYLESS VEHICLE function is described by sub-function (explained in Keyless vehicle section). 1.a. Access 1.a.1. Access without hands-free function: Locking or unlocking is requested by radiofrequency exchange (emission, at 433 or 315 MHz, by pressing the button on the RENAULT card, and reception via the aerial integrated in the UCH). The corresponding states can be viewed by means of the ET045 "R.F. frame received", ET066 "Card button press received", ET067 "Card button press recognised" states, by pressing the central door locking switch ET044 "Central Door Locking switch" or by means of the diagnostic tool. The tailgate can be locked or unlocked only by pressing the button on the RENAULT card. Locking can be viewed by 2 flashes of the direction indicators. Unlocking can be viewed by 1 flash of the direction indicators. A request for opening of the tailgate and, where applicable, the rear screen, can be viewed by means of the ET061 "Tailgate opening request" and ET062 "Rear screen opening request" states. The cause of the last locking and unlocking operations can be viewed by means of the ET068 "Source of last locking" and ET069 "Source of last unlocking" states. The number of cards programmed for this vehicle can be checked by means of the PR013 "Number of cards programmed" parameter (at most 4). The type of card and its correspondence with the vehicle can be checked by means of the specific SC005 "Card check" command and one or more cards can be assigned by means of the specific SC006 "Card assignment" command. – Locking with the ignition on is not possible with the RENAULT card. – Locking is impossible if one of the doors, or the tailgate, is detected open by the UCH. The states of the doors seen open or closed by the UCH can be viewed by means of the ET053 "Driver's door", ET042 "Passenger's door", ET051 "LH rear door", ET052 "RH rear door" and ET050 "Tailgate" states and, where applicable, the ET041 "Opening rear screen" state. Note: Satisfactory operation of the door switches is important, because they can activate the UCH. After unlocking, opening of a door causes time-delayed power-up, which is visible through lighting of the starting switch and the instrument panel. The central door locking switch indicator light comes on after locking and goes out, with the ignition off, approximately one minute later. Otherwise the indicator light goes out after unlocking. Operation of the Central Door Locking switch lighting can be checked by means of the AC020 "Central Door Locking switch indicator" command.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-10

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - System operation

87B

Locking can be performed by the UCH: – through automatic relocking (30 seconds after unlocking not followed by opening of a door or the tailgate). The activation or non-activation of automatic relocking can be checked by configuration reading LC012 "Automatic relocking" and changed with configuration CF018 "Automatic relocking". – By automatic locking when driving (RAID function: the vehicle is locked as soon as the speed signal exceeds approximately 8 kph). Activation or non-activation of the RAID function can be checked by means of the ET043 "Enabling of RAID function by Central Door Locking" state. The automatic locking when driving function is activated or deactivated, with the engine running, after pressing and holding down the central door locking switch for approximately 5 seconds. Acknowledgment is indicated by an audible alert. WARNING: If the central door locking switch is held down for approximately 5 seconds with the engine stopped, the vehicle will lock itself (irrespective of the state of the doors and windows) as soon as all the doors and the tailgate are detected closed by the UCH. Note: Unlocking can be performed by the UCH if the airbag computer has detected an impact or if it is faulty (not recognised on the multiplex network, internal fault, etc.). See Section 88C. Depending on the country in which the vehicle is used, locking/unlocking on certain doors only can be checked or configured by means of configuration reading LC029 "Selective opening of doors and windows" and configuration CF036 "Selective opening of doors and windows". Operation and powering of the lock motors by the UCH and the RENAULT card via the card holder. Operation and powering of the lock motors by the UCH can be checked by means of the actuator commands: AC004 "Door and window locking", AC005 "Door and window unlocking" and AC006 "Driver unlocking".

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-11

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - System operation

87B

1.a.2. Access with hands-free function: Same functionality of "access without hands-free function" but different RENAULT card and adding the possibility of unlocking/locking without acting on the card. Unlocking takes place by presence detection, by means of optical sensors located in the door handles (except with a tailgate, when detection is actuated by pressing a switch), and RENAULT card belonging to the vehicle detected, after querying by the external aerials. Note: Only the tailgate will be unlocked if the unlocking request is made by pressing the tailgate opening request switch. Locking takes place by pressing the locking switches located on the door handles and in the tailgate logo, and RENAULT card belonging to the vehicle detected, after querying by the external aerials. The configuration of the UCH with hands-free function can be checked and changed by means of the configuration reading LC001 "Hands-free" and configuration CF010 "Hands-free". Principle of exchange between the RENAULT card and the aerials: The aerials emit (at 125 kHz) following detection by a presence sensor or pressing on one of the door switches, to find out whether there is a RENAULT card in the areas covered exclusively by the external aerials, with the ignition off and with no card in the card reader. The RENAULT card replies directly to the UCH (at 433 or 315 MHz) if it is of the MEGANE II type, if it is of hands-free type and if it is programmed for this vehicle. If everything is alright, the vehicle will be able to lock or unlock itself. Note: If the RENAULT card is detected and recognised by the internal and external aerials, the internal aerials will be overriding and locking or unlocking in hands-free mode will not work. However, it is possible to leave a RENAULT card in the vehicle and to lock the vehicle with another card. The UCH controls the power supply and radiofrequency exchanges with the RENAULT card by external sender aerials. Exchanges between the RENAULT card, in hands-free operation, and the UCH, can be viewed by means of the ET045 "R.F. frame received" state. The UCH receives the locking request, in earthing form, through pressing on the door and boot handle locking switches (switch in logo). The locking requests can be viewed by means of the ET058 "Locking switch on driver's side handle", ET059 "Locking switch on passenger's side handle" and ET060 "Boot locking switch on tailgate" states. The UCH controls the power supply and state of the optical sensors on the doors. The sensor power supply can be viewed by means of the ET054 "Optical sensors powered" state. Sensor operation can be viewed by means of the ET055 "Driver front optical sensor", ET056 "Driver rear optical sensor" and ET057 "Front/rear passenger sensor" states. The optical sensor link is backed up by a switch located in the handle, operating through earthing as soon as it is pulled, which can actuate the UCH or replace a faulty sensor, and will cause the sensor state to go ACTIVE in the same way as presence detection. Note: After 72 hours without using the vehicle, the optical sensors go to standby mode. Locking takes place, with + after ignition switched off and no RENAULT card in the card reader, by pressing the buttons located on the door handles (or in the logo on the tailgate) and RENAULT card belonging to the vehicle detected, by the external aerials exclusively.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-12

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - System operation

87B

To check the operation of the aerials: Use the AC037 "Sender aerial diagnostics" command. After activation, perform reading of faults. In the event of failure of one or more aerials detected by the UCH, the faults concerning the aerial circuit will appear. Note: This command diagnoses open circuits and short circuits at + 12 V on the internal and external aerials, but does not detect short circuits to earth. The regions covered by the aerials can be checked by means of actuator commands AC032 "Test on external aerials on driver's side", AC033 "Test on external aerials on passenger's side", AC034 "Test on boot external aerial" and ET036 "Test on internal aerials" ("Protection" sub-function). Note: These commands enable checking of the region covered by the aerials for detecting the RENAULT card. As soon as the RENAULT card is detected, the card reader starts flashing. These commands can be used to determine the presence of a hands-free RENAULT card for Mégane II, even if it does not belong to the vehicle. In the event of a short circuit to earth, the region covered becomes greater. This is why the internal aerials must also be checked: in the event of a short circuit to earth, they could interfere with the vehicle's external aerials and render emitting by the external aerials ineffective.

1.a.3. Electric child safety system (where applicable) The UCH controls the rear door locks, to prevent their opening by using the inside handles, and inhibits operation of the window lift switches located at the rear. The switch states and activation of the electric child safety system can be viewed by means of the ET089 "Electric child safety switch" and ET086 "Electric child safety" states, configuration reading LC026 "Electric child safety" and configuration CF033 "Electric child safety". Operation of the indicator light on the child safety switch can be checked by means of actuator command AC029 "Child safety indicator".

1.a.4. Deadlocking (where applicable and if the vehicle is configured "WITH") The UCH controls the door locks to prevent unlocking by using the inside handles. Deadlocking can be viewed by 2 flashes followed by 3 flashes of the direction indicators when doors and windows are closed. The cause of the last activation or deactivation of deadlocking can be viewed by means of the ET088 "Source of deadlocking activation" and ET090 "Source of deadlocking deactivation" states, configuration reading LC003 "Deadlocking" and configuration CF009 "Deadlocking".

1.a.5. Door and window control (If the vehicle is equipped with sequential window lifts and sunroof) The UCH controls enabling of the window lifts and sunroof in the one touch window version. The one touch windows are controlled by a unit located in the doors. The activation or non-activation of sequential operation can be viewed by means of the ET087 "One touch window enabling" state. To activate one-touch operation, the actuator command AC025 "One touch window enabling" can be used. N.B. This command can be used only to activate one-touch operation (by earthing), not to deactivate it.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-13

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - System operation

87B

1.b. Protection The UCH shares control of the vehicle's anti-theft protection system with other computers. Pressing on the start switch absolutely must be seen by the UCH, because it is this pressing that enables the vehicle deprotection request. View pressing on the start switch by means of the ET070 "Start switch" state. Special notes concerning the immobiliser warning light: With the ignition off, the warning light flashes to indicate that the vehicle is protected. During placing in after ignition, the warning light remains lit steadily for 3 seconds and then goes out; the vehicle protection is removed. If the engine immobiliser protection is not removed, the warning light will remain lit steadily. Check the warning light's operation by means of the AC003 "Immobiliser warning light" command. Special notes concerning the card holder lighting: The card reader lights up following activation of the UCH. If the RENAULT card is not detected and recognised, the card reader will start flashing. Check operation of the card reader's lighting by means of the AC024 "Card holder lighting" command. Note: If the RENAULT card is not detected and recognised, the instrument panel will display a message. Special notes concerning start switch lighting: The start switch lights up after the UCH has been activated and goes out with the engine running or when the UCH is placed on standby. It lights again or declines in intensity upon a request for outside lighting. Check operation of the start switch's lighting by means of the AC026 "Start switch lighting" command. Vehicle protection is removed in the following order: Recognition of the RENAULT card by the UCH: After a press on the start switch, the RENAULT card is queried by the UCH via the card reader (card in the reader, with exchange taking place at 433 or 315 MHz for both the card and the reader). The protection system is controlled by a random rolling code RENAULT card recognition system. A coded chip (requiring no battery), independent of the remote control function or the hands-free function, is built into each of the vehicle's RENAULT cards. In hands-free mode, the RENAULT card (at 433 or 315 MHz) is queried by the internal aerials (at 125 kHz), except in the event of an open tailgate or a faulty card battery, in which case the card should be inserted in the card reader. Check that the vehicle is correctly configured with hands-free function by means of the configuration reading LC001 "Hands-free" and configuration CF010 "Hands-free".

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-14

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - System operation

87B

So long as the RENAULT card is not recognised as present and corresponding to this vehicle, the vehicle will remain protected. Once the RENAULT card has been recognised, the UCH enables access to the power supply + accessories level. When the ignition is switched off, if the RENAULT card is not recognised as present, two presses on the start switch are needed and it will not be possible to access the power supply + accessories level. The states corresponding to exchanges between the RENAULT card and the UCH can be viewed: – ET116 "Card code received" and ET117 "Card code valid", with card in the reader. – ET045 "R.F. frame received" RENAULT card seen by the internal aerials in hands-free mode. Operation of the aerials can be checked by means of the actuator commands: – AC037 "Sender aerial diagnostics"; after activation, perform fault reading. In the event of failure of one or more aerials, detected by the UCH, the faults concerning the aerial circuit will appear. Note: This command checks the internal and external aerials, but does not detect short circuits to earth. – AC036 "Internal aerial testing" Note: These commands enable checking of the region covered by the aerials for detecting the RENAULT card. As soon as the RENAULT card is detected, the card reader starts flashing. These commands enable a hands-free RENAULT card for Mégane II to be recognised, even if it does not belong to the vehicle.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-15

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - System operation

87B

The steering lock: The UCH communicates over the multiplex network with the steering lock. The steering lock is coded definitively and must be assigned to this vehicle. If the lock indeed belongs to the vehicle, the UCH requests unlocking. The lock (barring a failure) sends to the UCH its unlocked state in reply. Once the lock is recognised as unlocked, the UCH asks the Protection and Switching Unit to establish the + after ignition. Note: If the lock does not unlock or does not communicate with the UCH, the + after ignition feed will not be able to be delivered by the Protection and Switching Unit and the engine immobiliser indicator light will remain lit steadily. The lock cannot be locked if the speed signal is greater than 0 kph, if the coded line is still powered with +12 V and in the event of faults on the airbag computer. – ET119 "UCH request to steering lock", ET071 "Steering lock blank", – ET072 "Steering lock" and ET073 "Steering lock sensor signal" Immobiliser: Under + after ignition, the UCH and the injection system compare the immobiliser code and check that it corresponds to the vehicle in question. In case of failure, the injection system will prevent any starting. Non-activation of the engine immobiliser can be checked by means of the ET046 "Immobiliser" state. After the ignition has been switched off, the engine immobiliser becomes active again as soon as the RENAULT card leaves the reader. In hands-free operation, the engine immobiliser becomes active again approximately 10 seconds after switching the ignition off. The injection computer is delivered non-coded; see section dealing with injection: 13B or 17B. In case of failure, see processing of faults DF002 "Steering lock", DF014 "Card reader circuit" and DF005 "Renault card".

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-16

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - System operation

87B

1.c. Starting The UCH shares control of the vehicle's starting with other computers. The starting function can be performed only if the vehicle's protection can be completely removed. Force a + after ignition setting to confirm removal of the vehicle's protection. Starting conditions: After a press on the start switch, the UCH checks the presence of the RENAULT card and the starting conditions. – ET070 "Start switch". With manual gearbox: – ET047 "Brake pedal position" PRESSED. Gear lever on neutral detected by the Protection and Switching Unit. or – ET048 "Clutch pedal position" DEPRESSED. With automatic transmission: – ET047 "Brake pedal position" PRESSED. – ET108 "ATX gear selector lever position" PARKING or NEUTRAL. UCH sending of the starting request can be viewed by means of the ET110 "UCH request to UPC or injection system" state. Also check the consistency of the engine state by means of the ET092 "Engine stopped", ET094 "Engine driven", ET091 "Engine running" and ET093 "Engine stalled" states. In case of failure, see processing of faults: DF003 "Clutch switch circuit", DF004 "Brake light switch circuit".

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-17

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH 287B Fault finding - System operation

87B

2 The WIPERS function is described by sub-function 2.a. Wiper control The UCH receives the driver's request via the wiper control stalk. Windscreen wiper: The UCH requests the Protection and Switching Unit via the CAN network to supply power to the windscreen wiper. The park position is managed by the Protection and Switching Unit. The control stalk has four positions (neutral, intermittent wiping, slow speed and fast speed) and an intermittent speed ring by which the time between each wipe can be varied, in intermittent wiping. Special note: If the windscreen wiper is in second gear and the vehicle stops, the system switches to first gear. If the windscreen wiper is in first gear and the vehicle stops, the system switches to intermittent wiping. The requests made to the UCH via the wiper control stalk can be viewed by means of the following states: ET077 "Wiper stalk position" and ET096 "Wiper intermittent speed ring position". If the vehicle is fitted with a rain sensor, see explanation in "Special notes concerning rain and light detector". Rear screen wiper: Rear wiper speed and power supply are also controlled by the UCH. Windscreen wiper outside of neutral position: – The rear screen wiper starts up as soon as reverse gear is engaged. – At high speed, rear screen wiper wiping is continuous up to 80 kph and is time-delayed by 3 seconds beyond that. The states corresponding to operation of the rear screen wiper can be viewed by means of the ET080 "Rear screen wiper request", ET097 "Rear screen wiper park position" and ET109 "Reverse gear engaged" or ET108 "ATX gear selector lever position" states, the configuration reading LC019 "Rear screen wiper park position control" and the configuration CF025 "Rear screen wiper park position control". Windscreen washers: The front and rear windscreen washers are controlled directly by the wiper control stalk, via a cable connection. These connections are duplicated up to the UCH to permit wiping and state reading. ET078 "Windscreen washer request"; ET079 "Rear screen washer request". Special notes concerning headlight washers For vehicles fitted with discharge bulbs, the headlight washers, only if the headlights are illuminated, are actuated at the same time as the windscreen washer. The UCH sends the command by cable connection to the two headlight washer relays, located below the Protection and Switching Unit. Important: If the UCH cannot determine the position of the control stalk, or inform the Protection and Switching Unit of the control stalk's position, the Protection and Switching Unit will activate the windscreen wiper at slow speed (defect mode).

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-18

UCH Fault finding - System operation

Vdiag No.: 44

87B

2.b. Wiper power The UCH controls the power of the rear screen wiper and the headlight washers, where applicable. Their operation can be checked by means of the AC007 "Rear screen wiper", AC030 "Headlight washer relay 1" and AC031 "Headlight washer relay 2" commands.

Multiplex network

Matrices

Steering-column fingertip control

Protection and Switching unit UCH

Rear screen wiper Windscreen and rear screen washers

Headlight washer relays 1 and 2

Windscreen wiper

Headlight washer pump

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-19

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH 387B Fault finding - System operation

87B

3 The LIGHTING function is described by sub-function 3.a. Lighting control The UCH receives the request from the driver, from the lighting stalk, from the hazard warning lights button and, where applicable, from the light detector. The UCH requests the Protection and Switching Unit, via the multiplex network, to provide power to the side lights, dipped headlights, main beam headlights and fog lights (front). If the vehicle is fitted with discharge bulbs, the Protection and Switching Unit powers the discharge bulb computers. The dipped headlights are maintained when the main beam headlights are activated. The following states are viewed: ET081 "Lighting stalk position", ET082 "Rear fog lights request", ET085 "Hazard warning lights button", ET083 "Left hand indicator request", ET084 "Right hand indicator request". If the vehicle is fitted with a light sensor, see explanation in "Special notes concerning rain and light sensor". Note: If the UCH cannot determine the position of the control stalk, or inform the Protection and Switching Unit of the control stalk's position, the Protection and Switching Unit will activate the dipped headlights.

3.b. Lighting power The UCH controls the power supply for the rear fog light (a single one), direction indicators and interior lighting (roof lights and footwell/floor lights). The interior lighting request can be viewed by means of the ET112 "Interior lighting control" state. Operation of the lights powered by the UCH can be checked by means of the actuator commands AC009 "Rear fog lights", AC022 "Left hand indicator", AC023 "Right hand indicator", AC021 "Interior lights" and AC027 "Footwell/floor lighting". Rain and light detector

Multiplex network

UCH

UCH

Steering-column fingertip control

Matrices

Rear screen wiper Side lights

Windscreen wiper

Dipped headlights with discharge bulbs

Dipped headlights without discharge bulbs

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-20

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH 487B Fault finding - System operation

87B

SPECIAL NOTES CONCERNING RAIN AND LIGHT DETECTOR (where applicable). The rain and light detector is a single sensor, connected by a single link to the UCH. This sensor is installed in the windscreen. The rain detector allows automatic operation of the windscreen wipers and the control of wiper speeds according to the quantity of water on the windscreen. The detector is activated by setting the wiper stalk to "Intermittent ON" position. Automatic operation of the rain detector is inhibited after an ignition switch-off. To reactivate operation when next switching on the ignition, place the wiper control stalk in neutral position and then place it back in "Intermittent ON" position. On a vehicle equipped with a rain detector, automatic detection being activated and when it is not raining, the rear screen wiper will come into operation if the reverse gear is engaged. Note: The "Auto" position on the wiper control stalk takes the place of intermittent wiping on unequipped vehicles and the ring is in this case used to adjust the rain detector's sensitivity. Use the ET118 "Rain sensor sensitivity ring position" state in place of state ET096. Operation of the rain detector can be viewed by means of the ET114 "Wiper request by rain sensor" state, and configuration reading LC006 "Rain sensor", and the configuration can be altered by means of the CF012 "Rain sensor" command. The light detector allows automatic operation of the side lights and dipped headlights as soon as the vehicle is in a dark place (tunnel, night, gloomy weather conditions, etc.). The state of the light detector can be viewed by means of ET115 "Lights illumination request by light sensor", configuration reading LC007 "Light sensor", and the configuration can be altered by means of the CF013 "Light sensor" command. Rain and light detector

Multiplex network

Protection and Switching unit

UCH Steering-column fingertip control

Matrices

Rear screen wiper Side lights

Windscreen wiper

Dipped headlights with discharge bulbs

Dipped headlights without discharge bulbs

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-21

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH 587B Fault finding - System operation

87B

4 The AIR CONDITIONING function is described by sub-function The type of air conditioning can be viewed by means of the configuration reading LC013 "Type of air conditioning" and configured by means of the CF019 "Type of air conditioning" command. 4.a. User selection (Unregulated air conditioning only) The UCH receives the signal from the air conditioning control panel via cable connection for the air conditioning request, for electric rear screen de-icing and the signal of passenger compartment fan operation. The UCH sends the request to the Protection and Switching Unit to bring into operation electric rear screen de-icing. The UCH sends the request to the injection system to actuate the air conditioning compressor. The following states can be viewed: – ET029 "Air conditioning button", – ET028 "Heated rear screen button", – ET015 "Passenger compartment fan". Operation of the indicator lights for the air conditioning and electric rear screen de-icing request buttons can be checked by means of the actuator commands: AC015 "Air conditioning button indicator" and AC019 "Rear screen de-icing indicator". 4.b. Heating The UCH manages the passenger compartment heating resistors (RCH's) by controlling power relays according to the request for ventilation in the passenger compartment, the engine coolant temperature, the external temperature, the electrical balance, engine loading and, for the cabriolet version, whether the roof is open. The states produced by the UCH can be viewed: – PR001 "Battery voltage", – PR002 "External temperature", – ET015 "Passenger compartment fan" only with unregulated air conditioning, – ET017 "Number of RCH's required", – ET018 "Number of RCH's authorised by alternator" alternator load factor, – ET019 "Number of RCH's authorised by injection system", – ET020 "Number of RCH's activated", – ET021 "RCH control 1", – ET022 "RCH control 2", – ET031 "Fast idle request for RCH", – ET091 "Engine running", – ET025 "Retractable roof" Cabriolet version only, – ET026 "Rear screen de-icing". Relay 1 controls a set of passenger compartment heating resistors consisting of one resistor. Relay 2 controls a set of passenger compartment heating resistors consisting of two resistors. Operation of the passenger compartment heating resistors can be checked by means of actuator commands: AC016 "RCH relay 1" and AC017 "RCH relay 2". Passenger compartment heating resistor power

Relay 1

Relay 2

0W

0

0

333 W

1

0

667 W

0

1

1000 W

1

1

The configuration reading LC027 "Additional heating power available" can be viewed. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-22

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - System operation

87B

4.c. Cold loop The UCH requests compressor switch-on at injection by the multiplex network, according to the external temperature, the passenger compartment fan activation signal and whether the engine is in operation. The following states and parameters can be viewed: ET030 "Air conditioning request 2", ET091 "Engine running", ET015 "Passenger compartment fan" and PR002 "External temperature".

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-23

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - System operation

Low-end Multiplex connection Fault finding ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Card management RENAULT Basic RENAULT "hands-free" Coded immobiliser + Accessories feed control relay

87B Midrange

High-end

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

● ●

● ●

●

Opening elements Locking the opening elements (and unlocking in the event of an impact) Relocking the opening elements Electric and one-touch windows Tailgate lock Deadlocking the opening elements Electric childproof lock Opening "driver's door only" Control of exterior lock buttons Wipers Rain and luminosity sensor Front wiper (speed control/low and high) Rear screen wiper (wiper speed according to vehicle speed) Windscreen and rear screen washers Headlight washers

●

●

●

●

● ●

● ●

● ●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Heated rear screen management Air conditioning request management Alarm management (predisposition) External temperature management

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

Tyre pressure monitor Additional heating

●

●

●

●

●

●

Lights Lighting / wiper control management Indicators and hazard warning lights Hazard warning lights in emergency braking and airbag deployment Rear fog light Lights on reminder management (control) Timed interior lighting supply Interior lighting (floor) Daytime running lights Automatic lighting when driving and stationary

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-24

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Track allocation

87B

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-25

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Track allocation

87B

Connector PP1 (black) Track

Description

1

Earth

2

Not used

3

+ Before ignition feed (protected)

4

+ Before ignition feed (protected)

Connector PP2 (black) Track

Description

1

Steering column electric lock (supply)

2

Steering column electric lock (signal)

3

Rear screen wiper (control)

4

Rear screen wiper (supply)

5

Driver's door and fuel filler flap closing switch

6

Driver's door and fuel filler flap opening switch

7

Passenger door, rear doors and boot closing switch

8

Passenger door, rear doors and boot opening switch

9

Locking motors supply

10

Front doors deadlocking control

11

Rear doors deadlocking control

12

Not used

Connector PP3 Track

Description

1

Interior lighting (control)

2

Earth

3

+ Before ignition

4

Left-hand direction indicators control

5

Right-hand direction indicators control

6

Rear fog light control

7

Not used

8

Not used

9

Interior lighting (supply)

10

Interior lighting (supply)

11

Not used

12

Not used UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-26

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Track allocation

87B

Connector PE1 (brown) Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Description Electric steering column lock External temperature (output) Hazard warning lights indicator Card reader (card inserted) Clutch pedal sensor Door locking/unlocking switch Engine start push button (signal), Tailgate opening switch Child safety indicator light Not used Interior locking control (child safety) Steering-column fingertip control (headlight washer track 1) Engine start push button (engine running indicator light) Doors locking indicator light Passenger door opening sensor Rear right-hand door opening sensor Driver's door opening sensor Doors deadlocking status signal Rear left-hand door opening sensor Not used

Connector PE1 (green) Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Description Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-27

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Track allocation

87B

Connector PE3 (brown) Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Description Not used Not used Driver's door sensors supply Boot locking switch Boot opening switch Passenger door sensors supply Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Headlamp washer relay (1) Headlamp washer relay (2) Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used

Connector PE3 (green) Track 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

Description Sensor (driver's door) Sensor (driver's side rear door) Sensor (passenger door) Hands-free starting aerial (front) Hands-free starting aerial (front) Hands-free starting aerial (centre) Front hands-free opening aerial, driver's side Rear hands-free opening aerial, driver's side Boot hands-free opening aerial Sensor (passenger side rear door) Front hands-free opening aerial, passenger side Rear hands-free opening aerial, passenger side Rear hands-free opening aerial, passenger side Front hands-free opening aerial, passenger side Hands-free starting aerial (rear) Hands-free starting aerial (rear) Hands-free starting aerial (centre) Rear hands-free opening aerial, driver's side Front hands-free opening aerial, driver's side Boot hands-free opening aerial

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-28

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Track allocation

87B

PE2 connector (Black) Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Description Rain and luminosity sensor Steering-column fingertip control connection (track 9) External temperature sensor Steering-column fingertip control connection (track 2) Steering-column fingertip control connection (track 13) Multiplex connection H (Protection and Switching Unit) One-touch electric windows and sunroof Multiplex connection H (passenger compartment) Steering-column fingertip control connection (track 4) Multiplex connection H (steering column electric lock) Steering-column fingertip control connection (track 14) Steering-column fingertip control connection (track 5) External temperature sensor earth Steering-column fingertip control connection (track 3) Steering-column fingertip control connection (track 12) Multiplex connection L (Protection and Switching Unit) Steering-column fingertip control connection (track 8) Multiplex connection L (passenger compartment) Steering-column fingertip control connection (track 10) Multiplex connection L (steering column electric lock)

PE2 connector (Green) Track 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

Description Card holder Passenger compartment heating relay control Not used Air conditioning control (heated rear screen) Card holder (earth) Air conditioning control (air conditioning indicator light) Brake pedal switch (pressed) Steering-column fingertip control connection (rear screen washer track 2) Immobiliser warning light output Air conditioning control Not used Air conditioning control (heater fan) Passenger compartment heating relay control + Accessories relay Hazard warning lights switches Brake pedal switch (inactive) Rear screen wiper park position Heated rear screen indicator light Card holder Card holder

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-29

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Diagnostics - Replacing parts

87B

For replacement of the various components, see the relevant sections in the Mechanical Workshop Repair Manual for the vehicle. The programming and configurations are described in the following pages of the present document.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-30

UCH Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Configuration and programming

87B

1. GENERAL The protection system is controlled by a random rolling code RENAULT card recognition system. A coded chip (requiring no battery) independent of the remote control function is built into each of the vehicle's RENAULT Cards. The engine immobiliser switches on a few seconds after the RENAULT card is removed from the reader. Its status is shown by the flashing red light on the instrument panel and by locking of the electric steering column lock. During manufacture, a 12-character hexadecimal code is assigned to the vehicle to make the engine immobiliser operational. The repair code is required in After Sales to: – add RENAULT Cards, – replace one or more RENAULT cards, – deactivate one or more RENAULT cards (e.g. if lost or stolen), – replace a UCH. Note: It is essential to know the vehicle's serial number to obtain the repair code. There are several ways to do this, depending on location. – Minitel server, – voice server, – Techline.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-31

UCH Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Configuration and programming

87B

2. UCH PROGRAMMING New parts are not coded; following installation, they therefore have to be coded in order to be operational. To perform this procedure, it is essential that some parts on the vehicle are already correctly coded (with the vehicle code). Refer to the assignment table. WARNING Once a part is programmed with a code, it is assigned to the vehicle; the code cannot be deleted and the part cannot be reprogrammed with another code. The programmed code cannot be erased. Operation

State of Components

OPERATION

Electric steering lock

Repair Code needed

UCH

Renault card

Injection computer

Programming the UCH

Blank

Coded

Coded

/

YES

RENAULT card assignment or deactivation

Coded

Blank

/

/

YES

Programming of the electric steering lock

Coded

Coded

/

Blank

NO

Programming the injection computer

Coded

Coded

/

Coded

NO

The RENAULT card assigned to a vehicle must be blank or already programmed for the vehicle. Note: – The RENAULT card can be programmed to a vehicle but not operational (not assigned). – Only the RENAULT cards inserted during the assignment process will be operational.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-32

UCH Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Configuration and programming

87B

Run the "Multiplex network" test. Switch on the side lights. The tool displays "Unknown vehicle configuration: check tool updating". Click on "Test result".

Click on the "information" tab, then "Continue", Click on the "Result" tab, then "Passenger compartment unit", Click on "Diagnostic". Error message Click in "Repair" mode and in the "Programming" menu. Confirm line "SC004 UCH Programming".

"PROCEDURE ABORTED"

Error message "Power supply level inadequate". The instrument panel should be illuminated; insert a charger.

"Remove the card from the reader".

Enter the After Sales code. Enter the code (12 hexadecimal characters in upper case) and confirm.

Error messages

If you do not know the After Sales code, contact your Techline.

The tool displays "Insert card fully into reader".

"PROCEDURE ABORTED"

"Check the UCH power supply level"; the instrument panel should be illuminated.

"Incorrect code", contact your Techline.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-33

UCH Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Configuration and programming

87B

Error message "The RENAULT card presented is not fully inserted in the card holder or does not correspond to the After Sales code entered. Check the RENAULT card and the condition of the card holder." Error message

Insert a card assigned to the vehicle.

"The RENAULT card inserted is blank; start the procedure again with a card assigned to the vehicle".

Confirm

Error messages The tool displays "PROGRAMMING IN PROGRESS" "UCH programming problem: please contact your Techline".

The tool displays "Programming completed".

"Procedure aborted"; start the procedure again.

The UCH is programmed to the vehicle. It is now impossible to clear the programmed code. Next, program the cards and perform calibration and configuration of the UCH and programming of the valves.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-34

UCH Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Configuration and programming

87B

3. RENAULT CARD ASSIGNMENT PROCEDURE Note: It is possible to know whether a RENAULT card is blank by the state: ET IMPORTANT If not all the RENAULT cards are available, reassignment will have to be performed later with all the cards. In the "Programming" menu, confirm line "SC006 Card assignment". The tool displays: "Remove card from reader". The tool displays "Warning: all previously programmed cards will no longer be useable after the first card has been programmed. Important: Be sure to insert all the cards to be assigned to the vehicle when programming". The tool displays Please enter the After Sales code. With the card out of the reader, enter the secret After Sales code (12 hexadecimal digits in upper case) and confirm. If the format is correct, the tool displays "Insert card fully into reader". Now insert a blank card or one assigned to the vehicle and confirm. The tool displays: Programming in progress. Do not remove the card until you see the "One card programmed" message. The tool displays "Do you want to program another card?" The vehicle can have no more than four cards. To assign a second RENAULT card, select "YES". The tool displays "Insert card fully into reader". Now insert a blank card or one assigned to the vehicle and confirm. Note: If the same card is inserted twice, the system does not take this into account and the engine immobiliser indicator light remains off. To finish programming, select "NO" and confirm. The cards are assigned to the vehicle and the vehicle serial number is stored in the cards and in the UCH. WARNING These cards must be old RENAULT cards for the vehicle or blank new ones.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-35

UCH Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Configuration and programming

87B

Note: The vehicle can accept several RENAULT cards equipped with the function. WARNING The maximum time between each operation is five minutes, otherwise the procedure will be cancelled and the tool will display the message "Procedure interrupted: Warning, the cards assigned to the vehicle are the ones assigned before the procedure was performed, they are no longer blank and can be assigned only to this vehicle". This message also appears when communication with the UCH is lost or the battery is disconnected. Configure the UCH according to the vehicle options and equipment. Note: If only the UCH is replaced, there is no operation to perform on the injection computer, as it retains the same immobiliser code.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-36

UCH Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Configuration and programming

Special notes When working on the system, the repair code number can be requested from the local assistance network. When requesting the code number, it is essential to provide the vehicle's VIN as well as its fabrication number. This information enables the operator to identify the vehicle in order to provide the correct code. Replacement RENAULT cards are supplied non-coded and without an emergency metal key. The rechargeable battery for the hands-free function is charged. This system can have up to four RENAULT Cards. The remote control function, the battery and the rechargeable battery (on the hands-free version) have no effect on the engine immobiliser. Depending on version, this system can be associated with a card that has the hands-free function. In the event of loss or theft, or at the customer's request, one or more vehicle cards can be deactivated. They can be reallocated to the same vehicle if necessary. WARNING With this system, it is impossible to replace several components, such as the UCH and card, or the UCH and injection computer, simultaneously. (These parts are sold uncoded, i.e. blank) These components cannot be coded when replaced unless they have the vehicle's original code in memory. There is no way of erasing the code programmed into the system components. The programmed code cannot be erased.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-37

UCH Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Configuration and programming

Card programming and assignment procedure Run the "Multiplex network" test. Enter the "UCH" system.

Error messages

Select the "Repair" mode and "Programming" menu, and confirm the "SC006 Card assignment" line.

"The UCH is blank, run the UCH programming procedure."

The tool displays: "Remove card from reader". "Procedure aborted"; run the procedure again. The tool displays: "Warning: all previously programmed cards will no longer be useable after the first card has been programmed. Important note: Be sure to insert all cards assigned to the vehicle for programming."

Error messages "Incorrect code", contact the Techline.

The tool displays: "Please enter After-Sales code".

"Check the UCH power supply level". The instrument panel should be illuminated. "Procedure aborted". Run the programming procedure again.

Enter the code (12 hexadecimal characters in upper case) and confirm.

Error message

The tool displays "Insert card fully into reader".

"The RENAULT card presented is not fully inserted in the card holder. Check the condition of the card holder."

Insert a card into the reader. The card must be blank or assigned to the vehicle.

"Procedure aborted". Run the programming procedure again. "The RENAULT card inserted is already assigned to the vehicle".

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-38

UCH Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Configuration and programming

87B

Error messages "Programming not carried out. Check the condition of the RENAULT card, the card holder and the UCH, and contact your Techline".

The tool displays PROGRAMMING IN PROGRESS.

The tool displays "One card programmed".

The vehicle can have no more than four cards.

The tool displays "Do you want to program another card?"

The tool displays: "Remove card from reader".

NO

YES

Confirm

The tool displays: "Writing data to memory".

The cards are assigned to the vehicle. Test starting the vehicle and door locking with all the cards.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-39

UCH Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Configuration and programming

87B

4. UCH CONFIGURATION The UCH configurations possible using the diagnostic tool are: Configuration reading

Name of configuration

Configuration

Choice of configuration

LC024

Computer

CF031

LC001

Hands-Free function

CF010

with/without

LC003

Deadlocking

CF009

with/without

LC012

Automatic relocking

CF018

with/without

LC013

Air conditioning (type of air conditioning) CF019

LC020

Number of heating resistors

LC005

Gearbox

CF011

Automatic/Manual

LC006

Rain sensor

CF012

with/without

LC007

Light sensor

CF013

with/without

LC021

Type of windscreen

CF027

Heat insulating/Tinted

LC025

Follow-me-home lighting:

CF032

with/without

LC008

Daytime running lights

CF014

with/without

LC022

Discharge bulb

CF030

with/without

LC015

Front fog lights

CF021

with/without

LC009

Hazard warning lights on at impact

CF015

with/without

LC018

Hazard warning lights actuated by antilock braking system

CF024

with/without

LC014

Steering wheel position

CF020

Right-hand/Left-hand

LC019

Rear screen wiper park position control

CF025

with/without

LC017

Tyre Pressure Monitoring System function

CF023

with/without

LC010

Pax-type tyre system

CF016

with/without

Engine type

CF028

Petrol/Diesel

LC011

Vehicle type

CF017

All except Cabriolet/Convertible

LC029

Selective opening component opener

CF036

with/without

A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I (*)

(*) A = Heating (without air conditioning), without passenger compartment heating resistor. B = Manual air conditioning, without passenger compartment heating resistor. C = Regulated air conditioning, without passenger compartment heating resistor. D = Heating (without air conditioning), with one passenger compartment heating resistor. E = Manual air conditioning, with one passenger compartment heating resistor. F = Regulated air conditioning, with one passenger compartment heating resistor. G = Heating (without air conditioning), with two passenger compartment heating resistors. H = Manual air conditioning, with two passenger compartment heating resistors. I = Regulated air conditioning, with two passenger compartment heating resistors.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-40

UCH Vdiag No.: 44

87B

Fault finding - Configuration and programming

Specific UCH commands SCENARIO Function

Programming:

Keyless vehicle:

SC004:

UCH programming, if the UCH has been replaced

SC006:

Card assignment if a card has been added

SC005:

Card checking, card fault finding command: see under Specific Command function

SC003:

Reserved, command used to determine the After Sales code Contact the Techline

SC002:

Programming of valve codes in case of valve replacement, Refer to note 35B

SC001:

Reading the valve set and the stored codes

VP004:

Entering the VIN N

Tyres

Other Parameters

IMPORTANT When the configurations have been made, program the Tyre pressure monitor valves (see Section 35B), enter the topology of the multiplex network (see Section 88B). Switch off the ignition, wait for one minute, then disconnect the battery to register the configurations, and then confirm by reading the configuration using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-41

UCH Vdiag No.: 44

Fault finding - Configuration and programming

87B

5. CODING THE INJECTION COMPUTER The injection computer is supplied uncoded. It therefore has to be programmed with the engine immobiliser code when it is installed, to allow the vehicle to be started. Simply switch on the ignition for a few seconds without starting the engine. Switch the ignition off, and the immobiliser is activated after a few seconds.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-42

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Fault summary table

List of faults

87B

Description

DF001

UCH

DF002

Steering lock

DF003

Clutch switch circuit'

DF004

Brake switch circuit

DF005

Card

DF006

Left front wheel sensor

DF007

Right front wheel sensor

DF008

RH rear wheel sensor

DF009

LH rear wheel sensor

DF010

Steering-column fingertip control unit circuit

DF011

Rain/Light sensor circuit

DF012

RIGHT DIRECTION INDICATOR CIRCUIT

DF013

LEFT DIRECTION INDICATOR CIRCUIT left hand indicator

DF014

CARD READER CIRCUIT

DF015

OPTICAL SENSOR CIRCUIT

DF016

At least 2 identical codes in the summer set

DF017

At least 2 identical codes in the winter set

DF018

Programming of 4 codes in summer set not performed

DF019

Programming of 4 codes in winter set not performed

DF020

Front internal aerial circuit

DF021

Rear internal aerial circuit

DF022

Central internal aerial circuit

DF023

Driver side front door external aerial circuit

DF024

Passenger side front door external aerial circuit

DF025

Driver side rear door external aerial circuit

DF026

Passenger side rear door external aerial circuit

DF027

Exterior temperature sensor circuit

DF029

Steering lock circuit

DF030

Anti-locking line

DF031

One-touch window connection

DF032

Boot external aerial circuit

DF033

Driver-side external aerial(s)

DF034

Passenger-side external aerial(s)

DF035

Internal aerial circuit UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-43

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

UCH DF001 PRESENT

1.DEF: Internal electronic fault 2.DEF: Internal electrical fault

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to stored faults: Perform locking/unlocking by pressing button on card. If the fault appears, carry out this fault finding procedure. NOTES Special notes: If a fault concerning the steering lock is present or stored, deal with it first.

Contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-44

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

STEERING LOCK

DF002 PRESENT

1.DEF : Steering lock internal electronic fault 2.DEF : Steering lock internal electronic fault 3.DEF : Steering lock internal electronic fault 4.DEF : Steering lock internal electronic fault 5.DEF : Steering lock internal electronic fault 6.DEF : Steering lock internal electronic fault 7.DEF : Steering lock internal electronic fault 8.DEF : Steering lock internal electronic fault

Processing priority in the event of a number of faults: Firstly, deal with the DF029 "Steering lock circuit" fault, if it is present. NOTES Special notes: Lock/unlock the vehicle, open the driver's door.

Contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-45

Vdiag No.: 44

DF003 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

CC.0

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

CLUTCH SWITCH CIRCUIT CC.0 : Short circuit to earth CO.1 : Open circuit or short circuit to +12 V

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: The fault appears after: a road test at V > 40 kph.

NOTES

None.

Check the condition and connection of the green 2-track connector of the clutch switch (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the blue 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure insulation relative to earth for the following connection: Switch track 1 track 5 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the connection is satisfactory, replace the switch. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-46

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF003 (CONTINUED)

CO.1

NOTES

None.

Check the condition and connection of the green 2-track connector of the clutch switch (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the blue 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the insulation from + 12 volts and the continuity of the connection between: Switch track 1 track 5 of the UCH 40-track PE1 connector Ensure the presence of vehicle earth on track 2 of the switch. Repair if necessary. If the connection is satisfactory and earth is present, replace the switch. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-47

Vdiag No.: 44

DF004 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

STOP BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: The fault appears after a series of 10 presses of more than 1 second Note: The fault could prevent cruise control/speed limiter operation.

Refer to processing of the ET047 "Brake pedal position" state in the "Starting" sub-function.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-48

Vdiag No.: 44

DF005 PRESENT OR STORED

DEF

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

CARD DEF : Card battery low

NOTES

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to stored faults: Press one of the buttons on the card and check whether the fault appears. Perform the test with another card belonging to the vehicle.

Check the card battery. Replace the battery if necessary. If the fault persists, fill in the diagnostic sheet and contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-49

Vdiag No.: 44

DF006 DF007 DF008 DF009 PRESENT

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

LH FRONT VALVE SENSOR RH FRONT VALVE SENSOR RH REAR VALVE SENSOR LH REAR VALVE SENSOR 1.DEF : Internal electronic fault 2.DEF : Internal electronic fault 3.DEF : Internal electronic fault 4.DEF : Internal electronic fault 5.DEF : Internal electronic fault 6.DEF : Internal electronic fault 7.DEF : Internal electronic fault 8.DEF : Internal electronic fault

Special notes: Any operations involving replacing a valve or removing a tyre should not be attempted without full knowledge of the recommendations set out in the Workshop Repair Manual 364, Section 35. Before any operation, ensure that all the wheels have tyre pressure monitoring valves, and that the spare wheel has not been fitted.

For faults DF006 to DF009, if the fault is present as of the first kilometers, repeat programming of the 4 valves. If the programming fails, replace the valve in question according to the method described in the repair manual (Workshop Repair Manual 364, Section 35B). Make sure that no wheel has a rubber valve. If there is one, replace it by a wheel with a valve fitted with a sensor and perform a road test. If the problem is still present, carry out programming of the 4 valves. If the fault persists, replace the valve. The correspondence between fault numbers and the valve concerned is described below: – DF006 = Front left-hand valve sensor – DF007 = Front right-hand-hand valve sensor – DF008 = Rear right-hand-hand valve sensor – DF009 = Rear left-hand valve sensor Once the sensor has been replaced, program the four valve codes according to procedure SC002 "Programming four valve codes" described in the "Repair" section of this chapter.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test using the diagnostic tool. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-50

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

DF010 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

1.DEF

87B

STEERING-COLUMN FINGERTIP CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT 1.DEF : Failure detected on a connection between the steering-column fingertip control unit and the UCH 2.DEF : Internal electronic fault

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: If the fault appears after an action on the control stalk, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

NOTES

None.

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair it if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the black 12-track connector of the steering-column fingertip control (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair it if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Black 12-track connector 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. track 3 track 14, track 4 track 9, track 5 track 12, track 12 track 15, track 2 track 4, track 8 track 17, track 14 track 11, track 13 track 5, track 9 track 2, track 10 track 19. Repair if necessary. If the connections are correct, replace the steering-column fingertip control if necessary. Contact your Techline.

2.DEF

NOTES

None.

Replace the steering-column fingertip control unit unit.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-51

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

DF011 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

1.DEF

87B

RAIN/LIGHT SENSOR CIRCUIT 1.DEF: Communication disrupted 2.DEF: Internal electrical fault

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Place in operation the automatic wiper system and automatic light illumination system, then cover the sensor and/or place water on it. If the fault appears, carry out this fault finding procedure.

NOTES

Check the condition and connection of the sensor supply fuse in the passenger compartment relay and fuse box in position 2S. Replace it if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track connector of the sensor (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 3 of the sensor. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of 12 V on track 1 of the rain/light sensor. If okay, replace the sensor. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Sensor track 2 track 2 of UCH connector PE2. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

2.DEF

NOTES

If fault is present.

Replace the sensor.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-52

Vdiag No.: 44

DF012 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

RIGHT-HAND INDICATOR CIRCUIT CC.0 : Short circuit to earth CO.1 : Open circuit or short circuit to +12 V CC : Short circuit

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: If the fault appears after an action on the right-hand indicator control stalk, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Special note: The fault becomes stored following a change of bulb.

Check the bulbs. Replace them, if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the connectors for the left-hand headlight, the left-hand repeater and the LH rear light. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on the faulty component: Track 1 headlight not fitted with discharge bulb / Tracks 1 and 4 headlight fitted with discharge bulb Track 2 repeater Rear light: 3- and 5-door saloon: on track 3 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 3 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 3 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary. With the control activated, check the presence of +12 V on the faulty component: Track 3 headlight not fitted with discharge bulb / Track 8 headlight fitted with discharge bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3- and 5-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 1 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 2 of the rear light connector. If okay, check the bulbs again, and if still not okay replace the rear light(s).

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-53

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF012 CONTINUED

Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Track 3 headlight not fitted with discharge bulb Track 8 headlight fitted with discharge bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3- and 5-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 1 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary.

track 4 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH

If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-54

Vdiag No.: 44

DF013 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

LEFT-HAND INDICATOR CIRCUIT CC.0 : Short circuit to earth CO.1 : Open circuit or short circuit to +12 V CC : Short circuit

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: If the fault appears after an action on the left-hand indicator control stalk, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Special note: The fault becomes stored following a change of bulb.

Check the bulbs. Replace them, if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the connectors for the right-hand headlight, the right-hand repeater and the RH rear light. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on the faulty component: Track 1 headlight not fitted with discharge bulb / Tracks 1 and 4 headlight fitted with discharge bulb Track 2 repeater Rear light: 3- and 5-door saloon: on track 3 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 5 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 3 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 4 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary. With the control activated, check the presence of +12 V on the faulty component: Track 3 headlight not fitted with discharge bulb / Track 8 headlight fitted with discharge bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3- and 5-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 1 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 5 of the rear light connector. If okay, check the bulbs again, and if still not okay replace the rear light(s).

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-55

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF013 CONTINUED

Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Track 3 headlight not fitted with discharge bulb Track 8 headlight fitted with discharge bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3- and 5-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 6 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 5 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary.

track 4 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH

If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-56

Vdiag No.: 44

DF014 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

DEF

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

CARD READER CIRCUIT CC.0 : Short circuit to earth DEF : Internal electronic fault

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Insert the card in the reader, switch off and restore the after ignition. If the fault appears, carry out this fault finding procedure.

NOTES

None

Check the condition and connection of the black 8-track connector of the card reader (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary Check the condition and connection of the black 40-track PE2 connector and the blue 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of 12 V on track 3 of the card reader. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation from earth of the following connections: Card reader track 4 Track 39 of the black 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Card reader track 6 Track 40 of the black 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Replace the card reader if necessary. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-57

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF014 CONTINUED

DEF

NOTES

None.

Replace the card reader.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-58

Vdiag No.: 44

DF015 PRESENT OR STORED

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

OPTICAL SENSOR CIRCUIT CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Lock the vehicle and place your hand in each handle. If the fault appears, carry out this fault finding procedure. NOTES Special note: Only with hands-free.

Check the sensor states to determine on which sensor there is a short circuit. ET055 "Front driver side optical sensor", ET056 "Rear driver side optical sensor", ET057 "Front and rear passenger side optical sensor", Each state should go ACTIVE. If a state is on INACTIVE: Ensure the presence of 12 V on track 3 of the sensor(s). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Driver side front sensor track 1 track 21 of the UCH 40-track grey connector Driver side rear sensor track 1 track 22 of the UCH 40-track grey connector Passenger side front sensor track 1 track 23 of the UCH 40-track grey connector Passenger side rear sensor track 1 track 23 of the UCH 40-track grey connector Repair if necessary. If the connections are correct and the power supply is present, then replace the suspected faulty sensor. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-59

Vdiag No.: 44

DF016 DF017 PRESENT

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

AT LEAST 2 IDENTICAL CODES IN THE SUMMER SET AT LEAST 2 IDENTICAL CODES IN THE WINTER SET

Special notes: Any operations involving replacing a valve or removing a tyre should not be attempted without full knowledge of the recommendations set out in MR364, Section 35. Before any operation, ensure that all the wheels have tyre pressure monitoring valves, and that the spare wheel has not been fitted on the same axle assembly.

Fault DF016 At least 2 identical codes / summer set appears when at least two valve codes are identical in the summer wheel set (incorrect programming of four valve codes). In this case, repeat programming of the four valve codes according to procedure SC002: "Programming of the four valve codes" described in the "Repair" section of this note.

Fault DF017 At least 2 identical codes / winter set appears when at least two valve codes are identical in the winter wheel set (incorrect programming of four valve codes). In this case, repeat programming of the four valve codes according to procedure SC002: "Programming of the four valve codes" described in the "Repair" section of this note.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test using the diagnostic tool. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-60

Vdiag No.: 44

DF018 DF019 PRESENT

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

4 CODES NOT PROGRAMMED FOR SUMMER SET 4 CODES NOT PROGRAMMED FOR WINTER SET

Special notes: Any operations involving changing a valve or replacing a tyre should not be attempted without full knowledge of the recommendations set out in MR364, Section 35. Before any operation, ensure that all the wheels have tyre pressure monitoring valves, and that the spare wheel has not been fitted.

Fault DF018: 4 summer set codes not programmed is present if the UCH has not programmed a valve code for the summer tyre set (after replacing the sensors or UCH). Fault DF019: 4 winter set codes not programmed is present if the UCH has not programmed a valve code for the winter tyre set and the winter tyre set is selected. In the State menu, note the type of tyre set stored in memory (summer or winter). In the State menu, for the type of tyre stored in memory, note the valve codes assigned. Program the four valve codes according to procedure SC002: "Programming the four valve codes'' described in the ''Repair'' section of this note.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test using the diagnostic tool. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-61

Vdiag No.: 44

DF020 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

FRONT INTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO

: Open circuit

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Activation of command AC037: "Sender aerial diagnostics"; if the fault appears, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary Ensure the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 3-track connector on track 1 track 25 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 3-track connector on track 3 track 24 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-62

Vdiag No.: 44

DF021 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

REAR INTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO

: Open circuit

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Activation of command AC037: "Sender aerial diagnostics"; if the fault appears, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 3-track connector on track 1 track 35 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 3-track connector on track 3 track 36 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-63

Vdiag No.: 44

DF022 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

CENTRAL INTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO

: Open circuit

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Activation of command AC037: "Sender aerial diagnostics"; if the fault appears, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 3-track connector on track 1 track 26 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 3-track connector on track 3 track 37 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-64

Vdiag No.: 44

DF023 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DRIVER SIDE FRONT DOOR EXTERNAL AERIAL CO

: Open circuit

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Activation of command AC037: "Sender aerial diagnostics"; if the fault appears, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 track 27 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 4-track connector on track 2 track 39 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-65

Vdiag No.: 44

DF024 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

PASSENGER SIDE FRONT DOOR EXTERNAL AERIAL CO

: Open circuit

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Activation of command AC037: "Sender aerial diagnostics"; if the fault appears, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 track 31 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 4-track connector on track 2 track 34 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-66

Vdiag No.: 44

DF025 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DRIVER SIDE REAR DOOR EXTERNAL AERIAL CO

: Open circuit

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Activation of command AC037: "Sender aerial diagnostics"; if the fault appears, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 track 28 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 4-track connector on track 2 track 38 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-67

Vdiag No.: 44

DF026 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

PASSENGER SIDE REAR DOOR EXTERNAL AERIAL CO

: Open circuit

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Activation of command AC037: "Sender aerial diagnostics"; if the fault appears, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 track 32 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 4-track connector on track 2 track 33 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-68

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

Vdiag No.: 44

87B

EXTERIOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

DF027 PRESENT OR STORED

CC.1 : Short circuit to + 12 V CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: The fault reappears as stored after: – the fault has been cleared,

NOTES

Check whether the right-hand door mirror is fitted with a temperature sensor. If NO, vehicle does not have this option. If YES, carry out the following fault finding procedure. Check the green 2-track connector of the temperature sensor (tabs crushed, oxidised, broken). Repair if necessary. Check the black 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, oxidised, broken). Repair if necessary. Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Temperature sensor track 1 Track 3 of the black 40-track connector of the UCH. Temperature sensor track 2 Track 13 of the black 40-track connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check sensor resistance on tracks 1 and 2. Approximate temperature in °C between 0 and 5 between 11 and 15 between 21 and 25 between 31 and 35

Sensor resistance in Ω between 5400 and 6200 between 3700 and 4400 between 2500 and 3000 between 1700 and 2100

Replace the sensor if necessary. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-69

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

STEERING LOCK CIRCUIT

DF029 PRESENT

CC.1 1.DEF 2.DEF 3.DEF 4.DEF 5.DEF 6.DEF

: Short circuit to +12 V : Open circuit (e.g. lock disconnected) or lock power supply absent : Lock earth absent or multiplex network faulty (e.g. steering lock connection => UCH) : Voltage not within the permitted limits : Short circuit to earth on the steering lock sensor connection : Open circuit on the steering lock sensor connection : Short circuit to +12 V on the steering lock sensor connection.

None NOTES Special note: Lock/unlock the vehicle, and check the lock power supply within the 5 minutes following door opening.

CC.1. SHORT CIRCUIT to +12 V

NOTES

None

Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the steering lock. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of connectors PE2, PP2 of the UCH and PEH of the Protection and Switching Unit (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Steering lock on track 3 track 10 of UCH connector PE2 Steering lock on track 6 track 20 of UCH connector PE2 Steering lock on track 2 track 1 of UCH connector PP2 Steering lock on track 5 track 1 of the PEH connector of the Protection and Switching Unit Repair if necessary. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-70

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF029 CONTINUED 1

1.DEF

NOTES

None

Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the steering lock. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the PP2 and PE2 connectors of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of +12 V on track 2 of the steering lock. Ensure the continuity of the connection between track 1 of the connector and the body earth. Repair if necessary. Ensure the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Steering lock on track 3 track 10 of UCH connector PE2 Steering lock on track 6 track 20 of UCH connector PE2 Steering lock on track 2 track 1 of UCH connector PP2 Repair if necessary. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-71

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF029 CONTINUED 2

2.DEF

NOTES

None

Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the steering lock (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between track 1 of the connector and the body earth. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity of the connection between track 1 of the connector and the body earth. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Steering lock on track 3 track 10 of UCH connector PE2 Steering lock on track 6 track 20 of UCH connector PE2 Repair if necessary. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-72

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF029 CONTINUED 3

3.DEF

NOTES

None

Verify the battery voltage and check the charge circuit (excess voltage). Locking or unlocking possible if the voltage is in the range 9 V < Voltage < 16 V. Unlocking impossible if the voltage is > 16 V.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-73

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF029 CONTINUED 4

4.DEF

NOTES

None

Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the steering lock (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the PE1 connector on the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Steering lock on track 4 track 1 of the 12-track PP1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-74

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF029 CONTINUED 5

5.DEF

NOTES

None

Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the steering lock (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the PE1 connector on the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Steering lock on track 4 track 1 of the 12-track PP1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-75

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF029 CONTINUED 6

6.DEF

NOTES

None

Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the steering lock (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the PE1 connector on the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Steering lock on track 4 track 1 of the 12-track PE1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-76

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

ANTI-LOCKING LINE DF030 PRESENT

NOTES

CO.1

CO

: Open circuit

None

NOTES

Check the condition and connection of the black 6-track connector of the steering lock (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and presence of the 5D fuse on the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the PEH connector of the Protection and Switching Unit. (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Steering lock on track 5 track 1 of the 12-track PEH connector of the Protection and Switching Unit Repair if necessary. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-77

Vdiag No.: 44

DF031 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

ONE TOUCH WINDOW CONNECTION CC.1 : Short circuit to + 12 V CO.0 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: If the fault appears after an action on a one-touch window, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Special note: If the vehicle is not fitted with one-touch windows, ignore this fault.

Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the window lifts (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: 40-track PE2 connector on track 7 Track 6 of the window lift connector Repair if necessary If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-78

Vdiag No.: 44

DF032 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

BOOT EXTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO.1 : Short circuit or open circuit to + 12 V

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Activation of command AC037: "Sender aerial diagnostics"; if the fault appears, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 track 29 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 4-track connector on track 2 track 40 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-79

Vdiag No.: 44

DF033 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DRIVER SIDE EXTERNAL AERIAL(S) CO.1 : Short circuit or open circuit to + 12 V

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Activation of command AC037: "Sender aerial diagnostics"; if the fault appears, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Front door Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation of the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 track 27 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 4-track connector on track 2 track 39 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-80

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DRIVER SIDE EXTERNAL AERIAL(S) DF033 CONTINUED

Rear door Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary Check the insulation of the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 track 28 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 4-track connector on track 2 track 38 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-81

Vdiag No.: 44

DF034 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

PASSENGER SIDE EXTERNAL AERIAL(S) CO.1 : Short circuit or open circuit to + 12 V

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Activation of command AC037: "Sender aerial diagnostics"; if the fault appears, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Front door Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary Check the insulation against earth on the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 track 31 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 4-track connector on track 2 track 34 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-82

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

PASSENGER SIDE EXTERNAL AERIAL(S) DF034 CONTINUED

Rear door Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary Check the insulation against earth on the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 track 32 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 4-track connector on track 2 track 33 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-83

Vdiag No.: 44

DF035 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

INTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO.1 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Activation of command AC037: "Sender aerial diagnostics"; if the fault appears, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Front Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary Ensure the insulation and continuity relative to earth of the following connections: 3-track connector on track 1 track 25 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 3-track connector on track 3 track 24 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-84

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF035 CONTINUED

Centre Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 3-track connector on track 1 track 26 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 3-track connector on track 3 track 37 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

Rear Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 3-track connector on track 1 track 35 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector 3-track connector on track 3 track 36 of the UCH 40-track PE3 connector Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-85

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

OPENING REAR SCREEN ET041

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored. This state can be processed only for vehicles of types J (Scénic, 5-seater), R (Scénic 7seater) and K (estate).

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the grey 8-track connector of the opening rear screen switch (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Lock 4-track connector on track 3 Track 14 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check: The insulation of the lock switch on tracks 3 and 4 in OFF position. The continuity of the lock switch on tracks 3 and 4 in ON position. Replace the lock if it is not correct. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-86

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

PASSENGER DOOR ET042

NOTES

Check that no fault is present.

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector of the passenger door lock (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Passenger's door lock black 4-track connector Track A

track 15 of the UCH 40-track PE1 connector

Repair if necessary. Check: The insulation of the lock switch on tracks B and A in OFF position. The continuity of the lock switch on tracks B and A in ON position. Replace the lock if it is not correct. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-87

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

RAID FUNCTION ENABLED THROUGH CENTRAL DOOR ET043

NOTES

LOCKING

No faults may be present or stored.

Check that the UCH is configured with Locking when driving. Press the vehicle lock button for more than 5 seconds with the after ignition to activate automatic locking (the "locking when driving" state is active). Press the vehicle unlocking button for more than 5 seconds with the after ignition to deactivate automatic locking when driving (the "locking when driving" state is inactive). Press the vehicle lock button for more than 5 seconds without the after ignition to lock the vehicle (specification for Spain).

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-88

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING BUTTON ET044

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored.

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the grey 8-track connector of the Electric Door Locking switch (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: 8-track Electric Door Locking switch Track 5 Track 14 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check continuity of the connection between track 4 of the 8-track connector and the vehicle earth. Repair if necessary. Check: The continuity of the switch on tracks 5 and 2 (switch pressed) The insulation of the switch on tracks 5 and 2 (switch OFF) Replace the switch if it is not correct. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-89

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

RF FRAME RECEIVED ET045

No faults may be present or stored.

NOTES

Special note: This state is used for the tyre pressure monitoring system (SSPP) function, Unlocking/Locking, Hands-free starting. This state merely makes it possible to check the sound condition of the UCH receiver aerial.

ET045 "NO" upon pressing one of the buttons on the RENAULT card or with sensor detection faults on the Tyre Pressure Monitoring System function.

Check with the vehicle's second card. If the state goes to "YES", check state ET066 "Card button press received". If the state remains at "NO", perform a test with another card of another vehicle of MEGANE II type. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-90

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

TAILGATE ET050

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored.

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the white 4-track connector of the tailgate lock (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Tailgate lock 4-track white connector track 3 Track 8 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check: The insulation of the tailgate lock switch on tracks 3 and 4 in OFF position. The continuity of the tailgate lock switch on tracks 3 and 4 in ON position. Replace the lock if it is not correct. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-91

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

LEFT-HAND REAR DOOR ET051

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored.

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector of the left-hand rear door lock (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Left rear door 4-track black connector track D Track 19 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check: The insulation of the lock switch on tracks C and D (door closed). The continuity of the lock switch on tracks C and D (door closed). Replace the lock if it is not correct. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-92

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

RIGHT-HAND REAR DOOR ET052

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored.

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector of the left-hand rear door lock (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Right rear door 4-track black connector track A Track 16 of the blue 40-track connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check: The insulation of the lock switch on tracks A and B (door closed). The continuity of the lock switch on tracks A and B (door closed). Replace the lock if it is not correct. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-93

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

DRIVER'S DOOR ET053

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored.

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector of the left-hand rear door lock (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Left rear door 4-track black connector track D Track 17 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check: The insulation of the lock switch on tracks C and D (door closed). The continuity of the lock switch on tracks C and D (door closed). Replace the lock if it is not correct. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-94

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

OPTICAL SENSOR POWERED (Only in hands-free vehicles) ET054

NOTES

After 72 hours without an attempt at opening the vehicle, the UCH cuts out the optical sensors' power supply. To recover the optical sensors' power supply, one must pull the handle of one of the doors or unlock by card and lock the vehicle and place a hand in one of the handles.

ET054 : is at "NO" despite an action on the door handles

The vehicle has been immobilised for less than 72 hours: Check that the UCH is in hands-free configuration by means of the LC001 "Hands-free function" configuration reading. If everything is correct, contact the Techline.

The vehicle has been immobilised for more than 72 hours: Check the insulation against 12 V of the following track (door handle pulled): track 23 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH, Check the earth on track 23 of the 40-track PE connector of the UCH by pulling a handle Is earth present?

YES

NO

Contact your Techline.

Check the continuity between track 23 of the 40-track PE3 connector and track 2 of the black 3-track connector of the optical sensor. Repair if necessary. Check for earth on track 3 of the connector, and repair if necessary. Check for continuity of the switch with handle pulled on tracks 1 and 2, and if insulation change the handle. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-95

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

ET055 ET056 ET057

NOTES

DRIVER'S SIDE OPTICAL SENSOR DRIVER'S SIDE REAR OPTICAL SENSOR PASSENGER SIDE FRONT/REAR OPTICAL SENSOR (Only in hands-free vehicles)

No faults may be present or stored. Switch the ignition on, then switch it off.

Check that the state ET054 "Optical sensor powered" is at "YES". Place your hand behind the door handle; make sure the corresponding state is "active". If the state is "inactive", lock the vehicle and pull the handle. Is the status on?

YES

Check the condition of the reflective surface inside the handle (frost, dirt). Check the condition of the optical sensor. If necessary, replace the sensor.

NO

Check for insulation and continuity of the following connections: Driver side front sensor Passenger side front sensor Rear sensors, driver and passenger side Driver side front sensor

track 3 track 3 track 3 track 1

Passenger side front sensor track 1 Right-hand rear sensor

track 1

Left-hand rear sensor

track 1

Sensors

track 2

Track 3 of the grey 40-track connector of the UCH Track 21 of the grey 40-track connector of the UCH Track 23 of the grey 40-track connector of the UCH. Track 23 of the grey 40-track connector of the UCH. Track 22 of the grey 40-track connector of the UCH. Earth Repair if necessary.

If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-96

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

LOCKING BUTTON ON DRIVER'S HANDLE LOCKING BUTTON ON PASSENGER HANDLE

ET058 ET059

(Only in hands-free vehicles)

NOTES

Check that no fault is present.

Check the condition and connection of the blue 9-track connector of the door (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 4 of the door handle. Repair if necessary Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Door handle switch on track 3 Track 30 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check: The insulation between tracks 3 and 4 of the handle (OFF position) The continuity between tracks 3 and 4 of the handle (Pressed position) Replace the handle if necessary. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-97

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

BOOT LOCKING BUTTON ON TAILGATE (Only in hands-free vehicles) ET060

NOTES

Check that no fault is present.

Check the condition and connection of the white 2-track connector of the locking button on tailgate (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 2 of the locking button on tailgate. Repair if necessary Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Locking button on tailgate on track 1 Track 4 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check: The insulation between tracks 1 and 2 of the button on tailgate (OFF position). The continuity between tracks 1 and 2 of the button on tailgate (Pressed position). Replace the button if necessary. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-98

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

TAILGATE OPENING REQUEST ET061

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored.

ET061 "Absent" whereas there is a request on the button

Scenario 2 vehicle (hands-free) Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check for an earth on track 5 of the 40-track PE3 connector with the button pressed. Is earth present?

YES

NO

AFTER REPAIR

Contact your Techline.

Check the condition and connection of the switch's 2-track connector. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on track 2 of the switch's 2-track connector. Check for continuity of the switch on tracks 1 and 2 (with the button pressed). If insulated, replace the switch. Check for continuity between the 40-track PE3 connector on track 5 of the UCH and track 1 of the switch's 2-track connector. Repair if necessary.

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-99

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

ET061 CONTINUED

ET061 "Absent" whereas there is a request on the button

Scenario 1 vehicle (not hands-free) Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check for an earth on track 1 of the lock's 4-track connector with the button pressed. Is earth present?

YES

Check for +12 V on track 2 of the lock's 4-track connector. Is it present? YES: Replace the tailgate lock NO: Check for +12 V on track 7 of the PP3 connector of the UCH If +12 V is present, check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: connector PP3 of the UCH on track 7 track 2 on the lock's 4-track connector Repair if necessary. If +12 V is not present, contact your Techline.

NO

Check the continuity between track 1 of the switch's 2-track connector and the body earth. Repair if necessary. Check for continuity of the switch on tracks 1 and 2. If insulated, replace the switch.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-100

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

ET061 CONTINUED 1

ET061 "Present" when there is no request on the button

Scenario 2 vehicle (hands-free)

Check for insulation against earth on track 5 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check for insulation of the switch on tracks 1 and 2. If there is continuity, replace the switch If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

Scenario 1 vehicle (not hands-free)

Check for insulation against earth on track 1 of the lock's 4-track connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure insulation of the switch on tracks 1 and 2. If there is continuity, replace the switch If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-101

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

REAR SCREEN OPENING REQUEST ET062

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored. This state can be processed only for vehicles of types J (Scénic, 5-seater), R (Scénic 7seater) and K (estate).

ET062 "Absent" whereas there is a request on the button.

Scenario 2 vehicle (hands-free) Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check for an earth on track 16 of the 40-track PE3 connector with the button pressed. Is earth present?

YES

NO

AFTER REPAIR

Contact your Techline.

Check the condition and connection of the switch's 2-track connector. Repair if necessary. Check for continuity between the 40-track PE3 connector on track 16 of the UCH and track 1 of the switch's 2-track connector. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on track 2 of the switch's 2-track connector. Check for continuity of the switch on tracks 1 and 2. If insulated, replace the switch.

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-102

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

ET062 CONTINUED

ET062 "Absent" whereas there is a request on the button

Scenario 1 vehicle (not hands-free) Check the connection and condition of the 4-track connector of the lock. Repair if necessary. Check for an earth on track 1 of the door lock connector with the button pressed. Is earth present?

YES

Check for +12 V on track 2 of the lock's 4-track connector. Is it present? YES: Replace the tailgate lock NO: Check for +12 V on track 7 of connector PP3 of the UCH If +12 V is present, check the continuity and insulation of the following connection between connector PP3 of the UCH on track 7 and track 2 of the lock's 4-track connector Repair if necessary. If +12 V is not present, contact your Techline.

NO

Check the continuity between track 1 of the switch's 2-track connector and the body earth. Repair if necessary. Check for continuity of the switch on tracks 1 and 2. If insulated, replace the switch.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-103

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

ET062 CONTINUED

ET062 "Present" when there is no request on the button

Scenario 2 vehicle (hands-free)

Check for insulation against track earth on track 7 of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check for insulation of the switch on tracks 1 and 2. If there is continuity, replace the switch. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

Scenario 1 vehicle (hands-free)

Check for insulation against earth on track 4 of the lock. Repair if necessary. Check for insulation of the switch on tracks 1 and 2. If there is continuity, replace the switch. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-104

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

CARD BUTTON PRESS RECEIVED ET066

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored. It is essential to have the second card. The state is declared as "YES" when one of the buttons is pressed.

ET066: "NO" despite pressing one of the buttons on the card.

Check with the second card whether the state goes to "YES". Replace the first card. If the state remains at "NO", contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-105

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

CARD BUTTON PRESS RECOGNISED ET067

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored. The state is declared as "YES" when one of the buttons is pressed.

ET067: "NO" despite pressing one of the buttons on the card

Carry out resynchronisation of the cards by forced setting of the after ignition If the problem persists and if ET066 "Card button press received" is at "YES", replace the cards. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-106

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

ET068 ET069

NOTES

ORIGIN OF LAST LOCK ORIGIN OF LAST UNLOCK

No faults may be present or stored.

Makes it possible to know what mode is the origin of the last locking or unlocking operation. ET068 "Origin of last lock" RAID FUNCTION: The UCH controls locking according to the speed signal from the vehicle. AUTOMATIC: The UCH controls locking in case of non-detection of opening of a door or a hands-free or card unlocking request, within the 30 s following unlocking Electric door lock: follows an action on the button. HANDS-FREE: detection of a close request on button press located on the handles or in logical diagram. RENAULT CARD: detection upon a button press. FAULT FINDING: Action requested by the After Sales tool via the AC004 "Central door locking" command ET069 "Origin of last unlock" HANDS-FREE: detection of a hand in the handle; Electric door lock: follows an action on the button. AIRBAG: following an impact signal detected. FAULT FINDING: Action requested by the After Sales tool via command AC005 "Central door unlocking" AC006 "Driver unlocking" RENAULT CARD: detection upon a button press.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-107

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

ELECTRIC CHILD SAFETY SWITCH ET084

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored.

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.) Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the black 6-track connector of the child safety switch. (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on track A3 of the child safety switch connector. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Child safety button 6-track connector track B1 track 11 of the UCH 40-track PE1 connector Repair if necessary. Check: The insulation between tracks B1 and A3 of the switch (OFF position) The continuity between tracks B1 and A3 of the switch (Pressed position) Replace the switch if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-108

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

ELECTRIC CHILDPROOF LOCKS ET086

NOTES

There must be no faults present or stored. State ET084: "Electric child safety switch" must be consistent with the actual position of the switch. If faulty, carry out the fault finding procedure on this state first. The locking/unlocking function should work on all the doors. If faulty, carry out the fault finding procedure on commands AC004 and AC005 first.

Manually check the operation of the child safety system Otherwise, apply the following fault finding procedure. Check the condition and connection of the 12-track PP2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the black 6-track connector on the rear locks (tabs crushed, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Insert a warning light bulb and check that it lights, during the brief moment of activation or deactivation of the child safety system between tracks B and E of the rear lock motor. If faulty, check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: left-hand rear lock motor Track B Track 11 of UCH connector PP2 right-hand rear lock motor Track E left-hand rear lock motor Track E Track 8 of UCH connector PP2 right-hand rear lock motor Track B Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-109

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

ET088 ET090

NOTES

ORIGIN OF DEADLOCK ACTIVATION ORIGIN OF DEADLOCK DEACTIVATION

No faults may be present or stored.

Makes it possible to know what component is the origin of the last locking or unlocking operation. ET088 "Origin of deadlock activation" RENAULT CARD: upon a second button press on the card. HANDS-FREE: upon a second press on the door handle button. ET090 "Origin of deadlock deactivation" Electric Door Locking: upon pressing the locking/unlocking switch RENAULT CARD: press on card button. HANDS-FREE: placing a hand in the handle FAULT FINDING: by the After Sales tool controlling command AC 006. + after ignition: no deadlocking at this power supply level.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-110

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - PROTECTION

UCH BLANK ET008

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored.

ET008: is at "YES".

Refer to the start of this section to perform: – UCH programming and UCH configuration, – card programming.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-111

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - PROTECTION

IMMOBILISER SYSTEM ET046

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored. Power supply level required + after ignition.

ET046 "Active" scenario 1 vehicle (without hands-free) with start request, but the after ignition level is not present.

1 Check state ET070: "Start switch"; it should be depressed in the event of a button press; if it is released, perform fault finding on this state. 2 Transponder state ET116 "Card code recognised" and ET117 "Card code valid" 3 Check state ET071 "Blank steering lock" for NO; if YES , run fault finding on that state. Check state ET072 "Steering lock" which should be unlocked; if locked, run fault finding on that state. Check state ET073 "Steering lock sensor signal"; if locked, run fault finding on that state. 4 Check state ET111 "UCH request to injection system or Protection and Switching Unit" if ET111 is at "+ after ignition" 5 Check that there is no fault on the after ignition relay; this relay is located in the Protection and Switching Unit. 6 If these states are okay, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-112

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - PROTECTION

ET046 CONTINUED

ET046 "Active" scenario 2 vehicle (hands-free) with start request, but the after ignition is not present.

1 2 3 4 5

6 7 8

Check whether the card is assigned to the vehicle by means of the SC006 "Card assignment" command. Transponder state ET116 "Card code recognised" and ET117 "Card code valid". Testing of internal aerials via the command. Check state ET070: "Start switch"; it should be depressed in the event of a button press; if it is released, perform fault finding on this state. Check state ET071 "Blank steering lock" for NO; if YES , run fault finding on that state. Check state ET072 "Steering lock" which should be unlocked; if locked, run fault finding on that state. Check state ET073 "Steering lock sensor signal"; if locked, run fault finding on that state. Check state ET111 "UCH request to injection system or Protection and Switching Unit" if ET111 is at "+ after ignition". Check that there is no fault on the after ignition relay; this relay is located in the Protection and Switching Unit. If these states are okay, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-113

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - PROTECTION

ET046 CONTINUED

ET046 "Active" after ignition power supply level forced set as present

Check and repair if necessary. ET047 "Brake pedal position" should be "PRESSED", ET048 "Clutch pedal position" should be "PRESSED", Neutral state: see in Protection and Switching Unit. State of automatic transmission speed selector. State of engine immobiliser in the injection system; if "ACTIVE", check the injection computer. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-114

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - PROTECTION

START SWITCH ET070

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored.

Check the condition and connection of the 4-track connector of the engine ON/OFF button (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 2 of the ON/OFF button connector. Repair if necessary. Check: The continuity between tracks 1 and 2 of the ON/OFF button in depressed position and the insulation between tracks 1 and 2 of the ON/OFF button in released position Replace the switch if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the black 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: On-off control button on track 1 track 7 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-115

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - PROTECTION

BLANK STEERING COLUMN LOCK ET071

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored.

If the steering lock state remains at "YES". Check that the card is authenticated (otherwise refer to processing of the ET116 "Card code valid" state). Check that when pressing on the disengaged clutch pedal or on the brake pedal or the ON/OFF button, the UCH issues an unlock signal (if the steering is locked). If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-116

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - PROTECTION

STEERING LOCK ET072

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored.

If the state is at INCONSISTENCY, refer to processing of the DF029 "Steering lock circuit" fault.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-117

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - PROTECTION

STEERING LOCK SENSOR SIGNAL ET073

No faults may be present or stored. The state should be "unlocked" in after ignition present or "pseudo-armed" in "+ accessories" NOTES Special note: Perform a locking/unlocking operation, and check the lock power supply during the 5 minutes.

ET073 "Faulty" when the steering column is not unlocked. ET073 "Short circuit" when the steering column is not unlocked.

Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the steering lock (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the power supply on track 2 of the 6-track connector of the steering lock. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity between vehicle track 1 of the 6-track connector of the steering lock and the vehicle earth. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering lock on track 3 Track 10 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering lock on track 6 Track 20 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering lock on track 4 Track 1 of the 12-track PP1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-118

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - PROTECTION

ET073 CONTINUED

ET073 "Unlocked" and + after ignition absent.

The state remains UNLOCKED, with the ignition off, in case of failure of the airbag system or the speed signal. If everything is okay, refer to processing of the DF029: "Steering lock circuit" fault.

ET073 "Pseudo-armed" and + after ignition present.

In the "pseudo-armed" state, the lock bolt is pulled out, but the UCH cannot determine its position precisely. In case of inconsistency, contact the Techline.

ET073 "Undetermined".

The state is UNDETERMINED in the event that neither the lock nor the lock sensor can inform the UCH regarding its position. Refer to processing of the DF029 "Steering lock circuit" fault.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-119

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - PROTECTION

+ ACCESSORIES PRESENT ET075

No faults may be present or stored. NOTES Special note: Check satisfactory operation of the start switch: ET070 "Start switch".

State 075 is at "YES" but + accessories absent.

Check the power-supply fuses. Ensure +12 V on track 1B of the fuse box. Repair if necessary. Check for an earth on track 2B of the fuse box by pressing the button. Is earth present?

YES

Ensure +12 V + before ignition on track 3B of the passenger compartment relay and fuse box. Check on track 5B of the passenger compartment relay and fuse box for a +12 V by pressing the start switch. If there is no 12 V, replace the relay. If there is 12 V, check the wiring harness.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-120

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - PROTECTION

ET075 CONTINUED

State 075 is at "YES" but + accessories absent.

NO

AFTER REPAIR

Check at UCH output for earth on track 34 of the 40-track PE3 connector If "NO", contact the Techline. If "YES", check the continuity of the following connection: 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH on Track 34 Track 2B of passenger compartment relay and fuse box. Repair if necessary.

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-121

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - PROTECTION

CARD CODE RECEIVED ET116

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored.

ET116 "Inactive" key assigned to the vehicle.

If the state remains INACTIVE, try the other card assigned to the vehicle before performing any operation.' If the state goes ACTIVE with the vehicle's second card, replace the faulty card. If the ET116 "Card code received" state goes ACTIVE. Replace the vehicle's cards. If the ET117 "Card code received" state remains INACTIVE. Carry out the following checks: Check the following connectors: 8-track connector of the card reader (e.g. connector poorly connected, tabs crushed, broken, oxidised). 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (e.g. connector poorly connected, tabs crushed, broken, oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation against the earth of the following connections: Card reader track 3 Track 21 of the black 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Card reader track 4 Track 39 of the black 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Card reader track 6 Track 40 of the black 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Replace the reader if necessary. Contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-122

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - PROTECTION

CARD CODE VALID ET117

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored.

ET117 "Inactive" key assigned to the vehicle

If the state remains INACTIVE, try the other card assigned to the vehicle before performing any operation.' If the state goes ACTIVE with the vehicle's second card, replace the faulty card. Carry out card assignment SC006 "Card assignment". Remove the cards if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-123

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - STARTING

VEHICLE SPEED PR008

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored. A speed signal failure may cause various problems to appear (on the steering lock, difficulty stopping the engine, non-operation of the RAID system, etc.).

Perform a complete diagnostic of the ABS and the Protection and Switching Unit. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-124

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - STARTING

BRAKE PEDAL POSITION ET047

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored. The accessories relay must operate. During pedal travel, it is possible to note an inconsistency. This treatment applies only in cases in which the state is "inconsistency" or "undetermined", with foot hard down on the accelerator or completely released from the brake pedal. Special note: Apply forced setting of after ignition.

State 047 "Inconsistency" with pressing on the pedal.

Check the condition and connection of the 4-track connector of the brake pedal switch Repair if necessary. Check the insulation between tracks 3 and 4 of the brake pedal switch, with the pedal depressed. Replace the switch if faulty. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Ensure insulation from +12 V of the connection between track 3 of the brake pedal switch connector and track 36 of the PE2 connector of the UCH. Note: The line is shared with the injection computer and, where applicable, the automatic transmission computer. It is therefore necessary, in case of faulty insulation, to check, using a wiring diagram, the connections between the brake pedal switch connector and these computers. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-125

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - STARTING

ET047 CONTINUED

State 047 "Undetermined" without pressing on the pedal.

Check the condition and connection of the 4-track connector of the brake switch. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of 12 V on track 4 of the brake pedal switch connector. If not correct: – Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. – Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between the brake pedal switch connector track 4 and track 3 of the PP3 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Contact your Techline, if still faulty. Check the continuity of the connection between track 3 and track 4 of the brake switch in OFF position. Replace the switch if faulty. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector on the UCH Repair if necessary. Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between: UCH PE2 connector Track 36 Track 3 of the brake pedal switch connector. Repair if necessary. Note: The line is shared with the injection computer and, where applicable, the automatic transmission computer. It is therefore necessary, in case of faulty insulation, to check, using a wiring diagram, the connections between the brake pedal switch connector and these computers.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-126

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - STARTING

ET047 CONTINUED

State 047 "Inconsistency" without pressing on the pedal.

Check the condition and connection of the 4-track connector of the brake pedal switch. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation between tracks 1 and 2 of the brake pedal switch, with the pedal released. Replace the switch if faulty. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Ensure insulation from +12 V of the connection between track 3 of the brake pedal switch connector and track 27 of the PE2 connector of the UCH. Note: The line is shared with the ABS computer or the electronic stability program (ESP) relay (depending on equipment) and the brake lights. It is therefore necessary, in case of faulty insulation, to check, using a wiring diagram, the connections between the brake pedal switch connector and these items. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-127

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - STARTING

ET047 CONTINUED

State 047 "Undetermined" with pressing on the pedal.

Check the condition and connection of the 4-track connector of the brake switch. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of 12 V on track 2 of the brake pedal switch connector. If not correct: – Check the condition and connection of fuse 1H in the passenger compartment relay and fuse box. – Check the condition and connection of the 18-track connector of the passenger compartment relay and fuse box. – Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between the brake pedal switch connector track 4 and track 1H of the 18-track connector of the passenger compartment relay and fuse box. Repair if necessary. Contact your Techline, if still faulty. Check the continuity of the connection between track 1 and track 2 of the brake switch in depressed position. Replace the switch if faulty. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector on the UCH Repair if necessary. Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between: UCH connector PE2 Track 27 Track 1 of the brake pedal switch connector. Repair if necessary. Note: The line is shared with the ABS computer or the ESP relay (depending on equipment) and the brake lights. It is therefore necessary, in case of faulty insulation, to check, using a wiring diagram, the connections between the brake pedal switch connector and these items.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-128

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - STARTING

CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION ET048

No faults may be present or stored. NOTES Special note: Apply forced setting of after ignition.

State 048 "Released" with pressing on the pedal.

Check the condition and connection of the clutch pedal switch connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 2 of the clutch pedal switch connector. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity between tracks 1 and 2 of the clutch pedal switch in pedal depressed position. If faulty, replace the clutch pedal switch. Check the condition and connection of the PE1 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between: Clutch switch on track 1 Track 5 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-129

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - STARTING

ET048 CONTINUED

State 048 "Depressed" without pressing on the pedal.

Check the condition and connection of the clutch pedal switch connector. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation between tracks 1 and 2 of the clutch pedal switch in pedal released position. If faulty, replace the clutch pedal switch. Check the condition and connection of the PE1 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between: Clutch switch on track 1 Track 5 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-130

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - STARTING

+ AFTER IGNITION PRESENT ET049

No faults may be present or stored.

NOTES

Special notes: starting conditions: Make sure the start button presses are properly perceived by the UCH by means of the ET070 "Start switch" state. Check that the card is properly recognised by the UCH by means of the ET116 "Card code recognised" and ET117 "Card code valid" states. Check that the steering lock operates correctly by means of the ET073 "Steering lock sensor signal" state. Check that the UCH request is properly sent to the other computers, by means of the ET111 "UCH request to INJECTION OR Protection and Switching Unit" state. Make sure the pedal presses are properly perceived by the UCH by means of the ET047 "Clutch pedal" and ET048 "Brake pedal" states. In case of problems, apply the fault finding procedure associated with the faulty state.

State 049 "NO" with correct starting or forced after ignition setting conditions.

Run complete fault finding on the Protection and Switching Unit. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-131

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - STARTING

START SWITCH ET070

NOTES

AFTER REPAIR

No faults may be present or stored. Check this state in the "PROTECTION" sub-function.

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-132

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - STARTING

ENGINE RUNNING ET091

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored.

ET091: Inconsistent with the actual operation of the engine.

Run complete fault finding on the injection system and the multiplex network. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-133

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - STARTING

ENGINE STOPPED ET092

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored.

ET092: Inconsistent with the actual operation of the engine.

Run complete fault finding on the injection system and the multiplex network. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-134

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - STARTING

ENGINE STALLED ET093

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored.

ET093: Inconsistent with the actual operation of the engine.

Run complete fault finding on the injection system and the multiplex network. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-135

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - STARTING

ENGINE DRIVEN ET094

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored.

ET094: Inconsistent with the actual operation of the engine.

Run complete fault finding on the injection system and the multiplex network. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-136

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - STARTING

ATX GEAR SELECTOR LEVER POSITION ET108

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored.

ET108: "ABSENT": no automatic transmission presence, "OFF NEUTRAL": gear selector lever position on D, "NEUTRAL": gear selector lever position on N, "REVERSE": gear selector lever position on R. Run fault finding on the automatic transmission and the Protection and Switching Unit. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-137

Vdiag No.: 44

UCH Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - STARTING

UCH REQUEST TO INJECTION SYSTEM OR PROTECTION AND ET110

NOTES

SWITCHING UNIT

No faults may be present or stored.

This state gives information concerning the type of request made by the UCH to these computers.

ET110: "ENGINE STOP": when an engine stop is requested. "INACTIVE": without action on the vehicle. "+ after ignition": a press of more than 5 seconds on the start switch. "START": when starting is requested. If the state does not correspond to the current user request, refer to the corresponding fault finding charts in the Keyless Vehicle function section. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-138

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT 187BCONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

Heating / Air conditioning

EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE PR002

NOTES

None.

Check the temperature sensor's green 2-track connector. (e.g. connector poorly connected, pins crushed, oxidised, broken). Repair it if necessary. Check the UCH black 40-track connector. (e.g. connector poorly connected, pins crushed, oxidised, broken). Repair it if necessary. Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Temperature sensor track 1 Track 3 of the black 40-track connector of the UCH Temperature sensor track 2 Track 13 of the UCH 40-track black connector Repair if necessary. Check sensor resistance on tracks 1 and 2. Approximate temperature in °C

Sensor resistance in Ω

between 0 and 5

between 5400 and 6200

between 11 and 15

between 3700 and 4400

between 21 and 25

between 2500 and 3000

between 31 and 35

between 1700 and 2100

Replace the sensor if necessary. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-139

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

Heating / Air conditioning

NUMBER OF RCH'S REQUIRED ET017

No faults may be present or stored. The state, depending on the conditions, will be at 0, 1, 2 or 3.

NOTES

Special note: Manual heating and ventilation system Defined by the UCH according to the engine coolant temperature, the exterior temperature and electrical availability. Climate control Defined by the UCH according to the engine coolant temperature, the exterior temperature, electrical availability, the interior temperature and the user's request.

The passenger compartment heating resistor management conditions are: Manual heating and ventilation system: ET091 "Engine running" at YES ET015 "Passenger compartment ventilation" ACTIVE PR002: Exterior temperature < 5°°C Engine coolant temperature < 50°°C (refer to injection computer) Electrical availability - 60%, alternator charge < 70% (refer to the Power and Switching Unit). Climate control: ET091 "Engine running" PR002: Exterior temperature < 5°°C Engine coolant temperature < 50°°C (refer to injection computer) Electrical availability - 60%, alternator charge < 70% (refer to the Power and Switching Unit). Heat demand by the user (refer to the air conditioning computer). Check the consistency of these states and parameters. In the event of a problem, refer to the procedure for processing these states and parameters.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-140

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

Heating / Air conditioning

NUMBER OF RCH AUTHORISED BY ALTERNATOR ET018

No faults may be present or stored.

NOTES

AFTER REPAIR

Special note: Authorisation given by the UCH according to the electrical availability provided by the Protection and Switching Unit. Check in the Protection and Switching Unit that the parameter corresponds to the availability. The state, depending on the conditions, will be at 0, 1, 2 or 3.

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-141

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

Heating / Air conditioning

NUMBER OF RCH AUTHORISED BY INJECTION ET019

No faults may be present or stored.

NOTES

AFTER REPAIR

Special note: Authorisation given by the injection system according to the engine load and the driver's demands. The state, depending on the conditions, will be at 0, 1, 2 or 3.

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-142

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

Heating / Air conditioning

NUMBER OF RCH'S ORDERED ET020

No faults may be present or stored.

NOTES

AFTER REPAIR

Special note: The UCH controls the passenger compartment heating resistor relays according to the authorisation from the injection computers and Protection and Switching Unit. The state, depending on the conditions, will be at 0, 1, 2 or 3.

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-143

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

Heating / Air conditioning

ET021 ET022

NOTES

RCH CONTROL 1 RCH CONTROL 2

No faults may be present or stored.

Check on ET017 "Number of passenger compartment heating resistors required", ET018 "Number of passenger compartment heating resistors authorised by alternator", ET019 "Number of passenger compartment heating resistors authorised by injection system", ET015 "Passenger compartment ventilation". Check on requisite heating and ventilation parameters: heat demand via the temperature setting.

If all the requisite conditions are consistent and the states are "INACTIVE", contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-144

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

Heating / Air conditioning

REAR SCREEN DE-ICER CONTROL ET026

No faults may be present or stored. NOTES Special note: For the rear screen de-icer to operate, the engine must be running.

ET026 "Inactive" despite a rear de-icing request by the user.

MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING

Check whether the ET092 "Engine running" state is "YES"; otherwise run fault finding on the injection system. Check whether the ET028 "Rear screen de-icer switch" is "PRESSED"; otherwise run fault finding on that state. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

Automatic climate control

Check whether the ET092 "Engine running" state is "YES"; otherwise run fault finding on the injection system. Run fault finding on the air-conditioning computer. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-145

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

Heating / Air conditioning

FAST IDLE REQUEST FOR RCH ET031

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored.

ET031 "Inactive" whereas the state is inconsistent with normal operation of the vehicle.

Contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-146

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

AIR CONDITIONING - USER SELECTION

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT VENTILATION ET015

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored. Apply to manual heating and ventilation.

ET015 "Inactive" position on the air conditioning control panel different from 0.

Check the condition and connection of the black 9-track connector on the air conditioning control panel (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: 9-track connector of the control panel on Track 1 Track 32 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Perform a check on the control panel; see unregulated air conditioning section. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-147

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

AIR CONDITIONING - USER SELECTION

REAR SCREEN DE-ICER BUTTON ET028

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored. Apply to manual heating and ventilation.

ET028 "Released" with press on the button.

Check the condition and connection of the black 9-track connector on the air conditioning control panel (tabs crushed, broken.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the black 40-track connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Air conditioning control panel black 9-track connector on track 4 track 24 of the black 40-track connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Perform a check on the control panel; see unregulated air conditioning section. Contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-148

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

AIR CONDITIONING - USER SELECTION

AIR CONDITIONING KEY ET029

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored. Apply to manual heating and ventilation.

ET029 "Released" with press on the button.

Check the condition and connection of the black 9-track connector on the air conditioning control panel (tabs crushed, broken.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the black 40-track connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Air conditioning control panel black 9-track connector on track 7 track 30 of the black 40-track connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Perform a check on the control panel; see unregulated air conditioning section. Contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-149

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

Air conditioning - Cold loop

AIR CONDITIONING REQUEST ET030

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored. The status should be on when requested through the heating / ventilation control panel. The engine must be running.

ET030 "Inactive" despite an air conditioning request.

Manual heating and ventilation system

Check whether the ET091 "Engine running" state is "YES"; if it is "NO", run fault finding on the injection system. Check whether the ET029 "Air conditioning button" state is "DEPRESSED" with one press; if "RELEASED", run fault finding on that state. Check the ET015 "Passenger compartment ventilation" state, which should be "ACTIVE"; if "INACTIVE", run fault finding on that state. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

Climate control

Run fault finding on the air-conditioning computer. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-150

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING CONTROL

LIGHTING SETTING ET081

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored. For switch test, see Section 84.

ET081 "Dipped beam" with "Park" requested control stalk position. Check the operation of the following states: ET082 "Right hand indicator request": Place the control stalk on the right hand indicator, ET096 "Wiper intermittent speed ring position level 1": Place the intermittent speed ring in position 1. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained.

ET082 "Right-hand indicator request" ET096 "Wiper intermittent speed ring position level 1"

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

4

1

4

1 Change the steeringcolumn fingertip control

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control Track 3 Track 14 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 12 Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control track 12 Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control Track 3 Track 14 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. For switch test, see Section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-151

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING CONTROL

ET081 CONTINUED 1

ET081 "Dipped beam" with control stalk position on side lights requested.

Check the operation of the following states: ET080 "Rear screen wiper request": Place control stalk on rear screen wiper. ET096 "Wiper intermittent speed ring position level 1": Place the intermittent speed ring in position 1. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained.

ET080 "Rear screen wiper request" ET096 "Wiper intermittent speed ring position level 1"

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

4

1

4

1 Change the steeringcolumn fingertip control

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control Track 3 Track 14 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control Track 13 Track 5 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control Track 13 Track 5 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control Track 3 Track 14 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. For switch test, see Section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-152

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING CONTROL

ET081 CONTINUED 2

ET081 "Side lights" with control stalk position on main beam headlights requested. Check the operation of the following states: ET098 "Trip Computer button": Press the button at the end of the control stalk. ET096 "Wiper intermittent speed ring position level 1": Place the intermittent speed ring in position 1. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained.

ET098 "Trip Computer button" ET096 "Wiper intermittent speed ring position level 1"

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

Depressed

Released

Released

Depressed

4

1

4

1 Change the steeringcolumn fingertip control

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control Track 3 Track 14 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control Track 5 Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control Track 10 Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control Track 13 Track 5 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control Track 10 Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control Track 3 Track 14 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control Track 13 Track 5 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control Track 5 Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. For switch test, see Section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-153

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING CONTROL

ET081 CONTINUED 3

ET081 "Dipped beam" with control stalk position on headlight flash requested.

Check the operation of the following states: ET077 "Wiper stalk position": Place the wiper stalk on "Park" position. ET096 "Wiper intermittent speed ring position level 1": Place the intermittent speed ring in position 1. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained.

ET077 "Wiper stalk position" ET096 "Wiper intermittent speed ring position level 1"

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

Off

Intermittent facility

Intermittent facility

Off

4

1

4

1 Change the steering-column fingertip control

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control Track 5 Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control Track 8 Track 17 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control Track 5 Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control Track 8 Track 17 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. For switch test, see Section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-154

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING CONTROL

ET081 CONTINUED 4

ET081 "Side lights" with control stalk position on dipped beam requested.

Check the operation of the following states: ET077 "Wiper stalk position": Place the wiper stalk on "Park" position. ET096 "Wiper intermittent speed ring position level 1": Place the intermittent speed ring in position 1. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained.

ET077 "Wiper stalk position" ET096 "Wiper intermittent speed ring position level 1"

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

Off

Intermittent facility

Intermittent facility

Off

4

1

4

1 Change the steering-column fingertip control

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control Track 5 Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control Track 8 Track 17 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control Track 5 Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control Track 8 Track 17 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. For switch test, see Section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-155

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING CONTROL

REAR FOG LIGHTS REQUEST ET082

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored. See Section 84 (test procedure).

ET082 "Absent" with control stalk position on rear fog light requested.

Check the operation of the following states: ET083 "Left-hand indicator request": Place the control stalk on the left-hand indicator. ET080 "Rear screen wiper request": Place the wiper stalk in rear screen wiper position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET083 "Left-hand indicator request"

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET080 "Rear screen wiper request"

Absent

Present

Absent

Present See Chart 4

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control Track 2 Track 4 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control Track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control Track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control Track 2 Track 4 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. For switch test, see Section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-156

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING CONTROL

LEFT TURN SIGNAL REQUEST ET083

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored. For switch test, see Section 84.

ET083 "Absent" with control stalk position on left-hand indicator.

Check the operation of the following states: ET084 "Right-hand indicator request": Place the control stalk on the right-hand indicator. ET082 "Rear fog lights request": Place the control stalk on rear fog lights request. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET084 "Right-hand indicator request"

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET082 "Rear fog lights request"

Absent

Present

Absent

Present See Chart 4

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 14 Track 11 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 12 Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control track 12 Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control track 14 Track 11 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. For switch test, see Section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-157

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING CONTROL

RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR REQUEST ET084

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored. For switch test, see Section 84.

ET084 "Absent" with control stalk position on right-hand indicator.

Check the operation of the following states: ET083 "Left-hand indicator request": Place the control stalk on the left-hand indicator. ET096 "Wiper intermittent speed ring position level 3": Place the control stalk on rear fog lights request. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained. Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET083 "Left-hand indicator request"

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET096 "Wiper intermittent speed ring position level 3"

4

3

4

3 See Chart 5

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 12 Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Steering-column fingertip control track 14 Track 11 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control track 14 Track 11 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control track 12 Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. For switch test, see Section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-158

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING CONTROL

HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS BUTTON ET085

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored.

ET085 "Absent" with press on the switch.

Check on fuse F7B/RL 7 7.5 A of the Protection and Switching Unit. Replace it if necessary. Check on the grey 8-track connector of the doors/warning lights switch (e.g. connector properly connected, tabs crushed, broken, oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check on 40-track connectors PE2 and PE1 (e.g. connector properly connected, tabs crushed, broken, oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check for +12 V on track 3 and the earth and vehicle earth. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Switch track 6 Track 3 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH. Switch track 7 Track 35 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Power supply on track 3 Track 6 of the PPH 2 connector of the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check on the switch (depressed): tracks 6 and 7, If insulated, replace the switch. If continuity, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-159

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING CONTROL

ET085 CONTINUED

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored.

ET085 "Present" without press on the switch.

Check on the grey 8-track connector of the doors/warning lights switch. (connector properly connected, tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the 40-track PE2 and PE1 connectors. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Switch track 6 Track 3 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH. Switch track 7 Track 35 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Power supply on track 3 Track 6 of the PPH 2 connector of the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check on the switch (OFF): tracks 6 and 7, If insulated, replace the switch. If continuity, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-160

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING CONTROL

FRONT FOG LIGHTS REQUEST ET111

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored. See Section 84 (test procedure).

ET111 "Absent" with control stalk position on fog light requested.

Check the operation of the following states: ET083 "Left-hand indicator request": Place the control stalk on the left-hand indicator. ET080 "Rear screen wiper request": Place control stalk on rear screen wiper request. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET083 "Left-hand indicator request"

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET080 "Rear screen wiper request"

Absent

Present

Absent

Present See Chart 4

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control Track 2 Track 4 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control Track 2 Track 4 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. For switch test, see Section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-161

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING CONTROL

AUTOMATIC LIGHTING BUTTON ET113

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored. Refer to Section 84 (inspection method), only with rain sensor.

ET113 "Released" with one press on the button. Check the operation of the following states: ET083 "Left-hand indicator request": Place the control stalk on the left-hand indicator. ET096 "Wiper intermittent speed ring position level 1": Place the control stalk on rear fog lights request. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained.

ET083 "Left-hand indicator request" ET096 "Wiper intermittent speed ring position level 1"

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

4

1

4

1 Change the steeringcolumn fingertip control

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 12 Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 8 Track 17 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control track 5 Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control track 8 Track 17 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. For switch test, see Section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-162

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING CONTROL

REQUEST FROM LIGHT SENSOR TO SWITCH ON HEADLIGHTS ET115

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored. Vehicle fitted with sensor.

ET115 is "Inactive" without lights lit.

Replace the sensor.

ET115 is "Inactive" with lights lit.

Check on 15 A fuse of sensor power supply line. Replace it if necessary. Check on black 3-track connector of the sensor. (e.g. connector poorly connected, tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check on the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (e.g. connector properly connected, tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Sensor track 1 Track 11 of the Protection and Switch Unit PPH2 connector Sensor track 2 Track 2 of UCH connector PE2. Sensor track 3 Vehicle earth Repair if necessary. If necessary replace the sensor. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-163

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING CONTROL

ET115 CONTINUED

ET115 is "Active" without lights lit.

Check on black 3-track connector of the sensor, for connector poorly connected (e.g. tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check on 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (e.g. connector poorly connected, tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Sensor track 1 Track 11 of the Protection and Switch Unit PPH2 connector Sensor track 2 Track 2 of UCH connector PE2. Sensor track 3 Vehicle earth Repair if necessary. If necessary replace the sensor. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-164

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING POWER

INTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL ET112

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored.

ET112 "Inactive" when the footwells/floor are operative.

Check whether the footwell/floor switches operate correctly; if YES, contact your Techline. If NO, check for earth on tracks 9 and 10 of the PP3 connector of the UCH; if earth is present, check the continuity and insulation of the wiring harness between the UCH and the switch connectors (see wiring diagram). Repair if necessary. If the fault persists, replace the faulty switch.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-165

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL

VEHICLE SPEED PR008

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored.

Perform a complete diagnostic of the ABS and the Protection and Switching Unit. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-166

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL

WIPER STALK POSITION ET077

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored. To obtain state 081, main beam headlights, hold the switch in position. For switch test, see Section 84.

ET077 "Slow speed" but with control stalk in "Park" position requested. Check the operation of the following states: ET083 "Left-hand indicator request": Place the control stalk on the left-hand indicator. ET081 "Lighting stalk position": Place the control stalk on main beam headlights position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained. Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET083 "Left-hand indicator request"

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET081 "Lighting stalk position on main beam headlights"

Dipped headlights

Main beam

Dipped headlights

Main beam Change the steeringcolumn fingertip control

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control Track 5 Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control track 4 Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control Track 5 Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. For switch test, see Section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-167

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL

ET077 CONTINUED 1

NOTES

If no contact is detected by the UCH, slow speed is automatically selected.

ET077 "Slow speed" control stalk on "Park" requested position.

Change the steering-column fingertip control. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-168

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL

ET077 CONTINUED 2

ET077 "Slow speed" but with control stalk in fast speed requested position.

Check the operation of the following states: ET080 "Rear screen wiper request": Place the wiper stalk on a rear screen wiper request. ET081 "Intermittent speed ring position level 2": Place the intermittent speed ring on level 2. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained.

ET080 "Rear screen wiper request" ET096 "Intermittent speed ring position level 2"

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

4

2

4

2 Change the steeringcolumn fingertip control

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 9 Track 2 of the UCH 40-track PE2 connector Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 13 Track 5 of the UCH 40-track PE2 connector Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control track 13 Track 5 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control track 9 Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. For switch test, see Section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-169

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL

ET077 CONTINUED 3

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored. To obtain state 081, main beam headlights, hold the switch in position. For switch test, see Section 84.

ET077 "Level 2" but with intermittent speed level 1 requested. Check the operation of the following states: ET081 "Lighting stalk position": Place the lighting stalk on "Park" position. ET081 "Lighting stalk position": Place the lighting stalk on main beam headlights position.' Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained. Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET081 "Lighting stalk "Park" request position"

Off

Dipped headlights

Dipped headlights

Off

ET081 "Lighting stalk position on main beam headlights"

Dipped headlights

Main beam

Dipped headlights

Main beam Change the steeringcolumn fingertip control

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 8 Track 17 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 5 Track 12 of the UCH 40-track PE2 connector Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control track 8 Track 17 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. Steering-column fingertip control track 5 Track 12 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. For switch test, see Section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-170

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL

ET078 ET079

NOTES

FRONT WINDSCREEN WASHER REQUEST REAR SCREEN WASHER REQUEST

No faults may be present or stored. For switch test, see Section 84.

ET078 "Absent" with press on the control stalk. ET079 "Absent" with press on the control stalk.

Check on the steering-column fingertip control 6-track connector. E.g. connector poorly connected, tabs crushed, broken. Repair if necessary. Check the UCH 40-track PE1 connector. E.g. connector poorly connected, tabs crushed, broken. Repair if necessary. Check for +12 V on track 6 of the steering-column fingertip control connector. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control on track 1 Track 12 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH (front) Steering-column fingertip control on track 2 Track 28 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (rear) Control earth on track 5 Vehicle earth. Repair if necessary. Check the steering-column fingertip control black connector. Tracks 1 and 6 front windscreen washer control on; if insulated, change the control. Tracks 2 and 6 rear windscreen washer control on; if insulated, change the control. If continuity, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-171

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL

REAR SCREEN WIPER REQUEST ET080

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored. For switch test, see Section 84. To obtain ET082 "Rear fog lights request", hold the handle.

ET080 "Absent" with control stalk position on rear screen wiper requested. Check the operation of the following states: ET082 "Rear fog lights request": Place the lighting stalk on rear fog lights. ET077 "Wiper stalk position": Place the front wiper stalk on fast speed position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained. Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET082 "Rear fog lights request"

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET077 "Wiper stalk position at fast speed"

High speed

Low speed

Low speed

High speed See Chart 10

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 2 Track 4 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 13 Track 5 of the UCH 40-track PE2 connector Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control track 13 Track 5 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control track 2 Track 4 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. For switch test, see Section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-172

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL

WIPER INTERMITTENT RING POSITION ET096

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored. For switch test, see Section 84.

ET096 "Level 1" but with intermittent speed level 2 requested.

Check the operation of the following states: ET083 "Left-hand indicator request": Place the lighting stalk on the left-hand indicator. ET077 "Wiper stalk position": Place the front wiper stalk on slow speed position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained. Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET083 "Left-hand indicator request"

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET077 "Wiper stalk position at fast speed"

Off

Low speed

Off

Low speed Change the steeringcolumn fingertip control

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 9 Track 2 of the UCH 40-track PE2 connector Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control track 9 Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. For switch test, see Section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-173

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL

ET096 CONTINUED 1

ET096: "Level 1" but with intermittent speed level 3 requested.

Check the operation of the following states: ET083 "Right-hand indicator request": Place the lighting stalk on the right-hand indicator. ET077 "Wiper stalk position": Place the front wiper stalk on fast speed position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET084 "Right-hand indicator request"

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET077 "Wiper stalk position at fast speed"

Low speed

High speed

Low speed

High speed Change the steeringcolumn fingertip control

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 9 Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 12 Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control track 9 Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. For switch test, see Section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-174

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL

ET096 CONTINUED 2

NOTES

To obtain state ET081 Main beam headlights, hold the switch in position.

ET096 "Level 1" but with intermittent speed level 4 requested. Check the operation of the following states: ET077 "Wiper stalk position": Place the windscreen wiper stalk on fast speed. ET081 "Lighting stalk position": Place the lighting stalk on main beam headlights position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained. Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET077 "Wiper stalk position at fast speed"

High speed

Low speed

Low speed

High speed

ET081 "Lighting stalk position on main beam headlights"

Dipped headlights

Main beam

Dipped headlights

Main beam Change the steeringcolumn fingertip control

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 9 Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 12 Track 15 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control track 9 Track 2 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. For switch test, see Section 84. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-175

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL

REAR SCREEN WIPER PARK POSITION ET097

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored.

ET097 "Inactive"

Check the condition and connection of the white 3-track connector of the rear screen wiper (tabs crushed, broken). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken.). Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Rear screen wiper motor on track 2 Track 37 of the PE2 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity of the connection between connector track 3 and vehicle earth. Repair if necessary. Check the rear screen wiper motor. Check fitting. If everything is okay, replace the wiper motor. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-176

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL

REVERSE GEAR ENGAGED ET109

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored.

ET108 is "NO" when reverse gear is engaged.

Run complete fault finding on the Protection and Switching Unit.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-177

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL

ATX GEAR SELECTOR POSITION ET108

No faults may be present or stored. NOTES Special note: This state informs of the automatic transmission gear selector position.

ET108: "ABSENT", without automatic transmission, "OFF NEUTRAL", with a gear shift on position D, "NEUTRAL", gear selector lever on position N, "REVERSE", gear selector lever on position R, If there is an incorrect position, run fault finding on the automatic transmission. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-178

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL

WINDSCREEN WIPER REQUEST BY RAIN SENSOR ET114

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored. Vehicle fitted with sensor.

ET114 is "Inactive" without wiper in operation.

Replace the sensor.

ET114 is "Inactive" with wiper in operation.

Check on 15 A fuse of sensor power supply line. Replace if necessary. Check on black 3-track connector of the sensor (e.g. connector poorly connected, tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check on 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (e.g. connector poorly connected, tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Sensor track 1 Track 11 of the Protection and Switch Unit PPH2 connector Sensor track 2 Track 2 of UCH connector PE2. Sensor track 3 Vehicle earth Repair if necessary. If necessary replace the sensor. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-179

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

WIPERS - WIPER CONTROL

ET114 CONTINUED

ET114 is "Active" without wiper in operation.

Check on black 3-track connector of the sensor, for connector poorly connected (e.g. tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check on 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (e.g. connector poorly connected, tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Sensor track 1 Track 11 of the Protection and Switch Unit PPH2 connector Sensor track 2 Track 2 of UCH connector PE2. Sensor track 3 Vehicle earth Repair if necessary. If necessary replace the sensor. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-180

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

MAIN SCREEN

BATTERY VOLTAGE PR001

NOTES

None.

Check the + battery voltage reading.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-181

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

MAIN SCREEN

EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE PR002

NOTES

None.

Check the green 2-track connector of the temperature sensor (tabs crushed, oxidised, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the black 40-track connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, oxidised, broken, etc.). Repair it if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connections between: Temperature sensor track 1 Track 3 of the black 40-track connector of the UCH. Temperature sensor track 2 Track 13 of the black 40-track connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check sensor resistance on tracks 1 and 2. Replace the sensor if necessary. If the problem persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-182

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

MAIN SCREEN

CONTROL POWER LEVEL ET014

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored. Special note: This status displays the power level.

ET014: "NONE", no power supply "TIME-DELAYED", when a door is opened "+ ACCESSORIES", when the start switch is pressed "+ after ignition" at starting or a forced + after ignition setting Contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-183

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

MAIN SCREEN

ONE-TOUCH WINDOW ACTIVATION ET087

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored.

ET087 "Active" No operation of one or more one-touch windows.

Ensure the presence of earth on track 6 of the connector on the window lift suspected as faulty. Is earth present?

NO

Check earth at UCH output on track 7 of the 40-track PE2 connector. If there is no earth, contact your Techline. If the earth is present, ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: 40-track PE2 connector on track 7 Track 6 of the window lift connector Repair if necessary.

YES

AFTER REPAIR

Run complete fault finding on the window lift motor.

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-184

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

MAIN SCREEN

ET087 CONTINUED

ET087 "Inactive" No operation of one or more one-touch windows.

Run the AC025 "One-touch window enabling" command, and check for earth on track 6 of the window lift connector. Is earth present?

YES

NO

AFTER REPAIR

Operating conditions: Door open; if failure, check the door states. Power supply + accessories level raised at least once.

Run complete fault finding on the window lift motor.

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-185

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87B

MAIN SCREEN

TRIP COMPUTER BUTTON ET098

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored. This state should go to ON when the control is actuated.

ET098 "Released" with press on the button.

Check the operation of the following states: ET082 "Rear fog lights request": Place the lighting stalk on the fog lights position. ET081 "Lighting stalk position": Place the lighting stalk on dipped headlights position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding method according to the result obtained. Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET082 "Rear fog lights request"

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET081 "Dipped headlights wiper stalk position".

Off

Dipped headlights

Off

Dipped headlights Change the steeringcolumn fingertip control

Result 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Steering-column fingertip control track 2 Track 4 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary.

Result 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering-column fingertip control track 4 Track 9 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Steering-column fingertip control track 2 Track 4 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. For switch test, see Section 84. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-186

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

OPENING ELEMENT LOCKING AC004

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored. This command is for testing locking relay operation. The command lasts 7 seconds. Note: The driver's door circuit is shared with the fuel tank flap circuit.

One or more doors do not lock when the command is activated.

Check the condition and connection of the PP2 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the connector on the faulty lock(s). Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on: Driver's door and RH rear door locks, tracks C and D. Passenger's door and LH rear door locks, tracks A and B. Fuel tank flap lock motor, tracks 1 and 3. If faulty:

If okay: With the command activated, check the presence of +12 V: Driver's door and RH rear door locks on track D, taking the earth on track C. Passenger's door and LH rear door locks on track A, taking the earth on track B. Fuel tank flap lock motor on track 3, taking the earth on track 1. If okay, replace the faulty lock(s).

If faulty:

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-187

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

AC004 CONTINUED

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Driver's door bolt track C Fuel tank flap bolt track 1

Track 6 of the 12-track PP2 connector of the UCH

Driver's door bolt track D Fuel tank flap bolt track 3

Track 5 of the 12-track PP2 connector of the UCH

Passenger's door and LH rear door bolts track B RH rear door bolt track C

Track 8 of the 12-track PP2 connector of the UCH

Passenger's door and LH rear door bolts track A RH rear door bolt track D

Track 7 of the 12-track PP2 connector of the UCH

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-188

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

AC005 AC006

NOTES

UNLOCKING OF DOORS AND BOOT UNLOCKING OF DRIVER'S DOOR

No faults may be present or stored. This command is for testing unlocking relay operation. The driver's door circuit is shared with the fuel tank flap circuit. The command lasts 7 seconds.

One or more doors do not unlock when the commands are activated.

Check the condition and connection of the PP2 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the connector on the faulty lock(s). Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on: Driver's door and RH rear door locks, tracks C and D. Passenger's door and LH rear door locks, tracks A and B. Fuel tank flap lock motor, tracks 1 and 3. If faulty:

If okay: With the command activated, check the presence of +12 V: Driver's door and RH rear door locks on track C, taking the earth on track D. Passenger's door and LH rear door locks on track B, taking the earth on track A. Fuel tank flap lock motor on track 1, taking the earth on track 3. If okay, replace the faulty lock(s).

If faulty:

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-189

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

AC005 AC006 CONTINUED

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Driver's door bolt track C Fuel tank flap bolt track 1

Track 6 of the 12-track PP2 connector of the UCH

Driver's door bolt track D Fuel tank flap bolt track 3

Track 5 of the 12-track PP2 connector of the UCH

Passenger's door and LH rear door bolts track B RH rear door bolt track C

Track 8 of the 12-track PP2 connector of the UCH

Passenger's door and LH rear door bolts track A RH rear door bolt track D

Track 7 of the 12-track PP2 connector of the UCH

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-190

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING BUTTON INDICATOR AC020

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored. This command is used to see if the button has the proper power supply. The command lasts 7 seconds.

The electric door lock button light does not come on when the command is activated.

Check the condition and connection of the door locking button connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 5 of the electric door lock button connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for the presence of +12 V on track 5 of the electric door lock button connector. If okay, replace the switch. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector on the UCH Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Start switch track 5 Track 14 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-191

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

CHILD SAFETY INDICATOR LIGHT AC029

NOTES

No faults should be present or stored. This command is for testing child safety indicator light operation. The command lasts 7 seconds.

The child safety switch light does not come on when the command is activated.

Check the condition and connection of the child safety switch connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of +12 V on track A2 of the start switch connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for the presence of earth on track B3 of the child safety switch connector. If okay, replace the switch. Check the condition and connection of the PE1 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Start switch track A2 Track 9 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-192

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

ONE-TOUCH WINDOW ACTIVATION AC025

NOTES

No faults should be present or stored. This command can activate operation of the window lift motors after replacement of the UCH or a harmless loss of enabling. The command lasts 7 seconds.

After activation, perform reading of the ET087 "One-touch window enabling" state, to verify a change of state. If there is a problem, see the treatment for this condition.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-193

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

DRIVER-SIDE EXTERNAL AERIAL TEST AC032

Before executing this command, it is essential to have checked by means of command AC037 "Sender aerial diagnostics" that there is no fault on the aerials. There must be no faults present or stored. During this command, make sure that the vehicle is isolated from the other Mégane II's so as to make a correct diagnostic. NOTES Special Note This command is for testing correct operation of the driver-side external aerials. If the range exceeds 1.50 m, please check that there is no short circuit to earth on the aerials. This command lasts 1 minute. View the flashing of the card reader.

Front door

Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation of the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 Track 27 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH 4-track connector on track 2 Track 39 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-194

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

AC032 CONTINUED

Rear door

Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation of the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 Track 28 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH 4-track connector on track 2 Track 38 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-195

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

PASSENGER-SIDE EXTERNAL AERIAL TEST AC033

Before executing this command, it is essential to have checked by means of command AC037 "Sender aerial diagnostics" that there is no fault on the aerials. There must be no faults present or stored. During this command, make sure that the vehicle is isolated from the other Mégane II's so as to make a correct diagnostic. NOTES Special Note This command is for testing correct operation of the driver-side external aerials. If the range exceeds 1.50 m, check that there is no short circuit to earth on the aerials. This command lasts 1 minute. View the flashing of the card reader.

Front door

Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation against earth on the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 Track 31 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH 4-track connector on track 2 Track 34 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-196

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

AC033 CONTINUED

Rear door

Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation against earth on the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 Track 32 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH 4-track connector on track 2 Track 33 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-197

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

BOOT EXTERNAL AERIAL TEST AC033

Before executing this command, it is essential to have checked by means of command AC037 "Sender aerial diagnostics" that there is no fault on the aerials. There must be no faults present or stored. During this command, make sure that the vehicle is isolated from the other Mégane II's so as to make a correct diagnostic. NOTES Special Note This command is for testing correct operation of the driver-side external aerials. If the range exceeds 1.50 m, please check that there is no short circuit to earth on the aerials. This command lasts 1 minute. View the flashing of the card reader.

Check the condition and connection of the black 4-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation against earth on the following connections: 4-track connector on track 1 Track 29 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH 4-track connector on track 2 Track 40 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-198

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

INTERNAL AERIAL TEST AC034

Before executing this command, it is essential to have checked by means of command AC037 "Sender aerial diagnostics" that there is no fault on the aerials. There must be no faults present or stored. During this command, make sure that the vehicle is isolated from the other Mégane II's so as to make a correct diagnostic. NOTES Special Note This command is for testing correct operation of the internal aerials. If the range goes beyond the door sill, please check that there is no short circuit to earth on the aerials. This command lasts 1 minute. View the flashing of the card reader.

Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Ensure the insulation and continuity relative to earth of the following connections: 3-track connector on track 1 Track 25 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH 3-track connector on track 3 Track 24 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-199

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

AC034 CONTINUED 1

Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation against earth on the following connections: 3-track connector on track 1 Track 35 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH 3-track connector on track 3 Track 36 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-200

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

AC034 CONTINUED 2

Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track connector (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH (tabs crushed, broken, etc.). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation against earth on the following connections: 3-track connector on track 1 Track 26 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH 3-track connector on track 3 Track 37 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-201

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

SENDER AERIAL DIAGNOSTICS AC037

No faults should be present or stored.

NOTES

Special Note This command is for running diagnostics on the aerials in open circuit or short circuit at +12 V. This command lasts 1 minute.

After activating the command, perform fault reading. If one (or more) fault(s) concerning the aerials appear(s), refer to the processing of this (these) fault(s).

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-202

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - ACCESS

CARD CONTROL SC005

This command can indicate whether the card is blank, the card's assignment to the vehicle, the type of card and the card frequency. Normal operation Blank card

NO

Card assigned to vehicle

YES

Type of card

Hands-free or simple

Card frequency (MHz)

433

Abnormal operation Blank card

YES

Card assigned to vehicle

NO

Type of card

Hands-free or simple

Card frequency (MHz)

433

Blank card

NO

Card assigned to vehicle

NO

Type of card

Hands-free or simple

Card frequency (MHz)

433

Blank card

NO

Card assigned to vehicle

NO

Type of card

Hands-free or simple

Card frequency (MHz)

433

Blank card

YES

Card assigned to vehicle

YES

Type of card

Hands-free or simple

Card frequency (MHz)

433

This card is blank; you can carry out the assignment procedure.

This card does not belong to the vehicle; the card belongs to another type of vehicle.

This card does not belong to the vehicle; the card belongs to the Mégane II vehicle type.

Contact your Techline.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-203

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - PROTECTION

ENGINE IMMOBILISER INDICATOR LIGHT AC003

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored. The instrument panel must be seen present on the multiplex network. This command is for testing immobiliser indicator light operation. The command lasts 7 seconds.

The immobiliser indicator light does not come on when the command is activated.

Check the condition and connection of the instrument panel connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for the presence of earth on track 29 of the instrument panel. If okay, replace the instrument panel. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector on the UCH Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Instrument panel track 29 Track 29 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-204

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - PROTECTION

START SWITCH LIGHTING AC026

NOTES

No faults should be present or stored. This command is for testing start switch lighting operation. The command lasts 7 seconds.

The start switch light does not come on when the command is activated.

Check the condition and connection of the start switch connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 2 of the start switch connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for the presence of +12 V on track 4 of the start switch connector. If okay, replace the switch. Check the condition and connection of the PE1 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Start switch track 4 Track 13 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-205

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

KEYLESS VEHICLE - PROTECTION

CARD HOLDER LIGHTING AC024

NOTES

No faults should be present or stored. This command is for testing card reader operation. The command lasts 7 seconds.

The card holder light does not come on when the command is activated.

Check the condition and connection of the card holder connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 5 of the card holder connector. If okay:

If faulty: Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector on the UCH Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Card holder track 5 Track 25 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

With the command activated, check for the presence of +12 V on track 2 of the card holder connector. If okay, replace the card holder. Check the condition and connection of the PE1 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Card holder track 2 Track 4 of the 40-track PE1 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-206

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

Heating / Air conditioning

RCH RELAY 1. AC016

Check that the vehicle is fitted with passenger compartment heating resistors. No faults may be present or stored. This command is for testing the operation of the passenger compartment heating resistors. The command lasts 7 seconds.

NOTES

Ensure the presence of earth on tracks 2 and 4 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector. Repair if necessary.

With the command activated, check for the presence of +12 V on track 3 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector.

YES

NO With the command activated, check for the presence of +12 V on track A5 of passenger compartment heating resistor relay 1.

YES

NO

AFTER REPAIR

Check that the resistances between tracks 2 and 3 and between tracks 3 and 4 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector are equal to infinity. Replace the passenger compartment heating resistors if faulty. Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between track A5 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 1 and track 3 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector.

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-207

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

Heating / Air conditioning

AC016 CONTINUED

Contact your Techline. NO With the command activated, check for the presence of earth on track A2 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 1.

NO

With the command activated, check for the presence of earth on track 33 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. YES Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between track A2 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 1 and track 33 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

YES

Check for the presence of +12 V on track A3 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 1

NO

Check the presence, the condition and connection of the F7 fuse on the power supply fuse board. Repair if necessary. YES Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between track A3 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 1 and track 7 of the power supply fuse board.

YES

Check for the presence of +12 V on track A1 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 1.

NO

Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between track A1 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 1 and track 11 of the PPH2 connector of the Protection and Switching Unit.

If everything is okay, replace the relay.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-208

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

Heating / Air conditioning

RCH RELAY 2 AC017

Check that the vehicle is fitted with passenger compartment heating resistors. No faults may be present or stored. This command is for testing the operation of the passenger compartment heating resistors. The command lasts 7 seconds.

NOTES

Ensure the presence of earth on tracks 2 and 4 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector. Repair if necessary.

With the command activated, check for the presence of +12 V on tracks 1 and 5 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector.

YES

Check that the resistances between tracks 1 and 2 and between tracks 4 and 5 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector are equal to infinity. Replace the passenger compartment heating resistors if faulty.

NO With the command activated, check for the presence of +12 V on track B4 of passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2.

YES

Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between track B4 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2 and tracks 1 and 5 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector.

NO

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-209

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

Heating / Air conditioning

AC017 CONTINUED

Contact your Techline. NO With the command activated, check for the presence of earth on track B1 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2.

NO

With the command activated, check for the presence of earth on track 32 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH. YES Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between track B1 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2 and track 33 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH.

YES

Check for the presence of +12 V on track B3 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2.

NO

Check the presence, the condition and connection of the F9 fuse on the power supply fuse board. Repair if necessary. YES Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between track B3 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2 and track 9 of the power supply fuse board.

YES

Check for the presence of +12 V on track B2 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2.

NO

Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between track B2 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2 and track 11 of the PPH2 connector of the Protection and Switching Unit.

If everything is okay, replace the relay.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-210

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AIR CONDITIONING - USER SELECTION

AIR-CONDITIONING BUTTON INDICATOR LIGHT Manual heating and ventilation only. AC015

NOTES

No faults should be present or stored. This command is for testing air-conditioning indicator light operation. Apply the after ignition, and the air conditioning control panel should light up. The command lasts 7 seconds.

The indicator light does not come on when the command is activated.

Check the condition and connection of the heater control panel connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 5 of the heater control panel connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for the presence of +12 V on track 6 of the heater control panel connector. If okay, replace the control panel. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector on the UCH Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Control panel track 6 Track 26 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-211

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AIR CONDITIONING - USER SELECTION

REAR SCREEN DE-ICER INDICATOR LIGHT Except with climate control. AC019

NOTES

No faults should be present or stored. This command is for testing rear screen de-icer indicator light operation. Apply after ignition. The command lasts 7 seconds.

The rear screen de-icer indicator light does not come on when the command is activated.

Check the condition and connection of the heater control panel connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 5 of the heater control panel connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for the presence of +12 V on track 4 of the heater control panel connector. If okay, replace the control panel. Check the condition and connection of the PE2 connector on the UCH Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Control panel track 4 Track 38 of the 40-track PE2 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-212

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING POWER

REAR FOG LIGHTS AC009

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored. This command is for testing fog lights operation. Check the bulbs.

The rear fog lights do not come on when the command is activated.

Left-hand drive Check the condition and connection of the connector for each rear light. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on: 3- and 5-door saloon: on track 1 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 3 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 3 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check the presence of +12 V: 3- and 5-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 6 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 1 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 1 of the rear light connector. If okay, check the bulbs again, and if still not okay replace the rear light. Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: 3- and 5-door saloon: track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: track 6 of the rear light connector. Estate: track 1 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: track 1 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary.

Track 6 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH

If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-213

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING POWER

AC009 CONTINUED

Right-hand drive Check the condition and connection of the connector for each rear light. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on: 3- and 5-door saloon: on track 4 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 5 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 3 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 4 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check the presence of +12 V: 3- and 5-door saloon: on track 3 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 1 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 1 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 6 of the rear light connector. If okay, check the bulbs again, and if still not okay replace the rear light. Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: 3- and 5-door saloon: track 3 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: track 1 of the rear light connector. Estate: track 1 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: track 6 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary.

Track 6 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH

If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-214

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING POWER

LH DIRECTION INDICATOR AC022

NOTES

No faults should be present or stored. This command is for testing direction indicator operation. Apply after ignition. Check the bulbs.

The direction indicators do not light when the command is activated.

Check the condition and connection of the connectors for the left-hand headlight, the left-hand repeater and the LH rear light. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on the faulty component: Track 1 headlight not fitted with discharge bulb / Tracks 1 and 4 headlight fitted with discharge bulb Track 2 repeater Rear light: 3- and 5-door saloon: on track 3 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 3 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 3 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary. With the control activated, check for the presence of + 12 V on the faulty component: Track 3 headlight not fitted with discharge bulb / Track 8 headlight fitted with discharge bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3- and 5-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 1 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 2 of the rear light connector. If okay, check the bulbs again, and if still not okay replace the rear light(s).

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-215

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING POWER

LH direction indicator AC022

Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Track 3 headlight not fitted with discharge bulb Track 8 headlight fitted with discharge bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3- and 5-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 1 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary.

Track 4 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH

If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-216

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING POWER

RH DIRECTION INDICATOR AC023

NOTES

No faults should be present or stored. This command is for testing direction indicator operation. Apply after ignition. Check the bulbs.

The direction indicators do not light when the command is activated.

Check the condition and connection of the connectors for the right-hand headlight, the right-hand repeater and the RH rear light. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on the faulty component: Track 1 headlight not fitted with discharge bulb / Tracks 1 and 4 headlight fitted with discharge bulb Track 2 repeater Rear light: 3- and 5-door saloon: on track 3 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 5 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 3 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 4 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary. With the control activated, check for the presence of + 12 V on the faulty component: Track 3 headlight not fitted with discharge bulb / Track 8 headlight fitted with discharge bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3- and 5-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 6 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 5 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary. If okay, check the bulbs again, and if still not okay replace the rear light(s). Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-217

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING POWER

AC023 CONTINUED

Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Track 3 headlight not fitted with discharge bulb Track 8 headlight fitted with discharge bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3- and 5-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 6 of the rear light connector. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light connector. Cabriolet: on track 5 of the rear light connector. Repair if necessary.

Track 4 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH

If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-218

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING POWER

INTERIOR LIGHTS AC021

NOTES

No faults may be present or stored. This command is for testing interior lights operation. Check the bulbs.

The interior lights do not light when the command is activated.

Check the condition and connection of the interior lights connectors. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 3 of each interior light. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for the presence of +12 V on track 2 of each interior light. If okay, check the bulbs again, and if still not okay replace the interior light(s). Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Track 2 of each interior light Track 1 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-219

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

LIGHTING - LIGHTING POWER

FOOTWELL/FLOOR LIGHTS AC027

NOTES

No faults should be present or stored. This command is for testing footwell/floor lights operation. Check the bulbs.

Check the condition and connection of the footwell lighting connectors. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of +12 V on track 1 of each footwell light. If okay:

If faulty: Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Track 1 of each interior light Track 9 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

With the command activated, check for the presence of earth on track 2 of each footwell light. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Track 2 of each interior light Track 10 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-220

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

WIPERS - WIPER POWER

REAR SCREEN WIPER AC007

NOTES

No faults should be present or stored. This command is for testing rear wiper operation. The command lasts 7 seconds.

The rear screen wiper does not operate when the command is activated.

Check the condition and connection of the rear screen wiper motor connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 3 of the rear screen wiper connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for the presence of +12 V on track 1 of the rear screen wiper connector. If everything is okay, replace the rear screen wiper motor. Check the condition and connection of the PE3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Motor track 1 Track 37 of the 40-track PE3 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-221

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

WIPERS - WIPER POWER

HEADLIGHT WASHER RELAY 1 AC030

No faults should be present or stored. This command is for testing headlight washer 1 operation. The command lasts 7 seconds.

NOTES

Check for the presence of earth on tracks 1 and 2 of the headlight washer pump. Is it correct?

Faulty on track 2

Carry out the fault finding procedure for command AC031 Headlight washer relay 2

YES Faulty on track 1

With the command activated, check for the presence of +12 V on track 1 of the headlight washer pump. Is it correct? NO

YES Replace the headlight washer pump.

Check the condition and connection of the headlight washer relay 1 connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track A4 of the relay connector. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between: Headlight washer relay 1 track A3 Track 1 of the headlight washer pump. Repair if necessary. If everything is okay, replace the relay.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-222

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

WIPERS - WIPER POWER

AC030 CONTINUED

Check the condition and connection of headlight washer relay 1. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of +12 V on tracks A2 and A5 of the relay connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for the presence of earth on track A2 of the relay connector. Is it correct? NO Check the condition and connection of the PE3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. YES

Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between: Relay connector track A2 Track 13 of UCH connector PE3. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between: Headlight washer relay 1 track A3 Track 1 of the headlight washer pump. Repair if necessary. If everything is okay, replace the relay.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-223

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

WIPERS - WIPER POWER

HEADLIGHT WASHER RELAY 2 AC031

No faults should be present or stored. This command is for testing headlight washer 2 operation. The command lasts 7 seconds.

NOTES

Check for the presence of earth on tracks 1 and 2 of the headlight washer pump. Is it correct?

Faulty on track 1

Carry out the fault finding procedure for command AC030 Headlight washer relay 1

YES Faulty on track 2

With the command activated, check for the presence of +12 V on track 2 of the headlight washer pump. Is it correct? NO

YES Replace the headlight washer pump.

Check the condition and connection of the headlight washer relay 2 connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track B4 of the relay connector. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between: Headlight washer relay 1 track B3 Track 2 of the headlight washer pump. Repair if necessary. If everything is okay, replace the relay.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-224

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

WIPERS - WIPER POWER

AC031 CONTINUED

Check the condition and connection of headlight washer relay 2. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of +12 V on tracks B2 and A5 of the relay connector. Repair if necessary. With the command activated, check for the presence of earth on track B2 of the relay connector. Is it correct? NO Check the condition and connection of the PE3 connector on the UCH. Repair if necessary. YES

Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between: Relay connector track B2 Track 14 of UCH connector PE3. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between: Headlight washer relay 1 track B3 Track 1 of the headlight washer pump. Repair if necessary. If everything is okay, replace the relay.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the fault finding procedure on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other possible faults. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-225

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

These customer complaints should only be investigated after a complete check has been run using the diagnostic tool.

NOTES

CUSTOMER COMPLAINTS NO DIALOGUE WITH THE COMPUTER

Chart 1

LIGHTING NO REAR FOG LIGHT

Chart 2

NO RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR

Chart 3

NO LEFT DIRECTION INDICATOR

Chart 4

NO SIDE LIGHTS

Chart 5

NO DIPPED HEADLIGHTS

Chart 6

NO MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS

Chart 7

NO FRONT FOG LIGHTS

Chart 8

WIPERS, WASHERS NO REAR SCREEN WIPER

Chart 9

NO REAR PARK POSITION

Chart 10

NO WINDSCREEN WIPER PARK POSITION

Chart 11

NO WINDSCREEN WIPER

Chart 12

NO FRONT AND REAR SCREEN WASHER

Chart 13

NO HEADLIGHT WASHERS

Chart 14

NO AUTOMATIC WINDOW RAISING AT SECOND PRESS ON CARD OR HANDLE

Chart 15

NO AUTOMATIC RAISING OF ONE OF THE FRONT WINDOWS BY A SECOND PRESS ON CARD OR HANDLE

Chart 16

WINDOW LIFT

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-226

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

NOTES

87B

These customer complaints should only be investigated after a complete check has been run using the diagnostic tool.

CUSTOMER COMPLAINTS

NO AUTOMATIC RAISING OF ONE OF THE REAR WINDOWS BY A SECOND PRESS ON CARD OR HANDLE

Chart 17

NO RAISING OR LOWERING OF THE PASSENGER'S WINDOW

Chart 18

NO RAISING OR LOWERING OF THE DRIVER'S WINDOW

Chart 19

NO RAISING OR LOWERING OF THE LH REAR WINDOW

Chart 20

NO RAISING OR LOWERING OF THE RH REAR WINDOW

Chart 21

ELECTRIC WINDOWS DO NOT OPERATE

Chart 22

NO SUNROOF CLOSING AT SECOND PRESS ON CARD OR HANDLE

Chart 23

NO SUNROOF OPENING OR CLOSING WHATEVER THE USER'S REQUEST

Chart 24

NO SUNROOF OPENING POSITION 1 NO SUNROOF OPENING POSITION 2 NO SUNROOF OPENING POSITION 3

Chart 25

NO FOLDING-IN OR FOLDING-OUT OF ONE OR MORE DOOR MIRRORS

Chart 26

NO ADJUSTMENT ON ONE OF THE TWO DOOR MIRRORS

Chart 27

POWER

NO + ACCESSORIES

Chart 28

+ AFTER IGNITION REMAINS BLOCKED

Chart 29

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-227

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

Chart 1

87B

No dialogue with the computer

Check the condition and connection of the battery connections. Check the condition of the power fuses on the battery's positive terminal. Check the battery voltage. Repair if necessary.

NOTES

Is it possible to switch on the ignition or another power supply level?

YES

Refer to Chart 1 in multiplexing section "88B". Has the fault disappeared?

NO NO Perform locking/unlocking. Did locking/unlocking operate?

Refer to the "fault processing, multiplex network inoperative" part of the multiplexing section "88B".

YES

NO Check the condition and connection of connector PP1. Repair if necessary. Ensure the presence of earth on track 1 of the connector PP1 and on track 2 of connector PP3. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of +12 V on tracks 3 and 4 of connector PP1. Are the power supplies okay? YES NO Contact your Techline. Repair the faulty connections and fuses up to the battery, checking the passenger compartment relay and fuse boxes and the power supply fuse board.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-228

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 2

No rear fog lights

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check the bulbs. Are they in good condition?

NO

Replace the bulbs.

NO

Run fault finding on the state.

NO

Run fault finding on the command.

YES Check state 082 "Rear fog lights request" by actuating the control stalk. Is it present? YES Run command AC009 "Rear fog lights". Is the fog light controlled? YES For switch test, see Section 84. Replace the steering-column fingertip control. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-229

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 3

No right-hand direction indicator

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check the bulbs. Are they in good condition?

NO

Replace the bulbs.

YES Perform a power supply check. Is there a supply?

Check the connector for oxidation.

NO Check state 084 "Right-hand indicator request" by actuating the control stalk. Is it present?

Run fault finding on the state.

YES Run the AC023 "Right-hand indicator" command; is the right-hand indicator controlled?

NO

Run fault finding on the command.

YES For switch test, see Section 84. Replace the steering-column fingertip control. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-230

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 4

No left direction indicator

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check the bulbs. Are they in good condition?

NO

Replace the bulbs.

YES Perform a power supply check. Is there a supply?

Check the connector for oxidation.

NO Check state 083 "Left-hand indicator request" by actuating the control stalk. Is it present?

NO

Run fault finding on the state.

NO

Run fault finding on the command.

YES Run the AC022 "Left-hand indicator" command; is the left-hand indicator controlled? YES For switch test, see Section 84. Replace the steering-column fingertip control. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-231

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 5

No side lights

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check the bulbs. Are they in good condition?

NO

Replace the bulbs.

YES Perform a power supply check. Is there a supply?

Check the connector for oxidation.

NO Check state 081 "Lighting switch position". Is the side lights request on "side lights"?

NO

Run fault finding on the state.

YES Run diagnostics on the Power and Switch Unit.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-232

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 6

No dipped headlights

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check the bulbs. Are they in good condition?

NO

Replace the bulbs.

YES Perform a power supply check. Is there a supply?

Check the connector for oxidation.

NO Check state 081 "Lighting switch position". Is the dipped beam headlight request on "dipped beam"?

NO

Run fault finding on the state.

YES Run diagnostics on the Power and Switch Unit.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-233

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 7

No main beam headlights

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check the bulbs. Are they in good condition?

NO

Replace the bulbs.

YES Perform a power supply check. Is there a supply?

Check the connector for oxidation.

NO Check state 081 "Lighting stalk position": is the main beam headlight request on "main beam headlight"?

NO

Run fault finding on the state.

YES Run diagnostics on the Power and Switch Unit.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-234

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 8

No front fog lights

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check state 111 "Front fog lights request". Is it present?

Run fault finding on the state.

YES Run diagnostics on the Power and Switch Unit.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-235

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 9

No rear screen wiper

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check state 080 "Rear screen wiper request" for present. Is it present?

NO

Run fault finding on the state.

NO

Run fault finding on the command.

YES Run command AC007 "Rear screen wiper". Check the power supply of the wiper motor: On track 2 for +12 V. On track 3 for earth. Is the rear wiper controlled? YES For switch test, see Section 84. Replace the steering-column fingertip control. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-236

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 10

No rear screen wiper park position

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check state 097 "Rear screen wiper park position" for absent. Is it absent?

YES

Run fault finding on the state.

NO Contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-237

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 11

No windscreen wiper park position

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check state 077 "Wiper stalk position" Park position request. Is it present?

NO

Run fault finding on the state.

YES Protection and Switching Unit fault finding.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-238

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 12

No windscreen wiper

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check state 077 "Wiper stalk position"; is the position on "intermittent wiping", "slow speed" or "fast speed"?

NO

Run fault finding on the state.

Check whether state 114 "Wiper request by rain sensor" is "active".

NO

Run fault finding on the state.

YES Protection and Switching Unit fault finding.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-239

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 13

No front and rear screen washer

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Windscreen washer

Check state 078 "Windscreen washer request". Is it present?

NO

Run fault finding on the state.

NO

Check the continuity and insulation of track 2 of the pump and track 1 of the steering-column fingertip control on the black 6-track connector.

NO

Check the continuity and insulation of track 1 of the pump and track 2 of the steering-column fingertip control on the black 6-track connector.

YES Check for +12 V on track 2 of the window washer pump when activated; is +12 V present? YES Check for an earth on track 1 of the window washer pump; is earth present? YES Check the hoses. If everything is okay: Replace the windscreen washer pump.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-240

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 13 CONTINUED

Rear screen washer

Check state 079 "Windscreen washer request". Is it present?

NO

Run fault finding on the state.

NO

Check the continuity and insulation of track 1 of the pump and track 2 of the steering-column fingertip control on the black 6-track connector.

NO

Check the continuity and insulation of track 2 of the pump and track 1 of the steering-column fingertip control on the black 6-track connector.

YES Check for +12 V on track 1 of the window washer pump when activated; is +12 V present? YES Check for an earth on track 2 of the window washer pump; is earth present? YES Check the hoses. If everything is okay: Replace the windscreen washer pump.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-241

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 14

No headlight washers

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check whether dipped headlights state ET081 "Lighting stalk position" is on side lights.

NO

Run fault finding on the state.

NO

Run fault finding on the state.

NO

Run fault finding on the command.

YES Check whether dipped headlights state ET078 "Windscreen washer request" is present on side lights. YES Run commands AC030 "Headlight washer relay 1" and AC031 "Headlight relay 2" Do the commands operate? YES Check the condition of the pipes and nozzles. Repair if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-242

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 15

No automatic window raising at second press on card or handle

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check manual operation of the four windows: Do they operate by 50 mm steps?

NO

Check on 25 A and 40 A fuses. Check power supply on track 4 of the earth modules Repair if necessary.

YES Redo programming of the four windows.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-243

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 16

No automatic raising of one of the front windows by a second press on card or handle

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Open the 4 windows and with the card request automatic raising. Is there a confirmation of the fault?

NO

Go over the list of symptoms, and deal with that which corresponds.

YES YES

Do the manual controls cause raising by 50 mm steps? NO Check correct operation of the one-touch window, Chart 19, Chart 20.

Redo programming of the four windows.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-244

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 17

No automatic raising of one of the rear windows by a second press on card or handle

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Open the 4 windows and with the card request automatic raising. Is there a confirmation of the fault?

NO

Go over the list of symptoms, and deal with that which corresponds.

YES YES

Do the manual controls cause raising by 50 mm steps? NO Check correct operation of the one-touch window, Chart 21, Chart 22.

Redo programming of the four windows.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-245

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 18

No raising or lowering of the passenger's one-touch window

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check, on the driver's control panel, whether the window lift operates.

NO

YES Check on switch according to the method (Section 84A).

Replace the switch.

Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Passenger switch on track A2 Track 1 of the motor, Passenger switch on track A1 Track 2 of the motor, Passenger switch on track A3 Track 2 of the white connector of the driver switch, Passenger switch on track B1 Track 3 of the black connector of the driver switch. Repair if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-246

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 18 CONTINUED

Check on switch according to the method 84A.

NO

Replace the switch.

YES Check on state 087 "One-touch window enabling". Is it active?

Run fault finding on this state.

YES Check for earth on track 6 of the motor connector.

Run command AC025. Run fault finding on this command.

Ensure +12 V on track 4 of the window-lift motor. YES Check for earth on track 3 of the electric motor. Repair if necessary.

Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: White connector of the driver control panel track 2 Passenger switch on track A3, Black connector of driver control panel track 3 Passenger switch on track B1, Black connector of the driver control panel track 2 Track 2 of the motor, White connector of the driver control panel track 1 Track 1 of the motor. Repair if necessary. YES Replace the engine.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-247

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 19

No raising or lowering of the driver's one-touch window

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check the fuses and change them if necessary. YES Check on switch according to the method (Section 84A).

Replace the switch.

YES Check on state 087 "One-touch window enabling". Is it active?

NO

Run fault finding on this state.

NO

Run command AC025. Run fault finding on this command.

YES Check for earth on track 6 of the motor connector. YES Ensure +12 V on track 4 of the window-lift motor. Repair if necessary YES Check for earth on track 3 of the window lift motor. Repair if necessary

Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Black connector of the driver switch track 5 Track 2 of the motor, White connector of the driver switch track 4 Track 1 of the motor, Repair if necessary. YES Replace the engine.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool. UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-248

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 20

No raising or lowering of the one-touch LH rear window

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check, on the driver's control panel, whether the window lift operates.

NO

YES Check on indicator light and whether state ET089 is present.

Run fault finding on this state.

Check on switch according to the method 84A.

Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: LH rear switch on track B2 Track 1 of the motor, LH rear switch on track A1 Track 2 of the motor, LH rear switch on track A3 Track 2 of the white connector of the driver control panel, LH rear switch on track B1 Track 5 of the white connector of the driver control panel, LH rear switch on track A2 Track B1 of the child safety switch connector. Repair if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-249

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 20 CONTINUED

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check on switch according to the method 84A.

NO

Check on state 87 "One-touch window enabling". Is it active?

Replace the switch.

Run fault finding on this state.

YES Check for earth on track 6 of the motor connector.

NO

Run command AC025. Run fault finding on this command.

Ensure +12 V on track 4 of the window lift motor, and repair if necessary.

Check for earth on track 3 of the electric motor and the vehicle. Repair if necessary.

Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: White connector of the driver control panel track 2 Track A3 of the LH rear switch, Black connector of driver control panel track 3 Track B1 of the LH rear switch, Black connector of the driver control panel track 2 Track 2 of the motor, White connector of the driver control panel track 1 Track 1 of the motor. Repair if necessary. YES Replace the engine.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-250

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 21

No raising or lowering of the one-touch RH rear window

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check whether, on the driver control panel, the window lift operates.

NO

YES Run fault finding on this state.

Check whether state ET089 is present.

Check on switch according to the method 84A.

Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: RH rear switch on track B2 Track 1 of the motor RH rear switch on track A1 Track 2 of the motor RH rear switch on track A3 Track 2 of the white connector of the driver switch RH rear switch on track B1 Track 5 of the white connector of the driver switch RH rear switch on track A2 Track B1 of the child safety switch connector Repair if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-251

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 21 CONTINUED

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check on switch according to the method 84A.

NO

Check on state 87 "One-touch window enabling". Is it active?

Replace the switch.

Run fault finding on this state.

YES Check for earth on track 6 of the motor connector.

NO

Run command AC025. Run fault finding on this command.

Ensure +12 V on track 4 of the window lift motor, and repair if necessary.

Check for earth on track 3 of the electric motor and the vehicle. Repair if necessary.

Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: White connector of the driver control panel track 2 Track A3 of the RH rear switch, Black connector of driver control panel track 3 Track B1 of the RH rear switch, Black connector of the driver control panel track 2 Track 2 of the motor, White connector of the driver control panel track 1 Track 1 of the motor. Repair if necessary. YES Replace the engine.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-252

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 22

The window lifts are not working

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check for +12 V on track 5 of the white connector on driver's side. On tracks A1 and B2 of the brown connector on passenger's side. Is there + 12 V?

NO

Check on the 40 A fuse of the passenger compartment relay and fuse box. Check the insulation and continuity of the connection. Repair if necessary.

NO

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection. Repair if necessary.

NO

Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connections. Repair if necessary. If everything is okay: Replace the faulty switch.

YES Check for earth on track 4 of the black connector. Is there an earth? YES Check for +12 V on the grey connector. Check the earth. Is there + 12 V? Is there an earth? YES Check the runners. If everything is OK, replace the faulty electric motor.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-253

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 23

No sunroof closing at second press on card or on handle switch

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Open the sunroof and actuate the card or the handle.

NO

Go over the list of symptoms. Process that corresponding to the fault.

YES Does central door locking operate with the card? YES

NO

Perform the test with a second card or the handle. YES

NO

Repair the first card. Is the fault still present?

Run complete fault finding on the locking/unlocking system.

YES End.

Redo programming.

AFTER REPAIR

NO Check the 20 A fuse. Replace it if necessary. Ensure +12 V on track 7. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the following connection: sunroof motor track 9 Track 7 of the PE2 connector of the UCH. Repair if necessary. Contact your Techline.

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-254

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 24

No sunroof opening or closing whatever the user's request

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check for +12 V on track 7 of the motor. Is there +12 V?

YES

Check for earth on track 10 of the motor and the vehicle body. Repair if necessary.

NO

Check the 20A fuse. Replace it if necessary.

Replace the switch. If the fault persists, change the sunroof motor.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-255

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 25

No sunroof opening in position 1 No sunroof opening in position 2 No sunroof opening in position 3

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Sunroof switch on track 3 Track 4 of the motor. Sunroof switch on track 2 Track 3 of the motor. Sunroof switch on track 5 Track 2 of the motor. Sunroof switch on track 1 Track 1 of the motor.

Replace the switch if necessary. If the fault persists, replace the electric motor.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-256

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 26

No folding-in or folding-out of one or more door mirrors

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check for +12 V on the door mirror switch control. Is there + 12 V?

Check the fuse. Replace it if necessary.

Check for earth. Repair if necessary.

Check for continuity of switch: Tracks 5 and 1 for folding-in Tracks 4 and 10

Replace the switch if necessary.

Tracks 4 and 1 for folding-out Tracks 5 and 10

Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Door mirror switch track 10 Door mirror switch track 1

Track 9 of the left-hand door mirror Track 7 of the right-hand door mirror Track 7 of the left-hand door mirror Track 9 of the right-hand door mirror

Replace the door mirror(s).

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-257

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 27

No adjustment on one of the door mirrors

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Non-retractable door mirror. Left-hand door mirror.

Check for continuity of switch: Tracks A3/A2 and B3/B4 Slanting upward. Tracks A3/B3 and A2/B4 Slanting downward. Tracks A1/A2 and B3/B4 Slanting leftward. Tracks A1/B3 and A2/B4 Slanting rightward.

Replace the switch if necessary.

Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Door mirror switch track A3 Track 2 of the left-hand door mirror. Door mirror switch track A1 Track 4 of the left-hand door mirror. Door mirror switch track B4 Track 3 of the left-hand door mirror.

Replace the door mirror.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-258

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 27 CONTINUED 1

Non-retractable door mirror. Right-hand door mirror.

Check for continuity of switch: Tracks B2/A2 and B3/B4 Slanting upward. Tracks B2/B3 and A2/B4 Slanting downward. Tracks B1/A2 and B3/B4 Slanting leftward. Tracks B1/B3 and A2/B4 Slanting rightward.

Replace the switch if necessary.

Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Door mirror switch track B2 Track 2 of the left-hand door mirror. Door mirror switch track B1 Track 4 of the left-hand door mirror. Door mirror switch track B4 Track 3 of the left-hand door mirror. Repair if necessary.

Replace the door mirror.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-259

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 27 CONTINUED 2

Retractable door mirror. Left-hand door mirror.

Check for continuity of switch: Tracks 7/5 and 4/3 Slanting upward. Tracks 7/4 and 5/3 Slanting downward. Tracks 9/5 and 4/3 Slanting leftward. Tracks 9/4 and 5/3 Slanting rightward.

Replace the switch if necessary.

Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Door mirror switch track 7 Track 2 of the left-hand door mirror. Door mirror switch track 9 Track 4 of the left-hand door mirror. Door mirror switch track 3 Track 3 of the left-hand door mirror. Repair if necessary.

Replace the door mirror.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-260

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 27 CONTINUED 3

Retractable door mirror. Right-hand door mirror.

Check for continuity of switch: Tracks 6/5 and 4/3 Slanting upward. Tracks 6/4 and 5/3 Slanting downward. Tracks 8/5 and 4/3 Slanting leftward. Tracks 8/4 and 5/3 Slanting rightward.

Replace the switch if necessary.

Check for continuity and insulation of the following connections: Door mirror switch track 7 Track 2 of the left-hand door mirror. Door mirror switch track 8 Track 4 of the left-hand door mirror. Door mirror switch track 6 Track 3 of the left-hand door mirror. Repair if necessary.

Replace the door mirror.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-261

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 28

No + accessories

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check on state ET070 "Start switch"; is the state "Depressed" with action on the switch?

NO

Run fault finding on the state.

NO

Run fault finding on the state.

NO

Check the card with command SC005 and run fault finding on this command.

YES Check that the card is not perceived as absent by means of the messages on the instrument panel. Card perceived as absent? NO Check on state ET075 "+ Accessories present"; is the state "YES" with action on the switch?

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-262

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Vdiag No.: 44 Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87B

Chart 29

+ After ignition remains blocked

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

Check on state ET070 "Start switch"; is the state "Depressed" with action on the switch?

NO

Run fault finding on the state.

YES Run complete fault finding on the Protection and Switching Unit.

AFTER REPAIR

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

UCH B/C 84 version 2

87B-263

187B UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Introduction

87B

1. SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT This document presents the fault finding procedure applicable to all computers with the following specifications: Vehicle(s): Mégane II, Scénic II Function concerned: UCH

Name of computer: UCH Vdiag No.: 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50, 44

2. PREREQUISITES FOR FAULT FINDING Documentation type: Fault finding procedures (this document): – Assisted fault finding (integrated into the diagnostic tool), Dialogys. Wiring Diagrams: – Visu-Schéma (CD-ROM), paper version. Diagnostic tools type: – CLIP Special tooling required: Special tooling required Multimeter Elé. 1681

Universal bornier

3. REMINDER Procedure To run fault finding on the vehicle computers, switch on the forced + after ignition feed. Proceed as follows: Switch on the forced + after ignition feed: – with the vehicle card in the card reader, – press and hold the Start button (longer than 5 seconds) with start-up conditions not present, – connect the diagnostic tool and perform the required operations. Switching off the forced + after ignition feed: Press the start button twice briefly (less than 3 seconds); check that the + after ignition feed has cut (computer indicator lights on the instrument panel go out).

UCH_V44_PRELI/UCH_V48_PRELI/UCH_V4C_PRELI/ UCH_V4D_PRELI/UCH_V4F_PRELI/UCH_V50_PRELI

87B-1

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Introduction

87B

Faults Faults are declared as either present or stored (depending on whether they appeared in a certain context and have disappeared since, or whether they remain present but have not been diagnosed within the current context). The present or stored status of faults should be taken into consideration when the diagnostic tool is used following the + after ignition supply being switched on (without acting on the system components). For a present fault, apply the procedure described in the Interpretation of faults section. For a stored fault, note the faults displayed and apply the instructions in the Notes section. If the fault is confirmed when the instructions in the Notes section are applied, the fault is present. Deal with the fault If the fault is not confirmed, check: – the electrical lines which correspond to the fault, – the connectors on these lines (corrosion, bent pins, etc.), – the resistance of the component detected as faulty, – the condition of the wires (melted or split insulation, wear).

Conformity check The aim of the conformity check is to check data that does not produce a fault on the diagnostic tool because the data is inconsistent. Therefore, this stage is used to: – carry out fault finding on faults that do not have a fault display, and which may correspond to a customer complaint. – check that the system is operating correctly and that there is no risk of a fault recurring after repairs. This section gives the fault finding procedures for statuses and parameters and the conditions for checking them. If a status is not behaving normally or a parameter is outside the permitted tolerance values, consult the corresponding fault finding page.

Customer complaints - Fault finding chart When the test using the diagnostic tool is correct but the customer complaint is still present, the fault must be dealt with by customer complaint. A summary of the overall procedure to follow is provided on the following page in the form of a flow chart.

87B-2

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Introduction

87B

4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Perform a pre-diagnostic on the system

Print the system fault finding log (available on CLIP and in the Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note)

Connect CLIP

Dialogue with computer?

no See ALP no. 1

yes Read the faults

Faults present

no Conformity check

yes Deal with present faults

The cause is still present

Deal with stored faults

yes

no

Fault solved

Use fault finding charts (ALPs) The cause is still present

no

Fault solved The cause is still present

yes

yes Contact the Techline with the completed fault finding log

87B-3

no

Fault solved

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Introduction

87B

4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE (continued) Wiring check Fault finding problems Disconnecting the connectors and/or manipulating the wiring harness may temporarily remove the cause of a fault. Electrical measurements of voltage, resistance and insulation are generally correct, especially if the fault is not present when the analysis is made (stored fault). Visual inspection Look for damage under the bonnet and in the passenger compartment. Carefully check the fuses, insulation and wiring harness routing. Look for signs of oxidation. Tactile inspection While manipulating the wiring harness, use the diagnostic tool to note any change in fault status from stored to present. Make sure that the connectors are properly locked. Apply light pressure to the connectors. Twist the wiring harness. If there is a change in status, try to locate the source of the fault. Inspection of each component Disconnect the connectors and check the appearance of the clips and tabs, as well as the crimping (no crimping on the insulating section). Make sure that the clips and tabs are properly locked in the sockets. Check that no clips or tabs have been dislodged during connection. Check the clip contact pressure using an appropriate model of tab. Continuity, insulation and resistance check Check the continuity of entire lines, then section by section. Look for a short circuit to earth, to + 12 V or to another wire. If a fault is detected, repair or replace the wiring harness.

87B-4

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Introduction

87B

5. FAULT FINDING LOG

IMPORTANT!

IMPORTANT Any fault on a complex system requires thorough fault finding with the appropriate tools. The FAULT FINDING LOG, which should be completed during the procedure, enables you to keep track of the procedure which is carried out. It is an essential document when consulting the manufacturer.

IT IS THEREFORE MANDATORY TO FILL OUT A FAULT FINDING LOG EACH TIME FAULT FINDING IS CARRIED OUT. You will always be asked for this log: – when requesting technical assistance from the Techline, – for approval requests when replacing parts for which approval is obligatory, – to be attached to monitored parts for which reimbursement is requested. The log is needed for warranty reimbursement, and enables better analysis of the parts removed.

6. SAFETY ADVICE Safety rules must be observed during any work on a component to prevent any damage or injury: – check that the battery is properly charged to avoid damaging the computers with a low load, – use the appropriate tools. Procedure for disconnecting the battery: – Switch off the ignition. – Switch off all the electrical consumers. Wait at least 1 minute for the electronic systems to switch off. Disconnect the battery, starting with the negative terminal.

87B-5

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Passenger compartment connection unit

Page 1/2

List of monitored parts: Computer ●

Administrative identification Date

2

0

Log completed by VIN Engine Diagnostic tool

CLIP

OPTIMA 5800

NXR

Revision ●

Customer complaint 875

Door locking/unlocking fault

1194

Indicator light comes on

Other

●

Lights fault

1075

Wiper fault

004

Intermittently

Your comments:

Conditions under which the customer complaint occurs 005

While driving

009

Sudden fault

Other

●

1070

010

Gradual deterioration

Your comments:

Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure used

Type of fault finding manual:

MR

Technical Note

Assisted fault finding

Fault finding manual No.: Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note No.: Other documentation Title and/or part number:

FD 15 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Passenger compartment connection unit ●

Page 2/2

Computer identification and parts exchanged for the system

Part 1 part no. Part 2 part no. Part 3 part no. Part 4 part no. Part 5 part no. To be read with the diagnostic tool (Identification screen): Computer part no. Supplier No. Program No. Software version Calibration No. VDIAG ●

Faults found with the diagnostic tool Fault no.

●

Present

Fault name

Specification

Conditions under which fault occurs Status or parameter no.

●

Stored

Parameter name

Value

Unit

System-specific information

Description:

●

Additional information

What factors led you to replace the computer? What other parts were replaced? Other defective functions? Your comments:

FD 15 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

General operation: The UCH is involved in the following five functions (shared between several computers):

1/ Access-safety function This function is divided into three sub-functions: Access, Protection and Starting.

2/ Air-conditioning function This function is divided into three sub-functions, which are: User selection, Heating and Cold loop (see: 62A, Air conditioning). In this function, the UCH manages the triggering of the passenger compartment heating resistor control relays, as well as the heated rear screen and air conditioning indicator lights.

3/ Wiping function This function is divided into two sub-functions, which are: Wiper control and Wiper power.

4/ Lighting function This function is divided into two sub-functions, which are: Lighting control and Lighting power.

5/ Tyre function This function is divided into three sub-functions which are: Tyre reception, Tyre management and Tyre display (see 35B, Tyre Pressure Monitoring System).

87B-8

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

The ACCESS/SAFETY function is divided into three sub-functions: Access, Protection and Starting. The maximum number of Renault cards which can be programmed on the vehicle is 4. There is no master Renault card.

1

ACCESS/SAFETY FUNCTION

1.1

ACCESS SUBFUNCTION

The Megane II allows: – locking/unlocking by pressing the buttons on the Renault card (remote control function), – locking/unlocking by pressing the central door locking button, – locking via the Renault Anti-Intruder Device (RAID), – automatic relocking. If the vehicle is fitted with the hands-free function: – hands-free unlocking of the entire vehicle, by cutting the optical beam on one of the door handles, – hands-free tailgate-only unlocking by pressing the tailgate opening switch, – hands-free locking (by pressing the handle closure switch or the switch located in the tailgate badge), If the vehicle is fitted with: – electric child safety locking, – deadlocking, – selective opening element unlocking, – the valet card function. 1.1.1 Principle of locking/unlocking by pressing the buttons on the Renault card:

1 Opening element locking motors 2 Encrypted 433 MHz RF connection (315 Mhz in Japan) 3 Card button pressed

87B-9

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

a/ Main components of the function providing access through the pressing of a button on the Renault card: – Renault card, – UCH, – opening element locking motors.

b/ Unlocking using the unlock button on the card The vehicle may be unlocked by pressing the unlock button on the Renault card (open padlock symbol), if the card is less than 50 m from the vehicle (this distance varies according to the environment and the battery power). The RF reception aerial is inside the UCH (except Scenic II fitted with the SSPP function). Pressing the lock button on the Renault card starts the vehicle unlocking procedure. When the unlocking button is pressed, the card sends a 433 MHz encrypted signal to the UCH (315 MHz in Japan).315 If the UCH authenticates the Renault card, the UCH requests the locking motors to unlock. Conditions required: – The Renault card button must be pressed within the area covered by the card (this distance varies according to the environment and the battery power). – No + after ignition feed on the vehicle. Statuses available for the unlocking function: System operation may be viewed using statuses ET045 RF frame received, ET066 Card button press received and ET067 Card button press recognised. The power supply level on the vehicle can be viewed using ET014 Power supply level requested.

c/ Locking using the lock button on the card The vehicle may be locked by pressing the lock button on the Renault card (closed padlock symbol), if the card is less than 50 m from the vehicle (this distance varies according to the environment and the battery power). The RF reception aerial is inside the UCH (except Scenic II fitted with the SSPP function). Pressing the lock button on the Renault card starts the vehicle locking procedure. When the locking button is pressed, the card sends a 433 MHz encrypted signal to the UCH (315 MHz in Japan).315 If the UCH authenticates the Renault card, the UCH requests the locking motors to lock. Conditions required: – The Renault card button must be pressed within the area covered by the card (this distance varies according to the environment and the battery power). – No + after ignition feed on the vehicle. – No doors open. – No card in the card reader.

87B-10

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

Statuses available for the locking function: System operation may be viewed using statuses ET045 RF frame received, ET066 Card button press received and ET067 Card button press recognised. The statuses of the door detected by the UCH as open or closed are displayed using statuses ET053 Driver's door, ET042 Passenger's door, ET051 Rear left-hand door, ET052 Rear right-hand door, ET050 Tailgate/boot and ET041 Opening rear screen (if fitted to the vehicle). The power supply level on the vehicle can be viewed using ET014 Power supply level requested.

d) Boot-only locking/unlocking by pressing the "toggle tailgate status" button: The boot alone may be locked/unlocked by pressing the toggle tailgate status button on the Renault card (open tailgate symbol), if the card is less than 50 m from the vehicle (this distance varies according to the environment and the battery power). The RF reception aerial is inside the UCH (except Scenic II fitted with the SSPP function). Pressing the toggle tailgate status button on the Renault card starts the tailgate-only locking/unlocking procedure. When the toggle tailgate status button is pressed, the card sends a 433 MHz encrypted signal to the UCH (315 MHz in Japan). 315 If the UCH authenticates the Renault card, it will authorise or inhibit opening of the boot depending on the previous status (locked or unlocked). Conditions required: – The Renault card button must be pressed within the area covered by the card's radio frequency signal (this distance varies according to the environment and the battery power). – No + after ignition feed on the vehicle. – No card in the card reader. The statuses available for the boot-only unlocking/locking function (and for the opening rear screen if fitted) are: System operation may be viewed using statuses ET045 RF frame received, ET066 Card button press received and ET067 Card button press recognised. The open or closed status of the boot as seen by the UCH can be checked using status ET050 Tailgate/boot. The status of the tailgate opening request is visible using status ET062 Tailgate opening request. The open or closed status of the opening rear screen (if fitted) as seen by the UCH can be checked using status ET041 Opening rear screen. The status of the request to open the rear screen (if fitted) can be checked using status ET062 Rear screen opening request. The power supply level on the vehicle can be viewed using ET014 Power supply level requested.

e/ Principle of the identifier code: The Renault card is authenticated by the UCH by transmission of a "rolling code" for the access function. The code transmitted automatically increases incrementally each time the card is pressed. To allow for the case where the signal is not received by the UCH, a table of 1024 accepted codes has been created. The UCH and the Renault card can become desynchronised if the limit of 1024 possible presses is exceeded, that is the customer has pressed more than 1024 times outside the reception zone. If the Renault card does become desynchronised (code transmitted by the Renault card is outside the acceptance limit of the UCH), the user can access his vehicle using the emergency insert. Resynchronisation is performed when the vehicle is started with the card in the card-reader, or by removing/replacing the card battery.

87B-11

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

f/ Display: Unlocking is indicated by 1 flash of the direction indicators. Locking is indicated by 2 flashes of the direction indicators. When using the "tailgate status toggle" switch, display is not performed if a toggle request is made when the vehicle is completely unlocked. In fact, in this case, the vehicle is not locked as only the boot is locked. If one of the opening elements is detected as open when the request for locking the vehicle is made, the UCH will not authorise vehicle locking and no indicators will flash to warn the user.

1.1.2 Principle of locking/unlocking by pressing the central door locking button: This button is used to lock/unlock the vehicle while stationary or moving. This button has no effect if the vehicle has been locked using the card in hands-free or manual mode. If the electric central door-locking button is pressed when one door is unlocked it causes all the doors to lock and the warning light to come on. Status ET044 Electric door-locking button may be used to check that the button is operating correctly. Command mode AC020 Electric door-locking button indicator light checks the operation of the electric doorlocking button indicator light.

1.1.3 Principle of Renault Anti-Intruder Device (RAID system): The RAID function locks the vehicle as soon as the speed signal is above approximately 4 mph (7 km/h). Activation or deactivation of the RAID function can be viewed using status ET043 RAID function authorisation by electric door-locking button. The RAID function can be activated or deactivated by pressing and holding the electric door-locking button for approximately 5 seconds while the engine is running. Acknowledgement is indicated by a buzzer. Note: Unlocking can be performed by the UCH if the airbag computer has detected an impact or if it is faulty (not recognised on the multiplex network, internal fault, etc.). (see 88B, Multiplexing).

1.1.4 Principle of automatic relocking: Automatic relocking takes place 2 minutes after hands-free or card unlocking if unlocking is not followed by the opening of a door.

87B-12

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

1.1.5 Principle of hands-free locking/unlocking:

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Passenger side optical sensors Driver side optical sensors Handle and boot locking switches Boot/rear screen opening switch Access aerials Opening element locking motors RENAULT Card

a/ Main components of the hands-free function: – Renault card, – UCH, – optical presence sensors located in the door handles, – access aerials integrated in the door handles and the tailgate, – the locking switches incorporated in the door handles, – the boot-only opening/opening element locking switch integrated in the boot badge, – opening element locking motors.

b/ Hands-free unlocking When a hand is detected inside a handle (interruption of one of the optical beams) or a press on the boot opening switch is detected, the UCH sends a 125 kHz signal to the access aerials and interrogates the access zone (driverside aerial interrogated first). If the Renault card is in the access zone, it responds to the UCH at 433 MHz. If the UCH authenticates the Renault card, it requests unlocking of the opening elements or boot-only locking motors. Hands-free unlocking of the entire vehicle by stage: 1) 2) 3) 4)

The user places his/her hand around one of the door handles and the optical sensor detects a presence. If the Renault card is not hands-free disabled, the UCH sends a 125 kHz encrypted signal over the access aerials (initial interrogation is of the aerials on the side of the handle activated). If the Renault card recognises the code, it responds to the UCH using a 433 MHz encrypted signal. The UCH confirms that the Renault card code is correct and activates the locking motors.

87B-13

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

Conditions required: – – – –

Interruption of one of the optical beams in one of the handles or pressing the boot or rear screen opening switch. A vehicle card detected by the access aerials. No + after ignition feed on the vehicle. The card must not be hands-free disabled (a Renault card is disabled for hands-free starting and access if it was present in the vehicle when it was locked; the card is no longer disabled if it is detected by any aerial during unlocking).

Statuses available for the unlocking function: The UCH receives the unlocking request when an optical beam is cut on one of the handles. The sensors' power supply can be displayed using the ET054 Optical sensors supplied status. Operation of the sensors can be viewed using statuses ET055 Driver's side front optical sensor, ET056 Driver's side rear optical sensor, ET057 Passenger side front/rear optical sensors and boot opening switch status ET060 Tailgate locking button. The status of the tailgate opening request is visible using status ET061 Tailgate opening request. The status of the request to open the rear screen can be checked using status ET062 Rear screen opening request. The power supply level on the vehicle can be viewed using ET014 Power supply level requested. The AC037 Transmitting aerials fault finding command interrogates the aerials for an update of potential faults. Commands AC032 Test driver's side external aerials, AC033 Test passenger side external aerials and AC034 Test boot external aerials are used to check each zone separately. When the card is in the interrogated zone, the card reader flashes. The interrogation lasts 1 minute. These commands are used to check the hands-free access zones around the vehicle and will operate even if the hands-free card does not belong to the vehicle.

c/ Hands-free unlocking of the boot only When a press on the boot opening switch is detected, the UCH receives the signal requesting opening (ET061 Tailgate opening request). The UCH sends a 125 kHz signal to the access aerials. If the Renault card is in the access zone (initial interrogation on the boot side, then interrogation of both sides of the vehicle), it responds to the UCH at 433 MHz. If the UCH authenticates the card, the UCH orders unlocking of the boot only.

d/ Hands-free locking When a press on a door handle closing switch is detected, the UCH sends a 125 kHz signal to the access aerials. If the Renault card is in the access zone, it responds to the UCH at 433 MHz. If the UCH authenticates the card (and if it cannot be detected in the hands-free starting zone), the UCH requests the locking motors to lock. If, however, there is another card in the vehicle, locking will be possible, but the card left in the vehicle will temporarily lose its hands-free access and hands-free starting functions until the next unlocking operation (inhibition).

87B-14

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

Hands-free locking of the entire vehicle by stage: 1) 2)

3) 4)

5)

The user presses one of the locking switches on the door handle or tailgate (located in the badge). If the Renault card is not disabled for hands-free operation, the UCH sends a 125 kHz encrypted signal to the access aerials (interrogation of the aerials on the side of the activated handle is performed first), and to the starting aerials. If the Renault card authenticates the code, it responds to the UCH using a 433 MHz encrypted signal. If the UCH detects at least one Renault card in the access zone and this is authenticated (at least one Renault card detected by the external aerials and not detected by the starting aerials; this is necessary to avoid the vehicle being locked with the card inside), it activates the locking motors. If the UCH detects other cards inside the vehicle, it disables these cards for hands-free functions (access and starting) until the next time the vehicle is unlocked.

Conditions required: – At least one vehicle card detected by the access aerials and not detected by the starting aerials. – No doors open. – No Renault card in the card reader. – No + after ignition feed on the vehicle. – The card must not be hands-free disabled (a Renault card is disabled for hands-free starting and access if it was present in the vehicle when it was locked; the card is no longer disabled if it is detected by any aerial during unlocking). Statuses available for the locking function: The UCH receives the locking request in the form of an earth, when one of the locking buttons on the door handles or in the centre of the boot badge is pressed. The locking requests can be viewed using statuses ET058 Driver's side handle locking switch, ET059 Passenger's side handle locking switch and ET060 Tailgate locking switch. The statuses of the doors seen open or closed by the UCH can be displayed using the ET053 Driver's door, ET042 Passenger door, ET051 Rear left-hand door, ET052 Rear right-hand door and ET050 Tailgate/boot statuses and, where applicable, the ET041 Opening rear screen status. The power supply level on the vehicle can be viewed using ET014 Power supply level requested. The AC037 Transmitting aerials fault finding command interrogates the aerials for an update of potential faults. Commands AC032 Test driver's side external aerials, AC033 Test passenger side external aerials and AC034 Test boot external aerials are used to check each zone separately. When the card is in the interrogated zone, the card reader flashes. The interrogation lasts 1 min. These commands are used to check the hands-free access zones around the vehicle and will operate even if the hands-free card does not belong to the vehicle.

e/ Display Unlocking is indicated by 1 flash of the direction indicators. Locking is indicated by 2 flashes of the direction indicators.

87B-15

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

1.1.6 Principle of Electric Child Safety Locking: The UCH controls the rear door locks to prevent them from being opened with the interior door handles and inhibits operation of the rear electric window switches. The switch statuses and the activation of electric childproof locks can be viewed using the following statuses: – ET233 Child safety switch, – ET159 Rear left-hand door child safety lock, – ET160 Rear right-hand door child safety lock. The configuration Child safety lock can be read using configuration LC035 Child safety lock and modified (see Configurations and programming) using the specific command SC016 Child safety lock (Vdiag 4C, 4D, 4F and 50). Fault finding can be performed on the child safety lock switch indicator light using command AC076 Child safety lock indicator light.

1.1.7 Principle of deadlocking: The UCH controls the door locks to prevent unlocking via the interior handles. This function is activated by a long press (+ 2 seconds) on the Renault card locking button or by pressing the door locking button twice. The direction indicators flash rapidly three times for deadlocking (in addition to the two flashes for locking). For this function to operate the vehicle must have deadlocking (2 motors) and configuration LC003 Deadlocking must be WITH (see Configuration and programming). Deadlocking is configured using CF009 Deadlocking. The source of the last deadlocking activation/deactivation can be viewed using statuses ET088 Deadlocking activation source and ET090 Deadlocking deactivation source. It is impossible to deadlock the vehicle if the + accessories feed is active, if the lights are switched on or if the hazard warning lights are activated.

1.1.8 The Valet card function, special features in certain countries (Mexico): This function controls the valet card option which enables vehicles fitted with it to separately control unlocking of the driver's door, the boot, or the passenger doors and the glovebox. When the vehicle is electrically pre-equipped with the valet option and this option has been configured, the cards can be used in two different customer modes. The cards known as "masters" can unlock all the opening elements, but the cards known as "valets" cannot unlock the glovebox, the boot and the passenger opening elements. They can start the vehicle, lock the whole vehicle, and unlock the driver's door only. The function is configured with CF085 Valet card function using the specific command SC008 UCH type. To access CF085, set CF036 Selective opening element opening to WITH. To check that this function has been configured correctly, use LC016 Card valet function.

87B-16

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

1.1.9 Special features of the tailgate wiring: The tailgate opening control is wired differently depending on the type of vehicle: – Phase 1 bodywork without hands-free function:

1 2 3 4

Tailgate opening request reading Open tailgate status reading Motor control Tailgate motor

– Phase 1 mechanical with hands-free function: on vehicle manufactured before 17/01/2005 for type BCEJRK and before 10/01/2005 for type L.

1 2 3 4

Tailgate opening request reading Open tailgate status reading Motor control Tailgate motor

87B-17

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

– Phase 2 mechanical with hands-free function: on vehicle manufactured before 10/01/2005 for type BCEJRK and before 17/01/2005 for type L.

1 2 3 4

Tailgate opening request reading Open tailgate status reading Motor control Tailgate motor

– Phase 2 bodywork:

1 2 3 4

Tailgate opening request reading Open tailgate status reading Motor control Tailgate motor

87B-18

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

1.1.10 Special features of opening rear screen wiring: The rear screen opening control is wired differently depending on the type of vehicle: – Phase 1 mechanical without hands-free function: on vehicle manufactured before 10/01/2005 for type BCEJRK and before 17/01/2005 for type L.

1 2 3 4

Rear opening screen open request Open rear screen status reading Motor control Rear opening screen motor

– Phase 1 mechanical with hands-free function: on vehicle manufactured before 10/01/2005 for type BCEJRK and before 17/01/2005 for type L.

1 2 3 4

Rear opening screen open request Open rear screen status reading Motor control Rear opening screen motor

87B-19

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

– Phase 2 mechanical without hands-free function: on vehicles manufactured after 10/01/2005 for type BCEJRK and after 17/01/2005 for type L, except phase 2 bodywork

1 2 3 4

Rear opening screen open request Open rear screen status reading Motor control Rear opening screen motor

– Phase 2 mechanical with hands-free function: orPhase 2 bodywork on vehicles manufactured after 10/01/2005 for type BCEJRK and after 17/01/2005 for type L and vehicle with phase 2 bodywork.

1 2 3 4

Rear opening screen open request Open rear screen status reading Motor control Rear opening screen motor

87B-20

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

1.1.11 Special features of vehicle wiring (Mexico): The glovebox locking/unlocking control is wired differently depending on the type of vehicle: – Vehicle manufactured before 11/07/2005 for BCELJRK type:

1 Passenger door, rear doors and boot opening control 2 Passenger door, rear doors and boot closing control 3 Glovebox motor

– Vehicle manufactured after 11/07/2005 for BCELJRK type:

1 2 3 4 5

Driver's door and fuel filler flap closing control Driver's door and fuel filler flap opening control Glovebox motor Glovebox locking control relay Glovebox locking control

87B-21

87B

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

87B

Fault finding - System operation

1.1.12 Principle of automatic window relift: When the doors are locked, and the lock button on the card is pressed twice in succession (or the door or boot if the vehicle is fitted with hands-free function), the windows close automatically (as well as the sunroof, if fitted to the vehicle). The function is available on certain vehicles (see table below) depending on the number of one touch windows on the vehicle and depending on the bodywork phases. If

Then Production number type

Function of automatic window relift:

Vehicle type

One-touch window(s)

All except cabriolet phase 1 and 2 bodywork

NONE

4-door phase 1 bodywork

1 driver OTW

Jxxxxxx

NONE

4-door phase 1 bodywork

1 driver OTW

OTHERS

WITH

All except cabriolet and 4-door phase 1 bodywork

1 driver OTW

WITH

All except cabriolet phase 2 bodywork

1 driver OTW

NONE

All except cabriolet phase 1 and 2 bodywork

2 or 4 OTW

WITH

Cabriolet phase 1 and 2 bodywork

NONE

NONE

NONE

The automatic window relift function cannot be configured separately; it is automatically configured during special command SC008 UCH type according to the vehicle type, number of one touch windows and the production number type.

1.1.13 Principle of new vehicle storage mode: The vehicle is configured in this mode when it leaves the factory to optimise its power consumption: – The immobiliser warning light is inhibited. – The direction indicator warning lights are lit continuously on the instrument panel.

Before delivering the vehicle to the customer, deactivate this mode: – By flipping down the steering column controls with the after ignition feed off. – Or using command VP016 Deactivate new vehicle storage mode. This function can only be activated in the factory with UCH Vdiag 4F or 50.

87B-22

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

1.2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

PROTECTION SUB-FUNCTION

Steering column lock Injection computer Card reader Start button Starter aerials Renault Card Multiplex network Wire connection

The UCH shares control of the vehicle's immobiliser protection system with other computers. De-protection of the vehicle is performed in three consecutive stages: – Authentication of the card (hands-free or card reader) – Unlocking of the steering column lock (to allow after ignition feed to be established). – Unlocking the injection computer. 1.2.1 Authentication of the Renault card: Authentication is performed differently depending on whether the vehicle is fitted with the hands-free option or not. a) Authentication of the Renault card when the vehicle is fitted with the hands-free option: When the user presses the start button, the UCH activates its starting aerials and authenticates a card in the following way: 1/ The UCH activates its three starting aerials which generate a 125 kHz radio frequency signal. This signal is sent to the Renault card. 2/ If the Renault card is located in the zone covered by the starting aerials and recognises its UCH, it responds to it directly with a 433 MHz signal giving its identifier. 3/ The UCH decrypts the response and compares it with that stored in its memory. If the result is correct, it continues the starting procedure. The aerials stop transmitting once the card is authenticated. If no Renault card responds in hands-free mode, the UCH interrogates the card reader. If the Renault card is in the card reader, authentication is via transponder.

87B-23

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

Situations where use of the card reader is necessary for hands-free starting: – flat card battery, – vehicle in an area of frequency interference, – boot open (indication on instrument panel). The statuses and commands available on the card authentication function: – ET035 Radio frequency frame received – ET070 Start button – ET046 "Immobiliser" – ET014 Power supply level requested – AC036 Internal aerial test b) Authentication of the Renault card when the vehicle is not fitted with the hands-free option: When the user presses the start button, the UCH authenticates the card in the card reader using the transponder mode (short-range data exchange at 125 kHz). The transponder mode does not require a battery in the card.

1 2 3 4

Wire connection Card reader Short range TRANSPONDER connection RENAULT Card

The statuses and commands available on the card authentication function: – ET070 Start button – ET046 "Immobiliser" – ET014 Power supply level requested

87B-24

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

1.2.2 Unlocking/locking of the steering column lock:

1 2 3 4 5

Steering column lock Multiplex line Supply Sensor Line Safety line

a/ Unlocking the steering column lock Following authentication of the Renault card: 1/ The UCH sends a code to the electric steering column lock with an unlocking request via the multiplex network (ET119 UCH request to steering column lock). 2/ If the electric steering column lock recognises the code, it unlocks and sends its unlocked status to the UCH (ET073 Steering column lock sensor signal). 3/ When the UCH receives the Steering column unlocking completed signal, it orders the Protection and Switching Unit to activate the + after ignition relay and the procedure continues. The physical status of the column lock can be displayed by the ET072 Steering column lock status and its programming can be displayed by the ET071 Steering column lock blank status. Note: After ignition feed can only be established if the steering column unlocking procedure is performed correctly. The steering column lock remains locked if: – there is excessive mechanical load on the steering column (e.g.: wheel jammed against a kerb), – the battery voltage is too low, – the power demanded by the column lock is too high (thermal protection of the column lock electric motor).

87B-25

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

b/ Locking the steering column The steering column is locked with the engine off, after the Renault card is removed from the card reader. This locking operation requires: – a valid 0 mph speed signal, – a correctly functioning airbag and no impact detected, – a deactivated + after ignition connection. When the engine has not been started but the after ignition feed has risen (e.g. forced after ignition feed), certain conditions in which there is a drop in the after ignition feed do not cause the steering column to lock (steering column not locked message). Steering column lock fails if: 1/ Normal non-locking scenarios: – the card is present in the card reader, – more than 20 minutes has elapsed with the card in the reader and the engine off, – the vehicle speed is not zero, – power is demanded by the steering column lock too often. With regard to vehicles fitted with UCH computer Vdiag 4F or above: – the Renault card is removed from the card reader when the vehicle is being powered by + forced after ignition, – 3 mins have elapsed following a starting failure due to an engaged gear, – the Renault card is removed from the card reader following a starting failure due to an engaged gear, – a front door is open following a starting failure due to an engaged gear and the card is not in the reader. To lock the steering column, start and stop the engine again. 2/ Abnormal non-locking scenarios: – the airbag unit is faulty or locked, – the airbag unit is disconnected, – the airbag has been triggered, – the speed signal is not available. In the event that a steering column does not lock, the driver is informed via the message Steering column not locked.

1.2.3 Unlocking the injection computer: When the + after ignition feed has been established, the UCH and the injection computer compare their codes via the multiplex network. If the codes are identical, the vehicle immobiliser is deactivated (ET046 Immobiliser). If there is a failure, the immobiliser remains active. Reactivating protection: the immobiliser is reactivated when the engine stops.

87B-26

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

1.2.4 Renault card monitoring by the UCH: a/ Presence check When the engine is running, the UCH checks for the presence of the Renault card in the passenger compartment (if vehicle is hands-free) or in the card-reader when a door is opened then closed. If the Renault card is not detected, a message on the instrument panel and a buzzer warn the driver. Command AC036 Internal aerial test is used to check the area covered by the starting aerials inside the passenger compartment (hands-free vehicles). The card reader flashes when the card is detected. This command allows a hands-free card to be recognised even if it does not belong to the vehicle.

b/ Low battery warning If the Renault card battery is faulty or flat, the change card battery message is displayed on the instrument panel when the vehicle is started, if there have been 5 attempts to authenticate the Renault card since the battery fault.

c/ Storing information on the card A device allowing information relating to the vehicle to be read from the card is available. Information available:

– – – – – – –

VIN (Vehicle Identification Number). Mileage. Fuel level. Mileage before oil change. Tyre pressure (if vehicle fitted with SSPP). Status of OBD warning light. Oil level.

1.2.5 Immobiliser warning light programs

Immobiliser warning light Warning light flashes slowly

Vehicle protected (immobiliser active or fault with steering lock)

Warning light not lit

New vehicle or blank UCH storage mode

Warning light flashes slowly

Renault card not recognised

Warning light continuously lit

Injection authentication fault

Warning light not lit

Vehicle unprotected (immobiliser inactive)

Ignition off

Ignition on

Vehicle protection status

87B-27

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

1.3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

START SUB-FUNCTION

The UCH manages the control section of the starting sub-function. For this function to operate normally, the protection function must proceed correctly (immobiliser inactive ET046 Immobiliser). In order to control the starter motor, the UCH requires the following status and parameter information to check that the starting conditions have been met: – Start button ET070 Start button. – Clutch pedal position ET048 Clutch pedal position. – Brake pedal position ET047 Brake pedal position. – Automatic gearbox selector lever position ET108 Automatic gearbox selector lever position. – Position of the manual gearbox selector lever (see 87G, Engine compartment connection unit, Conformity check). If the starting conditions are met, the request for the Protection and Switching Unit to activate the starter motor can be viewed using status ET110 UCH request to injection or Protection and Switching Unit.

1.4

Main COMPONENTS of the ACCESS/SAFETY function

1.4.1 Main components of the ACCESS sub-function: – Renault card, – UCH, – optical presence sensors located in the door handles, – access aerials integrated in the door handles and the tailgate, – the locking switches incorporated in the door handles, – the boot-only opening/locking switch built into the tailgate badge, – opening element locking motors.

1.4.1.1 Renault card: The Renault card has three buttons which allow: – locking of the vehicle, – unlocking of the vehicle, – the boot to be locked/unlocked. The Renault hands-free card allows hands-free operation if it is located in the access and starting zones. The Renault card is powered by a 3 V battery. This battery is required for operation in hands-free mode or remote control mode (card button presses). If the battery is old or in an area of frequency interference, the emergency insert located in the Renault card allows the driver's door to be unlocked.

87B-28

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

1.4.1.2 The UCH: a)

In hands-free mode the UCH receives the unlocking request through the optical sensors, and the locking request through the locking switches.

b) The UCH manages the exchanges with the Renault card. In hands-free mode: The UCH interrogates and authenticates the Renault card via the access aerials located in the door handles and the tailgate, at a frequency of 125 kHz. After authentication from the UCH, the Renault card responds directly to it at 433 MHz. Outside hands-free mode: The UCH receives the access requests coming from card presses at 433 MHz (315 MHz in Japan). The 433 MHz reception aerial is incorporated in the UCH (except Scenic II fitted with the SSPP function). The signals are encrypted. c)

The UCH activates the locking motors. If the exchanges between the Renault card and the UCH are correct, the UCH activates the locking motors.

1.4.1.3 The optical presence sensors built into the door handles (hands-free vehicles): The optical presence sensors inform the UCH of the hands-free unlocking request for the entire vehicle when the infrared beam is cut in one of the handles (by a hand). This presence detection starts the hands-free access procedure. To limit battery use, the optical sensors are powered at 12 V only for 72 hours after the last change of vehicle lockedunlocked status. After this period, the handle must be pulled to operate a switch which 'wakes up' the UCH to resupply the optical sensors. In this case, pull the handle a second time to open the door once the card has been authenticated. The switch signal is parallel to the optical sensor signal: activation of the optical sensor or the switch earths the signal going to the UCH. Although it is a switch signal, the signal is not constant when pulling and holding the handle.

87B-29

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

The handle groups are shown in the diagram below:

Driver's side

Passenger side

UCH Optical sensor + Switch

Optical sensor + Switch

Optical sensor + Switch

Optical sensor + Switch

Boot unlocking

: Communal sensor supply Note: The tailgate is not fitted with an infrared optical sensor. The tailgate and rear screen opening switches notify the UCH of a request to open the tailgate or rear screen.

87B-30

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

1.4.1.4 The access aerials built into the door handles and tailgate (hands-free vehicles): The access aerials are built into the door handles and the tailgate. Only the tailgate aerial is removable. The UCH activates these aerials in the following order: – the side on which the handle has been pulled, – if the card has not been detected, the UCH activates the aerials on the opposite side, – if the card is still not detected, the UCH interrogates the rear aerial. The access aerial groups are shown in the diagram below:

Driver's side

Passenger side UCH

Tailgate

Note: 3-door and 5-door versions are distinguished by different handle aerials.

87B-31

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

1.4.1.5 The locking switches built into the door handles and the tailgate badge (hands-free vehicles): These switches are used to lock the opening elements. They are not removable, except for the tailgate switch which is separate from the badge. When a switch is pressed, a UCH track is connected to earth, informing it of a vehicle locking request. The access aerials are then activated. The grouping of these switches is shown in the diagram below:

Driver's side

Passenger side

Locking switch

Locking switch UCH

Locking switch

Locking switch

Boot lid switch

87B-32

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

1.4.1.6 Door locking motors: These are direct current motors (12 V supply). The door locking motors are controlled by the UCH. The deadlocking function requires a second motor per door.

1.4.2

Main components of the PROTECTION sub-function:

The protection sub-function is based on 4 main coded components: – The Renault cards. – The UCH. – The electric steering column lock. – The injection computer. These parts are coded definitively: a part coded for one vehicle may not be used on another vehicle. It is possible to replace a coded part with an uncoded part using special procedures in the CLIP tool and the vehicle repair code (See Configuration and programming).

1.4.2.1 The Renault card: The Renault card enables the vehicle to be started in two modes: – starting by inserting the card into the reader: – hands-free starting without insertion of the card into the card reader (hands-free vehicles). The Renault card is powered by a 3 V battery. This battery is necessary to operate in standard and hands-free mode. If the battery is too old, or if the vehicle is in an area of frequency interference, hands-free starting is not possible, but always possible by inserting the Renault card into the reader.

1.4.2.2 The UCH: a/ The UCH detects the starting request (Start button pressed under starting conditions). b/ The UCH authenticates the Renault card via the starting aerials for hands-free mode, or via the card reader for transponder mode. c/ The UCH manages the exchange with the steering column lock: The UCH sends an unlocking request to the steering column via the vehicle's multiplex network, and the steering column responds with the status of the lock bolt. d/ The UCH requests activation of the + after ignition feed from the Protection and Switching Unit. e/ The UCH manages the exchange with the injection computer: The UCH and the injection computer exchange their codes via the vehicle's multiplex network to deactivate protection and unlock the immobiliser. f/ The UCH requests the Protection and Switching Unit to supply the starter motor.

87B-33

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

1.4.2.3 The electric steering column lock: The electric steering column lock is controlled by the UCH. It controls the insertion and retraction of a bolt which locks the steering column. It replaces the Neimann type lock. The steering column lock is powered before + after ignition feed. The steering column lock supply is via the after ignition relay (located in the Protection and Switching Unit) in its rest position, from where it is distributed to the column lock by the UCH. The UCH sends an unlocking request and a code to the steering column lock, via the vehicle's multiplex network. The multiplex network unlocks the steering column lock if the code is recognised. A sensor located on the column lock bolt informs the UCH, via the multiplex network and by wire connection, that it is unlocked. When unlocking is confirmed, the UCH activates the + after ignition feed via the Protection and Switching Unit. The column lock is no longer supplied. The column lock has a "+ after ignition feed present on vehicle" wire signal which inhibits locking while the feed is active.

IMPORTANT!

IMPORTANT The steering column lock is: – not removable when the bolt is disengaged, – fitted with a left-hand thread self-shearing mounting bolt.

1.4.2.4 The injection computer: The injection computer is coded and unlocks following the encrypted challenge exchange with the UCH.

1.4.2.5 The starting aerials (hands-free vehicles) There are 3 transmitter aerials located in the passenger compartment They are controlled by the UCH to interrogate the card during a starting request or in confirming the presence of the card in the vehicle (e.g. after a door is opened). The power used allows the whole passenger compartment to be covered, including the boot. Overspill outside the passenger compartment is minimal.

1.4.2.6 The card reader: The card reader is connected to the UCH by a wire connection. It provides the transponder function (like a key recognition ring). It therefore allows authentication of a Renault card without a battery. If the card is not detected or recognised during hands-free starting, the card reader flashes to tell the customer to insert the Renault card.

87B-34

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

1.4.3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

Main components of the STARTING sub-function:

The starting sub-function is based on the following main factors: – The starting conditions being present. – The UCH. – The automatic gearbox computer (if fitted on the vehicle). – The Protection and Switching Unit. 1.4.3.1 Start button: The start button transmits the driver's requests to start or stop the engine to the UCH. 1.4.3.2 The UCH: The UCH ensures that the starting conditions are met, and that no other computer on the multiplex network is inhibiting starting of the vehicle. If the conditions are present, it requests control of the starter from the UPC. 1.4.3.3 The Protection and Switching Unit: The Protection and Switching Unit activates the starter motor following a request from the UCH via the multiplex network. 1.4.3.4 Neutral sensor (manual gearbox): Informs the UCH of the position of the gearbox (neutral or gear engaged). 1.4.3.5 Clutch switch (manual gearbox): Sends clutch pedal depressed signal (end of travel) to the UCH. 1.4.3.6 Brake switch: Sends brake pedal depressed signal to the UCH. Operation:

The unknown status does not automatically require the brake pedal to be replaced, because it is a temporary operating status between released pedal status and depressed pedal status (see diagram above). 1.4.3.7 The automatic transmission computer (if fitted to the vehicle): The computer informs the UCH of the selector position (park, neutral, etc.) via the multiplex network.

87B-35

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

2

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

AIR CONDITIONING FUNCTION

The type of air conditioning control can be displayed by configuration reading LC013 Air conditioning type and configured using command CF019 Air conditioning type (can be configured during configuration of the UCH by the SC008 UCH type command).

2.1

Sub-function: USER SELECTION (Non-regulated air conditioning only)

The UCH receives the signal from the air conditioning panel via cable connection for the air conditioning request, for electric heated rear screen and the signal for passenger compartment blower operation. The UCH sends the request to the Protection and Switching Unit to start electric heated rear screen de-icing. The UCH sends the request to the injection system to activate the air conditioning compressor. The following statuses can be displayed: – ET029 Air conditioning button. – ET028 Heated rear screen button. – ET015 Passenger compartment blower. The operation of the air conditioning request button and electric heated rear screen indicator lights can be checked using actuator commands: AC015 Air conditioning button indicator light and AC019 Heated rear screen indicator light.

2.2

Sub-function: HEATING

The UCH manages the passenger compartment heating resistors (RCHs) by controlling power relays according to the request for ventilation in the passenger compartment, the engine coolant temperature, the external temperature, the electrical power balance, engine loading and, for the cabriolet version, if the roof is open. The following statuses and parameters produced by the UCH can be displayed: – PR001 Battery voltage – PR002 External temperature – ET015 Passenger compartment blower only with non-regulated air conditioning – ET017 Number of RCH*s required – ET018 Number of RCH*s authorised by alternator alternator charge rate – ET019 Number of RCH*s authorised by injection system – ET020 Number of RCH*s activated – ET021 RCH* control 1 – ET022 RCH* control 2 – ET031 Fast idle request for RCH – ET169 Engine – ET025 Retractable roof for cabriolet version only – ET026 Heated rear screen switch. Relay 1 controls a passenger compartment heating resistor unit consisting of one resistor. Relay 2 controls a passenger compartment heating resistor unit consisting of two resistors. Check the operation of the passenger compartment heating resistors using actuator commands: AC016 RCH relay 1, AC017 RCH relay 2 and AC018 RCH relay 3.

87B-36

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

Passenger compartment heating resistor power

Relay 1

Relay 2

0W

0

0

333 W

1

0

667 W

0

1

1000 W

1

1

The configuration can be displayed using LC030 Heating resistor types. *RCH = Passenger Compartment Heating Resistors

2.3

Sub-function: COLD LOOP

The UCH requests the injection to switch on the compressor via the multiplex network, depending on the external temperature, the passenger compartment blower activation signal and whether the engine is in operation. The following statuses and parameters can be displayed: – ET030 Air conditioning request 2 – ET169 Engine – ET015 Passenger compartment blower – PR002 External temperature

87B-37

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

3

WIPING FUNCTION

3.1

Sub-function: WIPERS CONTROL

87B

The UCH receives the driver's request via the wiper control stalk. Windscreen wiper: The UCH requests the Protection and Switching Unit via the CAN network to supply power to the windscreen wiper. The park position is managed by the Protection and Switching Unit. The wiper control stalk has four positions (neutral, intermittent wiping, slow speed and fast speed) and a wiper intermittent speed ring which varies the time between each wipe. Special note: If the windscreen wiper is set to low speed when the vehicle is moving and then the vehicle stops, the system switches to intermittent wipe. The requests made to the UCH via the wiper control stalk can be displayed using the following statuses: ET077 Wiper stalk position and ET096 Wiper stalk intermittent speed ring. If the vehicle is fitted with a rain sensor, (see special features of the rain and light sensor). Rear screen wiper: Rear wiper speed and power supply are also controlled by the UCH. Windscreen wiper outside neutral position: – The rear screen wiper starts to operate as soon as reverse gear is engaged and rain drops are detected on the windscreen wiper. – When the vehicle is stationary, the wipers operate intermittently every 7 seconds; over 36 mph (60 km/h) they operate every 3 seconds. There is no continuous wiping function, except during the rear screen washer control. The statuses corresponding to operation of the rear screen wiper can be displayed using statuses ET080 Rear screen wiper request, ET097 Rear screen wiper park position and ET109 Reverse gear engaged or ET108 Automatic gearbox lever position, by configuration reading LC064 Rear screen wiper and by configuration CF166 Rear screen wiper. Windscreen washers: The front and rear windscreen washers are controlled directly by the wiper control stalk, via a wire connection. These connections are doubled up to the UCH to permit command status reading. ET078 Windscreen washer request,; ET079 Rear screen washer request. Special features of headlight washers For vehicles fitted with xenon bulbs, the headlight washers are actuated at the same time as the windscreen washer, only if the headlights are on.

87B-38

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

Two cases are possible concerning the control of the headlight washers. First case: (vehicles fitted with a SIEMENS Vdiag 44 UPC): the UCH sends the command by cable to two headlight washer relays on a relay plate underneath the UPC. Second case: (vehicles fitted with a LEAR Vdiag 48 or later): the UCH requests the UPC via the multiplex network to activate the washer relays. WARNING If the UCH does not manage to determine the position of the control stalk, or inform the Protection and Switching Unit of the control stalk's position, the Protection and Switching Unit will activate the windscreen wiper at low speed (defect mode).

3.2

Sub-function: WIPING POWER

The UCH controls the rear screen wiper's power (and that of the headlight washers if the vehicle is fitted with xenon headlights and a SIEMENS Vdiag 44 UPC). Their operation can be checked using commands AC007 Rear screen wiper, AC030 Headlight washer relay 1 and AC031 Headlight washer relay 2. Rain and light sensor Information displays

Steering column control

Multiplex network

Protection and Switching Unit UCH

Rear screen wiper

Windscreen wiper

Windscreen and rear screen washers Headlight washers

87B-39

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

3.3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

Special features of the rain sensor (if fitted to the vehicle)

Information displays

Steering column control

Rain and light sensor

Multiplex network

UCH

Protection and Switching Unit

Side lights

Windscreen wiper

Dipped headlights

Main beam headlights The rain and light sensor is a single sensor, connected to the UCH by a single connection. This sensor is installed on the windscreen. The rain sensor enables the windscreen wipers to be operated automatically and controls the wiper speeds according to the quantity of water on the windscreen. The sensor is activated by setting the wiper stalk to AUTO position. Depending on the vehicle's bodywork, two cases are possible for the operation of the rain sensor: a) Phase 1 bodywork: Automatic operation of the rain sensor is inhibited following ignition switch-off with the wiper stalk in the Auto position. To reactivate operation when next switching on the ignition, place the wiper control stalk in the neutral position then return it to the Auto position. b) Phase 2 bodywork: Automatic operation of the rain sensor remains active following ignition switch-off with the wiper stalk in the Auto position. For a vehicle which is equipped with a rain sensor, with automatic detection activated, the rear screen wiper starts to operate if reverse gear is engaged and if the sensor has detected rain for more than 1 minute. The wiper intermittent speed ring is used to modify the sensor's sensitivity to rain and therefore the time between wipes. When the vehicle is not fitted with a rain sensor, the intermittent speed position on the control stalk takes the place of the Auto position. The status ET118 Rain sensor sensitivity ring position can be interpreted if the vehicle is configured with rain sensor and inhibits status ET096 Intermittent wipe ring position. The operation of the rain sensor can be displayed using status ET114 Wiper request by rain sensor, and by configuration reading LC044 Rain/light sensor. Configuration CF035 Rain/light sensor is available during UCH configuration SC008 UCH type (see Configurations and programming).

87B-40

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

3.4

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

Special features of the headlight washers control wiring

The headlight washers control is wired differently depending on the type of vehicle: – Phase 1 mechanical: on vehicle manufactured before 10/01/2005 for type BCEJRK and before 17/01/2005 for type L.

1 Headlight washers relay 1 2 Headlight washers relay 2

– Phase 2 mechanical: on vehicles manufactured after 10/01/2005 for type BCEJRK and after 17/01/2005 for type L, except phase 2 bodywork.

1 Headlight washers relay 1 2 Headlight washers relay 2

87B-41

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

– Phase 2 bodywork:

1 Headlight washers relay 1 2 Headlight washers relay 2 3 Multiplex network

87B-42

87B

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

4

LIGHTING FUNCTION

4.1

Sub-function: LIGHTING CONTROL

87B

The UCH receives the request from the driver, from the lighting stalk, from the hazard warning lights button and, if fitted to the vehicle, from the light sensor. The UCH requests the Protection and Switching Unit, via the multiplex network, to provide power to the side lights, dipped headlights, main beam headlights and fog lights (front). If a request to activate the lighting is made, the UPC provides power to the xenon bulb computers. The dipped headlights are still supplied when the main beam headlights are activated. The following statuses can be displayed: ET081 Lighting stalk position. ET082 Rear fog lights request ET085 Hazard warning lights switch, ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request. ET084 Right-hand direction indicator request. If the UCH cannot determine the position of the control stalk, or inform the Protection and Switching Unit of the control stalk's position, the Protection and Switching Unit will activate the dipped headlights.

4.2

Sub-function: LIGHTING POWER

The UCH controls the power supply for the rear fog light (a single one), direction indicators and interior lighting (roof lights and footwell/floor lights). The interior lighting request can be displayed using the ET112 Interior lighting control status. Operation of the lights powered by the UCH can be checked using the actuator commands AC009 Rear fog lights, AC022 Left-hand direction indicator, AC023 Right-hand direction indicator, AC021 Interior lights and AC027 Footwell/floor lighting. Information displays

Steering column control

Rain and light sensor

Multiplex network

UCH

Protection and Switching Unit

Rear fog light

Side lights

Main beam headlights

Direction indicators

Dipped headlights

Front fog lights

Interior lighting

87B-43

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

4.3

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

Special features of the direction indicators

There are 2 types of wiring depending on the vehicle: – Phase 1 mechanical: on vehicle manufactured before 10/01/2005 for type BCEJRK and before 17/01/2005 for type L.

1a 1b 2a 2b 3a 3b

Front left-hand direction indicator Front right-hand direction indicator Rear left-hand direction indicator Rear right-hand direction indicator Left-hand side direction indicator Right-hand side direction indicator

– Phase 2 mechanical: on vehicles manufactured after 10/01/2005 for type BCEJRK and after 17/01/2005 for type L.

1a 1b 2a 2b 3a 3b

Front left-hand direction indicator Front right-hand direction indicator Rear left-hand direction indicator Rear right-hand direction indicator Left-hand side direction indicator Right-hand side direction indicator

87B-44

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

4.4

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87B

Special features of the light sensor (if fitted to the vehicle). Information displays

Steering column control

Rain and light sensor

Multiplex network

UCH

Protection and Switching Unit

Side lights

Windscreen wiper

Dipped headlights

Main beam headlights

The rain and light sensor is a single sensor, connected to the UCH by a single connection. This sensor is installed on the windscreen. The light sensor enables the side lights and dipped headlights to be operated automatically as soon as the vehicle is in a dark place (tunnel, night, gloomy weather conditions, etc.). The status of the light sensor can be displayed using ET115 Lights on request by light sensor, and by configuration reading LC044 Rain/light sensor. Configuration CF035 Rain/light sensor is available during a UCH configuration SC008 UCH Type (see Configurations and programming). To activate the automatic lighting function, press the AUTO button on the lighting stalk for at least 4 seconds. This action is confirmed by two beeps. To deactivate the automatic lighting function, switch the engine off and press the AUTO button on the lighting stalk for at least 4 seconds. A beep confirms this action and the message Automatic lighting OFF appears on the instrument panel. Any other operation on the lighting stalk overrides and cancels automatic operation.

87B-45

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Replacement of components

87B

For replacing different components, see the relevant sections in the MR vehicle mechanics (Megane II: see MR 364 Mechanical systems; Scenic II: see MR 370 Mechanical systems). The programming and configurations are described in the following pages of the present document.

87B-46

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

1/

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Configurations and programming

87B

GENERAL INFORMATION

Opening element and engine immobiliser management system. During manufacture, a 13-character hexadecimal code is assigned to the vehicle to make the engine immobiliser operational. The 4 coded components are: – UCH, – Renault cards, – steering lock, – injection computer. This immobiliser code is necessary to: – add or replace a Renault card, – deallocate one or more RENAULT cards (e.g. if lost or stolen), – replace the UCH or the injection computer. WARNING When the Clip tool issues the programming key, the user has a limited time in which to enter the immobiliser code. If the time has elapsed, the clip tool displays the message Time elapsed. Restart the procedure". This immobiliser code is available on RENAULT.net or by contacting Techline. When requesting an immobiliser code, always provide the VIN number of the vehicle and the programming key obtained using the Clip tool. This information enables the operator to identify the vehicle. WARNING If not all of the Renault cards are available, reallocate all Renault cards later. The UCH and the cards are not coded when new. When fitted to the vehicle, they must be programmed with a code to make them operational. The steering column lock and the injection computer are automatically coded when the + after ignition feed is switched on. To perform this procedure, certain vehicle parts must have already been correctly coded (with the vehicle code). Refer to the allocation table.

87B-47

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Configurations and programming

Operation

87B

Status of the components Injection computer

Steering column lock

Immobiliser code

After-Sales

UCH

Renault card

Programming the UCH

Blank

Coded

Immaterial

Immaterial

YES

Allocation or de-allocation of a RENAULT Card

Coded

Blank or assigned to the vehicle

Immaterial

Immaterial

YES

Programming the steering column lock

Coded

Coded

Immaterial

Blank

NO

Programming the injection computer

Coded

Coded

Blank

Coded

NO

IMPORTANT Once a part is programmed with a code, it is allocated to the vehicle; the code cannot be deleted and the part cannot be reprogrammed with another code. The programmed code cannot be erased.

2/

PROGRAMMING THE UCH (SC004)

This operation will allow the UCH to be coded. IMPORTANT – Do not interrupt the procedure when it is in progress. – If it is interrupted, restart the procedure, a new programming key will be displayed. – – – – – – – – – – – –

run the Multiplex network test, switch on the side lights, the tool displays Unknown vehicle configuration: check tool update. Click on Test result, click on tab Signal, then Continue, click on tab Result, then UCH, click on Fault finding, click on the Repair mode and in the Programming menu, select line SC004 Program UCH, remove the card from reader, enter the After-Sales code. Enter the code (12 hexadecimal characters in upper case) and confirm, the tool displays Insert card fully into reader, insert a card belonging to vehicle, confirm, the tool displays Programming in progress and Programming finished.

The UCH has been programmed to the vehicle. It is now impossible to clear the programmed code. Next, program the cards and calibrate and configure the UCH and program the valves.

87B-48

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

3/

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Configurations and programming

87B

RENAULT CARD ALLOCATION PROCEDURE (SC006)

WARNING If not all of the Renault cards are available, it will be necessary to reallocate all the cards later. – select the Programming menu and select line SC006 Card allocation, – the tool displays Remove card from reader, – the tool displays: Warning: all previously programmed cards will no longer be usable after the first card has been programmed. Important: be sure to insert all cards to be allocated to the vehicle during programming, – the tool displays Please enter the After-Sales code, – with the card removed from the reader, enter the After-Sales code (12 hexadecimal characters in upper case) and confirm it, – if the format is correct, the tool displays Insert card fully into reader, – insert the blank card or one allocated to the vehicle and confirm, – the tool displays: Programming in progress. Do not remove the card until the following message appears: One card programmed. – the tool displays: Would you like to program another card?. The vehicle can have up to four cards, – to allocate a second card, select YES, – the tool displays Insert card fully into reader, – insert the blank card or one allocated to the vehicle and confirm. Note: If the same card is inserted twice, the system does not take this into account and the engine immobiliser warning light remains off. To finish programming, select NO and confirm. The cards are allocated to the vehicle and the vehicle identification number is stored in the cards and in the UCH. IMPORTANT These cards must be old Renault cards belonging to the vehicle or new, uncoded Renault cards. If the card allocation procedure is interrupted, the new cards will no longer be blank and can only be allocated to this vehicle. The cards are currently ineffective in this state; restart the card allocation procedure to reactivate them.

87B-49

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

4/

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Configurations and programming

87B

PROGRAMMING THE INJECTION COMPUTER:

The blank injection computer is automatically programmed when + after ignition feed is first activated on the vehicle. After this, the injection computer has been programmed definitively. The injection computer can no longer be used on another vehicle. Programming will operate correctly if: – the cards and UCH are programmed, – the lock is programmed (to activate + after ignition feed), – the injection system is not programmed.

87B-50

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

5/

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Configurations and programming

87B

FUNCTION: TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM

5.1 PROCEDURE FOR PROGRAMMING THE 4 VALVE CODES (SC002) See 35B, Tyre pressure monitoring system, Configurations and programming. 5.2 PROCEDURE FOR ENTERING THE RECOMMENDED PRESSURES (VP005) See 35B, Tyre pressure monitoring system, Configurations and programming.

6/

CHILD SAFETY SYSTEM CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE (SC016)

This procedure will enable the child safety system, if fitted to the vehicle, to be configured for optimum running during the replacement of a UCH. – click on the Repair mode and in the Programming menu, – confirm the line SC016 Child safety, – follow the procedure and enter the following data: – CF104 Child safety lock (WITH or WITHOUT), – confirm, follow the procedure, – finish by confirming and clearing the stored faults. The child safety function is configured. There are two types of wiring: single or double input. – Single input: on vehicles manufactured before 10/01/2005

1 Rear left-hand door 2 Rear right-hand door

87B-51

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Configurations and programming

87B

– Double input: on vehicles manufactured after 10/01/2005

1 Rear left-hand door 2 Rear right-hand door

7/

PROCEDURE FOR CONFIGURING UPC TYPE (CF135)

This configuration is only available with a UCH Vdiag 4F or 50. This procedure will enable certain functions of the UCH computer to be configured to differentiate between a vehicle fitted with a phase 1 electronic layout and a vehicle fitted with a phase 2 electronic layout. – – – – – – – –

click on Repair mode and in the Configuration writing menu, confirm the line CF135 Protection and Switching Unit computer type, follow the procedure and enter the following data: CF135 UPC computer type (SIEMENS Vdiag 44 or OTHER), CF114 Body type (phase 1 or phase 2), CF112 Headlight washers on vehicle (WITH or WITHOUT): only if UCH Vdiag 50. confirm, follow the procedure and enter the following data: CF085 Valet card function (WITH or WITHOUT) Important: the Valet function is only available on vehicles for the MEXICAN market (this configuration is only available if the vehicle is fitted with a UPC Vdiag 44): only if UCH Vdiag 50, – confirm, follow the procedure, – a screen prompts the user to verify that the specifications configured are those for the vehicle, – confirm and follow the procedure.

87B-52

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

8/

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Configurations and programming

87B

UCH TYPE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE (SC008)

8.1 Vdiag 44, 48 This procedure will enable the UCH to be configured in relation to the vehicle to provide optimum running. – – – –

click on the Repair mode and in the Programming menu, confirm line SC008 UCH type, follow the procedure and enter the following data: CF097 Vehicle type (3-door/4-door/5-door/cabriolet/extended MPV/MPV/Estate),

– – – – – – – – –

confirm, follow the procedure and enter the following data: CF010 Hands-free function (WITH or WITHOUT), CF023 Tyre pressure monitoring system (WITH or WITHOUT), CF057 Type of heating resistors (NONE, 1000 W, or 1800 W), CF019 Type of air conditioning (HEATING, AUTOMATIC, MANUAL), CF027 Type of windscreen (TINTED, HEAT INSULATING), CF035 Rain/light sensor (WITH or WITHOUT), CF014 Daytime running lights (WITH or WITHOUT), CF022 Factory fitted perimeter protection (WITH or WITHOUT): function only available on vehicles for the Mexican market, – CF173 One-touch window(s)/Sunroof (WITH or WITHOUT),

– confirm, follow the procedure and enter the following data: – CF036 Selective opening of the opening elements (WITH or WITHOUT) Only if CF010 = WITHOUT – confirm, follow the procedure and enter the following data: – CF085 Valet card function (WITH or WITHOUT). Function only available for vehicles on the Mexican market, (This status will only be available if the following conditions are met: CF036 Selective opening of opening elements = WITH), – check that the options configured are those desired and finish.

87B-53

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Configurations and programming

87B

8.2 Vdiag 4C and 4D: This procedure will enable the UCH to be configured in relation to the vehicle to provide optimum running. – click on the Repair mode and in the Programming menu, – confirm line SC008 UCH type. – follow the procedure and enter the following data: CF097 Vehicle type (3-door/4-door/5-door/cabriolet/extended MPV/MPV/Estate). CF011 Gearbox type (BVA or BVM). CF020 Type of driving style (Right-hand or Left-hand). CF028 Engine type (F or K). – confirm, follow the procedure and enter the following data: CF010 Hands-free function (WITH or WITHOUT). CF023 Tyre pressure monitoring system function (WITH or WITHOUT). CF057 Type of heating resistors (NONE, 1000 W, or 1800 W). CF019 Type of air conditioning (HEATING, AUTOMATIC, MANUAL). CF027 Type of windscreen (TINTED, HEAT INSULATING). CF087 Front fog light (WITH or WITHOUT). CF014 Daytime running lights (WITH or WITHOUT). CF012 Rain sensor (WITH or WITHOUT). CF029 External temperature sensor (WITH or WITHOUT). – confirm, follow the procedure and enter the following data: CF036 Selective opening of opening elements (WITH or WITHOUT): Only if CF010 = WITHOUT. CF016 PAX system type tyre (WITH or WITHOUT): Only if CF097 = MPV or extended MPV or cabriolet and if CF023 = WITH. CF100 Deadlocking (WITH or WITHOUT). CF013 Light sensor (WITH or WITHOUT): Only if CF014 = WITHOUT. CF022 Factory fitted perimeter protection (WITH or WITHOUT). Function only available on vehicles sold in Mexico. CF083 One touch window(s) (WITH or WITHOUT): Absent if CF097 = Cabriolet. – confirm, follow the procedure and enter the following data: CF085 Valet card function (WITH or WITHOUT). Function only available on vehicles sold in Mexico. Only if CF036 = WITH and CF023 = WITHOUT. – check that the options configured are those desired and finish.

87B-54

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Configurations and programming

87B

8.3 Vdiag 4F and 50: This procedure will enable the UCH to be configured in relation to the vehicle to provide optimum running. – click on the Repair mode and in the Programming menu, – confirm line SC008 UCH type, – follow the procedure and enter the following data: CF097 Vehicle type (3-door/4-door/5-door/cabriolet/extended MPV/MPV/Estate). – confirm, follow the procedure and enter the following data: CF010 Hands-free function (WITH or WITHOUT), CF023 Tyre pressure monitoring system (WITH or WITHOUT), CF057 Type of heating resistors (NONE, 1000 W, or 1800 W), CF019 Type of air conditioning (HEATING, AUTOMATIC, MANUAL), CF027 Type of windscreen (TINTED, HEAT INSULATING), CF035 Rain/light sensor (WITH or WITHOUT). CF014 Daytime running lights (WITH or WITHOUT), CF189 Protection type (TYPE 1, TYPE 2 or WITHOUT): TYPE 1 = with factory fitted perimeter protection, TYPE 2 = with Cobra type alarm and WITHOUT = without factory fitted perimeter protection and without Cobra alarm. – confirm, follow the procedure and enter the following data:

CF173 One touch window(s)/sunroof (1 OTW phase 1/1 OTW phase 2/2 or 4 OTW/WITHOUT): Absent if CF097 = Cabriolet. 1 OTW phase 1 = 1 driver side one touch window with a phase 1 bodywork vehicle. 1 OTW phase 2 = 1 driver side one touch window with a phase 2 bodywork vehicle. 2 or 4 OTW = 2 or 4 one touch windows. WITHOUT = no one touch windows on the vehicle. – confirm, follow the procedure and enter the following data: CF188 Production number type (Jxxxxxx or OTHER): only if CF097 = 4-doors and CF173 = 1 OTW Phase 1. The production number is located on the oval plate on the vehicle's right-hand side B-pillar. The production number consists of 7 characters: 1 letter indicating the production plant followed by 6 figures. If the production number starts with the letter J, select Jxxxxxx. If the production number does not start with the letter J, select Other. – confirm, follow the procedure and enter the following data: CF036 Selective opening of opening elements (WITH or WITHOUT): Only if CF010 = WITHOUT CF016 PAX system type tyre (WITH or WITHOUT): Only if CF097 = MPV or extended MPV and if CF023 = WITH. – confirm, follow the procedure and enter the following data: CF085 Valet card function (WITH or WITHOUT): Only if CF036 = WITH and CF023 = WITHOUT. IMPORTANT Only configure WITH valet card function when the vehicle is electrically pre-equipped with the valet option. Incorrect configuration may cause certain pieces of equipment to malfunction. – check that the options configured are those desired and finish.

87B-55

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Configurations and programming

87B

UCH configurations according to the vehicle equipment which can be configured to the CLIP diagnostic tool: Configuration reading

Configuration

Name of configuration

Choice of configuration

Vdiag

LC001

Hands-free function

SC008 UCH type

WITH/WITHOUT

44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F and 50

LC002

External temperature sensor

CF029

WITH/WITHOUT

4C, 4D, 4F and 50

LC003

Deadlocking

CF009

WITH/WITHOUT

44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F and 50

LC004

One-touch window(s)

SC008 UCH type

WITH/WITHOUT

4C and 4D

LC005

Gearbox type

CF011

Manual/Automatic

44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F and 50

LC006

Rain detector

SC008 UCH type

WITH/WITHOUT

44, 48, 4C, 4D

LC007

Light sensor

SC008 UCH type

WITH/WITHOUT

44, 48, 4C, 4D

LC008

Daytime running lights

CF014

WITH/WITHOUT

44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F and 50

LC009

Hazard warning lights illuminated upon impact

automatic configuration

WITH/WITHOUT

44, 48, 4C, 4D

LC010

Tyre type Runflat tyre

SC008 UCH type

WITH/WITHOUT

44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F and 50

LC011

Vehicle type

SC008 UCH type

Cabriolet/3-door/All except E and C

44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F and 50

LC012

Automatic relocking

CF018

WITH/WITHOUT

44, 48, 4C, 4D

LC013

Type of air conditioning

SC008 UCH type

Heating/Automatic/ Manual

44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F and 50

LC014

Driving layout

CF020

RIGHT-HAND/ LEFT-HAND DRIVE

44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F and 50

LC015

Front fog lights

CF021

WITH/WITHOUT

44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F and 50

LC016

Valet card function

SC008 UCH type

WITH/WITHOUT

4C, 4D, 4F and 50

87B-56

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Configurations and programming

87B

UCH configurations (continued): Configuration reading

Configuration

Name of configuration

Choice of configuration

Vdiag

LC017

Tyre Pressure Monitor Function

SC008 UCH type

WITH/WITHOUT

44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F and 50

LC018

Hazard warning lights switched on by ABS

CF024

WITH/WITHOUT

44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F and 50

LC019

Rear screen wiper park position control

automatic configuration

WITH/WITHOUT

44, 48, 4C, 4D

LC020

Factory fitted perimeter protection

SC008 UCH type

WITH/WITHOUT

4C, 4D, 4F and 50

LC021

Type of windscreen

SC008 UCH type

TINTED/HEAT INSULATING

44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F and 50

LC023

Engine type

CF028

F ENGINE/K ENGINE/M ENGINE

44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F and 50

LC025

See-me-home lighting:

CF032

WITH/WITHOUT

44, 48, 4C, 4D

LC029

Selective opening element opening

SC008 UCH type

WITH/WITHOUT

44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F and 50

LC030

Heating resistor type

SC008 UCH type

NONE/1000 W/ 1800 W

44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F and 50

SC016 Child safety

WITH/WITHOUT

4C, 4D, 4F and 50

automatic configuration

WITH/WITHOUT

44 and 48

LC035

Child safety

LC041

New vehicle storage mode

VP016

ACTIVE/INACTIVE

4F and 50

LC044

Rain/light sensor

SC008 UCH type

WITH/WITHOUT

4F and 50

LC064

Rear screen wiper

CF166

WITH/WITHOUT

4F and 50

LC070

One-touch window(s)/ sunroof

SC008 UCH type

WITH/WITHOUT

4F and 50

87B-57

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Configurations and programming

87B

Specific UCH commands: Specific commands

Name of Specific command

Vdiag

SC001

Reading the valve set and stored codes

44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F and 50

SC002

Programming the 4 valve codes

44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F and 50

SC003

Spare

44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F and 50

SC004

UCH programming

44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F and 50

SC005

Card check

44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F and 50

SC006

Card allocation

44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F and 50

SC008

Type of UCH

44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F and 50

SC016

Child safety

4C, 4D, 4F and 50

87B-58

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault summary table

Tool fault

Diagnostic tool title

DF001

UCH

DF002

Steering lock

DF003

Clutch switch circuit'

DF004

Brake light switch circuit

DF005

Card

DF006

Front left-hand wheel valve sensor

DF007

Front right-hand wheel valve sensor

DF008

Rear right-hand wheel valve sensor

DF009

Rear left-hand wheel valve sensor

DF010

Steering column control unit circuit

DF011

Rain/light sensor circuit

DF012

Right-hand direction indicator circuit

DF013

Left-hand direction indicator circuit

DF014

Card reader circuit

DF015

Optical sensor circuit

DF016

At least 2 identical codes/summer set

DF017

At least 2 identical codes/winter set

DF018

Programming of 4 codes in summer set not performed

DF019

Programming of 4 codes in winter set not performed

DF020

Front internal aerial circuit

DF021

Rear internal aerial circuit

DF022

Centre internal aerial circuit

DF023

Driver's side front external aerial circuit

DF024

Passenger side front external aerial circuit

DF025

Driver's side rear external aerial circuit

DF026

Passenger side rear door external aerial circuit

DF027

External temperature sensor circuit

87B Vdiag

44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

87B-59

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault summary table

Tool fault

Diagnostic tool title

DF029

Steering lock circuit

DF030

Anti-locking line

DF031

One-touch window connection

DF032

Tailgate external aerial

DF033

Driver-side external aerial(s)

DF034

Passenger-side external aerial(s)

DF035

Internal aerial circuit

DF072

Child safety circuit

DF073

Right-hand door child safety lock circuit

DF074

Left-hand door child safety lock circuit

DF075

Timed supply circuit

87B Vdiag

44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

4D, 4F, 50

87B-60

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

UCH DF001 PRESENT

NOTES

1.DEF: Internal electronic fault 2.DEF: Internal electronic fault

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to stored faults: Perform locking/unlocking by pressing button on card. If the fault appears, carry out this fault finding procedure. Special notes: If a fault concerning the steering column lock is present or stored, deal with it first.

Contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF001P/UCH_V48_DF001P/UCH_V4C_DF001P/ UCH_V4D_DF001P/UCH_V4F_DF001P /UCH_V50_DF001P

87B-61

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

STEERING COLUMN LOCK

DF002 PRESENT

1.DEF: 2.DEF: 3.DEF: 4.DEF: 5.DEF: 6.DEF: 7.DEF: 8.DEF:

Steering lock internal electronic fault Steering column lock internal electronic fault Mechanical fault on column Steering column lock authentication fault Steering column lock authentication fault UCH internal electronic fault Steering column lock internal electronic fault Steering column lock internal electronic fault

Priorities when dealing with a number of faults: Firstly, deal with fault DF029 Steering column lock circuit, if it is present. NOTES Special notes: Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes.

1.DEF

NOTES

Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes.

If the fault is still present, replace the steering column lock.

2.DEF

NOTES

Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes.

Make another attempt to lock/unlock the column. If the fault is still present, replace the steering column lock.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF002P/UCH_V48_DF002P/UCH_V4C_DF002P/ UCH_V4D_DF002P/UCH_V4F_DF002P /UCH_V50_DF002P

87B-62

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF002 CONTINUED 1

3.DEF

NOTES

Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes.

Release the column by turning the steering wheel, while pressing the start button. If the fault is still present without mechanical fault (with the wheels set straight ahead), replace the steering column lock.

4.DEF

NOTES

Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes.

The steering column lock does not belong to this vehicle (or the UCH and/or the cards do not belong to this vehicle). Fit the correct steering column lock (or UCH and/or cards). If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

5.DEF

NOTES

Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes.

The steering column lock does not belong to this vehicle (or the UCH and/or the cards do not belong to this vehicle). Fit the correct steering column lock (or UCH and/or cards). If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-63

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF002 CONTINUED 2

6.DEF

NOTES

Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes.

Make another attempt to lock/unlock the column. If the fault is still present, replace the UCH.

7.DEF

NOTES

Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes.

If the vehicle is fitted with a Vdiag 0F ABS computer, or a Vdiag 0B or Vdiag 11 ABS/ESP computer: establish dialogue with the ABS or ABS/ESP computer and check that PR020 Vehicle speed on initialisation is correctly configured. If the configuration is incorrect, use command VP032 Vehicle speed on initialisation to reconfigure the ABS or the ABS/ESP. Make five attempts to start and lock the column. If the fault is still present, replace the steering column lock.

8.DEF

NOTES

Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes.

Deal with DF029 Steering column lock circuit first. If the fault is still present, replace the steering column lock.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-64

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF003 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

CO.1

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

CLUTCH SWITCH CIRCUIT CO.1 : Open circuit or short circuit to + 12 V

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: The fault appears after a road test at speed > 60 mph (100 km/h).

NOTES

None

Check the condition and connection of the green 2-track clutch switch connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.) If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the blue 40-track UCH connector PE1 (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation to + 12 V and the continuity of the following connection: Clutch switch track 1

track 5 of the 40-track UCH PE1 connector

Check for earth on track 2 of the clutch pedal switch. If the connection is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connection, otherwise replace the wiring. If the connection is OK and earth is present, replace the clutch pedal switch. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF003/UCH_V48_DF003/UCH_V4C_DF003/ UCH_V4D_DF003/UCH_V4F_DF003/UCH_V50_DF003

87B-65

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF004 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH CIRCUIT

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: The fault becomes present after 10 successive transitions of more than 1 second between the released status and depressed status. Note: The fault could prevent cruise control/speed limiter operation.

Refer to the interpretation of status ET047 Brake pedal position.

AFTER REPAIR

87B

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF004/UCH_V48_DF004/UCH_V4C_DF004/ UCH_V4D_DF004/UCH_V4F_DF004/UCH_V50_DF004

87B-66

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF005 PRESENT OR STORED

DEF

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

CARD DEF : Card battery low

NOTES

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to stored faults: Perform 5 start operations with each vehicle card.

Check the condition of the card battery and that it is inserted the right way round. Replace the battery if necessary. After each battery change, check that the fault does not recur after 5 starts. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

87B

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF005/UCH_V48_DF005/UCH_V4C_DF005/ UCH_V4D_DF005/UCH_V4F_DF005/UCH_V50_DF005

87B-67

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF006 DF007 DF008 DF009 PRESENT

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

FRONT LEFT-HAND WHEEL VALVE SENSOR FRONT RIGHT-HAND WHEEL VALVE SENSOR REAR RIGHT-HAND WHEEL VALVE SENSOR REAR LEFT-HAND WHEEL VALVE SENSOR 2.DEF: 3.DEF: 4.DEF: 5.DEF: 6.DEF: 7.DEF: 8.DEF:

Sensor internal electronic fault Sensor internal electronic fault Sensor internal electronic fault Sensor internal electronic fault Sensor internal electronic fault Sensor internal electronic fault Sensor internal electronic fault

Special notes: No operation involving replacement of a valve or removal of a tyre should be attempted without full knowledge of the required precautions (Mégane II: see MR 364, mechanical systems, 35B Tyre pressure monitoring system; Regarding Scenic II: see MR 370, Mechanical systems, 35B Tyre pressure monitoring system). Before any operation, ensure that all the wheels have tyre pressure monitoring valves, and that the spare wheel has not been fitted.

For faults DF006 to DF009, if the fault is present as of the first kilometres, repeat programming of the 4 valves. If programming is unsuccessful, replace the valve concerned following the procedure described in the MR (see Instructions). Check that there are no wheels with rubber valves. If there are, replace them with wheels with a valve fitted with a sensor and carry out a road test. If the fault is still present, carry out programming of the 4 valves. If the fault is still present, replace the valve. The correspondence between fault numbers and the valve concerned is described below: – DF006 = Front left-hand valve sensor. – DF007 = Front right-hand valve sensor. – DF008 = Rear right-hand valve sensor. – DF009 = Rear left-hand valve sensor. When the sensor has been replaced, start to program the four valve codes according to the procedure SC002 Programming the four valve codes (see Configuration and programming).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF006P/UCH_V48_DF006P/UCH_V4C_DF006P/UCH_V4D_DF006P/UCH_V4F_DF006P/UCH_V50_DF006P/ UCH_V44_DF007P/UCH_V48_DF007P/UCH_V4C_DF007P/UCH_V4D_DF007P/UCH_V4F_DF007P/UCH_V50_DF007P/ UCH_V44_DF008P/UCH_V48_DF008P/UCH_V4C_DF008P/UCH_V4D_DF008P/UCH_V4F_DF008P/UCH_V50_DF008P/ UCH_V44_DF009P/UCH_V48_DF009P/UCH_V4C_DF009P/UCH_V4D_DF009P/UCH_V4F_DF009P/UCH_V50_DF009P

87B-68

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

STEERING COLUMN SWITCH COMBINED CIRCUIT

DF010 PRESENT OR STORED

1.DEF 2.DEF 3.DEF 4.DEF 5.DEF

1.DEF: The combined stalk is not connected or not correctly connected (stalk or UCH side), not being supplied or has an internal electronic fault. 2.DEF: Combined stalk lighting function connection to UCH in open circuit or internal stalk fault. 3.DEF: Combined stalk wiping function connection to UCH in open circuit or internal stalk fault. 4.DEF: Combined stalk direction indicator function connection to UCH in open circuit or internal stalk fault. 5.DEF: Combined stalk trip computer function connection to UCH in open circuit or internal stalk fault.

NOTES

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: If the fault becomes present after an operation on the stalk, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH connector PE2 (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the black 12-track steering column control connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF010/UCH_V48_DF010/UCH_V4C_DF010/ UCH_V4D_DF010/UCH_V4F_DF010/UCH_V50_DF010

87B-69

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF010 CONTINUED

Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Steering column switch 12-track black connector

40-track UCH connector PE2

track 1

Track 14

track 2

Track 9

track 14

Track 12

track 9

Track 15

track 11

Track 4

track 12

Track 17

track 17

Track 11

track 18

Track 5

track 13

Track 2

track 16

Track 19

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If these connections are sound, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-70

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF011 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

1.DEF

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

RAIN/LIGHT SENSOR CIRCUIT 1.DEF: Communication disrupted 2.DEF: Internal electronic fault

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Run the automatic wiper system and automatic light illumination system, then cover the sensor and/or place water on it. If the fault appears, carry out this fault finding procedure.

NOTES

None

For vehicles which were manufactured after June 2005, check the condition and connection of the sensor supply 7.5A fuse located on the Protection and Switching Unit. Replace it if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the black 3-track sensor connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for earth on track 3 of the sensor. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for + 12 V APC on track 1 of the rain/light sensor (timed + 12 V AVC if vehicle was manufactured after June 2005). If not correct, check the continuity and insulation on the following connection: sensor track 1

track 3 of UCH PP3 connector.

Check for any intermediate connectors using the vehicle wiring diagram and repair if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF011/UCH_V48_DF011/UCH_V4C_DF011/ UCH_V4D_DF011/UCH_V4F_DF011/UCH_V50_DF011

87B-71

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF011 CONTINUED

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: sensor track 2

track 1 of UCH PE2 connector.

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

2.DEF

NOTES

If fault is present

Replace the sensor.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-72

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR CIRCUIT

DF012 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

87B

CO.0 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth 1.DEF: Bulbs not working or open circuit

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: If the fault appears after action on the right-hand direction indicator control stalk, apply this fault finding procedure. Special note: The fault becomes stored after changing a bulb.

Check the bulbs. Replace them if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the right-hand headlight connectors of the right-hand indicator repeater and the rear right-hand light. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for earth on the following components: Track 1 headlight. Track 2 indicator. Rear light: 3-door hatch: on track 3 of the rear light black connector. Cabriolet: on track 4 of the rear light black connector. Estate: on track 3 of the rear light black connector. 4-door hatch: on track 5 of the rear light black connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. With the command running, check for + 12 V on the following components: Track 3 headlight. Track 1 repeater. Rear light: 3-door hatch: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. Cabriolet: on track 5 of the rear light black connector. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door hatch: on track 6 of the rear light black connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF012/UCH_V48_DF012/UCH_V4C_DF012/ UCH_V4D_DF012/UCH_V4F_DF012/UCH_V50_DF012

87B-73

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF012 CONTINUED 1

Check the condition and connection of connector PP3 and connector PP1 on the UCH. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Fault finding procedure concerning mechanical phase 1 vehicles (vehicles manufactured before 10/01/2005 for type BCEJRK and before 17/01/2005 for type L): Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Track 3 headlight Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3-door hatch: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. Cabriolet: on track 5 of the rear light black connector. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door hatch: on track 6 of the rear light black connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

track 5 of the 12-track grey connector PP3 of the UCH

Fault finding procedure concerning mechanical phase 2 vehicles (vehicles manufactured after 10/01/2005 for type BCEJRK and after 17/01/2005 for type L): Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Track 3 headlight

AFTER REPAIR

track 5 of the 12-track grey PP3 connector of the UCH

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-74

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF012 CONTINUED 2

Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3-door hatch: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. Cabriolet: on track 5 of the rear light black connector. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door hatch: on track 6 of the rear light black connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

track 2 of the black connector PP1 4 of the UCH

If correct, check the connection between the UCH and front and rear lights (see wiring diagram), check the bulbs again and if still not correct, replace the rear lights(s).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-75

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

LEFT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR CIRCUIT

DF013 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

87B

CO.0 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth 1.DEF: Bulbs not working or open circuit

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: If the fault appears after action on the left-hand direction indicator control stalk, then apply this fault finding procedure. Special note: The fault becomes stored after changing a bulb.

Check the bulbs. Replace them if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the left-hand headlight connector, the left-hand repeater and the rear left-hand light. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for earth on the following components: Track 1 headlight. Track 2 indicator. Rear light: 3-door hatch: on track 3 of the rear light black connector. Cabriolet: on track 3 of the rear light black connector. Estate: on track 3 of the rear light black connector. 4-door hatch: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. With the command running, check for + 12 V on the following components: Track 3 headlight. Track 1 repeater. Rear light: 3-door hatch: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. Cabriolet: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door hatch: on track 1 of the rear light black connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF013/UCH_V48_DF013/UCH_V4C_DF013/ UCH_V4D_DF013/UCH_V4F_DF013/UCH_V50_DF013

87B-76

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF013 CONTINUED 1

Check the condition and connection of connector PP3 and connector PP2 on the UCH. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Fault finding procedure concerning mechanical phase 1 vehicles (vehicles manufactured before 10/01/ 2005 for type BCEJRK and before 17/01/2005 for type L): Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Track 3 headlight Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3-door hatch: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. Cabriolet: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door hatch: on track 1 of the rear light black connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

track 4 of the 12-track grey connector PP3 of the UCH

Fault finding procedure concerning mechanical phase 2 vehicles (vehicles manufactured after 10/01/2005 for type BCEJRK and after 17/01/2005 for type L): Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Track 3 headlight

AFTER REPAIR

track 4 of the 12-track grey connector PP3 of the UCH

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults.

87B-77

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF013 CONTINUED 2

Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3-door hatch: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. Cabriolet: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. Estate: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door hatch: on track 1 of the rear light black connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

track 12 of the 12-track black connector PP2 of the UCH

If correct, check the connection between the UCH and the front and rear lights (see wiring diagram), check the bulbs again and if still not correct, replace the rear lights(s).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults.

87B-78

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF014 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

CC.0

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

CARD READER CIRCUIT CC.0 CO.0 CC.1 DEF

: : : :

Short circuit to earth Open circuit or short circuit to earth Short circuit to + 12 V Internal electronic fault

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Insert the card into the card reader, switch on and switch off the engine, leaving the card in the card reader. Carry out fault finding on the card reader circuit with the card in the card reader (after the engine is switched off, the card reader is supplied and controlled for 20 min).

NOTES

None

Check the condition and connection of the 8-track card reader black connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track PE2 black connector and the 40-track UCH PE1 blue connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity and insulation against earth of the following connections: Card reader track 4

track 39 of the black 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH

Card reader track 6

track 40 of the black 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH

Card reader track 3

track 21 of the black 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Using an oscilloscope, check for a square pulse signal on track 3 of the card reader connector: Connect the oscilloscope between track 3 of the connector and a bodywork earth. Adjust the oscilloscope as follows: Calibration on 5 V/division Time base 100 ms/division Using an oscilloscope check for a square pulse signal coming from the UCH on track 3 of the card reader connector. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF014/UCH_V48_DF014/UCH_V4C_DF014/ UCH_V4D_DF014/UCH_V4F_DF014/UCH_V50_DF014

87B-79

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF014 CONTINUED 1

CO.0

NOTES

None

Check the condition and connection of the 8-track card reader black connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track black connector PE2 and the 40-track UCH blue connector PE1 (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for + 12 V on track 3 of the card reader. Check for earth on track 5 of the card reader. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity and insulation against earth of the following connections: Card reader track 4

track 39 of the 40-track black connector PE2 of the UCH

Card reader track 6

track 40 of the black 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH

Card reader track 3

track 21 of the black 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH

Card reader track 5

track 25 of the black 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Replace the card reader if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-80

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF014 CONTINUED 2

CC.1

NOTES

None

Check the condition and connection of the 8-track card reader black connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track black connector PE2 and the 40-track UCH blue connector PE1 (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for earth on track 5 of the card reader. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation against + 12 V on the following connections: Card reader track 4

track 39 of the black 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH

Card reader track 6

track 40 of the black 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH

Card reader track 5

track 25 of the black 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Replace the card reader if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

DEF

NOTES

None

Replace the card reader if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-81

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

DF015 PRESENT OR STORED

87B

OPTICAL SENSOR CIRCUIT CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Lock the vehicle and place your hand in each handle. If the fault appears, carry out this fault finding procedure.

NOTES

Check that ET054 Optical sensors supplied is YES. If status ET054 remains NO, consult the interpretation of status ET054. Check the statuses of the sensors to determine which sensor is in short circuit: without a hand being placed inside the handles, the statuses must be INACTIVE. ET055 Driver's side optical sensor, ET056 Driver's rear optical sensor, ET057 Front/rear passenger optical sensor. If one of the statuses remains ACTIVE, disconnect the faulty sensor(s): if, after disconnection, the status returns to INACTIVE, replace the faulty sensor. If a status remains INACTIVE after placing a hand inside the handle: Check for 12 V on track 3 of the sensor(s). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and the continuity of the following connections: Driver's side front sensor track 1

track 21 of the 40-track grey connector PE3 of the UCH.

Driver's side rear sensor track 1

track 22 of the 40-track grey connector PE3 of the UCH

Passenger side front sensor track 1

track 23 of the 40-track grey connector PE3 of the UCH.

Passenger side rear sensor track 1

track 23 of the 40-track grey connector PE3 of the UCH.

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the connections are correct and the power supply is present, then replace the sensor concerned. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF015/UCH_V48_DF015/UCH_V4C_DF015/ UCH_V4D_DF015/UCH_V4F_DF015/UCH_V50_DF015

87B-82

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF016 DF017 PRESENT

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

AT LEAST 2 IDENTICAL CODES/SUMMER SET AT LEAST 2 IDENTICAL CODES/WINTER SET

Special notes: No operation involving replacement of a valve, or removal of a tyre should be attempted without full knowledge of the required precautions (Mégane II: see MR 364, Mechanical systems, 35B Tyre pressure monitoring system; Regarding Scenic II: see MR 370, Mechanical systems, 35B Tyre pressure monitoring system). Before any operation, check that all the wheels have tyre pressure monitoring valves, and that the spare wheel has not been fitted on the same axle assembly.

Fault DF016 At least 2 identical codes/summer set appears when at least two valve codes are identical in the summer wheel set (incorrect programming of four valve codes). In this case, restart programming of the four valves according to procedure SC002: Programming of the four valve codes (see Configuration and programming). Fault DF017 At least 2 identical codes/winter set appears when at least two valve codes are identical in the winter wheel set (incorrect programming of four valve codes). In this case, restart programming of the four valves according to procedure SC002: Programming of the four valve codes (see Configuration and programming).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF016P/UCH_V48_DF016P/UCH_V4C_DF016P/UCH_V4D_DF016P/UCH_V4F_DF016P/UCH_V50_DF016P/ UCH_V44_DF017P/UCH_V48_DF017P/UCH_V4C_DF017P/UCH_V4D_DF017P/UCH_V4F_DF017P/UCH_V50_DF017P

87B-83

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF018 DF019 PRESENT

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

PROGRAMMING OF 4 CODES IN SUMMER SET NOT PERFORMED PROGRAMMING OF 4 CODES IN WINTER SET NOT PERFORMED

Special notes: No operation involving changing a valve, or removal of a tyre should be attempted without full knowledge of the required precautions (Mégane II: see MR 364 Mechanical systems, 35B Tyre pressure monitoring system and for Scenic II: see MR 370 Mechanical systems, 35B Tyre pressure monitoring system). Before any operation, ensure that all the wheels have tyre pressure monitoring valves, and that the spare wheel has not been fitted.

Fault DF018: Programming of 4 codes in summer set not performed is present if the UCH has not programmed a valve code for the summer tyre set (after replacing the sensors or UCH). Fault DF019 4 Programming of 4 codes in winter set not performed is present if the UCH has not programmed a valve code for the winter tyre set and the winter tyre set is selected. In the status menu, note the type of tyre set stored in the memory (summer or winter). In the status menu, note the valve codes allocated for the type of tyre stored in the memory. Program the four valve codes using the procedure SC002 Programming the four valve codes (see Configuration and programming).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF018P/UCH_V48_DF018P/UCH_V4C_DF018P/UCH_V4D_DF018P/UCH_V4F_DF018P/UCH_V50_DF018P/ UCH_V44_DF019P/UCH_V48_DF019P/UCH_V4C_DF019P/UCH_V4D_DF019P/UCH_V4F_DF019P/UCH_V50_DF019P

87B-84

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF020 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

FRONT INTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO

: Open circuit

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding; if the fault becomes present, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the front internal aerial 3-track black connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH grey connector PE3 (tabs bent, broken, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 3-track connector track 1

track 25 of the UCH 40-track connector PE3

3-track connector track 3

track 24 of the UCH 40-track connector PE3

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF020/UCH_V48_DF020/UCH_V4C_DF020/ UCH_V4D_DF020/UCH_V4F_DF020/UCH_V50_DF020

87B-85

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF021 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

REAR INTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO

: Open circuit

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding; if the fault becomes present, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the rear internal aerial 3-track black connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH grey connector PE3 (tabs bent, broken, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 3-track connector track 1

track 35 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

3-track connector track 3

track 36 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF021/UCH_V48_DF021/UCH_V4C_DF021/ UCH_V4D_DF021/UCH_V4F_DF021/UCH_V50_DF021

87B-86

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF022 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

CENTRE INTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO

: Open circuit

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding; if the fault becomes present, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the centre internal aerial 3-track black connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH grey connector PE3 (tabs bent, broken, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 3-track connector track 3

track 37 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

3-track connector track 1

track 26 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF022/UCH_V48_DF022/UCH_V4C_DF022/ UCH_V4D_DF022/UCH_V4F_DF022/UCH_V50_DF022

87B-87

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF023 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DRIVER'S SIDE FRONT EXTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO

: Open circuit

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding; if the fault becomes present, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the 4-track black connector of the driver's side front door external aerial (tabs bent, broken, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 (tabs bent, broken, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector track 2

track 39 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

4-track connector track 1

track 27 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF023/UCH_V48_DF023/UCH_V4C_DF023/ UCH_V4D_DF023/UCH_V4F_DF023/UCH_V50_DF023

87B-88

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF024 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

PASSENGER SIDE FRONT EXTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO

: Open circuit

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding; if the fault becomes present, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the 4-track black connector of the passenger side front door external aerial (tabs bent, broken, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 (tabs bent, broken, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector track 1

track 34 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

4-track connector track 2

track 31 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF024/UCH_V48_DF024/UCH_V4C_DF024/ UCH_V4D_DF024/UCH_V4F_DF024/UCH_V50_DF024

87B-89

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF025 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DRIVER'S SIDE REAR EXTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO

: Open circuit

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial diagnostic; if the fault appears, then carry out this fault finding procedure. Verify that configuration CF097 Vehicle type has been correctly performed.

Check the condition and connection of the 4-track black connector of the driver's side rear door external aerial (tabs bent, broken, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 (tabs bent, broken, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector track 1

track 28 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

4-track connector track 2

track 38 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF025/UCH_V48_DF025/UCH_V4C_DF025/ UCH_V4D_DF025/UCH_V4F_DF025/UCH_V50_DF025

87B-90

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF026 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

PASSENGER SIDE REAR EXTERNAL AERIAL CIRCUIT CO

: Open circuit

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding; if the fault becomes present, then carry out this fault finding procedure. Verify that configuration CF097 Vehicle type has been correctly performed.

Check the condition and connection of the 4-track black connector of the passenger side rear door external aerial (tabs bent, broken, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 (tabs bent, broken, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector track 1

track 32 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

4-track connector track 2

track 33 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF026/UCH_V48_DF026/UCH_V4C_DF026/ UCH_V4D_DF026/UCH_V4F_DF026/UCH_V50_DF026

87B-91

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT

DF027 PRESENT OR STORED

CC.0 : Short circuit to earth CO.1 : Open circuit or short circuit to + 12 V

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: The fault reappears as stored following the fault being cleared

NOTES

Check whether the passenger door mirror is fitted with a temperature sensor. If NO, vehicle is not fitted with it; (if the vehicle is not fitted with an external temperature sensor, check that configuration CF029 External temperature sensor has been correctly configured as WITHOUT. If YES, perform the following fault finding procedure. Check the 2-track green connector of the temperature sensor (tabs bent, oxidised, broken). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the 40-track UCH black connector PE2 (tabs bent, oxidised, broken, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Temperature sensor Track 1

Track 3 of the 40-track black connector of the UCH.

Temperature sensor Track 2

Track 13 of the 40-track black connector of the UCH.

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF027/UCH_V48_DF027/UCH_V4C_DF027/ UCH_V4D_DF027/UCH_V4F_DF027/UCH_V50_DF027

87B-92

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF027 CONTINUED

Measure the sensor resistance between tracks 3 and 4 of the 4-track passenger electric door mirror black connector. Approximate temperature in °C

Sensor resistance in Ω

between 0 and 5

between 5400 and 6200

between 11 and 15

between 3700 and 4400

between 21 and 25

between 2500 and 3000

between 31 and 35

between 1700 and 2100

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Replace the sensor if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-93

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

STEERING LOCK CIRCUIT DF029 PRESENT

CC.1 : Short circuit to + 12 V 1.DEF : Open circuit (e.g.: lock disconnected) or lock power supply absent 2.DEF : Lock earth absent or multiplex network faulty (e.g. steering lock ⇒ UCH connection) 4.DEF : Short circuit to earth on the steering column lock sensor connection 5.DEF : Open circuit on the steering column lock sensor connection 6.DEF : Short circuit to + 12 V on the steering column lock sensor connection

None NOTES

Special note: Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes.

NOTES

CC.1

Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes.

Check the condition and connection of the 6-track steering column lock black connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of connectors PE2, PP2 on the UCH and connectors PEH (UPC Vdiag 44) or CT1 (UPC Vdiag 48) on the UPC (bent or broken tabs, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Steering column lock on track 3

track 10 of UCH connector PE2

Steering column lock on track 6

track 20 of UCH connector PE2

Steering column lock on track 2

track 1 of the UCH connector PP2

Steering column lock on track 5

track 1 of the PEH or CT1 connector of the Protection and Switching Unit

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF029P/UCH_V48_DF029P/UCH_V4C_DF029P/ UCH_V4D_DF029P/UCH_V4F_DF029P /UCH_V50_DF029P

87B-94

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF029 CONTINUED 1

1.DEF 2.DEF

NOTES

Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes.

Check the condition and connection of the 6-track steering column lock black connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the PP2 and PE2 connectors of the UCH (tabs bent, broken, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity of the connection between track 1 of the steering column lock 6-track black connector and the bodywork earth. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Steering column lock on track 3

track 10 of UCH connector PE2

Steering column lock on track 6

track 20 of UCH connector PE2

Steering column lock on track 2

track 1 of UCH connector PP2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-95

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DF029 CONTINUED 2

4.DEF 5.DEF 6.DEF

NOTES

Attempt to apply + forced after ignition to update the fault codes.

Check the condition and connection of the 6-track steering column lock connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the UCH connector PE1 (tabs bent, broken, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity and the insulation of the following connection: Steering column lock on track 4

track 1 of the UCH PE1 connector

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-96

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

ANTI-LOCKING LINE CO

DF030 PRESENT

NOTES

: Open circuit

None

NOTES

CO.1

None

Check the condition and connection of the 6-track steering column lock connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the presence and condition of the F5D fuse on the UPC (Vdiag 44 UPC) or the F18 fuse (Vdiag 48 UPC or later). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of connector PEH (UPC Vdiag 44) or connector CT1 (UPC Vdiag 48) of the UPC (bent or broken tabs, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Steering column lock track 5

track 1 of the 12-track PEH or CT1 connector of the Protection and Switching Unit

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF030P/UCH_V48_DF030P/UCH_V4C_DF030P/ UCH_V4D_DF030P/UCH_V4F_DF030P /UCH_V50_DF030P

87B-97

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF031 PRESENT OR STORED

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

ONE TOUCH WINDOW CONNECTION CC.1 : Short circuit to + 12 V CO.0 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: If the fault becomes present after a one-touch window has been activated, then apply this fault finding procedure. NOTES

Special note: If the vehicle is not fitted with one-touch windows, ignore this fault. Refer to the information about Electric windows in the Fault finding chart section. If the vehicle has a Mégane II ph2 bodywork: see MR 366 Fault finding, 87D, Electric windows - Sunroof.

Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the electric windows (tabs bent, broken, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the connector PE2 of the UCH (tabs bent, broken, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: 40-track connector PE2 on track 7

track 6 of the window winder connector

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF031/UCH_V48_DF031/UCH_V4C_DF031/ UCH_V4D_DF031/UCH_V4F_DF031/UCH_V50_DF031

87B-98

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF032 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT EXTERNAL AERIAL CO.1 : Open circuit or short circuit to + 12 V

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial diagnostic; if the fault appears, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the boot external aerial 4-track black connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 (tabs bent, broken, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and the continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector track 2

track 40 of the black 40-track UCH connector PE3

4-track connector track 1

track 29 of the black 40-track UCH connector PE3

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF032/UCH_V48_DF032/UCH_V4C_DF032/ UCH_V4D_DF032/UCH_V4F_DF032/UCH_V50_DF032

87B-99

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF033 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

DRIVER'S SIDE EXTERNAL AERIAL(S) CO.1 : Open circuit or short circuit to + 12 V

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial diagnostic; if the fault appears, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the driver's side external aerial 4-track black connector (tabs bent, broken, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the UCH 40-track connector PE3 (tabs bent, broken, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and the continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector track 2

track 39 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

4-track connector track 1

track 27 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

4-track connector track 1

track 28 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

4-track connector track 2

track 38 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Disconnect one aerial then the other to identify which is the cause of the fault. (The aerials are connected by side, a short circuit in one aerial affects all the aerials on the same side). Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF033/UCH_V48_DF033/UCH_V4C_DF033/ UCH_V4D_DF033/UCH_V4F_DF033/UCH_V50_DF033

87B-100

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF034 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

PASSENGER SIDE EXTERNAL AERIAL(S) CO.1 : Open circuit or short circuit to + 12 V

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding; if the fault becomes present, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the passenger side external aerial 4-track black connector (tabs bent, broken, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the UCH 40-track connector PE3 (tabs bent, broken, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and the continuity of the following connections: 4-track connector track 2

track 34 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

4-track connector track 1

track 31 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

4-track connector track 1

track 32 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

4-track connector track 2

track 33 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Disconnect one aerial then the other to identify which is the cause of the fault. (The aerials are connected by side, a short circuit in one aerial affects all the aerials on the same side). Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF034/UCH_V48_DF034/UCH_V4C_DF034/ UCH_V4D_DF034/UCH_V4F_DF034/UCH_V50_DF034

87B-101

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF035 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

INTERNAL AERIALS CIRCUIT CO.1 : Open circuit or short circuit to + 12 V

Conditions for applying fault finding procedures to stored faults: Activation of command AC037: Transmitter aerial fault finding; if the fault becomes present, then carry out this fault finding procedure.

Check the condition and connection of the front internal aerial 4-track black connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the UCH 40-track connector PE3 (tabs bent, broken, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity and insulation to earth of the following connections: Front aerial, 3-track connector on track 1

track 25 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

Front aerial, 3-track connector on track 3

track 24 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

Centre aerial, 3-track connector on track 3

track 37 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

Centre aerial, 3-track connector on track 1

track 26 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

Rear aerial, 3-track connector on track 1

track 35 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

Rear aerial, 3-track connector on track 3

track 36 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Disconnect the aerials one by one to identify which is the cause of the fault. (The 3 aerials are interconnected in the UCH, a short circuit in one aerial affects all the aerials). Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF035/UCH_V48_DF035/UCH_V4C_DF035/ UCH_V4D_DF035/UCH_V4F_DF035/UCH_V50_DF035

87B-102

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

DF072 PRESENT OR STORED

CO CC

87B

CHILD SAFETY CIRCUIT CC CO

: Short circuit : Open circuit

NOTES

If DF074 Left-hand door child safety lock circuit and DF073 Right-hand door child safety lock circuit are present, reconfigure the child safety lock function using the special command SC016 Child safety lock (see Configurations and programming).

Check the condition and connection of the child safety switch connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for + 12 V on tracks A1 and B3 on the child safety lock switch connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for an earth on track A3 of the child safety lock switch connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of connector PE1 on the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Child safety lock switch track B3

Track 9 of the 40-track UCH connector PE1

Child safety lock switch track B1

Track 11 of the 40-track UCH connector PE1

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF072/UCH_V48_DF072/UCH_V4C_DF072/ UCH_V4D_DF072/UCH_V4F_DF072/UCH_V50_DF072

87B-103

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

DF073 PRESENT OR STORED

CO CC

87B

RIGHT-HAND DOOR CHILD SAFETY LOCK CIRCUIT CC CO

: Short circuit : Open circuit

NOTES

If DF072 Left-hand door child safety lock circuit and DF073 Right-hand door child safety lock circuit are present, reconfigure the child safety lock function using the special command SC016 Child safety lock (see Configurations and programming).

Check the condition and connection of the child safety switch connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for + 12 V on tracks A1 and B3 on the child safety lock switch connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for an earth on track A3 of the child safety lock switch connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the UCH PE1 and PP2 connectors. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Child safety lock switch track B3

Track 9 of the 40-track UCH connector PE1

Child safety lock switch track B1

Track 11 of the 40-track UCH connector PE1

Rear right-hand door locking motor 6-track black connector track B

Track 11 of the 12-track UCH connector PP2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF073/UCH_V48_DF073/UCH_V4C_DF073/ UCH_V4D_DF073/UCH_V4F_DF073/UCH_V50_DF073

87B-104

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

DF074 PRESENT OR STORED

CO CC

87B

LEFT-HAND DOOR CHILD SAFETY LOCK CIRCUIT CC CO

: Short circuit : Open circuit

NOTES

None

Check the condition and connection of the child safety switch connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for + 12 V on tracks A1 and B3 on the child safety lock switch connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for an earth on track A3 of the child safety lock switch connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the UCH PE1 and PP2 connectors. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Child safety lock switch track B3

Track 9 of the 40-track UCH connector PE1

Child safety lock switch track B1

Track 11 of the 40-track UCH connector PE1

Rear left-hand door locking motor 6-track black connector track E

Track 11 of the 12-track UCH connector PP2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF074/UCH_V48_DF074/UCH_V4C_DF074/ UCH_V4D_DF074/UCH_V4F_DF074/UCH_V50_DF074

87B-105

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

DF075 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87B

TIMED SUPPLY CIRCUIT CC

: Short circuit

After unlocking, opening of a door causes time-delayed power supply, indicated by lighting of the starting switch and the instrument panel. Before any check on the UCH tracks, unlock the vehicle.

Check the condition and connection of the connectors on the UCH and the connectors on the UPC. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for + 12 V on tracks 3 and 10 of the 12-track UCH connector PP3. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for an earth on track 1 of the 12-track UCH PP3 connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_DF075/UCH_V48_DF075/UCH_V4C_DF075/ UCH_V4D_DF075/UCH_V4F_DF075/UCH_V50_DF075

87B-106

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Note: Certain statuses and parameter do not affect all the Vdiags.

NOTES

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

MAIN COMPUTER STATUSES AND PARAMETERS

Sub-function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

Fault finding

Battery voltage

9 < X < 16

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of parameter PR001

ET014:

Control power level

NONE ACCESSORIES TIMED AFTER-IGNITION FEED

None

ET087:

One-touch window control/sunroof authorisation.

ACTIVE INACTIVE

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET087

ET098:

Trip Computer button

DEPRESSED RELEASED

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET098

ET195:

UCH frequency (in MHz)

315 433

None

ET205:

Type of UCH RF aerial

INTERNAL EXTERNAL

None

ET010:

Card frequency (in MHz)

315 433

None

PR001:

UCH

UCH_V44_CCONF/UCH_V48_CCONF/UCH_V4C_CCONF/ UCH_V4D_CCONF/UCH_V4F_CCONF/UCH_V50_CCONF

87B-107

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION Sub-function: Access

Sub-function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

Fault finding

PR013:

Number of cards programmed

1 2 3 4

None

ET010:

Card frequency (in MHz)

315 433

None

ET195:

UCH frequency (in MHz)

315 433

None

ET205:

Type of UCH RF aerial

INTERNAL

None

ET045:

RF frame received

YES NO

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET045

ET066:

Card detected button

YES NO

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET066

ET067:

Card button press recognised

YES NO

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET067

ET054:

Optical sensors supplied

YES NO

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET054

ET055:

Front optical sensor (driver's side)

ACTIVE INACTIVE

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET055

ET056:

Rear driver side optical sensor

ACTIVE INACTIVE

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET056

ET057:

Passenger side front/ rear optical sensor

ACTIVE INACTIVE

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET057

Access

87B-108

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION Sub-function: Access (continued 1):

Sub-function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

Fault finding

ET058:

Locking buttons on driver's side handles

DEPRESSED RELEASED

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET058

ET059:

Locking buttons on passenger side handles

DEPRESSED RELEASED

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET059

ET060:

Locking tailgate button

DEPRESSED RELEASED

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET060

ET086:

Electric child safety lock

ACTIVE INACTIVE

Signal interpreted if vehicle configured WITH Child safety lock.

ET053:

Driver's door

OPEN CLOSED

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET053

ET042:

Passenger door

OPEN CLOSED

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET042

ET194:

Passenger's door or bonnet

OPEN CLOSED

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET042

ET051:

Rear left-hand door

OPEN CLOSED

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET051

ET052:

Rear right-hand door

OPEN CLOSED

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET052

Open tailgate request

PRESENT = Tailgate opening button pressed. ABSENT = Button not pressed.

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET061

Access

ET061:

87B-109

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION Sub-function: Access (continued 2):

Sub-function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

Fault finding

ET050:

Tailgate/Boot

OPEN CLOSED

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET050

ET062:

Open rear screen request

ABSENT PRESENT

None

ET041:

Opening rear screen

OPEN CLOSED

None

ET044:

CPE* button

PRESSED RELEASED

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET044

ET233:

Child safety switch

PRESSED RELEASED

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET233

ET230:

Child safety

ACTIVE INACTIVE

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of fault DF072

ET160:

Rear right-hand door child safety lock

ACTIVE INACTIVE

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET160

ET159:

Rear left-hand door child safety lock

ACTIVE INACTIVE

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET159

ET087:

One-touch window control/sunroof authorisation.

ACTIVE INACTIVE

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET087

Access

*CPE: Electric central door locking

87B-110

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION Sub-function: Access (continued 3):

Sub-function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

Fault finding

Most recently locked by

AUTOMATIC = automatic relocking if there is no action on the opening elements within 2 minutes of unlocking. Electric central door locking = locking by pressing button on centre console HANDS-FREE = locking by pressing the door handle or tailgate switch RAID FUNCTION = Renault Anti-Intruder Device. Operates from approximately 3 mph (5 km/h). CARD = locking with card FAULT FINDING = Locking with actuator AC004 Opening element locking CPE LONG = locking by pressing and holding down centre console button

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET068

ET069:

Most recently unlocked by

HANDS-FREE = optical sensors CPE = electric central door locking button CARD = by card FAULT FINDING = AC005 IMPACT SIGNAL = following impact signal AIRBAG = unlocking by the airbag computer following an accident

If the status = Airbag, carry out fault finding on the Airbag computer (see 88C, Airbag and pretensioners). In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET069

ET088:

Deadlocking activation source

CARD HANDS-FREE FAULT FINDING

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET088

ET068:

Access

87B-111

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION Sub-function: Access (continued 4):

Sub-function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

Fault finding

ET090:

Deadlocking deactivation source

CPE CARD HANDS-FREE FAULT FINDING APC

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET090

ET043:

Renault Anti-Intruder Device (RAID) via the central locking function

ACTIVE INACTIVE

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET043.

Access

87B-112

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION Sub-function: Protection

Sub-function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

Fault finding

ET070:

Start button

PRESSED RELEASED

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET070

ET008:

Blank UCH

YES = If the UCH is blank. NO = If the UCH is programmed.

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET008

PR013:

Number of cards programmed

1, 2, 3 or 4

None

ET071:

Unprogrammed steering column lock

YES NO

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET071

ET119:

UCH request to steering column lock

LOCKING UNLOCKING

None

ET248:

Steering column lock immobiliser code

INCORRECT CORRECT

None

ET073:

Steering column lock sensor signal

FAULTY UNLOCKED UNDETERMINED SEMI-ACTIVATED SHORT CIRCUIT

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET073

ET072:

Steering column lock

INCONSISTENT LOCKED UNLOCKED

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET072

ET014:

Control power level

NONE ACCESSORIES TIMED AFTER-IGNITION FEED

None

ET250:

Injection

PROGRAMMED BLANK

None

ET229:

Injection immobiliser code

INCORRECT CORRECT

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET229

Protection

87B-113

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION Sub-function: Protection (continued)

Sub-function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

Fault finding

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET046

ET046:

Engine immobiliser

INACTIVE = Vehicle unprotected, ready to start. ACTIVE = Vehicle protected, starting impossible.

ET116:

Card code received

YES NO

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET116

ET117:

Card code valid

YES NO

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET117

ET045:

RF signal received

YES NO

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET045

ET075:

+ Accessories feed present

YES NO

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET075

Protection

87B-114

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION Sub:function: Starting

Sub-function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

Fault finding

ET070:

Start button

DEPRESSED RELEASED

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET070

ET108:

Automatic gearbox lever position

NOT IN NEUTRAL P NEUTRAL REAR

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET108

ET048:

Clutch pedal position

DEPRESSED RELEASED

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET048

ET047:

Brake pedal position

NOT FOUND RELEASED DEPRESSED INCONSISTENT

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET047

ET110:

UCH request to injection or Protection and Switching Unit

ENGINE STOPPED INACTIVE AFTER-IGNITION STARTING

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET110

ET169:

Engine

STOPPED

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET169

Starting

87B-115

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

AIR CONDITIONING FUNCTION Sub-function: User selection

Sub-function

Parameter or Status checked or Action ET029:

ET028:

Display and notes

Fault finding

Air conditioning button

DEPRESSED RELEASED

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET029

Heated rear screen button

PRESSED if the heated rear screen button on the air conditioning control panel is pressed. RELEASED otherwise

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET028

Passenger compartment blower

ACTIVE INACTIVE Note: This status is only operative for manual air conditioning systems (and heater versions without air conditioning).

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET015

User selection

ET015:

87B-116

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

AIR CONDITIONING FUNCTION Sub-function: Heating

Sub-function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

Fault finding

PR001:

Battery voltage

9 < X < 16

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of parameter PR001

PR002:

External temperature

Temperature in °C

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of parameter PR002

ET017:

Number of RCH required

0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET017

ET018:

Number of RCH authorised by alternator

0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET018

ET019:

Number of RCH authorised by injection computer

0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET019

ET015:

Passenger compartment blower

ACTIVE INACTIVE Note: this status is only operative for manual air conditioning systems (and heater versions without air conditioning).

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET015

ET020:

Number RCH* activated.

0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET020

ET021:

RCH* 1 relay control

ACTIVE INACTIVE

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET021

ET022:

Passenger compartment heating resistor 2 relay control

ACTIVE INACTIVE

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET022

Heating

*RCH = Passenger Compartment Heating Resistor

87B-117

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

AIR CONDITIONING FUNCTION Sub-function: Heating (continued)

Sub-function

Heating

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

Fault finding

ET023:

RCH* 3 relay control

ACTIVE INACTIVE

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET023

ET031:

Fast idle speed request for RCH*

INACTIVE Fast idle speed to prevent battery discharge

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET031

ET169:

Engine

STOPPED

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET169

ET025:

Retractable roof

CLOSED NOT CLOSED ABSENT

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET025

ET026:

Heated rear screen switch

ACTIVE INACTIVE

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET026

*RCH = Passenger Compartment Heating Resistor

87B-118

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

AIR CONDITIONING FUNCTION Sub-function: Cold Loop

Sub-function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

Fault finding

ET030:

Air conditioning request 2

ACTIVE INACTIVE

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET030

ET169:

Engine

STOPPED

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET169

ET015:

Passenger compartment blower

ACTIVE INACTIVE Note: this status is only operative for manual air conditioning systems (and heater versions without air conditioning).

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET015

PR002:

External temperature

Temperature in °C

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of parameter PR002

Cold loop

87B-119

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

FUNCTION: TYRES Sub-function: Tyre approval

Sub-function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

Fault finding In the event of a fault, refer to Configuration and programming

ET040:

Tyre pressure monitoring system

OUT OF USE ACTIVE

ET037:

Tyre pressure appropriate for the speed

YES NO

PR008:

Vehicle speed

In mph

ET036:

Tyre pressure imbalance

NONE FRONT REAR FRONT/REAR

ET045:

RF signal received

YES NO

ET032:

Front left-hand wheel valve signal

ET033:

Front right-hand wheel valve signal

ET034:

Rear right-hand wheel valve signal

ET035:

Rear left-hand wheel valve signal

PR003:

Front left-hand wheel pressure

In bar

PR019:

Front left-hand tyre temperature

In °C

PR004:

Front right-hand wheel pressure

In bar

PR020:

Front right-hand tyre temperature

In °C

Tyre receiver

OK ABSENT OVER-INFLATED PUNCTURED UNDER-INFLATED

87B-120

Without (See 35B, SSPP)

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

FUNCTION: TYRES Sub-function: Tyre approval (continued)

Sub-function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

PR005:

Rear right-hand wheel pressure

In bar

PR021:

Rear right-hand tyre temperature

In °C

PR006:

Rear left-hand wheel pressure

In bar

PR022:

Rear left-hand tyre temperature

In °C

Tyre receiver

Fault finding

Without (See 35B, SSPP)

87B-121

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

FUNCTION: TYRES Sub-function: Tyre management

Sub-function

Tyre management

Parameter or Status checked or Action PR009:

Front wheel low speed recommended pressure

PR010:

Rear wheel low speed recommended pressure

PR012:

Front wheel high speed recommended pressure

PR011:

Rear wheel high speed recommended pressure

PR014:

Left/right pressure difference threshold

PR015:

Low under-inflation threshold

PR059:

Puncture report threshold

PR017:

Cold over-inflation threshold

PR018:

Warm over-inflation threshold

Display and notes

Fault finding See 35B, SSPP

In bar

Without (See 35B, SSPP)

87B-122

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

FUNCTION: TYRES Sub-function: Tyre display

Sub-function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

ET039:

STOP warning light on request

ACTIVE INACTIVE

ET016:

Buzzer activation request

INACTIVE STATUS 1 STATUS 2 INCONSISTENCY

Tyre display

87B-123

Fault finding See 35B, SSPP

Without (See 35B, SSPP)

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

LIGHTING FUNCTION Sub-function: Lighting command

Sub-function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

Fault finding

ET081:

Lighting switch position

PARK SIDE DIPPED MAIN FLASH

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET081

ET115:

Request to switch on lights by light sensor

PRESENT ABSENT

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET115

ET169:

Engine

STOPPED

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET169

ET113:

Automatic lighting button

DEPRESSED RELEASED

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET113

ET111:

Front fog lights request

PRESENT ABSENT

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET111

ET082:

Rear fog lights request

PRESENT ABSENT

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET082

ET085:

Hazard warning lights button

DEPRESSED RELEASED

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET085

ET083:

Left-hand direction indicator request

PRESENT ABSENT

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of statuses ET083

ET084:

Right-hand direction indicator request

PRESENT ABSENT

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of statuses ET084

Lighting control

87B-124

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

WIPING FUNCTION Sub function: Wiper control

Sub-function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

Fault finding

Vehicle speed

In mph

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of parameter PR008

ET077:

Wiper stalk position

SWITCHING OFF INTERMITTENT LOW AND HIGH SPEEDS

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET077

ET096:

Wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET096

ET118:

Rain sensor sensitivity ring position

1 2 3 4

ET114:

Wiper request by rain sensor

PRESENT ABSENT

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET114

ET078:

Windscreen washer request

PRESENT ABSENT

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET078

ET080:

Rear screen wiper request

PRESENT ABSENT

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET080

ET097:

Rear screen wiper park position

PRESENT ABSENT

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET097

ET079:

Rear screen washer request

PRESENT ABSENT

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET079

ET109:

Reverse gear engaged

YES NO

In the event of a fault, check the reverse gear switch and its connections.

ET108:

Automatic gearbox lever position

NOT IN NEUTRAL P NEUTRAL REAR

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET108

PR008:

Wiper control

87B-125

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

NOTES

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

87B

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application condition: engine stopped, + after ignition feed present.

LIGHTING FUNCTION Sub-function: Lighting power Ü

Sub-function Lighting power

Parameter or Status checked or Action ET112:

Display and notes

Fault finding

ACTIVE INACTIVE

None

Interior lighting control

87B-126

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Status summary table

Tool status

Diagnostic tool title

87B Vdiag

ET008

UCH blank

V44, V48, V4C, V4D, V4F, V50

ET010

Card frequency (in MHz)

V44, V48, V4C, V4D

ET014

Control power level

ET015

Passenger compartment blower

ET016

Buzzer activation request

ET017

Number of RCH* required

ET018

Number of RCH* authorised by alternator

ET019

Number of RCH* authorised by injection computer

ET020

Number RCH* activated.

ET021

RCH* 1 relay control

ET022

RCH* 2 relay control

ET023

RCH* 3 relay control

ET025

Retractable roof

ET026

Heated rear screen switch

ET028

Heated rear screen button

ET029

Air conditioning button

ET030

Air conditioning request 2

ET031

Fast idle speed request for RCH*

ET032

Front left-hand wheel valve signal

ET033

Front right-hand wheel valve signal

ET034

Rear right-hand wheel valve signal

ET035

Rear left-hand wheel valve signal

ET036

Tyre pressure imbalance

ET037

Tyre pressure appropriate for speed

ET038

Service warning light "on" request

ET039

STOP warning light on request

ET040

Tyre pressure monitoring system

ET041

Opening rear screen

V48, V4C, V4D, V4F, V50

ET042

Passenger door

V44, V48, V4C, V4D, V4F, V50

V44, V48, V4C, V4D, V4F, V50

V48, V4C, V4D, V4F, V50

*RCH = Passenger Compartment Heating Resistor

87B-127

V44, V48, V4C, V4D, V4F, V50

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Status summary table

Tool status

Diagnostic tool title

ET043

RAID* function authorisation by CPE*

ET044

CPE* button

ET045

RF frame received

ET046

Engine immobiliser

ET047

Brake pedal position

ET048

Clutch pedal position

ET050

Tailgate/Boot

ET051

Rear left-hand door

ET052

Rear right-hand door

ET053

Driver's door

ET054

Optical sensors supplied

ET055

Front optical sensor (driver's side)

ET056

Rear driver side optical sensor

ET057

Passenger side front/rear optical sensor

ET058

Locking button on driver's side handles

ET059

Locking buttons on handles, passenger side

ET060

Locking tailgate button

ET061

Open tailgate request

ET062

Open rear screen request

ET066

Card detected button

ET067

Card button press recognised

ET068

Most recently locked by

ET069

Most recently unlocked by

ET070

Start button

ET071

Unprogrammed steering lock

ET072

Steering lock

ET073

Steering lock sensor signal

ET075

+ Accessories present

87B Vdiag

V44, V48, V4C, V4D, V4F, V50

V48, V4C, V4D, V4F, V50

V44, V48, V4C, V4D, V4F, V50

*Automatic locking when driving *Electric central door locking

87B-128

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Status summary table

Tool status

Diagnostic tool title

ET077

Wiper stalk position

ET078

Windscreen washer request

ET079

Rear screen washer request

ET080

Rear screen wiper request

ET081

Lighting switch position

ET082

Rear fog lights request

ET083

Left-hand direction indicator request

ET084

Right-hand direction indicator request

ET085

Hazard warning lights button

ET086

Electric child safety lock

ET087

One-touch window control/sunroof authorisation.

ET088

Deadlocking activation source

ET090

Deadlocking deactivation source

ET096

Wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position

ET097

Rear screen wiper park position

ET098

Trip Computer button

ET108

Automatic gearbox lever position

ET109

Reverse gear engaged

ET110

UCH request to injection or Protection and Switching Unit

ET111

Front fog lights request

ET112

Interior lighting control

ET113

Automatic lighting button

ET114

Wiping request via rain sensor

ET115

Request to switch on lights by light sensor

ET116

Card code received

ET117

Card code valid

ET118

Rain sensor sensitivity ring position

ET119

UCH request to steering column lock

87B Vdiag

V44, V48, V4C, V4D, V4F, V50

87B-129

V44, V48, V4C

V44, V48, V4C, V4D, V4F, V50

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Status summary table

Tool status

Diagnostic tool title

87B Vdiag

ET159

Rear left-hand door child safety lock

ET160

Rear right-hand door child safety lock

ET169

Engine

V44, V48, V4C, V4D, V4F, V50

ET194

Passenger's door or bonnet

V4C, V4D, V4F, V50

ET195

UCH frequency (in MHz)

ET205

Type of UCH RF aerial

V44, V48, V4C, V4D, V4F, V50

ET229

Injection immobiliser code

ET230

Child safety

ET233

Child safety switch

ET248

Steering column lock immobiliser code

ET250

Injection

V4D, V4F, V50

V4F, V50 V4D, V4F, V50 V44, V48, V4C, V4D, V4F, V50 V4F, V50

87B-130

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

BLANK UCH ET008

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET008 is YES. Carry out the following operations: – programming and configuration of the UCH, – programming or reallocation of the cards. (see Configuration and Programming)

ET008 is NO. Programmed UCH.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET008/UCH_V48_ET008/UCH_V4C_ET008/ UCH_V4D_ET008/UCH_V4F_ET008/UCH_V50_ET008

87B-131

87B

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

CONTROL POWER LEVEL ET014

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Special note: This status displays the power level.

NONE, no power supply. + ACCESSORIES feed, when the start switch is pressed. TIMED, when a door is opened. + AFTER IGNITION FEED when starting or on forced + after ignition feed. In the event of an inconsistency, contact Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET014/UCH_V48_ET014/UCH_V4C_ET014/ UCH_V4D_ET014/UCH_V4F_ET014/UCH_V50_ET014

87B-132

87B

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT BLOWER ET015

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Apply to manual air conditioning and heating systems.

ET015 is Inactive the ventilation control on the air conditioning control panel is not 0. Check the condition and connection of the 8-track air conditioning control panel black connector (bent, broken tabs, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the following connections: 8-track control panel connector Track 7

Track 30 of the 40-track grey connector PE2 on the UCH

8-track control panel connector Track 1

Track 32 of the 40-track grey connector PE2 on the UCH

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the control panel (see 62C, Manual air conditioning). If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET015/UCH_V48_ET015/UCH_V4C_ET015/ UCH_V4D_ET015/UCH_V4F_ET015/UCH_V50_ET015

87B-133

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

BUZZER ACTIVATION REQUEST ET016

There must be no present or stored faults. NOTES

Special note: Status ET016 is STATUS 1 or STATUS 2 if the SSPP buzzer is activated. A tyre is punctured or there is a severe under-inflation.

ET016 is STATUS 1 Request for activation of the buzzer linked to display of a puncture warning message on the instrument panel. Adjust the pressures of the four tyres to the recommended pressures. Repair or replace the tyre if necessary.

ET016 is STATUS 2. Request for buzzer activation to warn the driver that the vehicle speed is too high when the vehicle has one or more punctured tyres. This signal is only valid for vehicles fitted with runflat tyres. Adjust the pressures of the four tyres to the recommended pressures. Repair or replace the tyre if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET016/UCH_V48_ET016/UCH_V4C_ET016/ UCH_V4D_ET016/UCH_V4F_ET016/UCH_V50_ET016

87B-134

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

NUMBER OF RCHs REQUIRED ET017

There must be no present or stored faults. The status, depending on the conditions, will be 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.

NOTES

Special note: Manual air conditioning (not automatic) Defined by the UCH according to the engine coolant temperature, the external temperature and electrical availability. Climate control Defined by the UCH according to the engine coolant temperature, the external temperature, electrical availability, the internal temperature and the user's request.

The passenger compartment heating resistor control conditions are: Manual air conditioning (not automatic): ET169 Engine is Running, ET015 Passenger compartment blower is Active, PR002: External temperature < 5 °C Engine coolant temperature < 50 °C (refer to injection computer) Electrical availability - 60 %, alternator load < 70 % (refer to the Power and Switching Unit). Climate control: ET169 Engine is Running, PR002: External temperature < 5 °C Engine coolant temperature < 50 °C (refer to injection computer) Electrical availability - 60 %, alternator load < 70 % (refer to the Power and Switching Unit). Heat demand by the user (refer to the climate control computer). Check the consistency of these statuses and parameters. In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of these statuses and parameters. RCH = Passenger Compartment Heating Resistor

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET017/UCH_V48_ET017/UCH_V4C_ET017/ UCH_V4D_ET017/UCH_V4F_ET017/UCH_V50_ET017

87B-135

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

ET018

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

NUMBER OF PASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING RESISTORS AUTHORISED BY ALTERNATOR

There must be no present or stored faults.

NOTES

Special note: This information is usable only on vehicles fitted with passenger compartment heating resistors. Calculation performed by the UCH according to the alternator power available (information supplied by the UPC). This information allows the number of passenger compartment heating resistors to be supplied depending on the available power. The status, depending on the conditions, will be 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.

In the event of a fault, perform fault finding on the UPC (see 87G, Engine compartment connection unit). Parameter PR010 of the alternator load UPC should be less than 70 % so that the passenger compartment heating resistors can be authorised by the alternator. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline. RCH = Passenger Compartment Heating Resistor

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET018/UCH_V48_ET018/UCH_V4C_ET018/ UCH_V4D_ET018/UCH_V4F_ET018/UCH_V50_ET018

87B-136

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

ET019

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

NUMBER OF PASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING RESISTORS AUTHORISED BY INJECTION

There must be no present or stored faults.

NOTES

Special note: Calculation performed by the UCH depending on the maximum power authorised by the injection computer. This information allows the number of passenger compartment heating resistors to be supplied depending on the engine load. The status, depending on the conditions, will be 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5.

In the event of a fault, run fault finding on the injection system (see 13B, Diesel injection or 17B, Petrol injection). Conditions for authorisation of passenger compartment heating resistor by the injection: – injection system status ET111 Fixed number of RCHs should be NO, – injection system status ET112 RCH cut-off should be NO. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline. RCH = Passenger Compartment Heating Resistor

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET019/UCH_V48_ET019/UCH_V4C_ET019/ UCH_V4D_ET019/UCH_V4F_ET019/UCH_V50_ET019

87B-137

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

ET020

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

NUMBER OF CONTROLLED PASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING RESISTORS

There must be no present or stored faults. The maximum number of passenger compartment heating resistors controlled will be the maximum number indicated by statuses ET017, ET018, ET019. NOTES

Special note: The UCH controls the passenger compartment heating resistor relays according to the authorisation from the injection computers and Protection and Switching Unit. The status, depending on the conditions, will be 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4.

The passenger compartment heating resistor control conditions are: – Heater motor running. – Battery voltage > 12 V. – Internal temperature < 10 °C – User temperature setpoint in warm position (> 20 °C) – PR002 External temperature < 5 °C – ET015 Passenger compartment blower ACTIVE. – ET018 Number of RCHs authorised by alternator > 0. – ET019 Number of RCHs authorised by injection computer > 0. – PR010 (UPC) Alternator charge < 70 %. If all the conditions are satisfied, and depending on the air conditioning function program, the UCH controls the Passenger Compartment Heating Resistors needed to provide the service. Check that these statuses and parameters are working properly. In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of these statuses and parameters. RCH = Passenger Compartment Heating Resistor

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET020/UCH_V48_ET020/UCH_V4C_ET020/ UCH_V4D_ET020/UCH_V4F_ET020/UCH_V50_ET020

87B-138

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

ET021 ET022 ET023

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING RESISTOR 1 RELAY CONTROL PASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING RESISTOR 2 RELAY CONTROL PASSENGER COMPARTMENT HEATING RESISTOR 3 RELAY CONTROL

There must be no present or stored faults. For statuses ET021 and ET022, the signal is interpretable if the vehicle is configured with RCH 1000 W or RCH 1800 W. For status ET023, the signal is interpretable if the vehicle is configured with RCH 1800 W.

In the event of a fault, check the operation of statuses ET015 Passenger compartment blower, ET017 Number of heating resistors required, ET018 Number of heating resistors authorised by alternator, ET019 Number of heating resistors authorised by injection computer and ET020 Number of heating resistors controlled . Carry out the fault finding procedure for commands AC016 RCH 1 relay, AC017 RCH 2 relay, AC018 RCH 3 relay. Check the parameters needed to switch on the Passenger Compartment Heating Resistors; external temperature, internal temperature, temperature setpoint on the heater control panel, alternator load, battery voltage. If all the requisite conditions are consistent and the status remains INACTIVE, contact Techline. RCH = Passenger Compartment Heating Resistor

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET021/UCH_V48_ET021/UCH_V4C_ET021/UCH_V4D_ET021/UCH_V4F_ET021/UCH_V50_ET021/ UCH_V44_ET022/UCH_V48_ET022/UCH_V4C_ET022/UCH_V4D_ET022/UCH_V4F_ET022/UCH_V50_ET022/ UCH_V44_ET023/UCH_V48_ET023/UCH_V4C_ET023/UCH_V4D_ET023/UCH_V4F_ET023/UCH_V50_ET023

87B-139

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

RETRACTABLE ROOF ET025

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. If the vehicle is a cabriolet, status ET025 is CLOSED or NOT CLOSED. If the vehicle is not a cabriolet, status ET025 will be ABSENT.

ET025 is CLOSED The retractable roof of the cabriolet vehicle is closed. In case of inconsistency, contact the Techline.

ET025 is NOT CLOSED The retractable roof of the vehicle is not closed. In case of inconsistency, contact the Techline.

ET025 is ABSENT The position of the retractable roof is unknown. In case of inconsistency, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET025/UCH_V48_ET025/UCH_V4C_ET025/ UCH_V4D_ET025/UCH_V4F_ET025/UCH_V50_ET025

87B-140

87B

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

HEATED REAR SCREEN CONTROL ET026

There must be no present or stored faults. NOTES

Special note: Operation of the heated rear screen requires the engine status to be Running.

ET026 Inactive despite a rear de-icing request by the user. MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING

Verify that status ET142 Engine operating phase is Running; otherwise, carry out fault finding on the injection system. Verify that status ET028 Heated rear screen switch is PRESSED, otherwise refer to interpretation of this status. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

Climate control

Verify that status ET142 Engine operating phase is Running; otherwise, carry out fault finding on the injection system. If the fault is still present, carry out a fault finding procedure on the air conditioning computer. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET026/UCH_V48_ET026/UCH_V4C_ET026/ UCH_V4D_ET026/UCH_V4F_ET026/UCH_V50_ET026

87B-141

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

HEATED REAR SCREEN BUTTON ET028

There must be no present or stored faults. NOTES

Special note: Information interpretable if the vehicle is configured with Heating or Manual Air Conditioning (SC008 UCH type and CF019 Type of air conditioning).

ET028 Released with press on the button. ET028 Pressed without press on the button. Check the condition and connection of the 8-track air conditioning control panel black connector (bent, broken tabs, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH black connector PE2 (tabs bent, broken, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Air conditioning control panel 8-track black connector on track 3

track 24 of the UCH 40-track black connector PE2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the control panel (see 62C, Manual air conditioning). If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET028/UCH_V48_ET028/UCH_V4C_ET028/ UCH_V4D_ET028/UCH_V4F_ET028/UCH_V50_ET028

87B-142

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON ET029

There must be no present or stored faults. NOTES

Special note: Information interpretable if the vehicle is configured with Manual Air Conditioning (SC008 UCH type and CF019 Type of air conditioning).

Check the condition and connection of the 8-track air conditioning control panel black connector (bent, broken tabs, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the UCH 40-track black connector PE2 (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Climate control panel 8-track black connector on track 7

track 30 of the 40-track UCH black connector PE2.

If the connection is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connection, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the control panel (see 62C, Manual air conditioning). If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET029/UCH_V48_ET029/UCH_V4C_ET029/ UCH_V4D_ET029/UCH_V4F_ET029/UCH_V50_ET029

87B-143

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

AIR CONDITIONING REQUEST 2 ET030

There must be no present or stored faults. The engine must be running.

NOTES

Special note: This is the request for air conditioning sent by the UCH to the injection computer. This request may reach the UCH in two ways: – In the case of a vehicle fitted with manual air conditioning, by pressing on the air conditioning button. – In the case of a vehicle fitted with climate control, by request from the user or the climate control computer in automatic mode.

ET030 Inactive despite a climate control request. MANUAL AIR CONDITIONING

Verify that status ET169 Engine is Running. If it is not, carry out fault finding on the injection system. Verify that status ET029 Air conditioning button is PRESSED by pressing the button. If status ET029 is RELEASED carry out fault finding on this status. Verify that status ET015 Passenger compartment ventilation is ACTIVE. If status ET015 is INACTIVE carry out fault finding on this status. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

Climate control

Carry out fault finding on the climate control computer (see 62C, Manual air conditioning). If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET030/UCH_V48_ET030/UCH_V4C_ET030/ UCH_V4D_ET030/UCH_V4F_ET030/UCH_V50_ET030

87B-144

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

FAST IDLE REQUEST FOR RCH ET031

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET031 Inactive with engine at idling speed with the passenger compartment heating resistors switched on. In case of inconsistency, contact the Techline. RCH = Passenger Compartment Heating Resistor

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET031/UCH_V48_ET031/UCH_V4C_ET031/ UCH_V4D_ET031/UCH_V4F_ET031/UCH_V50_ET031

87B-145

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

PASSENGER DOOR ET042

NOTES

There must be no faults present.

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track connector PE1 of the UCH (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 4-track black connector of the passenger door lock (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Passenger lock black 4-track Track 1

Track 15 of the UCH 40-track connector PE1.

If the connection is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connection, otherwise replace the wiring. Check: The continuity of the lock switch on tracks 2 and 1 in the rest position. The insulation of the lock switch on tracks 2 and 1 in the engaged position. Replace the lock if it is not correct. In case of inconsistency, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET042/UCH_V48_ET042/UCH_V4C_ET042/ UCH_V4D_ET042/UCH_V4F_ET042/UCH_V50_ET042

87B-146

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

ET043

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

AUTOMATIC LOCKING WHILE DRIVING FUNCTION AUTHORISATION BY CENTRAL LOCKING SWITCH

There must be no present or stored faults.

Check that the UCH is configured with Locking when driving. Press the vehicle lock button for more than 5 seconds with the after ignition feed to activate automatic locking (the locking when driving status is active). Press the vehicle unlock button for more than 5 seconds with the after ignition feed to deactivate automatic locking when driving (the locking when driving status is inactive). Press the vehicle lock button for more than 5 seconds without the after ignition feed to lock the vehicle (specification for Spain). CAR: Automatic locking when driving CPE: Electric central door locking

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET043/UCH_V48_ET043/UCH_V4C_ET043/ UCH_V4D_ET043/UCH_V4F_ET043/UCH_V50_ET043

87B-147

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

Electric door lock button ET044

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track connector PE1 of the UCH (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 8-track grey connector of the Central Door Locking switch (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Electric central locking 8-track switch Track 5

Track 6 of the UCH 40-track connector PE1

Central door locking 8-track switch Track 6

Track 14 of the 40-track UCH connector PE1

If the connection is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connection, otherwise replace the wiring. Check continuity of the 8-track connector track 1 and the vehicle earth. If the connection is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connection, otherwise replace the wiring. Check: The continuity of the switch on tracks 5 and 2 (switch pressed). The insulation of the switch on tracks 5 and 2 (switch OFF). Replace the switch if it is not correct. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline. CPE: Electric central door locking

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET044/UCH_V48_ET044/UCH_V4C_ET044/ UCH_V4D_ET044/UCH_V4F_ET044/UCH_V50_ET044

87B-148

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

RF FRAME RECEIVED ET045

There must be no present or stored faults. NOTES

Special note: This status is used for the Unlocking/Locking and hands-free starting functions. This status simply makes it possible to check the condition of the UCH internal receiver aerial.

ET045 NO on pressing one of the card buttons. Check with the vehicle's second card. If the status changes to YES, check status ET066 Card button press received. If the status remains NO, perform a test with a card belonging to another vehicle. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET045/UCH_V48_ET045/UCH_V4C_ET045/ UCH_V4D_ET045/UCH_V4F_ET045/UCH_V50_ET045

87B-149

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ENGINE IMMOBILISER ET046

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Power supply level required + after ignition.

ET046 Active with starting request but no after ignition present. 1 Insert the card into the reader 2 Check if the card is allocated to the vehicle with command SC006 Card allocation. 3 Check status ET070 Start switch; it should be pressed in the event of the button being pressed; if it is released, perform fault finding on this status. 4 Check that status ET071 Steering column lock blank is NO, if it is YES, run fault finding on this status. Check that status ET072 Steering column lock is unlocked; if locked, run fault finding on this status. Check status ET073 Steering column lock sensor signal, if locked run fault finding on this status. 5 Check if status ET110 UCH request to injection system or Protection and Switching Unit is + after ignition. 6 Check that there is no fault on the after ignition relay; this relay is located in the Protection and Switching Unit. 7 If these statuses are correct, contact Techline. ET046 Active present forced after ignition feed level Check and repair if necessary: Status of engine immobiliser in the injection system; if ACTIVE, check the injection computer. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET046/UCH_V48_ET046/UCH_V4C_ET046/ UCH_V4D_ET046/UCH_V4F_ET046/UCH_V50_ET046

87B-150

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

BRAKE PEDAL POSITION ET047

NOTES

The accessories relay must operate. During pedal travel, it is possible to repair an undetermined or inconsistent status on status ET047 Brake pedal position when the pedal is left in an "indeterminate zone", with the brake pedal switch in between the released and depressed positions (see System operation). This treatment applies only in cases in which the status is inconsistent or undetermined, with foot hard down on the accelerator or completely released from the brake pedal. Special note: Switch on forced after ignition.

Status 047 Inconsistency when pressing on the pedal. Check the condition and connection of the 4-track connector of the brake pedal switch. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Remove the brake pedal switch and check the insulation between tracks 3 and 4 of the brake pedal switch, with the switch piston free. Only replace the brake pedal switch if it is incorrect. Check the condition and connection of connector PE2 of the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. With the UCH and brake pedal switch disconnected: Check the insulation against + 12 V of the connection between track 3 of the brake pedal switch connector and track 36 of connector PE2 of the UCH. The line is shared with the injection computer and, if fitted, the automatic gearbox computer. In the event of faulty insulation, it is therefore necessary, using a wiring diagram, to check the connections between the brake pedal switch connector and these computers. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET047/UCH_V48_ET047/UCH_V4C_ET047/ UCH_V4D_ET047/UCH_V4F_ET047/UCH_V50_ET047

87B-151

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET047 CONTINUED 1

Status 047 Undetermined without depressing on the pedal. Check the condition and connection of the 4-track connector of the brake pedal switch. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for 12 V on track 4 of the brake pedal switch connector. If not correct: – Check the condition and connection UCH connector PP3. – With the UCH and brake pedal switch disconnected, check the insulation to earth and the continuity of the connection between the brake pedal switch connector track 4 and track 3 of connector PP3 of the UCH. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, if not replace the wiring. Contact the Techline, if it is still not correct. Remove the brake pedal switch and check the continuity of the connection between tracks 3 and 4 of the brake pedal switch, with the switch piston depressed. Only replace the brake pedal switch if it is not correct. Check the condition and connection of the UCH connector PE2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. With the UCH and brake light switch disconnected: Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: UCH connector PE2 Track 36

Track 3 of the brake pedal switch connector

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. The line is shared with the injection computer and, if fitted, the automatic transmission computer. In the event of faulty insulation, it is therefore necessary, using a wiring diagram, to check the connections between the brake pedal switch connector and these computers. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-152

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET047 CONTINUED 2

Status 047 Inconsistency without depressing the pedal. Check the condition and connection of the 4-track connector of the brake pedal switch. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. With the brake pedal switch disconnected: Check the insulation between tracks 1 and 2 of the brake pedal switch, with the brake light switch piston depressed. Only replace the brake pedal switch if it is not correct. Check the condition and connection of the UCH connector PE2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. With the UCH and brake pedal switch disconnected: Check the insulation to + 12 V of the connection between track 3 of the brake pedal switch connector and track 27 of the UCH connector PE2. The line is shared with the ABS computer or the electronic stability program (ESP) relay (depending on equipment) and the brake lights. In the event of faulty insulation, it is therefore necessary, using a wiring diagram, to check the connections between the brake pedal switch connector and these components. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-153

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET047 CONTINUED 3

Status 047 Undetermined with the pedal depressed. Check the condition and connection of the 4-track connector of the brake pedal switch. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. With the brake pedal switch disconnected: Check for 12 V on track 2 of the brake pedal switch connector. If not correct: – Check the condition and connection of fuse 1H in the passenger compartment relay and fuse box. – Check the condition and connection of the 18-track connector of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box. – Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between the brake pedal switch connector track 4 and track 1H of the 18-track connector of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If it is still faulty, contact Techline. With the brake pedal switch disconnected: Check the continuity of the connection between tracks 1 and 2 of the brake pedal switch, with the brake pedal switch piston free. Only replace the brake pedal switch if it is not correct. Check the condition and connection of the UCH connector PE2 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. With the UCH and brake pedal switch disconnected: Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: UCH connector PE2 Track 27

Track 1 of the brake pedal switch connector

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. The line is shared with the ABS computer or the ESP relay (depending on equipment) and the brake lights. In the event of faulty insulation, it is therefore necessary, using a wiring diagram, to check the connections between the brake pedal switch connector and these components.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-154

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

CLUTCH PEDAL POSITION ET048

There must be no present or stored faults. NOTES

Special note: Switch on forced after ignition.

Status 048 Released with the pedal depressed. Check the connection and condition of the clutch pedal switch connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Remove the clutch pedal switch and check for earth on track 2 of the clutch pedal switch connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity between tracks 1 and 2 of the clutch pedal switch in the pedal depressed position. Only replace the clutch pedal switch if it is not correct. Check the condition and connection of connector PE1 on the UCH. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Clutch pedal switch on track 1

Track 5 of the 40-track UCH connector PE1

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET048/UCH_V48_ET048/UCH_V4C_ET048/ UCH_V4D_ET048/UCH_V4F_ET048/UCH_V50_ET048

87B-155

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET048 CONTINUED

Status 048 Depressed without depressing the pedal. Check the condition and connection of the clutch pedal switch connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Remove the clutch pedal switch and check the insulation between tracks 1 and 2 of the clutch pedal switch in pedal released position. Only replace the clutch pedal switch if it is not correct. Check the condition and connection of connector PE1 on the UCH. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Clutch pedal switch on track 1

Track 5 of the 40-track connector PE1 of the UCH

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-156

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

TAILGATE/BOOT ET050

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track connector PE1 of the UCH (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the white 4-track connector of the tailgate lock (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Tailgate lock 4-track white connector track 3

Track 8 of the 40-track connector PE1 of the UCH

If the connection is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connection, otherwise replace the wiring. Check: The insulation of the tailgate lock switch on tracks 3 and 4 in OFF position. The continuity of the tailgate lock switch on tracks 3 and 4 in ON position. Replace the lock if it is not correct. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET050/UCH_V48_ET050/UCH_V4C_ET050/ UCH_V4D_ET050/UCH_V4F_ET050/UCH_V50_ET050

87B-157

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

REAR LEFT-HAND DOOR ET051

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track connector PE1 of the UCH (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 6-track white connector of the rear left-hand door lock (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Rear left-hand 6-track lock track 4

Track 19 of the 40-track connector PE1 of the UCH

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check: The insulation of the rear left-hand door lock switch on tracks 6 and 4 (door open). The continuity of the rear left-hand door lock switch on tracks 6 and 4 (door closed). Replace the lock if it is not correct. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET051/UCH_V48_ET051/UCH_V4C_ET051/ UCH_V4D_ET051/UCH_V4F_ET051/UCH_V50_ET051

87B-158

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

REAR RIGHT-HAND DOOR ET052

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track connector PE1 of the UCH (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the rear right-hand door lock (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Rear right-hand 6-track lock track 3

Track 16 of the 40-track connector PE1 of the UCH.

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check: The insulation of the rear right-hand door lock switch on tracks 1 and 3 (door open). The continuity of the rear right-hand door lock switch on tracks 1 and 3 (door closed). Replace the lock if it is not correct. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET052/UCH_V48_ET052/UCH_V4C_ET052/ UCH_V4D_ET052/UCH_V4F_ET052/UCH_V50_ET052

87B-159

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

DRIVER'S DOOR ET053

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

Check the condition and connection of the 40-track connector PE1 of the UCH (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the driver's door lock (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Driver's door lock 6-track connector track 4

Track 17 of the 40-track connector PE1 of the UCH

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check: The insulation of the driver's door lock switch on tracks 4 and 3 (door open). The continuity of the driver's door lock switch on tracks 4 and 3 (door closed). Replace the lock if it is not correct. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET053/UCH_V48_ET053/UCH_V4C_ET053/ UCH_V4D_ET053/UCH_V4F_ET053/UCH_V50_ET053

87B-160

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

OPTICAL SENSORS SUPPLIED ET054

NOTES

After 72 hours without an attempt to open the vehicle, the UCH cuts out the optical sensors' power supply. To restore the power supply to the optical sensors, pull the handle to wake-up the UCH.

The vehicle has been immobilised for fewer than 72 hours: Check that the UCH is in hands-free configuration by reading the configuration LC001 Hands-free function. If everything is correct, contact the Techline. The vehicle is immobilised after more than 72 hours: Check the insulation to 12 V for the following track (door handle pulled): track 23 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3. Check the earth on track 23 of the 40-track connector PE of the UCH by pulling a handle. Is there an earth? YES

Contact the Techline.

NO

Check the continuity between track 23 of the 40-track connector PE3 and track 2 of the black 3-track connector of the optical sensor. Repair if necessary. Check the earth on track 3 of the connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for continuity of the handle pulled switch on tracks 1 and 2, and if there is insulation change the handle. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET054/UCH_V48_ET054/UCH_V4C_ET054/ UCH_V4D_ET054/UCH_V4F_ET054/UCH_V50_ET054

87B-161

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

ET055 ET056 ET057

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

FRONT OPTICAL SENSOR (DRIVER'S SIDE) DRIVER'S SIDE REAR OPTICAL SENSOR PASSENGER SIDE FRONT/REAR OPTICAL SENSORS

There must be no present or stored faults. Switch the ignition on, then switch it off.

Check that the status ET054 Optical sensor supplied is YES. Place your hand behind the door handle; make sure the corresponding status is active. If the status is inactive, lock the vehicle and pull the handle. Is the status ACTIVE? YES

Check the condition of the reflective surface inside the handle (frost, dirt). Check the condition of the optical sensor. If necessary, replace the sensor.

NO

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Driver side front sensor track 3 Passenger side front sensor track 3

Track 3 of the UCH 40-track grey connector PE3

Passenger and driver's rear sensors track 3 Driver's side front sensor track 1

Track 21 of the UCH 40-track grey connector PE3

Passenger side front sensor track 1

Track 23 of the UCH 40-track grey connector PE3

Rear right-hand sensor track 1

Track 23 of the UCH 40-track grey connector PE3

Rear left-hand sensor track 1

Track 22 of the UCH 40-track grey connector PE3

Sensors track 2

Earth

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET055/UCH_V48_ET055/UCH_V4C_ET055/UCH_V4D_ET055/UCH_V4F_ET055/UCH_V50_ET055/ UCH_V44_ET056/UCH_V48_ET056/UCH_V4C_ET056/UCH_V4D_ET056/UCH_V4F_ET056/UCH_V50_ET056/ UCH_V44_ET057/UCH_V48_ET057/UCH_V4C_ET057/UCH_V4D_ET057/UCH_V4F_ET057/UCH_V50_ET057

87B-162

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

ET058 ET059

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

LOCKING BUTTONS ON DRIVER'S SIDE HANDLES LOCKING BUTTONS ON PASSENGER SIDE HANDLES

There must be no faults present.

Check the condition and connection of the blue 9-track connector of the door (tabs crushed, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track connector PE3 of the UCH (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for earth on track 4 of the door handle. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Switch on the driver's side door handles on track 3

Track 30 of the 40-track connector PE3 of the UCH.

Switch on the passenger side door handles on track 3

Track 6 of the UCH 40-track connector PE3

Switch on the door handles on track 4

Earth

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check: The insulation between tracks 3 and 4 of the handle (Released position). The continuity between tracks 3 and 4 of the handle (Pressed position). Replace the handle if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET058/UCH_V48_ET058/UCH_V4C_ET058/UCH_V4D_ET058/UCH_V4F_ET058/UCH_V50_ET058/ UCH_V44_ET059/UCH_V48_ET059/UCH_V4C_ET059/UCH_V4D_ET059/UCH_V4F_ET059/UCH_V50_ET059

87B-163

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

LOCKING BUTTON ON TAILGATE ET060

NOTES

There must be no faults present.

Check the condition and connection of the transparent 2-track connector of the tailgate locking button (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track connector PE3 of the UCH (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for earth on track 2 of the tailgate locking button. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Tailgate locking button on track 1

Track 4 of the 40-track connector PE3 of the UCH.

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check: The insulation between tracks 1 and 2 of the tailgate button (Released position). The continuity between tracks 1 and 2 of the tailgate button (Pressed position). Replace the switch if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET060/UCH_V48_ET060/UCH_V4C_ET060/ UCH_V4D_ET060/UCH_V4F_ET060/UCH_V50_ET060

87B-164

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

TAILGATE OPENING REQUEST ET061

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET061 Absent when the button is pressed. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track connector PE3 of the UCH. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for an earth on track 5 of the 40-track connector PE3 with the button pressed. Is there an earth?

YES

Contact the Techline.

NO

Check the condition and connection of the switch's 2-track connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for earth on track 2 of the switch's 2-track connector. Check for continuity of the switch on tracks 1 and 2 (with the button pressed). If there is insulation, replace the switch. Check the continuity between the 40-track connector PE3 on track 5 of the UCH and track 2 of the 2-track connector of the tailgate opening switch. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET061/UCH_V48_ET061/UCH_V4C_ET061/ UCH_V4D_ET061/UCH_V4F_ET061/UCH_V50_ET061

87B-165

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET061 CONTINUED

ET061 Present when there is no request on the button. Check for insulation against earth on track 5 of the 40-track connector PE3 of the UCH. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for insulation of the switch on tracks 1 and 2. If there is continuity, replace the switch If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-166

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

CARD BUTTON PRESS RECEIVED ET066

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. The status is declared as YES when one of the buttons is pressed.

ET066 NO despite pressing one of the buttons on the card. Try pressing a button on a different card (card for the vehicle or another vehicle). If the status changes to YES, check the condition of the battery of the card in question. Replace it if necessary. If the status remains NO, check that there is no radio frequency interference in the area surrounding the vehicle. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET066/UCH_V48_ET066/UCH_V4C_ET066/ UCH_V4D_ET066/UCH_V4F_ET066/UCH_V50_ET066

87B-167

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

CARD BUTTON PRESS RECOGNISED ET067

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. The status is declared as YES when one of the buttons is pressed.

ET067 NO despite pressing one of the buttons on the card. Resynchronise the cards by activating forced after ignition with the card in the card reader. If the fault is still present and ET066 Card button press received is YES, program the cards. If ET066 Card button press received is NO, check the condition of the card battery. Replace it if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET067/UCH_V48_ET067/UCH_V4C_ET067/ UCH_V4D_ET067/UCH_V4F_ET067/UCH_V50_ET067

87B-168

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

SOURCE OF LAST LOCK ET068

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

Indicates which mode is the source of the last locking or unlocking operation. AUTOMATIC: The UCH orders locking if the opening of a door or a hands-free or card unlocking request is not detected within 30 seconds after unlocking. CPE*: the UCH orders locking of the whole vehicle following a press on the electric central door locking button. HANDS-FREE: detection of a close request by pressing of button in the handles or tailgate badge. RAID* FUNCTION: the UCH controls locking according to the speed signal from the vehicle. RENAULT CARD: detection upon a button press. FAULT FINDING: Action requested by the Clip tool using the AC004 Opening element locking command *Electric central door locking *Automatic locking when driving

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET068/UCH_V48_ET068/UCH_V4C_ET068/ UCH_V4D_ET068/UCH_V4F_ET068/UCH_V50_ET068

87B-169

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

SOURCE OF LAST UNLOCK ET069

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

Makes it possible to know what mode is the source of the last unlocking operation. HANDS-FREE: detection of a hand in the handle. CPE*: the UCH orders unlocking of the whole vehicle following a press on the electric central door locking button. RENAULT CARD: detection upon a button press. FAULT FINDING: Action requested by the Clip tool using the AC005 Opening element unlocking command IMPACT INFORMATION: following an impact signal detected. AIRBAG: following an impact signal detected. *Electric central door locking

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET069/UCH_V48_ET069/UCH_V4C_ET069/ UCH_V4D_ET069/UCH_V4F_ET069/UCH_V50_ET069

87B-170

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

START BUTTON ET070

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

Check the condition and connection of the 4-track connector of the engine ON/OFF button (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for earth on track 2 of the ON/OFF button connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check: The continuity between tracks 1 and 2 of the On/Off button in the Pressed position. The insulation between tracks 1 and 2 of the On/Off button in the Released position. Replace the switch if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the brown section of the 40-track white connector PE1 of the UCH (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: On/Off control button on track 1

track 7 of the 40-track connector PE1 of the UCH

On/Off control button on track 4

track 13 of the 40-track connector PE1 of the UCH

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET070/UCH_V48_ET070/UCH_V4C_ET070/ UCH_V4D_ET070/UCH_V4F_ET070/UCH_V50_ET070

87B-171

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

STEERING COLUMN LOCK UNPROGRAMMED ET071

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

If the steering column lock status remains YES, try to start the vehicle again. If the fault is still present, verify that the card has been authenticated by the UCH. Check that when pressing on the disengaged clutch pedal or on the brake pedal or the ON/OFF button that the UCH issues an unlock signal (if the steering is locked). If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET071/UCH_V48_ET071/UCH_V4C_ET071/ UCH_V4D_ET071/UCH_V4F_ET071/UCH_V50_ET071

87B-172

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

STEERING COLUMN LOCK ET072

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

If the status is INCONSISTENT, refer to dealing with fault DF029 Steering column lock circuit.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET072/UCH_V48_ET072/UCH_V4C_ET072/ UCH_V4D_ET072/UCH_V4F_ET072/UCH_V50_ET072

87B-173

87B

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

STEERING COLUMN LOCK SENSOR SIGNAL ET073

There must be no present or stored faults. The status should be unlocked with after ignition feed present or semi activated to + accessories. NOTES Special note: Perform locking/unlocking. Check the power supply to the lock for 5 min after the locking-unlocking operation.

ET073 Faulty when the steering column is not unlocked. ET073 Short circuit when the steering column is not unlocked. Check the condition and connection of the 6-track connector of the steering column lock (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the black 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the power supply on track 2 of the 6-track connector of the steering column lock. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity between track 1 of the 6-track connector of the steering column lock and the vehicle earth. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET073/UCH_V48_ET073/UCH_V4C_ET073/ UCH_V4D_ET073/UCH_V4F_ET073/UCH_V50_ET073

87B-174

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET073 CONTINUED

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering column lock on track 3

Track 10 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH

Steering column lock on track 6

Track 20 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH

Steering column lock on track 4

Track 1 of the 40-track connector PE1 of the UCH

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline. ET073 Unlocked and + after ignition absent. The status remains UNLOCKED, with the ignition off, in case of failure of the airbag system or the speed signal. If everything is OK, see dealing with fault DF029: Steering column lock circuit. ET073 Semi-activated and + after ignition present. In the semi-activated status, the lock bolt is pulled out, but the UCH cannot determine its position precisely. In case of inconsistency, contact the Techline. ET073 Undetermined. The status is UNDETERMINED in the event that neither the lock nor the lock sensor can inform the UCH regarding its position. Refer to processing of the DF029 Steering column lock circuit fault.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-175

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

+ ACCESSORIES PRESENT ET075

There must be no present or stored faults. NOTES

Special note: Check that the start switch operates correctly: ET070 Start button.

ET075 is YES but + accessories is absent. Check the power-supply fuses. Check the + 12 V feed on track E1 and E17 of the passenger compartment fuse box and relay 1 (left-hand side of the centre console). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for an earth on track A2 of the fuse box by pressing the button. Is there an earth? YES

Check + 12 V before ignition feed on track A3 of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box. Check on track A4 of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box for a + 12 V by pressing the start switch. If there is no 12 V, replace the relay. If there is 12 V, check the wiring harness.

ET075 is NO but + accessories feed is absent.

NO

Check at UCH output for + 12 V on track 34 of the 40-track connector PE2 If NO, contact the Techline. If YES, check the continuity of the following connection: Track 34 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH.

Track A2 the of passenger compartment fuse and relay box.

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET075/UCH_V48_ET075/UCH_V4C_ET075/ UCH_V4D_ET075/UCH_V4F_ET075/UCH_V50_ET075

87B-176

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

WIPER STALK POSITION ET077

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

In the event of an inconsistency, check the steering column control connectors. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: UCH PE2 black connector track 4

Track 2 15-track black connector of the steering column control

UCH PE2 black connector track 11

Track 14 15-track black connector of the steering column control

UCH PE2 black connector track 2

Track 9 15-track black connector of the steering column control

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET077/UCH_V48_ET077/UCH_V4C_ET077/ UCH_V4D_ET077/UCH_V4F_ET077/UCH_V50_ET077

87B-177

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

ET078 ET079

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

WINDSCREEN WASHER REQUEST REAR SCREEN WASHER REQUEST

There must be no faults present.

ET078 Absent when the control stalk is pressed. ET079 Absent when the control stalk is pressed. Check the black 6-track steering column control connector (e.g.: connector connected, tabs bent, broken, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the UCH 40-track connector PE1. E.g. connector poorly connected, tabs bent, broken. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for + 12 V on track 6 of the steering column control connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Black 6-track steering column control connector, track 1

Track 12 of the 40-track UCH connector PE1 (front)

Black 6-track steering column control connector, track 2

Track 28 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH (rear).

Black 6-track steering column control earth connector, track 5

Vehicle earth

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the steering column control black connector. Tracks 1 and 6, front windscreen washer control on, if insulated, change the control. Tracks 2 and 6, rear windscreen washer control on; if insulated, change the control. If continuity, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET078/UCH_V48_ET078/UCH_V4C_ET078/UCH_V4D_ET078/UCH_V4F_ET078/UCH_V50_ET078/ UCH_V44_ET079/UCH_V48_ET079/UCH_V4C_ET079/UCH_V4D_ET079/UCH_V4F_ET079/UCH_V50_ET079

87B-178

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

REAR SCREEN WIPER REQUEST ET080

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET080 Rear screen wiper request is Absent with stalk in Rear screen wiper requested position. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET082 Rear fog lights request: Set the lighting stalk to rear fog lights. ET077 Wiper stalk position: Set the windscreen wiper stalk to high speed position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET082 Rear fog lights request

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET077 Wiper stalk position at high speed

High speed

Low speed

Low speed

High speed See ALP 10

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection:

Result 1

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 2

Track 4 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET080/UCH_V48_ET080/UCH_V4C_ET080/ UCH_V4D_ET080/UCH_V4F_ET080/UCH_V50_ET080

87B-179

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET080 CONTINUED

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection:

Result 2

Black 15-track steering column control track 9

Track 5 of the UCH 40-track connector PE2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections:

Result 3

Black 15-track steering column control track 9

Track 5 of the UCH 40-track connector PE2

Black 15-track steering column control track 2

Track 4 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-180

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

LIGHTING STALK POSITION ET081

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET081 Lighting stalk position is Dipped with stalk position on Off. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET084 Right-hand direction indicator request: Place the control stalk in the right-hand direction indicator position. ET096 Windscreen wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position: Position the wiper intermittent speed ring in position 1. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET084 Right-hand direction indicator request

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET096 Wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position 1

4

1

4

1 Change the steering column control

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection:

Result 1

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 3

Track 14 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET081/UCH_V48_ET081/UCH_V4C_ET081/ UCH_V4D_ET081/UCH_V4F_ET081/UCH_V50_ET081

87B-181

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET081 CONTINUED 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection:

Result 2

Black 15-track steering column control track 12

Track 15 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections:

Result 3

Black 15-track steering column control track 12

Track 15 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

Black 15-track steering column control track 3

Track 14 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-182

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET081 CONTINUED 2

ET081 Lighting stalk position is Dipped with stalk position on Side light requested. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET080 Rear screen wiper request: Set control stalk to rear screen wiper. ET096 Windscreen wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position: Place the speed ring in position 1. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET080 Rear screen wiper request

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET096 Rear screen wiper speed ring position

4

1

4

1 Change the steering column control

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection:

Result 1

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 3

Track 14 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-183

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET081 CONTINUED 2

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection:

Result 2

Black 15-track steering column control track 9

Track 5 of the UCH 40-track connector PE2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections:

Result 3

Black 15-track steering column control track 9

Track 5 of the UCH 40-track connector PE2

Black 15-track steering column control track 3

Track 14 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-184

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET081 CONTINUED 3

ET081 Lighting stalk position is Dipped with stalk position on Main beam requested. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET098 Trip Computer button: Press the button at the end of the control stalk. ET096 Windscreen wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position: Place the speed ring in position 1. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET098 Trip Computer button

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET096 "Windscreen wiper intermittent ring position"

4

1

4

1 Change the steering column control

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection:

Result 1

Black 15-track steering column control track 3

Track 14 UCH 40-track connector PE2

Steering column control track 5

Track 12 UCH 40-track connector PE2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-185

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET081 CONTINUED 4

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections:

Result 2

Steering column control track 13

Track 2 UCH 40-track connector PE2

Steering column control track 18

Track 5 UCH 40-track connector PE2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections:

Result 3

Steering column control track 9

Track 2 UCH 40-track connector PE2

Steering column control track 3

Track 14 UCH 40-track connector PE2

Steering column control track 9

Track 5 UCH 40-track connector PE2

Steering column switch track 5

Track 12 UCH 40-track connector PE2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-186

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET081 CONTINUED 5

ET081 Lighting stalk position is Dipped with stalk position on Hazard lights requested. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET077 Wiper stalk position: Set the wiper stalk to Park position. ET096 Windscreen wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position: Place the speed ring in position 1. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET077 Wiper stalk position

Off

Intermittent facility

Intermittent facility

Off

ET096 "Windscreen wiper intermittent ring position"

4

1

4

1 Change the steering column control

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Result 1

Steering column switch track 5

Track 12 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2.

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-187

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET081 CONTINUED 6

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Steering column control track 8 Result 2

Track 17 UCH 40-track connector PE2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering column control track 5

Track 12 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2.

Steering column control track 8

Track 17 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

Result 3

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-188

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET081 CONTINUED 7

ET081 Lighting stalk position is Dipped with stalk position on Dipped beam requested. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET077 Wiper stalk position: Set the wiper stalk to Park position. ET096 Windscreen wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position: Place the speed ring in position 1. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET077 Wiper stalk position

Off

Intermittent facility

Intermittent facility

Off

ET096 "Windscreen wiper intermittent ring position"

4

1

4

1 Change the steering column control

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Steering column switch track 5 Result 1

Track 12 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2.

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-189

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET081 CONTINUED 8

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Steering column control track 8 Result 2

Track 17 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Steering column control track 5

Track 12 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2.

Steering column control track 8

Track 17 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

Result 3

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-190

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

REAR FOG LIGHTS REQUEST ET082

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET082 Rear fog lights request is Absent with stalk position on Rear fog lights. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request: Place the control stalk on the left-hand indicator position. ET080 Rear screen wiper request: Place the wiper stalk in rear screen wiper position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET080 Rear screen wiper request

Absent

Present

Absent

Present See ALP 4

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 2 Result 1

Track 4 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET082/UCH_V48_ET082/UCH_V4C_ET082/ UCH_V4D_ET082/UCH_V4F_ET082/UCH_V50_ET082

87B-191

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET082 CONTINUED

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection:

Result 2

Black 15-track steering column control track 4

Track 9 UCH 40-track connector PE2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections:

Result 3

Black 15-track steering column control track 4

Track 9 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

Black 15-track steering column control track 2

Track 4 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-192

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

LEFT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR REQUEST ET083

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request is Absent with stalk position on left-hand indicator. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET084 Right-hand direction indicator request: place the control stalk on the left-hand indicator position, ET082 Rear fog lights request: set the lighting stalk to the rear fog lights position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET084 Right-hand direction indicator request

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET082 Rear fog lights request

Absent

Present

Absent

Present See ALP 4

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection:

Result 1

15-track steering column control black connector, track 17

Track 11 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET083/UCH_V48_ET083/UCH_V4C_ET083/ UCH_V4D_ET083/UCH_V4F_ET083/UCH_V50_ET083

87B-193

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET083 CONTINUED

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection:

Result 2

Black 15-track steering column control track 12

Track 15 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections:

Result 3

Black 15-track steering column control track 12

Track 15 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

Black 15-track steering column control track 13

Track 11 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-194

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR REQUEST ET084

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET084 Right-hand direction indicator request is Absent with stalk in right-hand indicator position. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request: Place the control stalk on the left-hand indicator. ET096 Wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position, position 3: place the lighting stalk in rear fog lights position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET096 Wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position, position 3

4

3

4

3 See ALP 5

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection:

Result 1

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 12

Track 15 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET084/UCH_V48_ET084/UCH_V4C_ET084/ UCH_V4D_ET084/UCH_V4F_ET084/UCH_V50_ET084

87B-195

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET084 CONTINUED

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection:

Result 2

Black 15-track steering column control track 13

Track 11 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections:

Result 3

Black 15-track steering column control track 12

Track 15 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

Black 15-track steering column control track 13

Track 11 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-196

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS BUTTON ET085

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET085 Hazard warning lights button is Absent after pressing the button. Check the F16 15A fuse of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box on the left-hand side of the centre console. Replace it if necessary. Check the 8-track grey connector of the door/warning switch (e.g. connector properly connected, tabs bent, broken, oxidised). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the 40-track connectors PE2 and PE1 (e.g. connector properly connected, tabs bent, broken, oxidised). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for + 12 V on track 3. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Switch track 6

Track 3 of the UCH 40-track connector PE1.

Switch track 7

Track 35 of the UCH 40-track connector PE2.

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the button (press): tracks 6 and 7, if there is insulation, replace the switch, if there is continuity, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET085/UCH_V48_ET085/UCH_V4C_ET085/ UCH_V4D_ET085/UCH_V4F_ET085/UCH_V50_ET085

87B-197

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET085 CONTINUED

ET085 Hazard warning lights button is Present without pressing the button. Check the 8-track grey connector of the door/warning switch (e.g. connector properly connected, tabs bent, broken, oxidised). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the 40-track connectors PE2 and PE1 (e.g. connector properly connected, tabs bent, broken, oxidised). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Switch track 6

Track 3 of the UCH 40-track connector PE1.

Switch track 7

Track 35 of the UCH 40-track connector PE2.

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the button (press): tracks 6 and 7, if there is insulation, replace the switch, if there is continuity, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-198

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ONE-TOUCH WINDOW CONTROL/SUNROOF AUTHORISATION ET087

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET087 One touch window control/sunroof authorisation is Active and neither of the one touch window controls works. Check for earth on track 6 of the connector on the electric window suspected as faulty. Is there an earth? NO

Check earth at UCH output on track 7 of the 40-track connector PE2. If there is no earth, contact Techline. If earth is present, check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: 40-track connector PE2 on track 7

Track 6 of the window winder motor connector

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

YES

AFTER REPAIR

Run complete fault finding on the electric window motor.

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET087/UCH_V48_ET087/UCH_V4C_ET087/ UCH_V4D_ET087/UCH_V4F_ET087/UCH_V50_ET087

87B-199

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET087 CONTINUED

ET087 One-touch window control/sunroof authorisation is Inactive and neither of the one touch window controls works. Check that configuration LC070 ONE-TOUCH WINDOW(S)/SUNROOF is WITH. If LC070 is WITHOUT, configure using CF173 ONE-TOUCH WINDOW(S)/SUNROOF (can be configured during configuration of the UCH using the SC008 UCH TYPE command). Run command AC025 One-touch window/sunroof authorisation, and check for earth on track 6 of the electric window connector. Is there an earth? YES

Operating conditions: Door open if fault, check the doors. + accessories level power supply raised at least once.

NO

Run complete fault finding on the electric window motor.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-200

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

SOURCE OF DEADLOCK ACTIVATION SOURCE OF DEADLOCK DEACTIVATION

ET088 ET089

NOTES

87B

There must be no present or stored faults.

Enables determination of what component is the source of the last locking or unlocking operation. ET088 Source of deadlock activation. CARD: upon pressing the card for the second time. HANDS-FREE: on pressing the door handle button for the second time. FAULT FINDING: using the tool with the ignition on by running command AC004 Central door locking. ET090 Source of deadlock deactivation. CPE*: on pressing the locking/unlocking button. CARD: press on card button. HANDS-FREE: placing a hand in the handle. FAULT FINDING: using the tool with ignition on by running command AC005 Central door unlocking. + after ignition feed: no deadlocking at this power supply level. *Electric central door locking

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET088/UCH_V48_ET088/UCH_V4C_ET088/UCH_V4D_ET088/UCH_V4F_ET088/UCH_V50_ET088/ UCH_V44_ET089/UCH_V48_ET089/UCH_V4C_ET089/UCH_V4D_ET089/UCH_V4F_ET089/UCH_V50_ET089

87B-201

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

WIPER STALK INTERMITTENT SPEED RING POSITION ET096

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET096 Wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position is Sensitivity 1 but with Sensitivity 2 requested. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request: Set the lighting stalk to the left-hand indicator. ET077 Wiper stalk position: Set the windscreen wiper stalk to the low speed position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET077 Wiper stalk position

Off

Low speed

Off

Low speed Change the steering column control

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection:

Result 1

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 2

Track 9 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET096/UCH_V48_ET096/UCH_V4C_ET096/ UCH_V4D_ET096/UCH_V4F_ET096/UCH_V50_ET096

87B-202

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET096 CONTINUED 1

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection:

Result 2

Black 15-track steering column control track 13

Track 2 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2.

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections:

Result 3

Black 15-track steering column control track 13

Track 2 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2.

Black 15-track steering column control track 2

Track 9 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-203

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET096 CONTINUED 2

ET096 Wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position is Sensitivity 1 but with Sensitivity 3 requested. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request: Place the lighting stalk on the left-hand direction indicator. ET077 Wiper stalk position: Set the windscreen wiper stalk to the low speed position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET077 Wiper stalk position High speed

Low speed

High speed

Low speed

High speed Change the steering column control

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection:

Result 1

Black 15-track steering column control track 13

Track 2 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2.

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-204

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET096 CONTINUED 3

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection:

Result 2

Black 15-track steering column control track 12

Track 15 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections:

Result 3

Black 15-track steering column control track 13

Track 2 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2.

Black 15-track steering column control track 12

Track 15 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-205

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET096 CONTINUED 4

ET096 Wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position is Sensitivity 1 but with Sensitivity 4 requested. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET077 Wiper stalk position: set the windscreen wiper stalk to high speed. ET081 Lighting stalk position: set the lighting stalk to main beam headlights position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET077 Wiper stalk position at high speed

High speed

Low speed

Low speed

High speed

ET081 Lighting stalk in the main beam headlights position

Dipped headlights

Main beam

Dipped headlights

Main beam Change the steering column control

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection:

Result 1

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 4

Track 2 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-206

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET096 CONTINUED 5

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection:

Result 2

Black 15-track steering column control track 12

Track 15 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections:

Result 3

Black 15-track steering column control track 4

Track 2 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

Black 15-track steering column control track 2

Track 9 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-207

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

REAR SCREEN WIPER PARK POSITION ET097

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET097 Rear screen wiper park position is Absent Check the condition and connection of the 3-track white connector of the rear screen wiper (tabs bent, broken). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH (tabs bent, broken). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Rear screen wiper motor on track 2

Track 37 of connector PE2 of the UCH.

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity of the connection between connector track 3 and vehicle earth. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the rear screen wiper motor. Check fitting. If everything is OK, replace the wiper motor. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET097/UCH_V48_ET097/UCH_V4C_ET097/ UCH_V4D_ET097/UCH_V4F_ET097/UCH_V50_ET097

87B-208

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

TRIP COMPUTER BUTTON ET098

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This status must change to Pressed when the button is pressed.

ET098 Trip computer button is Released after press on the button. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET082 Rear fog lights request: set the lighting stalk to the rear fog lights position. ET081 Lighting stalk position: Set the lighting stalk to dipped headlights position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET082 Rear fog lights request

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET081 Dipped headlights wiper stalk position

Off

Dipped headlights

Off

Dipped headlights Change the steering column control

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection:

Result 1

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 2

Track 9 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET098/UCH_V48_ET098/UCH_V4C_ET098/ UCH_V4D_ET098/UCH_V4F_ET098/UCH_V50_ET098

87B-209

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET098 CONTINUED

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection:

Result 2

Black 15-track steering column control track 11

Track 4 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections:

Result 3

Black 15-track steering column control track 2

Track 9 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

Black 15-track steering column control track 11

Track 4 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-210

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX LEVER POSITION ET108

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ABSENT, no automatic gearbox. NOT IN NEUTRAL, with a gear shift to position D. NEUTRAL, gear selector lever on position N. REVERSE, gear selector lever on position R. P, gear selector lever on position P. If there is an incorrect position, run fault finding on the automatic gearbox. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET108/UCH_V48_ET108/UCH_V4C_ET108/ UCH_V4D_ET108/UCH_V4F_ET108/UCH_V50_ET108

87B-211

87B

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

REVERSE GEAR ENGAGED ET109

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET109 Reverse gear engaged is NO when reverse gear is engaged. Run complete fault finding on the Protection and Switching Unit.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET109/UCH_V48_ET109/UCH_V4C_ET109/ UCH_V4D_ET109/UCH_V4F_ET109/UCH_V50_ET109

87B-212

87B

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

ET110

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

UCH REQUEST TO INJECTION COMPUTER OR PROTECTION AND SWITCHING UNIT

There must be no present or stored faults.

This status gives information concerning the type of request made by the UCH to these computers. ENGINE STOP: when an engine stop is requested. INACTIVE: without action on the vehicle. + AFTER IGNITION FEED: on pressing the start button for more than 5 seconds. START: when starting is requested. If the status does not correspond to the current user request, carry out a test of the multiplex network. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET110/UCH_V48_ET110/UCH_V4C_ET110/ UCH_V4D_ET110/UCH_V4F_ET110/UCH_V50_ET110

87B-213

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

FRONT FOG LIGHTS REQUEST ET111

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET111 Front fog lights request is Absent with stalk position on Front fog lights. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request: Set the control stalk to the left-hand indicator. ET080 Rear screen wiper request: Place control stalk on rear screen wiper request. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET080 Rear screen wiper request

Absent

Present

Absent

Present Change the steering column control

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection:

Result 1

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 2

Track 9 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET111/UCH_V48_ET111/UCH_V4C_ET111/ UCH_V4D_ET111/UCH_V4F_ET111/UCH_V50_ET111

87B-214

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET111 CONTINUED

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection:

Result 2

Black 15-track steering column control track 11

Track 4 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections:

Result 3

Black 15-track steering column control track 2

Track 9 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

Black 15-track steering column control track 11

Track 4 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-215

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

INTERIOR LIGHTING CONTROL ET112

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET112 Interior lighting control is Inactive when the interior lighting is on. Check whether the footwell/floor switches operate correctly; if YES, contact the Techline. If NO, check the earth on track 10 of the PP3 connector of the UCH, if there is an earth, check the continuity and insulation of the wiring harness between the UCH and the switch connectors (see wiring diagram). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, replace the faulty switch.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET112/UCH_V48_ET112/UCH_V4C_ET112/ UCH_V4D_ET112/UCH_V4F_ET112/UCH_V50_ET112

87B-216

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

AUTOMATIC LIGHTING BUTTON ET113

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET113 Released with one press on the button. Check the operation of the following statuses: ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request: Set the control stalk to the left-hand indicator. ET096 Windscreen wiper stalk intermittent speed ring position: set the stalk to the rear fog lights position. Check in the following table and apply the fault finding procedure according to the result obtained.

Result 1

Result 2

Result 3

Result 4

ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request

Present

Absent

Absent

Present

ET096 "Windscreen wiper intermittent ring position"

4

1

4

1 Change the steering column control

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection:

Result 1

Black 15-track steering column control connector, track 9

Track 15 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET113/UCH_V48_ET113/UCH_V4C_ET113/ UCH_V4D_ET113/UCH_V4F_ET113/UCH_V50_ET113

87B-217

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET113 CONTINUED

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection:

Result 2

Black 15-track steering column control track 12

Track 17 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections:

Result 3

Black 15-track steering column control track 14

Track 12 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

Black 15-track steering column control track 12

Track 17 of the 40-track UCH connector PE2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-218

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

WIPER REQUEST BY RAIN SENSOR ET114

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Make sure that the vehicle is fitted with the rain and light sensor. The status should change to ACTIVE if there is any water on the windscreen on the sensor position. Make sure that the other positions of the wiper control are working properly.

Check the condition and connection of the rain and light sensor connector (tabs broken, bent, oxidised). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the + 12 V after ignition feed on track 1 of the rain and light sensor connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the + 12 V feed is not correct, check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: 12-track UCH grey connector PP3, track 3

Track 1 of the rain and light sensor connector

If the + 12 V feed is not correct for vehicles manufactured after June 2005, check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connection: Fuse on UPC F5F (7.5 A)

Track 1 of the rain and light sensor connector

Ensure that earth is present on track 3 of the rain and light sensor connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the UCH 24-track connector (broken, bent, oxidised tabs). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET114/UCH_V48_ET114/UCH_V4C_ET114/ UCH_V4D_ET114/UCH_V4F_ET114/UCH_V50_ET114

87B-219

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET114 CONTINUED

Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connection: 40-track UCH grey connector PE2, track 1

Track 2 of the rain and light sensor connector

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check configuration LC044 Rain/light sensor. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-220

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

REQUEST FROM LIGHT SENSOR TO SWITCH ON HEADLIGHTS ET115

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. Make sure that the vehicle is fitted with the rain and light sensor. The status should change to ACTIVE when the sensor is hidden from the surrounding light by placing a thumb over it or in darkness. Make sure that the other lighting control positions are working properly.

Check the condition and connection of the rain and light sensor connector (tabs broken, bent, oxidised). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the + 12 V after ignition feed on track 1 of the rain and light sensor connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the + 12 V feed is not correct, check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: 12-track UCH grey connector PP3, track 3

Track 1 of the rain and light sensor connector

If the + 12 V feed is not correct for vehicles manufactured after June 2005, check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connection: Fuse on UPC F5F (7.5 A)

Track 1 of the rain and light sensor connector

Ensure that earth is present on track 3 of the rain and light sensor connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the UCH 24-track connector (broken, bent, oxidised tabs). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET115/UCH_V48_ET115/UCH_V4C_ET115/ UCH_V4D_ET115/UCH_V4F_ET115/UCH_V50_ET115

87B-221

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

ET115 CONTINUED

Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connection: 40-track UCH grey connector PE2, track 1

Track 2 of the rain and light sensor connector

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check configuration LC044 Rain/light sensor. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-222

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

CARD CODE RECEIVED ET116

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET116 Inactive card belonging to the vehicle. If the status remains INACTIVE, try the other card assigned to the vehicle before performing any other operation. If the status becomes Active using the second card of the vehicle, replace the faulty card. If status ET116 Card code received remains Inactive, carry out the following checks: Check the 8-track connector of the card-reader and the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH (example: connector incorrectly connected, tabs broken, bent, oxidised). Ensure that earth is present on track 3 of the rain and light sensor connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity and insulation against earth on the following connections: Card reader track 3

Track 21 of the 40-track black connector PE2 of the UCH

Card reader track 4

Track 39 of the 40-track black connector PE2 of the UCH

Card reader track 6

Track 40 of the black 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Replace the card reader if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET116/UCH_V48_ET116/UCH_V4C_ET116/ UCH_V4D_ET116/UCH_V4F_ET116/UCH_V50_ET116

87B-223

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

CARD CODE VALID ET117

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET117 Inactive card belonging to the vehicle. If the status remains INACTIVE, try the other card assigned to the vehicle before performing any other operation. If the status becomes Active using the second card of the vehicle, replace the faulty card. Assign the cards using the specific command SC006 Assign card. Replace the cards if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET117/UCH_V48_ET117/UCH_V4C_ET117/ UCH_V4D_ET117/UCH_V4F_ET117/UCH_V50_ET117

87B-224

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

ET159 ET160

Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

REAR LEFT-HAND DOOR CHILD SAFETY LOCK REAR RIGHT-HAND DOOR CHILD SAFETY LOCK

There must be no present or stored faults. NOTES

Check that configuration LC035 Child safety is WITH, if not perform configuration using specific command SC016 Child safety (see Configurations and programming). Status only visible if Vdiag 4C, 4D, 4F and 50 UCH.

IMPORTANT After disconnecting the battery, there may be an inconsistency between a request on the switch and the status of one or two lock(s). In this case, deactivate and reactivate the switch until the warning light comes on when the switch is pressed. Check the condition and connection of the lock connector (broken, bent, oxidised tabs). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 12-track UCH black connector PP2 (tabs bent, broken, oxidised). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for earth on track 5 (left-hand side) or on track 2 (right-hand side) of the rear door lock connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Rear left-hand door lock connector track 6 Rear right-hand door lock connector track 1

Track 11 of the 12-track PP2 black connector of the UCH

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Replace the faulty lock. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET159/UCH_V48_ET159/UCH_V4C_ET159/UCH_V4D_ET159/UCH_V4F_ET159/UCH_V50_ET159/ UCH_V44_ET160/UCH_V48_ET160/UCH_V4C_ET160/UCH_V4D_ET160/UCH_V4F_ET160/UCH_V50_ET160

87B-225

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

Engine ET169

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

In the event of an inconsistency, test the multiplex network (see 88B, Multiplexing). Run fault finding on the injection system (see 13B, Diesel injection, or 17B + 17C, Petrol injection). If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET169/UCH_V48_ET169/UCH_V4C_ET169/ UCH_V4D_ET169/UCH_V4F_ET169/UCH_V50_ET169

87B-226

187B UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

INJECTION IMMOBILISER CODE ET229

There must be no present or stored faults. NOTES

INCORRECT

Apply the checks only if the status remains INCORRECT after the ignition is switched off and back on.

Try to start the vehicle, ensuring that the steering column lock unlocks correctly and that + after ignition is correctly established. First check the operation of status ET046 Engine immobliser. Carry out a multiplex network test. Run fault finding on the injection system. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET229/UCH_V48_ET229/UCH_V4C_ET229/ UCH_V4D_ET229/UCH_V4F_ET229/UCH_V50_ET229

87B-227

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

CHILD SAFETY ET230

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

ET230 Childproof locks is Inactive although the childproof lock switch has been pressed. Verify that ET233 Childproof lock switch is Pressed. If Inactive, refer to interpretation of ET233. If Press, check using configuration reading LC035 Childproof locks" that the UCH is correctly configured as WITH childproof locks. If WITHOUT, configuration WITH child safety lock is carried out with special command SC016 Child safety lock (V4C, V4D, V4F and V50). If WITH, check that all the doors are correctly closed, using the following statuses: ET053: Driver's door ET042: Passenger door ET051: Rear left-hand door ET052: Rear right-hand door If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET230/UCH_V48_ET230/UCH_V4C_ET230/ UCH_V4D_ET230/UCH_V4F_ET230/UCH_V50_ET230

87B-228

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87B

CHILDPROOF LOCK SWITCH ET233

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

Check the condition and connection of the UCH 40-track connector PE1 (broken, bent, oxidised tabs).1 If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 6-track child safety lock switch black connector (tabs broken, bent, oxidised). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for earth on track A3 of the child safety lock switch connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connection: Childproof switch connector track B1

Track 11 of the white 40-track connector PE1 of the UCH

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check: For insulation between tracks B1 and A3 of the switch (Released position). For continuity between tracks B1 and A3 of the switch (Pressed position). Replace the switch if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_ET233/UCH_V48_ET233/UCH_V4C_ET233/ UCH_V4D_ET233/UCH_V4F_ET233/UCH_V50_ET233

87B-229

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Parameter summary table

Tool parameter

Diagnostic tool title

PR001

Battery voltage

PR002

External temperature

PR003

Front left-hand wheel pressure

PR004

Front right-hand wheel pressure

PR005

Rear right-hand wheel pressure

PR006

Rear left-hand wheel pressure

PR008

Vehicle speed

PR009

Front wheels low speed recommended pressure

PR010

Rear wheels low speed recommended pressure

PR011

Rear wheels high speed recommended pressure

PR012

Front wheel high speed recommended pressure

PR013

Number of cards programmed

PR014

Left/right pressure difference threshold

PR015

Low under-inflation threshold

PR017

Cold over-inflation threshold

PR018

Warm over-inflation threshold

PR019

Front left-hand tyre temperature

PR020

Front right-hand tyre temperature

PR021

Rear right-hand tyre temperature

PR022

Rear left-hand tyre temperature

PR023

Heat difference threshold between wheels

PR059

Puncture report threshold

87B-230

87B

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

87B

BATTERY VOLTAGE PR001

NOTES

Check for correct tightness of the battery terminals.

Check the consistency between the battery voltage measurement from the multimeter and the value of PR004 Battery voltage. Engine stopped: 11 V < X < 13.5 V. Engine running: 10.5 V < X < 16 V. If the voltage values are not consistent (greater than 0.3 V difference between the 2 values), check the connection between the + battery feed and the Protection and Switching Unit. If the values are consistent, run fault finding on the battery and charging circuit (see Technical Note 6014, Checking the charging circuit, 16A, Starting-charging).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_PR001/UCH_V48_PR001/UCH_V4C_PR001 / UCH_V4D_PR001/UCH_V4F_PR001/UCH_V50_PR001

87B-231

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

87B

EXTERNAL TEMPERATURE PR002

NOTES

None

Check the 2-track green connector of the temperature sensor (example: connector incorrectly connected, pins bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check 40-track black connector of the UCH (example: connector incorrectly connected, pins bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Temperature sensor Track 1

Track 3 of the black 40-track UCH connector

Temperature sensor Track 2

Track 13 of the black 40-track UCH connector

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check sensor resistance on tracks 1 and 2. Approximate temperature (°°C)

Sensor resistance Ω) (Ω

Between 0 and 5

Between 5400 and 6200

Between 11 and 15

Between 3700 and 4400

Between 21 and 15

Between 2500 and 3000

Between 31 and 35

Between 1700 and 2100

Replace the sensor if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_PR002/UCH_V48_PR002/UCH_V4C_PR002 / UCH_V4D_PR002/UCH_V4F_PR002/UCH_V50_PR002

87B-232

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

VEHICLE SPEED PR008

NOTES

None

Run complete fault finding on the ABS and the Protection and Switching Unit. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

UCH_V44_PR008/UCH_V48_PR008/UCH_V4C_PR008 / UCH_V4D_PR008/UCH_V4F_PR008/UCH_V50_PR008

87B-233

87B

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Command summary table

Tool command

Diagnostic tool title

AC003

Immobiliser warning light

AC004

Central locking

AC005

Unlocking doors and luggage compartment

AC006

Driver's door unlocking

AC007

Rear screen wiper

AC008

Front fog lights

AC009

Rear fog lights

AC015

Air conditioning button indicator light

AC016

RCH* 1 relay

AC017

RCH* 2 relay

AC018

RCH* 3 relay

AC019

Heated rear screen indicator light

AC020

CPE* button indicator light

AC021

Interior lights

AC022

Left-hand direction indicator

AC023

Right-hand direction indicator

AC024

Card reader lighting

AC025

One-touch window control/sunroof authorisation.

AC026

Start button lighting

AC027

Footwell lights

AC030

Headlight washer relay 1 (only if Vdiag 44 UPC)

AC031

Headlight washer relay 2 (only if Vdiag 44 UPC)

AC032

Driver's side external aerial test

AC033

Passenger side external aerial test

AC034

Luggage compartment external aerial test

AC036

Internal aerial test

AC037

Transmitter aerial fault finding

AC076

Child safety lock indicator light

*RCH = Passenger Compartment Heating Resistor *CPE: Electric central door locking

87B-234

87B Vdiag

V44, V48, V4C, V4D, V4F, V50

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Command summary table

Special Commands

Description

SC001

Reading the valve set and the stored codes

SC002

Programming the 4 valve codes

SC003

Spare

SC004

UCH programming

SC005

Card check

SC006

Card allocation

SC008

Type of UCH

SC016

Child safety

Settings

87B Vdiag

V44, V48, V4C, V4D, V4F, V50

V4C, V4D, V4F, V50

Description

VP004

Enter VIN

VP005

Entering recommended pressures

VP016

New vehicle storage mode deactivation

87B-235

Vdiag V44, V48, V4C, V4D, V4F, V50 V4F, V50

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

IMMOBILISER WARNING LIGHT AC003

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. The instrument panel must be detected as present on the multiplex network. This command is for testing whether the immobiliser warning light is working. The command lasts 10 seconds.

The immobiliser indicator light does not come on when the command is performed. Check the condition and connection of the instrument panel connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. With the command activated, check for earth on track 29 of the instrument panel. If correct, replace the instrument panel. Check the condition and connection of connector PE2 on the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Instrument panel track 29

Track 29 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH.

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-236

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

LOCK DOORS AND TAILGATE AC004

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing locking relay operation. Note: The driver's door circuit is shared with the fuel tank flap circuit.

One or more doors do not lock when the command is activated. Check the condition and connection of the PP2 connector on the UCH. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the connector on the faulty lock(s). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for earth on: Driver's door and rear right-hand door locks, tracks C and D. Passenger's door and rear left-hand door locks, tracks A and B. Fuel tank flap lock motor, tracks 1 and 3. If faulty:

If OK: With the command activated, check for + 12 V: Driver's door and rear right-hand door locks on track D, taking the earth on track C. Passenger's door and rear left-hand door locks on track A, taking the earth on track B. Fuel tank flap lock motor on track 3, taking the earth on track 1. If OK, replace the faulty lock(s). If faulty:

A

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-237

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AC004 CONTINUED

Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Driver's door lock track C Fuel tank flap bolt track 1

Track 6 of the 12-track UCH connector PP2

Driver's door lock track D Fuel tank flap bolt track 3

Track 5 of the 12-track UCH connector PP2

Passenger and rear left-hand door locks track B Rear right-hand door bolt track C

Track 8 of the 12-track UCH connector PP2

Passenger and rear left-hand door locks track A Rear right-hand door bolt track D

Track 7 of the 12-track UCH connector PP2

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-238

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

AC005 AC006

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

UNLOCK DOORS AND TAILGATE DRIVER'S DOOR UNLOCKING

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing unlocking relay operation. The driver's door circuit is shared with the fuel tank flap circuit.

One or more doors do not unlock when the commands are activated. Check the condition and connection of the PP2 connector on the UCH. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the connector on the faulty lock(s). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for earth on: Driver's door and rear right-hand door locks, tracks C and D. Passenger's door and rear left-hand door locks, tracks A and B. Fuel tank flap lock motor, tracks 1 and 3. If faulty:

If OK: With the command activated, check for + 12 V: Driver's door and rear right-hand door locks on track C, taking the earth on track D. Passenger's door and rear left-hand door locks on track B, taking the earth on track A. Fuel tank flap lock motor on track 1, taking the earth on track 3. If OK, replace the faulty lock(s). If faulty:

A

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-239

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AC005 AC006 CONTINUED

Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Driver's door lock track C Fuel tank flap bolt track 1

Track 6 of the 12-track connector PP2 of the UCH

Driver's door lock track C Fuel tank flap bolt track 1

Track 5 of the 12-track connector PP2 of the UCH

Passenger and rear left-hand door locks track B Rear right-hand door bolt track C

Track 8 of the 12-track connector PP2 of the UCH

Passenger and rear left-hand door locks track A Rear right-hand door bolt track D

Track 7 of the 12-track connector PP2 of the UCH

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-240

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

REAR SCREEN WIPER AC007

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults.

The rear screen wiper does not operate when the command is activated. Check the condition and connection of the rear screen wiper motor connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for an earth on track 3 of the rear screen wiper connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. With the command activated, check for an + 12 V on track 1 of the rear screen wiper connector. If everything is correct, replace the rear screen wiper motor. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of connector PE3 on the UCH. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Motor track 1

Track 3 of connector PP2 of the UCH

Motor track 2

Track 37 of connector PE2 of the UCH.

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-241

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

FRONT FOG LIGHTS AC008

NOTES

Check: – the condition and connection of the front fog lights fuse, – the condition of the bulbs. Replace the bulbs if necessary.

The rear screen wiper does not operate when the command is activated. Check the condition and connection of connector PPA on the UPC (Vdiag 44) or connector AN on the UPC (Vdiag 48 or above). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the bulb connectors. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for earth on R9 connection then check the connections of the bulb connectors. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for + 12 V on the fog light connectors when they are being controlled by command AC004. If correct, replace the bulb(s).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-242

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AC008 CONTINUED

Vdiag 44 Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPA track 8

Track 1 of the front left-hand fog light connector

Protection and Switching Unit connector PPA track 7

Track 1 of the front right-hand fog light connector

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Vdiag 48 or above Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector AN track 2

Track 1 of the front left-hand fog light connector

Protection and Switching Unit connector AN track 3

Track 1 of the front right-hand fog light connector

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-243

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

REAR FOG LIGHTS AC009

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing operation of the rear fog lights. Check the bulbs.

Left-hand drive Check the condition and connection of the connector for each rear light. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for an earth on track 1 of the black rear light connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. With the command activated, check for + 12 V on track 2 of the rear light black connector. If OK, check the bulbs again, and if still not OK replace the rear light. Check the condition and connection of UCH connector PP3. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Track 2 of the rear light black connector

Track 6 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-244

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AC009 CONTINUED

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing operation of the rear fog lights. Check the bulbs.

Right-hand drive Check the condition and connection of the connector for each rear light. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for an earth on track 4 of the rear light black connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. With the command activated, check for + 12 V on track 3 of the rear light black connector. If OK, check the bulbs again, and if still not OK replace the rear light. Check the condition and connection of UCH connector PP3. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Track 3 of the rear light black connector

Track 6 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-245

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

AC015

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AIR-CONDITIONING BUTTON INDICATOR LIGHT Manual air conditioning only

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing operation of the air-conditioning indicator light. Apply the after ignition feed, and the air conditioning control panel should light up. The command lasts 7 seconds.

The indicator light does not come on when the command is activated. Check the condition and connection of the heater control panel connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for earth on track 5 of the heater control panel connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. With the command activated, check for + 12 V on track 6 of the heater control panel connector. If OK, replace the control panel. Check the condition and connection of connector PE2 on the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Control panel track 6

Track 26 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH

Control panel track 5

Earth

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-246

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

Passenger compartment heating resistor 1 relay AC016

NOTES

Check that the vehicle is fitted with passenger compartment heating resistors. There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing the operation of the passenger compartment heating resistors. The command lasts 7 seconds.

Check for earth on tracks 2 and 4 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

With the command activated, check for + 12 V on track 3 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector.

YES

Check that the resistances between tracks 2 and 3 and between tracks 3 and 4 of the passenger compartment heating resistor connector are equal to infinity. Replace the passenger compartment heating resistors if faulty.

YES

Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between track A5 of passenger compartment heating resistor 1 relay and track 3 of the passenger compartment heating resistor connector.

NO Check for + 12 V on track A3 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 1. NO

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-247

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AC016 CONTINUED 1

Contact the Techline. NO With the command activated, check for earth on track A2 of the passenger compartment heating resistor 1 relay.

NO

With the command activated, check for earth on track 33 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH. YES

YES

Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between track A2 of the passenger compartment heating resistor 1 relay and track 33 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-248

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AC016 CONTINUED 2

Check for + 12 V on track A1 of the passenger compartment heating resistor 1 relay.

NO

Check the presence, the condition and connection of the F7 fuse on the power supply fuse board. Repair if necessary. YES Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between track A1 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 1 and track 7 of the power supply fuse board.

YES

With the command activated, check for earth on track A2 of the passenger compartment heating resistor 1 relay.

NO

Ensure insulation and continuity of the connection between track A2 of passenger compartment heating resistance relay 1 and track 33 of the PPH2 (Vdiag 44) or CN (Vdiag 48) connector of the UPC.

If everything is OK, replace the relay.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-249

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

Passenger compartment heating resistor 2 relay AC017

NOTES

Check that the vehicle is fitted with passenger compartment heating resistors. There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing the operation of the passenger compartment heating resistors. The command lasts 7 seconds.

Check for earth on tracks 2 and 4 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

With the command activated, check for + 12 V on tracks 1 and 5 of the passenger compartment heating resistors' connector.

YES

Verify that the resistances between tracks 1 and 2 and between tracks 4 and 5 of the passenger compartment heating resistor connector are equal to infinity. Replace the passenger compartment heating resistors if faulty.

YES

Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between track B5 of passenger compartment heating resistor 2 relay and tracks 1 and 5 of the passenger compartment heating resistor connector.

NO With the command activated, check for + 12 V on track B5 of passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2. NO

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-250

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AC017 CONTINUED 1

Contact the Techline. NO With the command activated, check for an earth on track B1 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2.

NO

With the command activated, check for an earth on track 22 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH.

YES

YES Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between track B1 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2 and track 22 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-251

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AC017 CONTINUED 2

Check for + 12 V on track B3 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2.

NO

Check the presence, the condition and connection of the F9 fuse on the power supply fuse board. Repair if necessary. YES Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between track B3 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2 and track 9 of the power supply fuse board.

YES

Check for + 12 V on track B2 of the passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2.

NO

Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between track B2 of passenger compartment heating resistor relay 2 and track 11 of connector PPH2 (Vdiag 44) or CN (Vdiag 48 or above) of the UPC.

If everything is OK, replace the relay.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-252

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

AC019

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

HEATED REAR SCREEN INDICATOR LIGHT Except with climate control

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing operation of the heated rear screen indicator light. Apply after ignition feed. The command lasts 7 seconds.

The heated rear screen indicator light does not come on when the command is activated. Check the condition and connection of the heater control panel connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for of earth on track 5 of the heater control panel connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. With the command activated, check for + 12 V on track 4 of the heater control panel connector. If OK, replace the control panel. Check the condition and connection of connector PE2 on the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Control panel track 4

Track 38 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH.

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the fault memory. Deal with any other faults.

87B-253

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

CENTRAL LOCKING BUTTON INDICATOR LIGHT AC020

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is used to test whether the button has a power supply. The command lasts 7 seconds.

The central door locking button light does not come on when the command is performed. Check the connection and condition of the central door locking button connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for earth on track 4 of the central door locking button. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. When the command is performed, check for + 12 V on track 5 of the central door locking button connector. If OK, replace the button. Check the condition and connection of connector PE2 on the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: CPE* button track 5

Track 14 of connector PE1 of the UCH

CPE* button track 2

Track 6 connector PE1 of the UCH

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline. *Electric central door locking

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-254

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

INTERIOR LIGHTS AC021

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing interior lights operation. Check the bulbs.

The interior lights do not light when the command is activated. Check the condition and connection of the interior lights connectors. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for earth on track 3 of each interior light. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. With the command activated, check for + 12 V on track 2 of each interior light. If OK, check the bulbs again, and if still not OK replace the interior light(s). Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Track 2 of each interior light

Track 1 of the 12-track UCH connector PP3

If the connection is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connection, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-255

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

Left-hand direction indicator AC022

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing direction indicator operation. Apply after ignition feed. Check the bulbs.

The direction indicators do not light when the command is activated. Check the condition and connection of the connectors for the left-hand headlight, the left-hand repeater and the rear left-hand light. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for earth on the faulty component: Track 1 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb / Tracks 1 and 4 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 2 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door hatch: on track 3 of the rear light black connector. 4-door saloon: on track 2 of the rear light connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. With the command activated, check for + 12 V on the faulty component: Track 3 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb/Track 8 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door hatch: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door hatch: on track 1 of the rear light connector. If OK, check the bulbs again, and if still not OK replace the rear light(s).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-256

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AC022 CONTINUED

Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Track 3 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb Track 8 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door hatch: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door hatch: on track 1 of the rear light connector.

Track 4 of the 12-track UCH connector PP3

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-257

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR AC023

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing direction indicator operation. Apply after ignition feed. Check the bulbs.

The direction indicators do not light when the command is activated. Check the condition and connection of the connectors for the right-hand headlight, the right-hand repeater and the rear right-hand light. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for earth on the faulty component: Track 1 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb / Tracks 1 and 4 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 2 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door hatch: on track 3 of the rear light black connector. 4-door hatch: on track 5 of the rear light connector. With the command activated, check for + 12 V on the faulty component: Track 3 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb/Track 8 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door hatch: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door hatch: on track 6 of the rear light connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If correct, check the bulbs again, and if still correct, replace the rear light(s).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-258

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AC023 CONTINUED

Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: Track 3 headlight not fitted with xenon bulb Track 8 headlight fitted with xenon bulb Track 1 repeater Rear light: 3 and 5-door hatch: on track 2 of the rear light black connector. 4-door hatch: on track 6 of the rear light connector.

Track 4 of the 12-track UCH connector PP3

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-259

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

CARD READER LIGHT AC024

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing card reader operation. The command lasts 7 seconds.

The card reader light does not come on when the command is activated. Check the condition and connection of the card reader connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for an earth on track 5 of the card reader connector. If OK:

If faulty: Check the condition and connection of connector PE2 on the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Card reader track 5

Track 25 of the 40-track connector PE2 of the UCH.

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

With the command activated, check for + 12 V on track 2 of the card reader connector. If OK, replace the card reader. Check the condition and connection of connector PE1 on the UCH. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Card reader track 2

Track 4 of the 40-track connector PE1 of the UCH.

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-260

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

ONE-TOUCH WINDOW CONTROL/SUNROOF AUTHORISATION. AC025

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is used to operate the window motors, after the UCH has been replaced or minor loss of authorisation. The command lasts 7 seconds.

After activation, take a reading of the ET087 One-touch window/sunroof authorisation status to verify a change of status. If there is a fault, see the procedure for this status.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-261

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

START BUTTON LIGHTING AC026

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing operation of the start button. The command lasts 7 seconds.

The button light does not come on when the command is activated. Check the connection of the start button connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for earth on track 2 of the start button connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. With the command activated, check for + 12 V on track 4 of the start button connector. If OK, replace the button. Check the condition and connection of connector PE1 on the UCH. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Start button track 4

Track 13 of the 40-track UCH connector PE1

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-262

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

FOOTWELL LIGHTS AC027

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing footwell/floor lights operation. Check the bulbs.

Check the condition and connection of the footwell lighting connectors. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for + 12 V on track 1 of each footwell light. If OK:

If faulty: Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Track 1 of each interior light

Track 9 of the 12-track PP3 connector of the UCH

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

With the command activated, check for earth on track 2 of each footwell light. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the PP3 connector on the UCH. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Track 2 of each interior light

Track 10 of the 12-track connector PP3 of the UCH

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-263

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

AC030

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

HEADLIGHT WASHER 1 RELAY (ONLY IF VDIAG 44 UPC)

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing headlight washer 1 operation. The command lasts 3 seconds.

Check for earth on tracks 1 and 2 of the headlight washer pump. Is there an earth? Not on track 1.

Not on track 2.

Run the fault finding procedure for command AC031 Headlight washer 2 relay.

YES With the command activated, check for + 12 V on track 1 of the headlight washer pump. Is there + 12 V?

NO

YES Replace the headlight washer pump.

A

Check the condition and connection of the headlight washer 1 relay connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for earth on track A4 of the relay connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Headlight washer relay 1 track A3

Track 1 of the headlight washer pump.

If everything is OK, replace the relay.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-264

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AC030 CONTINUED

Check the condition and connection of headlight washer relay 1. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for + 12 V on tracks A2 and A5 of the relay connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. With the command activated, check for earth on track A2 of the relay connector. Is there an earth? YES

NO Check the condition and connection of connector PE3 on the UCH. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Relay connector track A2

Track 13 of the UCH connector PE3

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Headlight washer relay 1 track A3

Track 1 of the headlight washer pump.

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If everything is OK, replace the relay.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-265

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

AC031

NOTES

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

HEADLIGHT WASHER RELAY 2 (ONLY IF VDIAG 44 UPC)

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is used to test the operation of headlight washer 2 or for locking the glovebox if the vehicle is fitted with one of these functions: This command is only active for UPC Vdiag 44 (see System operation). The command lasts 3 seconds.

Headlight washer 2 relay Check for an earth on tracks 1 and 2 of the headlight washer pump. Is there an earth? Faulty on track 1.

Not correct on track 2.

Run the fault finding procedure for command AC030 Headlight washer 1 relay.

YES With the command activated, check for + 12 V on track 2 of the headlight washer pump. Is there + 12 V?

NO

YES Replace the headlight washer pump.

A

Check the condition and connection of the headlight washer relay 2 connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for earth on track B4 of the relay connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Headlight washer relay 1 track B3

Track 2 headlight washer pump

If everything is OK, replace the relay.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-266

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AC031 CONTINUED 1

Check the condition and connection of headlight washer 2 relay. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for + 12 V on tracks B2 and A5 of the relay connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. With the command running, check for earth on track B2 of the relay connector. Is there earth? YES

NO Check the condition and connection of connector PE3 on the UCH. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Relay connector track B2

Track 14 of the UCH connector PE3

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connection: Headlight washer relay 2 track B3

Track 1 headlight washer pump

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If everything is OK, replace the relay.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-267

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AC031 CONTINUED 2

Glovebox locking If after command AC031, the glovebox does not unlock: Check for + 12 V between track 3 of the glovebox connector and the earth during command AC031. If there is no 12 V, check the following connection: track 22 white 40-track connector PE1 (green section) of the UCH

track 3 black glovebox connector

If there is + 12 V, check the following connection: track 8 of the black 12-track connector PP2 of the UCH

track 2 black glovebox connector

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-268

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

DRIVER'S SIDE EXTERNAL AERIAL TEST AC032

Before performing this command, it is essential to perform command AC037 Transmitter aerial diagnostic to ensure there is no aerial fault. There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for checking the hands-free access zones around the vehicle and functions even if the hands-free card does not belong to the vehicle.

NOTES

Special Note This command is for testing correct operation of the driver-side external aerials. This command takes 1 minute. View the flashing of the card reader.

Front door Check the condition and connection of the 4-track black connector of the aerial (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 (tabs bent, broken, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections to + 12 V and to earth: 4-track aerial connector track 1

Track 27 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

4-track aerial connector track 2

Track 39 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-269

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AC032 CONTINUED

Rear door Check the condition and connection of the 4-track black connector of the aerial (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 (tabs bent, broken, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections: 4-track aerial connector track 1

Track 28 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

4-track aerial connector track 2

Track 38 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-270

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

PASSENGER SIDE EXTERNAL AERIAL TEST AC033

Before performing this command, it is essential to perform command AC037 Transmitter aerial diagnostic to ensure there is no aerial fault. There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for checking the hands-free access zones around the vehicle and functions even if the hands-free card does not belong to the vehicle. NOTES Special Note This command is for testing correct operation of the passenger-side external aerials. If the range exceeds 1.50 m, check that there is no short circuit to earth on the aerials. This command takes 1 minute. View the flashing of the card reader.

Front door Check the condition and connection of the 4-track black connector of the aerial (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 (tabs bent, broken, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections to + 12 V and to earth: 4-track aerial connector track 1

Track 31 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

4-track aerial connector track 2

Track 34 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-271

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AC033 CONTINUED

Rear door Check the condition and connection of the 4-track black connector of the aerial (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 (tabs bent, broken, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections to + 12 V and to earth: 4-track aerial connector track 1

Track 32 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

4-track aerial connector track 2

Track 33 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-272

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT EXTERNAL AERIAL TEST AC034

Before performing this command, it is essential to perform command AC037 Transmitter aerial diagnostic to ensure there is no aerial fault. There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for checking the hands-free luggage compartment access zone and works even if the hands-free card does not belong to the vehicle. NOTES Special Note This command is for testing correct operation of the external aerial on the tailgate side. If the range exceeds 1.50 m, check that there is no short circuit to the aerial earth. This command takes 1 minute. View the flashing of the card reader.

Check the condition and connection of the 4-track black connector of the aerial (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 (tabs bent, broken, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections to + 12 V and to earth: 4-track aerial connector track 1

Track 29 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

4-track aerial connector track 2

Track 40 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-273

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

INTERNAL AERIAL TESTING AC036

Before performing this command, it is essential to perform command AC037 Transmitter aerial diagnostic to ensure there is no aerial fault. There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for checking the hands-free access zones around the vehicle and functions even if the hands-free card does not belong to the vehicle.

NOTES

Special Note This command is for testing correct operation of the internal aerials. This command takes 1 minute. View the flashing of the card reader.

FRONT INTERNAL AERIAL Check the condition and connection of the 3-track black connector of the aerial (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 (tabs bent, broken, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections to + 12 V and to earth: 3-track aerial connector track 1

Track 25 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

3-track aerial connector track 3

Track 24 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-274

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AC036 CONTINUED 1

BOOT INTERNAL AERIAL Check the condition and connection of the 3-track black connector of the aerial (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 (tabs bent, broken, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections to + 12 V and to earth: 3-track aerial connector track 1

Track 35 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

3-track aerial connector track 3

Track 36 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-275

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

AC036 CONTINUED 2

CENTRE INTERNAL AERIAL Check the condition and connection of the 3-track black connector of the aerial (tabs bent, broken, oxidised, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of the 40-track UCH connector PE3 (tabs bent, broken, etc.). If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connections to + 12 V and to earth: 3-track aerial connector track 1

Track 26 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

3-track aerial connector track 3

Track 37 of the 40-track UCH connector PE3

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Replace the aerial if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-276

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

TRANSMITTER AERIAL FAULT FINDING AC037

There must be no present or stored faults. NOTES

Special note: This command is used to run fault finding on the internal and external transmitter aerials on open circuit or short circuit to + 12 V. This command takes 1 minute.

After activating the command, perform fault reading. If one (or more) fault(s) concerning the aerials appear(s), refer to the processing of this (these) fault(s).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-277

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87B

CHILD SAFETY INDICATOR LIGHT AC076

NOTES

There must be no present or stored faults. This command is for testing child safety indicator light operation. The command lasts 7 seconds.

The child safety switch light does not come on when the command is activated. Check the condition and connection of the child safety switch connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for + 12 V on tracks A1 of the child safety lock switch connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the condition and connection of connector PE1 on the UCH If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check the insulation and continuity of the following connection: Locking switch track A2

Track 9 of the 40-track UCH connector PE1

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out another fault finding check on the system. Clear the stored faults. Deal with any other faults.

87B-278

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Customer complaints

NOTES

87B

Only refer to these customer complaints after a full check with the diagnostic tool.

NO DIALOGUE WITH THE COMPUTER

ALP 1

LIGHTING

NO REAR FOG LIGHTS

ALP 2

NO RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR

ALP 3

NO LEFT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR

ALP 4

NO SIDE LIGHTS (LIGHTS WITHOUT XENON BULB)

ALP 5

NO DIPPED BEAM LIGHTS (LIGHTS WITHOUT XENON BULB)

ALP 6

NO MAIN BEAM LIGHTS (LIGHTS WITHOUT XENON BULB)

ALP 7

NO FRONT FOG LIGHTS

ALP 8

WIPERS, WASHERS

NO REAR SCREEN WIPER

ALP 9

NO REAR PARK POSITION

ALP 10

NO WINDSCREEN WIPER PARK POSITION

ALP 11

NO WINDSCREEN WIPER

ALP 12

NO FRONT AND REAR SCREEN WASHER

ALP 13

NO HEADLIGHT WASHERS (ONLY IF VDIAG 44 UPC)

ALP 14

87B-279

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Customer complaints

87B

ELECTRIC WINDOWS

NO PASSENGER WINDOW OPERATION (DRIVER AND PASSENGER ELECTRIC WINDOWS)

ALP 15

NO PASSENGER WINDOW OPERATION (DRIVER AND PASSENGER ONE TOUCH ELECTRIC WINDOWS)

ALP 16

NO PASSENGER WINDOW OPERATION (DRIVER'S ONE TOUCH ELECTRIC WINDOW AND PASSENGER ELECTRIC WINDOW)

ALP 17

NO DRIVER'S WINDOW OPERATION (DRIVER AND PASSENGER ELECTRIC WINDOWS)

ALP 18

NO DRIVER'S WINDOW OPERATION (DRIVER AND PASSENGER ONE TOUCH ELECTRIC WINDOWS)

ALP 19

NO DRIVER'S WINDOW OPERATION (DRIVER'S ONE TOUCH ELECTRIC WINDOW AND PASSENGER ELECTRIC WINDOW)

ALP 20

NO OPERATION ON REAR LEFT-HAND WINDOW (REAR ONE TOUCH ELECTRIC WINDOWS)

ALP 21

NO OPERATION ON REAR RIGHT-HAND WINDOW (REAR ONE TOUCH ELECTRIC WINDOWS)

ALP 22

NO ELECTRIC WINDOW OPERATION (DRIVER AND PASSENGER ELECTRIC WINDOWS)

ALP 23

87B-280

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Customer complaints

87B

OPENING ELEMENTS

NO SUNROOF OPENING AND CLOSING

ALP 24

NO SUNROOF OPENING POSITION 1, 2 or 3

ALP 25

THE SUNROOF IS DIFFICULT TO CLOSE OR THE ANTI-PINCH IS TRIGGERED WITHOUT ANY APPARENT OBSTACLE

ALP 26

FAULT LOCKING/UNLOCKING VIA BUTTON ON CARD

ALP 27

FAULT LOCKING/UNLOCKING TAILGATE VIA CARD BUTTON

ALP 28

BOOT OPENING FAULT (NOT HANDS-FREE)

ALP 29

REAR SCREEN OPENING FAULT (NOT HANDS-FREE)

ALP 30

LOCKING/UNLOCKING FUEL FILLER FLAP FAULT

ALP 31

UNLOCKING FAULT IN HANDS-FREE MODE

ALP 32

LOCKING FAULT IN HANDS-FREE MODE

ALP 33

HANDS-FREE TAILGATE UNLOCKING FAULT

ALP 34

FAULT OPENING THE REAR SCREEN IN HANDS-FREE MODE

ALP 35

CENTRAL LOCKING/UNLOCKING FAULT ON ONE OR MORE DOORS

ALP 36

AUTOMATIC LOCKING WHEN DRIVING OPERATION FAULT (RAID)

ALP 37

WINDOWS FAIL TO CLOSE AFTER TWO ATTEMPTS TO LOCK

ALP 38

87B-281

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Customer complaints

87B

ANTITHEFT AND STARTING RECORDED FAULTS

NO + ACCESSORIES FEED

ALP 39

FORCED AFTER-IGNITION FEED FAILS

ALP 40

THE VEHICLE FAILS TO START AND AFTER IGNITION FEED FAILS, CARD IN READER

ALP 41

THE VEHICLE FAILS TO START AND AFTER IGNITION FEED FAILS IN HANDS-FREE MODE, BUT WORKS WITH CARD IN READER

ALP 42

THE VEHICLE FAILS TO START AND GOES INTO AFTER IGNITION FEED

ALP 43

THE STARTER BRIEFLY RUNS BUT THE VEHICLE FAILS TO START AND GOES INTO AFTER IGNITION FEED

ALP 44

IMPOSSIBLE TO SHUT OFF ENGINE

ALP 45

STEERING COLUMN LOCK DOES NOT LOCK

ALP 46

STEERING COLUMN LOCK DOES NOT UNLOCK

ALP 47

STARTING ERRATIC

ALP 48

87B-282

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Customer complaints

87B

DOOR MIRRORS

NO FOLDING-IN OR FOLDING-OUT OF ONE OR MORE DOOR MIRRORS

ALP 49

CANNOT ADJUST ONE OF THE TWO DOOR MIRRORS

ALP 50

+ AFTER IGNITION FEED REMAINS BLOCKED

ALP 51

SUPPLY

87B-283

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 1

NOTES

87B

No dialogue with the computer

Check the condition and connection of the battery connections. Check the condition of the power fuses on the battery's positive terminal. Check the battery voltage. Repair if necessary.

YES

Is there contact or another feed level?

Refer to ALP 1 (see 88B, Multiplexing). Has the fault disappeared?

NO

NO

Perform locking/unlocking. Did locking/unlocking operate?

YES

Refer to the section Interpretation of faults, Multiplex network out of service (see 88B Multiplexing).

NO Check the condition and connection of connector PP1 of the UCH. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for earth on track 1 of connector PP1 and on track 2 of connector PP3 of the UCH. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for + 12 V on tracks 3 and 4 of connector PP1 of the UCH. Are the power supplies correct? YES

NO

Repair the faulty connections and fuses up to the battery, checking the passenger compartment relay and fuse boxes and the power supply fuse board.

AFTER REPAIR

Contact the Techline.

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP1/UCH_V48_ALP1/UCH_V4C_ALP1/ UCH_V4D_ALP1/UCH_V4F_ALP1/UCH_V50_ALP1

87B-284

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 2

NOTES

87B

No rear fog lights

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check the bulbs. Are the bulbs in good condition?

NO

Replace the bulbs.

NO

Apply interpretation of ET082 Rear fog light request.

NO

Apply interpretation of command AC009 Rear fog light.

YES Check status ET082 Rear fog lights request by actuating the control stalk. Is status ET082 present? YES Perform command AC009 Rear fog lights. Does the fog light come on? YES Check the UCH connectors. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP2/UCH_V48_ALP2/UCH_V4C_ALP2/ UCH_V4D_ALP2/UCH_V4F_ALP2/UCH_V50_ALP2

87B-285

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 3

NOTES

87B

NO RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check the bulbs. Are the bulbs in good condition?

NO

Replace the bulbs.

YES

Verify that there is no corrosion on the connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

NO

Apply interpretation of status ET084 Right-hand direction indicator request.

NO

Apply interpretation of command AC023 Right-hand direction indicator.

YES Check the + 12 V supply and earth on the bulb connectors (see interpretation of DF012 Right-hand direction indicator circuit). Is there a supply? NO Check status ET084 Right-hand direction indicator request by actuating the control stalk. Is status ET084 present?

YES Perform command AC023 Right-hand direction indicator. Does the right-hand direction indicator come on? YES Check the UCH connectors. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP3/UCH_V48_ALP3/UCH_V4C_ALP3/ UCH_V4D_ALP3/UCH_V4F_ALP3/UCH_V50_ALP3

87B-286

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 4

NOTES

87B

No left-hand direction indicator

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check the bulbs. Are the bulbs in good condition?

NO

Replace the bulbs.

YES

Verify that there is no corrosion on the connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

NO

Apply interpretation of status ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request.

NO

Apply interpretation of command AC022 Left-hand direction indicator.

YES Check the + 12 V supply and earth on the headlight connectors (see interpretation of DF013 Left-hand direction indicator circuit). Is there a supply? NO Check status ET083 Left-hand direction indicator request by actuating the control stalk. Is status ET083 present?

YES Perform command AC022 Left-hand direction indicator . Does the left-hand direction indicator come on? YES Check the UCH connectors. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP4/UCH_V48_ALP4/UCH_V4C_ALP4/ UCH_V4D_ALP4/UCH_V4F_ALP4/UCH_V50_ALP4

87B-287

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

No side lights (lights without xenon bulb)

ALP 5

NOTES

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check the bulbs. Are the bulbs in good condition?

NO

Replace the bulbs.

YES

Verify that there is no corrosion on the connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

NO

Apply interpretation of status ET081 Lighting stalk position.

YES Check the + 12 V supply on track 5 of the headlights and earth on track 1. Is there a supply? NO Check status ET081 Lighting stalk position. Is the side lights request on side lights? YES Run fault finding on the Protection and Switching Unit.

AFTER REPAIR

87B

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP5/UCH_V48_ALP5/UCH_V4C_ALP5/ UCH_V4D_ALP5/UCH_V4F_ALP5/UCH_V50_ALP5

87B-288

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

No dipped beam lights (lights without xenon bulb)

ALP 6

NOTES

87B

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check the bulbs. Are the bulbs in good condition?

NO

Replace the bulbs.

YES

Verify that there is no corrosion on the connector. Repair if necessary.

NO

Apply interpretation of status ET081 Lighting stalk position.

YES Check the + 12 V supply on track 2 of the headlights and earth on track 1. Is there a supply? NO Check status ET081 Lighting stalk position. Is the dipped beam headlight request on dipped beam? YES Run fault finding on the Protection and Switching Unit and check the dipped headlight F8C fuses (Vdiag 44 UPC) and F3 and F4 fuses (Vdiag 48 or above UPC) on the UPC.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP6/UCH_V48_ALP6/UCH_V4C_ALP6/ UCH_V4D_ALP6/UCH_V4F_ALP6/UCH_V50_ALP6

87B-289

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

No main beam lights (lights without xenon bulb)

ALP 7

NOTES

87B

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check the bulbs. Are the bulbs in good condition?

NO

Replace the bulbs.

YES

Verify that there is no corrosion on the connector. Repair if necessary.

NO

Apply interpretation of status ET081 Lighting stalk position.

YES Check the + 12 V supply on track 4 of the headlights and earth on track 1. Is there a supply? NO Check status ET081 Lighting stalk position. Does the side light request occur on main beam? YES Run fault finding on the Protection and Switching Unit. Check the F8A and F8B fuses (Vdiag 44 UPC) and F6 and F7 fuses (Vdiag 48 or above UPC).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP7/UCH_V48_ALP7/UCH_V4C_ALP7/ UCH_V4D_ALP7/UCH_V4F_ALP7/UCH_V50_ALP7

87B-290

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 8

NOTES

87B

No front fog lights

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check status ET111 Front fog lights request with the stalk in the front fog lights position. Is status ET111 Present?

NO

Apply interpretation of ET111 Front fog light request.

NO

Apply interpretation of command AC008 Front fog lights.

YES Perform command AC008 Front fog lights. Do the front fog lights come on? YES Check the UCH connectors. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP8/UCH_V48_ALP8/UCH_V4C_ALP8/ UCH_V4D_ALP8/UCH_V4F_ALP8/UCH_V50_ALP8

87B-291

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 9

NOTES

87B

No rear screen wiper

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check status ET080 Rear screen wiper request with the stalk in the rear screen wiper position. Is status ET080 Present?

NO

Apply interpretation of status ET080 Rear screen wiper request.

NO

Perform fault finding on command AC007 Rear screen wiper.

YES Perform command AC007 Rear screen wiper. Check the power supply of the wiper motor: On track 2, for + 12 V. On track 3, for earth. Is the rear screen wiper working? YES Check the UCH connectors. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP9/UCH_V48_ALP9/UCH_V4C_ALP9/ UCH_V4D_ALP9/UCH_V4F_ALP9/UCH_V50_ALP9

87B-292

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 10

NOTES

No rear park position

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check status ET097 Rear screen wiper park position. Is status ET097 absent?

YES

Apply interpretation of status ET097 Rear screen wiper park position.

NO Contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

87B

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP10/UCH_V48_ALP10/UCH_V4C_ALP10/ UCH_V4D_ALP10/UCH_V4F_ALP10/UCH_V50_ALP10

87B-293

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 11

NOTES

No windscreen wiper park position

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check status ET077 Wiper stalk position park position request. Is status ET077 present?

NO

Apply interpretation of status ET077 Wiper stalk position.

YES Contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

87B

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP11/UCH_V48_ALP11/UCH_V4C_ALP11/ UCH_V4D_ALP11/UCH_V4F_ALP11/UCH_V50_ALP11

87B-294

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 12

NOTES

87B

No windscreen wiper

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check the condition of the windscreen wiper motor connections (with battery disconnected) and the UPC connections. Check the continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Windscreen wiper motor connector track 5

Track 1 of connector CN (Vdiag 48 or above) or 12-track brown connector PPH2 (Vdiag 44) of the UPC

Windscreen wiper motor connector track 4

Track 2 of connector CN (Vdiag 48 or above) or 12-track brown connector PPH2 (Vdiag 44) of the UPC

Windscreen wiper motor connector track 2

Track 6 of connector CN (Vdiag 48 or above) or 12-track brown connector PPH2 (Vdiag 44) of the UPC

Check for an earth on track 1 of the windscreen wiper motor connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP12/UCH_V48_ALP12/UCH_V4C_ALP12/ UCH_V4D_ALP12/UCH_V4F_ALP12/UCH_V50_ALP12

87B-295

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 13

NOTES

87B

No front and rear screen washer

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Windscreen washer Check status ET078 Front windscreen washer request by actuating the control stalk. Is status ET078 present?

NO

Apply interpretation of status ET078 Front windscreen washer request.

YES Check for + 12 V between tracks 2 and 1 of the washer fluid pump when it is in operation. Is there + 12 V?

NO

YES Check the hoses. If everything is OK: Replace the washer fluid pump. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between track 2 of the pump and track 1 of the steering wheel control on the 6-track black connector. Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between track 1 of the pump and track 2 of the steering wheel control on the 6-track black connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP13/UCH_V48_ALP13/UCH_V4C_ALP13/ UCH_V4D_ALP13/UCH_V4F_ALP13/UCH_V50_ALP13

87B-296

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 13 CONTINUED

NOTES

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Rear screen washer Check status ET079 Rear windscreen washer request by actuating the control stalk. Is status ET079 present?

NO

Apply interpretation of status ET079 Rear screen wiper request.

YES Check for + 12 V between tracks 2 and 1 of the washer fluid pump when it is in operation. Is there + 12 V?

NO

YES Check the hoses. If everything is OK: Replace the windscreen washer pump. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between track 2 of the pump and track 1 of the steering wheel control on the 6-track black connector. Check the continuity and insulation of the connection between track 1 of the pump and track 2 of the steering wheel control on the 6-track black connector. Repair if necessary.

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-297

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

No headlight washers (only if VDIAG 44 UPC)

ALP 14

NOTES

87B

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Place the stalk on side lights and check whether status ET081 Lighting stalk position is on Side lights.

NO

Apply interpretation of status ET081 Lighting stalk position.

NO

Apply interpretation of status ET078 Windscreen washer request.

NO

Apply interpretation of commands AC030 Headlight washer 1 relay and AC031 Headlight washer 2 relay.

YES Check whether status ET078 Front windscreen washer request is "Present" when the stalk is operated. YES Run commands AC030 Headlight washer 1 relay and AC031 Headlight washer 2 relay. Can commands AC030 and AC031 be run?

YES Check the condition of the pipes and nozzles. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP14/UCH_V48_ALP14/UCH_V4C_ALP14/ UCH_V4D_ALP14/UCH_V4F_ALP14/UCH_V50_ALP14

87B-298

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

Passenger window does not operate (driver and passenger electric window)

ALP 15

NOTES

87B

Use the Wiring Diagram Technical Note and a multimeter. Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. For vehicles with Mégane II phase 2 bodywork, see 87D Electric windows Sunroof, Fault finding chart.

Remove the passenger's window winder switch (see MR 364 (Mégane II) or MR 370 (Scenic II) Mechanical systems, 87D, Electric windows - Sunroof, Front window winder switch on passenger's door: Removal Refitting) and disconnect its connector. Check for + 12 V on tracks A1 and B2 of the passenger's electric window switch. Are the feeds correct? YES

NO

Shunt track A3 of the passenger's window winder switch connector with track A1 of the passenger's window winder switch connector and track B1 of the passenger's window winder switch connector with track A2 of the passenger's window winder switch connector to lower the window (to raise it, shunt track A3 of the passenger's window winder switch connector with track A2 and track B1 with track A1 of the passenger's window winder switch connector). Does the window move?

Remove the passenger's window winder switch (see MR 364 (Mégane II) or MR 370 (Scenic II) Mechanical systems, 87D, Electric windows Sunroof, Front window winder switch on passenger's door: Removal - Refitting). Shunt track 5 of the driver's window winder switch connector with tracks 2 and 3 of the driver's window winder switch connector. Check for + 12 V again on tracks A1 and B2 of the passenger's electric window switch. Are the feeds correct?

YES

NO YES

Replace the passenger's window winder switch (see MR 364 (Mégane II) or MR 370 (Scenic II) Mechanical systems, 87D, Electric windows - Sunroof, Front window winder switch on passenger's door: Removal Refitting).

AFTER REPAIR

Replace the driver's electric window switch (see MR 364 (Mégane II) or MR 370 (Scenic II) Mechanical systems, 87D, Electric windows Sunroof, Front electric window switch on driver's door: Removal - Refitting).

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP15/UCH_V48_ALP15/UCH_V4C_ALP15/ UCH_V4D_ALP15/UCH_V4F_ALP15/UCH_V50_ALP15

87B-299

NO

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 15 CONTINUED

Connect a voltmeter between track 1 and track 2 of the passenger window winder connector. Reconnect the window winder switch and activate it. Does the voltmeter display the correct supply? YES

Ensure continuity on the following connections: Driver's window lift switch connector track 3

Track A1 of the passenger's window winder switch connector

Passenger's window winder switch connector track 2

Track B1 of the passenger's window winder switch connector

NO

Replace the window riser motor (see MR 365 (Mégane) or MR 371 (Scenic) Bodywork, 51A, Side opening element mechanisms, Front side door electric window lift mechanism: Removal - Refitting).

Check the intermediate connectors if there is a continuity fault. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Ensure continuity on the following connections: Passenger's window winder switch connector track A3

Track 1 of the passenger's window winder switch connector

Passenger's window winder switch connector track 2

Track B1 of the passenger's window winder switch connector

Check the intermediate connectors if there is a continuity fault. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-300

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

Passenger window does not operate (driver's one touch electric window and passenger window)

ALP 16

NOTES

87B

Use the Wiring Diagram Technical Note and a multimeter. Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. For vehicles with Mégane II phase 2 bodywork, see 87D Electric windows Sunroof, Fault finding chart.

Remove the passenger's window winder switch (see MR 364 (Mégane II) or MR 370 (Scenic II) Mechanical systems, 87D, Electric windows - Sunroof, Front window winder switch on passenger's door: Removal Refitting) and disconnect its connector. Shunt track A1 of the passenger's window winder switch connector with track B2 to lower the window (tracks B1 and A2 for cabriolets) and to raise the window shunt track A2 of the passenger's window winder switch connector with track B2 (tracks A3 and A2 for cabriolets). Does the window move? YES

NO Check for an earth on track 3 of the passenger's window winder connector. Is the earth correct?

Replace the passenger's window winder switch (see MR 364 (Mégane II) or MR 370 (Scenic II) Mechanical systems, 87D, Electric windows Sunroof, Front window winder switch on passenger's door: Removal - Refitting).

NO

YES Connect a voltmeter between track 3 and track 4 of the passenger window winder connector. Does the voltmeter display the correct supply?

Check that the right-hand dashboard cross member earth is in good condition and correctly secured to the chassis. If the earth is not in good condition, clean and retighten the terminal. If the earth is faulty, replace the wiring.

NO Check the continuity on the following connection: Window winder motor connector track 4

Track 1M passenger compartment fuse and relay box grey connector

Check the intermediate connectors and the fuse if there is a continuity or supply fault. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP16/UCH_V48_ALP16/UCH_V4C_ALP16/ UCH_V4D_ALP16/UCH_V4F_ALP16/UCH_V50_ALP16

87B-301

YES

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 16 CONTINUED

Use the Wiring Diagram Technical Note and a multimeter. Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

NOTES

Ensure continuity on the following connections:

Using a multimeter, check for + 12 V between tracks 4 and 6 of the passenger window winder connector. Is the voltage approximately 12 V?

Electric window riser motor connector track 6 NO

YES Using a multimeter, check for + 12 V on track A2 of the passenger's window winder switch connector and track A1 of the passenger's window winder switch connector. Is the voltage approximately 12 V?

NO

YES Replace the window riser motor (see MR 365 (Mégane) or MR 371 (Scenic) Bodywork, 51A, Side opening element mechanisms, Front side door electric window lift mechanism: Removal - Refitting).

Check the intermediate connectors if there is a continuity fault. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Ensure continuity on the following connections: Window riser motor connector track 2

Track A2 of the window winder switch connector (A3 cabriolet)

Window riser motor connector track 1

Track A1 of the window winder switch connector (B1 cabriolet)

Is the continuity of the connections correct? YES

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Track 7 connector PE2 brown section of the UCH

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-302

NO

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

Passenger's window does not operate (driver's one touch electric window and passenger's electric window)

ALP 17

NOTES

87B

Use the Wiring Diagram Technical Note and a multimeter. Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. For vehicles with Mégane II phase 2 bodywork, see 87D Electric windows Sunroof, Fault finding chart.

Remove the passenger's window winder switch (see MR 364 (Mégane II) or MR 370 (Scenic II) Mechanical systems, 87D, Electric windows - Sunroof, Front window winder switch on passenger's door: Removal Refitting) and disconnect its connector. Check for + 12 V on track B2 of passenger's window winder switch connector and for + 12 V on track A1. Are the feeds correct? YES

NO

Shunt track B1 of the passenger's electric window switch connector with track A2 and shunt track A3 with track A1 to lower the window (shunt track A3 of the passenger's electric window switch with track A2 and track B1 with track B2 to raise the window). Does the window move?

Remove the passenger's window winder switch (see MR 364 (Mégane II) or MR 370 (Scenic II) Mechanical systems, 87D, Electric windows Sunroof, Front window winder switch on passenger's door: Removal - Refitting) and disconnect its connector. Check for + 12 V on track 2 of the white connector of the driver's window lift switch. Is the feed correct?

YES

NO

YES

Replace the passenger's window winder switch (see MR 364 (Mégane II) or MR 370 (Scenic II) Mechanical systems, 87D, Electric windows - Sunroof, Front window winder switch on passenger's door: Removal Refitting).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP17/UCH_V48_ALP17/UCH_V4C_ALP17/ UCH_V4D_ALP17/UCH_V4F_ALP17/UCH_V50_ALP17

87B-303

NO

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 17 CONTINUED 1

Connect a voltmeter between tracks 1 and 2 of the passenger window winder connector. Reconnect the window winder switch and activate it; is the supply correct?

NO

YES Replace the window riser motor (see MR 365 (Mégane) or MR 371 (Scenic) Bodywork, 51A, Side opening element mechanisms, Front side door electric window lift mechanism: Removal - Refitting).

YES Replace the driver's electric window switch (see MR 364 (Mégane II) or MR 370 (Scenic II) Mechanical systems, 87D, Electric windows Sunroof, Front electric window switch on driver's door: Removal - Refitting).

Ensure continuity on the following connections: Window riser motor connector track 1

Track A3 of the passenger's window winder connector

Window riser motor connector track 2

Track B1 of the passenger's window winder connector

Shunt track 2 of the driver's side electric window switch white connector with track 1 of the driver's side electric window switch white connector and track 3 of the driver's side electric window switch black connector. Check again for + 12 V on track B2 of the passenger's window winder switch connector and for + 12 V on track A1. Are the feeds correct?

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-304

NO

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 17 CONTINUED 2

Check the continuity n the following connection:

Ensure continuity on the following connections:

Driver's window lift switch connector track 2

Driver's window lift switch white connector track 1

Track B2 of the passenger's window winder switch connector

Driver's window lift switch white connector track 3

Track A1 of the passenger's window winder switch connector

Track 5A of the passenger compartment connection unit connector

If there is poor continuity, check the intermediate connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

AFTER REPAIR

If one of the continuity's is poor, check the intermediate connectors. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-305

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

Driver window does not operate (driver and passenger electric windows)

ALP 18

NOTES

87B

Use the Wiring Diagram Technical Note and a multimeter. Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. For vehicles with Mégane II phase 2 bodywork, see 87D Electric windows Sunroof, Fault finding chart.

Remove the driver's window winder switch (see MR 364 (Mégane II) or MR 370 (Scenic) Mechanical systems, 87D, Electric windows - Sunroof, Front window winder switch on driver's door: Removal - Refitting) and disconnect its connector. Check for + 12 V on track 5 of the white connector of the driver's electric window switch. Is the feed correct? YES

NO

Shunt track 5 of the driver's side electric window switch white connector with track 5 of the driver's side electric window switch black connector and shunt track 4 of the driver's side electric window switch white connector with track 4 of the driver's side electric window switch black connector to lower the window (to raise the window shunt track 5 of the driver's side switch white connector with track 4 of the driver's side electric window switch white connector and shunt track 5 of the driver's side electric window switch black connector with track 4 of the driver's side electric window switch black connector. Does the window move?

Check that the left-hand dashboard cross member earth is in good condition and correctly secured to the chassis. If the earth is not in good condition, clean and retighten the terminal. If the earth is faulty, replace the wiring.

NO

A

YES Replace the driver's electric window switch. (see MR 364 (Mégane II) or MR 370 (Scenic II) Mechanical systems, 87D, Electric windows Sunroof, Front electric window switch on driver's door: Removal - Refitting).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP18/UCH_V48_ALP18/UCH_V4C_ALP18/ UCH_V4D_ALP18/UCH_V4F_ALP18/UCH_V50_ALP18

87B-306

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 18 CONTINUED

Connect a voltmeter between tracks 1 and 2 of the driver's window winder connector. Reconnect the window winder switch and activate it; is the supply correct? YES

NO

Replace the window riser motor (see MR 365 (Mégane) or MR 371 (Scenic) Bodywork, 51A, Side opening element mechanisms, Front side door electric window lift mechanism: Removal Refitting).

Ensure continuity on the following connections: Window riser motor connector track 1

Track 5 of the driver's window lift switch black connector

Window riser motor connector track 2

Track 4 of the driver's window lift switch white connector

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-307

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

Driver's window does not operate (driver's one touch electric window and passenger window)

ALP 19

NOTES

87B

Use the Wiring Diagram Technical Note and a multimeter. Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. For vehicles with Mégane II phase 2 bodywork, see 87D Electric windows Sunroof, Fault finding chart.

Remove the driver's window winder switch (see MR 364 (Mégane II) or MR 370 (Scenic II) Mechanical systems, 87D, Electric windows - Sunroof, Front window winder switch on driver's door: Removal - Refitting) and disconnect its connector. Shunt track 4 of the driver's side window winder switch white connector with track 4 of the driver's side window winder switch black connector to lower the window (to raise the window, shunt track 5 of the driver's side window winder black connector with track 4 of the driver's side window winder switch black connector. Does the window move? YES

NO Check for earth on track 4 of the black connector of the driver's window lift switch. Is the earth correct?

Replace the driver's electric window switch (see MR 364 (Mégane II) or MR 370 (Scenic II) Mechanical systems, 87D, Electric windows Sunroof, Front electric window switch on driver's door: Removal - Refitting).

YES

Check for earth on track 3 of the black connector of the driver's window winder. Is the earth correct?

NO

YES

AFTER REPAIR

Check that the left-hand dashboard cross member earth is in good condition and correctly secured to the chassis. If the earth is not in good condition, clean and retighten the terminal. If the earth is faulty, replace the wiring.

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP19/UCH_V48_ALP19/UCH_V4C_ALP19/ UCH_V4D_ALP19/UCH_V4F_ALP19/UCH_V50_ALP19

87B-308

NO

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 19 CONTINUED 1

Check the continuity on the following connection: Window riser motor connector track 4 Check for + 12 V on track 4 of the driver's window lift motor black connector. Is the feed correct?

NO

If the continuity is faulty, check the intermediate connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

YES Check for + 12 V on track 4 of the white connector of the driver's window lift switch and on track 5 of the black connector of the driver's window lift switch. Is the feed correct? Is the feed correct?

Track 1L of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box

NO

B

YES Check for + 12 V between track 6 and track 4 of the driver's window winder connector. Is the feed correct?

NO

Check the continuity on the following connection: Driver's window winder connector track 6

YES Replace the window riser motor (see MR 365 (Mégane) or MR 371 (Scenic) Bodywork, 51A, Side opening element mechanisms, Front side door electric window lift mechanism: Removal Refitting).

AFTER REPAIR

In the event of a continuity fault, check the intermediate connector. If there is a repair procedure (See Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring, otherwise replace it.

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-309

Track 7 of the brown section of connector PE2 of the UCH

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 19 CONTINUED 2

Ensure continuity on the following connections: Driver's window lift switch white connector track 4

Track 1 of the driver's window winder

Driver's window lift switch black connector track 5

Track 2 of the driver's window winder

NO

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Is the continuity good?

If there is a repair procedure (See Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring, otherwise replace it. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

YES Replace the window riser motor (see MR 365 (Mégane) or MR 371 (Scenic) Bodywork, 51A, Side opening element mechanisms, Front side door electric window lift mechanism: Removal Refitting).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-310

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

Driver's window does not operate (driver's one touch electric window and passenger's electric window)

ALP 20

NOTES

87B

Use the Wiring Diagram Technical Note and a multimeter. Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. For vehicles with Mégane II phase 2 bodywork, see 87D Electric windows Sunroof, Fault finding chart.

Remove the driver's window winder switch (see MR 364 (Mégane II) or MR 370 (Scenic II) Mechanical systems, 87D, Electric windows - Sunroof, Front window winder switch on driver's door: Removal - Refitting) and disconnect its connector. Shunt track 4 of the driver's side window winder switch white connector with track 4 of the driver's side window winder switch black connector to lower the window (to raise the window, shunt track 5 of the driver's side window winder black connector with track 4 of the driver's side window winder switch black connector. Does the window move? YES

NO

Replace the driver's electric window switch (see MR 364 (Mégane II) or MR 370 (Scenic II) Mechanical systems, 87D, Electric windows Sunroof, Front electric window switch on driver's door: Removal - Refitting).

Check for earth on track 4 of the black connector of the driver's window lift switch. Is the earth correct? YES

Check for earth on track 3 of the black connector of the driver's window winder. Is the earth correct?

NO

YES

AFTER REPAIR

Check that the left-hand dashboard cross member earth is in good condition and correctly secured to the chassis. If the earth is not in good condition, clean and retighten the terminal. If the earth is faulty, replace the wiring.

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP20/UCH_V48_ALP20/UCH_V4C_ALP20/ UCH_V4D_ALP20/UCH_V4F_ALP20/UCH_V50_ALP20

87B-311

NO

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 20 CONTINUED 1

Check the continuity on the following connection: Window riser motor connector track 4 Check for + 12 V on track 4 of the driver's window lift motor black connector. Is the feed correct?

NO

If the continuity is faulty, check the intermediate connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

YES Check for + 12 V on track 4 of the white connector of the driver's window lift switch and on track 5 of the black connector of the driver's window lift switch. Is the feed correct?

Track 1L of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box

NO

B

YES Check for + 12 V between track 6 and track 4 of the driver's window winder connector. Is the feed correct?

NO

Check the continuity on the following connection: Driver's window winder connector track 6

YES Replace the window riser motor (see MR 365 (Mégane) or MR 371 (Scenic) Bodywork, 51A, Side opening element mechanisms, Front side door electric window lift mechanism: Removal Refitting).

AFTER REPAIR

In the event of a continuity fault, check the intermediate connector. If there is a repair procedure (See Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring, otherwise replace it.

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-312

Track 7 of the brown section of connector PE2 of the UCH

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 20 CONTINUED 2

Ensure continuity on the following connections: Driver's window lift switch white connector track 4

Track 1 of the driver's window winder

Driver's window lift switch black connector track 5

Track 2 of the driver's window winder

NO

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Is the continuity good?

If there is a repair procedure (See Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring, otherwise replace it. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

YES Replace the window riser motor (see MR 365 (Mégane) or MR 371 (Scenic) Bodywork, 51A, Side opening element mechanisms, Front side door electric window lift mechanism: Removal Refitting).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-313

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

Rear left-hand window does not operate (rear one-touch electric windows)

ALP 21

Use the Wiring Diagram Technical Note and a multimeter. Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. For vehicles with Mégane II phase 2 bodywork, see 87D Electric windows Sunroof, Fault finding chart.

NOTES

Remove the rear left-hand window winder switch (see MR 364 (Mégane) or MR 370 (Scenic) Mechanical systems, 87D, Electric windows - Sunroof, Rear window winder switch: Removal - Refitting) and disconnect its connector. Shunt tracks A2 and B2 (A3 and A2 for cabriolets) on the rear left-hand window winder switch connector to lower the window (to raise it shunt tracks A1 and A2 (B1 and A2 for cabriolets) on the rear left-hand window winder switch connector). Does the window move? NO

YES

Remove the rear left-hand door trim (see MR 365 (Mégane) or MR 371 (Scenic) Bodywork, 72A, Side opening trims, Rear side door trim: Removal - Refitting) and disconnect the connectors from the LH rear window winder and from the LH rear window winder switch. Ensure continuity on the following connections:

Replace the rear left-hand window winder switch (see MR 364 (Mégane) or MR 370 (Scenic) Mechanical systems, 87D, Electric windows - Sunroof, Rear window winder switch on rear door: Removal - Refitting).

Window riser motor connector track 2 (track 1 for cabriolet)

Track A1 (track B1 for cabriolet) of the rear left-hand window winder connector

Window riser motor connector track 1 (track 2 for cabriolet)

Track B2 (track A3 for cabriolet) of the driver's window lift white connector YES

Is the continuity good?

AFTER REPAIR

NO

If there is a repair procedure (See Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring, otherwise replace it.

A

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP21/UCH_V48_ALP21/UCH_V4C_ALP21/ UCH_V4D_ALP21/UCH_V4F_ALP21/UCH_V50_ALP21

87B-314

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 21 CONTINUED 1

Check for + 12 V between tracks 4 and 3 of the rear left-hand window winder switch connector. Is the feed correct? YES

NO

Check the continuity on the following connection: Window riser motor connector track 6

Check for + 12 V between track 4 of the rear left-hand window winder switch connector and the chassis earth. Is the feed correct?

Track 7 of connector PE2 of the UCH

If the continuity is faulty, check the intermediate connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

NO

Check that the rear left-hand end panel earth is in good condition and correctly secured to the chassis. If the earth is not in good condition, clean and retighten the terminal. If the earth is faulty, replace the wiring.

B

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-315

YES

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 21 CONTINUED 2

Check the continuity on the following connection: Window riser motor connector track 6

Track 20 of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box grey connector

If the continuity is faulty, check the intermediate connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the continuity is correct, check the rear window riser motor 40A fuse. If the fuse is in good condition and the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-316

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

Rear right-hand window does not operate (rear one-touch electric windows)

ALP 22

Use the Wiring Diagram Technical Note and a multimeter. Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. For vehicles with Mégane II phase 2 bodywork, see 87D Electric windows Sunroof, Fault finding chart.

NOTES

Remove the rear right-hand window winder switch (see MR 364 (Mégane) or MR 370 (Scenic) Mechanical systems, 87D, Electric windows - Sunroof, Rear window winder switch: Removal - Refitting) and disconnect its connector. Shunt tracks A2 and B2 (A3 and A2 for cabriolets) on the rear right-hand window winder switch connector to lower the window (to raise it shunt tracks A1 and A2 (B1 and A2 for cabriolets) on the rear left-hand window winder switch connector). Does the window move? NO

YES

Remove the rear right-hand door trim (see MR 365 (Mégane) or MR 371 (Scenic) Bodywork, 72A, Side opening trims, Rear side door trim: Removal - Refitting) and disconnect the connectors from the RH rear window winder and from the RH rear window winder switch. Ensure continuity on the following connections:

Replace the rear left-hand window winder switch (see MR 364 (Mégane) or MR 370 (Scenic) Mechanical systems, 87D, Electric windows - Sunroof, Rear window winder switch on rear door: Removal - Refitting).

Window riser motor connector track 2 (track 1 for cabriolet)

Track A1 (track B1 for cabriolet) of the rear left-hand window winder switch connector

Window riser motor connector track 1 (track 2 for cabriolet)

Track B2 (track A3 for cabriolet) of the driver's window lift white connector YES

Is the continuity good?

AFTER REPAIR

NO

If there is a repair procedure (See Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the wiring, otherwise replace it.

A

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP22/UCH_V48_ALP22/UCH_V4C_ALP22/ UCH_V4D_ALP22/UCH_V4F_ALP22/UCH_V50_ALP22

87B-317

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 22 CONTINUED 1

NOTES

Use the Wiring Diagram Technical Note and a multimeter. Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check for + 12 V between tracks 4 and 3 of the rear right-hand window winder switch connector. Is the feed correct? YES

NO Check for + 12 V between tracks 4 of the rear right-hand window winder switch connector and the chassis earth. Is the feed correct?

Check the continuity on the following connection: Window riser motor connector track 6

Track 7 of connector PE2 of the UCH

If the continuity is faulty, check the intermediate connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

NO

Check that the rear right-hand end panel earth is in good condition and correctly secured to the chassis. If the earth is not in good condition, clean and retighten the terminal. If the earth is faulty, replace the wiring.

B

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-318

YES

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 22 CONTINUED 2

Check the continuity on the following connection: Window riser motor connector track 6

Track 20 of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box grey connector

If the continuity is faulty, check the intermediate connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the continuity is correct, check the rear window riser motor 40A fuse. If the fuse is in good condition and the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-319

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

No windows operate (driver and passenger electric windows)

ALP 23

NOTES

87B

Use the Wiring Diagram Technical Note and a multimeter. Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. For vehicles withMégane II phase 2 bodywork, see 87D Electric windows Sunroof, Fault finding chart.

Remove the driver's window winder switch (see MR 364 (Mégane) or MR 370 (Scenic) Mechanical systems, 87D, Electric windows - Sunroof, Front window winder switch on driver's door: Removal - Refitting) and disconnect its connector. Check for + 12 V between track 5 of the driver's window riser switch white connector and track 4 of the driver's window riser black connector. Is the feed correct? YES

NO

Replace the driver's electric window switch (see MR 364 (Mégane) or MR 370 (Scenic) Mechanical systems, 87D, Electric windows - Sunroof, Front electric window switch on driver's door: Removal - Refitting).

Check for + 12 V between track 5 of the driver's window riser switch white connector and the chassis earth. Is the feed correct? YES

NO

Check the continuity on the following connection: Check that the left-hand dashboard cross member earth is in good condition and secured correctly. If the earth is not in good condition, clean and retighten the terminal. If the earth is faulty, replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

Window riser motor connector track 6

Track 5 of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box grey connector

If the continuity is faulty, check the intermediate connector. If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP23/UCH_V48_ALP23/UCH_V4C_ALP23/ UCH_V4D_ALP23/UCH_V4F_ALP23/UCH_V50_ALP23

87B-320

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 24

NOTES

87B

NO SUNROOF OPENING AND CLOSING

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. For vehicles with Mégane II phase 2 bodywork, see MR 366, Fault finding, 87D Electric windows - Sunroof, Fault finding chart.

Carry out UCH configuration reading and check that command LC070 (ONE-TOUCH ELECTRIC WINDOWS/SUNROOF) is configured WITH. Is command LC070 configured WITH?

NO

Modify the configuration (see Configurations and programming).

NO

Check for + 12 V on track 7 of the sunroof black connector. Is the feed correct?

YES Move the sunroof control to the Closed position and press and hold the central part of the control. After pressing the central part of the control for approximately 10 seconds, does the roof move smoothly?

YES

NO

YES Check the continuity on the following connection: See ALP 26.

Track 2E of the passenger compartment fuse and relay box grey connector Left-hand dashboard/cross member earth

A

Track 7 of the sunroof black connector

Track 10 of the sunroof black connector

If one of the continuities is faulty, check the intermediate connector. If a connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP24/UCH_V48_ALP24/UCH_V4C_ALP24/ UCH_V4D_ALP24/UCH_V4F_ALP24/UCH_V50_ALP24

87B-321

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 24 CONTINUED 1

Use the diagnostic tool to read the faults in the UCH. Is fault DF031 One touch window connection present? YES

NO

Check the continuity, insulation and the absence of the interference resistance to + 12 V and to earth of the following connection: UCH black connector PE2 track 7

Track 9 of the sunroof black connector

If the continuity is faulty, check the intermediate connectors. If one of the connectors is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-322

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 24 CONTINUED 2

Disconnect the connector from the sunroof switch (see MR 364 Mechanical, 87D Electric windows sunroof, sunroof switch: Removal - Refitting). Check the resistance between track 1 of the connector and the chassis earth. Is the value shown less than 30 Ohms?

YES

Using the multimeter and table (ALP 24 CONTINUED 6), check the conformity and correct operation of the sunroof switch.

NO

If the connector is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring.

NO Disconnect the sunroof motor connector (see MR Mechanical, 87D Electric windows - sunroof, Sunroof motor: Removal - Refitting). Check the continuity on the following connection: Sunroof switch connector track 1

Track 1 of the sunroof motor black connector

If the continuity is faulty, check the intermediate connector. Is the connection correct? YES

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-323

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 24 CONTINUED 3

Disconnect the black connector from the sunroof motor. Using a multimeter, check for + 12 V between tracks 7 and 10 of the sunroof motor connector. Is the feed correct? YES

NO

Replace the sunroof motor (see 87D Electric windows - sunroof: Removal Refitting). Using the wiring diagram which corresponds to the vehicle, check the conformity of union R301. Disconnect the sunroof motor connector (see MR Mechanical systems, 87D Electric windows-sunroof, Sunroof motor: Removal - Refitting) and disconnect union R301. Ensure continuity on the following connections: Sunroof switch black connector track 10

Track 10 black section of union R301

Sunroof switch black connector track 7

Track 21 black section of union R301

If the continuity is faulty, check the intermediate connector R339. If one of the connectors is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. After repairing the condition of the wiring, initialise the sunroof (see MR fault finding 87D, Electric sunroof: Initialisation). If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-324

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 24 CONTINUED 4

Is the control correct?

NO

Replace the control (see MR Mechanical systems, 87D Electric windows sunroof, Sunroof switch: Removal Refitting).

YES Disconnect the sunroof motor connector (see MR Mechanical, 87D Electric windows - sunroof, Sunroof motor: Removal - Refitting). Check for + 12 V between tracks 7 and 10 of the sunroof motor connector. Is the feed correct? YES

NO Using the wiring diagram which corresponds to the vehicle, check the conformity of union R301. Disconnect the sunroof motor connector (see MR Mechanical systems, 87D Electric windows-sunroof, Sunroof motor: Removal - Refitting) and disconnect union R301. Ensure continuity on the following connections: Sunroof switch black connector track 10

Track 10 black section of union R301

Sunroof switch black connector track 7

Track 21 black section of union R301

If the continuity is faulty, check the intermediate connector R339. If one of the connectors is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. After repairing the condition of the wiring, initialise the sunroof (see MR fault finding 87D, Electric sunroof: Initialisation). If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-325

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 24 CONTINUED 5

Check using status ET087 Sunroof/one touch window authorisation that authorisation for the UCH to open the sunroof is ACTIVE. Disconnect the sunroof motor connector (see MR Mechanical, 87D Electric windows - sunroof, Sunroof motor: Removal - Refitting). Check for + 12 V between tracks 7 and 9 of the sunroof motor connector. Is the feed correct? YES

NO Disconnect the sunroof motor connector (see MR Mechanical systems, 87D Electric windows-sunroof, Sunroof motor: Removal - Refitting) and disconnect union R301. Ensure continuity on the following connections: Sunroof switch black connector track 9

Track 7 of connector PE2 of the UCH

If the continuity is faulty, use the wiring diagram corresponding to the vehicle to check intermediate connectors R339 and R301. If one of the connectors is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. After repairing the condition of the wiring, initialise the sunroof (see MR fault finding 87D, Electric sunroof: Initialisation). If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-326

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 24 CONTINUED 6

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Sunroof switch black connector track 3

Track 4 of the sunroof motor black connector

Sunroof switch black connector track 2

Track 3 of the sunroof motor black connector

Sunroof switch black connector track 5

Track 2 of the sunroof motor black connector

If the continuity is faulty, use the wiring diagram corresponding to the vehicle to check the conformity of intermediate connector R339. If one of the connectors is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. After repairing the wiring, initialise the sunroof (see MR fault finding 87D, Electric sunroof: Initialisation). If the continuity and insulation of the following connections is correct, replace the sunroof motor (see 87D Electric window-sunroof: Removal - Refitting).

Control position

Tracks 1 and 2

Tracks 1 and 3

Tracks 1 and 5

Closed

100 Ω Max.

100 Ω Max.

infinite

Tilt position

infinite

100 Ω Max.

infinite

Sliding position 1

infinite

100 Ω Max.

100 Ω Max.

Sliding position 2

infinite

infinite

100 Ω Max.

Sliding position 3

100 Ω Max.

infinite

100 Ω Max.

Pressed

100 Ω Max.

100 Ω Max.

100 Ω Max.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-327

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 25

NOTES

87B

No sunroof opening position 1, 2 or 3

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. For vehicles the Mégane II phase 2 bodywork, see 87D Electric windows Sunroof, Fault finding chart.

Does the sunroof operate in at least one of the control positions?

NO

See ALP 24.

YES Disconnect the sunroof switch and check its conformity and correct operation using a multimeter and the table below.

Control position

Tracks 1 and 2

Tracks 1 and 3

Tracks 1 and 5

Closed

100 Ω Max.

100 Ω Max.

infinite

Tilt position

infinite

100 Ω Max.

infinite

Sliding position 1

infinite

100 Ω Max.

100 Ω Max.

Sliding position 2

infinite

infinite

100 Ω Max.

Sliding position 3

100 Ω Max.

infinite

100 Ω Max.

Pressed

100 Ω Max.

100 Ω Max.

100 Ω Max.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP25/UCH_V48_ALP25/UCH_V4C_ALP25/ UCH_V4D_ALP25/UCH_V4F_ALP25/UCH_V50_ALP25

87B-328

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 25 CONTINUED

Is the control correct?

NO

Replace the control. (see MR Mechanical systems, 87D Electric windows sunroof, Sunroof switch: Removal Refitting).

YES Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Sunroof switch black connector track 3

Track 4 of the sunroof motor black connector

Sunroof switch black connector track 2

Track 3 of the sunroof motor black connector

Sunroof switch black connector track 5

Track 2 of the sunroof motor black connector

If the continuity is faulty, use the wiring diagram corresponding to the vehicle to check the conformity of intermediate connector R339. If one of the connectors is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. After repairing the condition of the wiring, initialise the sunroof (see MR fault finding 87D, Electric sunroof: Initialisation). If the continuity and insulation of the following connections is correct, replace the sunroof motor (see 87D Electric window-sunroof: Removal - Refitting).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-329

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

The sunroof is difficult to close or the anti-pinch is triggered without any apparent obstacles

ALP 26

NOTES

87B

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. For vehicles with Mégane II phase 2 bodywork, see MR 366, Fault finding, 87D Electric windows - Sunroof, Fault finding chart.

Initialise the sunroof (see MR fault finding 87D Electric sunroof: Initialisation). Has the fault been solved?

YES

End of fault finding.

YES

Replace the sunroof motor (see 87D Electric windows - sunroof: Removal Refitting).

YES

Clean the mechanism and the rails with an air gun. Refit the sunroof mobile panel (see MR 365 Bodywork, 52A, Non-side opening element mechanisms, Moving sunroof panel: Removal - Refitting). Initialise the sunroof (see MR fault finding 87D Electric sunroof: Initialisation).

NO Open the sunroof fully (if not possible, see Defect mode and safe mode). Remove the sunroof motor (see MR 364 Mechanical, 87D Electric windowssunroof, Sunroof motor: Removal - Refitting). Slide the moving panel of the sunroof manually. Does the moving panel slide without meeting a point of resistance? NO Remove the moving sunroof panel (see MR Bodywork, 52A, Non-side opening element mechanisms, Mobile sunroof panel: Removal Refitting). Visually check that no foreign bodies (sand, leaves, etc.) are present in the rails. Are there any foreign bodies in the rails? NO

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP26/UCH_V48_ALP26/UCH_V4C_ALP26/ UCH_V4D_ALP26/UCH_V4F_ALP26/UCH_V50_ALP26

87B-330

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 26 CONTINUED

Manually check that all of the linkages (front and rear) slide correctly. Lubricate the rails, linkages and mechanisms (see MR 365 Bodywork, 52A, Non-side opening element mechanisms, Mobile sunroof panel: Removal - Refitting). Refit the moving sunroof panel. Initialise the sunroof (see Electric sunroof: Initialisation). Is the fault still present?

NO

End of fault finding.

NO

Replace the sunroof (see MR Bodywork, Non-side opening element mechanisms, Sunroof: Removal Refitting).

NO

Replace the sunroof deflector (see MR 365 Bodywork, 52A Non-side opening element mechanisms, Sunroof deflector: Removal - Refitting). Initialise the sunroof (see MR fault finding 87D Electric sunroof: Initialisation).

YES Is the anti-pinch triggered when the sunroof reaches the deflector? YES Remove the sunroof deflector (see MR Bodywork, 52A Non-side opening element mechanisms, Sunroof deflector: Removal - Refitting). Initialise the sunroof (see Electric sunroof: Initialisation). Does the anti-pinch still trigger? YES Replace the sunroof (see MR Bodywork, Non-side opening element mechanisms, Sunroof: Removal - Refitting).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-331

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 27

Fault locking/unlocking tailgate via card button.

NOTES

Check that there is no after ignition feed or card in the card reader. Check that no opening element is detected as open by the UCH (look at the symbol on the instrument panel). First carry out a function fault finding check. Test with the other card. Check the condition of the battery (inserted the wrong way round, flat, incorrect model).

If the fault is still present after having carried out a test with the other card: – There may be radiofrequency interference in the area (ET066 Card button press received is NO for both cards). Move the vehicle to try again. – The UCH which has just been replaced does not have the correct part number (external or internal UCH aerial). Use the correct UCH part number. – If the vehicle is a Scenic II fitted with a tyre pressure monitoring system, check that the external UCH aerial is connected correctly. – Check that the UCH for the vehicle is not blank. Check that the UCH on the vehicle has not been used on another vehicle. Check that statuses ET066 Card button press received and ET067 Card button press recognised are YES after pressing the card's lock or unlock button. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for those statuses. Check that statuses ET066 Card button press received and ET067 Card button press recognised are YES after pressing the card's lock or unlock button. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for those statuses. Check that status ET014 Supply level requested is not APC. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for this status. Check that statuses ET041 Opening rear screen, ET042 Passenger's door, ET050 Tailgate/Boot, ET051 Rear left-hand door, ET052 Rear left-hand door and ET053 Driver's door are CLOSED. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for those statuses. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP27/UCH_V48_ALP27/UCH_V4C_ALP27/ UCH_V4D_ALP27/UCH_V4F_ALP27/UCH_V50_ALP27

87B-332

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 28

NOTES

87B

Fault locking/unlocking tailgate via card button

Check that there is no after ignition feed or card in the card reader. First carry out a function fault finding check. Test with the other card. Check the condition of the batteries.

Check if the direction indicator lights flash once on unlocking and twice on locking. NO

YES

Check that statuses ET066 Card button press received and ET067 Card button press recognised are YES after pressing the card's lock or unlock button. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for those statuses. Check that the tailgate is not detected as OPEN using status ET050 Tailgate/Boot. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for this status.

Check that the tailgate is not detected as OPEN using status ET050 Tailgate/Boot. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for this status.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP28/UCH_V48_ALP28/UCH_V4C_ALP28/ UCH_V4D_ALP28/UCH_V4F_ALP28/UCH_V50_ALP28

87B-333

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

Opening luggage compartment fault (not hands-free)

ALP 29

NOTES

87B

First carry out a function fault finding check. The vehicle or luggage compartment must be unlocked.

Check that status ET061 Open tailgate request becomes PRESENT after pressing the tailgate opening button. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for this status. Check that the tailgate is not detected as OPEN using status ET050 Tailgate/Boot. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for this status. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP29/UCH_V48_ALP29/UCH_V4C_ALP29/ UCH_V4D_ALP29/UCH_V4F_ALP29/UCH_V50_ALP29

87B-334

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

Opening rear screen fault (not hands-free)

ALP 30

NOTES

87B

First carry out a function fault finding check. The vehicle or luggage compartment must be unlocked.

Check that status ET062 Open rear screen request becomes PRESENT when the rear screen opening button is pressed. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for this status. Check that the tailgate is not detected as OPEN using status ET041 Opening rear screen. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for this status. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP30/UCH_V48_ALP30/UCH_V4C_ALP30/ UCH_V4D_ALP30/UCH_V4F_ALP30/UCH_V50_ALP30

87B-335

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 31

NOTES

87B

Fault locking/unlocking fuel filler flap

First carry out a function fault finding check. The locking/unlocking should function on the driver's door.

With the flap open, try locking and unlocking to make sure the lock bolt slides properly. If correct, make sure the flap is properly positioned in relation to the motion of the lock bolt. Check the condition and connection of the fuel filler flap lock connector. Check for earth on both tracks of the flap lock connector. Check while: Locking, earth present on track 3 and + 12 V on track 1 of the flap lock connector. Unlocking, earth present on track 1 and + 12 V on track 3 of the flap lock connector. If correct, replace the fuel filler flap lock. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: UCH connector PP2 track 6

Track 1 of the fuel filler flap lock connector

UCH connector PP2 track 5

Track 3 of the fuel filler flap lock connector

If one of the connectors is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP31/UCH_V48_ALP31/UCH_V4C_ALP31/ UCH_V4D_ALP31/UCH_V4F_ALP31/UCH_V50_ALP31

87B-336

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 32

NOTES

87B

Unlocking fault in hands-free mode

Check that there is no after ignition feed. Tests must be conducted with the other cards allocated to the vehicle. First carry out a function fault finding check. Carry out a conformity check before using this procedure.

The card may be inhibited: unlock the vehicle by pressing the card button and check to see if the hands-free unlocking fault is still present. If the fault only affects one card, replace the faulty card. If the unlocking fault in hands-free mode affects all the cards: Check that the optical sensors are receiving power by checking status ET054 Optical sensors supplied. Unless the vehicle has not been unlocked for over 72 hours, pulling the handle activates it. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for this status. Check that statuses ET055, ET056 or ET057 become active when a hand is passed in front of the corresponding sensor. Test on all the doors. If any status fails to change, apply the fault finding procedure associated with that status. Note: One of these statuses becomes active if the vehicle has not been unlocked for 72 hours and the corresponding door handle is pulled. Make sure that the cards belong to the vehicle and are properly configured by running command SC005 Check card. If the cards belong to the vehicle but have a faulty configuration, program the cards.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP32/UCH_V48_ALP32/UCH_V4C_ALP32/ UCH_V4D_ALP32/UCH_V4F_ALP32/UCH_V50_ALP32

87B-337

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 32 CONTINUED

Run command AC037 Transmitter aerial fault finding and see if a fault appears. In the event of a present or stored fault, refer to the procedure for it. Run the following commands and check the card coverage zone on each side of the vehicle: AC032 Driver's side external aerial test AC033 Passenger's side external aerial test The card reader starts to flash as soon as a card is detected in the coverage zone. The maximum distance from the vehicle is 1.5 m. If not correct, apply the fault finding procedure associated with each command. IMPORTANT This mode allows detection of the presence of a Mégane hands-free type card, but not its recognition. Check that no lock button on the door handle is stuck in the pressed position. By checking statuses ET058 Driver's side handle lock buttons and ET059 Passenger side handle lock buttons. Configure the UCH in hands-free function (see Configurations and programming). If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-338

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 33

Locking fault in hands-free mode

NOTES

Check that there is no after ignition feed or card in the card reader. Conduct the tests with the other cards allocated to the vehicle. First carry out a function fault finding check. Make sure all the doors are fully closed (check that the interior lights are off or switch on the ignition to check that no door is open from the instrument panel symbol). Visually check that the lock buttons are not stuck in the down position. Check that one of the cards has not been disabled (locked in the vehicle), activate the + after ignition feed with this card and attempt to unlock again with it.

If the fault only affects one card, replace the faulty card. Make sure statuses ET058, ET059 and ET060 indicating a press on the lock button for each door or the luggage compartment become active when the button is pressed. Test all the lock buttons. See the section for dealing with the status(es) concerned. Make sure that the cards belong to the vehicle and are properly configured by running command SC005 Check card. If the cards belong to the vehicle but have a faulty configuration, program the cards. Run command AC037 Transmitter aerial fault finding and see if a fault appears. In the event of a present or stored fault, refer to the procedure for it. Run the following commands and check the card coverage zone on each side of the vehicle: AC032 Driver's side external aerial test AC033 Passenger's side external aerial test AC034 Luggage compartment external aerial test. The card reader starts to flash as soon as a card is detected in the coverage zone. The maximum distance from the vehicle is 1.5 m. If not correct, apply the fault finding procedure associated with each command. This mode allows the presence of a Mégane hands-free type card to be detected, but not recognised. Configure the UCH in hands-free function (see Configurations and programming). If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP33/UCH_V48_ALP33/UCH_V4C_ALP33/ UCH_V4D_ALP33/UCH_V4F_ALP33/UCH_V50_ALP33

87B-339

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

ALP 34

NOTES

Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

Fault opening the luggage compartment in hands-free mode

First carry out a function fault finding check. Vehicle locked. Test with the other card.

Check that status ET061 Open tailgate request becomes PRESENT after pressing the tailgate opening button. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for this status. When the tailgate unlocking button is pressed, if the card is present and recognised, the direction indicator lights should flash to indicate that the tailgate is being unlocked. NO

YES Check the condition and connection of the tailgate lock connector. If one of the connectors is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for earth on track 1 of the lock connector. Check, when pressing on the opening button, for + 12 V on track 2 of the lock connector. If correct, replace the tailgate lock. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP34/UCH_V48_ALP34/UCH_V4C_ALP34/ UCH_V4D_ALP34/UCH_V4F_ALP34/UCH_V50_ALP34

87B-340

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 34 CONTINUED 1

Make sure that the cards belong to the vehicle and are properly configured by running command SC005 Check card. If the cards belong to the vehicle but have a faulty configuration, program the cards. Run command AC037 Transmitter aerial fault finding and see if a fault appears. In the event of a present or stored fault, refer to the procedure for it. Run command AC034 Tailgate external aerial test and check the card coverage zone. The card reader starts to flash as soon as a card is detected in the coverage zone. The maximum distance from the vehicle is 1.5 m. If not correct, use the fault finding procedure associated with each command. This mode allows detection of the presence of a Mégane hands-free type card, but not its recognition. If all is correct, reprogram the card(s). If the system still does not work, replace them. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-341

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 34 CONTINUED 2

NOTES

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check that status ET061 Open tailgate request becomes PRESENT after pressing the tailgate opening button. If not correct, use the fault finding procedure associated with this status. Make sure the tailgate is not detected as OPEN using status ET050 Opening rear screen. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for this status. Check the condition and connection of the tailgate lock connector. If one of the connectors is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for earth on track 1 of the lock connector. If one of the connectors is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check, when pressing on the opening button, for + 12 V on track 2 of the lock connector. If correct, replace the tailgate lock. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-342

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

ALP 35

NOTES

Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

Fault opening the rear screen in hands-free mode

First carry out a function fault finding check. Vehicle locked. Test with the other card.

Make sure status ET062 Open rear screen request becomes PRESENT when the tailgate opening button is pressed. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for this status. When the rear screen opening button is pressed, if the card is present and recognised, the direction indicator lights should flash to indicate that the luggage compartment is being unlocked. NO

YES Check the connection and condition of the rear screen lock connector. Repair if necessary. Check for earth on track 1 of the lock connector. Repair if necessary. Check, when pressing on the opening button, for + 12 V on track 2 of the lock connector. If correct, replace the rear screen lock. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP35/UCH_V48_ALP35/UCH_V4C_ALP35/ UCH_V4D_ALP35/UCH_V4F_ALP35/UCH_V50_ALP35

87B-343

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 35 CONTINUED 1

Make sure that the cards belong to the vehicle and are properly configured by running command SC005 Check card. If the cards belong to the vehicle but have a faulty configuration, program the cards. Run command AC037 Transmitter aerial fault finding and see if a fault appears. In the event of a present or stored fault, refer to the procedure for it. Run command AC034 Tailgate external aerial test and check the card coverage zone. The card reader starts to flash as soon as a card is detected in the coverage zone. The maximum distance from the vehicle is 1.5 m. If not, apply the fault finding procedure for this command. This mode allows detection of the presence of a Mégane hands-free type card, but not its recognition. If all is correct, reprogram the card(s). If the system still does not work, replace them. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-344

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 35 CONTINUED 2

NOTES

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Make sure status ET061 Open rear screen request becomes PRESENT when the tailgate opening button is pressed. If not correct, use the fault finding procedure associated with this status. Make sure the tailgate is not detected as OPEN using status ET050 Opening rear screen. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for this status. Check the connection and condition of the rear screen lock connector. If one of the connectors is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check for earth on track 1 of the lock connector. If one of the connectors is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. Check, when pressing on the opening button, for + 12 V on track 2 of the lock connector. If correct, replace the tailgate lock. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-345

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

ALP 36

NOTES

Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

Fault locking/unlocking one or more doors

First carry out a function fault finding check. Check whether configuration LC029 Selective unlocking of opening elements is WITH. Reconfigure with command CF036 Selective unlocking of opening elements, if necessary.

Use commands AC004 Central door locking, AC005 Central door unlocking and AC006 Unlocking by driver, to confirm the fault. Apply the fault finding procedure associated with these commands. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP36/UCH_V48_ALP36/UCH_V4C_ALP36/ UCH_V4D_ALP36/UCH_V4F_ALP36/UCH_V50_ALP36

87B-346

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

ALP 37

NOTES

Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

Automatic locking when driving operation fault (RAID)

First carry out a function fault finding check. Make sure the RAID function is active by checking status ET043 RAID function authorised by central door looking. Make sure no door is detected open by the UCH. Check the consistency of the vehicle speed signal. Check for faults in the ABS system. Check for faults in the airbag system.

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

87B

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP37/UCH_V48_ALP37/UCH_V4C_ALP37/ UCH_V4D_ALP37/UCH_V4F_ALP37/UCH_V50_ALP37

87B-347

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

ALP 38

NOTES

Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

Windows fail to close after two locking requests

Make sure the vehicle is really equipped with a one-touch electric window. Make sure status ET087 One-touch electric window authorisation is ACTIVE. See the procedure for dealing with this status if necessary.

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

87B

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP38/UCH_V48_ALP38/UCH_V4C_ALP38/ UCH_V4D_ALP38/UCH_V4F_ALP38/UCH_V50_ALP38

87B-348

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 39

NOTES

87B

Accessories feed not activated

Check the battery voltage. Begin the fault finding with the ignition off and the vehicle locked. When the vehicle is unlocked, the instrument panel should light up for a moment. If not, carry out fault finding on the multiplex network and instrument panel.

The vehicle should switch to timed power (approximately 20 minutes) after the driver's door is opened (ET053 Driver's door). If nothing happens, try by: – pushing the Start button (ET070 Ignition switch), or – switching on the hazard warning lights (ET085 Hazard warning lights button), or – switching on the side lights (ET081 Lighting switch position). If correct, run status fault finding for the faulty component. If not correct, apply ALP No dialogue with the UCH. The vehicle goes into accessories feed mode when the Start button is pressed (timed power active). If not correct, check the Start button operation using status ET070 Start button and use the fault finding procedure associated with this status if necessary. If the Start button operates correctly, use the fault finding procedure for status ET075 + accessories feed present. Run fault finding on, and check the condition of, the connectors of the + battery housing (Power fuses), of the power plate (maxi fuses), of the Protection and Switching Unit (UPC), of the Passenger Compartment Fuse and Relay Box, of the Passenger Compartment Fuse and Relay Box option, of the relay plate. Check the condition and connection of the connectors on the UCH and the connectors on the UPC. Check for + 12 V on tracks 3 and 10 of the PP3 12-track connector of the UCH. Check for earth on tracks 1 and 2 of the 12-track connector PP3 of the UCH. If one of the connectors is faulty and there is a repair procedure (see Technical Note 6015A, Electrical wiring repair, Wiring: Precautions for repair), repair the connector, otherwise replace the wiring. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP39/UCH_V48_ALP39/UCH_V4C_ALP39/ UCH_V4D_ALP39/UCH_V4F_ALP39/UCH_V50_ALP39

87B-349

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 40

Forced after-ignition feed fails

NOTES

Check the battery voltage. Carry out a fault finding procedure on the function. Test with the other card. Switching to + accessories feed should work. If not deal with ALP 39 Accessories feed not activated first. It can be checked while trying to activate after ignition feed if the verlog indicator light: – Remains on, meaning that the steering lock is not recognised. – Remains on for 3 seconds and flashes at 4 Hz, meaning the card is not recognised. Review of the procedure for forcing after ignition feed: + accessories feed off, card in reader, starting conditions not met, followed by a long press (approximately 5 seconds) on the Start button.

Make sure that there is no Insert card message on the instrument panel. Make sure statuses: ET008 Blank central unit is NO. ET116 Card code received is ACTIVE. ET117 Card code valid is ACTIVE. See the procedure for these statuses if necessary. Check that status ET110 UCH request to UPC or injection becomes + after ignition feed after a request for forced after ignition feed. If everything is correct, run fault finding on the UPC. Make sure the steering column lock functions properly by checking in particular that: – statuses: – ET071 Steering column lock blank is NO. – ET072 Steering column lock is UNLOCKED. – ET073 Steering column lock sensor signal is UNLOCKED. See the procedure for these statuses if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP40/UCH_V48_ALP40/UCH_V4C_ALP40/ UCH_V4D_ALP40/UCH_V4F_ALP40/UCH_V50_ALP40

87B-350

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 41

The vehicle fails to start and after ignition feed fails, card in reader

NOTES

Check the battery voltage. First carry out a function fault finding check. Switching to + accessories feed should work. If not deal with ALP 39 Accessories feed not activated first. Check that the start-up conditions are met: It can be checked while attempting to start if the immobiliser warning light: – Remains on, meaning that the steering lock is not recognised. – Remains on for 3 seconds and flashes at 4 Hz, meaning the card is not recognised. It can also be checked while trying to start; if the Start button flashes, the card has not been detected or recognised.

If the message "Insert card" is displayed on the instrument panel. Check the following statuses: – ET116 Card code received must be ACTIVE. If it is inactive, run a test with the 2nd vehicle card (if the vehicle only has one card, take a card from another MEGANE II vehicle and try to start the vehicle). – If ET116 becomes ACTIVE, reallocate the card SC006 Card allocation. If the fault is still present, replace the faulty card. – If ET116 remains INACTIVE, apply the fault finding for DF014 CC.0. If the message "Insert card" is not displayed on the instrument panel. Make sure statuses: – ET008 Blank central unit is NO. – ET116 Card code received is ACTIVE. – ET117 Card code valid is ACTIVE. See the procedure for these statuses if necessary. Make sure status ET110 UCH request to UPC or injection becomes START after a request to start. If everything is correct, run fault finding on the UPC. Make sure the steering column lock functions properly by checking in particular that: – status ET071 Unprogrammed steering lock is NO, ET072 Steering lock is UNLOCKED and ET073 Steering lock signal is UNLOCKED. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP41/UCH_V48_ALP41/UCH_V4C_ALP41/ UCH_V4D_ALP41/UCH_V4F_ALP41/UCH_V50_ALP41

87B-351

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 42

The vehicle fails to start and after ignition feed fails in hands-free mode, but works with card in reader

NOTES

First carry out a function fault finding check. Test with the other card. Switching to +accessories feed should work. If not deal with ALP 39 Accessories feed not activated first. Check that the start-up conditions are met: Check that the tailgate is detected as closed by the UCH using status ET050 Tailgate/ Boot. Carry out the tests with the other cards allocated to the vehicle.

The card my be inhibited or the vehicle has not been unlocked electrically: unlock by pressing the card button and check if the hands-free starting fault is still present. If the hands-free starting fault affects only one card: Check that the card battery has been inserted the right way round. If the battery is flat or an incorrect model is being used, replace the battery. If not, replace the faulty card. If the hands-free starting fault affects every card: Make sure the UCH is properly configured for hands-free operation. Reconfigure if necessary. Make sure that the cards belong to the vehicle and are properly configured by running command SC005 Check card. If the cards belong to the vehicle but have a faulty configuration, program the cards. Run command AC037 Transmitter aerial fault finding and see if a fault appears. In the event of a present or stored fault, refer to the procedure for it. If the vehicle is fitted with a tyre pressure monitoring system, check that the external UCH aerial is connected correctly. Run command AC036 Internal aerial test and check the card coverage zone. The card reader starts to flash as soon as a card is detected in the coverage zone. When the card is outside the vehicle, it should not be detected by the internal aerials. If not correct, apply the relevant fault finding procedure for each command. This mode allows of a Mégane hands-free type card to be detected as present, but not recognised. Check the part number of the UCH and that it is hands-free. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP42/UCH_V48_ALP42/UCH_V4C_ALP42/ UCH_V4D_ALP42/UCH_V4F_ALP42/UCH_V50_ALP42

87B-352

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 43

The vehicle fails to start and goes into after ignition feed

NOTES

Check the battery voltage. Carry out a fault finding procedure on the function. Make sure the start-up conditions are met (no gear engaged). The engine immobiliser warning light can be used to check if the injection is still protected (lit continuously). Check the conformity of the antitheft and starting components.

Make sure status ET110 UCH request to injection or UPC is START if the start-up conditions are met when the start button is pressed. If there is a fault, see the procedure for this status.

If everything is correct, run fault finding on the ignition circuit in the Protection and Switching Unit.

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP43/UCH_V48_ALP43/UCH_V4C_ALP43/ UCH_V4D_ALP43/UCH_V4F_ALP43/UCH_V50_ALP43

87B-353

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

ALP 44

NOTES

Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

The starter briefly runs but the vehicle fails to start and goes into after ignition feed

Carry out a fault finding procedure on the function. Check the conformity of the antitheft and starting components. The engine immobiliser warning light can be used to see if the injection is still protected (if it remains on).

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

87B

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP44/UCH_V48_ALP44/UCH_V4C_ALP44/ UCH_V4D_ALP44/UCH_V4F_ALP44/UCH_V50_ALP44

87B-354

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 45

NOTES

87B

Impossible to stop engine

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check whether the engine switches off if the Start button is pressed twice. If it does, make sure the card is not detected as absent by the UCH, particularly by checking the messages on the instrument panel.

Make sure the button presses are detected correctly by the UCH with status ET070 Start button. If not, see the procedure for dealing with this status.

Check that status ET110 UCH request to injection or UPC is STOP, when the button is pressed. If there is a fault, see the procedure for this status.

Check the consistency of parameter PR008 Vehicle speed with the vehicle stationary. If not, run fault finding on the ABS. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP45/UCH_V48_ALP45/UCH_V4C_ALP45/ UCH_V4D_ALP45/UCH_V4F_ALP45/UCH_V50_ALP45

87B-355

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 46

Steering column lock does not lock

NOTES

Make sure there are no steering lock faults. Check the battery voltage. It should be between 9 V and 16 V. Check the consistency of parameter PR008 Vehicle speed. Check for any faults in the Airbag computer (impact detected) and ABS/ESP computers. Remember: With hands-free, the steering locks the instant the ignition is switched off. With the card in the reader, the steering locks after the ignition is switched off as soon as the card is removed.

The conditions for a drop in + after ignition feed without the steering column locking are: – the card is present in the card reader, – more than 20 minutes has elapsed with the card in the reader and the engine off, – the vehicle speed is not zero, – power is demanded by the steering column lock too frequently. With regard to vehicles fitted with UCH computer Vdiag 4F or above: – the Renault card is removed from the card reader when the vehicle is being powered by + forced after ignition, – 3 mins have elapsed following a starting failure due to an engaged gear, – the Renault card is removed from the card reader following a starting failure due to an engaged gear, – a front door is open following a starting failure due to an engaged gear and the card is not in the reader. Check that these conditions are not present.

Check the consistency of statuses ET072 Steering column lock and ET073 Steering column lock signal. In the event of a fault, see the procedure for these statuses in the UCH section. Check that the steering column lock belongs to the vehicle using status ET248 Steering column lock immobiliser code. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP46/UCH_V48_ALP46/UCH_V4C_ALP46/ UCH_V4D_ALP46/UCH_V4F_ALP46/UCH_V50_ALP46

87B-356

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 47

NOTES

87B

Steering column lock does not unlock

– the immobiliser warning light flashes normally, – the card reader does not flash, – there is a message on the instrument panel Column not unlocked or Turn steering wheel + Start.

Check that the steering column is not under any mechanical stress (e.g.: wheel(s) jammed against pavement). If the steering column is under stress, try to start the vehicle again by lifting the steering column (and pulling the card out of the reader if a message requests this).

Check the consistency of statuses ET072 Steering column lock and ET073 Steering column lock signal. In the event of a fault, see the procedure for these statuses in the UCH section. Check that the steering column lock belongs to the vehicle using status ET248 Steering column lock immobiliser code.

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP47/UCH_V48_ALP47/UCH_V4C_ALP47/ UCH_V4D_ALP47/UCH_V4F_ALP47/UCH_V50_ALP47

87B-357

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 48

Erratic starting

NOTES

Only consult this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Manual gearbox Make sure that the clutch pedal switch is working correctly. Particularly by checking that status ET048 Clutch pedal position in the UCH is consistent. In the event of a fault, apply fault finding procedure DF003 Clutch switch circuit.

Make sure that the brake pedal switch is working correctly. Particularly by checking that status ET047 Brake pedal position in the UCH is consistent. In the event of a fault, apply fault finding procedure DF004 Brake light switch circuit.

Make sure that the gear selector lever is working correctly. Particularly by checking that status ET005 Manual gearbox selector lever position in the Protection and Switching Unit is consistent. In the event of a fault, use the fault finding procedure for status ET005. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

Automatic transmission Make sure that the brake pedal switch is working correctly. Particularly by checking that status ET047 Brake pedal position in the UCH is consistent. In the event of a fault, apply fault finding procedure DF004 Brake light switch circuit.

Make sure that the clutch pedal switch is working correctly. Particularly by checking that status ET108 Automatic transmission lever position in the UCH is consistent. In the event of a fault, use fault finding procedure for status ET108. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP48/UCH_V48_ALP48/UCH_V4C_ALP48/ UCH_V4D_ALP48/UCH_V4F_ALP48/UCH_V50_ALP48

87B-358

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 49

87B

No folding-in or folding-out of one or more door mirrors

NOTES

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check for + 12 V on the mirror switch control. Is there + 12 V?

Check the mirror power supply fuse. Replace it if necessary.

Check for earth on the switch. Repair if necessary.

Check the continuity on the switch between the following tracks: for folding-in: Tracks 5 and 1 Tracks 4 and 10 for folding-out: Tracks 4 and 1 Tracks 5 and 10

Replace the switch if necessary.

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Left-hand door mirror track 9 Right-hand door mirror track 7

Track 10 door mirror switch

Left-hand door mirror track 7 Right-hand door mirror track 9

Track 1 door mirror switch

If the fault is still present, replace the door mirror(s).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP49/UCH_V48_ALP49/UCH_V4C_ALP49/ UCH_V4D_ALP49/UCH_V4F_ALP49/UCH_V50_ALP49

87B-359

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 50

NOTES

87B

Cannot adjust one of the two door mirrors

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Non-retractable door mirror. Left-hand door mirror. Check for continuity of switch: Tracks A3/A2 and B3/B4 Slanting upward. Tracks A3/B3 and A2/B4 Slanting downward. Tracks A1/A2 and B3/B4 Slanting leftward. Tracks A1/B3 and A2/B4 Slanting rightward.

Replace the switch if necessary.

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Door mirror switch track A3

Track 2 of the left-hand door mirror.

Door mirror switch track A1

Track 4 of the left-hand door mirror.

Door mirror switch track B4

Track 3 of the left-hand door mirror.

If the fault is still present, replace the door mirror(s).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP50/UCH_V48_ALP50/UCH_V4C_ALP50/ UCH_V4D_ALP50/UCH_V4F_ALP50/UCH_V50_ALP50

87B-360

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 50 CONTINUED 1

NOTES

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Non-retractable door mirror. Right-hand door mirror. Check for continuity of switch: Tracks B2/A2 and B3/B4 Slanting upward. Tracks B2/B3 and A2/B4 Slanting downward. Tracks B1/A2 and B3/B4 Slanting leftward. Tracks B1/B3 and A2/B4 Slanting rightward.

Replace the switch if necessary.

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Door mirror switch track B2

Track 2 of the right-hand door mirror.

Door mirror switch track B1

Track 4 of the right-hand door mirror.

Door mirror switch track B4

Track 3 of the right-hand door mirror.

If the fault is still present, replace the door mirror(s).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-361

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 50 CONTINUED 2

NOTES

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Retractable door mirror. Left-hand door mirror. Check for continuity of switch: Tracks 7/5 and 4/3 Slanting upward. Tracks 7/4 and 5/3 Slanting downward. Tracks 9/5 and 4/3 Slanting leftward. Tracks 9/4 and 5/3 Slanting rightward.

Replace the switch if necessary.

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Door mirror switch track 7

Track 2 of the left-hand door mirror.

Door mirror switch track 9

Track 4 of the left-hand door mirror.

Door mirror switch track 3

Track 3 of the left-hand door mirror.

Replace the door mirror.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-362

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87B

ALP 50 CONTINUED 3

NOTES

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Retractable door mirror. Right-hand door mirror. Check for continuity of switch: Tracks 6/5 and 4/3 Slanting upward. Tracks 6/4 and 5/3 Slanting downward. Tracks 8/5 and 4/3 Slanting leftward. Tracks 8/4 and 5/3 Slanting rightward.

Replace the switch if necessary.

Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Door mirror switch track 7

Track 2 of the right-hand door mirror.

Door mirror switch track 8

Track 4 of the right-hand door mirror.

Door mirror switch track 6

Track 3 of the right-hand door mirror.

If the fault is still present, replace the door mirror(s).

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

87B-363

UCH Vdiag No.: 44, 48, 4C, 4D, 4F, 50

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 51

NOTES

+ after ignition feed remains blocked

Only check this customer complaint after a complete check with the diagnostic tool.

Check status ET070 Start button; is the status Pressed when the button is pressed?

NO

Apply interpretation of status ET070 Start button.

YES Run complete fault finding on the Protection and Switching Unit.

AFTER REPAIR

87B

Carry out a full check with the diagnostic tool.

UCH_V44_ALP51/UCH_V48_ALP51/UCH_V4C_ALP51/ UCH_V4D_ALP51/UCH_V4F_ALP51/UCH_V50_ALP51

87B-364

187C

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Introduction

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION 1. SCOPE OF DOCUMENT This document presents the fault finding procedure applicable to all computers with the following specifications: Vehicle(s): Scénic II Function concerned: Keyless vehicles

VDIAG No.: 04

2. PREREQUISITES FOR FAULT FINDING Documentation type Fault Finding Procedures (this document and the technical notes for the injection fitted to the vehicle, the Passenger Compartment Central Unit (UCH) and the Protection and Switching Unit: – Assisted fault finding (integrated into the diagnostic tool), Dialogys. Wiring Diagrams: – Visu-Schéma (CD-ROM), paper version. Type of diagnostic tools – CLIP Special tooling required

Special tooling required Multimeter Elé 1681 Universal bornier

3. RECAP Procedure To run fault finding on the vehicle's computers, switch on the ignition in fault finding mode (forced + after ignition feed). Proceed as follows: – Renault card in the card reader (keyless vehicle scenario 1, standard, not hands-free and scenario 2, top of the range, hands-free), – press and hold the Start button (longer than 5 seconds) with start-up conditions not present, – connect the diagnostic tool and perform the required operations. Note: The left-hand and right-hand xenon bulb computers are supplied when the dipped headlights are lit. Fault finding procedures can only be carried out on them after the ignition has been switched on in fault finding mode (forced + after ignition feed) and the dipped headlights are on.

VSC84 1.0

87C-1

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Introduction

87C

Proceed as follows to cut off the + after ignition feed: – disconnect the diagnostic tool, – press the Start button twice briefly (less then 3 seconds), – ensure that the + after ignition feed has been cut off by checking that the computer indicator lights on the instrument panel have gone out.

Faults Faults are displayed as present or stored (they appeared in a certain context and have since disappeared, or they are still present but cannot be diagnosed in the current context). The present or stored status of faults should be taken into consideration when using the diagnostic tool with + after ignition feed activated (without any system components being operated). For a present fault, apply the procedure described in the Interpretation of faults section. For a stored fault, note the faults displayed and apply the Notes section. If the fault is confirmed when the notes are applied, the fault is present. Deal with the fault If the fault is not confirmed, check: – the electrical lines which correspond to the fault, – the connectors for these lines (for oxidation, bent pins, etc.), – the resistance of the component detected as faulty, – the condition of the wires (melted or split insulation, wear).

Conformity check The aim of the conformity check is to check statuses and parameters that do not produce a fault display on the diagnostic tool when they are inconsistent. Therefore, this step is used to: – carry out fault finding on faults that do not have a fault display, and which may correspond to a customer complaint, – check that the system is operating correctly and that there is no risk of a fault recurring after repairs. This section features the fault finding procedures for statuses and parameters, and the conditions for checking them. If a status is not operating normally or a parameter is outside permitted tolerance values, you should consult the corresponding fault finding page.

Special notes on checking the conformity of the keyless vehicle function The keyless vehicle function conformity check is divided into three parts. These parts represent the three sub-functions of the keyless vehicle function: door locking system, antitheft and starting. The statuses and parameters related to these sub-functions are listed with their respective computers.

Customer complaints - Fault finding chart If the diagnostic tool check is in order, but the customer complaint is still present, the fault should be dealt with as a customer complaint. A summary of the overall procedure to follow is provided on the following page in the form of a flow chart

VSC84 1.0

87C-2

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Introduction

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

87C

4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Check the battery charge and the condition of the fuses

Print the system fault finding log (available on CLIP and in the Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note)

Connect CLIP

Dialogue with Electronic Control Unit?

no See ALP 1

yes Read faults

Faults found

no

Conformity check

yes The cause is still present

Deal with present faults

no

Fault solved

no

Fault solved

Deal with stored faults Use fault finding charts (ALPs) The cause is still present

no

Fault solved The cause is still present

yes

Contact Techline with the completed fault finding log

VSC84 1.0

87C-3

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Introduction

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

87C

5. FAULT FINDING LOG

IMPORTANT!

NOTE Any fault on a complex system requires thorough fault finding with the appropriate tools. The FAULT FINDING LOG, which should be completed during the procedure, enables you to keep track of the procedure which is carried out. It is an essential document when consulting the manufacturer.

IT IS THEREFORE MANDATORY TO FILL OUT A FAULT FINDING LOG FOR EACH FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE. You will always be asked for this log: ● when requesting technical assistance from the Techline. ● for approval requests when replacing parts for which approval is obligatory. ● to be attached to monitored parts for which reimbursement is requested. The log is needed for warranty reimbursement, and enables better analysis of the parts removed.

6. SAFETY ADVICE All work on components requires that the safety rules be obeyed to prevent damage or injury: – Make sure the battery is properly charged to avoid damaging the computers with a low load. – Avoid the use of a booster battery (prohibited with 24 V). – Make sure there is no fault with the clutch switch to prevent unwanted starts. – Do not smoke, – Use the appropriate tools.

VSC84 1.0

87C-4

Edition 3

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Door locking

Page 1/2

List of monitored parts: Computer ●

Administrative identification Date

2

0

Log completed by VIN Engine Diagnostic tool

CLIP

Revision ●

Customer complaint 875

Door locking/unlocking fault

1072

Interior lighting faults

Other

●

Card or remote control fault

881

Indicator light comes on

004

Intermittently

Your comments:

Conditions under which the customer complaint occurs 005

While driving

009

Sudden fault

Other

●

1473

010

Gradual deterioration

Your comments:

Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure used

Type of diagnostic manual:

MR

Technical Note

Assisted fault finding

Fault finding manual no.: Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note No.: Other documentation Title and/or part number:

FD 18 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Door locking ●

Page 2/2

Computer identification and parts exchanged for the system

Part 1 part no. Part 2 part no. Part 3 part no. Part 4 part no. Part 5 part no. To be read with the Diagnostic tool (Identification screen): Computer part no. Supplier no. Program no. Software version Calibration no. VDIAG ●

Faults found with the diagnostic tool Fault no.

●

Present

Fault name

Specification

Conditions under which fault occurs Status or parameter no.

●

Stored

Parameter name

Value

Unit

System-specific information

Description: ●

Additional information

What factors led you to replace the computer? What other parts were replaced? Other defective functions? Your comments:

FD 18 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

DOOR LOCKING 187C SYSTEM Fault finding - System operation

87C

Diagram of the hands-free function

2 3 4 5

: range of the door aerials : range of the boot aerial : range of the interior aerials : range of two aerials that may not be covered if a phase inversion occurs in either one. Note: In the event of an aerial earth short-circuit, the range may double. If an interior aerial has a short circuit to earth, its range can cover the exterior aerials (risk of locking/unlocking impossible but starting possible with the card outside the vehicle). If an exterior aerial has a short circuit to earth, the vehicle can be locked/ unlocked with the card approximately 2 m or more from the vehicle.

VSC84 1.0

87C-7

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

187C SYSTEM DOOR LOCKING Fault finding - System operation

87C

GENERAL OPERATION The keyless vehicle function is divided into three sub-functions: door locking system, antitheft and starting. Using the diagnostic tool, there are two ways of running keyless function fault finding. ● The first procedure is by computer fault finding which makes it possible to communicate with just one computer (select the computer concerned). ● The second procedure consists of performing fault finding by function which allows communications to be established with the three (or four) computers of the keyless vehicle function.

DESCRIPTION OF THE SUB-FUNCTIONS Door locking system sub-function This sub-function encompasses everything involved in opening and closing the vehicle opening elements. The UCH alone provides this sub-function. Note: – Locking is impossible if the ignition is on or the card is in the reader. – The ABS provides the vehicle speed signal for the Renault Anti-Intruder Device (RAID) function. – Airbag system failure blocks the RAID function and the "airbag triggered" signal unlocks the vehicle. Protection sub-function This sub-function includes everything used to protect the vehicle from theft. The computers concerned are the UCH, injection for the engine immobiliser, and the steering lock. Note: – An airbag system and/or ABS (speed signal) failure inhibits locking of the steering column. – A malfunction of the Protection and Switching Unit can lead to failure of the steering lock. Starting sub-function This sub-function covers everything used to start the vehicle. The computers concerned are the UCH, injection, Protection and Switching Unit and (if fitted to the vehicle) automatic or sequential gearbox computer. Note: – A speed signal > 0 mph inhibits engine switch-off. – Airbag triggering stops the engine.

VSC84 1.0

87C-8

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - System operation

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION EXCHANGES BETWEEN THE MAIN COMPONENTS OF THE KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION – lock or unlock request

Steering column lock

UCH – lock status signal

– request for after ignition feed – starting conditions met – request to activate starter

Protection and Switching Unit

UCH – after-ignition feed present signal

– engine immobiliser software lock exchange

Injection computer

UCH – starting conditions met signal

UCH

UCH

– speed signal

ABS computer

– absence or presence of fault

Airbag computer

Injection computer – card response

Card reader

Card – card present and allocated to vehicle interrogation

VSC84 1.0

87C-9

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - System operation

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION SUMMARY OF COMPONENTS CONTROLLED OR MANAGED BY THE KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION TO CONTROL THE DOORS

Deadlocking Front left-hand door status switch/lock motor UCH Front right-hand door status switch/lock motor Rear right-hand door status switch/lock motor

Radio frequency reception aerial

Rear left-hand door status switch/lock motor Luggage compartment status switch/lock motor

Central door locking button

ABS

Card reader

Vehicle multiplex network

open luggage compartment request switch

Card

Speed signal Instrument panel AIRBAG Only in the event of a fault Protection and Switching Unit

Key: Wire connections = Multiplex connections = VSC84 1.0

87C-10

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - System operation

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION SUMMARY OF CONTROLS OR COMPONENTS CONTROLLED OR MANAGED BY THE KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION TO CONTROL THE DOORS (HANDS-FREE)

Deadlocking

Front right-hand door lock button

Central door locking button

Front right-hand door lock button

Front right-hand door lock button

Front right-hand door lock button

Lock motor / front left-hand door status switch

Front right-hand door lock button

Front right-hand door aerial

Lock motor / front right-hand door status switch

Front left-hand door aerial

UCH

Lock motor / rear right-hand door status switch

Rear left-hand door aerial

Lock motor / rear left-hand door status switch

Rear right-hand door aerial

Radio aerial

Lock motor / luggage compartment status switch

Luggage compartment aerial Interior aerials

Switch/ optical sensor

Card reader

Switch/ optical sensor

Switch/ optical sensor

Switch/ optical sensor

Open luggage compartment request switch

Card ABS Speed signal

Vehicle multiplex network Instrument panel

AIRBAG Only in the event of a fault Protection and Switching Unit

Key: Wire connections = Multiplex connections = VSC84 1.0

87C-11

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - System operation

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION SUMMARY OF COMPONENTS CONTROLLED OR MANAGED BY THE KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION FOR ANTITHEFT UCH

Start button Immobiliser warning light

Lock power supply

Lock position signal Card reader

Vehicle multiplex network

Card

Steering column lock

Switch at rest supply

ABS Safety line

Speed signal

Protection and Switching Unit

AIRBAG Instrument panel

Only in the event of a fault

After ignition feed supply

Injection computer

Key: Wire connections = Multiplex connections =

VSC84 1.0

87C-12

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - System operation

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION SUMMARY OF ANTITHEFT CONTROLS OR COMPONENTS USED BY THE KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION (HANDS-FREE) UCH

Start button Immobiliser warning light

Lock power supply

Lock position signal Front interior aerial

Central interior aerial

Vehicle multiplex network

Rear interior aerial

Hands-free card

Steering column lock

Switch at rest supply

ABS Safety line

Speed signal

Protection and Switching Unit

AIRBAG Instrument panel

Only in the event of a fault

After ignition feed supply

Injection computer

Key: Wire connections = Multiplex connections =

VSC84 1.0

87C-13

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - System operation

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION SUMMARY OF COMPONENTS CONTROLLED OR MANAGED BY THE KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION FOR STARTING UCH Brake pedal switch Clutch pedal switch Start button

Vehicle multiplex network

Luggage compartment switch

Automatic or sequential gearbox (if fitted to the vehicle)

Gear selector Starter motor After ignition feed supply

ABS

Speed signal

Protection and Switching Unit AIRBAG After ignition feed supply

Only in the event of a fault

Reverse gear switch (and neutral switch for manual gearbox)

Injection

Key: Wire connections = Multiplex connections =

VSC84 1.0

87C-14

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

187C SYSTEM DOOR LOCKING Fault finding - System operation

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION REPAIR MODE In the diagnostic tool, repair mode provides access to: – special commands, – reading and writing various system configurations.

IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS FOR REPAIR MODE It is essential to check the consistency of system configurations, because this could be the origin of the fault or customer complaint. After replacing a computer, be sure to properly enter all configurations to avoid operational inconsistencies.

VSC84 1.0

87C-15

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Configuration

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

NOTES

87C

After configuring the instrument panel, switch off the ignition and wait for a minute, then disconnect and reconnect the battery for the new configurations to take effect.

No.

Configuration

Note:

CF010

Hands-free function

WITH or WITHOUT Depending on vehicle equipment. The presence of the hands-free option can be determined visually by looking for optical sensors on the door handles.

CF009

Deadlocking

WITH or WITHOUT WITH depending on country where used.

CF036

Selective door opening

CF018

Automatic relocking

WITH or WITHOUT Customer's choice. Allows the vehicle to lock up after 30 seconds, if no opening element has been opened since the vehicle was unlocked.

CF033

Electric child safety lock

WITH or WITHOUT Depending on vehicle equipment. Whether or not the switch is present can be determined visually on the driver's door.

CF020

Type of driving style

RIGHT or LEFT Depending on the dashboard, steering wheel on the right or left.

CF017

Vehicle type

ALL EXCEPT E84 or E84 ALONE (E84 corresponds to the cabriolet model)

VSC84 1.0

87C-16

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

Fault finding - Specific command table

87C

After configuring the instrument panel, switch off the ignition and wait for a minute, then disconnect and reconnect the battery for the new configurations to take effect.

NOTES

No.

Configuration

Note:

SC004

UCH programming

Allows a blank UCH to be programmed.

SC006

Card allocation

Allows blank cards to be programmed for the vehicle, or those already allocated to the vehicle to be reprogrammed. All cards to be allocated to the vehicle must be submitted.

SC005

Card check

Allows the conformity of the card and its allocation to the vehicle to be checked.

SC003

Spare

VSC84 1.0

87C-17

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

Fault finding - Specific command table

NOTES

87C

After configuring the instrument panel, switch off the ignition and wait for a minute, then disconnect and reconnect the battery for the new configurations to take effect.

No.

Configuration

Note:

LC001

Hands-free function

WITH or WITHOUT Depending on vehicle equipment. The presence of the hands-free option can be determined visually by looking for optical sensors on the door handles.

LC003

Deadlocking

WITH or WITHOUT WITH depending on country.

LC029

Selective opening of opening elements

WITH or WITHOUT

LC012

Automatic relocking

WITH or WITHOUT Customer's choice. Allows the vehicle to lock up after 30 seconds, if no opening element has been opened since the vehicle was unlocked.

LC026

Electric child safety lock

WITH or WITHOUT Depending on vehicle equipment. Whether or not the switch is present can be determined visually on the driver's door.

LC014

Type of driving style

RIGHT or LEFT Depending on the dashboard, steering wheel on the right or left.

LC011

Vehicle type

ALL EXCEPT E84 or E84 ALONE (E84 corresponds to the cabriolet model).

VSC84 1.0

87C-18

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

Fault finding - Conformity check (hands-free)

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION

NOTES

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subfunction. Test conditions: card in vehicle, engine off, ignition on.

Access Order

Function

0

UCH

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and Notes

Fault finding

2 (maximum 4)

PR013:

Number of cards programmed

ET045:

Radiofrequency signal received

YES

ET066:

Press card button received

YES

ET067:

Press card button recognised

YES

ET053:

Driver's door

OPEN or CLOSED

ET042:

Passenger door

OPEN or CLOSED

ET051:

Rear left-hand door

OPEN or CLOSED

ET052:

Rear right-hand door

OPEN or CLOSED

ET061:

Open tailgate request

PRESENT (button pressed)

ET050:

Tailgate

ET062:

Open rear screen request

If there is a fault, see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned.

OPEN or CLOSED PRESENT (button pressed)

VSC84 1.0

87C-19

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Conformity check (hands-free)

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION

NOTES

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subfunction. Test conditions: card in vehicle, engine off, ignition on.

Access Order

Function

0 (continued)

UCH (continued)

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and Notes

ET041:

Opening rear screen

ET044:

Electric door-locking button Button depressed

PRESSED

ET089:

Childproof lock button Button depressed

PRESSED

ET086:

Electric child safety lock

ET087:

One-touch electric window authorisation

ET068:

Most recently locked by

Fault finding

OPEN or CLOSED

ACTIVE ACTIVE or INACTIVE CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING or CARD or FAULT FINDING

ET069:

Most recently unlocked by

CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING or AIRBAG or CARD or FAULT FINDING

ET088:

Central locking system activated

CARD or FAULT FINDING

ET090:

Deadlocking system inactive

+ AFTER IGNITION FEED or ELECTRIC CENTRAL DOOR LOCKING or CARD or FAULT FINDING

ET043:

RAID function authorisation by central locking button

If there is a fault, see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned.

ACTIVE

VCS84 1.0

87C-20

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Conformity check (hands-free)

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subfunction. Test conditions: card in vehicle, engine off, ignition on.

NOTES

Access Order

Function

0 (continued)

UCH (continued)

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and Notes

AC004:

Central door locking

The opening elements lock

AC006:

Unlock driver's door

The driver's door unlocks

AC005:

Unlock opening elements

The opening elements unlock

AC020:

Central door locking button indicator light

The indicator light should come on

AC029:

Child safety lock indicator light

The indicator light should come on

AC025:

One-touch electric window authorisation

Activates or deactivates pushbutton operation

Fault finding

If there is a fault, see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned.

VSC84 1.0

87C-21

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

Fault finding - Conformity check (hands-free)

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION

NOTES

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subfunction. Test conditions: card in vehicle, engine off, ignition on.

Access with hands-free Order

Function

0

UCH

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and Notes

PR013:

Number of cards programmed

2 (maximum 4)

ET045:

Radiofrequency signal received Press on one of the card buttons

YES

ET066:

Press on card button received Press on one of the card buttons

YES

ET067:

Press on card button recognised Press on one of the card buttons

YES

ET054:

Optical sensor supplied

YES

ET055:

Front driver side optical sensor Hand in front of the sensor

ACTIVE

ET056:

Rear driver side optical sensor Hand in front of the sensor

ACTIVE

ET057:

Front/rear passenger side optical sensor Hand in front of the sensor

ACTIVE

ET058:

Locking button on driver's handle Button depressed

ACTIVE

Fault finding

If there is a fault, see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned.

VSC84 1.0

87C-22

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Conformity check (hands-free)

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subfunction. Test conditions: card in vehicle, engine off, ignition on.

NOTES

Access with hands-free Order

Function

0 (continued)

UCH (continued)

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and Notes

ET059:

Locking button on passenger handle Button depressed

PRESSED

ET060:

Luggage compartment locking button on tailgate

PRESSED

ET053:

Driver's door

OPEN or CLOSED

ET042:

Passenger door

OPEN or CLOSED

ET051:

Rear left-hand door

OPEN or CLOSED

ET052:

Rear right-hand door

OPEN or CLOSED

ET061:

Open tailgate request

PRESENT (button pressed)

ET050:

Tailgate

OPEN or CLOSED

ET062:

Open rear screen request

PRESENT (button pressed)

ET041:

Opening rear screen

ET044:

Electric door-locking button Button depressed

PRESSED

ET089:

Childproof lock button Button depressed

PRESSED

ET086:

Electric child safety lock

ET087:

One-touch electric window authorisation

Fault finding

If there is a fault, see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned.

OPEN or CLOSED

ACTIVE ACTIVE or INACTIVE

VSC84 1.0

87C-23

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

Fault finding - Conformity check (hands-free)

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subfunction. Test conditions: engine stopped, ignition on.

NOTES

Access with hands-free Order

Function

0 (continued)

UCH (continued)

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and Notes

ET068:

Most recently locked by

HANDS-FREE or CENTRAL LOCKING or CARD or FAULT FINDING

ET069:

Most recently unlocked by

HANDS-FREE or CENTRAL LOCKING or AIRBAG or CARD or FAULT FINDING

ET088:

Central locking system activated

CARD or HANDSFREE or FAULT FINDING

ET090:

Deadlocking system inactive

+ AFTER IGNITION FEED or CENTRAL LOCKING or CARD or HANDSFREE or FAULT FINDING

ET043:

RAID function authorisation by central locking button

AC037:

Aerial fault finding

AC032:

Driver's side exterior aerial test

ACTIVE

Fault finding

If there is a fault, see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned.

Switches on aerial fault finding (interior and exterior) and reports a fault if one of the aerials fails. The card reader light flashes as soon as a handsfree card is detected within range of the driver's side aerials. VSC84 1.0

87C-24

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

Fault finding - Conformity check (hands-free)

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subfunction. Test conditions: card in vehicle, engine off, ignition on.

NOTES

Access with hands-free Order

Function

0 (continued)

UCH (continued)

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and Notes

AC033:

Passenger side exterior aerial test

The card reader light flashes as soon as a handsfree card is detected within range of the passenger side aerials.

AC034:

Luggage compartment exterior aerial test

The card reader light flashes as soon as a handsfree card is detected within range of the luggage compartment aerial.

AC004:

Central door locking

The opening elements lock.

AC006:

Unlock driver's door

The driver's door unlocks.

AC005:

Unlock opening elements

The opening elements unlock.

AC020:

Central door locking button indicator light

The indicator light should come on.

AC029:

Child safety lock indicator light

The indicator light should come on.

AC025:

One-touch electric window authorisation

Allows or blocks one-touch button operation.

Fault finding

If there is a fault, see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned.

VSC84 1.0

87C-25

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

Fault finding - Conformity check (hands-free)

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION

NOTES

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subfunction. Test conditions: card in vehicle, ignition on, engine off.

Protection Order

Function

0

UCH

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and Notes

ET008:

blank UCH

ET046:

Engine immobiliser

INACTIVE

ET070:

Ignition switch pressed

PRESSED

ET116:

Card code received

ET117:

Valid card code

ET045:

RF signal received

ET071:

Unprogrammed steering lock

ET072:

Steering lock

UNLOCKED

ET073:

Steering lock sensor signal

UNLOCKED

PR008:

Vehicle speed

0 mph

PR013:

Number of cards programmed

2 (maximum 4)

AC037:

Transmitter aerial fault finding

Switches on aerial fault finding (interior and exterior) and reports a fault if one of the aerials fails.

AC036:

Interior aerial test

The card reader light flashes as soon as a hands-free card is detected within range of the luggage compartment aerial.

Fault finding

NO

NO

If there is a fault, see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned.

VSC84 1.0

87C-26

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

Fault finding - Conformity check (hands-free)

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subfunction. Test conditions: card in vehicle, ignition on, engine off.

NOTES

Protection Order

Function

0 (continued)

UCH

1

2

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and Notes

AC003:

Immobiliser warning light

AC026:

Starter switch light

AC024:

Card reader

Protection and Switching Unit

ET008:

Starting authorised

S3000/ EDC16 injection

ET006:

Code programmed

YES

ET003:

Engine immobiliser

INACTIVE

ET077:

Impact detected

ET076:

Starting

ET003:

Engine immobiliser

INACTIVE

ET006:

Code programmed

YES

PR074:

Battery voltage

DDCR Injection

Fault finding

The warning light should come on. The switch should light up. The card reader should light up. YES If there is a fault, see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned.

NO AUTHORISED

> 11 volts

VSC84 1.0

87C-27

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Conformity check (hands-free)

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subfunction. Test conditions: card in vehicle, ignition on, engine off.

NOTES

Starting Order

Function

0 (continued)

Protection and Switching Unit

1

2

UCH

Injection S3000

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and Notes

ET003:

After ignition relay power

PRESENT

ET005:

Manual gearbox selector lever

NEUTRAL

ET008:

Authorisation to start

YES

ET075:

+ accessories feed present

YES

ET110:

UCH request to injection or Protection and Switching Unit

INACTIVE (STARTING or request for starting)

ET108:

Automatic transmission selector position

ET047:

Brake pedal position: Pedal depressed

DEPRESSED

ET048:

Clutch pedal position: Pedal depressed

DEPRESSED

ET092:

Engine stopped

YES

ET094:

Engine started

NO (YES with starter on)

ET091:

Engine running

NO (YES engine running)

ET093:

Engine stalled

NO (YES if engine stalled)

ET076:

Starting

ET048:

Actuator relay control

PR071:

Computer feed voltage

Fault finding

PARK or NEUTRAL If there is a fault, see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned.

AUTHORISE D ACTIVE > 11 V VSC84 1.0

87C-28

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

Fault finding - Conformity check (hands-free)

87C

KEYLESS VEHICLE FUNCTION

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check with the diagnostic tool and after having dealt with any faults present in the computers concerned by this subfunction. Test conditions: card in vehicle, ignition on, engine off.

NOTES

Starting Order

Function

2 (continued)

Injection EDC16

Injection DDCR

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and Notes

ET001:

Computer + after ignition feed

ET076:

Starting

AUTHORISED

ET038:

Engine

STOPPED

ET001:

Computer + after ignition feed

PRESENT

ET076:

Starting

AUTHORISED

ET038:

Engine

STOPPED

PR074:

Battery voltage

Fault finding

PRESENT

If there is a fault, see the fault finding procedure related to the status or command concerned.

> 11 V

VSC84 1.0

87C-29

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

NOTES

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Customer complaints

87C

Check the battery voltage. Test the multiplex network. No faults must be present; otherwise, deal with them before starting this procedure. Hands-free features: When a card is left in the vehicle, its hands-free operation is blocked. Activate after ignition feed with the card to restore it.

OPENING ELEMENT LOCKING SYSTEM FAULTS NOTED

LOCKING/UNLOCKING FAULT WHEN PRESSING BUTTON ON CARD

ALP 1

LOCKING/UNLOCKING LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FAULT WHEN PRESSING BUTTON ON CARD

ALP 2

OPENING LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT FAULT (NOT HANDS-FREE)

ALP 3

OPENING REAR SCREEN FAULT (NOT HANDS-FREE)

ALP 4

LOCKING/UNLOCKING FUEL FILLER FLAP FAULT

ALP 5

UNLOCKING FAULT IN HANDS-FREE MODE

ALP 6

LOCKING FAULT IN HANDS-FREE MODE

ALP 7

FAULT OPENING THE LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT IN HANDS-FREE MODE

ALP 8

FAULT OPENING THE REAR SCREEN IN HANDS-FREE MODE

ALP 9

FAULT LOCKING/UNLOCKING ONE OR MORE DOORS

ALP 10

FAULT WITH RAID FUNCTION

ALP 11

WINDOWS FAIL TO CLOSE AFTER TWO ATTEMPTS TO LOCK

ALP 12

VSC84 1.0

87C-30

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

NOTES

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Customer complaints

87C

Check the battery voltage. Test the multiplex network. No faults must be present; otherwise, deal with them before starting this procedure. Hands-free features: When a card is left in the vehicle, its hands-free operation is blocked. Activate after ignition feed with the card to restore it.

ANTITHEFT AND STARTING FAULTS NOTED

NO + ACCESSORIES FEED

ALP 13

FORCED AFTER-IGNITION FEED FAILS

ALP 14

THE VEHICLE FAILS TO START AND AFTER IGNITION FEED FAILS, CARD IN READER

ALP 15

THE VEHICLE FAILS TO START AND AFTER IGNITION FEED FAILS IN HANDSFREE MODE, BUT WORKS WITH CARD IN READER

ALP 16

THE VEHICLE FAILS TO START AND GOES INTO AFTER IGNITION FEED

ALP 17

THE STARTER BRIEFLY RUNS BUT THE VEHICLE FAILS TO START AND GOES INTO AFTER IGNITION FEED

ALP 12

IMPOSSIBLE TO SHUT OFF ENGINE

ALP 19

STEERING COLUMN LOCK FAILS

ALP 20

STARTING ERRATIC

ALP 21

VSC84 1.0

87C-31

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

ALP 1

NOTES

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault finding chart

87C

Locking/unlocking fault when pressing button on card

Check for absence of after ignition feed and of card in card reader. First carry out a function fault finding check. Test with another card. Check the condition of the batteries.

Check that statuses ET066 Card button press received and ET067 Card button press recognised are YES after pressing on the card's lock or unlock button. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for those statuses. Run commands AC004 Lock opening elements and AC005 Unlock opening elements to find out if the locks work and the UCH can control them. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for those commands. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-32

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

ALP 2

NOTES

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault finding chart

87C

Locking/unlocking luggage compartment fault when pressing button on card

Check for absence of after ignition feed and of card in card reader. First carry out a function fault finding check. Test with another card. Check the condition of the batteries.

Check if the direction indicator lights flash once on unlocking and twice on locking. No Check that statuses ET066 Card button press received and ET067 Card button press recognised are YES after pressing on the card's lock or unlock button. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for those statuses.

Yes

Make sure the tailgate is not considered OPEN by displaying status ET050 Tailgate. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for this status.

See ALP 3 (non-hands-free model) or 8 (hands-free model).

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-33

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

ALP 3

NOTES

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault finding chart

87C

Luggage compartment opening fault (Not hands-free)

First carry out a function fault finding check. The vehicle or luggage compartment must be unlocked.

Check that status ET061 Open tailgate request becomes PRESENT when the tailgate opening button is pressed. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for this status. Make sure the tailgate is not considered OPEN by displaying status ET050 Tailgate. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for this status. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-34

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault finding chart Rear screen opening fault. (Not hands-free)

ALP 4

NOTES

87C

First carry out a function fault finding check. The vehicle or luggage compartment must be unlocked.

Make sure status ET062 Open rear screen request becomes PRESENT when the rear screen opening button is pressed. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for this status. Make sure the rear screen is not considered OPEN by displaying status ET041 Opening rear screen. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for this status. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-35

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault finding chart

ALP 5

NOTES

87C

Fuel filler flap locking/unlocking fault

First carry out a function fault finding check. The locking/unlocking should function on the driver's door.

With the flap open, try locking and unlocking to make sure the lock bolt slides properly. If okay, make sure the flap is properly positioned in relation to the motion of the lock bolt. Check the condition and connection of the fuel filler flap lock connector. Repair if necessary. Check for the earth on both tracks of the flap lock connector. Check while: Locking, earth present on track 3 and + 12 V on track 1 of the flap lock connector. Unlocking, earth present on track 1 and + 12 V on track 3 of the flap lock connector. If okay, replace the fuel filler flap lock. Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: UCH connector PP2 track 6

Track 1 of the fuel filler flap lock connector

UCH connector PP2 track 5 Repair if necessary.

Track 3 of the fuel filler flap lock connector

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-36

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault finding chart

87C

ALP 6

Unlocking fault in hands-free mode

NOTES

Check for absence of after ignition feed and of card in card reader. Tests must be conducted with the other cards allocated to the vehicle. First carry out a function fault finding check. Carry out a conformity check before using this procedure. Make sure one of the cards is not blocked (locked in the vehicle), activate after ignition feed with the card and try unlocking again with the card.

Make sure the optical sensors are receiving power by checking status ET054 Optical sensors supplied. Unless the vehicle has not been opened for over 72 hours, pulling the handle wakes it up. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for this status. Check that statuses ET055, ET056 or ET057 become active when a hand is passed in front of the corresponding sensor. Test on all the doors. If any status fails to change, apply the fault finding procedure associated with that status. Note: One of these statuses becomes active if the vehicle has not been opened for 72 hours and the corresponding door handle is pulled! Make sure the cards belong to the vehicle and are properly configured by running command SC005 Card check. If the cards belong to the vehicle but have a faulty configuration, program them. Run command AC037 Transmitter aerial fault finding and see if a fault appears. In the event of a present or stored fault, refer to the procedure for it. Run the following commands and check the card coverage zone on each side of the vehicle: AC032 Driver's side exterior aerial test AC033 Passenger's side exterior aerial test The card reader should flash as soon as a card is detected within the coverage zone. The maximum distance from the vehicle is 1.5 m. If not correct, apply the fault finding procedure associated with each command. ATTENTION: this method allows detection of the presence of a Mégane hands-free type card, but not its recognition. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-37

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault finding chart

87C

ALP 7

Locking fault in hands-free mode

NOTES

Check for absence of after ignition feed and of card in card reader. Tests must be conducted with the other cards allocated to the vehicle. First carry out a function fault finding check. Make sure all the doors are fully closed (check that the interior lights are off or switch on the ignition to check that no door is open from the instrument panel symbol). Visually check that the lock buttons are not stuck in the pressed position. Make sure one of the cards is not blocked (locked in the vehicle), activate after ignition feed with the card and try unlocking again with the card.

Make sure statuses ET058, ET059 and ET060 indicating a press on the locking button for each door or the luggage compartment become active when the button is pressed. Test all the lock buttons. See the section for dealing with the status(es) concerned. Make sure the cards belong to the vehicle and are properly configured by running command SC005 Card check. If the cards belong to the vehicle but have a faulty configuration, program them. Run command AC037 Transmitter aerial fault finding and see if a fault appears. In the event of a present or stored fault, refer to the procedure for it. Run the following commands and check the card coverage zone on each side of the vehicle: AC032 Driver's side exterior aerial test AC033 Passenger's side exterior aerial test AC034 Luggage compartment exterior aerial test The card reader should flash as soon as a card is detected within the coverage zone. The maximum distance from the vehicle is 1.5 m. If not correct, apply the fault finding procedure associated with each command. ATTENTION: this method allows detection of the presence of a Mégane hands-free type card, but not its recognition. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-38

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault finding chart

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

ALP 8

87C

Fault opening the luggage compartment in hands-free mode

First carry out a function fault finding check. Vehicle locked. Test with another card.

NOTES

Check that status ET061 Open tailgate request becomes PRESENT when the tailgate opening button is pressed. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for this status. When the tailgate opening button is pressed, if the card is present and recognised, the direction indicator lights should flash to indicate that the luggage compartment is being unlocked. Yes Check the condition and connection of the tailgate lock connector. Repair if necessary. No

Check for the earth on track 1 of the lock connector. Repair if necessary. Check, when pressing on the opening button, for + 12 V on track 2 of the lock connector. If correct, replace the tailgate lock. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

Make sure the cards belong to the vehicle and are properly configured by running command SC005 Card check. If the cards belong to the vehicle but have a faulty configuration, program them. Run command AC037 Transmitter aerial fault finding and see if a fault appears. In the event of a present or stored fault, refer to the procedure for it. Run command AC034 Luggage compartment exterior aerial test and check the card coverage zone. The card reader should flash as soon as a card is detected within the coverage zone. The maximum distance from the vehicle is 1.5 m. If not correct, use the fault finding procedure associated with each command. ATTENTION: this method allows detection of the presence of a Mégane hands-free type card, but not its recognition. If everything is okay, reprogram the card(s). If the system still does not work, replace them. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-39

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault finding chart

87C

ALP 8 CONTINUED

NOTES

First carry out a function fault finding check. Vehicle unlocked.

Check that status ET061 Open tailgate request becomes PRESENT when the tailgate opening button is pressed. If not correct, use the fault finding procedure associated with this status. Make sure the tailgate is not considered OPEN by displaying status ET050 Opening rear screen. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for this status. Check the condition and connection of the tailgate lock connector. Repair if necessary. Check for the earth on track 1 of the lock connector. Repair if necessary. Check, when pressing on the opening button, for + 12 V on track 2 of the lock connector. If correct, replace the tailgate lock. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-40

Edition 3

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault finding chart

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

ALP 9

NOTES

87C

Fault opening the rear screen in hands-free mode

First carry out a function fault finding check. Vehicle locked. Test with another card.

Make sure status ET062 Open rear screen request becomes PRESENT when the tailgate opening button is pressed. If not, use the relevant fault finding procedure. When the rear screen opening button is pressed, if the card is present and recognised, the direction indicator lights should flash to indicate that the luggage compartment is being unlocked. Yes Check the connection and condition of the rear screen lock connector. Repair if necessary. No

Check for the earth on track 1 of the lock connector. Repair if necessary. Check, when pressing on the opening button, for + 12 V on track 2 of the lock connector. If okay, replace the rear screen lock. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

Make sure the cards belong to the vehicle and are properly configured by running command SC005 Card check. If the cards belong to the vehicle but have a faulty configuration, program them. Run command AC037 Transmitter aerial fault finding and see if a fault appears. In the event of a present or stored fault, refer to the procedure for it. Run command AC034 Luggage compartment exterior aerial test and check the card coverage zone. The card reader should flash as soon as a card is detected within the coverage zone. The maximum distance from the vehicle is 1.5 m. If not, use the fault finding procedure for this command. ATTENTION: this method allows detection of the presence of a Mégane hands-free type card, but not its recognition. If everything is okay, reprogram the card(s). If the system still does not work, replace them. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-41

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault finding chart

87C

ALP 9 CONTINUED

NOTES

First carry out a function fault finding check. Vehicle unlocked.

Make sure status ET062 Open tailgate request becomes PRESENT when the tailgate opening button is pressed. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for this status. Make sure the tailgate is not considered OPEN by displaying status ET050 Opening rear screen. If not, apply the fault finding procedures for this status. Check the connection and condition of the rear screen lock connector. Repair if necessary. Check for the earth on track 1 of the lock connector. Repair if necessary. Check, when pressing on the opening button, for + 12 V on track 2 of the lock connector. If okay, replace the rear screen lock. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-42

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault finding chart

87C

ALP 10

Fault locking/unlocking one or more doors

NOTES

First carry out a function fault finding check. Check whether configuration LC029 Selective opening element opening is WITH. Reconfigure with command CF036 Selective opening element opening, if necessary.

Use commands AC004 Central door locking, AC005 Central door unlocking and AC006 Unlocking by driver, to confirm the fault. Apply the fault finding procedure associated with these commands. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-43

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault finding chart

ALP 11

NOTES

87C

Fault with RAID function

First carry out a function fault finding check. Make sure the RAID function is active by checking status ET043 RAID function authorised by central door looking. Make sure no door is considered open by the UCH. Check the validity of the vehicle speed signal. Check for faults in the ABS system. Check for faults in the airbag system.

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-44

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

ALP 12

NOTES

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault finding chart

87C

Windows fail to close after two attempts to lock

Make sure the vehicle is really equipped with a one-touch electric window. Make sure status ET087 One-touch electric window authorisation is ACTIVE. See the treatment for this status if necessary.

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-45

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault finding chart

87C

ALP 13

No + accessories feed

NOTES

Check the battery voltage. Begin the fault finding with the ignition off and the vehicle locked. When the vehicle is unlocked, the instrument panel should light up for a moment. If not, apply the fault finding procedure for the multiplex network and instrument panel.

The vehicle should switch to timed power (approximately 20 minutes) after the driver's door is opened (ET053 Driver's door). If nothing happens, try by: – pushing the Start button (ET070 Ignition switch), or – switching on the hazard warning lights (ET085 Hazard warning lights button), or – switching on the side lights (ET081 Lighting switch position). If okay, run fault finding on the faulty component's status. If not okay, use ALP "No dialogue with UCH" in the UCH section. The vehicle goes into accessories feed mode when the Start button is pressed (timed power active). If not okay, check Start button operation with status ET070 Ignition switch and apply the fault finding procedure associated with this status if necessary. If the Start button works properly, use the fault finding procedure for status ET075 + accessories feed present. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-46

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault finding chart

87C

ALP 14

Forced after-ignition feed fails

NOTES

Check the battery voltage. Carry out a fault finding procedure on the function. Test with another card. Switching to + accessories feed should work. If not, first use ALP 13. It can be checked while trying to activate after ignition feed if the verlog indicator light: – remains on, meaning that the steering lock is not recognised. – Remains on for 3 seconds and flashes at 4 Hz, meaning the card is not recognised. Review of the procedure for forcing after ignition feed: + accessories feed off, card in reader, starting conditions not met, followed by a long (approximately 5 seconds) press on the Start button.

Make sure there is no "Insert card" message on the instrument panel. Make sure statuses: ET008 Blank central unit is NO. ET011 Blank card is PROGRAMMED. ET012 Card allocated is YES. See the procedure for these statuses if necessary. Make sure status ET110 UCH request to UPC or injection becomes + after ignition feed after a request for forced after ignition feed. If everything is okay, run Protection and Switching Unit fault finding. Make sure the steering column lock functions properly by checking in particular that: – status ET071 Unprogrammed steering lock is NO, ET072 Steering lock is UNLOCKED and ET073 Steering lock signal is UNLOCKED. See the procedure for these statuses if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-47

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault finding chart

87C

ALP 15

The vehicle fails to start and after ignition feed fails, card in reader

NOTES

Check the battery voltage. First carry out a function fault finding check. Switching to + accessories feed should work. If not, apply ALP 13 UCH first. Check that the start-up conditions are met: It can be checked while attempting to start if the immobiliser warning light: – Remains on, meaning that the steering lock is not recognised. – Remains on for 3 seconds and flashes at 4 Hz, meaning the card is not recognised. It can also be checked while trying to start; if the Start button flashes, the card has not been detected or recognised.

If the message "Insert card" appears on the instrument panel, check the following statuses: – ET116 Card code received must be ACTIVE. – If INACTIVE, run a test with the second vehicle card (if the vehicle had only one card, take a card from another SCENIC II vehicle and try to start the vehicle). – If ET116 becomes ACTIVE, reallocate the cards SC006 Card allocation. – If the fault is still present, replace the faulty card. – If ET116 remains INACTIVE, apply the fault finding procedure for DF014 - CC.0. If the message "Insert card" is not displayed on the instrument panel. Make sure statuses: – ET008 Blank central unit is NO. – ET011 Card blank is PROGRAMMED. – ET012 Card allocated is YES. See the procedure for these statuses if necessary. Make sure status ET110 UCH request to UPC or injection becomes START after a request to start. If everything is okay, run Protection and Switching Unit fault finding. Make sure the steering lock functions properly by checking in particular that: – status ET071 Unprogrammed steering lock is NO, ET072 Steering lock is UNLOCKED and ET073 Steering lock signal is UNLOCKED. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-48

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

ALP 16

NOTES

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault finding chart

87C

The vehicle fails to start and after ignition feed fails in hands-free mode, but works with card in reader

First carry out a function fault finding check. Test with another card. Switching to + accessories feed should work. If not, apply ALP 13 first. Check that the start-up conditions are met: Make sure the luggage compartment is considered closed by the UCH with status ET050 Tailgate. Conduct the tests with the other cards associated with the vehicle.

Make sure the UCH is properly configured for hands-free operation. Reconfigure if necessary. Make sure the cards belong to the vehicle and are properly configured by running command SC005 Card check. If the cards belong to the vehicle but have a faulty configuration, program them. Run command AC037 Transmitter aerial fault finding and see if a fault appears. In the event of a present or stored fault, refer to the procedure for it. Run command AC036 Interior aerial test and check the card coverage zone. The card reader should flash as soon as a card is detected within the coverage zone. When the card is outside the vehicle, it should not be detected by the interior aerials. If not okay, use the relevant fault finding procedure for each command. ATTENTION: this method allows detection of the presence of a Mégane hands-free type card, but not its recognition. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-49

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault finding chart

87C

ALP 17

Vehicle fails to start and goes into after ignition feed

NOTES

Check the battery voltage. Carry out a fault finding procedure on the function. Make sure the start-up conditions are met (no gear engaged). The engine immobiliser warning light can be used to see if the injection is still protected (if it remains on). Check the conformity of the antitheft and starting components.

Make sure status ET110 UCH request to injection or UPC is START if the start-up conditions are met when the button is pressed. If there is a fault, see the procedure for this status. If everything is okay, run fault finding on the ignition circuit in the Protection and Switching Unit. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-50

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault finding chart

87C

ALP 18

The starter briefly runs but the vehicle fails to start and goes into after ignition feed

NOTES

Carry out a fault finding procedure on the function. Check the conformity of the antitheft and starting components. The engine immobiliser warning light can be used to see if the injection is still protected (if it remains on).

If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-51

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault finding chart

ALP 19

NOTES

87C

Impossible to stop engine

Carry out a fault finding procedure on the function.

See whether the engine shuts off if the Start button is pressed twice. If it does, make sure the card is not considered absent by the UCH, particularly by checking for messages on the instrument panel. Make sure the button presses are properly perceived by the UCH with status ET070 Ignition switch. If not, see the treatment for this status. Make sure status ET110 UCH request to injection or UPC is STOP after when the button is pressed. If there is a fault, see the procedure for this status. Check the consistency of parameter PR008 Vehicle speed with the vehicle at rest. If not, run fault finding on the ABS. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-52

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault finding chart

87C

ALP 20

Steering lock fails

NOTES

Make sure there are no steering lock faults. Check the battery voltage. It should be between 9 V and 16 V. Check the consistency of parameter PR008 Vehicle speed. Make sure there are no airbag computer faults. Remember: With hands-free, the steering locks the instant the ignition is switched off. With card in reader, the steering locks after the ignition is switched off as soon as the card is removed.

Check the consistency of statuses ET072 Steering lock and ET073 Steering lock signal. In the event of a fault, see the procedure for these statuses in the UCH section. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-53

Edition 3

VSC Vdiag No.: 04

DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM Fault finding - Fault finding chart

ALP 21

NOTES

87C

Starting erratic

Carry out a fault finding procedure on the function.

Manual gearbox Make sure the clutch pedal switch works properly. Particularly by checking the consistency of status ET048 Clutch pedal position in the UCH. In the event of a fault, apply fault finding procedure DF003 Clutch switch circuit. Make sure that the brake pedal switch is working correctly. Particularly by checking the consistency of status ET047 Brake pedal position in the UCH. In the event of a fault, apply fault finding procedure DF004 Brake light switch circuit. Make sure that the gear selector lever is working correctly. Particularly by checking the consistency of status ET005 Manual gearbox gear lever position in the Protection and Switching Unit. In the event of a fault, use fault finding procedure for status ET005. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline. Automatic transmission Make sure that the brake pedal switch is working correctly. Particularly by checking the consistency of status ET047 Brake pedal position in the UCH. In the event of a fault, apply fault finding procedure DF004 Brake light switch circuit. Make sure the clutch pedal switch works properly. Particularly by checking the validity of status ET108 Automatic transmission lever position in the UCH. In the event of a fault, use fault finding procedure for status ET108. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

VSC84 1.0

87C-54

Edition 3

Vdiag No.: 04

PARKING PROXIMITY 187F SENSOR Fault finding - Introduction

87F

1. SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT This document describes the fault-finding applicable to all Electronic Central Units with the following characteristics: Vehicle(s): Scénic II

Name of computer: AAP

Function concerned: Parking aid

Program no.: 0000 VDIAG No.: 04

2. PREREQUISITES FOR FAULT FINDING Documentation type Fault finding procedures (this manual): – Assisted fault finding (incorporated into the diagnostic tool), paper version (Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note) and Dialogys. Wiring Diagrams: – Visu-Diagram (CD-ROM), paper. Type of diagnostic tools – CLIP Special tooling required Essential special tooling Multimeter Universal terminal unit Elé. 1681 3. REMINDERS Procedure To run diagnostics on the vehicle's computers, switch on the ignition in fault finding mode (+ after ignition forced setting). Proceed as follows: – Renault card on the card holder (keyless vehicle scenario 1, basic, not hands-free and scenario 2, top of the range, hands-free), – Press and hold start button (longer than 5 seconds) with start-up conditions not fulfilled, – Connect the diagnostic tool and perform the required operations. Note: The left-hand and right-hand Xenon bulb computers are powered when the dipped headlights are lit. Fault finding procedures can only be carried out on them after the ignition has been switched on in fault finding mode (+ after ignition forced setting) and the dipped headlights are on. To cut off + after ignition, proceed as follows: – Disconnect the diagnostic tool, – Press the start button twice briefly (less then 3 seconds), – Ensure that the + after ignition feed has been cut off by checking that the computer warning lights on the instrument panel have gone out.

AAP X84 - 1.0

87F-1

Vdiag No.: 04

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Introduction

87F

Faults Faults are declared to be either present or stored (depending on whether they appeared in a certain situation and have disappeared since, or whether they remain but are not diagnosed within the current context). The present or stored state of faults should be taken into consideration when the diagnostic tool is used after the + after ignition feed (without acting on the system components). For a present fault, apply the method described in the Interpretation of faults section. For a stored fault, note the faults displayed and apply the Notes section. If the fault is confirmed when the instructions in the Notes section are applied, the fault is present. Deal with the fault. If the fault is not confirmed, check: – the electrical lines which correspond to the fault, – the connectors for these lines (for oxidation, bent pins, etc.), – the resistance of the faulty component, – the condition of the wires (melted or cut insulation, wear). Conformity check The conformity check is designed to check the states and parameters which do not display any faults on the diagnostic tool when inconsistent. This phase therefore allows: – Fault finding on faults which are not displayed but which may correspond to a customer complaint. – Checks that the system operates correctly and that there is no risk of a fault reappearing after repairs. This section gives the fault finding procedures for states and parameters and the conditions for checking them. If a state is not operating normally or a parameter is outside permitted tolerance values, you should consult the corresponding fault finding page. Customer complaints - Fault finding chart If the diagnostic tool check is correct, but the customer complaint persists, the problem should be dealt with according to the customer complaint.

A synopsis of the general procedure to follow is provided on the following page in the form of a flow chart.

AAP X84 - 1.0

87F-2

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Introduction

Vdiag No.: 04

87F

4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Check the battery charge and condition of the fuses

Print the system fault finding log (available in CLIP or in the Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Notes)

Connect CLIP

Dialogue with the ECU?

no See CHART 1.

yes Read faults

no

Conformity check

Faults present

yes The symptom persists

Deal with faults found

Deal with stored faults

Problem solved

no

Problem solved

Use fault finding charts 5

no The symptom persists

no

Problem solved

The symptom persists

yes Contact Techline with the completed fault finding log

AAP X84 - 1.0

87F-3

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Introduction

Vdiag No.: 04

87F

5. FAULT FINDING LOG

WARNING:

WARNING All problems involving a complex system call for thorough diagnostics with the appropriate tools. The FAULT FINDING LOG, which should be completed during the fault finding procedure, ensures a record is kept of the procedure carried out. It is an essential item when discussing the fault with the constructor.

IT IS THEREFORE MANDATORY TO FILL OUT A FAULT FINDING SHEET EACH TIME FAULT FINDING IS DONE.

You will always be asked for this report: ● When requesting technical assistance from the Techline. ● For certification requests when replacing parts that must be certified. ● Which must be attached to monitored parts for which reimbursement is requested. It is therefore used to decide whether a reimbursement will be made under warranty and leads to improved analysis of the removed parts.

6. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS All work on components requires obeying safety rules to prevent physical damage or human injury: – Make sure the battery is properly charged to avoid damaging the computers with a low charge. – Use the proper tools.

AAP X84 - 1.0

87F-4

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Parking aid

Page 1 / 2

List of monitored parts: Computer ●

Administrative identification Date

2

0

Sheet completed by VIN Engine Diagnostic tool

CLIP

Version ●

Customer complaint 1198

Other

●

1198

Constant sound signal

1198

The system does not detect obstacles

004

Intermittently

Your comments

Conditions under which the customer complaint occurs 011

When switched on

005

While driving

009

Sudden breakdown

999

When reverse gear is engaged

Other

●

No sound signal

Your comments

Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure

Type of fault finding manual:

Workshop Repair Manual

Technical Note

Assisted fault finding

Fault Finding Manual No.: Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note No.: Other documentation Title and/or part no.: FD 24 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Parking aid ●

Page 2 / 2

Identification of the computer and system parts replaced

Part 1 part no. Part 2 part no. Part 3 part no. Part 4 part no. Part 5 part no. To be read with the diagnostic tool (Identification screen): Computer part no. Supplier no. Program no. Software version Calibration no. VDIAG ●

Faults found with the diagnostic tool Fault no.

●

Present

Fault title

Specification

Conditions when fault occurs State or parameter no.

●

Stored

Name of parameter

Value

Unit

System-specific information

Description:

●

Additional information

What factors led you to replace the computer? What other parts were replaced? Other defective functions? Your comments

FD 24 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

Vdiag No.: 04

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - System operation

87F

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION The system consists of four sensors mounted in the rear bumper, a computer and a buzzer. The system assists the driver during parking maneouvres by warning of any obstacles behind the car. – The sensors and the computer calculate the distance between the car and any obstacles. The sensors operate over a distance range from 20 - 30 cm minimum to 150 cm maximum. – The driver is informed of the distances by a buzzer. – The system only works when the vehicle is in reverse gear. Activation is signalled by a brief 0.5-second ON tone. The audible warning is activated when the car is 150 cm from the obstacle. As the distance diminishes, the frequency of the warning signal increases. When the distance reaches 20 - 30 cm, the warning signal becomes steady. – The system can only be activated with + after ignition feed. DEACTIVATING THE SYSTEM The parking aid system can be deactivated in two ways: – Temporary deactivation: a brief press (one second) on the parking aid switch on the instrument panel deactivates the system (the red light on the switch comes on). The function can be turned on again by a second brief press (the red light on the switch goes out) or by turning the ignition off and back on. – Permanent deactivation: the parking aid system can be deactivated for a longer time with a long press (about three seconds) on the parking aid switch on the instrument panel (the red light on the switch comes on). The function can be turned on again only by a second long press (the red light on the switch goes out). Note: The status screen of the fault-finding tool can be used to determine the state of the system (ready, detecting, suspended or off) with status ET003 "Parking aid function" (see conformity check or status interpretation). Fault finding A low 5-second audible signal informs the driver that a system fault has occurred when the ignition is switched on.

AAP X84 - 1.0

87F-7

Vdiag No.: 04

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Track allocation

87F

Computer track

Description

Destination track

1

+ 12 volts after ignition

2

+ 12 volts alarm

3

Computer EARTH

4

Reverse-gear signal (+ 12 volts)

5

Indicator light control

6

Alarm earth

Track 1 of the parking aid alarm

8

Diagnostic line K

Track 7 of the diagnostic socket

9

+ 12 volts proximity sensors

Track 1 of the 4 proximity sensors

10

Proximity sensors earth

Track 3 of the 4 proximity sensors

12

Parking-aid switch on/off signal

Track B1 of the parking aid switch

13

Right-hand inner sensor signal

Track 2 of the inner right sensor

14

Left-hand inner sensor signal

Track 2 of the inner left sensor

15

Left-hand outer sensor signal

Track 2 of the outer left sensor

16

Right-hand inner sensor signal

Track 11 of the Protection and Communication Unit PPH2 connector Track 2 of the parking aid alarm

Track 9 of the Protection and Communication Unit PPH2 connector Track B2 of the parking aid switch

7

11

Track 2 of the outer right sensor

Note: The computer and alarm are located on the left side of the luggage compartment behind the interior lining.

AAP X84 - 1.0

87F-8

Vdiag No.: 04

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Configuration and programming

87F

CONFIGURATION AFTER REPLACING THE COMPUTER Following a computer replacement, the parking aid computer has to be reconfigured to inform it of the body type with configuration "CF005 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION" (fault-finding tool repair-mode menu, configuration service). The configuration adapts the sensors' detection field to the type of body. The type of gearbox associated with the body type (automatic or manual transmission) determines the timing of the parking aid coming on. In fact, the parking aid coming on is indicated by a brief 5-second activation tone (vehicle is in reverse gear). In vehicles with automatic transmission, the 3-second timer prevents the activation tone from sounding every time the driver switches from Park to Drive. Two types of vehicle can be programmed: – J84 / R84 TA: Short and long Scénic II with automatic transmission. – J84 / R84 BVM: Short and long Scénic II with manual transmission. Following computer configuration, the configuration has to be confirmed by reading configuration "LC005 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION" (fault-finding tool repair-mode menu, read configuration service). SETTING OPTIONS At the customer's request, the volume and tone of the buzzer can be adjusted (fault-finding tool repair-mode menu, configuration service). Configuration "CF001 BUZZER VOLUME)" is used to adjust the volume. There are five selections: – NONE – LOW – MEDIUM – LOUD – MAXIMUM Configuration "CF006 TONE SETTING)" is used to adjust the tone of the buzzer. There are three selections: – 800 Hz – 1000 Hz – 2000 Hz (high-pitch) After the computer has been configured, the configuration has to be confirmed by reading configurations "LC001 BUZZER VOLUME" and "LC006 TONE SETTING" (fault-finding tool repair-mode menu, read configuration service).

AAP X84 - 1.0

87F-9

Vdiag No.: 04

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Summary table of faults

Fault names

87F DTC

DF002 OUTER LEFT SENSOR

90 01

DF003 INNER LEFT SENSOR

90 02

DF004 OUTER RIGHT SENSOR

90 04

DF005 INNER RIGHT SENSOR

90 03

DF006 BUZZER

90 06

DF007 SENSOR POWER SUPPLY

90 07

DF008 COMPUTER FAULT

90 05

DF012 PARKING AID SWITCH LIGHT

90 10

AAP X84 - 1.0

87F-10

Vdiag No.: 04

DF002 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87F

LEFT-HAND OUTER SENSOR CC.1 : Short circuit to + 12 V CO.0 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth 1.DEF: Internal electronic fault.

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: The fault is declared present after: – shifting into reverse if the parking aid system is ON (READY): parking aid light switch off, see the interpretation of status ET003 "Parking aid function".

Special notes: This fault is indicated by the buzzer (5-second alarm) and the system shuts off.

Switch off the ignition and disconnect the computer's 16-track connector. With the 16-track connector disconnected, measure resistances inside the computer: Ω ± 10 kΩ Ω. The computer resistance between track 15 and track 9 should be 215 kΩ Ω ± 5 kΩ Ω. The computer resistance between track 15 and track 10 should be 100 kΩ If the readings do not match the above values, or if there is a short circuit between the specified tracks, contact your Techline. If the above check fails to solve the problem, remove the rear bumper and disconnect the outer left proximity sensor's 3-track connector. Check the condition of the sensor connector. Replace the connector if necessary. Measure the resistance between sensor track 2 (signal) and track 1 (power). Replace the sensor if the resistance is not infinite. Then measure the resistance between sensor track 2 (signal) and track 3 (earth). Replace the sensor if the Ω ± 5 kΩ Ω (wait a few seconds for the reading to stabilize). resistance is not 98 kΩ With the ignition off, disconnect the parking-aid computer connector to check the insulation, continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Parking aid computer

Left-hand outer sensor

Track 9 Track 15 Track 10 Repair if necessary (see vehicle diagram).

Track 1 Track 2 Track 3

If the above checks fail to solve the problem, replace the outer left proximity sensor.

AFTER REPAIR

– Clear the fault memory. – Follow the instructions to confirm repair. – Deal with any other possible faults. AAP X84 - 1.0

87F-11

Vdiag No.: 04

DF003 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87F

LEFT-HAND INNER SENSOR CC.1 : Short circuit to + 12 V CO.0 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth 1.DEF: Internal electronic fault.

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: The fault is declared present after: – shifting into reverse if the parking aid system is ON (READY): parking aid light switch off, see the interpretation of status ET003 "Parking aid function".

Special notes: This fault is indicated by the buzzer (5-second alarm) and the system shuts off.

Switch off the ignition and disconnect the computer's 16-track connector. With the 16-track connector disconnected, measure resistances inside the computer: Ω ± 10 kΩ Ω. The computer resistance between track 14 and track 9 should be 215 kΩ Ω ± 5 kΩ Ω. The computer resistance between track 14 and track 10 should be 100 kΩ If the readings do not match the above values, or if there is a short circuit between the specified tracks, contact your Techline. If the above check fails to solve the problem, remove the rear bumper and disconnect the inner left proximity sensor's 3-track connector. Check the condition of the sensor connector. Replace the connector if necessary. Measure the resistance between sensor track 2 (signal) and track 1 (power). Replace the sensor if the resistance is not infinite. Then measure the resistance between sensor track 2 (signal) and track 3 (earth). Replace the sensor if the Ω ± 5 kΩ Ω (wait a few seconds for the reading to stabilize). resistance is not 98 kΩ With the ignition off, disconnect the parking-aid computer connector to check the insulation, continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Parking aid computer

Left-hand inner sensor

Track 9 track 14 track 10 Repair if necessary (see vehicle diagram).

Track 1 Track 2 Track 3

If the above checks fail to solve the problem, replace the inner left proximity sensor.

AFTER REPAIR

– Clear the fault memory. – Follow the instructions to confirm repair. – Deal with any other possible faults. AAP X84 - 1.0

87F-12

Vdiag No.: 04

DF004 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87F

RIGHT-HAND OUTER SENSOR CC.1 : Short circuit to + 12 V CO.0 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth 1.DEF: Internal electronic fault.

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: The fault is declared present after: – shifting into reverse if the parking aid system is ON (READY): parking aid light switch off, see the interpretation of status ET003 "Parking aid function".

Special notes: This fault is indicated by the buzzer (5-second alarm) and the system shuts off.

Switch off the ignition and disconnect the computer's 16-track connector. With the 16-track connector disconnected, measure resistances inside the computer: Ω ± 10 kΩ Ω. The computer resistance between track 16 and track 9 should be 215 kΩ Ω ± 5 kΩ Ω. The computer resistance between track 16 and track 10 should be 100 kΩ If the readings do not match the above values, or if there is a short circuit between the specified tracks, contact your Techline. If the above check fails to solve the problem, remove the rear bumper and disconnect the outer right proximity sensor's 3-track connector. Check the condition of the sensor connector. Replace the connector if necessary. Measure the resistance between sensor track 2 (signal) and track 1 (power). Replace the sensor if the resistance is not infinite. Then measure the resistance between sensor track 2 (signal) and track 3 (earth). Replace the sensor if the Ω ± 5 kΩ Ω (wait a few seconds for the reading to stabilize). resistance is not 98 kΩ With the ignition off, disconnect the parking-aid computer connector to check the insulation, continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Parking aid computer

Right-hand outer sensor

Track 9 Track 16 Track 10 Repair if necessary (see vehicle diagram).

Track 1 Track 2 Track 3

If the above checks fail to solve the problem, replace the outer right proximity sensor.

AFTER REPAIR

– Clear the fault memory. – Follow the instructions to confirm repair. – Deal with any other possible faults. AAP X84 - 1.0

87F-13

Vdiag No.: 04

DF005 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87F

RIGHT-HAND INNER SENSOR CC.1 : Short circuit to + 12 V CO.0 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth 1.DEF: Internal electronic fault.

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: The fault is declared present after: – shifting into reverse if the parking aid system is ON (READY): parking aid light switch off, see the interpretation of status ET003 "Parking aid function".

Special notes: This fault is indicated by the buzzer (5-second alarm) and the system shuts off.

Switch off the ignition and disconnect the computer's 16-track connector. With the 16-track connector disconnected, measure resistances inside the computer: Ω ± 10 kΩ Ω. The computer resistance between track 13 and track 9 should be 215 kΩ Ω ± 5 kΩ Ω. The computer resistance between track 13 and track 10 should be 100 kΩ If the readings do not match the above values, or if there is a short circuit between the specified tracks, contact your Techline. If the above check fails to solve the problem, remove the rear bumper and disconnect the inner right proximity sensor's 3-track connector. Check the condition of the sensor connector. Replace the connector if necessary. Measure the resistance between sensor track 2 (signal) and track 1 (power). Replace the sensor if the resistance is not infinite. Then measure the resistance between sensor track 2 (signal) and track 3 (earth). Replace the sensor if the Ω ± 5 kΩ Ω (wait a few seconds for the reading to stabilize). resistance is not 98 kΩ With the ignition off, disconnect the parking-aid computer connector to check the insulation, continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Parking aid computer

Right-hand inner sensor

Track 9 Track 13 Track 10 Repair if necessary (see vehicle diagram).

Track 1 Track 2 Track 3

If the above checks fail to solve the problem, replace the inner right proximity sensor.

AFTER REPAIR

– Clear the fault memory. – Follow the instructions to confirm repair. – Deal with any other possible faults. AAP X84 - 1.0

87F-14

Vdiag No.: 04

DF006 PRESENT OR STORED

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87F

BUZZER CC.1 : Short circuit to + 12 V CO.0 : Open circuit or short circuit to earth

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: The fault is declared present after: – shifting into reverse if the parking aid system is ON (READY): parking aid light switch off, see the interpretation of status ET003 "Parking aid function". NOTES Special notes: This fault is indicated by the absence of a 1-second signal from the buzzer when shifting into reverse.

Switch off the ignition and disconnect the computer's 16-track connector. With the 16-track connector disconnected, measure the resistance inside the computer between track 2 and track 6. The computer should have a resistance of 314 Ω. If the reading does not match the above values, or if there is a short circuit between the specified tracks, contact your Techline. Check the connection and condition of the connector on the buzzer. Replace the connector if necessary. With the ignition off, disconnect the parking-aid computer connector to check the insulation, continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Parking aid computer

Buzzer

Track 2 Track 2 Track 6 Track 1 Repair if necessary (see vehicle diagram). Measure the resistance of the buzzer between track 1 and track 2. Replace the buzzer if its resistance is not approximately 48 Ω. If the above checks fail to solve the problem, replace the buzzer.

AFTER REPAIR

– Clear the fault memory. – Follow the instructions to confirm repair. – Deal with any other possible faults. AAP X84 - 1.0

87F-15

Vdiag No.: 04

DF007 PRESENT OR STORED

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87F

SUPPLY VOLTAGE SENSORS CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Apply this fault finding procedure if the fault appears as present or stored again after: – clearing the fault, switching the ignition off and on, and shifting into reverse. NOTES Special notes: The sensors receive a 12-volt power supply directly from the computer.

With the parking aid computer 16-track connector connected and the ignition on, measure the sensor power supply coming from the computer. The power reading between track 9 (+ 12 V) and track 10 (earth) should be the same as the battery voltage (± 0.5 V). If there is not a 12-V power supply between the tracks specified above, remove the rear bumper to access the sensors. Switch off ignition and disconnect the parking-aid computer connector to check the insulation, continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Parking aid computer connector

Sensors

Track 9 Track 10

Track 1 of the four sensors Track 3 of the four sensors

Repair if necessary. If the sensor power supply tests okay (no short circuit), reconnect the computer connector and four sensor connectors. Turn on the ignition and disconnect the sensors, one at a time, to see if any of the sensors causes the power supply to drop. Replace the faulty sensor. If the fault persists, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

– Clear the fault memory. – Follow the instructions to confirm repair. – Deal with any other possible faults. AAP X84 - 1.0

87F-16

Vdiag No.: 04

DF008 PRESENT OR STORED

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87F

COMPUTER FAULT 1.DEF : Electric fault inside computer 2.DEF : Electric fault inside computer 3.DEF : Electric fault inside computer

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: Apply this fault finding procedure if the fault appears as present or stored again after: – clearing the fault, switching the ignition off and on, and shifting into reverse. NOTES

Special notes: If the fault is present and characterized 1.DEF, the system operates in defect mode (substitute values are used). If the fault is present and characterized 3.DEF, and the buzzer fails to sound when shifting into reverse, contact your Techline.

After following the instructions, if the fault recurs, switch off the ignition and disconnect the parking aid computer supply fuse (see vehicle diagram). Plug the fuse back in, switch the ignition back on, and do a fault reading. If the fault recurs, check the connections and condition of the parking aid computer connector (no damage to the connections). Repair if necessary. With the ignition off, disconnect the parking aid computer connector to make sure the power supply is okay and check the insulation, continuity and absence of interference resistance in the following connections: Parking aid computer connector Track 1 + After ignition (track 11 of the Protection and Switch Unit PPH2 connector) Track 3 Earth Repair if necessary (see vehicle diagram). If the above checks fail to solve the problem, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

– Clear the fault memory. – Follow the instructions to confirm repair. – Deal with any other possible faults. AAP X84 - 1.0

87F-17

Vdiag No.: 04

DF011 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87F

WARNING LIGHT CC.0 : Short circuit to earth CO.1 : Short circuit or open circuit to + 12 V

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to the stored fault: The fault is declared present after: – shifting into reverse and pressing the switch to turn off the parking aid.

Remove the parking aid switch and check the connections and condition of its connector. Repair if necessary. Check for an earth on track B3 of the parking aid switch connector. Repair if necessary. With the ignition off, disconnect the parking-aid switch connector to check the insulation, continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connection: Parking aid switch connector

Parking aid computer connector

Track B2 Repair if necessary.

Track 5

If the connection just checked is okay (no open or short circuit), and there is an earth on track B3 of the switch but the problem persists, replace the parking aid switch.

AFTER REPAIR

– Clear the fault memory. – Follow the instructions to confirm repair. – Deal with any other possible faults. AAP X84 - 1.0

87F-18

Vdiag No.: 04

NOTES

Order

Function

PARKING PROXIMITY 187F SENSOR Fault finding - Conformity check

Only check the conformity after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. Fault-finding test conditions: ignition on.

Setting Status Checked or Action ET003:

Parking aid function

Display and notes

Parking aid system status

Fault finding

READY (system operating and ready to detect) DETECTING (if the system is detecting)

1

87F

SUSPENDED (if the system is temporarily switched off)

For more information or, if there is a problem, see the fault finding for status ET003.

OFF (if the system is completely switched off)

2

ET004:

PARKING AID SWITCH

PRESS DETECTED when the switch is pressed, RELEASED when released.

PR006:

Sensor supply voltage

10.5 V < X < 14.4 V

If there is a problem, apply fault-finding procedure DF007.

PR020:

Computer supply voltage

10.5 V < X < 14.4 V

If there is a problem with this parameter, check the insulation, continuity and absence of interference resistance on the computer power supply and earth (see wiring diagrams). If the problem is still present, carry out a fault finding test on the charging circuit.

ET001:

Reverse gear engaged

YES or NO

In the event of a problem: see the fault finding procedure for status ET001.

Parking aid ON/ OFF switch.

3

Supplies

4

Reverse gear selection

If the switch does not operate as specified: Replace the switch.

AAP X84 - 1.0

87F-19

Vdiag No.: 04

NOTES

Order

Function

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Conformity check

Only check the conformity after a complete check with the diagnostic tool. Fault-finding test conditions: ignition on.

Parameter or State Check or Action ET002:

5

87F

Buzzer control

Buzzer control

Display and notes ON when the buzzer sounds.

Fault finding

If there is a fault, refer to the fault finding procedure for status ET002.

OFF otherwise.

6

PR001:

Left hand outer sensor distance

20 cm < X < 150 cm depending on the proximity of the obstacle. (value beyond detection: 255 cm).

In the event of a problem, refer to the fault finding procedure for parameter PR001.

PR002:

Left hand inner sensor distance

20 cm < X < 150 cm depending on the proximity of the obstacle. (value beyond detection: 255 cm).

In the event of a problem, refer to the fault finding procedure for parameter PR002.

PR003:

Right hand outer sensor distance

20 cm < X < 150 cm depending on the proximity of the obstacle. (value beyond detection: 255 cm).

In the event of a problem, refer to the fault finding procedure for parameter PR003.

PR004:

Right hand inner sensor distance

20 cm < X < 150 cm depending on the proximity of the obstacle. (value beyond detection: 255 cm).

In the event of a problem, refer to the fault finding procedure for parameter PR004.

PR005:

Shortest distance calculated

20 cm < X < 150 cm depending on the proximity of the obstacle. (value beyond detection: 255 cm).

In the event of a problem, refer to the fault finding procedure for parameter PR005.

Proximity sensors

AAP X84 - 1.0

87F-20

Vdiag No.: 04

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87F

REVERSE GEAR ENGAGED ET001

NOTES

Special note: This fault finding applies if reverse-gear status is not properly displayed (status displays YES or NO steadily, whether or not in reverse).

Make sure the reversing lights working properly: they should come on when shifting into and go off when shifting out of reverse. If the reversing lights fail to function as specified, make the necessary repairs. With the ignition off, disconnect the parking aid computer connector to check the insulation (against + 12 V), continuity, and absence of interference resistance in the following connection: Rear left hand lights connector

Parking aid computer connector Track 4 Repair if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Track 2

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

AAP X84 - 1.0

87F-21

Vdiag No.: 04

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87F

BUZZER CONTROL ET002

NOTES

ET002 remains OFF.

There must be no faults present or stored.

With the fault-finding tool's "main data" screen, make sure the parking aid system is really on with status ET003 "Parking aid function" (parking aid switch light off). If the status displayed is suspended or off, the system has to be reactivated by a one- or three-second press. See the interpretation of status ET003. With the fault-finding tool's configuration reading screen ("repair mode" menu), make sure that the parking aid system is properly configured for the type of body on which it is installed (LC005 "Vehicle identification": Mégane, automatic or manual transmission). Reconfigure the computer if necessary with command CF005 "Vehicle identification". With the vehicle near (20 to 150 cm) an obstacle, make sure the real distance matches the value displayed by the fault-finding tool (PR001 to PR004). If the distance is off or if the distance setting remains at 255 cm, make sure nothing is interfering with the reading (adhesive, mud, snow etc. on the rear bumper).

ET002 ON but buzzer fails to sound.

With the fault-finding tool's configuration reading screen, make sure the buzzer volume is not turned down full (LC001: NONE). If the volume setting is NONE, the computer has to be reconfigured with command CF001 "Buzzer volume". Select the volume setting preferred by the customer (low, medium, high, maximum). With the ignition off, disconnect the parking-aid computer connector to check the insulation, continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Parking aid computer

Buzzer

Track 2 Track 6 Repair if necessary (see vehicle diagram).

Track 1 Track 2

Measure the resistance between the buzzer's two tracks. Replace the buzzer if its resistance is not approximately 48 Ω. If the above checks fail to solve the problem, replace the buzzer.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

AAP X84 - 1.0

87F-22

Vdiag No.: 04

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Interpretation of states

87F

PARKING AID FUNCTION ET003

NOTES

Special notes: If the parking aid system is suspended or off, the parking aid switch light is on.

This status indicates whether the parking aid system is on or off: – ET003: READY This means that, when backing up, the parking aid system detects obstacles and the buzzer sounds (the parking aid switch light is off). – ET003: DETECTING an obstacle.

This status is displayed when in reverse and the parking aid system detects

– ET003: SUSPENDED This means the parking aid system is switched off (no detection possible). The suspension is temporary because the parking aid system comes back on after the ignition is switched off and on. The system can be suspended and turned back on manually with a brief press (one second) on the parking aid switch. – ET003: OFF This means the parking aid system is switched off (no detection possible). This suspension is permanent (turning the ignition off and on does not reactivate the system). The system can be turned off and on with a long press (three seconds) on the parking aid switch. If the status is not as specified, check for an earth on track A2 of the parking aid switch. Repair if necessary. With the ignition off, disconnect the parking aid switch connector to check the insulation (against the earth and + 12 V), continuity, and absence of interference resistance in the following connection: Parking aid switch connector

Parking aid computer connector

Track B1 Repair if necessary.

Track 12

If the connection just checked is okay (no open or short circuit), and there is an earth on track A2 of the switch but the problem persists, check switch operation with an ohmmeter. Switch not pressed: insulation between track A2 and B1. Switch pressed: continuity between track A2 and B1. Replace the parking aid switch if it fails to function as specified.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

AAP X84 - 1.0

87F-23

Vdiag No.: 04

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

PR001

87F

LEFT-HAND OUTER SENSOR DISTANCE

PR002

LEFT-HAND INNER SENSOR DISTANCE

PR003

RIGHT-HAND OUTER SENSOR DISTANCE

PR004

RIGHT-HAND INNER SENSOR DISTANCE

Special notes: Before tracking down a possible problem with these parameters, make sure no fault is present or stored. If there is one, use the diagnostic procedure associated with the fault detected by the fault-finding tool. NOTES NOTE: The ultrasonic sensors are very fragile. Therefore, when removing the rear bumper, be careful not to scratch them.

With the fault-finding tool's configuration reading screen ("repair mode" menu), make sure that the parking aid system is properly configured for the type of body on which it is installed (LC005 "Vehicle identification": Mégane, automatic or manual transmission). Reconfigure the computer if necessary with command CF005 "Vehicle identification". With the vehicle near (20 to 150 cm) an obstacle, make sure the real distance matches the value displayed by the fault-finding tool (PR001 to PR004). If the distance is off or if the distance setting remains at 255 cm, make sure nothing is interfering with the reading (adhesive, mud, snow etc. on the rear bumper). If the distances displayed by the sensors seem wrong or 255 cm is displayed steadily, check the condition of the sensor(s). There must be no scratches on the detection component (outer metal part) of the sensors. Replace the faulty sensor. If the problem persists, apply the fault-finding procedure to the sensor whose distance reading is wrong (even if the fault-finding tool does not report a fault).

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

AAP X84 - 1.0

87F-24

Vdiag No.: 04

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

87F

SHORTEST CALCULATED DISTANCE PR005

Special notes: Before tracking down a possible problem with these parameters, make sure no fault is present or stored. If there is one, use the diagnostic procedure associated with the fault detected by the fault-finding tool.

NOTES

NOTE: The ultrasonic sensors are very fragile. Therefore, when removing the rear bumper, be careful not to scratch them. This parameter is an average calculated by the computer when an obstacle is placed between two sensors. Below 30 cm, the calculated distance is displayed as 0 cm (critical detection wheel with intermittent or steady alarm).

With the fault-finding tool's configuration reading screen ("repair mode" menu), make sure that the parking aid system is properly configured for the type of body on which it is installed (LC005 "Vehicle identification": Mégane or Mégane 4X4, automatic or manual transmission). Reconfigure the computer if necessary with command CF005 "Vehicle identification". With the vehicle near (0 to 150 cm) an obstacle, see if the calculated distance is accurate. If the distance is off or if the distance setting remains at 255 cm, make sure nothing is interfering with the reading (adhesive, mud, snow etc. on the rear bumper). If the calculated distance is still off or displaying 255 cm steadily, check the condition of the sensors, which must not have any scratches on the detection component (outer metal part). Replace the faulty sensor. If the problem persists, apply the fault-finding procedure to the sensor whose distance reading is wrong (even if the fault-finding tool does not report a fault).

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

AAP X84 - 1.0

87F-25

Vdiag No.: 04

NOTES

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Customer complaints

87F

Only consult the customer complaints after a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

NO DIALOGUE WITH THE COMPUTER

CHART 1

NO SOUND SIGNAL

CHART 2

CONSTANT SOUND SIGNAL (no obstacle detection)

CHART 3

AAP X84 - 1.0

87F-26

Vdiag No.: 04

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Fault finding chart

CHART 1

NOTES

87F

No dialogue with the computer

None.

Try the diagnostic tool on another vehicle. Check: – The connection between the diagnostic tool and the diagnostic socket (wiring in good condition), – the injection, engine and passenger compartment fuses. Check for the presence of + 12 V battery on track 16, and + 12 V after ignition on track 1 and an earth on track 5 and on track 4 of the diagnostic socket. Repair if necessary. With the ignition off, disconnect the parking-aid computer connector to check the insulation, continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Parking aid computer connector Track 1 Track 3 Track 8 Repair if necessary (see vehicle diagram).

AFTER REPAIR

+ Before ignition (see vehicle diagram) Earth track 7 of the diagnostic socket (line K)

Perform a complete check using the diagnostic tool.

AAP X84 - 1.0

87F-27

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Fault finding chart

Vdiag No.: 04

87F

CHART 2

No sound signal

NOTES

Only investigate this customer complaint after a full check with the diagnostic tool (no faults must be present or stored).

At the fault-finding tool's main data screen, make sure the parking aid system is really on. Status ET003 "Parking aid function" must be "READY" (and the red light on the parking aid switch must be off). Is status ET003 okay?

No

Yes

Turn on the parking aid system by pressing on the switch for 1 or 3 seconds (the red light should go out). NOTE: For more details about system activation, see the interpretation of status ET003.

At the fault-finding tool's main data screen, make sure reverse really is engaged. Status ET001 "Reverse engaged" must be "YES". Also make sure the reversing lights really come on when reverse is engaged. Is status ET001 okay?

No

Apply the fault-finding procedure for status ET001.

Yes

Reconfigure the buzzer volume with the fault-finding tool (command CF001 "Buzzer volume").

Yes At the fault-finding tool's read configuration screen, make sure the buzzer volume is not turned down completely (setting LC001 "Buzzer volume" must not be NONE). Is setting LC001 "NONE"? No Check the connection and condition of the connector on the buzzer (located in the left rear wing). Replace the connector if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Check that the system is operating correctly.

AAP X84 - 1.0

87F-28

Vdiag No.: 04

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Fault finding chart

87F

CHART 2 CONTINUED

With the fault-finding tool's parameter screen (PR001, PR002, PR003, PR004), make sure the proximity sensors really detect obstacles (between 20 and 150 cm). Do the parameters specified above display distances (with an obstacle in front of the rear bumper)?

Apply the fault-finding procedure for parameters (PR001, PR002, PR003, PR004).

No

Yes Place an obstacle in front of the rear bumper to have the tool display a distance reading. During the detection, make sure the buzzer has a proper power supply by taking a reading between track 1 and track 2 on the buzzer. During this test, is the buzzer receiving power? Yes

No

Measure the resistance between the buzzer's two tracks. Replace the buzzer if its resistance is not approximately 48 Ω .

With the ignition off, disconnect the parking-aid computer connector to check the insulation, continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connections:

Is the fault still present?

Parking aid computer

yes

Track 2 Track 2 Track 6 Track 1 Repair if necessary (see vehicle diagram).

No

Buzzer

Is the fault still present? Replace the alarm. No

End of fault finding.

AFTER REPAIR

yes

Contact your Techline.

Check that the system is operating correctly.

AAP X84 - 1.0

87F-29

PARKING PROXIMITY SENSOR Fault finding - Fault finding chart

Vdiag No.: 04

87F

CHART 3

Steady alarm (no obstacle detection)

NOTES

Only investigate this customer complaint after a full check with the diagnostic tool (no faults must be present or stored).

With the ignition off, disconnect the parking-aid computer connector to check the insulation, continuity and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Parking aid computer

Buzzer

Track 2 Track 2 Track 6 Track 1 NOTE: The line running from track 6 of the computer must be insulated against + 12 V and the one from track 2 of the computer must be insulated against the earth. Repair if necessary (see vehicle diagram). No

Is the fault still present?

End of fault finding.

Yes With no obstacle less than 150 cm in front of the rear bumper, make sure the distance reading on the faultfinding tool is 255 cm "out of range" (PR001, PR002, PR003, PR004). If those parameters display a setting even though there is no obstacle in front of the rear bumper, make sure nothing is interfering with the reading (adhesive, mud, snow etc. on the rear bumper). Repair if necessary.

End of fault finding.

AFTER REPAIR

Check that the system is operating correctly.

AAP X84 - 1.0

87F-30

187G

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Introduction

87G

1. SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT This document presents the fault finding procedure applicable to all computers with the following specifications: Vehicle(s): MEGANE II, SCENIC II Function concerned: UPC

Name of computer: UPC VDIAG No.: 44

2. PREREQUISITES FOR FAULT FINDING Documentation type Fault finding procedures (this manual): – Assisted fault finding (integrated into the fault finding tool), Dialogys. Wiring diagrams: – Visu-Schéma (CD-ROM), paper version. Type of diagnostic tools – CLIP Special tooling required

Special tooling required Multimeter Universal bornier 3. RECAP Procedure To run diagnostics on the vehicle's computers, switch on the ignition in fault finding mode (forced + after ignition feed). Proceed as follows: – Put the vehicle card in the card reader. – press and hold Start button (longer than 5 seconds) with start-up conditions not fulfilled, – connect the diagnostic tool and perform the desired operations. Note: The left-hand and right-hand discharge bulb computers are powered when the dipped headlights are lit. Fault finding procedures can only be carried out on them after the ignition has been switched on in fault finding mode (+ after ignition imposed) and the dipped headlights are on. To cut off the + after ignition feed, proceed as follows: – disconnect the diagnostic tool, – press the Start button twice briefly (less than 3 seconds), – Check that the computer warning lights on the instrument panel have gone out to confirm that the + after ignition feed has been cut off.

UPC84 2.0

87G-1

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Introduction

87G

Faults Faults are declared as either present or stored (depending on whether they appeared in a certain context and have disappeared since, or whether they remain present but have not been diagnosed within the current context). The present or stored status of the fault should be taken into consideration when the fault finding tool is used after the + after ignition feed has been connected (without any of the system components being activated). For a present fault, apply the procedure described in the Interpretation of faults section. For a stored fault, note the faults displayed and apply the instructions in the Notes section. If the fault is confirmed when the instructions in the Notes section are applied, the fault is present. Deal with the fault If the fault is not confirmed, check: – the electrical lines which correspond to the fault, – the connectors on these lines (corrosion, bent pins, etc.), – the resistance of the component detected as faulty, – the condition of the wires (melted or split insulation, wear).

Conformity check The aim of the conformity check is to check statuses and parameters that do not produce a fault display on the diagnostic tool because they are inconsistent. Therefore, this phase is used: – to carry out fault finding on faults that do not have a fault display, and which may correspond to a customer complaint. – to check that the system is operating correctly and that there is no risk of a fault recurring after repair. This section gives the fault finding procedures for statuses and parameters and the conditions for checking them. If a status is not behaving normally or a parameter is outside the permitted tolerance values, consult the corresponding fault finding page.

Customer complaints - Fault finding chart If the test with the diagnostic tool is OK but the customer complaint is still present, the fault should be treated by customer complaints.

A summary of the overall procedure to follow is provided on the following page in the form of a flow chart.

UPC84 2.0

87G-2

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Introduction

87G

4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Check the battery charge and the condition of the fuses

Print the system fault finding log (available on CLIP or in the MR or NT)

Connect CLIP

Dialogue with computer?

no See ALP no. 1

yes Read the faults

Faults present

no Conformity check

yes The cause is still present

Deal with present faults

no

Fault solved

Deal with stored faults Use the fault finding charts (ALPs)

The cause is still present

no

Fault solved

The cause is still present

no

Fault solved

yes

Contact the Techline with the completed fault finding log

UPC84 2.0

87G-3

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Introduction

87G

Wiring check: Fault finding problems: Disconnecting the connectors and/or manipulating the wiring harness may temporarily remove the cause of a fault. Electrical measurements of voltage, resistance and insulation are generally correct, especially if the fault is not present when the analysis is made (stored fault). Visual inspection: Look for damage under the bonnet and in the passenger compartment. Carefully check the protective parts, insulators and wiring harness routing. Look for signs of oxidation. Tactile inspection: While manipulating the wiring harness, use the diagnostic tool to note any change in fault status from stored to present. Make sure that the connectors are properly tightened, Apply light pressure to the connectors, Twist the wiring harness. If there is a change in status, try to locate the source of the fault. Inspection of each component: Disconnect the connectors and check the appearance of the clips and tabs, as well as their crimping (no crimping on the insulating section). Make sure that the clips and tabs are properly locked in the sockets. Check that no clips or tabs have been dislodged during connection. Check the clip contact pressure using an appropriate model of tab. Resistance check: Check the continuity of entire lines, then section by section. Look for a short circuit to earth, the +12 V feed or with another wire. If a fault is detected, repair or replace the wiring harness.

UPC84 2.0

87G-4

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Introduction

87G

5. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE

IMPORTANT!

IMPORTANT Any fault on a complex system requires thorough fault finding with the appropriate tools. The FAULT FINDING LOG, which should be completed during the procedure, enables you to keep track of the procedure which is carried out. It is an essential document when consulting the manufacturer.

IT IS THEREFORE MANDATORY TO FILL OUT A FAULT FINDING LOG FOR EACH FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE. You are always asked for this log: – when requesting technical assistance from the Techline, – for approval requests when replacing parts for which approval is obligatory, – to be enclosed when returning monitored parts on request. The log is needed for warranty reimbursement, and enables better analysis of the parts removed.

6. SAFETY ADVICE All work on components requires that the safety rules be obeyed to prevent damage or injury: – Make sure that the battery is properly charged to avoid damaging the computers with a low load. – Use the appropriate tools.

UPC84 2.0

87G-5

Edition 5

FAULT FINDING LOG System: All types

Page 1/2

List of monitored parts: Computer ●

Administrative identification Date

2

0

Log completed by VIN Engine Fault finding tool

CLIP

Update version ●

Customer complaint

Please specify:

●

Conditions under which the customer complaint occurs

Please specify:

●

Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure used

Type of fault finding manual:

Workshop Repair Manual

Technical Note

Assisted fault finding

Fault finding manual no: Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note No: Other documentation Title and/or part number:

FD 97 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

FAULT FINDING LOG System: All types ●

Page 2/2

Computer identification and system parts replaced

Part 1 part no. Part 2 part no. Part 3 part no. Part 4 part no. Part 5 part no. To be read with the Fault finding tool (Identification screen): Computer part no. Supplier no. Program no. Software version Calibration no. VDIAG ●

Faults found with the fault finding tool Fault no.

●

Present

Fault name

Specification

Conditions under which fault occurs Status or parameter no.

●

Stored

Parameter name

Value

Unit

System-specific information

Description:

●

Additional information

What factors led you to replace the computer? What other parts were replaced? Other faulty functions? Please specify:

FD 97 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87G

1. GENERAL FUNCTIONING The Protection and Switching Unit (UPC) is involved in the following functions: – distribution and protection of the electric power, – keyless vehicle, – wipers, – lighting, – de-icing, – air conditioning, – oil pressure detection, Distribution and protection of the electric power supply The principal function of the Protection and Switching Unit is to switch and distribute the power supply to the vehicle's systems, actuators or computers. Another part of the power supply distribution is housed in the engine compartment connection unit but it is not electronically controlled by the computer. +12 V battery feed The Protection and Switching Unit receives power from the battery via the 1 track screwed-in connector and redistributes the +12 V around the vehicle. + after ignition feed The UCH requests the + after ignition feed via the multiplex network. When the Protection and Switching Unit receives this request, it unconditionally controls the after ignition relay. Managing the Power Supply The computer transmits the alternator charge signal via the multiplex network. Keyless vehicle In the keyless vehicle function, the Protection and Switching Unit is involved with the starting sub-function. The computer: – receives the start request from the Protection and Switching Unit via the multiplex network, – checks that the start conditions are satisfied then instructs the starter relay, – can inhibit or switch off the starter relay control in response to a signal to prohibit starting transmitted by the injection computer via the multiplex network. Air conditioning For details on the operation of this function and the role of the Protection and Switching Unit in its operation (see 62A, Air conditioning, Function layout and general operating mode). Cold loop The computer receives the compressor switch-on request from the injection via the multiplex network. The computer controls the compressor clutch engagement relay. Heating The computer also controls the rear screen de-icer and the electric door mirrors. Fan assembly When requested by the engine management, the Protection and Switching Unit supplies power to the fan assembly.

UPC84 2.0

87G-8

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87G

Front wipers The Protection and Switching Unit receives requests from the UCH wipers via the multiplex network. The computer then executes the following requests: – low or high speed windscreen wiper, – windscreen wiper park position Lights The Protection and Switching Unit receives lighting requests from the UCH via the multiplex network. The computer then executes the following requests: – side lights – dipped headlights, – main beam headlights, – front fog light. Oil pressure detection, The Protection and Switching Unit receives the oil pressure sensor signal and makes it available via the multiplex network.

2. PROTECTION AND SWITCHING UNIT LEVELS Vehicles can be equipped with 3 levels of Protection and Switching Unit: – Entry level Protection and Switching Unit N1, – Top of the range Protection and Switching Unit N2, – Top of the range Protection and Switching Unit N3, Only the Top of the range Protection and Switching Units N2 and N3 are available as spare parts. The N2 and N3 versions can be distinguished in the way the high speed fan assembly is controlled: – in the N2 version, the Protection and Switching Unit controls an external relay, – in the N3 version, the relay is integrated in the Protection and Switching Unit.

UPC84 2.0

87G-9

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Allocation of computer tracks

87G

The Protection and Switching Unit is located in the engine compartment connection unit (engine compartment). See the Technical Note Wiring Diagram for the faulty vehicle for allocation of tracks and to consult the Wiring Diagrams.

UPC84 2.0

87G-10

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Replacing components

87G

1. REPLACING THE COMPUTER See Mechanical MR 364, 87G, Engine compartment connection unit (Megane) or MR 370 Mechanical, 87G, Engine compartment connection unit (Scenic). Following replacement: ● Configure the alternator type using command CF001 Alternator Type (see Configurations and programming). ● Find the Vehicle Identification Number using command VP003 Write the VIN.

UPC84 2.0

87G-11

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Configurations and programming

NOTES

No.

Ignition on, engine off.

Related configuration reading

Configuration

ALTERNATOR TYPE: CF001

87G

TG11 110 VALEO SG12 VALEO LIE8 150 BOSCH SG15L VALEO MELCO 8GM

LC001

Note:

Enter information about the alternator fitted in the vehicle then confirm. (MELCO = Mitsubishi Electronics Corporation)

No.

Other parameters

Note:

VP003

WRITE THE VIN:

Enter the vehicle identification number then confirm.

UPC84 2.0

87G-12

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Summary of faults

87G

Tool fault

Associated DTC

Fault finding tool title

DF002

9210

FAN ASSEMBLY HIGH SPEED RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT

DF005

920E

INTERNAL ELECTRONIC FAULT

DF009

920D

+ AFTER IGNITION FEED CIRCUIT

UPC84 2.0

87G-13

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

FAN ASSEMBLY HIGH SPEED RELAY CONTROL CIRCUIT DF002 PRESENT

NOTES

CC.1 : Short circuit to +12 V

Special notes: The function is inhibited if the fault is present. Reactivation of the function by a new after ignition request.

Measure the resistance between tracks 1 and 2. If the resistance is not 65 Ω ± 10 Ω, replace the relay. Remove the relay and ensure insulation against +12 V on the connection: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPM2 track 2 Track 2 of the fan assembly relay connector Repair if necessary. If the fault continues, check the absence of +12 V on track 2 of connector PPM2 of the Protection and Switching Unit. If +12 V is present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory. Turn the ignition off and back on, then run another check with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-14

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

INTERNAL ELECTRONIC FAULT DF005 PRESENT

NOTES

DEF : Internal electronic fault

None

Disconnect the battery for 30 seconds, then reconnect it. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory. Turn the ignition off and back on, then run another check with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-15

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

+ AFTER IGNITION FEED CIRCUIT DF009 PRESENT

NOTES

DEF : Consistency

None

Check the voltage of the battery. Check that the status of ET026 + after ignition feed is consistent Check the condition of the fuses on the battery positive terminal. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and the connection of the + battery feed to the Protection and Switching Unit mounting and to connector P2. Repair if necessary. With the ignition off, check the absence of +12 V on track 6 of connector PPM2 of the Protection and Switching Unit. If +12 Vfound, remove the following fuses one by one to pinpoint the faulty track: – fuse 5C (track 6 connector PPM2), – fuse 5D (track 1 connector PEH), – fuse 5E (track 10 connector PPH2), – fuse 5F (track 11 connector PPH2), – fuse 5G (track 7 connector PPM2), – fuse 5H (track 10 connector PPM2). With the help of a wiring diagram, check the insulation against +12 V of the connection between the faulty track on the Protection and Switching Unit and the computers or consumers connected to this track. With the ignition on, check for the presence of +12 V on one of the following tracks on the Protection and Switching Unit: – track 1 of the connector PEH – tracks 6, 7 and 10 of connector PPM2 – tracks 10 and 11 of connector PPH2 If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory. Turn the ignition off and back on, then run another check with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-16

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

NOTES

87G

Only check conformity after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Test conditions: Engine stopped, ignition on.

MAIN SCREEN

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Order

Function

Display and notes

1

Charging circuit

ET001:

Battery warning light

LIT

2

Oil pressure contact

ET027:

Oil pressure contact

CLOSED

3

Gearbox

ET004:

Reverse gear engaged

YES NO

Fault finding

If there are any faults, consult the corresponding fault finding procedure.

UPC84 2.0

87G-17

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

NOTES

87G

Only check conformity after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Test conditions: Engine stopped, ignition on.

KEYLESS VEHICLE: Starting

Order

Function

Parameter or Status checked or Action ET004:

1

2

Reverse gear engaged

YES NO

Manual gearbox lever

NEUTRAL NOT IN NEUTRAL NOT SUPPORTED, if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic transmission

Gearbox ET005:

Starting

ET010:

Display and notes

Starting conditions met

YES, if the starting conditions are met and the Start button is then pressed NO, if the starting conditions are not met or if the Start button is not pressed

Fault finding

If there are any faults, consult the corresponding fault finding procedure.

UPC84 2.0

87G-18

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

NOTES

87G

Only check conformity after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Test conditions: Engine stopped, ignition on.

AIR CONDITIONING: Heating

Order

Function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes

Alternator charge

In % The value must be fixed, above 98%

Rear screen heating

The heating resistors of the rear screen and door mirrors (if the vehicle has heated door mirrors) must be receiving power and warming up

PR010:

1

Starting AC011:

Fault finding

If there are any faults, consult the corresponding fault finding procedure.

AIR CONDITIONING: Cold loop

Order

Function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

AC009:

1

The fan should be heard running at low speed

Low speed fan assembly

Fan assembly

Air conditioning

Fault finding

The fan should be heard running at high speed AC010:

2

Display and notes

AC008:

High speed fan assembly

Compressor control

This command cannot be executed in vehicles which are not fitted with air conditioning

If there are any faults, consult the corresponding fault finding procedure.

Compressor clutch should be heard (command prohibited with the engine running)

UPC84 2.0

87G-19

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

NOTES

87G

Only check conformity after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Test conditions: Engine stopped, ignition on.

WIPERS: Wiper power

Order

Function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes The wiper should run for one sweep then stop in its initial position.

1

Park position

AC012:

Windscreen wiper park position test

2

Wiper protection

ET002:

Windscreen wiper protection

INACTIVE

AC005:

Windscreen wiper low speed

The wiper should run at low speed.

AC006:

Windscreen wiper high speed

The wiper should run at high speed.

3

Wipers

Fault finding

If there are any faults, consult the corresponding fault finding procedure.

UPC84 2.0

87G-20

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

NOTES

87G

Only check conformity after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Test conditions: Engine stopped, ignition on.

LIGHTING: Lighting power

Order

Function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Side lights

The front and rear side lights and number plate lights should light up along with the controls and switches in the passenger compartment.

AC002:

Dipped headlights

The dipped beam headlights should come on.

AC001:

Main beam headlights

The main beam headlights should come on.

AC004:

Front fog lights

The front fog lights should come on.

AC003:

1

Lighting

Display and notes

Fault finding

If there are any faults, consult the corresponding fault finding procedure.

UPC84 2.0

87G-21

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

NOTES

87G

Only check conformity after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Operating Condition: engine running.

MAIN SCREEN

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Order

Function

Display and notes

1

Charging circuit

ET001:

Battery warning light

OFF

2

Oil pressure contact

ET027:

Oil pressure contact

OPEN

3

Gearbox

ET004:

Reverse gear engaged

YES NO

Fault finding

If there are any faults, consult the corresponding fault finding procedure.

UPC84 2.0

87G-22

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

NOTES

87G

Only check conformity after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Operating Condition: engine running.

KEYLESS VEHICLE: Starting

Order

Function

Parameter or Status checked or Action ET004:

1

2

Reverse gear engaged

YES NO

Manual gearbox lever

NEUTRAL NOT IN NEUTRAL NOT SUPPORTED, if the vehicle is fitted with an automatic transmission

Gearbox ET005:

Starting

ET010:

Display and Notes

Starting conditions met

YES, if the starting conditions are met and the Start is then button pressed NO, if the starting conditions are not met or if the Start button is not pressed

Fault finding

If there are any faults, consult the corresponding fault finding procedure.

UPC84 2.0

87G-23

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

NOTES

87G

Only check conformity after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Operating Condition: engine running.

AIR CONDITIONING: Heating

Order

Function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

PR010:

1

Alternator charge

In % The value varies according to the consumption of electricity.

Rear screen heating

The heating resistors of the rear screen and door mirrors (if the vehicle has heated door mirrors) must be receiving power and warming up

Starting AC011:

Display and notes

Fault finding

If there are any faults, consult the corresponding fault finding procedure.

AIR CONDITIONING - Cold loop:

Order

Function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

AC009:

1

2

Display and notes The fan should be heard running at low speed

Low speed fan assembly

The fan should be heard running at high speed

Fan assembly

Air conditioning

AC010:

High speed fan assembly

AC008:

Compressor control

Fault finding

This command cannot be executed in vehicles which are not fitted with air conditioning

If there are any faults, consult the corresponding fault finding procedure.

(command prohibited with engine running)

UPC84 2.0

87G-24

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

NOTES

87G

Only check conformity after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Operating Condition: engine running.

WIPERS: Wiper power

Order

Function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and notes The wiper should be activated for one sweep then stop in its initial position.

Park position

AC012:

Windscreen wiper park position test

Wiper protection

ET002:

Windscreen wiper protection

INACTIVE

AC005:

Windscreen wiper low speed

The wiper should run at low speed.

AC006:

Windscreen wiper high speed

The wiper should run at high speed.

1

Wipers

Fault finding

If there are any faults, consult the corresponding fault finding procedure.

UPC84 2.0

87G-25

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

NOTES

87G

Only check conformity after a complete check using the diagnostic tool. Operating Condition: engine running.

LIGHTING: Lighting power

Order

Function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Side lights

The front and rear side lights and number plate lights should light up along with the controls and switches in the passenger compartment.

AC002:

Dipped headlights

The dipped beam headlights should come on.

AC001:

Main beam headlights

The main beam headlights should come on.

AC004:

Front fog lights

The front fog lights should come on.

AC003:

1

Lighting

Display and notes

Fault finding

If there are any faults, consult the corresponding fault finding procedure.

UPC84 2.0

87G-26

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Statuses and parameters summary table

87G

Tool status

Fault finding tool title

ET001

BATTERY WARNING LIGHT

ET002

WINDSCREEN WIPER PROTECTION

ET004

REVERSE GEAR ENGAGED

ET005

MANUAL GEAR LEVER POSITION

ET010

STARTING CONDITIONS MET

ET013

HIGH SPEED FAN ASSEMBLY RELAY CONTROL

ET026

+ AFTER IGNITION FEED

ET027

Tool parameter

Fault finding tool title

PR010

ALTERNATOR CHARGE

UPC84 2.0

87G-27

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87G

BATTERY WARNING LIGHT ET001

NOTES

Check that the status is OUT with engine running and LIT with engine stopped, ignition on. Check consistency with the instrument panel warning light.

With engine running, check that the battery voltage is well above +12 V. Perform a fault finding procedure on the charge circuit if necessary. Check the status and the connection of the PEM connector on the Protection and Switching Unit and the connections on the alternator. Repair if necessary. Switch off the ignition and ensure the insulation against +12 V and the continuity of the connection: Protection and Switching Unit PEM connector track 8 Track 1 of the 2-track alternator connector Repair if necessary. With the ignition on, ensure insulation against earth and continuity of the connection between: Protection and Switching Unit PEM connector track 8 Track 1 of the 2-track alternator connector Repair if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-28

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87G

WINDSCREEN WIPER PROTECTION ET002

First check the good operation of the windscreen wiper motor by running the commands AC005 Windscreen wiper low speed and AC006 Windscreen wiper high speedcontrols, then check the park position using the command AC012 Test windscreen wiper park position.

NOTES

These statuses are in order of severity or persistence of wiper malfunction. – If the status is INACTIVE, the wipers are functioning normally. – If the status is LOW SPEED, the Protection and Switching Unit has found an abnormal high speed wiper operation for more than 6 seconds (blocked or jamming); wipers are therefore restricted to low speed following a request for high speed wipers, – If the status is TIME DELAYED, the wipers are stopped for 10 seconds after a fault has been found is persisting (blocked or jamming), – If the status is BLOCKED, the wipers are stopped for 30 seconds after a period of malfunction greater than 2 minutes. The status returns to INACTIVE as soon as the UCH requests another wiping setpoint (wiper control adjusted, or request by the rain sensor).

Make sure that nothing is mechanically blocking movement of the wiper arms (blades stuck, condition and assembly of the wiper mechanism linkage and no object is interfering with the motion of the mechanism). Check that the windscreen wiper mechanism is not sticking. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of connectors PPH2, PEH on the Protection and Switching Unit and of the windscreen wiper motor. Repair if necessary.

UPC84 2.0

87G-29

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87G

ET002 (continued)

Check the continuity and insulation against earth of the following connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector PEH track 6 Track 2, windscreen wiper motor connector Protection and Switching Unit connector PPH2 track 1 Track 5, windscreen wiper motor connector Protection and Switching Unit connector PPH2 track 2 Track 4, windscreen wiper motor connector Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-30

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87G

REVERSE GEAR ENGAGED ET004

NOTES

Check fuse 5C on the Protection and Switching Unit and replace if necessary.

MANUAL GEARBOX Check the condition and connection of the reverse gear switch connector and connector PPM2 of the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. With the ignition on and reverse engaged, check for the presence of +12 V on track 9 of connector PPM2. If not correct, ensure the continuity and insulation against earth of the connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPM2 track 9 Track 1 (track 3 of ND0 gearbox) of switch Protection and Switching Unit connector PPM2 track 6 Track 2 (track 1 of ND0 gearbox) of switch Repair if necessary. With reverse gear engaged, check the continuity of tracks 1 and 2 (or tracks 1 and 3 of ND0 gearbox) of switch. Replace the reverse gear switch if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

UPC84 2.0

87G-31

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87G

ET004 (continued)

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION Check the condition and connection of the multifunction switch connector and connector PPM2 of the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. With the ignition on and reverse engaged, check for the presence of +12 V on track 9 of connector PPM2. If not correct, ensure the continuity and insulation against earth of the connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPM2 track 9 Track 1 of the multifunction switch Protection and Switching Unit connector PPM2 track 6 Track 2 of the multifunction switch Repair if necessary. With reverse gear engaged, check the continuity of tracks 1 and 2 of the switch. Replace the multifunction switch if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-32

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87G

MANUAL GEAR LEVER POSITION ET005

NOTES

Check fuse 5C on the Protection and Switching Unit and replace if necessary. Only applies to vehicles fitted with automatic transmission.

Check the status and the connection of the neutral connector switch and connectors PPM2 and PEM of the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. With the ignition on and in neutral, check for the presence of +12 V on track 6 of connector PEM. If not correct, ensure the insulation against earth and the continuity of the connection between the switch and track 6 of the connector PEM on the Protection and Switching Unit. Check the correct operation of the switch: there should be continuity between tracks 1 and 2 of the switch when the gearbox is in neutral. there should be an open circuit between tracks 1 and 2 of the switch when in gear. If faulty, replace the switch. With the ignition on, check for the presence of +12 V on track 2 (track 1 if equipped with ND0 gearbox) of the neutral switch connector. If not correct, check for the insulation against earth and the continuity of the connection between the switch and track 6 of connector PPM2 of the Protection and Switching Unit. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-33

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87G

OIL PRESSURE CONTACT ET009

NOTES

CLOSED engine stopped, OPEN engine running.

Check the status and the connection of connector PEM of the Protection and Switching Unit and of the oil pressure sensor. Repair if necessary. Make sure that the sensor is securely mounted on the engine. Check the insulation against +12 V and the continuity of the connection between: Protection and Switching Unit connector PEM track 12 Track 1 of the pressure sensor Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-34

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87G

STARTING CONDITIONS MET ET010

NOTES

No particular notes.

Check in the Keyless vehicle function that the starting conditions are met. The Protection and Switching Unit is involved with the starting function in that it manages the gearbox switches. Check the proper operation of the gearbox switches on the statuses ET004 Reverse gear engaged and ET005 Manual gearbox gear lever position then perform fault finding on the starting and engine management functions of the Protection and Switching Unit. If the conditions are met and the starter does not work, consult Fault Finding Chart 2. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-35

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

87G

ALTERNATOR CHARGE PR010

NOTES

Check the configuration readings to make sure that the correct alternator type has been configured. With the engine stopped, the value should be fixed, above 98%. With the engine running, the value varies according to the consumption of electricity. The value should not be fixed.

Carry out fault finding on the charge circuit. Disconnect the 2-track connector of the alternator. With the ignition on, check for the presence of +12 V on track 2 of the alternator. With the ignition off, check for the presence of earth on track 2 of the alternator. Repair if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-36

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of controls

87G

MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS AC001

NOTES

Check: – the condition and connection of fuses 8A and 8B of the Protection and Switching Unit, – the condition of the bulbs. Replace them, if necessary.

Without xenon lights Check the condition and connection of the connector PPA and the fuses of the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the headlight connectors. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on connector R9 and then on track 1 of the headlight connector. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of +12 V on track 4 of the headlights while they are being controlled by command AC001. If correct, replace the bulbs. If not correct, ensure the insulation against earth and continuity of the connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPA track 3 Track 4 left-hand headlight Protection and Switching Unit connector PPA track 4 Track 4 right-hand headlight Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

UPC84 2.0

87G-37

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of controls

87G

AC001 (continued)

With xenon lights Check the condition and connection of connector PPA and the fuses in the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the headlight connectors. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on connector R9 and then on tracks 4 and 10 of the headlights. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of +12 V on track 5 (for Megane-type vehicles) or track 4 (for Scenic-type vehicles) of the headlights while they are being controlled by command AC001. If correct, apply the fault finding procedure (see 80C, Discharge bulbs). If not correct, ensure the insulation against earth and continuity of the connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPA track 3 Track 5 or track 4 (according to vehicle type) of the left-hand headlight Protection and Switching Unit connector PPA track 4 Track 5 or track 4 (according to vehicle type) of the right-hand headlight Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-38

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of controls

87G

DIPPED HEADLIGHTS AC002

NOTES

Check: – the condition and connection of fuses 8C and 8D of the Protection and Switching Unit, – the condition of the bulbs. Replace them, if necessary.

Without xenon lights Check the condition and connection of connector PPA and the fuses of the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the headlight connectors. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on connector R9 and then on track 1 of the headlight connector. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of +12 V on track 2 of the headlights while they are being controlled by command AC002. If correct, replace the bulb(s). If not correct, ensure the insulation against earth and continuity of the connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPA track 6 Track 2 left-hand headlight Protection and Switching Unit connector PPA track 5 Track 2 right-hand headlight Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

UPC84 2.0

87G-39

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of controls

87G

AC002 (continued)

With xenon lights Check the condition and connection of the connector PPA and the fuses of the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the headlight connectors. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on connector R9 and then on tracks 4 and 10 of the headlight connectors. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of +12 V on track 3 of the headlights while they are being controlled by command AC002. If correct, apply the fault finding procedure (see 80C, Discharge bulbs). If not correct, ensure the insulation against earth and continuity of the connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPA track 6 Track 3 left-hand headlight Protection and Switching Unit connector PPA track 5 Track 3 right-hand headlight Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-40

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of controls

87G

SIDE LIGHTS AC003

NOTES

Check: – the condition and the connection of fuses 7A and 7B of the Protection and Switching Unit, – the condition of the bulbs. Replace them, if necessary.

Without xenon lights Check the condition and connection of connectors PPA, PPH2 and the fuses of the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the headlights and rear lights. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on junction R9 then on track 1 of the headlights and on track 2 of the rear lights and number plate light. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of +12 V on track 5 of the headlights and track 1 of the rear lights and the license plate lights while they are being controlled by command AC003. If correct, replace the bulb(s). If not correct, Ensure the insulation against earth and continuity of the connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPH2 track 6 Track 1 left-hand rear light Protection and Switching Unit connector PPH2 track 7 Track 1 right-hand rear light and license plate light Protection and Switching Unit connector PPA track 1 Track 5 left-hand headlight Protection and Switching Unit connector PPA track 2 Track 5 right-hand headlight Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

UPC84 2.0

87G-41

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of controls

87G

AC003 (continued)

With xenon lights Check the condition and connection of connectors PPA, PPH2 and the fuses of the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the headlights and rear lights. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on junction R9 then on tracks 4 and 10 of the headlights and on track 2 of the rear lights and licence plate light. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of +12 V on track 9 of the headlights and track 1 of the rear lights and license plate light while they are being controlled by command AC003. If correct, replace the bulb(s). If not correct, ensure the insulation against earth and continuity of the connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPH2 track 6 Track 1 left-hand rear light Protection and Switching Unit connector PPH2 track 7 Track 1 right-hand rear light and license plate light Protection and Switching Unit connector PPA track 1 Track 9 left-hand headlight Protection and Switching Unit connector PPA track 2 Track 9 right-hand headlight Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-42

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of controls

87G

FRONT FOG LIGHTS AC004

NOTES

Check: – the condition and connection of fuse 10, – the condition of the bulbs. Replace them, if necessary.

Check the condition and the connection of connector PPA of the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the bulb connectors. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on junction R9 then check the connections of the bulb connectors. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of +12 V on the fog light connectors they are being controlled by command AC004. If correct, replace the bulb(s). Check the continuity and insulation of the following connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPA track 8 Protection and Switching Unit connector PPA track 7

Track 1 of the front left-hand foglight connector Track 1 of the front right hand foglight connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-43

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of controls

87G

WINDSCREEN WIPER LOW SPEED AC005

NOTES

Check: – the condition and connection of fuse 9. Replace it if necessary.

Check the condition and the connection of connector PPH2 of the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check the status and connections of the windscreen wiper motor connector. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on track 1 of the windscreen wiper motor. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of +12 V on track 4 of the windscreen wiper motor while it is being controlled by command AC005. If correct, replace the motor. Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPH2 track 2

Track 4 of the windscreen wiper motor

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-44

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of controls

87G

WINDSCREEN WIPER HIGH SPEED AC006

NOTES

Check: – the condition and connection of fuse 9. Replace it if necessary.

Check the condition and the connection of connector PPH2 of the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check the status and connections of the windscreen wiper motor connector. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on track 1 of the windscreen wiper motor. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of +12 V on track 5 of the windscreen wiper motor while it is being controlled by command AC006. If correct, replace the motor. Ensure the insulation and continuity of the connection between: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPH2 track 1

Track 5 of the windscreen wiper motor

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-45

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of controls

87G

COMPRESSOR CONTROL AC008

NOTES

Command prohibited with the engine running. Check: – the condition and connection of fuse 4. Replace it if necessary.

Check the condition and the connection of connector PPM2 of the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the air conditioning compressor connector. Repair if necessary. Make sure that the compressor is properly earthed. Check for the presence of +12 V on the compressor connector while it is being controlled by command AC008. If not correct, ensure the insulation against earth and continuity of the connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPM2 track 5 Air conditioning compressor connector. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-46

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of controls

87G

LOW-SPEED FAN UNIT AC009

NOTES

Check: – the condition and connection of fuse 11. Replace it if necessary. The engine cooling fan must be off. Make sure nothing is mechanically blocking the rotation of the blade.

Check the condition and connection of the fan unit connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure track 2 of the fan unit is properly earthed. Check that the resistor fitted in the fan unit (if present), is not in open circuit and that its resistance is equal to 0.69 Ω ± 20%. If not correct, replace it. Check for the presence of +12 V on the fan unit connector while it is being controlled by command AC009. If correct, replace the fan unit. If not correct, ensure the insulation against earth and continuity of the connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPM1 1 track 4 Track 1 of the fan unit OR Protection and Switching Unit connector PPM1 track 4 Resistor fitted on the fan unit (if present) Resistor fitted on the fan unit (if present) Track 1 of the fan unit Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-47

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of controls

87G

HIGH-SPEED FAN UNIT AC010

NOTES

This control is only valid for variants fitted with air conditioning. Check: – the condition and the connection of fuse 11 (Protection and Switching Unit level N3 only). Replace it if necessary.

Type N2 Protection and Switching Unit Check the condition and connection of the fan unit connector. Repair if necessary. Make sure that the fan unit is properly earthed. Test the resistance of the external relay controlling the high speed fan unit: 65 Ω ± 10 Ω . Replace it if necessary. Check for the presence of +12 V on track 1 of the external control relay of the high speed fan unit while it is being controlled by command AC010. If not correct, ensure the insulation against earth and continuity of the connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPM2 track 3 Track 1 of the external control relay of the high speed fan unit Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on track 2 of the external control relay of the high speed fan unit. If not correct, ensure there is continuity and insulation against +12 V on the following connection: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPM2 track 2 Track 2 of the external control relay of the high speed fan unit Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of +12 V on track 1 of the fan unit while running command AC010. If not correct, ensure the insulation against earth and continuity of the connections: Track 1 fan unit Track 5 of the external control relay of the high speed fan unit Repair if necessary.

UPC84 2.0

87G-48

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of controls

87G

AC010 (continued 1)

Check for the presence of +12 V battery on track 3 of the external control relay of the high speed fan unit. If not correct, ensure the insulation against earth and continuity of the connections: External control relay high speed fan unit track 3 Track 1 of the power supply fuse board Repair if necessary. Check fuse F1 of the power supply fuse board. Replace it if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

UPC84 2.0

87G-49

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of controls

87G

AC010 (continued 2)

Type N3 Protection and Switching Unit Check the condition and connection of the fan unit connector. Repair if necessary. Make sure that he fan unit is properly earthed. Check for the presence of +12 V on the fan unit connector while it is being controlled by command AC010. If correct, replace the fan unit. If not correct, ensure the insulation against earth and continuity of the connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector P1 Fan unit Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-50

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of controls

87G

HEATED REAR SCREEN AC011

NOTES

Ignition on Check: – the condition and connections of fuses 6 and W located in the passenger compartment. Replace if necessary.

Rear screen Check the condition and the connection of connector PPH1 of the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the rear screen connectors. Repair if necessary. Check that the resistance of the rear screen window is between 0.5 Ω and 1 Ω. Replace the rear screen if necessary. Check that the rear screen de-icer is earthed. Check for the presence of +12 V on the rear screen terminal while it is being controlled by command AC011. If not correct, ensure the insulation against earth and continuity of the connection: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPH1 track 2 Rear screen Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

UPC84 2.0

87G-51

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of controls

87G

AC011 (continued)

Door mirrors (if equipped with de-icers) Check the condition and the connection of connector PPH1 of the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the door mirror connectors. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on track 5 of the door mirror connector. Check for the presence of +12 V on track 1 of the door mirror connector while the command is running. If not correct, ensure the insulation against earth and continuity of the connection: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPH1 track 2 Track 1 of the door mirror via the fuse box and the passenger compartment relay Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-52

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of controls

87G

WINDSCREEN WIPER PARK POSITION TEST AC012

NOTES

Commands AC005 Low speed windscreen wiper and AC006 High speed windscreen wiper must be running to activate this control. Otherwise, consult the interpretation of these commands. Apply this procedure if the windscreen wipers do not stop in their initial position.

Check the condition and the connection of connector PEH of the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the windscreen wiper motor connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure the continuity and insulation of the connection between: Protection and Switching Unit connector PEH track 6 Repair if necessary.

Track 2 of the wiper motor

Using a warning light bulb placed between track 2 of the windscreen wiper motor and the + battery supply, check that the bulb lights up briefly at the end of the wipe cycle. If not correct, replace the wiper motor. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-53

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Customer complaints

87G

Carry out a fault finding procedure on the multiplex network. Run fault finding on the Protection and Switching Unit.

NOTES

RECORDED FAULTS

NO DIALOGUE WITH THE COMPUTER

ALP 1

THE STARTER DOES NOT WORK

ALP 2

NO LIGHTING OF VARIOUS FUNCTIONS IN THE PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

ALP 3

UPC84 2.0

87G-54

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 1

NOTES

87G

No dialogue with the computer

Test the multiplex network.

Check the voltage of the battery. Check the condition and connection of the battery terminals and power fuses. Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on track 3 of connector PPH2. If necessary, repair the defective connection and/or connector. Check for the presence of +12 V battery on the connector P2. If necessary, repair the defective connection and/or connector. Check the condition and connection of connector PEH. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-55

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

ALP 2

NOTES

87G

The starter does not work

Check for any faults in the multiplex network by running the network test. Refer to the Starting function to check that the starting conditions are met. Check that status ET010: Starting conditions met is YES after the Start button is pressed, if not, refer to the information on how to deal with this status. Check: – the condition and connection of fuse 3. Replace it if necessary.

Check the wiring of the starter motor (tightness of the terminals, continuity). Check the condition and connections of the starter power fuse. Replace it if necessary. Check the condition and connection of connector PPM1 of the Protection and Switching Unit and the control terminal on the starter motor. Repair if necessary. If everything is correct, with the starter turning, check for the presence of +12 V on the starter command terminal. If correct, carry out a fault finding procedure on the starter. Check the insulation against earth and continuity of the following connection: Protection and Switching Unit connector PPM1 track 3 The control terminal on the starter motor. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-56

Edition 5

UPC Vdiag No.: 44

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault Finding Chart

87G

ALP 3

No lighting of various functions in the passenger compartment

NOTES

The side lights must not be faulty, if they are, refer to the interpretation of command AC003 Side lights.

Check the condition and connection of the faulty function(s). Repair if necessary. Check for the presence of earth on the defective function(s). Repair if necessary. With the side lights on, check for the presence of +12 V on the defective function(s). If correct, replace the defective component. Ensure insulation and continuity against earth between the defective function and the Protection and Switching Unit: Cigarette lighter, air conditioning control panel, radio, multifunction display, door mirror controls, front and rear window riser controls and lock, door lock switch, instrument panel dimmer control and on-site headlight adjustment.

Track 6 connector PPH2 of the Protection and Switching Unit

Heated seat switches, hard roof switch, LPG or petrol fuel selection switch, electronic stability program switch, simultaneous window control, automatic transmission display and cruise control/speed limiter controls.

Track 7 connector PPH2 of the Protection and Switching Unit

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any other possible faults. Switch off the ignition and carry out a road test followed by a test with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 2.0

87G-57

Edition 5

187G UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Introduction

87G

1. SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT This document presents the fault finding procedure applicable to all computers with the following specifications: Vehicle(s): Mégane II, Scénic II

Name of computer: Protection and Switching Unit

Function concerned: Protection and Switching

Program No.: C54 Vdiag No.: 48

2. PREREQUISITES FOR FAULT FINDING Documentation type: Fault finding procedures (this manual): – Assisted fault finding (integrated into the diagnostic tool), Dialogys. Wiring Diagrams: – Visu-Schéma (CD-ROM), paper version. Type of diagnostic tools: – CLIP + CAN sensor Type of special tooling required: Special tooling required Multimeter, oscilloscope Elé. 1681

Universal bornier

3. REMINDER To run fault finding on the vehicle's computers, switch on the ignition in fault finding mode (forced + after ignition feed). Depending on the type of vehicle equipment, proceed as follows: with the vehicle card in the card reader, press and hold the Start button (longer than 5 seconds) with start-up conditions not met, connect the diagnostic tool and perform the required operations. To cut off + after ignition feed, proceed as follows: press the Start button twice briefly (less than 3 seconds), Ensure that the + after ignition feed has been cut off by checking that the computer indicator lights on the instrument panel have gone out.

USM_V48_PRELI

UPC84 V1.1

87G-1

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Introduction

87G

Faults Faults are declared as either present or stored (depending on whether they appeared in a certain context and have disappeared since, or whether they remain present but have not been diagnosed within the current context). The present or stored status of faults should be taken into consideration when the diagnostic tool is used following the + after ignition supply being switched on (without acting on the system components). For a present fault, apply the procedure described in the Interpretation of faults section. For a stored fault, note the faults displayed and apply the instructions in the Notes section. If the fault is confirmed when the instructions in the Notes section are applied, the fault is present. Deal with the fault If the fault is not confirmed, check: – the electrical lines which correspond to the fault, – the connectors on these lines (corrosion, bent pins, etc.), – the resistance of the component detected as faulty, – the condition of the wires (melted or split insulation, wear).

Conformity check The aim of the conformity check is to check data that does not produce a fault on the diagnostic tool because the data is inconsistent. Therefore, this phase is used to: – carry out fault finding on faults that do not have a fault display, and which may correspond to a customer complaint. – check that the system is operating correctly and that there is no risk of a fault recurring after repairs. This section gives the fault finding procedures for statuses and parameters and the conditions for checking them. If a status is not behaving normally or a parameter is outside the permitted tolerance values, consult the corresponding fault finding page.

Customer complaints - Fault finding chart If the test with the diagnostic tool is OK but the customer complaint is still present, the fault should be dealt with by customer complaint. A summary of the overall procedure to follow is provided on the following page in the form of a flow chart.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-2

Edition 2

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

87G

Fault finding - Introduction

4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Perform a pre-diagnostic on the system

Print the system fault finding log (available on CLIP and in the Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note)

Connect CLIP

Dialogue with computer?

no See ALP No. 1

yes Read the faults

Faults present

no Conformity check

yes The cause is still present

Deal with present faults

no

Fault solved

Deal with stored faults Use fault finding charts (ALPs)

The cause is still present

no

Fault solved

The cause is still present

no

Fault solved

yes

Contact Techline with the completed fault finding log

UPC84 V1.1

87G-3

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Introduction

87G

4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE (continued) Wiring check Fault finding problems Disconnecting the connectors and/or manipulating the wiring harness may temporarily remove the cause of a fault. Electrical measurements of voltage, resistance and insulation are generally correct, especially if the fault is not present when the analysis is made (stored fault). Visual inspection Look for damage under the bonnet and in the passenger compartment. Carefully check the fuses, insulators and wiring harness routing. Look for signs of oxidation. Tactile inspection While manipulating the wiring harness, use the diagnostic tool to note any change in fault status from stored to present. Make sure that the connectors are properly locked. Apply light pressure to the connectors. Twist the wiring harness. If there is a change in status, try to locate the source of the fault. Inspection of each component Disconnect the connectors and check the appearance of the clips and tabs, as well as the crimping (no crimping on the insulating section). Make sure that the clips and tabs are properly locked in the sockets. Check that no clips or tabs have been dislodged during connection. Check the clip contact pressure using an appropriate model of tab. Continuity, insulation and resistance check Check the continuity of entire lines, then section by section. Look for a short circuit to earth, to + 12 V or to another wire. If a fault is detected, repair or replace the wiring harness.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-4

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Introduction

87G

5. FAULT FINDING LOG

IMPORTANT!

IMPORTANT Any fault on a complex system requires thorough fault finding with the appropriate tools. The FAULT FINDING LOG, which should be completed during the procedure, enables you to keep track of the procedure which is carried out. It is an essential document when consulting the manufacturer.

IT IS THEREFORE MANDATORY TO FILL OUT A FAULT FINDING LOG EACH TIME FAULT FINDING IS CARRIED OUT You will always be asked for this log: – when requesting technical assistance from the Techline, – for approval requests when replacing parts for which approval is obligatory, – to be attached to monitored parts for which reimbursement is requested. The log is needed for warranty reimbursement, and enables better analysis of the parts removed.

6. SAFETY ADVICE Safety rules must be observed during any work on a component to prevent any damage or injury: – make sure that the battery is properly charged to avoid damaging the computers with a low load, – use the appropriate tools, – do not touch the xenon bulbs, and do not work on the COSLAD system when it is in operation, as the voltage can be more than 20,000 V.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-5

Edition 2

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Passenger compartment connection unit

Page 1/2

List of monitored parts: Computer ●

Administrative identification Date

2

0

Log completed by VIN Engine Diagnostic tool

CLIP

OPTIMA 5800

NXR

Update version ●

Customer complaint 875

Door locking/unlocking fault

1194

Warning light on

Other

●

Lighting fault

1075

Wiper fault

004

Intermittently

Your comments:

Conditions under which the customer complaint occurs 005

While driving

009

Sudden fault

Other

●

1070

010

Gradual deterioration

Your comments:

Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure used

Type of fault finding manual:

Workshop Repair Manual Assisted fault finding

Technical Note

Fault finding manual no: Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note No: Other documentation Title and/or part number:

FD 15 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Passenger compartment connection unit ●

Page 2/2

Computer identification and parts exchanged for the system

Part 1 part no. Part 2 part no. Part 3 part no. Part 4 part no. Part 5 part no. To be read with the Diagnostic tool (Identification screen): Computer part no. Supplier no. Program no. Software version Calibration no. VDIAG ●

Faults found with the diagnostic tool Fault no.

●

Present

Fault name

Specification

Conditions under which fault occurs Status or parameter no.

●

Stored

Parameter name

Value

Unit

System-specific information

Description:

●

Additional information

What factors led you to replace the computer? What other parts were replaced? Other defective functions? Your comments:

FD 15 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87G

General operation The Protection and Switching Unit is involved in the following functions: – Access - Safety. – Air conditioning. – Lighting. – Wipers. – Charging circuit. – Oil pressure detection. – Electric power distribution.

1 - Electric power distribution The main function of the Protection and Switching Unit is to switch and distribute the power supply to the vehicle's systems, actuators or computers. Part of this function is handled within the unit, but it is not electronically controlled by the computer. + 12 V battery supply The Protection and Switching Unit receives energy from the battery via the Busbar and MM connectors (tracks 6 and 4) and redistributes the + 12 V supply. + 12 V after ignition supply The UCH sends the Protection and Switching Unit the + 12 V after ignition supply request via the multiplex network. When the Protection and Switching Unit receives this request, it actuates the after ignition relay unconditionally. The signal is distributed to the sensors, actuators and computers.

2 - Charge circuit One of the main functions of the Protection and Switching Unit is managing the charge circuit. a) Battery – PR008 Battery voltage after rest represents the battery charge status. If PR008 is below 12.1 V in the first miles, a Recharge Battery message is displayed on the instrument panel if the battery needs charging. Depending on the battery charge status, the operating phase and the battery temperature, the Protection and Switching Unit determines what the voltage across the battery terminals should be. To obtain this voltage, the Protection and Switching Unit actuates the alternator. b) Alternator The Protection and Switching Unit is linked to the alternator by a serial connection. The Protection and Switching Unit and the alternator communicate via this connection. The alternator sends the Protection and Switching Unit the following signals: – Type of alternator: the Protection and Switching Unit configures itself according to the alternator specifications. – ET023 Alternator thermal fault.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-8

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87G

The Protection and Switching Unit sends the alternator the following information: – PR006 Alternator setpoint voltage. The Protection and Switching Unit can detect electrical or communication faults on this connection and signal them using the fault DF007 UPC-Alternator connection. When the battery charge drops and PR008 Battery voltage after rest declines, the Protection and Switching Unit can temporarily increase PR006 Alternator setpoint voltage by 1 V for a period of 30 minutes after starting. Before and during starting, PR006 Alternator setpoint voltage is fixed at 10.6 V. A maximum of 30 seconds after the engine has started, the Protection and Switching Unit sets PR006 Alternator setpoint voltage to the calculated optimum value. Only on vehicles with M9R injection: The injection computer also acts on the alternator regulation voltage. The injection computer sends the maximum authorised power delivered by the engine, to the UPC computer via the multiplex network. If the power available from the engine is less than the power consumed by the alternator, the UPC computer reduces PR006 Alternator setpoint voltage. For vehicles with any injection type except M9R: The UPC sends the alternator charge to the injection to regulate the idling speed.

3 - Keyless vehicle Under the keyless vehicle function, the Protection and Switching Unit is involved in the starting sub-function. The computer: – receives the supply request from the passenger compartment starter via the multiplex network, as well as the clutch pedal position, – controls the starter relay, – disables or cuts off control of this relay if there is a start inhibition signal sent by the injection or gearbox computer via the multiplex network.

4 - Air conditioning For the operation of the air conditioning and the role of the Protection and Switching Unit in the control of this function, see 62A, Air conditioning. Cold loop: The computer receives the compressor switch-on request from the injection via the multiplex network. The computer controls the compressor clutch engagement relay. Heating: The computer manages the alternator charge and sends back the signal over the multiplex network. The computer also controls the rear screen de-icing.

USM_V48_SSFON

UPC84 V1.1

87G-9

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - System operation

87G

5 - Exterior lighting The Protection and Switching Unit receives lighting requests from the UCH via the multiplex network. The computer then switches the power relays: – side lights, – dipped headlights, – main beam headlights, – front fog light.

6 - Wipers The Protection and Switching Unit receives wiping requests from the UCH via the multiplex network. The computer then switches the power relays: – low or high-speed windscreen wiper, – headlight washers pump relay. – The Protection and Switching Unit also receives the windscreen wiper park position signal. Using this signal the computer can determine whether the blade is jammed, and decide whether to stop the wiper motor to protect it.

7 - Oil pressure detection The Protection and Switching Unit receives the oil pressure sensor signal and distributes it over the multiplex network.

8 - Reverse gear engaged signal The Protection and Switching Unit receives the reverse gear engaged position sensor signal and distributes it over the multiplex network. 9. Injection The Protection and Switching Unit plays a part in the injection operation, in relation to the computer supply voltage and its sensors (see the different components that are supplied in Allocation of computer tracks). Supply malfunctions may lead to engine management customer complaints (rough idle, etc.).

UPC84 V1.1

87G-10

Edition 2

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

Fault finding - System operation

87G

9 - Fuse fault finding The Protection and Switching Unit can detect the condition of its fuses and indicate faults using: DF016 DF017 DF014 DF015 DF030 DF023 DF018 DF019 DF020 DF022 DF031 DF036 DF029 DF024 DF025 DF026 DF021 DF032

LEFT-HAND DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT RIGHT-HAND DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT LEFT-HAND SIDE LIGHT CIRCUIT RIGHT-HAND SIDE LIGHT CIRCUIT CLIMATE CONTROL COMPRESSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT WINDSCREEN WIPER CIRCUIT LEFT-HAND MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT RIGHT-HAND MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT FRONT FOG LIGHT CIRCUIT HEATED REAR SCREEN CIRCUIT HEADLIGHT WASHER SUPPLY CIRCUIT STEERING COLUMN LOCK SUPPLY CIRCUIT ENGINE MANAGEMENT/COLUMN LOCK SUPPLY LPG COMPUTER SUPPLY ELECTRIC POWER ASSISTED STEERING/AIRBAG SUPPLY AUTOMATIC GEARBOX SUPPLY REVERSING LIGHT(S) CIRCUIT +12 V RELAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT

To carry out fault finding on the fuses, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. If a fuse is faulty, the associated fault becomes STORED. Once the fuse has been replaced or the repair completed, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits again to clear the fault.

Protection and Switching Unit Version There are 4 Protection and Switching Unit versions: – N1: vehicles with a 340 W fan assembly. – N2: vehicles with a 460 W fan assembly. – N3: vehicles with a 550 W fan assembly (external relay). – N4: vehicles with 340 W, 460 W or 550 W fan assemblies + automatic gearbox and/or LPG and/or headlight washers.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-11

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Allocation of computer tracks

87G

Protection and Switching Unit computer tracks Computer track

Function

Sensor - actuator track

Busbar connector 1

Protected + battery supply Connector CM

1

+ Protected after ignition supply fuse

Track A1 additional heater relay 1 black connector Track B2 additional heater relay 2 black connector Track B2 additional heater relay 3 black connector Track 1A passenger compartment fuse and relay box black connector Track 1 diagnostic socket black connector Track 1 parking proximity sensor computer white connector

2

Not used

3

Earth

front left-hand side member

4

Rear screen de-icer + control supply

rear screen connector track 1

5

ABS computer + protected battery supply

ABS/ABS + ESP computer connector track 3

6

Earth

UPC84 V1.1

87G-12

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

Computer track

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Allocation of computer tracks

Function

87G

Sensor - actuator track Connector CN

1

+ fuel pump supply

Fuel pump and sender unit connector track 1

2

Reversing light + control supply

Rear right-hand light track 2, rear left-hand light track 5

3

Headlight beam adjustment + control supply

Track 7 headlight beam adjustment rheostat switch

4

Windscreen wiper high-speed + control supply

Windscreen wiper motor connector track 5

5

+ right-hand side light supply

Track 4 rear right-hand light, track 1 number plate lights

6

+ injection supply, protection relay

Injection computer black connector track G1

7

Right-hand headlight washer motor + control supply

Track 2 headlight washer pump black connector

8

Electric power assisted steering/airbag + protected after ignition supply

Track 8 electric power assisted steering black connector track 7 airbag computer black connector

9

Windscreen wiper low speed + control supply

Windscreen wiper motor connector track 4

10

Steering column lock + protected after ignition supply

Track 2 UCH connector PP2

11

Left-hand headlight washer pump motor + control supply

Track 1 headlight washer pump black connector

12

+ left-hand side light supply

Rear left-hand light

UPC84 V1.1

87G-13

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Allocation of computer tracks

Computer track

Function

87G

Sensor - actuator track Connector CT1

1

CAN L

Track 16 UCH connector PE2

2

ABS CAN L

Track 15 airbag computer black connector Track 14 ABS/ESP computer black connector

3

ABS CAN H

Track 26 airbag computer black connector Track 35 ABS/ESP computer black connector

4

Injection/steering column lock + after ignition supply

Track D1 injection computer black connector Track 5 steering column lock

5

Oil level sensor signal 1

Track 8 instrument panel black connector

6

Oil level sensor signal 2

Track 7 instrument panel black connector

7

Injection CAN L

Track A3 injection computer black connector

8

CAN H

Track 6 UCH connector PE2

9

Injection CAN H

Track A4 injection computer black connector

10

Windscreen wiper park position control supply

Track 2 windscreen wiper motor orange connector

11

Water in diesel detection sensor signal

Track B3 injection computer grey connector

12

+ accessories supply

Track 1G passenger compartment fuse and relay box black connector Connector AN

1

+ front right-hand side light supply

Track 5 front right-hand side light

2

+ front left-hand fog light supply

Front left-hand fog light track 1

3

+ front right-hand fog light supply

Front right-hand fog light track 1

4

+ left-hand dipped headlight supply

Left-hand headlight

5

+ front left-hand side light supply

Track 5 front left-hand side light

6

+ front right-hand dipped beam headlight supply

Right-hand headlight

7

+ left-hand main beam headlight supply

Track 4 left-hand headlight

8

+ right-hand main beam headlight supply

Track 4 right-hand headlight

UPC84 V1.1

87G-14

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Allocation of computer tracks

Computer track

Function

87G

Sensor - actuator track Connector MT1

1

Alternator synchronous bit signal

Track 2 alternator black connector

2

Not used

3

Not used

4

Not used

5

Fuel pump relay coil control supply

6

Water in diesel detection sensor signal

Track 2 water in diesel sensor black connector

7

Oil pressure warning light control supply

Pressure switch track 1

8

+ alternator excitation supply

Track 1 alternator black connector

9

High-speed fan assembly relay - control

Track 2 fan assembly relay white connector

10

+ accessories supply

Track A1 diesel fuel heater relay cyan connector

11

Oil level sensor signal 1

Track 2 oil level sensor black connector

12

Oil level sensor signal 2

Track 1 oil level sensor black connector Connector MM

1

High-speed fan assembly supply

Track 1 fan assembly black connector if climate control Track 2 fan assembly black connector if manual or regulated heating

2

Fan assembly + control supply

Track 1 fan assembly resistor

3

+ starting supply

Starter solenoid

4

Protected + battery supply

Track 1 + Protected battery supply fuse F3

5

Not used

6

Fan assembly fuse + protected battery supply

Track 1 power and supply fuse board orange connector

UPC84 V1.1

87G-15

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Allocation of computer tracks

Computer track

Function

87G

Sensor - actuator track Connector MN

1

Injection + supply

2

Injection + supply

3

Injection + supply

Track 4 air flowmeter black connector (with RH connections)

4

LPG computer + after ignition supply

Track C2 LPG computer blue connector

5

Power latch relay coil - control

– track D4 injection computer brown connector (K4J, K4M, F4R) – track E1 injection computer brown connector (F9Q) – track F1 injection computer grey connector (K9K)

6

Protected + battery supply

Track A1 diesel fuel heater relay cyan connector

7

Not used

8

Automatic gearbox computer or LPG computer + battery supply

9

Ignition coil control

10

Air conditioning clutch + control

Track A air conditioning compressor clutch

11

Reversing lights + after ignition supply

Reversing lights switch track 2, neutral sensor/reversing lights track 1

12

Automatic gearbox neutral + signal

13

Automatic gearbox computer + after ignition supply

Automatic gearbox computer connector A track 27

14

Reversing lights + after ignition supply

Reversing lights switch track 1, neutral sensor/reversing lights track 2

15

Injection power + battery supply

Track A3 fuel pump relay

16

Not used

Track 56 automatic gearbox computer connector A tracks A1 and A3 of the LPG solenoid valve relays

UPC84 V1.1

87G-16

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Replacement of components

87G

Once a component is replaced, run VP004 Vehicle parameters (see Configuration and programming). Switch the ignition off and on again for the configurations to be recognised. IMPORTANT Removing or replacing the Protection and Switching Unit computer relays is forbidden.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-17

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Configurations and programming

87G

Equipment required CLIP diagnostic tool This operation is used to configure the Protection and Switching Unit to the equipment present in the vehicle. Configuration

Configuration reading

Name of configuration

Choice of configuration

LC008

Gearbox type

Manual/Automatic

LC007

Front fog lights

WITH/WITHOUT

LC013

Headlight washers

WITH/WITHOUT

VP004

Procedure to follow for modifying these configurations: ● Establish dialogue with the UPC. ● Select the repair mode menu. ● Select the write configuration menu. ● Select line VP004 vehicle parameters. ● Select the line corresponding to the vehicle equipment from the drop-down menus. ● Confirm the configurations selected then click on confirm. ● Switch the ignition off and then back on for the configurations to be recognised by the computer. ● In the configuration reading menu, check that each configuration has been performed. Make sure that all the vehicle's equipment is working.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-18

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Fault summary table

87G

Summary of faults on which fault finding can be performed by the Protection and Switching Unit. (with corresponding design office codes). Tool fault

Associated DTC

Diagnostic tool title

DF006

920E

COMPUTER

DF034

9212

ALTERNATOR TYPE

DF016

9215

LEFT-HAND DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT

DF017

9216

RIGHT-HAND DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT

DF014

9217

LEFT-HAND SIDE LIGHT CIRCUIT

DF015

9218

RIGHT-HAND SIDE LIGHT CIRCUIT

DF030

9219

CLIMATE CONTROL COMPRESSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT

DF023

921A

WINDSCREEN WIPER CIRCUIT

DF018

921B

LEFT-HAND MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT

DF019

921C

RIGHT-HAND MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT

DF020

921D

FRONT FOG LIGHT CIRCUIT

DF035

9213

COMPUTER SUPPLY

DF022

921E

REAR SCREEN DE-ICER CIRCUIT

DF031

921F

HEADLIGHT WASHER SUPPLY CIRCUIT

DF036

9220

STEERING COLUMN LOCK SUPPLY CIRCUIT

DF029

9221

INJECTION/STEERING COLUMN LOCK SUPPLY

DF024

9222

GAS COMPUTER SUPPLY

DF025

9223

ELECTRIC POWER ASSISTED STEERING/AIRBAG SUPPLY

DF026

9224

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX SUPPLY

DF021

9226

REVERSING LIGHT(S) CIRCUIT

DF032

9227

+12 V RELAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT

DF033

9229

FAN ASSEMBLY SUPPLY CIRCUIT

DF007

9211

UPC - ALTERNATOR CONNECTION

DF013

920F

VOLTAGE REGULATION

DF012

9210

ALTERNATOR

DF027

9225

ACCESSORIES SUPPLY

UPC84 V1.1

87G-19

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF006 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

COMPUTER 1.DEF: Internal electrical fault

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to stored faults; The fault is declared present after the ignition is switched off and back on.

If the fault is present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF006

UPC84 V1.1

87G-20

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF007 PRESENT OR STORED

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

UPC - ALTERNATOR CONNECTION CO : Open circuit CC : Short circuit to earth or to + 12 V 1.DEF: Communication disrupted

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to stored faults: The fault is declared present after the engine has been running for 10 minutes. NOTES Special notes: If the Protection and Switching Unit connection is correct, its voltage is above 3 V.

CO

NOTES

None

Disconnect the UPC-Alternator connection from the alternator and the Protection and Switching Unit. Check the condition of the UPC - Alternator connection at the alternator end. Check the condition of the UPC - Alternator connection at the Protection and Switching Unit end. Check the condition of Protection and Switching Unit connector MT1. Check the continuity on the UPC-Alternator connection: Protection and Switching Unit connector MT1 track 1

alternator

Replace the wiring harness if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF007

UPC84 V1.1

87G-21

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

DF007 CONTINUED 1

Connect the UPC-Alternator connection to the Protection and Switching Unit, and disconnect the alternator-side connection. 1 st procedure Using an oscilloscope, check for a square pulse signal on the UPC-alternator connection. The test must not be carried out until the engine has been running for at least 10 minutes. Connect the oscilloscope between the UPC-alternator connection connector (on the alternator side) and a body earth. Adjust the oscilloscope as follows: – calibration: 5 V/div – Time base: 500 µs/div Check for a square pulse signal on the oscilloscope, as shown in the diagram below:

If the signal obtained is similar, the USM is communicating with the alternator; contact Techline. If the signal obtained is different, contact Techline. 2 nd procedure Measure the connection voltage on the alternator side with the multimeter. If the voltage is less than 3 V, contact Techline.

1.DEF

NOTES

None

Check the connections on the alternator. Check the connections on Protection and Switching Unit 12-track connector MT1. Check that the alternator earth is connected (straps, etc.). With the engine running, switch on the heated rear screen. Measure the voltage between the alternator body earth and the vehicle earth. If the difference is greater than 1 V, check the vehicle earths. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF007

UPC84 V1.1

87G-22

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

DF007 CONTINUED 2

CC

NOTES

None

Check the connections on the alternator. Check the connections on the 12-track Protection and Switching Unit MT1 connector. Disconnect the UPC-Alternator connection from the alternator and the Protection and Switching Unit. Make sure that the UPC-Alternator connection is insulated against the + 12 V supply and earth: Protection and Switching Unit connector MT1 track 1

alternator

Replace the connection if necessary. Measure the voltage on track 1 of Protection and Switching Unit connector MT1. If the voltage is 12 V, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 V1.1

87G-23

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF008 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

MULTIPLEX NETWORK

None.

Apply the multiplex network fault finding procedure (see 88B, Multiplexing).

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF008

UPC84 V1.1

87G-24

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF012 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

1.DEF

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

ALTERNATOR 1.DEF: Alternator electrical fault 2.DEF: Alternator mechanical fault

Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to present faults: The fault is declared present when: the engine is running.

NOTES

None

Check the fitting, condition and tension of the accessories drive belt. Check the conformity of the connections and tightness of the alternator earth. Check that the alternator is not clogged. Carry out command AC014 Alternator Regulation, and check its interpretation. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

2.DEF

– – – – –

NOTES

None

Check the fitting, condition and tension of the accessories drive belt. Check the conformity of the connections and tightness of the alternator earths. Check that the alternator is not clogged. Carry out command AC014 Alternator Regulation, and check its interpretation. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF012

UPC84 V1.1

87G-25

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF013 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

VOLTAGE REGULATION 1.DEF : Voltage too low 2.DEF: Voltage too high

Deal with fault DF012 Alternator if it is present or stored first. Conditions for applying the fault finding procedure to present faults: The fault is declared present after: when the engine is running.

Check the insulation and continuity of the connection between the alternator and the battery. Check that the alternator earth is sound. Check command PR004 Battery voltage and carry out fault finding on the battery and charge circuit (see Technical Note 6014A, Check the charging circuit) if not correct. Run command AC014 Alternator regulation. In the event of a fault, apply the procedure for dealing with command AC014. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF013

UPC84 V1.1

87G-26

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF014 PRESENT OR STORED

CO

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

LEFT-HAND SIDE LIGHT CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that the front left-hand side light bulb is sound. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 2-track connector on the front left-hand side light (tabs broken, bent, oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check that earth on track 2 of the front left-hand side light connector is perfect. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the Protection and Switching Unit 8-track connector AN (tabs broken, bent oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 5

track 5 of the front left-hand side light connector

Repair if necessary. Check the fitting and switch on the front left-hand side light. Repair if necessary or replace the light if it is faulty. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF014

UPC84 V1.1

87G-27

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

DF014 CONTINUED

CCO

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F1 (7.5A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 5

track 2 of the front left-hand side light connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 V1.1

87G-28

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF015 PRESENT OR STORED

CO

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

RIGHT-HAND SIDE LIGHT CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that the front right-hand side light bulb is sound. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 2-track connector on the front right-hand side light (tabs broken, bent, oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check that the earth on track 2 of the front right-hand side light connector is perfect. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the Protection and Switching Unit 8-track connector AN (tabs broken, bent oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 1

track 5 of the front right-hand side light connector

Repair if necessary. Check the fitting and switch on the front right-hand side light. Repair if necessary or replace the light if it is faulty. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF015

UPC84 V1.1

87G-29

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

DF015 CONTINUED

CC.0

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F2 (7.5A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 1

track 5 of the front right-hand side light connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 V1.1

87G-30

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF016 PRESENT OR STORED

CO

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

LEFT-HAND DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that the left-hand dipped beam headlight bulb is sound. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the left-hand headlight 4 track connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check that the earth on track 1 of the left-hand headlight connector is perfect. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the Protection and Switching Unit 8-track connector AN (tabs broken, bent oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 4

track 2 of the left-hand headlight connector

Repair if necessary. Check the fitting and switch on the left-hand headlight. Repair if necessary or replace the light if it is faulty. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF016

UPC84 V1.1

87G-31

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

DF016 CONTINUED

CC.0

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F4 (10A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 4

track 2 of the left-hand headlight connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 V1.1

87G-32

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF017 PRESENT OR STORED

CO

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

RIGHT-HAND DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that the right-hand dipped beam headlight bulb is sound. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the right-hand headlight 4-track connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check that the earth on track 1 of the right-hand headlight connector is perfect. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the Protection and Switching Unit 8-track connector AN (tabs broken, bent oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 6

track 2 of the right-hand headlight connector

Repair if necessary. Check the fitting and switch on the right-hand headlight. Repair if necessary or replace the light if it is faulty. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF017

UPC84 V1.1

87G-33

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

DF017 CONTINUED

CC.0

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F3 (10A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 6

track 2 of the right-hand headlight connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 V1.1

87G-34

Edition 2

UPC Program no.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF018 PRESENT OR STORED

CO

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

LEFT-HAND MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that the left-hand main beam headlight bulb is sound. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the left-hand headlight 4 track connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check that the earth on track 1 of the left-hand headlight connector is perfect. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the Protection and Switching Unit 8-track connector AN (tabs broken, bent oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 7

track 4 of the left-hand headlight connector

Repair if necessary. Check the fitting and switch on the left-hand headlight. Repair if necessary or replace the light if it is faulty. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF018

UPC84 V1.1

87G-35

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

DF018 CONTINUED

CC.0

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F6 (10A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 7

track 4 of the left-hand headlight connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 V1.1

87G-36

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF019 PRESENT OR STORED

CO

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

RIGHT-HAND MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHT CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that the right-hand main beam headlight bulb is sound. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the right-hand headlight 4-track connector (tabs bent, broken, oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check that the earth on track 1 of the right-hand headlight connector is perfect. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the Protection and Switching Unit 8-track connector AN (tabs broken, bent oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 8

track 4 of the right-hand headlight connector

Repair if necessary. Check the fitting and switch on the right-hand headlight. Repair if necessary or replace the light if it is faulty. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF019

UPC84 V1.1

87G-37

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

DF019 CONTINUED

CC.0

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F7 (10A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 8

track 4 of the right-hand headlight connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 V1.1

87G-38

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF020 PRESENT OR STORED

CO

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

FRONT FOG LIGHTS CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that the front fog light bulbs are sound. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the front fog light 2-track connectors (tabs broken, bent, oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check that the earth on track 1 of the front right-hand fog light connector is perfect. Repair if necessary. Check that the earth on track 1 of the front left-hand fog light connector is perfect. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the Protection and Switching Unit 8-track connector AN (tabs broken, bent oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: UPC track 2

track 1 of the front left-hand fog light connector

UPC track 3

track 1 of the front right-hand fog light connector

Repair if necessary. Check the fitting and switch on the front fog lights. Repair if necessary or replace the light(s) if faulty. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF020

UPC84 V1.1

87G-39

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

DF020 CONTINUED

CC.0

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F5 (20A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: UPC track 2

track 1 of the front left-hand fog light connector

UPC track 3

track 1 of the front right-hand fog light connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 V1.1

87G-40

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF021 PRESENT OR STORED

CC.0

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

REVERSING LIGHT(S) CIRCUIT CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F19 (10A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: UPC track 2

track 5 of the rear left-hand light connector track 2 of the rear right-hand light connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF021

UPC84 V1.1

87G-41

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF022 PRESENT OR STORED

CO

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

REAR SCREEN DE-ICER CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check the condition and connection of the heated rear screen (tabs broken, bent, oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check that the earth on track 1 of the rear right-hand light connector is perfect. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 6-track Protection and Switching Unit CM connector (tabs broken, bent oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 4

track 1 of the heated rear screen connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF022

UPC84 V1.1

87G-42

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

DF022 CONTINUED

CC.0

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F23 (30A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 4

track 1 of the heated rear screen connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool. UPC84 V1.1

87G-43

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF023 PRESENT OR STORED

CC.0

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

WINDSCREEN WIPER CIRCUIT CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F9 (25A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: UPC track 4

track 5 of the windscreen wiper motor orange connector

UPC track 9

track 4 of the windscreen wiper motor orange connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF023

UPC84 V1.1

87G-44

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF024 PRESENT OR STORED

CC.0

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

GAS COMPUTER SUPPLY CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F16 (10A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 4

track C2 of the LPG computer connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF024

UPC84 V1.1

87G-45

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF025 PRESENT OR STORED

CC.0

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

ELECTRIC POWER ASSISTED STEERING/AIRBAG SUPPLY CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F10 (5A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: UPC track 8

track 7 of the airbag computer black connector track 8 of the electric power assisted steering black connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF025

UPC84 V1.1

87G-46

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF026 PRESENT OR STORED

CC.0

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

AUTOMATIC GEARBOX SUPPLY CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F15 (5A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 13

track 27 of the automatic gearbox computer connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF026

UPC84 V1.1

87G-47

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF029 PRESENT OR STORED

CC.0

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

ENGINE MANAGEMENT/STEERING COLUMN LOCK SUPPLY CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F18 (5A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: UPC track 4

track 5 of the steering column lock 6-track black connector track D1 of the injection computer black connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF029

UPC84 V1.1

87G-48

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF030 PRESENT OR STORED

CC.0

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

CLIMATE CONTROL COMPRESSOR SUPPLY CIRCUIT CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F22 (10A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 10

track A of the climate control clutch 2-track grey connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF030

UPC84 V1.1

87G-49

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF031 PRESENT OR STORED

CC.0

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

HEADLIGHT WASHER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F21 (15A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: UPC track 11

track 1 of the headlight washer pump 2-track black connector

UPC track 7

track 2 of the headlight washer pump 2-track black connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF031

UPC84 V1.1

87G-50

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF032 PRESENT OR STORED

CC.0

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

+12 V RELAY SUPPLY CIRCUIT CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuses F8 (25A), F12 (20A) and F20 (20A) are correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: UPC connector MN track 8

track 56 of automatic gearbox computer connector A track A1 and A3 of the LPG solenoid valve relays

UPC connector MN track 6

track A1 of the diesel heater relay connector

UPC connector CM track 5

track 3 ABS computer connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF032

UPC84 V1.1

87G-51

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF033 PRESENT OR STORED

CO

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

FAN ASSEMBLY SUPPLY CIRCUIT CO : Open circuit CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check the condition and connection of the fan assembly 2 -track black connector (tabs broken, bent, oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the 6-track Protection and Switching Unit MM connector (tabs broken, bent oxidised). Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: UPC track 1

track 2 of the fan assembly 2-track black connector (heating) track 1 of the fan assembly 2-track black connector (climate control)

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

CC.0

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: UPC track 1

track 2 of the fan assembly 2-track black connector (heating) track 1 of the fan assembly 2-track black connector (climate control)

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF033

UPC84 V1.1

87G-52

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF034 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

ALTERNATOR TYPE 1.DEF: inconsistency

None.

Check, by reading configuration LC001 ALTERNATOR TYPE, that the alternator type corresponds to that fitted to the vehicle. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF034

UPC84 V1.1

87G-53

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF035 PRESENT OR STORED

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

COMPUTER SUPPLY VOLTAGE 1.DEF: voltage too low

The fault is declared present after: a drop in the UPC voltage to less than 8 V for longer than 10 seconds. NOTES

The fault is declared stored following: a drop in the UPC voltage to less than 8 V for longer than 10 seconds followed by a rise in the voltage to more than 8 V.

Contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF035

UPC84 V1.1

87G-54

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

DF036 PRESENT OR STORED

CC.0

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

87G

STEERING COLUMN LOCK SUPPLY CIRCUIT CC.0 : Short circuit to earth

NOTES

To display this fault as present or stored, run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits.

Check that UPC fuse F11 (15A) is correct. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connection: UPC track 10

track 2 of UCH connector PP2

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits. Clear the computer fault memory, switch the + after ignition supply off and back on, and run another check with the diagnostic tool.

USM_V48_DF036

UPC84 V1.1

87G-55

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

NOTES

Fault finding - Conformity check

87G

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application conditions: engine stopped, + after ignition feed active.

Main screen

Order

Function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and Notes

Fault finding

1

Battery voltage

PR004:

Battery voltage

11 V < X < 13.5 V

If there is a fault, refer to the procedure for dealing with parameter PR004 Battery voltage.

2

Reverse gear

ET004:

Reverse gear engaged

YES NO

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET004.

3

Oil pressure

ET027:

Oil pressure contact

OPEN CLOSED

None

4

+ 12 V after ignition feed

ET003:

+ 12 V after ignition feed relay control

INACTIVE ACTIVE

None

USM_V48_CCONF

UPC84 V1.1

87G-56

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

NOTES

Fault finding - Conformity check

87G

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application conditions: engine stopped, + after ignition feed active.

Keyless vehicle Sub-function: starting

Order

Function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and Notes

Fault finding

1

+ 12 V after ignition feed

AC015:

+ 12 V after ignition feed

This command is used to activate the + after ignition feed

In the event of a fault, run fault finding on the battery and the charge circuit (see Technical Note 6014A, Checking the charge circuit, 16A, Starting-charging).

2

Reverse gear

ET004:

Reverse gear engaged

YES NO

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET004.

NOT IN NEUTRAL NEUTRAL

Normal statuses.

UNAVAILABLE INVALID

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation for status ET005.

STATUS 1 STATUS 2 STATUS 3

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation for status ET010.

YES

Normal status.

INACTIVE ACTIVE

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of fault DF032.

3

4

5

Manual gearbox gear lever position

Starting conditions met

+ 12 V after ignition feed relay control

ET005:

ET010:

ET003:

Manual gearbox gear lever position

Starting conditions met

+ 12 V after ignition feed relay control

UPC84 V1.1

87G-57

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

NOTES

Fault finding - Conformity check

87G

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application conditions: engine stopped, + after ignition feed active.

FUNCTION: AIR CONDITIONING Sub-function: HEATING

Order

1

2

Function

Alternator

Rear screen de-icer

Parameter or Status checked or Action

PR010:

AC011:

Display and Notes

Fault finding

Alternator

0 < X < 99 % Switch on the heated rear screen and check that the value increases

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of parameter PR010.

Rear screen de-icer

This command supplies the rear screen and door mirror heating resistors, if fitted to the vehicle. They should be warm.

In the event of a fault, apply the procedure for dealing with command AC011.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-58

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

87G

Sub-function: Cold loop

Order

Function

1

Compressor control

2

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and Notes

Fault finding

AC008:

Compressor control

You should be able to hear the compressor clutch (stops the motor running).

In the event of a fault, apply the procedure for dealing with command AC008.

AC009:

Low-speed fan assembly

This command is used to activate the fan assembly at low speed.

In the event of a fault, apply the procedure for dealing with command AC009.

AC010:

High-speed fan assembly

This command is used to activate the fan assembly at high speed.

In the event of a fault, apply the procedure for dealing with command AC010.

ET014:

Low-speed engine fan assembly relay control

INACTIVE ACTIVE

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation for status ET014.

ET013:

High-speed engine fan assembly relay control

INACTIVE ACTIVE

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation for status ET013.

Fan assembly

3

Low-speed engine fan assembly relay control

4

High-speed engine fan assembly relay control

UPC84 V1.1

87G-59

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

NOTES

Fault finding - Conformity check

87G

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application conditions: engine stopped, + after ignition feed active.

FUNCTION: WIPING Sub-function: WIPING POWER

Order

Function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

AC004: 1

Wiper

2

Windscreen wiper protection

3

Windscreen wiper park position

4

Low-speed wiper

Headlight washer

Display and Notes This command is used to activate the windscreen wiper motor at low speed. This command is used to activate the windscreen wiper motor at high speed.

Fault finding

In the event of a fault, apply the procedure for commands AC005 and AC006

AC006:

High-speed wiper

ET002:

Windscreen wiper protection

INACTIVE

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation for status ET002.

ET018:

Windscreen wiper park position

PRESENT (if the wiper is not active) ABSENT

In the event of a fault, refer to the interpretation of status ET018.

Headlight washers relay

This command is used to activate the headlight washers relay on the right and left-hand side alternately.

In the event of a fault, apply the procedure for dealing with command AC013.

AC013:

UPC84 V1.1

87G-60

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

NOTES

Fault finding - Conformity check

87G

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application conditions: engine stopped, + after ignition feed active.

FUNCTION: LIGHTING Sub-function: LIGHTING POWER

Order

Function

1

Side lights

Parameter or Status checked or Action

Display and Notes

Fault finding

AC003:

Side lights

This command switches on the side lights.

In the event of a fault, apply the procedure for dealing with command AC003.

2

Dipped headlights

AC002:

Dipped headlights

This command switches on the dipped beam headlights.

In the event of a fault, apply the procedure for dealing with command AC002.

3

Main beam headlights

AC001:

Main beam headlights

This command switches on the main beam headlights.

In the event of a fault, apply the procedure for dealing with command AC001.

4

Front fog lights

AC004:

Front fog lights

This command switches on the front fog lights.

In the event of a fault, apply the procedure for dealing with command AC004.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-61

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT

NOTES

Fault finding - Conformity check

87G

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application conditions: engine running.

FUNCTION: CHARGE CIRCUIT Sub-function: ALTERNATOR

Order

Function

1

Alternator fault

3

4

Alternator

Alternator regulation

Parameter or Status checked or Action

ET023:

PR010:

AC014:

Display and Notes

Fault finding

Alternator thermal fault

ABSENT

In the event of a fault, consult the interpretation of status ET023.

Alternator

0 < X < 99 % Switch on the heated rear screen and check that the value increases

In the event of a fault, apply the procedure for dealing with command PR010 Alternator Charge.

Alternator regulation

Run this command with the engine running. When the command is run, the Protection and Switching Unit sets a regulation voltage setpoint for the alternator: – Alternator voltage = 15 V for 30 seconds – Alternator voltage = 13 V for 30 seconds

In the event of a fault, apply the procedure for dealing with command AC014.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-62

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

NOTES

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Conformity check

87G

Only carry out this conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool (fault reading and configuration checks). Application conditions: engine stopped, + after ignition feed active.

FUNCTION: CHARGE CIRCUIT Sub-function: BATTERY

Order

1

Function

Parameter or Status checked or Action

PR004:

Battery voltage

PR008:

Battery voltage after rest

Display and Notes

Fault finding

11 < X < 13.5 V

If there is a fault, apply the procedure for dealing with command PR004 Battery voltage.

12.1 V < X < 13.5 V

If there is a fault, apply the procedure for dealing with command PR008 Battery voltage after rest.

Voltages

UPC84 V1.1

87G-63

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Status summary table

Tool status

87G

Diagnostic tool title

ET002

Windscreen wiper protection

ET003

+ 12 V after ignition feed relay control

ET004

Reverse gear engaged

ET010

Starting conditions met

ET021

Alternator electrical fault

ET022

Alternator mechanical fault

ET023

Alternator thermal fault

ET013

High-speed fan assembly relay control

ET014

Low-speed fan assembly relay control

ET005

Manual gearbox gear lever position

ET018

Windscreen wiper park position

ET027

Oil pressure contact

UPC84 V1.1

87G-64

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87G

WINDSCREEN WIPER PROTECTION ET002

NOTES

Special notes: Only apply the checks if the status is ACTIVE or LOCKED. If the status is ACTIVE, this means that after a wiping request, the UPC detected abnormal operation for more than 6 seconds (restricted or jammed). If the status is LOCKED, this means that the total duration of pauses is greater than 2 minutes. The status returns to INACTIVE as soon as the UCH requests another wiping setpoint (wiper control adjusted or request by the rain sensor).

Make sure that nothing is mechanically blocking the movement of the wiper arms (blades stuck, condition and assembly of the wiper mechanism linkage and no object that could impair the movement of the mechanism). Check that the windscreen wiper mechanism is not seized. Repair if necessary. Check the condition and connection of connectors CT1 and CN on the UPC and the windscreen wiper motor. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance of the following connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector CT1 track 10

track 2 of the windscreen wiper motor connector

UPC connector CN track 4

track 5 of the windscreen wiper motor connector

UPC connector CN track 9

track 4 of the windscreen wiper motor connector

Repair if necessary. If everything is in order but the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

USM_V48_ET002

UPC84 V1.1

87G-65

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87G

REVERSE GEAR ENGAGED ET004

NOTES

Special notes: Only apply the checks if: – + after ignition feed is active. – There must be no faults present.

5-speed manual gearbox Check the condition and connection of the reverse gear switch connector and UPC connector MN. Repair if necessary. With the ignition on and reverse gear engaged, check for + 12 V on tracks 11 and 14 of UPC connector MN. If this is not correct, check for insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector MN track 14

track 2 neutral sensor

Protection and Switching Unit connector MN track 11

track 1 neutral sensor

Reverse gear engaged: Switch track 1

track 2 of the switch

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

USM_V48_ET004

UPC84 V1.1

87G-66

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87G

ET004 CONTINUED

6-speed manual gearbox Check the condition and connection of the reverse gear switch connector and UPC connector MN. Repair if necessary. With the ignition on and reverse gear engaged, check for + 12 V on tracks 11 and 14 of UPC connector MN. If this is not correct, check for insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector MN track 11

track 2 neutral sensor

Protection and Switching Unit connector MN track 14

track 1 neutral sensor

Reverse gear engaged: Switch track 1

track 2 of the switch

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline. Automatic gearbox Check the condition and connection of the reverse gear switch connector and UPC connector MN. Repair if necessary. With the ignition on and reverse gear engaged, check for + 12 V on tracks 11 and 14 of UPC connector MN. If this is not correct, check for insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector MN track 14

track A2, multifunction switch

Protection and Switching Unit connector MN track 11

track A1 multifunction switch

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-67

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87G

STARTING CONDITIONS MET ET010

NOTES

Special notes: Apply the checks if the status is STATUS 1, STATUS 2 OR STATUS 3, with the ignition on.

STATUS 1 The UCH is preventing the Protection and Switching Unit from activating the starter. Run fault finding on this computer (see 87B, UCH). STATUS 2 The injection is preventing the Protection and Switching Unit from running the starter. Run fault finding on this computer (see 13B, Diesel injection and 17B, Petrol injection). STATUS 3 The automatic gearbox computer is preventing the Protection and Switching Unit from running the starter. Make sure that the selector lever is in position P or N. Run fault finding on this computer (see 23A, automatic gearbox). If the conditions are met and the starter does not work, refer to ALP 2. If the fault is still present, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

USM_V48_ET010

UPC84 V1.1

87G-68

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87G

ALTERNATOR ELECTRICAL FAULT ET021

NOTES

Special notes: Apply the checks if the status is PRESENT with the engine running.

Check the condition and connection of the alternator connector and Protection and Switching Unit connector MT. If status ET022 Alternator mechanical fault is PRESENT, check the condition and tension of the accessories belt. Replace the belt if necessary. If status ET022 Alternator mechanical fault is ABSENT, check the charging circuit (see Technical Note 6014A, Checking the charging circuit, 16A, Starting-charging). Replace the alternator if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

USM_V48_ET021

UPC84 V1.1

87G-69

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87G

ALTERNATOR MECHANICAL FAULT ET022

NOTES

Special notes: Apply the checks if the status is PRESENT with the engine running.

Check the condition and tension of the accessories belt. Replace the belt if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

USM_V48_ET022

UPC84 V1.1

87G-70

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of statuses

87G

ALTERNATOR THERMAL FAULT ET023

NOTES

Special notes: Apply the checks if the status is PRESENT, with the engine running.

Stop the engine Check the general condition of the alternator: Make sure that there are no foreign bodies that could impair the alternator cooling. Clean the alternator if necessary. With the engine stopped, let the alternator cool down with the bonnet open for at least 1 hour. Start the engine with the bonnet closed. Switch on the main beam headlights and rear screen de-icer. If the status returns to PRESENT, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

USM_V48_ET023

UPC84 V1.1

87G-71

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Parameter summary table

Tool parameter

87G

Diagnostic tool title

PR004

Battery voltage

PR008

Battery voltage after rest

PR006

Alternator setpoint voltage

PR010

Alternator charge

UPC84 V1.1

87G-72

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

87G

BATTERY VOLTAGE PR004

NOTES

None

Check the consistency between the battery voltage measurement from the multimeter and the value of PR004 Battery voltage. Engine stopped: 11 V < X < 13.5 V. Engine running: 10.5 V < X < 16 V. If the voltage values are not consistent (greater than 0.3 V difference between the 2 values), check the connection between the + battery feed and the Protection and Switching Unit. If the values are consistent, carry out fault finding on the battery and the charge circuit (see Technical Note 6014, Checking the charging circuit, 16A, Starting-charging).

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

USM_V48_PR004

UPC84 V1.1

87G-73

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

87G

ALTERNATOR SETPOINT VOLTAGE PR006

NOTES

Priority in dealing with fault: – if fault DF007 UPC-alternator connection is declared present, deal with this fault first. – if one of statuses ET021 Alternator electrical fault, ET022 Alternator mechanical fault, ET023 Alternator thermal fault is present, deal with these statuses first. Special notes: Only apply the checks if: – the engine is running, – the parameter value is inconsistent with the voltage value measured between the alternator B+ terminal and the alternator chassis earth.

Wait for 10 minutes with the engine running. After 10 minutes, if fault DF007 UPC-alternator connection is declared present, deal with the fault. Measure the voltage at the alternator terminals, between the B+ terminal and the alternator chassis earth. Run AC014 Alternator regulation. Wait 20 seconds, for 10 seconds the alternator voltage should be 15 V ± 0.2. Wait 20 seconds, for 10 seconds the alternator voltage should be 13 V ± 0.2. Switch on the heated rear screen and the main beam headlights. Run AC014 Alternator regulation again. Wait 20 seconds, for 10 seconds the alternator voltage should be 15 V ± 0.2. Wait 20 seconds, for 10 seconds the alternator voltage should be 13 V ± 0.2. If the values obtained are not correct, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

USM_V48_PR006

UPC84 V1.1

87G-74

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

87G

BATTERY VOLTAGE AFTER REST PR008

NOTES

This value can only be interpreted after the engine and electrical consumers have been stopped for at least 8 hours.

Check the consistency between the battery voltage measurement from the multimeter and the value of PR008 Battery voltage after rest. This value must be between 12.1 V < X < 13.5 V If the voltage values are not consistent (greater than 0.3 V difference between the 2 values), check the connection between the + battery feed and the Protection and Switching Unit. If the voltage values are consistent, carry out fault finding on the battery and the charge circuit (see Technical Note 6014, Checking the charging circuit, 16A, Starting-charging).

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

USM_V48_PR008

UPC84 V1.1

87G-75

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of parameters

87G

ALTERNATOR CHARGE PR010

NOTES

If fault DF007 UPC-alternator connection is declared present, deal with this fault first.

Is parameter PR008 Battery voltage after rest greater than 12.2 V?

YES Start the engine and let it idle for 5 minutes. Deactivate the climate control request. Check that the fan assemblies are not running. Without electrical consumers running, check that PR010 Alternator Charge is below 50 %. Switch on the heated rear screen and the main beam headlights. Wait 20 seconds and check that PR010 Alternator charge has increased but remains below 100 %. If PR010 Alternator charge is locked at 100 %, contact the Techline. NO Start the engine and let it idle for 30 minutes. Deactivate the climate control request. Check that the fan assemblies are not running. Switch on the heated rear screen and the main beam headlights. Wait 20 seconds and check that PR010 Alternator charge has increased but remains below 100 %. If PR010 Alternator charge is locked at 100 %, contact the Techline. If the fault is still present, carry out fault finding on the battery and charge circuit (see Technical Note 6014; Checking the charging circuit, 16A, Starting-charging).

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

USM_V48_PR010

UPC84 V1.1

87G-76

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Command summary table

Tool command

87G

Diagnostic tool title

AC001

Main beam headlights

AC002

Dipped headlights

AC003

Side lights

AC004

Front fog lights

AC005

Windscreen wiper low speed

AC006

Windscreen wiper high-speed

AC008

Compressor control

AC009

Low-speed fan assembly

AC010

High-speed fan assembly

AC011

Rear screen de-icer

AC013

Headlight washer relay

AC014

Alternator regulation

AC015

+ 12 V after ignition feed

AC016

Test electrical supply circuits

UPC84 V1.1

87G-77

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS AC001

NOTES

Check the condition and connections of fuses 6 (10A) and 7 (10A) on the Protection and Switching Unit. Replace them, if necessary. Check the condition and connections of the bulbs. Replace them, if necessary.

Check the condition and connection of the headlight connectors. Repair if necessary. Check for earth on track 1 of the headlight. Repair if necessary. Check for +12 V on track 4 of the headlight while the command is running. If the value is correct, check the continuity and insulation between the bulb and the headlight connector. Check the condition and connection of connector AN and the fuses on the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector AN track 7

track 4 left-hand headlight connector

Protection and Switching Unit connector AN track 8

track 4 right-hand headlight connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-78

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

DIPPED HEADLIGHTS AC002

NOTES

Check the condition and connections of fuses 3 (10A) and 4 (10A) on the Protection and Switching Unit. Replace them, if necessary. Check the condition and connections of the bulbs. Replace them, if necessary.

Check the condition and connection of the headlight connectors. Repair if necessary. Check for earth on track 1 of the headlight. Repair if necessary. Check for +12 V feed on track 2 of the headlight while the command is running. If the value is correct, check the continuity and insulation between the bulb and the headlight connector. Check the condition and connection of connector AN and the fuses on the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector AN track 4

track 2 of the left-hand headlight connector

Protection and Switching Unit connector AN track 6

track 2 of the right-hand headlight connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-79

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

SIDE LIGHTS AC003

NOTES

Check the condition and connections of fuses 1 (7.5A) and 2 (7.5A) on the Protection and Switching Unit. Replace them, if necessary. Check the condition and connections of the bulbs. Replace them, if necessary.

Check the condition and connection of the headlight connectors. Repair if necessary. Check for earth on track 1 of the headlight. Repair if necessary. Check for +12 V on track 5 of the headlight while the command is running. If the value is correct, check the continuity and insulation between the bulb and the headlight connector. Check the condition and connection of connector AN and the fuses on the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector AN track 5

track 5 left-hand headlight connector

Protection and Switching Unit connector AN track 1

track 5 right-hand headlight connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-80

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

FRONT FOG LIGHTS AC004

NOTES

Use this command only for vehicles fitted with front fog lights. Check the condition and connection of fuse 5 (20A) on the Protection and Switching Unit. Replace it if necessary. Check the condition and connection of the bulbs. Replace them, if necessary.

Check the condition and connection of the bulb connectors. Repair if necessary. Check for earth on the bulb connectors. Repair if necessary. Check for the + 12 V feed on the bulb connectors while the command is running. If the value is correct, replace the bulb(s). Check the condition and connection of connector AN on the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check for insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector AN track 2

track 1 left-hand fog light connector

Protection and Switching Unit connector AN track 3

track 1 right-hand fog light connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-81

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

WINDSCREEN WIPER LOW SPEED AC005

NOTES

Check the condition and connection of fuse 9 (25A) on the Protection and Switching Unit. Replace it if necessary. Make sure that status ET002 Windscreen wiper protection remains INACTIVE.

Check the condition and connections of the wiper motor. Repair if necessary. Check the earth of track 1 of the wiper motor. Repair if necessary. Check for the + 12 V feed on track 4 of the wiper motor while the command is running. If the value is correct, replace the motor. Check the condition and connection of connector CN and the fuses on the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connection: Protection and Switching Unit connector CN track 9

track 4 windscreen wiper motor

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-82

Edition 2

UPC Program No. C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

WINDSCREEN WIPER HIGH SPEED AC006

NOTES

Check the condition and connection of fuse 9 (25A) on the Protection and Switching Unit. Replace it if necessary. Make sure that status ET002 Windscreen wiper protection remains INACTIVE.

Check the condition and connections of the wiper motor. Repair if necessary. Check the earth of track 1 of the wiper motor. Repair if necessary. Check for + 12 V on track 5 of the wiper motor while the command is running. If the value is correct, replace the motor. Check the condition and connection of connector CN and the fuses on the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connection: Protection and Switching Unit connector CN track 4

track 5 windscreen wiper motor

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-83

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

COMPRESSOR CONTROL AC008

NOTES

Activating the command with the engine running is prohibited. Check the condition and connection of fuse 22 (10A) on the Protection and Switching Unit.

Check the condition and connection of the climate control compressor connector. Repair if necessary. Make sure that the compressor is earthed. Repair if necessary. Check for + 12 V on track A of the compressor while the command is running. If not correct: Check the condition and connection of connector MN on the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connection: Protection and Switching Unit connector MN track 10

track A compressor connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-84

Edition 2

UPC Program No. C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

LOW-SPEED FAN ASSEMBLY AC009

NOTES

Make sure nothing is hindering the rotation of the blades.

Check the condition and connection of the engine cooling fan connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure that track 2 of the engine cooling fan is earthed. Repair if necessary. Check for + 12 V feed on the fan assembly while the command is running. If correct, replace the fan assembly. If this is not correct, check for insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connection: Protection and Switching Unit connector MM track 2

track 1 of the engine cooling fan

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-85

Edition 2

UPC Program No. C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

HIGH-SPEED FAN ASSEMBLY AC010

NOTES

Make sure nothing is hindering the rotation of the blades.

Check the condition and connection of the engine cooling fan connector. Repair if necessary. Ensure that track 2 of the engine cooling fan is earthed. Repair if necessary. Check for + 12 V feed on the fan assembly while the command is running. If correct, replace the fan assembly. If not correct, check the continuity and insulation on the following connection: Protection and Switching Unit connector MM track 1

track 1 of the fan assembly

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-86

Edition 2

UPC Program No. C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

REAR SCREEN DE-ICER AC011

NOTES

Check the condition and connection of fuse 23 (30A) on the Protection and Switching Unit. Replace it if necessary.

REAR SCREEN

Check the condition and connection of the rear screen connectors. Repair if necessary. Check that the resistance of the rear screen is neither zero nor infinity. Make sure that the rear screen is earthed. Check for + 12 V feed on the rear screen terminal while the command is running. If not correct: Check the condition and connection of connector CM and the fuses on the Protection and Switching Unit. Repair if necessary. Check for insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the following connection: Protection and Switching Unit connector CM track 4

track 1 rear screen connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-87

Edition 2

UPC Program No. C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

HEADLIGHT WASHER RELAY AC013

NOTES

Check the condition and connection of fuse 21 (15A) on the Protection and Switching Unit. Replace it if necessary. The headlight washer pump operates if the dipped headlights are lit and the windscreen washer switch is pressed and held.

Check the condition and connection of the connectors on the headlight washer pump. Repair if necessary. To check that the pump is working properly, supply the pump's tracks directly in one direction and then the other. If the pump does not rotate, replace it. Check for + 12 V alternately on track 2 of the headlight washer pump connector. If not correct: Check the condition and connection of connector CN. Repair if necessary. Check the continuity, insulation and absence of interference resistance on the following connections: Protection and Switching Unit connector CN track 7

track 2 of the headlight washer pump black connector

Protection and Switching Unit connector CN track 11

track 1 of the headlight washer pump black connector

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-88

Edition 2

UPC Program No. C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

ALTERNATOR REGULATION AC014

NOTES

Conditions for the application of the command: – engine running at idling speed and warm engine, – Climate control off, – check that the fan assembly is not in operation. – check that PR010 Alternator charge is below 50 % without electrical consumers and below 90 % with the main beam headlights lit and rear screen de-icer activated. Effect of command: – for 30 seconds, the Protection and Switching Unit imposes a regulation voltage of 15 V ± 0.2 on the alternator. – then for another 30 seconds, the Protection and Switching Unit imposes a regulation voltage of 13 V ± 0.2 on the alternator.

Switch off all the electrical consumers (fans, main beam headlights, etc.). Measure the voltage across the alternator terminals between the B+ alternator terminal and the body of the alternator for the earth. Run AC014 Alternator regulation. Wait 20 seconds, for 10 seconds the alternator voltage should be 15 V ± 0.2. Wait 20 seconds, for 10 seconds the alternator voltage should be 13 V ± 0.2. Switch on the heated rear screen and the main beam headlights. Run AC014 Alternator regulation again. Wait 20 seconds, for 10 seconds the alternator voltage should be 15 V ± 0.2. Wait 20 seconds, for 10 seconds the alternator voltage should be 13 V ± 0.2. If the values obtained are not correct, carry out fault finding on the battery and the charge circuit (see Technical Note 6014, Checking the charging circuit, 16A, Starting-charging).

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-89

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Interpretation of commands

87G

TEST ELECTRICAL SUPPLY CIRCUITS AC016

NOTES

Switch off the ignition.

This command activates several electrical circuits run by the Protection and Switching Unit, and so carry out fault finding on the fuses in open circuit or short circuit. Switch on the ignition again. Read the faults. Deal with present faults,

AFTER REPAIR

Run command AC016 Test electrical supply circuits again.

UPC84 V1.1

87G-90

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Fault finding - Customer complaints

87G

Run complete fault finding on the multiplex network (see 88B, Multiplex). Carry out fault finding on the Protection and Switching Unit.

NOTES

RECORDED FAULTS

NO DIALOGUE WITH THE COMPUTER

ALP 1

THE STARTER DOES NOT WORK

ALP 2

NO BACKLIGHTING OF THE VARIOUS FUNCTIONS IN THE PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

ALP 3

UPC84 V1.1

87G-91

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87G

ALP 1

No dialogue with the computer

NOTES

Run a complete multiplex network check using the diagnostic tool. Check the condition and connection of the connectors and fuses on the UPC. Check the connection, condition and operation of relay 9 (+ after ignition feed) on the UPC.

Try the tool on another vehicle. Check the voltage of the battery. Check the condition and connection of the battery fuse box fuses and terminals. Replace any faulty fuses. Repair if necessary. Check for + 12 V feed on the Protection and Switching Unit bolted power terminal. Repair if necessary. Check for earth on tracks 3 and 6 of connector CM. Repair if necessary. Check for a + 12 V battery feed on track 16, a + 12 V after ignition supply on track 1, an earth on track 5 and on track 4 of the diagnostic socket. Repair if necessary. If dialogue with the computer is still not possible, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

USM_V48_ALP1

UPC84 V1.1

87G-92

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87G

ALP 2

The starter does not work

NOTES

Run a complete multiplex network check using the diagnostic tool. Using status ET010 Starting conditions satisfied, check that all the starting conditions have been fulfilled; the status should be YES.

Check the condition and connection of connector MM on the Protection and Switching Unit, and of the starter control terminal. Repair if necessary. With the starter activated, check for 12 V feed on the starter control terminal. If correct, carry out fault finding on the starter. Check the insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance on the connection between UPC connector MM track 3 and the starter control terminal. Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

USM_V48_ALP2

UPC84 V1.1

87G-93

Edition 2

UPC Program No.: C54 Vdiag no.: 48

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CONNECTION UNIT Diagnostic - Fault finding charts

87G

ALP 3

No backlighting of the various functions in the passenger compartment

NOTES

Make sure that the side lights are working; if not, refer to the procedure for command AC003 Side lights.

Check the condition and connection of the faulty function(s). Repair if necessary. Check for earth on the faulty function(s). Repair if necessary. With the side lights lit, check for 12 V feed on the faulty function(s). If correct, replace the defective component. Check for insulation, continuity and the absence of interference resistance between the faulty function and the Protection and Switching Unit: Rear right-hand light, right-hand heated seat control, righthand window winder controls, central locking switch, climate control computer, CD changer, cruise control/speed limiter control, door mirrors control.

track 5 of Protection and Switching Unit connector CN.

Rear left-hand light, left-hand heated seat control, number plate lighting, left-hand window winder controls, electric door mirrors control, cigarette lighter, radio, automatic gearbox display, traction control switch.

track 12 of Protection and Switching Unit connector CN.

Repair if necessary. If the fault is still present, contact the Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Repeat the conformity check from the start.

USM_V48_ALP3

UPC84 V1.1

87G-94

Edition 2

MULTIPLEXING 188B Fault finding - Introduction

88B

INTRODUCTION WARNING Fault-finding on the Scénic II can only be done with the CLIP diagnostic tool fitted with the new vehicle connection probe cord (part no. Elé 1674 or 00 00 167 400).

Description of the multiplex network: The multiplex network consists of a twisted pair of wires connected to several vehicle computers. The two wires are known as Can H and Can L. Two of the computers have an internal resistance of 120 Ω (terminating resistance): – the airbag computer – the injection computer The network carries data exchanged by the computers. The Scénic II is a new-generation multiplex vehicle; the main change is the increase in communication speed to 500 kBauds. On the Scénic II, only one multiplex network can be diagnosed with the RENAULT tool. The maximum number of computers on this network is 15. Note: A second multiplex network for the navigation system may also be present.

PURPOSE: ● The purpose of the multiplex network test is to determine the various computers present on the vehicle's multiplex network as well as the cause of possible inter-computer communication failures. ● It also serves to determine the functions installed in the vehicle, which are sometimes housed in various computers (distributed functions). ● The test also checks the condition of multiplex network segments. ● The multiplex network test can also run diagnostics on computers disconnected from the multiplex network; this provides an overview of the vehicles electronic architecture.

88B-1

MULTIPLEXING Fault finding - Introduction

88B

MONITORING MULTIPLEX NETWORK OPERATION Vehicle computer power supply for diagnostics: Vehicle card in card reader. Press and hold (over 5 seconds) the Start button in the absence of start conditions (for example: selecting a gear). Connect the diagnostic tool and perform the required operations. Important: To power the discharge bulb computers, the dipped headlights must be turned on.

This step is the essential starting point before any computer diagnostics. It ensures that the network is correctly connected at the terminals of each computer and that the signal is correctly sent to it and received by it. On the Scénic II, this function also reads the number of faults present in the computers.

The multiplex network test function is executed automatically after vehicle selection by the user. After the network check, the other functions become accessible.

MULTIPLEX NETWORK TEST PROCEDURE: ⇒ Communication established with the computers storing the vehicle configuration (identification read). ⇒ Vehicle configuration read in the two computers that hold the multiplex network configuration (airbag and UCH on the SCENIC II) ⇒

List of diagnosable computers read in the two configuration computers

⇒

Computer interrogation

⇒

Physical (electronic) measurements on the CAN network.

88B-2

MULTIPLEXING Fault finding - Introduction

88B

COMPUTERS – – – –

Valid: green outline, green lettering. Undetected: red outline, red lettering. Undiagnosable: black outline, black lettering. Unknown: red outline, red lettering + exclamation mark.

PISTON RINGS – Valid: green dash. – Faulty: red dash. – Undiagnosed: black dash. INTERPRETING TEST RESULT CHARTS On the Problems tab, the computers are organised into the following groups: – Undetected if the computer failed to respond to the tool's identification request. – Within the undetected category, the computers are subdivided into Stores multiplex network configuration and Does not store multiplex network configuration". – Unknown if the computer is detected but cannot be identified from its response. On the Information tab, the computers are organised and listed as follows: – Undiagnosable if the computer cannot be diagnosed with the tool and therefore was not queried. – Valid if the computer responded correctly to the tool's query. Clicking on the continue icon in the lower right-hand corner displays a new screen with the following tab: On the Results tab, the computers are organised into the following groups: – Faulty if the computer is known and has a non-zero number of faults. – OK if the computer was detected, recognised and has no faults. – Unknown if the computer was detected but could not be identified from its response. – Undetected if the computer can be diagnosed but failed to respond. FUNCTION TESTING The vehicle function tests screen resembles the multiplex network test screen in showing a diagram of the network architecture if this is known and displayed. The Function tab, displays the various computers involved in the functions whether distributed or not distributed over the different computers. The Info tab displays the other possible functions found on the vehicle concerned. Selecting a function from the list greys out the computers on the diagram that are not involved in that function. The Diagnostics button runs diagnostics on the function selected from the list.

88B-3

MULTIPLEXING Fault finding - Configuration

88B

MULTIPLEX NETWORK CONFIGURATION In this vehicle, the two computers holding the multiplex network configuration are the airbag and UCH computers. The Configuration screen consists of two tabs for displaying and modifying the: – multiplex network configuration on the first tab, – diagnosable computer configuration on the second. WARNING First repair the computers containing the multiplex network configuration (airbag and UCH) to be able to display the screen with the multiplex network configuration diagram for the diagnosed vehicle. LIST OF VEHICLE COMPUTERS

Computer

Multiplex network configuration

Diagnosable computer configuration Via the ISO K/L Via CAN lines

Injection

PRESENT

YES

-

ABS

PRESENT

YES

-

Protection and Switching Unit

PRESENT

YES

-

Automatic gearbox

PRESENT

-

YES

LPG

PRESENT

-

YES

Steering lock

PRESENT

-

-

Electric power-assisted steering

PRESENT

YES

-

Instrument panel

PRESENT

YES

-

UCH

PRESENT

YES

-

Air conditioning

PRESENT

YES

-

Central Communications Unit

PRESENT

NO

NO

Driving school unit

PRESENT

NO

NO

Airbag

PRESENT

YES

-

Automatic parking brake

PRESENT

-

YES

Parking assistance

ABSENT

NO

NO

Discharge bulbs

ABSENT

-

YES

88B-4

MULTIPLEXING Fault finding - Configuration

88B

MULTIPLEX NETWORK GENERIC ARCHITECTURE Number of multiplex network segments between computers:

120 118 1094 1337 119 997 1088 1232 247 645

Injection ABS ** ABS+ESP ** Switching Protection Unit Automatic transmission * LPG / GNV * Steering lock Electric power-assisted steering Instrument panel UCH

419 1125 469 756 1217 989 1222

Air conditioning Control and Communications Unit Driving School Unit Airbag Automatic parking brake Discharge bulbs Parking assistance

* A vehicle can have either LPG or automatic transmission, but never both. ** The vehicle either has just ABS or ABS + ESP (electronic stability program).

88B-5

MULTIPLEXING Fault finding - Configuration

88B

NETWORK CONFIGURATION

NOTES

The configuration is detected with the ignition on. It can be launched from the multiplex network test results screens.

The tool displays the UCH and/or airbag computer configuration. Configuration involves the following steps: – Select the computer to be modified. – Select the multiplex network diagram version. The version number increases with each change to the multiplex network wiring in this vehicle. This information is available in the global vehicle base. Choice of computers in the vehicle present on the network The following computers are always fitted to the vehicle: – Injection – Protection and Switching Unit – ABS – Steering lock (cannot be support fault finding with the tool) – Instrument panel – Passenger Compartment Control Unit (UCH) – Electric power-assisted steering – Airbag + the vehicle options: – Automatic gearbox – LPG – Climate control – Control and Communications Unit (cannot support fault finding with the tool) – Automatic parking brake – Driving School Unit (cannot support fault finding with the tool) – Discharge bulbs – Parking assistance

WARNING A computer connected to the multiplex network but not registered in the computers containing the multiplex network configuration will not be checked in the multiplex network test. Adjust the configuration by declaring any missing computers as present in the UCH or airbag computer or both. Relaunch the multiplex network test after modifying the configuration.

88B-6

MULTIPLEXING Diagnostics - Dealing with faults

88B

FAULTY SEGMENT

NOTES

First check that the computer at the end of the faulty segment is properly supplied (earth, + battery, + accessories or + after ignition). Always check that the computer is operating correctly. Important: the tool may not be able to pinpoint the faulty segment(s). It then suggests several segments that could be faulty. In this event, repair the segment nearest to the diagnostic socket.

Isolate the faulty segment by disconnecting both ends of the segment. Check the condition of the connections. Check the continuity of the Can H and Can L lines between the two connectors of the isolated segment. Refer to the Help with finding short circuits section for computer and connection track allocations. Perform the necessary operations to ensure the continuity of the two lines (for example, replacing the wiring). Make sure the computer present in the vehicle is compatible with the Scénic II and that the data it is producing is correct. Reconnect the segment. Carry out a new multiplex network test with the diagnostic tool. Is the segment still declared faulty?

No

End of fault finding.

Yes

Are there other faulty segments?

AFTER REPAIR

No

Repeat the multiplex network tests to check the continuity and insulation of the Can H and Can L lines between the end of the faulty segment and the diagnostic socket.

Yes

Apply the same procedure to each segment.

Carry out a new multiplex network test with the diagnostic tool. Clear the stored faults on all the computers connected to the network. Deal with any other possible faults.

88B-7

MULTIPLEXING Diagnostics - Dealing with faults

88B

FAULTY COMPUTER

– Make sure the computers installed in the vehicle are the correct type and are compatible with Mégane II. – Check the power supply to the computers (earth, + battery, + accessories or + after ignition).

NOTES

Make sure that the computer wake-up mode is in full working order on the vehicle and properly assimilated by the computers. The wake-up mode is: – timed power supply: UCH, instrument panel. – + accessories: Protection and Switching Unit, air conditioning control panel, radio, Control and Communications Unit. – + After ignition: Injection, ABS, airbag, Electric Power Assisted Steering, Automatic transmission, LPG, Steering lock, Roof control unit, Driving school unit, Automatic parking brake, Parking assistance. – + After ignition + dipped headlights: Xenon bulbs.

WARNING Dialogue with the Xenon bulbs is only possible with + after ignition and the dipped headlights on.

– Switch to computer diagnostics mode. Test of communication with computers. ⇒No communication from computers to diagnostic tool: see Fault Finding Chart 1 No communication with the computer or computers not communicating with the diagnostic tool. Check the connections to the computers and for no open circuit. Repair if necessary. ⇒Computers that only produce partial information when identified: Check in the Workshop Repair Manual or Global Vehicle Base to see that the computer really is compatible with Scénic II. Make sure the CLIP diagnostic tool update is recent enough to handle Scénic II faults.

If after these tests no irregularity or open or short circuit has been detected, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a new multiplex network test with the diagnostic tool. Clear the stored faults on all the computers connected to the network. Deal with any other possible faults.

88B-8

MULTIPLEXING Diagnostics - Dealing with faults

88B

UNKNOWN COMPUTERS ON THE NETWORK

– Check the compatibility of the computers with Scénic II.

NOTES

Make sure the CLIP diagnostic tool update is recent enough to be able to handle Scénic II faults.

– Switch to computer diagnostics mode. Test of communication with computers. ⇒No communication from computers to diagnostic tool: see Fault Finding Chart 1 No communication with the computer or computers not communicating with the diagnostic tool. Check the connections to the computers and for no open circuit. Repair if necessary. ⇒Make sure the computer identification information is correct and matches the vehicle in diagnostics. – Computer information: – Parts Department part no.: – Vdiag: – Program no.: – Version no.: – Calibration no.:

If after these tests no irregularity or open or short circuit has been detected, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Carry out a new multiplex network test with the diagnostic tool. Clear the stored faults on all the computers connected to the network. Deal with any other possible faults.

88B-9

MULTIPLEXING Diagnostics - Dealing with faults

88B

MULTIPLEX NETWORK OUT OF ORDER Help finding network short circuits

NOTES

Get a copy of the multiplex network wiring diagram for the vehicle and the diagnostic socket diagram. In the event of a short-circuit to + battery, leave the battery connected.

The test procedure involves disconnecting the various network components in sequence to pinpoint the faulty one. Check the condition of the connectors. Check the condition of the multiplex network wires (CAN H - CAN L). Repair the damaged components. Systematically repeat the multiplex network test after each operation to see if the fault has been resolved. If the fault is still shown as present, continue disconnecting the connectors and computers one by one.

Input Connector

Output

Can H

Can L

Protection and Switching Unit

Siemens

PEH blue

10

8

K4J injection

S 3000 C

2AN A black

A4

A3

K4M - F4R injection

S 3000 C

2AN A black

A4

A3

K9K injection

LVCR

2AN A black

A4

A3

F9Q injection

EDC 16 C Black

A4

A3

Automatic transmission

DP0

39

Black

38

ABS - ESP

Black

35

14

ABS

Black

26

15

Black

7

5

Airbag

Black

11

10

Climate control

Black

7

1

Steering lock

Black

3

6

UCH

PE 2 black

6

16

Instrument panel

Grey

30

29

Driving school unit

Black

A3

B3

Central communications unit

Green

Automatic parking brake

Grey

R2

Grey

2

3

R 369

White

12

13

OBD (On Board Diagnostic)

Black

6

14

Electric power-assisted steering

TRW

6

7

A3

A2

Connector PEH blue

7/9

2AN B brown

K4

K3

Black

6

4

10/8

20/18

Red

2

3

Grey

3

4

Carry out a new multiplex network test with the diagnostic tool. Clear the stored faults on all the computers connected to the network. Deal with any other possible faults.

88B-10

Can L

11/12

If the fault is not visible, contact your Techline.

AFTER REPAIR

Can H

MULTIPLEXING Fault finding - Fault finding chart

88B

CHART 1

No communication with computers

NOTES

Vehicle computer power supply for diagnostics: Vehicle card in card reader. Press and hold (over 5 seconds) the start button in the absence of start conditions (for example: selecting a gear). Connect the diagnostic tool and perform the required operations. WARNING: The dipped headlights must be switched on to power the Xenon headlights.

Try the diagnostic tool on another vehicle. Make sure the tool version is more recent than CD-ROM No. 32. Check: – The connection between the diagnostic tool and socket (connection and cable in good condition). – The computers' power supply. – The engine compartment and passenger compartment fuses. Make sure the CLIP sensor is properly fed by tracks 16 (+ 12 V), and 4 and 5 (earth) of the diagnostic socket, indicated by the two red diodes on the sensor lighting up. Make sure that the CLIP sensor is properly connected to the computer's USB port. Make sure that the CLIP sensor is communicating properly with the vehicle's computers; this is indicated by the two green diodes on the sensor lighting up. green diodes red diodes CAN ISO

Vehicle power supply Sensor power supply

Use the diagnostic socket to check the following tracks: track 1 + After ignition track 16 + Battery tracks 4 and 5 Earth Repair if necessary. CAN network communications failure Check line continuity and insulation: CAN H (diagnostic socket track 6) CAN L (diagnostic socket track 14) With a multimeter, make sure that the voltages at the diagnostic socket terminals are: – 2.5 V between CAN H (track 6) and the earth (tracks 4 and 5) – 2.5 V between CAN L (track 14) and earth (tracks 4 and 5) (average values) See the Help with finding short circuits on the network heading in this section for how to detect short circuits in the vehicle's multiplex network. No communication on the K line Check the continuity, insulation and for absence of interference on the K line of the diagnostic socket (track 7).

88B-11

MULTIPLEXING Fault finding - Fault finding chart

CHART 2

88B

Topology diagram not displayed during multiplex network test

NOTES

The topology cannot be displayed under the following conditions: – The two computers storing the multiplex network configuration failed to respond. – The multiplex network is out of order; therefore communication is impossible. – On the Multiplex network tab on the configuration screen, a wrong Network version number has been entered into one of the two computers that store the network configuration. – No Network version has been entered into the two computers that store the configuration.

88B-12

MULTIPLEXING Fault finding - Fault finding chart

CHART 3

NOTES

88B

Configuration chart display

Fault finding chart to use if the tool loads the configuration screen at the end of the multiplex network test. The configuration chart is always accessible through the Configuration icon.

The RENAULT loads the configuration screen directly under the following conditions: ● MULTIPLEX NETWORK tab – Inconsistent Network version numbers entered into the two computers that store the multiplex network configuration. – Inconsistent list of computers entered into the computers that store the multiplex network configuration. – Wrong network version number entered into at least one of the two computers that store the multiplex network configuration. – One of the two computers that store the network version is blank (case of replaced airbag or UCH computer). ● The COMPUTERS THAT CAN SUPPORT FAULT FINDING tab (see screen below) – Inconsistent diagram numbers entered into the two computers that store the configuration. – Inconsistency in the list of diagnosable computers entered into the two computers that store the list of diagnosable computers. – Inconsistency between the list of computers entered and the computers actually detected on the vehicle.

88B-13

MULTIPLEXING Diagnostics - Repair assistance

88B

CHANGES IN SCENIC II DIAGNOSTICS ●

Assistance with computer or faulty segment detection:

If the multiplex network is completely frozen, this command can isolate multiplex network segments and thereby rule out those that respond properly to the tool. This makes it easier to pinpoint the origin of the failure. The algorithm for help with locating faults is intended for dealing with electrical faults present solely in CAN; it is therefore essential that connectors and computers not attached to the bus are not taken into consideration.

●

A test for multiplex network faults by using physical measurements:

When a multiplex network segment has a short circuit, the computers can no longer communicate with each other nor with the diagnostic tool. At this point, the network test is out of order. The CLIP tool can identify several types of faults by taking electrical measurements on the CAN H and CAN L multiplex network. It can detect a CAN L / CAN H short circuit, a CAN L / + 12 V short circuit, a CAN H / + 12 V short circuit, and a CAN H / earth short circuit. Then, by disconnecting the connectors and computers in the order described under the "Help with detecting segments - computers" heading, the actual or possible segment causing the multiplex network fault can be identified.

●

Disconnecting connectors and computers:

⇒ Help with locating network faults screen In keeping with the diagnostic tool algorithm and based on the results obtained as it unfolds, the order for disconnecting connectors and computers recommended by the diagnostic tool will probably be as follows: Injection, ABS, Protection and Switching Unit, automatic transmission, LPG, steering lock, electric powerassisted steering, instrument panel, UCH, heating and ventilation system, Control and Communications Unit, R369 Union, Driving School Unit, airbag, R2 Union, automatic parking brake. NOTE: The tool sometimes requests that computers not present in the vehicle concerned be disconnected; in this case, make sure that the computer in question is not installed, and confirm as though the component concerned had been disconnected and reconnected and continue the test. Network physical measurements screen With the second screen, the operator can check the status of the multiplex network after each disconnection / reconnection procedure involving the selected connector or computer. This enables the operator to check the status of the multiplex network after disconnecting each component.

88B-14

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS 188C AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

88C

Fault finding - Introduction

1. SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT This document presents the fault finding method applicable to all computers with the following specifications: Véhicule: SCENIC II

Name of computer: AUTOLIV - ACU 4

Function concerned: AIRBAG

Program no.: Vdiag No.: 04

2. PREREQUISITES FOR FAULT FINDING Documentation type Fault finding procedures (this manual): – Assisted fault finding (incorporated into the diagnostic tool), paper version (Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note) and Dialogys. Wiring Diagrams: – Visu-Diagram (CD-ROM), paper. Type of diagnostic tools: – CLIP Special tooling required:

SPECIAL TOOLING REQUIRED – Multimeter. – Set of adapters and terminal blocks for using the airbag and pretensioner wiring harness check function of CLIP and XRBAG tools for updates including the terminal blocks listed below. – Modifying the series of new airbag ignition module connectors entails modifying the dummy ignition module. LOCAL MODIFICATION OF THE DUMMY IGNITION MODULE: – Remove the ignition module from its red mounting and remove one of the brown locking notches. – – – –

22-track computer terminal block: Elé. 1685 64-track computer terminal block: Elé. 1717 22-track seat terminal block: Elé. 1687 10-track rotary switch terminal block: Elé. 1617

ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-1

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Introduction

88C

3. REMINDERS Procedure: To run diagnostics on the vehicle's computers, switch on the ignition in fault finding mode (+ after ignition forced setting): – vehicle card in card reader. – Press and hold start button (longer than 5 seconds) with start-up conditions not fulfilled, – Then connect the diagnostic tool and perform the required operations. IMPORTANT The left-hand and right-hand Xenon bulb computers are powered when the dipped headlights are lit. Fault finding procedures can only be carried out on them after the ignition has been switched on in fault finding mode (+ after ignition imposed) and the dipped headlights are on. + After ignition feed cut-out is performed as follows: – Disconnect the diagnostic tool, – Press the start button twice briefly (less then 3 seconds), – See that the + after ignition feed has been cut off by checking that the computer warning lights on the instrument panel have gone out. Faults: Faults are declared to be either present or stored (depending on whether they appeared in a certain situation and have disappeared since, or whether they remain but are not diagnosed within the current context). The present or stored state of faults should be taken into consideration when the diagnostic tool is used after the + after ignition feed (without acting on the system components). Deal with present faults according to the procedure specified in the Interpretation of faults section. For stored faults, note the faults displayed and follow the instructions in the "Notes" section. If the fault is confirmed when the instructions in the Notes section are applied, the fault is present. In this case, deal with the fault If the fault is not confirmed, carry out basic checks. Check: – the electrical lines which correspond to the fault, – the connectors for these lines (for oxidation, bent pins, etc.), – - the resistance of the faulty component, – the condition of the wires (melted or cut insulation, wear). or use the fault finding procedure to check the circuit of the faulty component. Conformity check The conformity check is designed to check the states and parameters which do not display any faults on the diagnostic tool when inconsistent. This phase therefore: – diagnosis of faults that do not have a fault display, and which may correspond to a customer complaint. – checks that the system is operating correctly and that there is no risk of a fault reappearing after repairs. This section gives the fault finding procedures for states and parameters and the conditions for checking them. If a state is not behaving normally or a parameter is outside permitted tolerance values, you should consult the corresponding fault finding page. Customer complaints – Fault finding charts If the diagnostic tool check is correct, but the customer complaint persists, it should be dealt with according to the customer complaint.

A synopsis of the general procedure to follow is provided on the following page in the form of a logic flow chart. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-2

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Introduction

88C

4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Check the battery charge and condition of the fuses

Print the system diagnostic sheet (available in CLIP and in the Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note)

Connect CLIP

Dialogue with computer?

no

See CHART 1

yes Read faults

no Faults present

Conformity check

yes no Deal with faults found

The symptom persists

Fault solved

Deal with stored faults Use ALP charts (fault finding charts)

no The symptom persists

Fault solved no The symptom persists

yes

Fault solved

Contact Techline with the completed fault finding log

ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-3

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Introduction

88C

5. FAULT FINDING LOG

WARNING!

WARNING: A properly documented diagnostic sheet is required for all monitored part (computer-type) reimbursements or Techline calls.

IT IS THEREFORE COMPULSORY TO FILL OUT A FAULT FINDING SHEET EVERY TIME A FAULT FINDING OPERATION IS PERFORMED. All faults requiring replacement of a computer for thorough fault finding with the appropriate tools. The diagnostic sheet must be filled out during the process and indicate the findings for the warranty refund.

6. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS All work on components requires obeying safety rules to prevent physical damage or human injury: – Make sure the battery is properly charged to avoid damaging the computers with a low charge. During operations on the airbag/seat belt pretensioner systems it is vital that you lock the computer using the diagnostic tool to prevent any risk of accidental triggering (all the ignition lines will be inhibited). The locked mode is signalled when the Instrument panel warning light comes on. If it is impossible to connect the fault-finding tool, switch off the ignition, remove the system power fuse, and wait at least 2 seconds for the reserve power capacity to discharge. Never measure the airbag or pretensioner trigger lines with any device other than XRBAG or CLIP's "Airbag and pretensioner wiring harness check". Before using a dummy ignition module, ensure that its resistance is between 1.8 and 2.5 ohms. While working, make sure the computer power supply does not drop below 10 V. WARNING Airbag and pretensioner destruction and disposal is subject to national legislation.

ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-4

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Introduction

88C

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM (FRONT section)

AR To rear wiring

ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-5

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Introduction

88C

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM (REAR section)

AR A B C D E

G

H I

To rear wiring Central unit Driver’s seat Front passenger seat Buckle pretensioner Driver's front airbag ignition module Passenger's front airbag ignition module Front side airbag ignition module Lap belt pretensioner or seat cushion airbag

J/K L/M N/O

Curtain airbag ignition modules Rear side airbag ignition modules Rear seat belt retractors

FRONT AIRBAGS

CT

Rotary switch

P

+ 12 V / earth Warning light / Fault finding lines Impact sensors/ Impact information Passenger airbag lock switch

Measuring point

Correct value

Driver

C0, C2 and C4

1.8 to 6.2 Ω

Passenger

C0 and C4

1.8 to 4 Ω

SIDE AIRBAGS AND PRETENSIONERS Measuring point

Correct value

C0, C1 and C3

1.8 to 4 Ω

Correct insulation value: display ≥ 100.h or 9999 flashing.

ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-6

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Introduction

88C

DEFINITION OF THE TRIGGER LINES

L1:

Driver's seat cushion / frontal airbag circuit (cable B of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717)

L2:

Passenger's seat cushion / frontal airbag circuit (cable D of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717)

L3:

Passenger's frontal airbag circuit 1 (cable B of 22-track terminal block Elé. 1685)

L4:

Passenger's frontal airbag circuit 2 (cable A of 22-track terminal block Elé. 1685)

L5:

Driver's frontal airbag circuit 1 (cable C of 22-track terminal block Elé. 1685)

L6:

Driver's frontal airbag circuit 2 (cable D of 22-track terminal block Elé. 1685)

L7:

Driver's side curtain airbag circuit (cable I of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717)

L8:

Passenger's side curtain airbag circuit (cable G of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717)

L9:

Driver's front chest side airbag circuit (cable H of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717

L10: Passenger's front chest side airbag circuit (cable F of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717) L11: Driver's rear chest side airbag circuit (cable N of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717) L12: Passenger's rear chest side airbag circuit (cable L of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717) L13: Front buckles pretensioner circuit (cables A and C of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717) L14: Rear seat belt retractors (cables E and J of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717)

ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-7

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Diagnostics - System operation

88C

PASSIVE SAFETY EQUIPMENT

The MEGANE II has equipment also found on the LAGUNA II and VEL SATIS, namely: – Front seat chest side airbag. – Front seat type BXX double pretensioner. – Driver's seat position sensor for adaptive airbag. – Three-point rear centre seat belt. – Front and rear Isofix mountings.

INNOVATIONS: – Passenger airbag inhibition switch – Anti-skid airbag in the seat along with a buckle pretensioner on the front seat in type CMXX MEGANE II.

In the text, this airbag is referred to as the: SEAT-CUSHION AIRBAG/DRIVER'S SEAT LAP BELT.

Via the same trigger line, the ACU 4 Vdiag 04 computer controls either the seat-cushion (antiskid) airbag or the driver's seat lap belt pretensioner: The configuration for type B is: Driver's seat lap belt pretensioner. The configuration for type C is: Driver's seat-cushion airbag. Both features are never found on the same vehicle because they use the same ignition line.

ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-8

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Computer track allocation

88C

AIRBAG COMPUTER 22-track connector: Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Description

Track

+ Passenger front airbag volume 2 + Passenger front airbag volume 1 + Driver's front airbag volume 1 + Driver's front airbag volume 2 Not used Not used + After ignition Not used Not used CAN L CAN H

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

Description - Passenger front airbag volume 2 - Passenger front airbag volume 1 - Driver's front airbag volume 1 - Driver's front airbag volume 2 Not used Not used Electrical earth Not used Not used + Passenger airbag inhibition switch + Passenger airbag inhibition switch

64-track connector: Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

Description

Track

+ Buckle pretensioner: driver - Buckle pretensioner: driver + Lap belt pretensioner: driver + Lap belt pretensioner: driver Not used Not used Not used Not used - Driver's seat position sensor + Driver's seat position sensor + Driver's seat belt buckle contact - Driver's seat belt buckle contact Not used Not used + Driver's front chest side airbag - Driver's front chest side airbag + Driver's side curtain airbag + Driver's side curtain airbag + Driver's rear seat belt retractor - Driver's rear seat belt retractor Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used + Driver's side lateral impact sensor - Driver's side lateral impact sensor + Rear chest side airbag driver's side - Rear chest side airbag driver's side Not used Not used

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64

Description Not used Not used Not used Not used + Buckle pretensioner: passenger - Buckle pretensioner: passenger + Lap belt pretensioner: passenger - Lap belt pretensioner: passenger + Rear passenger seat belt retractor + Rear passenger seat belt retractor + Passenger's front chest side airbag - Passenger's front chest side airbag + Passenger side curtain airbag - Passenger side curtain airbag Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used + Passenger's rear chest side airbag - Passenger's rear chest side airbag Not used Not used + Passenger side lateral impact sensor - Passenger side lateral impact sensor Not used Not used

ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-9

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Computer track allocation

88C

SIDE IMPACT SENSORS CONNECTIONS

2-track connector Track 1

Description

Track

Signal +

2

Description Signal -

Note: The front belt pretensioners, front chest side airbags, lap pretensioners or seat airbags and seat position sensor functions run through a black 22-track R341 or R342 intermediate connector located under each seat and attached to the vehicle floor.

ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-10

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Diagnostics - Replacing parts

88C

REPLACING THE AIRBAG COMPUTER

BEFORE REPLACING ANY COMPUTER, YOU ARE REQUIRED TO CONTACT YOUR TECHLINE. So that the failure of the returned computer can be analyzed, the use of command RZ001 "erase fault memory" when DF001 "Computer" is present or stored is officially prohibited. The airbag computers are sold in locked mode to avoid all risk of accidental triggering (all ignition lines are inhibited). The locked mode is signalled when the airbag fault warning indicator lights up on the instrument panel. Follow this procedure to replace an airbag computer: – – – – – – – –

Ensure that the ignition is switched off. Replace the computer. Modify the computer configuration if necessary. Enter the VIN into the computer with diagnostic tool command VP010 "Write VIN". Switch off the ignition. Carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Enter the After Sales service date with diagnostic tool command VP008 "Write last After Sales service date". Unlock the computer only if no faults are indicated by the diagnostic tool.

ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-11

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

Fault finding - Configuration and programming

88C

CLEARING RZ001: Fault memory. This command is used to clear faults from the computer's memory. CONFIGURATION / READ CONFIGURATION: – To make it easier to configure airbag computer ACU4, the fault-finding tool has five automatic configuration commands for the trigger lines and sensors installed in the vehicles (BMXX, CMXX, SMXX). The commands in the table on the next page, however, are used to configure each system component individually to adapt the computer configuration to the actual equipment in the vehicle. – The read-configuration commands (LCXXX) are used to display the current computer configuration in relation to the trigger lines and sensors installed in the vehicle. – The configuration commands (CFXXX) are used to adjust computer configuration to the equipment actually installed in the vehicle. – STANDARD CONFIGURATION COMMANDS: – CF297: B/C NO SIDE AIRBAGS. Vehicle types B, C WITH NO FRONT AND REAR FRONTAL SIDE AIRBAGS AND NO SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS (SABLAT / SSABCS). – CF298: B/C WITH FRONT FRONTAL + CURTAIN AIRBAGS. Vehicle types B, C with FRONT FRONTAL SIDE AIRBAGS + SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS (ABLAVI / SSABCS). – CF299: B/C WITH FRONT/REAR FRONTAL + CURTAIN AIRBAGS. Vehicle types B, C with FRONT AND REAR FRONTAL SIDE AIRBAGS + SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS (ABLAT / SSABCS). – CF300: VAN WITH CURTAIN AIRBAGS. Three S vehicles (vans) equipped with CURTAIN SIDE AIRBAGS (ABLAT / SSABCS). – CF301: VAN WITH NO CURTAIN AIRBAGS. Three S vehicles (vans) WITHOUT CURTAIN SIDE AIRBAGS (ABLAVI / SSABCS). Because of probably computer part number unification in the Parts Department, some sensors or trigger lines may have to be deconfigured after using standard configuration commands. For this, use the individual configuration commands for system components. After configuration, check the display configuration screen to make sure that the information entered is correct.

ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-12

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

Fault finding - Configuration and programming

88C

CONFIGURATION / READ CONFIGURATION: – CONFIGURABLE FEATURES: Trigger lines "WITH" or "WITHOUT": The front buckle pretensioners are serially wired. The rear seat belt retractors are serially wired.

TITLE SEAT-CUSHION AIRBAG/DRIVER'S SEAT LAP BELT. PASSENGER'S SEAT-CUSHION AIRBAG / LAP BELT PASSENGER FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT 1 PASSENGER FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT 2 DRIVER'S FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT 1 DRIVER'S FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT 2 DRIVER'S SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG PASSENGER SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG DRIVER'S FRONT CHEST SIDE AIRBAG PASSENGER FRONT CHEST SIDE AIRBAG DRIVER'S REAR CHEST SIDE AIRBAG PASSENGER REAR CHEST SIDE AIRBAG FRONT BUCKLE PRETENSIONERS REAR INERTIA REELS

CONFIGURATION READING

CONFIGURATION

LC080 LC079 LC052 LC047 LC048 LC049 LC040 LC041 LC042 LC043 LC044 LC045 LC081 LC078

CF283 CF282 CF236 CF229 CF230 CF231 CF221 CF222 CF223 CF224 CF225 CF226 CF284 CF278

CONFIGURATION READING

CONFIGURATION

LC086 LC025 LC026 LC073

CF289 CF207 CF208 CF273

Sensors "WITH" or "WITHOUT":

TITLE DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION SENSOR DRIVER'S SIDE SENSOR PASSENGER SIDE SENSOR DRIVER'S SEAT BELT BUCKLE SENSOR

ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-13

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

Fault finding - Configuration and programming

88C

CONFIGURATION / READ CONFIGURATION (continued):

Passenger airbag lock mode "WITH KEY" or "WITHOUT":

TITLE PASSENGER AIRBAG LOCK MODE

CONFIGURATION READING

CONFIGURATION

LC060

CF248

Read type of vehicle: LC034 "MEGANE II"

OTHER COMMANDS: – VP006: Lock computer. This command is used whenever servicing the system. It shuts down all trigger lines. – VP007: Unlock computer. This command unlocks the computer after it was locked. – VP008: Write last After Sales service date. This command is used to enter the date the system was serviced. – VP010: Write VIN. This command serves to enter the vehicle identification number (VIN) into the computer. – SC004: Read impact context. This command is used in reconditioning the vehicle following an impact. It obtains, from the computer that is to be replaced, a list of the trigger lines controlled and the system's state at the moment of impact.

ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-14

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Airbags and pretensioners

Page 1 / 2

List of monitored parts: Airbag computer ●

Administrative identification Date

2

0

Log completed by Business name or no./ Country Vehicle model VIN: Engine Diagnostic tool

CLIP

Version ●

Customer complaint 1192

Other

●

Please specify:

When the fault appears 011

When switched on

005

While driving

Other

●

Airbag warning light lit

004

Intermittently

999

When starting the engine

Please specify:

Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure

Type of fault finding manual:

Workshop Repair Manual:

Technical Note

Assisted fault finding

Fault Finding Manual No.: Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note No.: Other documentation Title and/or part no.:

FD 16 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Airbag and pretensioners ●

Page 2 / 2

Identification of the computer and parts replaced for the system

Part 1 part no. Part 2 part no. Part 3 part no. Part 4 part no. Part 5 part no. To be read with the diagnostic tool (Identification screen): Computer part no. Supplier no. Program no. Software version Calibration number VDIAG ●

Faults found with the diagnostic tool Fault no.

●

Present

Stored

Fault title

Specification

System-specific information

Total vehicle mileage (kilometrage) when the customer's problem occurred: How often does it occur? How long after the engine starts? ●

Additional information

What factors led you to replace the computer? What other parts were replaced? Other faulty functions?

CAN Wiring harness Seats

Instrument panel Battery Other

Rotary switch Fuse

Please specify:

FD 16 Fault finding log page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Summary table of faults

Tool fault

Associated DTC

DF001 DF002 DF010 DF028 DF034 DF039 DF040 DF051 DF052 DF053 DF060 DF065 DF066 DF067 DF068 DF069 DF070 DF071 DF072 DF074 DF075 DF077 DF091 DF187 DF193 DF194 DF210 DF214 DF232 DF239 DF240 DF241

9080 9042 9040 9041 907E 9035 9036 9035 9036 9031 9050 9031 900E 900D 900C 900A 9009 9008 9007 9006 9005 900B 9034 9044 907C 907F 9014 9034 9051 9017 9001 9002

88C

Diagnostic tool heading Computer Computer supply voltage Fault warning light circuit Passenger's airbag status warning light circuit Computer locked Driver's side sensor circuit Passenger's side sensor circuit Driver's side sensor configuration Passenger side sensor configuration Driver's seat position sensor Multiplex network Driver's front seat position sensor circuit Passenger's rear side air bag circuit Driver's rear chest side airbag circuit Passenger's front side airbag circuit Passenger's curtain side airbag circuit Driver's head side airbag circuit. Driver's front airbag circuit 2 Driver's front airbag circuit 1 Passenger's front airbag circuit 2 Passenger's front airbag circuit 1 Driver's front side airbag circuit airbag locking switch circuit Trigger lines configuration Change of status of passenger airbag locking Computer to be replaced following impact Front buckles pretensioner circuit Airbag lock switch configuration Driver's seat belt buckle sensor circuit Rear seat belt retractors circuit Driver's seat-cushion / seat lap belt circuit Passenger's seat-cushion / seat lap belt circuit

ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-17

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

DF001 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

88C

COMPUTER

Special notes: So that the failure of the returned computer can be analyzed, the use of command RZ001 "erase fault memory" when DF001 "Computer" is present or stored is officially prohibited.

Replace the airbag computer (see the replacing components section for this procedure).

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any faults detected by the diagnostic tool. Clear the computer memory. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-18

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

COMPUTER SUPPLY VOLTAGE DF002 PRESENT

NOTES

1.DEF: Micro-cut 2.DEF: Values beyond tolerance

Special notes: Use the 22-track Elé. 1685 adapter for working on the computer connector (cable 1).

Carry out the operations necessary to obtain the correct voltage supply to the computer: 10.5 volts ± 0.1 < correct voltage < 16 volts ± 0.1. – – – – –

Check the battery charge. Check the charging circuit. Check the tightness and the condition of the battery terminals. Check the computer earth. Check the condition of the computer + locking connections.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-19

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

FAULT WARNING LIGHT CIRCUIT DF010 PRESENT

NOTES

1.DEF: External diagnostics (instrument panel signal) 2.DEF: Consistency (dashboard indicator light state signal / airbag request)

Special notes: None.

Apply the fault finding procedure relevant to this fault in the instrument panel fault finding information section.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-20

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

PASSENGER AIRBAG CONDITION INDICATOR LIGHT CIRCUIT DF028 PRESENT

NOTES

1.DEF: External diagnostics (instrument panel signal) 2.DEF: Consistency (dashboard indicator light state signal / airbag request)

Special notes: None.

Apply the fault finding procedure relevant to this fault in the instrument panel fault finding information section.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-21

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

COMPUTER LOCKED DF034 PRESENT

NOTES

Special notes: None.

Use diagnostic tool command VP007 to unlock the airbag computer.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-22

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

DRIVER'S SIDE SENSOR CIRCUIT DF039 PRESENT

NOTES

CO - CC.0 - 1.DEF

CO : CC.0 : 1.DEF: 2.DEF: 3.DEF:

Open circuit Short circuit to earth Communication disrupted Sensor internal electrical fault External diagnostics

Special notes: Use the 64-track Elé. 1717 adapter for working on the computer connector.

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Check that the driver's side sensor is connected correctly and check its wiring. Check the condition of the connections on the computer (tracks 27 and 28). Check the condition of the 64-track connector (locking system, connections, etc.) Ensure continuity and insulation of the connections between: Terminal block (Elé. 1717) terminal 27 Track 1 sensor connector Terminal block (Elé. 1717) terminal 28 Track 2 sensor connector

2.DEF - 3.DEF

NOTES

None.

Replace the driver's side sensor.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-23

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

PASSENGER SIDE SENSOR CIRCUIT DF040 PRESENT

NOTES

CO - CC.0 - 1.DEF

CO : CC.0 : 1.DEF: 2.DEF: 3.DEF:

Open circuit Short circuit to earth Communication disrupted Sensor internal electrical fault External diagnostics

Special notes: Use the 64-track Elé. 1717 adapter for working on the computer connector.

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Check that the driver's side sensor is connected correctly and check its wiring. Check the condition of the connections on the computer (tracks 61 and 62). Check the condition of the 64-track connector (locking system, connections, etc.) Ensure continuity and insulation of the connections between: Terminal block (Elé. 1717) terminal 61 Track 1 sensor connector Terminal block (Elé. 1717) terminal 62 Track 2 sensor connector

2.DEF - 3.DEF

NOTES

None.

Replace the passenger side sensor.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-24

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

DRIVER'S SIDE SENSOR CONFIGURATION DF051 PRESENT

NOTES

Special notes: None.

This fault indicates an inconsistency between the computer configuration and the vehicle equipment detected by the computer. The computer has detected the presence of an element additional to its configuration. Read configuration LC025 under the heading "read configuration". Use command CF207 to adjust the computer configuration to the vehicle's equipment level.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-25

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

PASSENGER SIDE SENSOR CONFIGURATION DF052 PRESENT

NOTES

Special notes: None.

This fault indicates an inconsistency between the computer configuration and the vehicle equipment detected by the computer. The computer has detected the presence of an element additional to its configuration. Read configuration LC026 under the heading "read configuration". Use command CF208 to adjust the computer configuration to the vehicle's equipment level.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-26

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION SENSOR CONFIGURATION DF053 PRESENT

NOTES

Special notes: None.

This fault indicates an inconsistency between the computer configuration and the vehicle equipment detected by the computer. The computer has detected the presence of an element additional to its configuration. Read configuration LC086 under the heading "read configuration". Use command CF289 to adjust the computer configuration to the vehicle's equipment level.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-27

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

MULTIPLEX NETWORK DF060 PRESENT

NOTES

1.DEF: Carry out the multiplex network fault finding procedure

None.

Apply the fault finding procedure for the multiplex network.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Check again using the diagnostic tool. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-28

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT. DF065 PRESENT

CO : CC.0 : CC.1 : 1.DEF: 2.DEF:

Open circuit Short circuit to earth Short circuit to + 12 V Below minimum threshold Values out of range

Priorities when dealing with multiple faults: If DF065 is present with at least one of DF077, DF210, DF232, or DF240, begin the fault finding by checking the 22-track under-seat connector. NOTES Special notes: Use the 64-track Elé. 1717 adapter for working on the computer connector.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1717) test adapter and measure the resistance between track 9 and track 10 with the seat fully forward and fully back. When the seat is forward, the resistance should be: 400 Ω (275 < X < 545 Ω) When the seat is back, the resistance should be: 100 Ω (65 < X < 145 Ω ) If the resistances are correct, check the connections of the 64-track computer connector. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat and measure the resistance between tracks 3 and 4 with the seat fully forward and fully back. When the seat is forward, the resistance should be: 400 Ω (275 < X < 545) When the seat is back, the resistance should be: 100 Ω (65 < X < 145) Are the values correct?

NO

Check the connection and the condition of the sensor connections. Check and ensure the continuity and insulation of the connections between: Terminal block Track 3 Track 2 sensor connector Terminal block Track 4 Track 1 sensor connector If the checks are correct, replace the seat position sensor.

YES

Check the connections of the seat connector (tracks 3 and 4) and 64-track connector (tracks 9 and 10). If the fault is still present, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer, the seat position sensor, and the under-seat connector, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-29

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

PASSENGER CHEST REAR SIDE AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF066 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.

CO - CC

NOTES

Special notes correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with rear side airbags.

Lock the computer. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the passenger's rear side airbag is correctly connected. Disconnect the ignition module from the passenger's rear side airbag and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the passenger's rear side airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 57 and 58). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track ( Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance of cable L. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and passenger's rear chest side airbag (C0/C3) is faulty; replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger's rear side airbag module then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the passenger's rear chest side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-30

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

DF066 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 57 and 58). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track ( Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable L. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and passenger's rear chest side airbag (C0/C3) is faulty; replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger's rear side airbag module then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the passenger's rear chest side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-31

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

DRIVER'S REAR SIDE CHEST AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF067 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.

CO - CC

NOTES

Special notes correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with rear side airbags.

Lock the computer. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the driver's rear side airbag is correctly connected. Disconnect the ignition module from the driver's rear side airbag and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the driver's rear side airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 29 and 30). Repair if necessary Attach the 64-track ( Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance of cable N. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and driver's rear chest side airbag (C0/C3) is faulty; replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's rear side airbag module then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's rear chest side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-32

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

DF067 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 29 and 30). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track ( Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable N. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and driver's rear chest side airbag (C0/C3) is faulty; replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's rear side airbag module then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's rear chest side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-33

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

PASSENGER CHEST FRONT SIDE AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF068 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration.

NOTES

Priorities when dealing with multiple faults: If DF068 is present with at least one of DF210 or DF241, begin the fault finding by checking the 22-track under-seat connector. Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track (Elé. 1687) adapter for working on the seat.

CO - CC

NOTES

Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with passenger front chest side airbags.

Lock the computer, disconnect the computer connector and attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure resistance in the adapter wire marked F. If the value obtained is correct, check the connections of the 64-track (tracks 43 and 44) connector. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable A. Is the value obtained correct? NO

Check the seat connector connections (tracks 11 and 12). Strip the passenger seat and check that the airbag ignition module is connected correctly. Disconnect the side airbag ignition module, connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector and again measure the resistance in cable A. – If the value obtained is correct, replace the passenger chest front side airbag module. – If the value obtained is still not correct, replace the wiring between points C1 and C3 (seat wiring).

YES

Check the seat connector connections (tracks 11 and 12) again, as well as those of the 64-track (tracks 43 and 44) connector. If the fault persists, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger's front side airbag module then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the chest side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-34

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

DF068 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer, disconnect the computer connector and attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in the adapter cable marked F. If the value obtained is correct, check the connections of the 64-track (tracks 43 and 44) connector. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable A. Is the value obtained correct?

NO

Passenger's seat wiring fault (C1/C3). Replace the wiring if necessary.

YES

Check the seat connector connections (tracks 11 and 12) again, as well as those of the 64-track (tracks 43 and 44) connector. If the fault persists, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger's front side airbag module then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the chest side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-35

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

PASSENGER SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF069 PRESENT

CO : CC : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Open circuit Short circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.

CO - CC

NOTES

Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a passenger side curtain airbag.

Lock the computer. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the passenger side curtain airbag is properly connected. Disconnect the ignition module from the passenger side curtain airbag and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the passenger side curtain airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 45 and 46). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track ( Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable G. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and the passenger side curtain airbag (C0/C3) is faulty; replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger side curtain airbag module then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy the passenger side curtain airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-36

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

DF069 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 45 and 46). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track ( Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable G. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and the passenger side curtain airbag (C0/C3) is faulty; replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger side curtain airbag module then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy the passenger side curtain airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-37

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

DRIVER SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF070 PRESENT

CO : CC : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Open circuit Short circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.

CO - CC

NOTES

Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a driver side curtain airbag.

Lock the computer. Switch off the ignition and make sure the ignition module of the driver side curtain airbag is properly connected. Disconnect the ignition module from the driver side curtain airbag and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the driver side curtain airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 17 and 18). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track ( Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance of cable I. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and driver side curtain airbag connector (C0/C3) is faulty; replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's side curtain airbag module then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy the driver's side curtain airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-38

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

DF070 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 17 and 18). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track ( Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable I. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and driver side curtain airbag connector (C0/C1) is faulty; replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's side curtain airbag module then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy the driver's side curtain airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-39

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

DRIVER'S FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT 2 DF071 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 22-track (Elé. 1685) adapter for working on the computer connector.

CO - CC

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Turn off the ignition and remove the driver's front airbag. Check that it is correctly connected. Disconnect the driver's front airbag and attach 2 dummy ignition modules to the ignition module connectors. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the driver's front airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). With the ignition switched off, disconnect and reconnect the connector of the rotary switch at the steering wheel. Check the connections if the fault has become stored (fault no longer declared present). Attach the 10-track (Elé. 1617) test adapter to the rotary switch at point C2 (tracks 9 and 10). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable A. If the value obtained is incorrect, replace the rotary switch under the steering wheel. Reconnect the rotary switch under the steering wheel, disconnect the computer and check the connections of the 22-track (tracks 4 and 15) connector Fit the 22-track (Elé. 1685) test adapter. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable D. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the rotary switch connector (C0/C2). Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and driver's front airbag ignition modules, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's front airbag if it has been replaced (tool airbag Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-40

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

DF071 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Turn off the ignition and unclip the driver's front airbag. Check the condition and correct connection of the trigger lines. Attach the 10-track test adapter to the rotary switch at point C2 (tracks 9 and 10). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable A (driver's front airbag connected). If the value obtained is incorrect, replace the rotary switch under the steering wheel. Reconnect the rotary switch under the steering wheel, disconnect the computer and check the connector's connections (tracks 4 and 15). Fit the 22-track (Elé. 1685) test adapter. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable D. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the rotary switch connector (C0/C2). Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and driver's front airbag ignition modules, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's front airbag if it has been replaced (tool airbag Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-41

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

DRIVER'S FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT 1 DF072 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 22-track (Elé. 1685) adapter for working on the computer connector.

CO - CC

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Turn off the ignition and remove the driver's front airbag. Check that it is correctly connected. Disconnect the driver's front airbag and attach 2 dummy ignition modules to the ignition module connectors. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the driver's front airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). With the ignition switched off, disconnect and reconnect the connector of the rotary switch at the steering wheel. Check the connections if the fault has become stored (fault no longer declared present). Attach the 10-track (Elé. 1617) test adapter to the rotary switch at point C2 (tracks 6 and 7). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable B. If the value obtained is incorrect, replace the rotary switch under the steering wheel. Reconnect the rotary switch under the steering wheel, disconnect the computer and check the connector's connections (tracks 3 and 14). Fit the 22-track (Elé. 1685) test adapter. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable C. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the rotary switch connector (C0/C2). Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and driver's front airbag ignition modules, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's front airbag if it has been replaced (tool airbag Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-42

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

DF072 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Turn off the ignition and unclip the driver's front airbag. Check the condition and correct connection of the trigger lines. Attach the 10-track (Elé. 1617) test adapter to the rotary switch at point C2 (tracks 6 and 7). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable B (driver's front airbag connected). If the value obtained is incorrect, replace the rotary switch under the steering wheel. Reconnect the rotary switch under the steering wheel, disconnect the computer and check the connector's connections (tracks 3 and 14). Fit the 22-track (Elé. 1685) test adapter. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable C. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the rotary switch connector (C0/C2). Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and driver's front airbag ignition modules, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's front airbag if it has been replaced (tool airbag Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-43

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

PASSENGER FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT 2 DF074 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 22-track (Elé. 1685) adapter for working on the computer connector.

CO - CC

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Turn off the ignition and make sure the passenger's front airbag is properly connected (access the connectors through the glovebox). Disconnect the passenger’s front airbag ORANGE connector and attach a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). If the value is incorrect: Disconnect the computer and check the connector connections (tracks 1 and 12). Fit the 22-track (Elé. 1685) test adapter. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable A. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger airbag connectors (C0/C4). Replace the wiring if necessary. If the value obtained is correct, check the computer wiring again.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer, then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's front airbag if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-44

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

DF074 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the computer and check the connector connections (tracks 1 and 12). Attach 22-track adapter (Elé. 1685). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable A. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger airbag connectors (C0/C4). Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer, then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's front airbag if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-45

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

PASSENGER FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT 1 DF075 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 22-track (Elé. 1685) adapter for working on the computer connector.

CO - CC

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Turn off the ignition and make sure the passenger's front airbag is properly connected (access the connectors through the glovebox). Disconnect the passenger's front airbag BLUE connector and attach a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). If the value is incorrect: Disconnect the computer and check the connector wiring (tracks 2 and 13). Attach 22-track adapter (Elé. 1685). The CLIP or XRBAG absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable B. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger airbag connectors (C0/C4). Replace the wiring if necessary. If the value obtained is correct, check the computer wiring again.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer, then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's front airbag if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-46

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

DF075 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the computer and check the connector wiring (tracks 2 and 13). Attach 22-track adapter (Elé. 1685). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be use to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable B. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger airbag connectors (C0/C4). Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer, then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's front airbag if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-47

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

DRIVER'S CHEST FRONT SIDE AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF077 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration.

NOTES

Priorities when dealing with multiple faults: If DF077 is present with at least one of DF065, DF210, DF232, or DF240, begin the fault finding by checking the 22-track under-seat connector. Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track (Elé. 1687) adapter for working on the seat.

CO - CC

NOTES

Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a driver's front chest side airbag.

Lock the computer, disconnect the computer connector and attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in the adapter cable marked H. If the value indicated is correct, check the connections of the 64-track (tracks 15 and 16) connector. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable A. Is the value obtained correct?

NO

Check the seat connector connections (tracks 11 and 12). Remove the trim from the driver's seat and check that the chest side airbag ignition module is properly connected. Disconnect the chest side airbag ignition module, connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector and again measure the resistance in cable A. – If the value obtained is correct, replace the driver's chest front side airbag module. – If the value obtained is still not correct, replace the wiring between points C1 and C3 (seat wiring).

YES

Check the seat connector connections (tracks 11 and 12) again, as well as those of the 64-track (tracks 15 and 16) connector. If the fault is still present, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's front side airbag module then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the chest side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-48

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

DF077 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer, disconnect the computer connector and attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in the adapter cable marked H. If the value indicated is correct, check the connections of the 64-track (tracks 15 and 16) connector. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable A. Is the value obtained correct?

NO

– Driver's seat wiring fault (C1/C3). – Replace the wiring between points C1 and C3 (seat wiring) if necessary.

YES

Check the seat connector connections (tracks 11 and 12) again, as well as those of the 64-track (tracks 15 and 16) connector. If the fault is still present, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's front side airbag module then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the chest side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-49

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

AIRBAG LOCKING SWITCH CIRCUIT DF091 PRESENT

NOTES

CO : CC.0 : CC.1 : 1.DEF: 2.DEF:

Open circuit Short circuit to earth Short circuit to + 12 V Below minimum threshold Values out of range

Special notes: Use the 22-track (Elé. 1685) adapter for working on the computer connector. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool.

Check that the lock switch is properly connected and check its connections. Check the condition and connections of the 22-track computer connector (lock system, wiring etc.). Ensure continuity and insulation of the connections between: Terminal block Elé. 1685 terminal 21 Terminal block Elé. 1685 terminal 22

Track 6 lock switch connector Track 3 lock switch connector

Replace the locking switch if the fault persists.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the locking switch, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-50

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

TRIGGER LINES CONFIGURATION DF187 PRESENT

NOTES

None.

This fault indicates an inconsistency between the computer configuration and the vehicle equipment detected by the computer. The computer has detected the presence of an element additional to its configuration. Carry out a reading of the configuration under the heading "READING THE CONFIGURATION". Modify the computer configuration, adapting it to the equipment level of the vehicle.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Check again using the diagnostic tool.

ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-51

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

PASSENGER AIRBAG LOCKING CHANGE OF STATE DF193 PRESENT

NOTES

Special features: the vehicle user has 10 seconds after switching on + after ignition feed to inhibit the passenger airbag with the switch. After this time, the computer will store this fault and light up the warning light on the instrument panel. Switching the ignition off and on erases this fault from the computer memory.

Set the locking switch to the desired position, switch the ignition off and wait for a few seconds. Switch the ignition back on and check that the fault is gone.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-52

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

COMPUTER TO BE REPLACED FOLLOWING IMPACT DF194 PRESENT

NOTES

None.

Contact your Techline (see the "Replacing components" section for this procedure).

AFTER REPAIR

None

ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-53

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

FRONT BUCKLE PRETENSIONNERS CIRCUIT DF210 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF Check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES Special notes: the front buckle pretensioners are serially wired. Never do measuring on the trigger lines with any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.

CO - CC

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the driver's seat buckle pretensioner is properly connected. Disconnect the ignition module of the pretensioner and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the driver's seat buckle pretensioner if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the passenger's seat buckle pretensioner is properly connected. Disconnect the ignition module of the pretensioner and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the passenger seat buckle pretensioner ignition module if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present).' Disconnect the computer and check the connector connections (tracks 1, 2, 37 and 38). Attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable A. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat buckle pretensioner ignition module (C0/C3). See next page. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable C. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger seat buckle pretensioner (C0/C3). See next page.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the buckle pretensioners then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy any pretensioners that have been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-54

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

DF210 CONTINUED 1

Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat (tracks 7 and 8). Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable C. Is the value obtained correct?

NO

Check seat side seat connector connections again (tracks 8 and 7). If the fault persists, the wiring is faulty between the 22-track seat connector and the buckle pretensioner of the faulty seat (C1/C3).

YES

Again check the connections of the seat connector (tracks 7 and 8) on the passenger compartment wiring side and of the 64-track (driver seat tracks 1 and 2 or passenger seat tracks 37 and 38) connector. If the fault persists, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the seat displaying the fault (C0/C1). Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the buckle pretensioners then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy any pretensioners that have been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-55

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

DF210 CONTINUED 2

CC.0 - CC.1

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer. Disconnect the computer and check the connector connections (tracks 1, 2, 37 and 38). Attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable A. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat buckle pretensioner ignition module (C0/C3). See interpretation A. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable C. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger seat buckle pretensioner (C0/C3). See interpretation A.

Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat (tracks 7 and 8). Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable C. Is the value obtained correct?

NO

YES

AFTER REPAIR

If the fault persists, the wiring is faulty between the 22-track seat connector and the buckle pretensioner of the faulty seat (C1/C3). Replace the wiring if necessary.

Faulty wiring between the computer and the seat displaying the fault (C0/C1). Replace the wiring if necessary.

Reconnect the computer and the buckle pretensioners then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy any pretensioners that have been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-56

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

AIRBAG LOCK SWITCH CONFIGURATION DF214 PRESENT

NOTES

Special notes: None.

This fault indicates an inconsistency between the computer configuration and the vehicle equipment detected by the computer. The computer has detected the presence of an element additional to its configuration. Read configuration LC060 under the heading "read configuration". Use command CF248 to adjust the computer configuration to the vehicle's equipment level.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Check again using the diagnostic tool. ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-57

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

DRIVER'S SEAT BELT BUCKLE SENSOR CIRCUIT CO : CC.0 : CC.1 : 1.DEF: 2.DEF: 3.DEF:

DF232 PRESENT

Open circuit Short circuit to earth Short circuit to + 12 V Configuration Below minimum threshold Values out of range

If 1.DEF Check and adjust the computer configuration.

NOTES

Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track (Elé. 1687) adapter for working on the seat.

CO - CC.0 - CC.1 2.DEF - 3.DEF

NOTES

Special notes: None.

Check the condition and connections of the 64-track computer connector (lock system, wiring etc.). Make sure the driver's seat belt buckle sensor is properly connected and test its connections. Ensure continuity and insulation of the connections between: Terminal block Elé. 1717 terminal 11 Track 2 buckle sensor connector. Terminal block Elé. 1717 terminal 12 Track 1 buckle sensor connector If the connection is OK, replace the driver's seat belt buckle sensor. If the connection is faulty: Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat, seat side (tracks 5 and 6). Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). Ensure continuity and insulation of the connections between: Terminal block Elé. 1687 terminal 5 Track 2 buckle sensor connector. Terminal block Elé. 1687 terminal 6 Track 1 buckle sensor connector Repair if necessary. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat, computer side (tracks 5 and 6). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1717) test adapter to the computer (point C0). Ensure continuity and insulation of the connections between: Terminal block Elé. 1717 terminal 11 Track 5 22-track connector Terminal block Elé. 1717 terminal 12 Track 6 22-track connector If the connection is faulty, repair or replace the harness.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Check again using the diagnostic tool.

ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-58

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

REAR SEAT BELT RETRACTORS CIRCUIT DF239 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES Special notes: the rear seat belt retractors are serially wired. Never do measuring on the trigger lines with any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.

CO - CC

NOTES

Special notes: Correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with rear seat-belt retractors.

Lock the computer. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the rear seat belt retractor, driver's side is correctly connected. Disconnect the ignition module of the retractor and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the rear seat belt retractor, driver's side, if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the rear seat belt retractor, passenger's side is correctly connected. Disconnect the ignition module of the retractor and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the passenger's side rear seat belt retractor if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Disconnect the computer and check the connections of the connector (tracks 19, 20, 41 and 42). Attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable J. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer and the driver's side rear seat belt retractor ignition module (C0/C3) is faulty. Repair or replace the wiring if necessary. The CLIP or XRBAG absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable E. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the passenger's side rear seat belt retractor ignition module (C0/C3) is faulty. Repair or replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and seat belt retractor, then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy any retractors that have been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-59

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

DF239 CONTINUED

CC.0 - CC.1

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer. Disconnect the computer and check the connections of the connector (tracks 19, 20, 41 and 42). Attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable J. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer and the driver's side rear seat belt retractor ignition module (C0/C3) is faulty. Repair or replace the wiring if necessary. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable E. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer and the passenger's side rear seat belt retractor ignition module (C0/C3) is faulty. Repair or replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and seat belt retractor, then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy any retractors that have been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-60

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

DRIVER'S SEAT-CUSHION AIRBAG / LAP BELT CIRCUIT CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

DF240 PRESENT

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. Priorities when dealing with multiple faults: If DF240 is present with at least one of DF077, DF065, DF210 or DF232, begin the fault finding by checking the 22-track under-seat connector. NOTES Special notes: depending on the type of vehicle body, this is either a lap belt pretensioner circuit fault or seat-cushion air bag (anti-skid airbag) fault. Never do measuring on the trigger lines with any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track (Elé. 1687) adapter for working on the seat.

CO - CC

NOTES

Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a driver's seat-cushion airbag / lap belt.

Lock the computer, disconnect the computer connector and attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in the adapter cable marked B. If the value indicated is correct, check the connections of the 64-track connector (tracks 3 and 4). Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable B. Is the value obtained correct?

NO

Check the seat connector connections (tracks 9 and 10). Make sure the driver's seat-cushion airbag/lap belt ignition module is properly connected. Disconnect the driver's seat-cushion airbag/lap belt ignition module, connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector, then again measure the resistance in cable B. – If the value indicated is correct, replace the driver's seat-cushion airbag/lap belt module. – If the value obtained is still not correct, replace the wiring between points C1 and C3 (seat wiring).

YES

Again check the connections of the seat connector (tracks 9 and 10) and of the 64-track (tracks 3 and 4) connector. If the fault is still present, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the driver's seat-cushion airbag/lap belt ignition module, then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the seat airbag module or driver's seat lap belt pretensioner if it has been replaced(tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-61

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

DF240 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable B. Is the value obtained correct?

NO

Seat wiring fault. Replace the wiring between points C1 and C3.

YES

AFTER REPAIR

Wiring fault between the computer and driver's seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring if necessary.

Reconnect the computer and the driver's seat-cushion airbag/lap belt ignition module, then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the seat airbag module or driver's seat lap belt pretensioner if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-62

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

PASSENGER'S SEAT-CUSHION AIRBAG / LAP BELT CIRCUIT DF241 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. Priorities when dealing with multiple faults: If DF241 is present with at least one of DF068, DF210 or DF232, begin the fault finding by checking the 22-track under-seat connector. NOTES Special notes: depending on the type of vehicle body, this is either a lap belt pretensioner circuit fault or seat-cushion airbag (anti-skid airbag) fault. Never do measuring on the trigger lines with any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track (Elé. 1687) adapter for working on the seat.

CO - CC

NOTES

Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a passenger seat-cushion airbag / lap belt.

Lock the computer, disconnect the computer connector and attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in the adapter cable marked D. If the value obtained is correct, check the connections of the 64-track (tracks 39 and 40) connector. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable B. Is the value obtained correct? NO

Check the seat connector connections (tracks 9 and 10). Make sure the passenger seat-cushion airbag/lap belt ignition module is properly connected. Disconnect the passenger seat-cushion airbag/lap belt ignition module, connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector, then again measure the resistance in cable B. – If the value indicated is correct, replace the passenger seat-cushion airbag/lap belt module. – If the value obtained is still not correct, replace the wiring between points C1 and C3 (seat wiring).

YES

Again check the connections of the seat connector (tracks 9 and 10) and of the 64-track (tracks 39 and 40) connector. If the fault persists, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the passenger seat-cushion airbag/lap belt ignition module, then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the seat airbag module or driver's seat lap belt pretensioner if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-63

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault Interpretation

88C

DF241 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable B. Is the value obtained correct?

NO

Seat wiring fault. Replace the wiring between points C1 and C3.

YES

AFTER REPAIR

Wiring fault between the computer and passenger's seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring if necessary.

Reconnect the computer and the passenger seat-cushion airbag/lap belt ignition module, then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the seat airbag module or driver's seat lap belt pretensioner if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-64

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

88C

Fault finding - States and parameter summary table

ACU4 AIRBAG STATES SUMMARY TABLE:

STATES TOOL ET010 ET072 ET073 ET074 ET076 ET103 ET105 ET108 ET143 ET144

DIAGNOSTIC TOOL HEADINGS Impact detected Passenger airbag status indicator light commanded Computer locked by tool Fault warning light commanded Computer to replace Type of passenger airbag lock Locked diagnostics power supply out of limits Passenger airbag lock mode Passenger airbag(s) locked Fault present or in memory

ACU4 AIRBAG PARAMETERS SUMMARY TABLE: PARAMETERS TOOL PR001 PR002 PR104 PR105 PR106 PR107 PR108 PR109 PR110 PR111 PR112 PR113 PR114 PR115 PR116 PR117 PR118 PR140 PR147

DIAGNOSTIC TOOL HEADINGS Computer supply voltage Vehicle type Driver's seat sensor impedance Line 1 impedance (Driver's seat / lap airbag circuit). Line 2 impedance (Passenger's seat / lap airbag circuit). Line 3 impedance (Passenger's front airbag circuit 1). Line 4 impedance (Passenger's front airbag circuit 2). Line 5 impedance (Driver's front airbag circuit 1). Line 6 impedance (Driver's front airbag circuit 2). Line 7 impedance (Driver's side curtain side airbag circuit). Line 8 impedance (Passenger's side curtain side airbag circuit). Line 9 impedance (Driver's front frontal side airbag circuit). Line 10 impedance (Passenger's front frontal side airbag circuit). Line 11 impedance (Driver's rear frontal side airbag circuit). Line 12 impedance (Passenger's rear frontal side airbag circuit). Line 13 impedance (Front belt pretensioners circuit). Line 14 impedance (Rear retractors). Number of memory zone deletions Airbag lock circuit impedance

The trigger line or sensor impedance is 99.9 Ω when the component is disconnected or not controlled by the computer.

ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-65

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Diagnostics - Conformity check

NOTES

88C

Only carry out conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool.

Order

Function

Parameter or State Check or Action

1

Diagnostic tool dialogue

-

Airbag

ACU 4

CHART 1

2

Computer conformity

Parameter PR002 "Vehicle type"

MEGANE II:

48

DF001

3

Computer configuration

Computer initialisation check.

Fault finding

Using "READ CONFIGURATION" commands

Ensure that the computer configuration defined in the "Current" column corresponds to the vehicle equipment.

None

Ignition switched on

Warning light comes on for 3 seconds when the ignition is switched on

None

Warning light operation 4

Display and notes

ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-66

AIRBAG ACU4 Vdiag: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault finding chart

88C

CHART 1

No communication with the airbag computer

NOTES

Special note: To perform fault finding on the vehicle computers, switch on the ignition in fault finding mode (+ after ignition imposed), i.e. proceed as follows: – Vehicle card in card reader, press on the Start button for more than five seconds outside of starting conditions.

Ensure that the diagnostic tool is not causing the fault by trying to establish dialogue with a computer on another vehicle. If the tool is not the problem and communication cannot be established with any other computer in the same vehicle, check the battery voltage and do the work required to obtain the proper reading (10.5 V < battery voltage < 16 V).

Check the presence and condition of the airbag computer supply voltage fuse. Check that the computer connector is properly connected and check the condition of its wiring. Check that the computer is correctly supplied: – Disconnect the airbag computer and attach 22-track adapter (Elé. 1685). – Check and ensure the presence of + after ignition feed between the terminals marked earth and + after ignition feed.

Ensure that the diagnostic socket is correctly supplied: – + Before ignition on track 16. – + after ignition feed on track 1 – Earth on tracks 4 and 5. With 22-track adapter (Elé. 1685), check the continuity and insulation of the airbag computer / diagnostic socket connection between: Terminal block track CAN H Track 6 of the diagnostic socket Terminal block track CAN L Track 14 of the diagnostic socket

If communication is still not established after these various tests, contact your Techline (see the "Help" section for details).

AFTER REPAIR

When communication is established, deal with any faults indicated.

ACU4 Vdiag04 J84 1.0

88C-67

188C AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS ACU4 AIRBAG VDIAG No.: 08

88C

Fault finding - Introduction

1. SCOPE OF THIS DOCUMENT This document presents the fault finding method applicable to all computers with the following specifications: Vehicle: SCENIC II

Name of computer: AUTOLIV - ACU 4

Function concerned: AIRBAG

Program no.: Vdiag No.: 08

2. PREREQUISITES FOR FAULT FINDING Documentation type Fault finding procedures (this manual): – Assisted fault finding (incorporated into the diagnostic tool), paper version (Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note) and Dialogys. Wiring Diagrams: – Visu-Diagram (CD-ROM), paper. Type of diagnostic tools – CLIP Special tooling required

SPECIAL TOOLING REQUIRED – Multimeter – Set of adapters and terminal blocks for using the airbag and pretensioner wiring harness check function of CLIP and XRBAG tools for updates including the terminal blocks listed below. – Modifying the series of new airbag ignition module connectors entails modifying the dummy ignition module. LOCAL MODIFICATION OF THE DUMMY IGNITION MODULE: – Remove the ignition module from its red mounting and remove one of the brown locking notches. – – – –

22-track computer terminal block: Elé. 1685 64-track computer terminal block: Elé. 1717 22-track seat terminal block: Elé. 1687 10-track rotary switch terminal block: Elé. 1617

ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-69

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 Fault finding - Introduction VDIAG No.: 08

88C

3. REMINDERS Procedure To run diagnostics on the vehicle's computers, switch on the ignition in fault finding mode (+ after ignition forced setting): – vehicle card in card reader. – Press and hold start button (longer than 5 seconds) with start-up conditions not fulfilled, – Then connect the diagnostic tool and perform the required operations. IMPORTANT The left-hand and right-hand Xenon bulb computers are powered when the dipped headlights are lit. Fault finding procedures can only be carried out on them after the ignition has been switched on in fault finding mode (+ after ignition imposed) and the dipped headlights are on. + After ignition feed cut-out is performed as follows: – Disconnect the diagnostic tool, – Press the start button twice briefly (less then 3 seconds), – See that the + after ignition feed has been cut off by checking that the computer warning lights on the instrument panel have gone out. Faults Faults are declared to be either present or stored (depending on whether they appeared in a certain situation and have disappeared since, or whether they remain but are not diagnosed within the current context). The present or stored state of faults should be taken into consideration when the diagnostic tool is used after the + after ignition feed (without acting on the system components). Deal with present faults according to the procedure specified in the Interpretation of faults section. For stored faults, note the faults displayed and follow the instructions in the "Notes" section. If the fault is confirmed when the instructions in the Notes section are applied, the fault is present. In this case, deal with the fault If the fault is not confirmed, carry out basic checks. Check: – the electrical lines which correspond to the fault, – the connectors for these lines (for oxidation, bent pins, etc.), – the resistance of the faulty component, – the condition of the wires (melted or cut insulation, wear), or use the fault finding procedure to check the circuit of the faulty component. Conformity check The conformity check is designed to check the states and parameters which do not display any faults on the diagnostic tool when inconsistent. This phase therefore: – diagnosis of faults that do not have a fault display, and which may correspond to a customer complaint. – checks that the system is operating correctly and that there is no risk of a fault reappearing after repairs. This section gives the fault finding procedures for states and parameters and the conditions for checking them. If a state is not behaving normally or a parameter is outside permitted tolerance values, you should consult the corresponding fault finding page. Customer complaints - Fault finding chart If the diagnostic tool check is correct, but the customer complaint persists, it should be dealt with according to the customer complaint.

A synopsis of the general procedure to follow is provided on the following page in the form of a logic flow chart. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-70

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 Fault finding - Introduction VDIAG No.: 08

88C

4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Check the battery charge and condition of the fuses

Print the system diagnostic sheet (available in CLIP and in the Workshop Repair Manual or Technical Note)

Connect CLIP

no Dialogue with computer?

See CHART 1

yes Read faults

no Faults present

Conformity check

yes

no

Deal with faults found

The symptom persists

Fault solved

Deal with stored faults Use ALP charts (fault finding charts)

no The symptom persists

Fault solved no The symptom persists

yes

Fault solved

Contact Techline with the completed fault finding log

ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-71

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 Fault finding - Introduction VDIAG No.: 08

88C

4. FAULT FINDING PROCEDURE Wiring test: Diagnostic problems: Disconnecting connectors and/or handling the wiring can briefly conceal the cause of a problem. Electrical measurements of the voltage, resistance and insulation are generally correct, especially if the fault is not present (stored) when doing the testing. Visual inspection: Look for damage under the bonnet and in the passenger compartment. Meticulously inspect the protective devices, insulation and path of the wiring. Look for signs of rust. Tactile inspection: While handling the wiring, use the fault-finding tool to detect any change in the status of faults from stored to present during the inspection. Make sure the connectors are firmly locked; Apply light pressure to the connectors; Twist the harness; If the status changes, try to locate the origin of the problem. Inspection of each component: Disconnect the connectors and check the appearance of the clips and blades, as well as their crimping (no crimping on insulation part). Make sure the clips and tabs are properly locked in place. Make sure the clips and tabs do not get bent back when connecting them. Check the contact pressure of the clips with the proper type of blade.

Checking the resistance: Check the continuity of the entire line, then each section. Look for a short circuit to earth at + 12 V or with another wire. If a fault is detected, proceed with the repairs or replacement.

ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-72

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 Fault finding - Introduction VDIAG No.: 08

88C

5. FAULT FINDING LOG

WARNING!

WARNING: All problems involving a complex system call for thorough diagnostics with the appropriate tools. The FAULT FINDING LOG, which should be completed during the fault finding procedure, ensures a record is kept of the procedure carried out. It is an essential item when discussing the fault with the constructor.

IT IS THEREFORE COMPULSORY TO FILL OUT A FAULT FINDING SHEET EVERY TIME A FAULT FINDING OPERATION IS PERFORMED. You will always be asked for this report: – When requesting technical assistance from the Techline. – For certification requests when replacing parts that must be certified. – Which must be attached to monitored parts for which reimbursement is requested. It is therefore used to decide whether a reimbursement will be made under warranty and leads to improved analysis of the removed parts.

6. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS All work on components requires obeying safety rules to prevent physical damage or human injury: – Make sure the battery is properly charged to avoid damaging the computers with a low charge. During operations on the airbag/seat belt pretensioner systems it is vital that you lock the computer using the diagnostic tool to prevent any risk of accidental triggering (all the ignition lines will be inhibited). The locked mode is signalled when the Instrument panel warning light comes on. If it is impossible to connect the fault-finding tool, switch off the ignition, remove the system power fuse, and wait at least 2 seconds for the reserve power capacity to discharge. Never measure the airbag or pretensioner trigger lines with any device other than XRBAG or CLIP's "Airbag and pretensioner wiring harness check". Before using a dummy ignition module, ensure that its resistance is between 1.8 and 2.5 ohms. While working, make sure the computer power supply does not drop below 10 V. WARNING Airbag and pretensioner destruction and disposal is subject to national legislation.

ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-73

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Introduction

88C

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM (FRONT section)

AR To rear wiring

ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-74

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Introduction

88C

SYSTEM CONFIGURATION DIAGRAM (REAR section)

Rear A B C D E G

H I

J/K L/M N/O

To rear wiring R/S Central unit Driver’s seat CT Front passenger seat Buckle P pretensioner Driver's front airbag ignition module Passenger's front airbag ignition module Front side airbag ignition module Lap belt pretensioner or seat cushion airbag Curtain airbag ignition modules Rear side airbag ignition modules Rear seat belt retractors

Rear frontal airbag triggers Rotary switch

FRONT AIRBAGS

+ 12 V / earth Warning light / Fault finding lines Impact sensors, seat position, seat belt buckles, rear retractor straps / Passenger airbag lock switch

Measuring point

Correct value

Driver

C0, C2 and C4

1.8 to 6.2 Ω

Passenger

C0 and C4

1.8 to 4 Ω

SIDE AIRBAGS AND PRETENSIONERS Measuring point

Correct value

C0, C1 and C3

1.8 to 4 Ω

Correct insulation value: display ≥ 100.h or 9999 flashing.

ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-75

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Introduction

88C

DEFINITION OF THE TRIGGER LINES

L1:

Driver's seat cushion / frontal airbag circuit (cable B of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717)

L2:

Passenger's seat cushion / frontal airbag circuit (cable D of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717)

L3:

Passenger's frontal airbag circuit 1 (cable B of 22-track terminal block Elé. 1685)

L4:

Passenger's frontal airbag circuit 2 (cable A of 22-track terminal block Elé. 1685)

L5:

Driver's frontal airbag circuit 1 (cable C of 22-track terminal block Elé. 1685)

L6:

Driver's frontal airbag circuit 2 (cable D of 22-track terminal block Elé. 1685)

L7:

Driver's side curtain airbag circuit (cable I of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717)

L8:

Passenger's side curtain airbag circuit (cable G of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717)

L9:

Driver's front chest side airbag circuit (cable H of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717)

L10: Passenger's front chest side airbag circuit (cable F of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717) L11: Driver's rear chest side airbag circuit (cable N of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717) L12: Passenger's rear chest side airbag circuit (cable L of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717) L13: Front buckles pretensioner circuit (cables A and C of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717) L14: Rear seat belt retractors (cables E and J of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717) L15: Driver's side rear chest frontal airbag circuit (cable O of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717) L16: Passenger's side rear chest frontal airbag circuit (cable M of 64-track terminal block Elé. 1717)

ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-76

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - System operation

88C

PASSIVE SAFETY EQUIPMENT The MEGANE II has equipment also found on the LAGUNA II and VEL SATIS, namely: – Front seat chest side airbag. – Double pretensioner on front seat in type B, J, G, R, L, K, S. – Driver's seat position sensor for adaptive airbag. – Three-point rear centre seat belt. – Front and rear Isofix mountings. INNOVATIONS: – The ACU4 computers identified by Vdiag 08 use the signals from the side impact sensors to confirm detection of a frontal collision as well. This is why even vehicles without side airbags have side impact sensors. ACU4 Vdiag 08 computers are always configured "With side sensors". There is no fault-finding tool command to change that configuration. – LEFT-HAND and RIGHT-HAND steering configuration so that the system matches the vehicle. – Passenger airbag inhibition switch. – Driver's and passenger's side rear frontal airbags. These airbags are built into the seat belts only in the SCENIC II. – The absence of rear chest airbags is the SCENIC II is compensated by reinforced doors. – Anti-skid airbag in the seat along with a buckle pretensioner on the front seats in type C, E and G MEGANE II. In the text, this airbag is referred to as the: DRIVER'S SEAT-CUSHION/LAP AIRBAG and PASSENGER'S SEAT-CUSHION/LAP AIRBAG. Via the same trigger line, the ACU 4 Vdiag 08 computer controls either the seat-cushion (anti-skid) airbag or the driver's seat lap belt pretensioner: In types B, J, R, L, K and S the configuration is: driver's seat lap belt pretensioner and passenger's seat lap belt pretensioner. In types C, E and G the configuration is: driver's seat-cushion airbag and passenger's seat-cushion airbag. Both features are never found on the same vehicle because they use the same ignition line.

ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-77

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

88C

Fault finding - Computer track allocation

AIRBAG COMPUTER 22-track connector: Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Description

Track

+ Passenger front airbag volume 2 + Passenger front airbag volume 1 + Driver's front airbag volume 1 + Driver's front airbag volume 2 Not used Not used + After ignition Not used Not used CAN L CAN H

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

Description - Passenger front airbag volume 2 - Passenger front airbag volume 1 - Driver's front airbag volume 1 - Driver's front airbag volume 2 Not used Not used Electrical earth Not used Not used - Passenger airbag inhibition switch + Passenger airbag inhibition switch

64-track connector: Track 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32

Description + Buckle pretensioner: driver - Buckle pretensioner: driver + Lap belt pretensioner: driver + Lap belt pretensioner: driver Not used Not used Not used Not used - Driver's seat position sensor + Driver's seat position sensor + Driver's seat belt buckle contact - Driver's seat belt buckle contact Not used Not used + Driver's front chest side airbag - Driver's front chest side airbag + Driver's side curtain airbag + Driver's side curtain airbag + Driver's rear seat belt retractor - Driver's rear seat belt retractor Not used Not used + Driver's side rear strap sensor - Passenger's side rear strap sensor Not used Not used + Driver's side lateral impact sensor - Driver's side lateral impact sensor + Rear chest side airbag driver's side - Rear chest side airbag driver's side + Rear frontal airbag. driver's side + Rear frontal airbag. driver's side

Track

Description

33

Reserved (+ passenger's seat belt buckle contact) Reserved (- passenger's seat belt buckle contact) Reserved (+ passenger's seat-cushion sensor) Reserved (- passenger's seat-cushion sensor) + Buckle pretensioner: passenger - Buckle pretensioner: passenger + Lap belt pretensioner: passenger - Lap belt pretensioner: passenger + Rear passenger seat belt retractor + Rear passenger seat belt retractor + Passenger's front chest side airbag - Passenger's front chest side airbag + Passenger side curtain airbag - Passenger side curtain airbag Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used + Passenger's rear chest side airbag - Passenger's rear chest side airbag + Rear frontal airbag. passenger's side - Rear frontal airbag. passenger's side + Passenger side lateral impact sensor - Passenger side lateral impact sensor + Passenger side rear strap sensor - Passenger side rear strap sensor

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64

ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-78

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

88C

Fault finding - Computer track allocation

SIDE IMPACT SENSORS CONNECTIONS

2-track connector Track 1

Description

Track

Signal +

2

Description Signal -

Note: The front belt pretensioners, front chest side airbags, lap pretensioners or seat airbags and seat position sensor functions run through a black 22-track R341 or R342 intermediate connector located under each seat and attached to the vehicle floor.

ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-79

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Parts replacement

88C

REPLACING THE AIRBAG COMPUTER BEFORE REPLACING ANY COMPUTER, YOU ARE REQUIRED TO CONTACT YOUR TECHLINE. So that the failure of the returned computer can be analyzed, the use of command RZ001 "erase fault memory" when DF001 "Computer" is present or stored is officially prohibited. The airbag computers are sold in locked mode to avoid all risk of accidental triggering (all ignition lines are inhibited). The locked mode is signalled when the airbag fault warning indicator lights up on the instrument panel. Follow this procedure to replace an airbag computer: – – – – – – – –

Ensure that the ignition is switched off. Replace the computer. Modify the computer configuration if necessary. Enter the VIN into the computer with diagnostic tool command VP010 "Write VIN". Switch off the ignition. Carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Enter the After Sales service date with diagnostic tool command VP008 "Write last After Sales service date". Unlock the computer only if no fault is reported by the fault-finding tool and see if the indicator light is out.

ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-80

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

Fault finding - Configuration and programming

88C

CLEARING RZ001: Fault memory. This command is used to clear faults from the computer's memory. CONFIGURATION / READ CONFIGURATION: – To make it easier to configure the ACU4 AIRBAG computer, the fault-finding tool has automatic configuration commands for the trigger lines and sensors based on the equipment installed in the various models. The commands in the table on the next page, however, are used to configure each system component individually to adapt the computer configuration to the actual equipment in the vehicle. – The read-configuration commands (LCXXX) are used to display the current computer configuration in relation to the trigger lines and sensors installed in the vehicle. – The configuration commands (CFXXX) are used to adjust computer configuration to the equipment actually installed in the vehicle. – STANDARD CONFIGURATION COMMANDS: – CF297: B/C NO SIDE AIRBAGS. Vehicle types B, C WITH NO FRONT AND REAR FRONTAL SIDE AIRBAGS AND NO SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS (SABLAT / SSABCS). – CF298: B/C WITH FRONT FRONTAL + CURTAIN AIRBAGS. Vehicle types B, C with FRONT FRONTAL SIDE AIRBAGS + SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS (ABLAVI / SSABCS). – CF299: B/C WITH FRONT/REAR FRONTAL + CURTAIN AIRBAGS. Vehicle types B, C with FRONT AND REAR FRONTAL SIDE AIRBAGS + SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS (ABLAT / SSABCS). – CF300: G/S WITH CURTAIN AIRBAGS. Type S vehicles (vans) equipped with CURTAIN SIDE AIRBAGS (ABLAVI / SSABCS). – CF301: G/S NO CURTAIN AIRBAGS. Type S vehicles (vans) WITHOUT CURTAIN SIDE AIRBAGS (ABLAVI / SSABCS). – CF302: J NO SIDE AIRBAGS. Type J vehicles. Command for automatic configuration of the trigger lines and sensors in SCENIC models with no chest side airbags nor curtain airbags (SABLAT / SSABCS). – CF303: J WITH SIDE AIRBAGS AND NO REAR FRONTAL AIRBAGS. Type J vehicles. Command for automatic configuration of the trigger lines and sensors in SCENIC models with front chest side airbags, curtain airbags and no rear seat-belt airbag (ABLAVI / SSABCS).

ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-81

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

Fault finding - Configuration and programming

88C

– STANDARD CONFIGURATION COMMANDS (cont'd): – CF304: J WITH SIDE AIRBAGS + REAR FRONTAL AIRBAGS. Type J vehicle. Command for automatic configuration of the trigger lines and sensors in SCENIC models with front chest side airbags, curtain airbags and rear seat-belt airbag (ABLAVI / SSABCS). – CF305: E WITH SIDE AIRBAGS. Type E vehicle. Command for automatic configuration of the trigger lines and sensors in CABRIOLET models with front chest side airbags (SABLAT / SSABCS). – CF306: E WITH NO SIDE AIRBAGS Type E vehicles: Command for automatic configuration of the trigger lines and sensors in CABRIOLET models with no front chest side airbags (SABLAT / SSABCS). – CF307: K/L WITH NO SIDE AIRBAGS. Type K and L vehicles: Command for automatic configuration of the trigger lines and sensors in 4-door BREAK and TRICORPS models with neither front chest side airbags nor curtain airbags (SABLAT / SSABCS). – CF308: K/L WITH FRONT CHEST AND CURTAIN AIRBAGS. Type K and L vehicles: Command for automatic configuration of the trigger lines and sensors in 4-door BREAK and TRICORPS models with front chest side airbags and curtain airbags (ABLAVI / SSABCS). – CF309: K/L WITH FRONT/REAR CHEST AND CURTAIN AIRBAGS. Type K and L vehicles: Command for automatic configuration of the trigger lines and sensors in 4-door BREAK and TRICORPS models with front and rear chest side airbags and curtain airbags (ABLAT / SSABCS).

Because of probably computer part number unification in the Parts Department, some sensors or trigger lines may have to be deconfigured after using standard configuration commands. For this, use the individual configuration commands for system components. After configuration, check the display configuration screen to make sure that the information entered is correct.

ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-82

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

Fault finding - Configuration and programming

88C

CONFIGURATION / READ CONFIGURATION: – CONFIGURABLE FEATURES: Trigger lines "WITH" or "WITHOUT": The front buckle pretensioners are serially wired. The rear seat belt retractors are serially wired.

TITLE DRIVER'S SEAT-CUSHION/LAP AIRBAG PASSENGER'S SEAT-CUSHION/LAP AIRBAG PASSENGER FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT 1 PASSENGER FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT 2 DRIVER'S FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT 1 DRIVER'S FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT 2 DRIVER'S SIDE REAR FRONT AIRBAG PASSENGER'S SIDE REAR FRONT AIRBAG DRIVER'S SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG PASSENGER'S SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG DRIVER'S FRONT CHEST SIDE AIRBAG PASSENGER'S FRONT CHEST SIDE AIRBAG DRIVER'S REAR CHEST SIDE AIRBAG PASSENGER REAR CHEST SIDE AIRBAG FRONT BUCKLE PRETENSIONERS REAR SEAT BELT RETRACTORS

CONFIGURATION READING

CONFIGURATION

LC080 LC079 LC052 LC047 LC048 LC049 LC091 LC092 LC040 LC041 LC042 LC043 LC044 LC045 LC081 LC078

CF283 CF282 CF236 CF229 CF230 CF231 CF294 CF295 CF221 CF222 CF223 CF224 CF225 CF226 CF284 CF278

CONFIGURATION READING

CONFIGURATION

LC086 LC025 LC026 LC073 LC074 LC090 LC089 LC075

CF289 NONE NONE CF273 CF274 CF293 CF292 CF275

Sensors "WITH" or "WITHOUT":

TITLE DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION SENSOR DRIVER'S SIDE SENSOR PASSENGER SIDE SENSOR DRIVER'S SEAT BELT BUCKLE SENSOR PASSENGER'S SEAT BELT BUCKLE SENSOR DRIVER'S SIDE REAR STRAP SENSOR PASSENGER'S SIDE REAR STRAP SENSOR PASSENGER PRESENCE DETECTION SENSOR

ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-83

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

Fault finding - Configuration and programming

88C

CONFIGURATION / READ CONFIGURATION (continued):

Lefthand/righthand steering configuration"

Title STEERING SIDE

Configuration reading

Configuration

LC088

CF291

Passenger airbag lock mode "WITH KEY" or "WITHOUT":

Title PASSENGER AIRBAG LOCK MODE

Configuration reading

Configuration

LC060

CF248

Read type of vehicle: LC034 "MEGANE II"

OTHER COMMANDS: – VP006: Lock computer. This command is used whenever servicing the system. It shuts down all trigger lines. – VP007: Unlock computer. This command is used to unlock a computer that is new or block by command VP006. – VP008: Write last After Sales service date. This command is used to enter the date the system was serviced. – VP010: Write VIN. This command serves to enter the vehicle identification number (VIN) into the computer. – SC004: Read impact context. This command is used in reconditioning the vehicle following an impact. It obtains, from the computer that is to be replaced, a list of the trigger lines controlled and the system's state at the moment of impact.

ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-84

List of monitored parts: Airbag computer

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Airbags and pretensioners ●

Page 1 / 2

Administrative identification

Date

2

0

Log completed by Business name or no./Country Vehicle model VIN: Engine Diagnostic tool

CLIP

Version ●

Customer complaint 1192

Other

●

Please specify:

When the fault appears 011

When switched on

005

While driving

Other

●

Airbag warning light lit

004

Intermittently

999

When starting the engine

Technical Note:

Assisted fault finding

Please specify:

Documentation used in fault finding Fault finding procedure

Type of fault finding manual:

Workshop Repair Manual:

Fault Finding Manual No.: Wiring diagram used Wiring Diagram Technical Note No.: Other documentation Title and/or part no.:

FD 16 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

FAULT FINDING LOG System: Airbag and pretensioners ●

Page 2 / 2

Identification of the computer and parts replaced for the system

Part 1 part no. Part 2 part no. Part 3 part no. Part 4 part no. Part 5 part no.

To be read with the diagnostic tool (Identification screen): Computer part no. Supplier no. Program no. Software version Calibration number VDIAG ●

Faults found with the diagnostic tool Fault no.

●

Present

Stored

Fault title

Specification

System-specific information

Total vehicle mileage (kilometrage) when the customer's problem occurred: How often does it occur?

How long after the engine starts? ●

Additional information

What factors led you to replace the computer? What other parts were replaced? Other faulty functions?

CAN Wiring harness Seats

Instrument panel Battery Other

Rotary switch Fuse

Please specify:

FD 16 Fault finding log

page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy - page to print or photocopy

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault summary table

Tool fault

Associated DTC

DF001 DF002 DF010 DF028 DF034 DF039 DF040 DF053 DF060 DF065 DF066 DF067 DF068 DF069 DF070 DF071 DF072 DF074 DF075 DF077 DF091 DF193 DF194 DF210 DF212 DF213 DF214 DF227 DF228 DF232 DF233 DF234 DF239 DF240 DF241 DF242

9080 9042 9040 9041 907E 9035 9036 9031 9050 9031 900E 900D 900C 900A 9009 9008 9007 9006 9005 900B 9034 907C 907F 9014 901A 901B 9034 9026 9027 9051 9052 9053 9017 9001 9002 907B

88C

Diagnostic tool heading Computer Computer supply voltage Fault warning light circuit Passenger's airbag status warning light circuit Computer locked Driver's side sensor circuit Passenger's side sensor circuit Driver's seat position sensor Multiplex network Driver's front seat position sensor circuit Passenger's rear side airbag circuit Driver's rear chest side airbag circuit Passenger's front side airbag circuit Passenger's curtain side airbag circuit Driver's curtain side airbag circuit Driver's front airbag circuit 2 Driver's front airbag circuit 1 Passenger's front airbag circuit 2 Passenger's front airbag circuit 1 Driver's front side airbag circuit Airbag locking switch circuit Change of status of passenger airbag locking Computer to be replaced following impact Front buckles pretensioner circuit Rear front airbag circuit driver's side Rear front airbag circuit passenger's side Airbag lock switch configuration Driver's side rear strap sensor circuit Passenger's side rear strap sensor circuit Driver's seat belt buckle sensor circuit Passenger's seat belt buckle sensor circuit Passenger presence detection sensor circuit Rear seat belt retractors circuit Driver's seat-cushion / seat lap belt circuit Passenger's seat-cushion / seat lap belt circuit Lefthand/righthand steering configuration

ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-87

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

DF001 PRESENT OR STORED

NOTES

88C

COMPUTER

Special notes: So that the failure of the returned computer can be analyzed, the use of command RZ001 "erase fault memory" when DF001 "Computer" is present or stored is officially prohibited.

Replace the airbag computer (see the replacing components section for this procedure).

AFTER REPAIR

Deal with any faults detected by the diagnostic tool. Clear the computer memory. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-88

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

COMPUTER SUPPLY VOLTAGE DF002 PRESENT

NOTES

1.DEF: Micro-breaks 2.DEF: Values beyond tolerance

Special notes: Use the 22-track adapter (Elé. 1685) to work on the computer connector (cable 1).

Carry out the operations necessary to obtain the correct voltage supply to the computer: 10.5 volts ± 0.1 < correct voltage < 16 volts ± 0.1. – – – – –

Check the battery charge. Check the charging circuit. Check the tightness and the condition of the battery terminals. Check the computer earth. Check the condition of the computer + locking connections.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-89

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DEFAULT INDICATOR LIGHT CIRCUIT DF010 PRESENT

NOTES

1.DEF: External diagnostics (instrument panel signal) 2.DEF: Consistency (dashboard indicator light state signal / airbag request)

Special notes: None.

Apply the fault finding procedure relevant to this fault in the instrument panel fault finding information section.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-90

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

PASSENGER AIRBAG CONDITION INDICATOR LIGHT CIRCUIT DF028 PRESENT

NOTES

1.DEF: External diagnostics (instrument panel signal) 2.DEF: Consistency (dashboard indicator light state signal / airbag request)

Special notes: None.

Apply the fault finding procedure relevant to this fault in the instrument panel fault finding information section.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-91

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

COMPUTER LOCKED DF034 PRESENT

NOTES

Special notes: None.

Use diagnostic tool command VP007 to unlock the airbag computer.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-92

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DRIVER'S SIDE SENSOR CIRCUIT DF039 PRESENT

CO : CC.0 : 1.DEF: 2.DEF: 3.DEF: 4.DEF:

Open circuit Short circuit to earth Configuration Disrupted communication Sensor internal electrical fault Values out of range

If 1.DEF contact your Techline. NOTES Special notes: Use the 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717) to work on the computer connector.

CO - CC.0 - 2.DEF

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Check that the driver's side sensor is connected correctly and check its wiring. Check the condition of the connections on the computer (tracks 27 and 28). Check the condition of the 64-track connector (locking system, connections, etc.) Ensure continuity and insulation of the connections between: Terminal block (Elé. 1717) terminal 27 Track 1 sensor connector Terminal block (Elé. 1717) terminal 28 Track 2 sensor connector

3.DEF - 4.DEF

NOTES

None.

Replace the driver's side sensor.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-93

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

PASSENGER SIDE SENSOR CIRCUIT DF040 PRESENT

CO : CC.0 : 1.DEF: 2.DEF: 3.DEF: 4.DEF:

Open circuit Short circuit to earth Configuration Disrupted communication Sensor internal electrical fault Values out of range

If 1.DEF contact your Techline. NOTES Special notes: Use the 64-track Elé. 1717 adapter to work on the computer connector.

CO - CC.0 - 2.DEF

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Check that the driver's side sensor is connected correctly and check its wiring. Check the condition of the connections on the computer (tracks 61 and 62). Check the condition of the 64-track connector (locking system, connections, etc.) Ensure continuity and insulation of the connections between: Terminal block (Elé. 1717) terminal 61 Track 1 sensor connector Terminal block (Elé. 1717) terminal 62 Track 2 sensor connector

3.DEF - 4.DEF

NOTES

None.

Replace the passenger side sensor.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-94

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION SENSOR CONFIGURATION DF053 PRESENT

NOTES

Special notes: None.

This fault indicates an inconsistency between the computer configuration and the vehicle equipment detected by the computer. The computer has detected the presence of an element additional to its configuration. Read configuration LC086 under the heading "read configuration". Use command CF289 to adjust the computer configuration to the vehicle's equipment level.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-95

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

MULTIPLEX NETWORK DF060 PRESENT

NOTES

1.DEF: Carry out the multiplex network fault finding procedure

None.

Apply the fault finding procedure for the multiplex network.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Check again using the diagnostic tool. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-96

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DRIVER'S SEAT POSITION SENSOR CIRCUIT. DF065 PRESENT

CO : CC.0 : CC.1 : 1.DEF: 2.DEF:

Open circuit Short circuit to earth Short circuit to + 12 V Configuration Values out of range

If 1.DEF Check and adjust the computer configuration.

NOTES

Priorities when dealing with multiple faults: If DF065 is present with at least one of DF077, DF210, DF232, or DF240, begin the fault finding by checking the 22-track under-seat connector.

Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track (Elé. 1687) adapter for working under the driver's seat.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1717) test adapter and measure the resistance between track 9 and track 10 with the seat fully forward and fully back. When the seat is forward, the resistance should be: 400 Ω (275 < X < 545 Ω) In the fully reclined position, the resistance is approximately: 100 Ω (65 < X < 145 Ω) If the resistances are correct, check the connections of the 64-track computer connector. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat and measure the resistance between tracks 3 and 4 with the seat fully forward and fully back. When the seat is forward, the resistance should be: 400 Ω (275 < X < 545 Ω) In the fully reclined position, the resistance is approximately: 100 Ω (65 < X < 145) Are the values correct?

NO

Check the connection and the condition of the sensor connections. Check and ensure the continuity and insulation of the connections between: Terminal block Track 3 Track 2 sensor connector Terminal block Track 4 Track 1 sensor connector If the checks are correct, replace the seat position sensor.

YES

Check the connections of the seat connector (tracks 3 and 4) and 64-track connector (tracks 9 and 10). If the fault is still present, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer, the seat position sensor, and the under-seat connector, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-97

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

PASSENGER CHEST REAR SIDE AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF066 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES

CO - CC

Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.

NOTES

Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with rear chest side airbags.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the passenger's rear side airbag is correctly connected. Disconnect the ignition module from the passenger's rear side airbag and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the passenger's rear side airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 57 and 58). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance of cable L. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and passenger's rear chest side airbag (C0/C3) is faulty. Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger's rear side airbag module then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the passenger's rear chest side air bag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-98

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF066 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 57 and 58). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable L. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and passenger's rear chest side airbag (C0/C3) is faulty. Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger's rear side airbag module then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the passenger's rear chest side air bag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-99

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DRIVER'S REAR SIDE CHEST AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF067 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES

CO - CC

Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.

NOTES

Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with rear chest side airbags.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the driver's rear side airbag is correctly connected. Disconnect the ignition module from the driver's rear side airbag and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the driver's rear side airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 29 and 30). Repair if necessary Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance of cable N. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and driver's rear chest side airbag (C0/C3) is faulty. Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's rear side airbag module then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's rear chest side air bag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-100

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF067 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 29 and 30). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable N. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and driver's rear chest side airbag (C0/C3) is faulty. Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's rear side airbag module then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's rear chest side air bag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-101

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 Fault finding - Interpretation of faults VDIAG No.: 08

88C

PASSENGER CHEST FRONT SIDE AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF068 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration.

Priorities when dealing with multiple faults: If DF068 is present with at least one of DF210 or DF241, begin the fault finding by checking the 22-track under-seat connector.

NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track (Elé. 1687) adapter for working on the seat.

CO - CC

Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with passenger front chest side airbags.

NOTES

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the computer connector and attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure resistance in the adapter wire marked F. If the value obtained is correct, check the connections of the 64-track (tracks 43 and 44) connector. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable A. Is the value obtained correct?

NO

Check the seat connector connections (tracks 11 and 12). Strip the passenger seat and check that the airbag ignition module is connected correctly. Disconnect the side airbag ignition module, connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector and again measure the resistance in cable A. – If the value obtained is correct, replace the passenger chest front side airbag module. – If the value obtained is still not correct, replace the wiring between points C1 and C3 (seat wiring).

YES

Check the seat connector connections ( tracks 11 and 12) again, as well as those of the 64-track (tracks 43 and 44) connector. If the fault persists, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger's front side airbag module then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the chest side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-102

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF068 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the computer connector and attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in the adapter cable marked F. If the value obtained is correct, check the connections of the 64-track (tracks 43 and 44) connector. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable A. Is the value obtained correct?

NO

Passenger's seat wiring fault (C1/C3). Replace the wiring if necessary.

YES

Check the seat connector connections (tracks 11 and 12) again, as well as those of the 64-track (tracks 43 and 44) connector. If the fault persists, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger's front side airbag module then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the chest side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-103

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

PASSENGER SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF069 PRESENT

CO : CC : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Open circuit Short circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES

CO - CC

Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.

NOTES

Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a passenger side curtain airbag.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the passenger side curtain airbag is properly connected. Disconnect the ignition module from the passenger side curtain airbag and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the passenger side curtain airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 45 and 46). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable G. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and passenger's curtain side airbag (C0/C3) is faulty. Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger side curtain airbag module then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy the passenger side curtain air bag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-104

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF069 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 45 and 46). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable G. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and passenger's curtain side airbag (C0/C3) is faulty. Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger side curtain airbag module then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy the passenger side curtain air bag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-105

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DRIVER SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF070 PRESENT

CO : CC : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Open circuit Short circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES

CO - CC

Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.

NOTES

Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a driver side curtain airbag.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Switch off the ignition and make sure the ignition module of the driver side curtain airbag is properly connected. Disconnect the ignition module from the driver side curtain airbag and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the driver side curtain airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 17 and 18). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance of cable I. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and driver's curtain side airbag (C0/C3) is faulty. Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's side curtain airbag module then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy the driver's side curtain air bag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-106

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF070 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 17 and 18). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable I. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and driver's curtain side airbag (C0/C1) is faulty. Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's side curtain airbag module then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy the driver's side curtain air bag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-107

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DRIVER'S FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT 2 DF071 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES

CO - CC

Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 22-track (Elé. 1685) adapter for working on the computer connector.

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Turn off the ignition and remove the driver's front airbag. Check that it is correctly connected. Disconnect the driver's front airbag and attach 2 dummy ignition modules to the ignition module connectors. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the driver's front airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). With the ignition switched off, disconnect and reconnect the connector of the rotary switch at the steering wheel. Check the connections if the fault has become stored (fault no longer declared present). Attach the 10-track (Elé. 1617) test adapter to the rotary switch at point C2 (tracks 9 and 10). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable A. If the value obtained is incorrect, replace the rotary switch under the steering wheel. Reconnect the rotary switch under the steering wheel, disconnect the computer and check the connections of the 22-track (tracks 4 and 15) connector Fit the 22-track (Elé. 1685) test adapter. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable D. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the rotary switch connector (C0/C2). Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and driver's front airbag ignition modules, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's front air bag if it has been replaced (tool air bag Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-108

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF071 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Turn off the ignition and unclip the driver's front airbag. Check the condition and correct connection of the trigger lines. Attach the 10-track test adapter to the rotary switch at point C2 (tracks 9 and 10). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable A (driver's front airbag connected). If the value obtained is incorrect, replace the rotary switch under the steering wheel. Reconnect the rotary switch under the steering wheel, disconnect the computer and check the connector's connections (tracks 4 and 15). Fit the 22-track (Elé. 1685) test adapter. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable D. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the rotary switch connector (C0/C2). Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and driver's front airbag ignition modules, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's front air bag if it has been replaced (tool air bag Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-109

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DRIVER'S FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT 1 DF072 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES

CO - CC

Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 22-track (Elé. 1685) adapter for working on the computer connector.

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Turn off the ignition and remove the driver's front airbag. Check that it is correctly connected. Disconnect the driver's front airbag and attach 2 dummy ignition modules to the ignition module connectors. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the driver's front airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). With the ignition switched off, disconnect and reconnect the connector of the rotary switch at the steering wheel. Check the connections if the fault has become stored (fault no longer declared present). Attach the 10-track (Elé. 1617) test adapter to the rotary switch at point C2 (tracks 6 and 7). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable B. If the value obtained is incorrect, replace the rotary switch under the steering wheel. Reconnect the rotary switch under the steering wheel, disconnect the computer and check the connector's connections (tracks 3 and 14). Fit the 22-track (Elé. 1685) test adapter. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable C. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the rotary switch connector (C0/C2). Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and driver's front airbag ignition modules, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's front air bag if it has been replaced (tool air bag Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-110

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF072 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Turn off the ignition and unclip the driver's front airbag. Check the condition and correct connection of the trigger lines. Attach the 10-track (Elé. 1617) test adapter to the rotary switch at point C2 (tracks 6 and 7). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable B (driver's front airbag connected). If the value obtained is incorrect, replace the rotary switch under the steering wheel. Reconnect the rotary switch under the steering wheel, disconnect the computer and check the connector's connections (tracks 3 and 14). Fit the 22-track (Elé. 1685) test adapter. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable C. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the rotary switch connector (C0/C2). Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and driver's front airbag ignition modules, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's front air bag if it has been replaced (tool air bag Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-111

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

PASSENGER FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT 2 DF074 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES

CO - CC

Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 22-track (Elé. 1685) adapter for working on the computer connector.

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Turn off the ignition and make sure the passenger's front airbag is properly connected (access the connectors through the glovebox). Disconnect the passenger’s front airbag ORANGE connector and attach a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). If the value is incorrect: Disconnect the computer and check the connector connections (tracks 1 and 12). Fit the 22-track (Elé. 1685) test adapter. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable A. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger airbag connectors (C0/C4). Replace the wiring if necessary. If the value obtained is correct, check the computer wiring again.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer, then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's front air bag if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-112

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF074 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the computer and check the connector connections (tracks 1 and 12). Attach 22-track adapter (Elé. 1685). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable A. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger airbag connectors (C0/C4). Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer, then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's front air bag if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-113

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

PASSENGER FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT 1 DF075 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES

CO - CC

Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 22-track (Elé. 1685) adapter for working on the computer connector.

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Turn off the ignition and make sure the passenger's front airbag is properly connected (access the connectors through the glovebox). Disconnect the passenger's front airbag BLUE connector and attach a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). If the value is incorrect: Disconnect the computer and check the connector wiring (tracks 2 and 13). Attach 22-track adapter (Elé. 1685). The CLIP or XRBAG absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable B. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger airbag connectors (C0/C4). Replace the wiring if necessary. If the value obtained is correct, check the computer wiring again.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer, then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's front air bag if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-114

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF075 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the computer and check the connector wiring (tracks 2 and 13). Attach 22-track adapter (Elé. 1685). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be use to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable B. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger airbag connectors (C0/C4). Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer, then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's front air bag if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-115

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 Fault finding - Interpretation of faults VDIAG No.: 08

88C

DRIVER'S CHEST FRONT SIDE AIRBAG CIRCUIT DF077 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration.

Priorities when dealing with multiple faults: If DF077 is present with at least one of DF065, DF210. DF232 or DF240, begin the fault finding by checking the 22-track under-seat connector.

NOTES Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track (Elé. 1687) adapter for working on the seat.

CO - CC

NOTES

Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a driver's front chest side airbag.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the computer connector and attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in the adapter cable marked H. If the value indicated is correct, check the connections of the 64-track (tracks 15 and 16) connector. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable A. Is the value obtained correct?

NO

Check the seat connector connections (tracks 11 and 12). Remove the trim from the driver's seat and check that the chest side airbag ignition module is properly connected. Disconnect the chest side airbag ignition module, connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector and again measure the resistance in cable A. – If the value obtained is correct, replace the driver's chest front side airbag module. – If the value obtained is still not correct, replace the wiring between points C1 and C3 (seat wiring).

YES

Check the seat connector connections ( tracks 11 and 12) again, as well as those of the 64-track (tracks 15 and 16) connector. If the fault is still present, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's front side airbag module then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the chest side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-116

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF077 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the computer connector and attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in the adapter cable marked H. If the value indicated is correct, check the connections of the 64-track (tracks 15 and 16) connector. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable A. Is the value obtained correct?

NO

– Driver's seat wiring fault (C1/C3). – Replace the wiring between points C1 and C3 (seat wiring) if necessary.

YES

Check the seat connector connections (tracks 11 and 12) again, as well as those of the 64-track (tracks 15 and 16) connector. If the fault is still present, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's front side airbag module then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the chest side airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-117

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

AIRBAG LOCKING SWITCH CIRCUIT DF091 PRESENT

CO : CC : CC.0 : CC.1 : 1.DEF: 2.DEF:

Open circuit Short circuit Short circuit to earth Short circuit to + 12 V Configuration Values out of range

If 1.DEF Check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES

Special notes: Use the 22-track (Elé. 1685) adapter for working on the computer connector. Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool.

Check that the lock switch is properly connected and check its connections. Check the condition and connections of the 22-track computer connector (lock system, wiring etc.). Ensure continuity and insulation of the connections between: Terminal block Elé. 1685 terminal 21 Terminal block Elé. 1685 terminal 22

Track 6 lock switch connector Track 3 lock switch connector

Replace the locking switch if the fault persists.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the locking switch, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-118

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

PASSENGER AIRBAG LOCKING CHANGE OF STATE DF193 STORED

NOTES

Special features: the vehicle user has 10 seconds after switching on + after ignition feed to inhibit the passenger airbag with the switch. After this time, the computer will store this fault and light up the warning light on the instrument panel.

Clear the computer memory. Switch off the ignition, and wait a few seconds. Put the lock switch in the desired setting. Switch the ignition back on and check that the fault is gone.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-119

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

COMPUTER TO BE REPLACED FOLLOWING IMPACT DF194 PRESENT

NOTES

None.

Contact your Techline (see the "Replacing components" section for this procedure).

AFTER REPAIR

None

ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-120

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

FRONT BUCKLE PRETENSIONERS CIRCUIT DF210 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF Check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES

CO - CC

Special notes: the front buckle pretensioners are serially wired. Never do measuring on the trigger lines with any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the driver's seat buckle pretensioner is properly connected. Disconnect the ignition module of the pretensioner and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the driver's seat buckle pretensioner if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the passenger's seat buckle pretensioner is properly connected. Disconnect the ignition module of the pretensioner and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the passenger seat buckle pretensioner ignition module if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Disconnect the computer and check the connector connections (tracks 1, 2, 37 and 38). Attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable A. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat buckle pretensioner ignition module (C0/C3). See next page. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable C. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger seat buckle pretensioner (C0/C3). See next page.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the buckle pretensioners then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy any pretensioners that have been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-121

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF210 CONTINUED 1

Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat (tracks 7 and 8). Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable C. Is the value obtained correct?

NO

Check seat side seat connector connections again (tracks 8 and 7). If the fault persists, the wiring is faulty between the 22-track seat connector and the buckle pretensioner of the faulty seat (C1/C3).

YES

Again check the connections of the seat connector (tracks 7 and 8) on the passenger compartment wiring side and of the 64-track (driver seat tracks 1 and 2 or passenger seat tracks 37 and 38) connector. If the fault persists, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the seat displaying the fault (C0/C1). Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the buckle pretensioners then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy any pretensioners that have been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-122

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF210 CONTINUED 2

CC.0 - CC.1

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the computer and check the connector connections (tracks 1, 2, 37 and 38). Attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable A. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat buckle pretensioner ignition module (C0/C3). See interpretation A. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable C. If the value obtained is incorrect, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger seat buckle pretensioner (C0/C3). See interpretation A.

Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat (tracks 7 and 8). Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable C. Is the value obtained correct?

NO

YES

AFTER REPAIR

If the fault persists, the wiring is faulty between the 22-track seat connector and the buckle pretensioner of the faulty seat (C1/C3). Replace the wiring if necessary.

Faulty wiring between the computer and the seat displaying the fault (C0/C1). Replace the wiring if necessary.

Reconnect the computer and the buckle pretensioners then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy any pretensioners that have been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-123

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

REAR FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT DRIVER'S SIDE DF212 PRESENT

CO : CC : CC.0 : CC.1 : 1.DEF:

Open circuit Short circuit Short circuit to earth Short circuit to + 12 V Configuration

If 1.DEF Check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES

CO - CC

Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.

NOTES

Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a driver side rear front airbag.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the driver's rear front airbag is properly connected. Disconnect the ignition module from the driver's rear front airbag and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the driver's rear front airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 31 and 32). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable O. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and driver's side rear front airbag (C0/C3) is faulty. Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's side rear front airbag module, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory. Switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's side rear front airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-124

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF212 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 31 and 32). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable O. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and driver's side rear front airbag (C0/C1) is faulty. Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the driver's side rear front airbag module, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory. Switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the driver's side rear front airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-125

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

REAR FRONT AIRBAG CIRCUIT PASSENGER'S SIDE DF213 PRESENT

CO : CC : CC.0 : CC.1 : 1.DEF:

Open circuit Short circuit Short circuit to earth Short circuit to + 12 V Configuration

If 1.DEF Check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES

CO - CC

Special notes: never carry out measuring operations on trigger lines using any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.

NOTES

Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a passenger side rear front airbag.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the passenger's rear front airbag is properly connected. Disconnect the ignition module from the passenger's rear front airbag and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the passenger's rear front airbag if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 59 and 60). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable M. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and passenger's side rear front airbag (C0/C3) is faulty. Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger's side rear front airbag module, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory. Switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the passenger's side rear front airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-126

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF213 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 59 and 60). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1717) test adapter to the airbag wiring (point C0). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable M. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer connector and passenger's side rear front airbag (C0/C1) is faulty. Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the ignition module of the passenger's side rear front airbag module, then switch on the ignition. Clear the computer memory. Switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the passenger's side rear front airbag module if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-127

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

AIRBAG LOCK SWITCH CONFIGURATION DF214 PRESENT

NOTES

Special notes: None.

This fault indicates an inconsistency between the computer configuration and the vehicle equipment detected by the computer. The computer has detected the presence of an element additional to its configuration. Read configuration LC060 under the heading "read configuration". Use command CF248 to adjust the computer configuration to the vehicle's equipment level.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Check again using the diagnostic tool. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-128

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DRIVER'S SIDE REAR STRAP SENSOR CIRCUIT DF227 PRESENT

CO : CC : CC.0 : CC.1 : 1.DEF: 2.DEF:

Open circuit Short circuit Short circuit to earth Short circuit to + 12 V Configuration Value out of range

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES Special notes: Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Make sure the black 2-track connector under the driver's side rear retractor is properly connected. Disconnect the black 2-track connector and measure the sensor's resistance on the retractor side: In the fully retracted position, the resistance is approximately: 100 ohms In the fully extended position, the resistance is approximately: 400 ohms If the resistance is incorrect, replace the driver's side rear retractor. If the resistance is okay, check the condition of the sensor connections. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 23 and 24). Repair if necessary. Fit the 64-track Elé. 1717 test adapter. Check and ensure the continuity and insulation of the connections between: Terminal block track 23 Track 1 sensor connector Terminal block track 24 Track 2 sensor connector Also ensure insulation across these two connections.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the rear strap sensor, then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory. Switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer.

ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-129

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

PASSENGER'S SIDE REAR STRAP SENSOR CIRCUIT DF228 PRESENT

CO : CC : CC.0 : CC.1 : 1.DEF: 2.DEF:

Open circuit Short circuit Short circuit to earth Short circuit to + 12 V Configuration Value out of range

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES Special notes: Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Make sure the black 2-track connector under the passenger's side rear retractor is properly connected. Disconnect the black 2-track connector and measure the sensor's resistance on the retractor side: In the fully retracted position, the resistance is approximately: 100 ohms In the fully extended position, the resistance is approximately: 400 ohms If the resistance is incorrect, replace the passenger's side rear retractor. If the resistance is okay, check the condition of the sensor connections. Disconnect the 64-track computer connector and check its connections (tracks 63 and 64). Repair if necessary. Fit the 64-track Elé. 1717 test adapter. Check and ensure the continuity and insulation of the connections between: Terminal block Track 63 Track 1 sensor connector Terminal block Track 64 Track 2 sensor connector Also ensure insulation across these two connections.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the rear strap sensor, then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory. Switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-130

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 04

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DRIVER'S SEAT BELT BUCKLE SENSOR CIRCUIT DF232 PRESENT

CO : CC : CC.0 : CC.1 : 1.DEF: 2.DEF:

Open circuit Short circuit Short circuit to earth Short circuit to + 12 V Configuration Values out of range

If 1.DEF Check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES

Special notes: Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track (Elé. 1687) adapter for working on the seat.

Check the condition and connections of the 64-track computer connector (lock system, wiring etc.). Make sure the driver's seat belt buckle sensor is properly connected and test its connections. Ensure continuity and insulation of the connections between: Terminal block Elé. 1717 terminal 11 Track 2 buckle sensor connector Terminal block Elé. 1717 terminal 12 Track 1 buckle sensor connector If the connections are OK, replace the driver's seat belt buckle sensor. If a connection is faulty: Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat, seat side (tracks 5 and 6). Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). Ensure continuity and insulation of the connections between: Terminal block Elé. 1687 terminal 5 Track 2 buckle sensor connector Terminal block Elé. 1687 terminal 6 Track 1 buckle sensor connector Repair if necessary. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat, computer side (tracks 5 and 6). Repair if necessary. Attach the 64-track (Elé. 1717) test adapter to the computer (point C0). Ensure continuity and insulation of the connections between: Terminal block Elé. 1717 terminal 11 Track 5 22-track connector Terminal block Elé. 1717 terminal 12 Track 6 22-track connector If a connection is faulty, repair or replace the harness.

AFTER REPAIR

Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Check again using the diagnostic tool. ACU4 Vdiag04 B,C, S84 1.0

88C-131

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

REAR SEAT BELT RETRACTORS CIRCUIT DF239 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration. NOTES

CO - CC

Special notes: the rear seat belt retractors are serially wired. Never do measuring on the trigger lines with any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter to work on the computer connector.

NOTES

Special notes: Correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with rear seat-belt retractors.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the rear seat belt retractor, driver's side is correctly connected. Disconnect the ignition module of the retractor and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the rear seat belt retractor, driver's side, if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Switch off the ignition and check that the ignition module of the rear seat belt retractor, passenger's side is correctly connected. Disconnect the ignition module of the retractor and connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector. Switch on the ignition and carry out a check using the diagnostic tool. Replace the passenger's side rear seat belt retractor if the fault becomes stored (fault no longer declared present). Disconnect the computer and check the connections of the connector (tracks 19, 20, 41 and 42). Attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable J. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer and the driver's side rear seat belt retractor ignition module (C0/C3) is faulty. Repair or replace the wiring if necessary. The CLIP or XRBAG absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in adapter cable E. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the passenger's side rear seat belt retractor ignition module (C0/C3) is faulty. Repair or replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and seat belt retractor, then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy any retractors that have been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-132

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF239 CONTINUED

CC.0 - CC.1

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the computer and check the connections of the connector (tracks 19, 20, 41 and 42). Attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable J. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer and the driver's side rear seat belt retractor ignition module (C0/C3) is faulty. Repair or replace the wiring if necessary. The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in adapter cable E. If the value indicated is incorrect, the wiring between the computer and the passenger's side rear seat belt retractor ignition module (C0/C3) is faulty. Repair or replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and seat belt retractor, then switch on the ignition again. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. Destroy any retractors that have been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-133

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 Fault finding - Interpretation of faults VDIAG No.: 08

88C

DRIVER'S SEAT-CUSHION AIRBAG / LAP BELT CIRCUIT DF240 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration.

Priorities when dealing with multiple faults: If DF240 is present with at least one of DF077, DF065, DF210 or DF232, begin the fault finding by checking the 22-track under-seat connector.

NOTES Special notes: depending on the type of vehicle body, this is either a lap belt pretensioner circuit fault or seat-cushion air bag (anti-skid airbag) fault. Never do measuring on the trigger lines with any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track (Elé. 1687) adapter for working on the seat.

CO - CC

NOTES

Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a driver's seat-cushion airbag / lap belt.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Disconnect the computer connector and attach 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in the adapter cable marked B. If the value indicated is correct, check the connections of the 64-track connector (tracks 3 and 4). Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable B. Is the value obtained correct?

NO

Check the seat connector connections (tracks 9 and 10). Make sure the driver's seat-cushion airbag/lap belt ignition module is properly connected. Disconnect the driver's seat-cushion airbag/lap belt ignition module, connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector, then again measure the resistance in cable B. – If the value indicated is correct, replace the driver's seat-cushion airbag/lap belt module. – If the value obtained is still not correct, replace the wiring between points C1 and C3 (seat wiring).

YES

Again check the connections of the seat connector (tracks 9 and 10) and of the 64-track (tracks 3 and 4) connector. If the fault is still present, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the driver's seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the driver's seat-cushion airbag/lap belt ignition module, then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the seat airbag module or driver's seat lap belt pretensioner if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-134

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF240 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable B. Is the value obtained correct?

NO

Seat wiring fault. Replace the wiring between points C1 and C3.

YES

AFTER REPAIR

Wiring fault between the computer and driver's seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring if necessary.

Reconnect the computer and the driver's seat-cushion airbag/lap belt ignition module, then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the seat airbag module or driver's seat lap belt pretensioner if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287). ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-135

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 Fault finding - Interpretation of faults VDIAG No.: 08

88C

PASSENGER'S SEAT-CUSHION AIRBAG / LAP BELT CIRCUIT DF241 PRESENT

CC : CO : CC.1 : CC.0 : 1.DEF:

Short circuit Open circuit Short circuit to + 12 V Short circuit to earth Configuration

If 1.DEF, check and adjust the computer configuration.

Priorities when dealing with multiple faults: If DF241 is present with at least one of DF068, DF210 or DF232, begin the fault finding by checking the 22-track under-seat connector.

NOTES Special notes: depending on the type of vehicle body, this is either a lap belt pretensioner circuit fault or seat-cushion airbag (anti-skid airbag) fault. Never do measuring on the trigger lines with any tool other than CLIP or XRBAG. Use the 64-track (Elé. 1717) adapter for working on the computer connector and the 22-track (Elé. 1687) adapter for working on the seat.

CO - CC

NOTES

Special notes: correct the trigger line configuration if the vehicle is not fitted with a passenger seat-cushion airbag / lap belt.

Lock the computer with the fault-finding tool command, disconnect the computer and attach the 64-track adapter (Elé. 1717). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in the adapter cable marked D. If the value obtained is correct, check the connections of the 64-track (tracks 39 and 40) connector. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the resistance in cable B. Is the value obtained correct?

NO

Check the seat connector connections (tracks 9 and 10). Make sure the passenger seat-cushion airbag/lap belt ignition module is properly connected. Disconnect the passenger seat-cushion airbag/lap belt ignition module, connect a dummy ignition module to the ignition module connector, then again measure the resistance in cable B. – If the value indicated is correct, replace the passenger seat-cushion airbag/lap belt module. – If the value obtained is still not correct, replace the wiring between points C1 and C3 (seat wiring).

YES

Again check the connections of the seat connector (tracks 9 and 10) and of the 64-track (tracks 39 and 40) connector. If the fault persists, the wiring is faulty between the computer and the passenger seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring if necessary.

AFTER REPAIR

Reconnect the computer and the passenger seat-cushion airbag/lap belt ignition module, then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the seat airbag module or driver's seat lap belt pretensioner if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-136

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

DF241 CONTINUED

CC.1 - CC.0

NOTES

None.

Lock the computer using the command on the diagnostic tool. Check the connections of the 22-track connector under the seat. Repair if necessary. Attach the 22-track (Elé. 1687) test adapter under the seat (point C1). The CLIP or XRBAG tool absolutely must be used to measure the proper insulation for the type of fault in cable B. Is the value obtained correct?

NO

Seat wiring fault. Replace the wiring between points C1 and C3.

YES

AFTER REPAIR

Wiring fault between the computer and passenger's seat (C0/C1). Replace the wiring if necessary.

Reconnect the computer and the passenger seat-cushion/lap airbag ignition module, then switch the ignition back on. Clear the computer memory then switch off the ignition. Carry out the check again using the diagnostic tool and, if there are no faults, unlock the computer. When replacing the airbag module, do not forget to reconnect the earth on the new one. Destroy the seat airbag module or driver's seat lap belt pretensioner if it has been replaced (tool Elé. 1287).

ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-137

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Interpretation of faults

88C

LEFTHAND/RIGHTHAND STEERING CONFIGURATION DF242 PRESENT

NOTES

Special notes: None.

This fault occurs because left/righthand steering has not been configured. Configure the computer with command CF291. Read the left/righthand steering configuration LC088 with "Read configuration".

AFTER REPAIR

ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-138

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

88C

Fault finding - States and parameter summary table

ACU4 AIRBAG STATES SUMMARY TABLE:

STATES TOOL ET010 ET072 ET073 ET074 ET076 ET103 ET105 ET108 ET143 ET144 ET169

DIAGNOSTIC TOOL HEADINGS Impact detected Passenger airbag status indicator light commanded Computer locked by tool Fault warning light commanded Computer to replace Type of passenger airbag lock Locked diagnostics power supply out of limits Passenger airbag lock mode Passenger airbag(s) locked Fault present or in memory Driver's seat belt contact

ACU4 AIRBAG PARAMETERS SUMMARY TABLE: PARAMETERS TOOL PR001 PR002 PR104 PR105 PR106 PR107 PR108 PR109 PR110 PR111 PR112 PR113 PR114 PR115 PR116 PR117 PR118 PR119 PR120 PR140 PR147 PR149 PR150

DIAGNOSTIC TOOL HEADINGS Computer supply voltage Vehicle type Driver's seat sensor impedance Line 1 impedance (Driver's seat / lap airbag circuit). Line 2 impedance (Passenger's seat / lap airbag circuit). Line 3 impedance (Passenger's front airbag circuit 1). Line 4 impedance (Passenger's front airbag circuit 2). Line 5 impedance (Driver's front airbag circuit 1). Line 6 impedance (Driver's front airbag circuit 2). Line 7 impedance (Driver's side curtain side airbag circuit). Line 8 impedance (Passenger's side curtain side airbag circuit). Line 9 impedance (Driver's front frontal side airbag circuit). Line 10 impedance (Passenger's front frontal side airbag circuit). Line 11 impedance (Driver's rear frontal side airbag circuit). Line 12 impedance (Passenger's rear frontal side airbag circuit). Line 13 impedance (Front belt pretensioners circuit). Line 14 impedance (Rear retractors). Line 15 impedance (Driver's rear front airbag circuit). Line 16 impedance (Passenger's rear front airbag circuit). Number of memory zone deletions Airbag lock circuit impedance Passenger's rear retractor circuit impedance Driver's rear retractor circuit impedance

The trigger line or sensor impedance is 99.9 Ω when the component is disconnected or not controlled by the computer.

ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-139

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Conformity check

NOTES

88C

Only carry out conformity check after a full check using the diagnostic tool.

Order

Function

Parameter or State Check or Action

1

Diagnostic tool dialogue

-

2

Computer conformity

LC034 "Type of vehicle"

MEGANE II

DF001

Using "READ CONFIGURATION" commands

Ensure that the computer configuration defined in the "Current" column corresponds to the vehicle equipment.

None

Ignition switched on

Warning light comes on for 3 seconds when the ignition is switched on

None

3

Computer configuration

Airbag

Warning light operation 4

Computer initialisation check

Display and notes

ACU 4

Fault finding

CHART 1

ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-140

AIRBAG ACU4 VDIAG No.: 08

AIRBAG - SEAT BELT PRETENSIONERS Fault finding - Fault finding chart

88C

CHART 1

No communication with the airbag computer

NOTES

Special note: To perform fault finding on the vehicle computers, switch on the ignition in fault finding mode (+ after ignition imposed), i.e. proceed as follows: – Vehicle card in card reader, press on the Start button for more than five seconds outside of starting conditions.

Ensure that the diagnostic tool is not causing the fault by trying to establish dialogue with a computer on another vehicle. If the tool is not the problem and communication cannot be established with any other computer in the same vehicle, check the battery voltage and do the work required to obtain the proper reading (10.5 V < battery voltage < 16 V).

Check the presence and condition of the airbag computer supply voltage fuse. Check that the computer connector is properly connected and check the condition of its wiring. Check that the computer is correctly supplied: – Disconnect the airbag computer and attach 22-track adapter (Elé. 1685). – Check and ensure the presence of + after ignition feed between the terminals marked earth and + after ignition feed.

Ensure that the diagnostic socket is correctly supplied: – + Before ignition on track 16. – + after ignition feed on track 1. – Earth on tracks 4 and 5. With 22-track adapter (Elé. 1685), check the continuity and insulation of the airbag computer / diagnostic socket connection between: Terminal block track CAN H Track 6 of the diagnostic socket Terminal block track CAN L Track 14 of the diagnostic socket

Contact your Techline if dialogue has still not been established after these various checks.

AFTER REPAIR

When communication is established, deal with any faults indicated.

ACU4 Vdiag08 TTX84 1.0

88C-141